《Dungeon Core Abi》 Chapter 1 : Awakening Dungeons are born with the knowledge to be able to grow and take care of themselves. Whether that''s in the wilderness, surrounded by nature and monsters, or closer to the human populace. They can be a source of revenue for a town, helping them grow substantially. Or they can be the polar opposite, which makes them a threat to their own existence, killing everything in sight. It all depends on the Dungeon Core itself. No two are alike as they have their own individual identity, consciousness and monsters. Adventurers must choose their words carefully whilst moving inside the dungeon as the floors and walls are part of the mysterious creature''s body. One rule about dungeons remains as true today as it did at the time of its creation. If you come across an unguarded dungeon, you should not enter and it should be reported straight away so that it may be classified a category and destroyed if needed. You never know what kind of monstrosities might be waiting in the dark. Safety is never a laughing matter. - Excerpt from the Worldpedia. Chapter 4. Dungeons.
Awakening to darkness, I open my eyes before realising that I''m in an unfamiliar place. Believing that I''m still partially dreaming, I begin carrying out my morning routine. I try to stretch out my arms, but a wave of fear crashes down over me instead. Immediately, carrying out the simple motion that I''ve done thousands of times, I notice some thing''s wrong. My arms are gone! Worse yet, the strange phenomenon isn''t only limited to my arms. I don''t seem to possess any of my limbs. None. Legs, arms, head. All gone! It begs the quesrion ''How am I able to see?'' And more importantly, what''s happened to my body? Wait. Do I still have a body? Where is it? Butterfly''s flutter in my non-existent tummy and a cold sweat runs down my back as I take in the only object in sight. A gorgeous, green crystal. Pulsing a soft, green light, the small gemstone looks to be worth more gold than a Lord''s manor. What the hell is going on!? A conversation springs to mind that I try to forget, but can''t. Not that it would help. Unable to ignore it, I start to panic and break down. No. No. No. No. Don''t be silly. I can''t be, can I? I''m not... A Dungeon Core? Not that I''ve ever seen one before to be certain, but I''m told this is what they''re supposed to look like. Only, maybe a little bigger? The whole Dungeon is supposedly controlled by this tiny gem that acts as the heart and soul of the supernatural creature. Destroying one grants Adventurers special powers. Depending on the strength of the dungeon, that is, and also at the price of being labelled a criminal if caught. That''s ridiculous though. This is obviously one of those crazy-strong dreams. The kind where you feel as though you''re awake, but you''re actually not. I mean, it has to be. I am definitely not a Dungeon Core. If that''s even close to the truth then... Then... What am I going to do? Then again, I could be dead. I might not be that stunning emerald, which makes me feel quite sad actually, but a ghost instead? That could be a thing. Right?
Dungeon Core........ Please enter a name
Noooo! I don''t want to be a stupid Dungeon Core. It doesn''t matter how nice gem is. Fear sinks its claws in deeper into my soul and imaginary tears spill from my non-existent eyes. How did this even happen? The last thing I remember is being with my party. We had taken a contract that required us to kill a group of Ogres that were camped in the forest. Now, Ogres are quite tough. Not that we''re amateurs or anything, but neither are we masters of our respective trades. We are confident in our abilities though and most importantly, have trust in each other. Before we reached the Ogres, we came across my least-favorite monsters. Goblins. After killing a small group loitering around, we found their cave. Having already put a fair distance between us and Orad, we decided to clear it out and rest inside. Shockingly enough, that cave turned out to be a Dungeon. Instead of returning and reporting the dungeon, as good adventurers should, we decided to try and make some money first. And it went well. Really well. We were selling loot to travelling merchants before returning for another load. Staying out of cities and, never using the same person twice and hoping not to get caught. At the risk of expulsion from the guild, we decided to do one last run before reporting the unclassified Dungeon. Racking up quite a catch, we called it on the Seventh floor. Deciding to rest there before leaving, Anya taking my watch was the last thing I remember before everything turned... Wrong. Wrong. Wrong. Wrong! I don''t wanna be a dungeon. I wanna be me again. Like I was before. Why is this happening to me!? Surely someone has done this to me on purpose. Someone must have killed me! Was it my friends? No, I don''t believe that. What if it was the Dungeon we were in? That actually sounds plausible. I mean... Dungeons eat people all the time, right? It only makes sense it would kill me whilst I slept. But how did my friends not notice during their watch? Were they killed too? If so, then where are they? Why am I the only one here? And why am I bright, jade diamond!? It doesn''t make any sense.
Dungeon Core........ Please enter a name
My name is Abi! Stop calling me Dungeon Core. And I''m human, not a Dungeon.
Name Confirmed: Dungeon Core Abi has been registered Entrance will open in 24 hours: Unfortunately, you are not human anymore. Please make adequate preparations during this time. Otherwise, you will die.
Wait, what? No. Hold on. What do you mean die?
Dungeon Core Abi: This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. 1 Room 0 Monsters 0 Traps Current DP available: 20/20
What? Is that... My status? That''s not what I asked for. And it tells me nothing! What do you mean, I could die?
As you only have one room, anyone could destroy your Core quite easily once your Dungeon opens. Even a Goblin, with a stick.
Hey! That''s a little harsh. I''m in the middle of a crisis right now and you''re saying I might die again tomorrow? By a dirty Goblin as well! What''s your problem? I was human yesterday and now, I''m a Dungeon Core. What''s it going to be next? Will I be a monster tomorrow!? That thought scares the hell out of me. I really don''t want to turn in to a monster. Then again, I don''t want to be a Dungeon Core either. Why can''t I just be me again?
The only way to become human again is by utilising the reincarnation cycle. However, the chances of that happening are slim at best.
Here comes the waterworks. Can I even cry? It''s doubtful. Stupid, stupid, stupid Dungeon. Why did I let Kal talk me into that last run? If I would have known that something like this was going to happen... I shouldn''t have come here.
Dungeon Core Abi, do you wish to die here?
Don''t be stupid. Why would I want that? In fact, who would want that? Do you want to die here... Whoever you are?
I cannot die. I have no form and am only a program. One of many that are linked to Dungeon Cores to provide help and advice. I keep track of your Dungeon Points, your regeneration rate, as well as the location of monsters and intruders on all floors. I can also provide you with a list of items available to purchase with your DP.
I just want my body back. That''s all. I don''t care about points or lists right now. I just want to be able to move!
Then you must reach Level 10 by expanding your dungeon. You will unlock a projection skill that matches your wishes.
That means I don''t have to stay as a pretty gemstone all my life.
Unfortunately, you are now the Dungeon Core and will remain as such until you die. Manifestation will make you appear as... Something else. It also lets you interact with those inside the Dungeon. Over time you will be able to improve the ability, but it is a long way off. I suggest focusing on the present.
So... I''ll never be human again in this life?
Sadly not. But on a more positive note, I am here to help. May I start by suggesting that you make a purchase with your DP? Your points will then start to regenerate and can be used again when full. This will result in the chance of death reducing slightly.
I burst into tears. I don''t want to be a dungeon! How long can I cry over this? Apparently, not long because people will be coming to kill me as soon as I''m open for business. Which is less than 24 hours away. As much as I want to wallow in self pity, I''ve got to do something. Sitting around waiting to die will get me nowhere and seeing how I''ve managed to bag myself a helper, I would be foolish to ignore their advice. I have no idea how to be a dungeon so I''m going to need all the help I can get. Helper?
I am the Voice Activated User Notification System. You may address me however you wish.
That a right mouthful. Voice Activated User Notification System. Gods, that rolls right off the tongue, doesn''t it? Hmm? Distracting myself from the awful reality that''s now my life, I try to come up with a better name for my helper. The bulky name it has now is no good and I certainly don''t want to say all that every time I have to ask a question. I need something easy to call it, like Sam, or Max. Let''s think... Its a special programme that''s designed for me. It''s also part of me now and is going to help me grow without getting destroyed or killed in the process. I''ll be honest. I''ve always been rubbish with names so let''s try and keep it simple. Really simple. In fact, let''s make it as simple as simple can be. I''m going to call you, Me.
Me? My prior statement where I regarded that anything would be fine still applies, but Me seems to be rather awkward.
Hehe. I can''t help but giggle. I know it''s childish, but it takes my mind away from the horror that''s now life. It sounded perfect to me. It''s also nowhere near as long as Voice Activated User Notification System.
Quite. I suppose any name will suffice as it is just a means of garnering one''s attention. Now, I suggest that you make a purchase quickly as you have already wasted a good amount of time. I will show you what''s available from the categories you have unlocked.
Available Purchases: Goblin 3 DP Wolf 5 DP Pitfall Trap 5 DP Rogue (Special) 10 DP Random Gacha 10 DP x2 Tunnel 5 DP Room 20 DP
Looking at the list floating before me, I wipe away a non-existent tear with an imaginary hand. I''m still on the verge of a breakdown, but I''m trying my best to fight it off. There''s no time to waste, according to Me, so let''s put my best foot forward. Staring at the prices, however, all I can think is, why does it cost so much? Shouldn''t things be cheaper than this for a newborn Dungeon Core? And why the hell are the Goblins the cheapest Monsters on the list? Screw them. Let''s see, if I purchase a room then I''ll have no defence for when I''m attacked. So that''s out... A tunnel is no use yet either without anything to connect it to. Also out. That leaves fewer options to consider. I''ve already chosen to ignore the option of summoning cheap and smelly Goblins. Who would want to purchase those ugly-little beasts, right? What''s a Gacha?
A random summon. It includes every feature and monster available across all Dungeons.
That actually sounds quite good and I find myself really wanting to purchase a Gacha, but the (special) Rogue option steadies my hand. That was my class when I was still human. With sentiment pulling on my heartstrings, my decision is swayed and I make my first purchase. The Gacha will have to wait. A bright blue light erupts into existence inside the small, dark cave. It pushes and ripples the air around it, growing steadily until it becomes the size of a person. After a few seconds, it begins to fade until it disappears completely. A female Rogue is left behind on the cold floor of the Dungeon and I''m shocked. Not because she appeared from nowhere, but because I created her. Me. With my crazy dungeon voodoo magic points. That... Was... Amazing! Thankfully, she''s not naked and is wearing your basic Rogue gear. A cheap, leather-breastplate, chausses that cover her thighs and knee-length boots. Gloves hide her skin and a cowl covers her face. A small, crude-looking dagger hangs at her side finishing her attire. From the features I can see, her chin and lips, she looks young. Definitely human too. Dark curls of divine, green hair escape her hood and cover her neck, reminding me of what I''ve lost. She also appears to be level 1. I wonder if that''s because of how I summoned her? Can I make her stronger? Not that it matters now, but she will get stronger right?
Quite. Your monsters need XP to level up, just like did when you were human. You can also make them stronger during creation by adding more DP. Anything you create this way will be enhanced to a certain degree, but lower-level Cores shouldn''t dabble in this practice. If a high level monster is discovered in a starter Dungeon you may be deemed a threat and an army might be dispatched to eliminate you.
Wait? What? No! What''s that about? I haven''t even done anything yet. I most certainly do not want that happening.
Next monster, Dungeon Core Abi.
It''s just Abi! Not Dungeon Core Abi, OK?
Next monster then, Abi. Preferably a normal one.
That''s better. Pulling my mind away from an inevitable death at the hands of adventurers, knights or Goblins with sticks, I kind of listen to my advisor and spend my points on the random Gacha x2. Not a normal monster like I was advised to choose, but it will be a monster nonetheless. C''mon! Momma needs a Dragon for protection! Once again the cave is lit by the glow of summoning. This time, however, the light that appears is a vibrant orange. More beautiful than any sunset, it covers much more of the room than the little glow my Core my gives off and it keeps growing. Growing. It''s much larger than when the rogue materialised and eventually wipes out the remaining darkness my small room was harbouring. That''s when I realised that wishing for a Dragon probably wasn''t the smartest idea. Really, I should have been wishing for something small, adorable and not life-threatening at all. Something no one is going notice. The summoning light becomes an enormous, swelling mass. It''s almost like a sun has formed inside my dungeon and the worrying part is that it''s almost reached my Core. Panic sets in again as the thought of my pretty, green crystal shattering causes me to fret. A second death looming over me. Is that monster even going to fit in here? What is it? Oh no, please no. Please don''t break my heart! Chapter 2 : Resolve How do you describe your maker? The being that creates you. Guides you. Gives you warmth and fills your belly with sustenance. Provides love. A mother? A provider? A divine being? In the beginning, there was nothing until IO came into existence. He knew little about anything until he created the universe by using himself as a foundation. The universe created was full of many wondrous sights and IO longed to share them with another. All alone and with no one to voice his thoughts to, whilst starting to grasp the concept of loneliness, he decided to create another being using his own body as material. He had done this before, for everything that surrounded him, so performing this task should have had the same outcome. This newly created being, which IO named LO, did not reciprocate the same feelings and resented his creator for bringing him into existence. One full of eternal boredom and surrounded by no one, except the one that gave him life in the first place, placing a tiresome burden on the other only being in the universe. LO decided to create other beings for himself, he thought that if his creator could accomplish such feats, then why wouldn''t he be able to perform the creation himself? The act succeeded and he created his followers, but the beings born from LO''s resentment came out cruel and twisted as they were forged from negative emotions. Shortly afterwards LO and his followers departed, IO was left confused over this and alone once again. He decided to try to create another being, seeing how this time he now had some minor experience in the matter and was still learning after all. IO created a second being, this one also made from his body. She was different from LO and he found what would soon become known as hope, so he named her AO. However, just as LO had tired and bored of IO''s solitary world, she too felt the frustration of being alone with IO and followed in her predecessor''s footsteps. Unlike LO, AO''s creations were peaceful and full of love as that is what she desired when she had created them. Peace and love were not enough to make them stay though and soon they departed as well, leaving IO alone once again. These are who we refer to when we talk about any of the Gods, whether they are the Benevolent Gods or the Evil Gods. Or even IO, the lonely God, they all fall under the same category. An excerpt from the History Of Tironia. Tira''s Church Edition. Passage 1, Verse 1.
Oh my gods! Managing to fill the only room in my dungeon with ease, a large Golem looms directly beside my Core. His slightest movement could shatter my very being. What am I going to do with him? It''s larger than any Golem I have ever seen, heard of, or read about in any book. Resembling midnight, the twinkling of stars on its body captivates me as the summoning light fades away. Statue-still and not moving a single part of its enormous frame, the presence it exudes is kind of terrifying. With hands the size of boulders, the Gacha-summoned monster looms over the crystal that''s now my heart and causes it to pulse erratically. That''s gotta be classified as a dangerous monster, right?
Monster Unlocked: Mythril Golem
Quite. There are not many Mythril Golems currently inhabiting Tironia. It will attract attention if it is found due to the material its body is created from. If adventurers strong enough to defeat it enter your dungeon, they will take the body with them. Mythril is valuable to humans and can be sold at high prices.
I know that! We have mines for obtaining Mythril though. Ones without dangerous monsters like this one, I might add. One of the jobs we took frequently was a routine sweep of the closest Mythril mine. All we had to do was make sure the paths were monster-free. I don''t think I''ve ever heard of a Mythril Golem before though. I just thought this was a larger, darkee and shinier version of a normal Golem.
It is. The better term is evolved. That is why this one is classed as a Mythril Golem. Much larger than other variants of its species, they are created from mana-efficient materials.
Sure, it wasn''t a Dragon. The monster is still very imposing, however. Especially when standing next to my Core like that. Considering the fact thst I used to be human, seeing the Rogue was second nature to me. When the Golem appeared though, I nearly fainted. Can I even do that? Do Dungeons faint?
Not normally. However, you seem to be a little... Different. So you never know.
Don''t be like that, Me. You''re meant to be my assistant. Please, help me. What am I supposed to do now?
Now you want to listen?
Yes. I need help, please. I really don''t wanna die again.
In that case, you must move the Golem further into the dungeon so it can avoid detection. To do that, you must first expand beyond your current parameters. Unfortunately, you currently have 0 DP so moving the Golem is not an option for the moment. If adventurers enter, the Golem will either be destroyed, or reported. It will then be destroyed at a later time by whoever the local Lord sends. Whether that be powerful adventurers or a group of Knights. Monsters above a certain threat level are hunted down and destroyed to stop them from growing stronger, along with the Dungeon Core that spawned them. New Dungeons are created by The System every day and there is never a shortage of them. If anything it''s the opposite and they are culled to keep regular citizens safe from attacks.
What the hell was that? I didn''t want to hear about death again. Plus, I know most of that already. Even if it was quite a lot. Where''s the help, Me?
Without DP, you are currently unable to do anything. You must wait for it to refill.
That sucks. Why do I have to wait? Is that a dungeon thing? Why can''t we just start digging now?
As stated, you do not have any points to create a tunnel. Only after placing a room will you be able to move your Core away from the entrance.
I know that I can be a bit of a fool sometimes, but I do understand what no DP means. What I meant was, why can''t my new Golem dig the tunnel for me? Like, right now?
I... You... T-That is not what monsters are for.
But the Golem can do it though, right?
I... Suppose so. It''s not as though you have reinforced walls yet. In that case, you need only command it to carry out your will.
See, this is why I need your help. How do I do that if I can''t speak?
You need only will it to be so. The monsters understand the intentions of the Dungeon Core automatically.
Oh. Is that why my Rogue is perched on the ground? I was thinking, just go sit down for a minute, before I tried my luck on the Gacha. It was a little startling when she did.
Correct. You have already used it once so it will not be a problem to repeat.
Carrying out Me''s advice, I will the Golem to start digging somewhere it won''t damage my Core and to be as careful as possible about it. As though it''s a flower and not a Golem, the brute ever-so-carefully turns around and tiptoes toward the closest wall. That wasn''t what I meant when I said to be careful, but it''s good enough to relieve some worry so it''s fine. Scooping out a silly amount of wall, I tell the Golem to head straight and not dump his excess near my Core or the exit. Hey, Me. When does the door open? Oh. That one did sound pretty weird. Maybe Me wasn''t such a good idea after all?
It will open automatically in 23 hours and 3 minutes.
Ok, what can I do while I wait? I need to do something. I don''t just want to stare at the walls.
Most dungeons do not require the need to do something whilst they wait. They enter a meditative state which increases the recovery speed of Dungeon Points.
Meditative state? That sounds almost as bad as staring at the walls! Now that I''ve spent my points, at least I can freely complain about being a dungeon to my heart''s content. Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original. However, instead of complaining, my attention shifts to the Golem currently attempting to rip out a huge section of the cave''s wall. When I say huge, I mean ridiculously huge. It''s almost twice the size of my Rogue! It looks comical in a way, almost like the monster is hugging the wall. That''s not what I meant when I said dig. I thought it would just shovel it out with its large hands. Instead, the wall starts to crack as it shows a weakening resistance. Once a good enough grip has been established, the Golem forces the entire section free with a mighty pull. It then discards the piece of hard-packed earth behind itself with ease, almost crushing the Rogue in the process, before proceeding to repeat the action. What the fuck? I''m more shocked than the Rogue is and she was nearly flattened. Not by the fact that this Golem is strong enough to rip out sections of the wall like they''re paper. No, it''s because that specific segment of wall disappeared right after landing on the floor as if it was never there in the first place.
New features acquired: Clay 1 DP Soil 1 DP
Me, what just happened? Where did that huge piece of wall go and what does that message mean?
You absorbed them through one of your dungeon skills. I''ll list them now so that you can see them. Passive Skills: Absorb Regeneration Level 1 Active Skills: Summon Dismantle Level 1 Passive skills are always running unless turned off manually whereas Active skills need to be physically used.
Physically used? You mean... I need a body to do it?
Sorry, but no. That was a poor phrasing on my part. When your Golem deposits materials on your floor, you claim them as your own. Did you think about doing that?
No.
Correct. That is because you didn''t. Absorb is working passively in the background. For example, it''s the same as breathing for a human. For an active skill like Dismantle, you need to designate the material before it can be taken apart.
I start getting worked up again and begin to sniffle.
What now?
I-I''m never going to breathe again, I choke out before breaking out into tears once more. After wailing for a while and emptying my sorrowful emotions, Me finally tells me some good news. It helps bring me out of the new style of Meditation that I have just created. The Wail.
Abi, your DP is full. I suggest spending the points so that they can regenerate again. Would you like to view a list of available purchases?
Looking at my Golem, it''s almost sad that the stone-hearted monster ignored my wailing wholeheartedly for the last twenty minutes. At least I can see that it made some good progress. The female Rogue also kept her attention elsewhere but me. Instead of consoling the crying woman who just lost her life, she chose to watch the Golem excavate with a strained expression from her seat on the floor. To be fair, there isn''t anything else for her to do except watch, avoid being flattened and ignore the wailer. It isn''t like I have a shovel for her. Also, doesn''t it seem unfair that I get such a minuscule amount of DP from such a huge chunk of rock? Whatever. Yes please, Me.
Available Purchases: Pitfall Trap 5DP Goblin 3DP Wolf 5DP Rogue (Special) 10DP Random Gacha 10DP x1 Tunnel 5DP Room 20DP
Why can''t I summon another Mythril Golem?
I do not understand why you would want a second Golem so early on. They are not on the list because you cannot afford to purchase another one at this time.
Oh. So I can summon them, I just don''t have enough DP?
Correct.
OK. I suppose that makes sense. To answer your question, it''s because I was going to put them to work creating tunnels for me. Barry''s doing quite well and if I had a second Golem, I would earn even more DP.
Barry? Why would... It isn''t important. Just spend some points, Abi.
Okay. Looking at Barry, he hasn''t made enough progress yet for me to add a new room on the end of his short tunnel. Maybe after a few more refills, he''ll be far enough in. Me, how long is a tunnel if I buy one with DP?
Traversable feature are customisable. Tunnels have a minimum length of 5 feet and a max of 50. They can include turns, ascend or descend, and the inner look may also be altered. They can adjoin to any floor in range that is either one level above or below, the current floor. They can also be dismantled and refunded at half the cost, as long as it does not separate the Core from the entrance.
Wow, that was a lot to take in. It also makes my idea of having Barry dig the tunnels himself a stupid idea. Especially when it only costs 5 DP to actually create one. However, without Barry''s digging, I wouldn''t have my points back to have this dilemma in the first place. Would I?
I suppose you are correct.
So I''m not stupid then?
I never said you were stupid in the first place.
Yeah, but you were thinking it, right?
No. If I were to describe you in human terms, I would use the word ''childish''.
Was that a joke or an insult? I feel like I''ve just been burnt, but I''m going to take that as a joke. Good one, Me! Another Rogue later and there are now two people sitting on the floor of the Dungeon. Avoiding pieces of wall deposited in their immediate locale, they both look miserable as sin. I should have really thought about what I was doing before I did it. It''s too late now though. The second Rogue is a male, made obvious by how tall he is compared to the female. His build would also suggest the same thing, especially when I can''t see their faces since they''re both hidden away under hoods. I''m not just guessing though, a goatee of blue hair clearly marks our newbie as a man. Dungeon man? Whatever. He''s definitely a dude. Joining his partner, I will them to move to the other side of the room. That way, Barry won''t accidentally crush one of them and waste 10DP. They comply immediately and move away from the danger zone. Using your will is very imposing. I kind of feel like an Empress.
Why did you summon another Rogue?
I was just thinking the same thing. Still, I most certainly won''t be summoning any Goblins and I''m kinda scared of Wolves. Plus the Gacha says X1 and I''m pretty sure that means it can only be used one more time.
They would be your Wolves and would not dare harm the Core that created them. Monsters can not survive properly without you. Do you want your dungeon to turn into a Bandit Camp?
What? No! Why would I want that? Also, no thanks on the Wolves. I''m not going there yet. With slim options, I decide to roll the Gacha and get it over with. I also don''t a third Rogue to be stuck in this small room with nothing to do. It''s such a depressing sight. I''m also a little worried about summoning any Rogues now. I don''t want my dungeon to be classed as a Bandit Hideout like Me mentioned. Doubling down, I make my selection and orange light fills the Dungeon for a second time. I wonder if it always looks like that when it''s rolled? As I ponder matters beyond my station, the light starts to shrink in size. Slowly at first, it keeps on going until it''s much smaller than it was when Barry arrived. I feel a tinge of sadness knowing I''m not getting a second Golem, even though it would probably be dangerous like me said. If I was discovered with not one, but two dangerous monsters, I would definitely be on the destruction list. Goodbye Abi. I suppose I''m lucky that the light is still shrinking. It''s even taken on a slightly purple hue. It looks beautiful.
Oh no.
Oh no? What do you mean, Oh no? Why''s the purple light a bad sign? It''s smaller than before so that''s got to good, right?
Monster Unlocked: Mimic
A purple light means that a monster of legendary proportions is about to be created.
Watching the last of the light fade away, the strangest treasure chest I''ve ever seen is left in its wake. A long, pink tongue flaps out from its chest as Spider-like appendages lift it off the floor. Running around my Core in circles, the strange monster leaves a trail of saliva everywhere almost like a happy puppy. There''s no way that you can convince me that this adorable, comical creature is a dangerous monster. I''m reminded of the first Gacha roll when I wanted to change my wish from a dragon to a smaller, cuter and less life-threatening monster. This guy certainly seems to fit the bill I described and I''m overjoyed at the adorable sight. Go me. What is it? I''ve never seen a treasure chest with a tongue before. Why is it called a Mimic?
It is a legendary monster that Mimics the appearance of an average treasure chest. Adventurers hoping to obtain treasure from its trunk, find themselves being devoured instead. No one knows where their remains go, but it has been suggested that they are sent to an alternate dimension through space magic.
Woah, that does sound kinda scary. How come I''ve never heard of them before then?
If I may, you do not seem like the most... Attentive person.
Hey! There was a lot to learn when becoming an Adventurer. I can''t be expected to know about every monster out there. Anyway, forget that, what shall I call him?
What shall you call him? You must hide it immediately, or as soon as Dungeonly possible! Better yet, dismantle it. It is much more dangerous for the Mimic to be seen than the Golem. If it is discovered that a legendary monster resides in your dungeon, we will be destroyed without a doubt.
Gods, this new life is just doom and gloom, followed by misery and despair. What''s a girl gotta do to catch a break around here? I know, I''ll call you, Colin. Do you like that, Colin? Who''s a good boy? You are. That''s right, that''s right. Colin is. Yes, you are. You''re a good treasure chest. Good boy. Good. Now, go sit over there with the Rogues and watch Barry. There''s nothing else to do at the minute, but there will be later. I watch Colin toddle over to the two Rogues that I''ve yet to name and it looks both creepy and funny at the same time. Hiding his appendages away inside himself, he would look just like an ordinary chest if it weren''t for the line of saliva leading directly to him. Certainly not a legendary monster that may, or may not, get me killed. I get it now! Mimic. Anyway, I''ve come up with a plan. A good one where I avoid dying. I''m going to have to wait for a few refills before I can get started though.
One can only hope they will be fruitful. With... Barry, it shouldn''t take... As long as it usually would.
Hehe. That''s right. For now, I''ll watch Barry work as well. Apparently, I''m in the same boat as my monsters with nothing to do. Dungeon life sure is slow. Maybe I should give that Meditation a try? Or maybe I should try wailing again? One day I might actually make a sound. Not that I want to be known as the wailing dungeon. That would be worse than being known as the Bandit Hideout. Why can''t I be the dungeon of sunshine and rainbows? Now that would be kick-ass. A girl can dream, right? Chapter 3 : Moving on Dungeons are known to hold many secrets, hidden within their walls. More often than not, that''s the reason people enter them unclassified. One of their many secrets is more of a question. How do they decide what loot to reward adventurers with? No one really knows how dungeons gain the ability to choose between the many different treasures they can offer. It is speculated, however, that whenever a dungeon absorbs anything, they gain the knowledge and understanding of it there and then. For example; The dungeon in Cair Orn produces many types of loot, all in the form of currency. Adventurers seeking to get rich usually find themselves in this dungeon more so than others, but it wasn''t always this way. 55 years ago, the dungeon used to produce only weapons and no other loot items could be obtained, no matter how long one stayed inside. At the time, the crown prince of Elda who was set to take the throne, Eric Tibur was trying to establish a name for himself before his Coronation. Entering the dungeon, which was commonly referred to as the Swordsmith, his money pouch had come loose and fallen to the floor where it disappeared. Upon being absorbed by the dungeon, the crown prince was furious. Not over the loss of money but rather the hand-made coin pouch his friend had given him. Screaming at the dungeon and threatening to destroy it in his rage, Prince Eric demanded retribution for what had taken place. The dungeon, being no fool, decided to gift Eric with a chest full of the items he was obsessing over so that it wouldn''t be destroyed. Multiple coin pouches, all in the same design, full of riches. This act not only spared the dungeon its life from the wrath of the Elda Kingdom, but it also managed to make a name for itself in the process. The dungeon, which is now known as the Dungeon of Fortune, decided to keep gifting people silver and gold inside hand-made coin pouches and still does to this day. The Dungeon of Fortune is currently under the protection of the King of Elda. There are many more examples of dungeons producing specific rewards, or even specific monsters, in the most unusual circumstances. If it seems unlikely to come about, then a dungeon may still do it regardless as they follow their own set of rules. This gives us insight and understanding in the form that dungeons are wise enough to keep themselves alive and because of this, they must be judged differently at certain threat levels. However, it still leaves the question open on how they choose their loot; do they create loot for our benefit, or is it for the benefit of the dungeon itself should we die whilst in its confines, this will remain unanswered for now. Dungeon Lore. Chapter 4, The Clever and Unknown. Written by Pontisa Ponti, Scholar of the Eldan Magistrate.
Some good progress has been made in a relatively short period of time. And I thought dungeon life was going to be slow. As it turns out, I''m making remarkable speed. Or Barry is, should I say? He''s managed to refill my points four times just by excavating his tunnel, which is now over 40 feet in length. It takes Barry 20 minutes to fill my DP and his tunnel is 8 feet longer by the time he''s done. Even I didn''t expect this when I first had the idea. What a guy. Or maybe I should say, What a Golem! Either way. That doesn''t mean I''ve been idle while the tunnel-creating machine has been gruelling away. No, no, no. I''ve been racking my brain over what I should purchase next. There''s no way in hell I''m summoning any Goblins. They''re ugly, evil and notoriously smelly if we''re being honest. It''s similar circumstances for the wolves. Except they''re not ugly, evil or smelly. They''re vicious by nature and scary as hell when there''s a pack of them. That only leaves me with two options. A Pitfall Trap or another Rogue. I can no longer use the Gacha to get low-cost sweet deals, which is a shame really. If the random mechanics are meant to leave it up to luck, does that mean that mine''s actually good? If so, how did I end up in this situation in the first place? They were my thoughts as I watched Barry drop plough through me. Dropping his load, he injected 2 DP into my pool every couple of minutes. At the end of his first cycle, my points were full. That didn''t stop him from dropping off another load and my total went over the limit by 2. It didn''t stay there though unfortunately and slowly dropped back down to 20. Each time that happened, I was quickly reminded that I should be spending the points instead of letting them go to waste. Doing what other dungeons do and not just attempting to hoard it. Not that that''s what I was doing. Me''s wishes fell on deaf ears because I just couldn''t make a decision. In the end, my indecision turned out to be a blessing in disguise as I managed to learn a new skill. Which in turn, helped me make a decision.
Stockpile Level 1: Let''s the Dungeon Core store DP over the total capacity 10% per skill level skill.
I know it doesn''t seem so great now, what with my measly 20 DP and all, but just you wait. When this skill is maxed, it should be extremely beneficial. Anyway, the decision I made was to do nothing. Repeating the current trend to level up Stockpile. Least to say, Me is not impressed. He keeps saying that I''m wasting time and not acting like a proper Dungeon should. Well, whatever Me. I''m pretty sure that your proper Dungeon would be asleep right now, waiting to build their tunnel or whatever whilst a Goblin scratches their arse in the Core Room. They wouldn''t even have the points Barry is supplying, so screw proper dungeons! This shit''s already hard enough without being compared to something I don''t want comparing to. After a few more disagreements over what I should be doing, Stockpile went up two more levels taking it to 3. Now I can hold 30% more than my current capacity says I can. 26/20 and it''s all thanks to my Golem and his hard dug efforts. Now that his shaft is long enough, I call Barry out as it''s time to make my first big purchase. Looking through the list of options Me so helpfully provided, I select a new room for 20 DP. Immediately, I feel disorientated as my viewpoint switches from normal to aerial and I see the layout of my dungeon below. Woah. That was weird. The small room that houses the five of us is adjoined to an awkwardly-shaped tunnel. The crude hole that Barry has dug looks dull, but I try placing a room on the end anyway.
Error: Cannot be placed separately to the Dungeon... Query Pending... Establishing Parameters... Connecting to the Dungeon... Resolution Complete The existing tunnel has become: Dungeon Tunnel
A slight pain shoots through my non-existent body and I notice my Core has a hairline fracture running up the tip. I''m starting to wonder whether Barry''s tunnel was such a good idea after all? Maybe I shouldn''t try and use the areas he digs out. I can still earn DP from them and use them as potential traps. With that settled, I place a room at the end of my tunnel. Before it finalises, I''m able to alter the width, length and height to a certain extent, just like Me said. I make it twice as large as the first room making it feel like a palace. Even Barry is able to fit inside comfortably and I won''t have to worry about Barry getting too close to my Core.
You have created a new room: 2 XP Awarded.
Oh? XP. What''s that for, Me?
When your dungeon increases in size, you will level up and unlock new features. You have earned your first piece of XP by creating your first room. You will also earn a one-time bonus when your dungeon absorbs anything that it doesn''t currently possess.
What about the clay and soil I keep absorbing, why doesn''t that give XP?
Do you really believe your dungeon is made from something other than those materials?
Well... No. Alright, I get it. It was a stupid question. Don''t be like that, Me. My first room. I still can''t get over the fact that I''m a Dungeon now. I''ve got to admit though, I feel very content after placing that room. Still, I don''t have time to spare for pleasant feelings. I have 6 DP left to spend. This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work. Not wanting to break my own heart any further, I buy a tunnel and place it across from Barry''s. Easy to place, just like the room, all it took was a little bit of willpower and it was done. A 50-foot tunnel just like that. This left me with 1DP, but I''m extremely happy now that everyone can move out of the starting room. It holds memories, but getting stronger and levelling up is always the best course of action. Even if I do have to do it as a Dungeon Core. Leaving my Core in the first room, for the time being, I ship everyone off to the spacious room down the corridor. Why would I do that? Mainly because it''s a good way to keep my Core safe from any accidental damage. I''m not saying that Barry''s clumsy, but he did almost squash my Rogue. The last thing I want is him tripping over his dropping something on my heart. Also, I don''t know anyone who likes being confined to small-cramped spaces. Especially when they''re not able to move around without the fear of breaking the one object that keeps everyone alive. How nerve-racking would that be? Once everyone''s relocated, I set Barry off to dig out a new cave system and... The Rogues take a seat. I feel bad, but there still isn''t anything for them to do. Over than wam the floor of my dungeon. Colin isn''t even phased and is just chestin'' in the corner. I get him started on the wall to the left of the entrance we came through. I''m hoping that if he does a good job then that''s where he will be able to hide if, or once, we are discovered. If Barry digs far enough in, maybe people won''t associate him with us. His tunnels aren''t exactly part of the dungeon, are they? It even hurts me to take control of them. Then again, how would anyone other than us know that?
That may actually be a possible solution. Categorisers have the ability to determine what is and isn''t Dungeon. In theory, Barry wouldn''t be noticed if he was far enough away. His tunnels would also register as Non-Dungeon.
As long as he''s dropping those loads in me and not somewhere else, I won''t complain where he''s digging. He''ll still help me if I''m attacked though, right?
Quite. It doesn''t matter where they are, all monsters are loyal to the dungeon.
The idea of losing my Mythril Golem scared me for a second there. Barry will be a great help if I need to defend against any try-hard Core killers. However, the panic is alleviated as I''m reassured by Me.
We should also put the Mimic in there.
Don''t be ridiculous. He''s staying with us. Colin is super cute. No one in their right mind is going to attack him... OK, that might have been too far. Still, he can stay with my Core because he''s small and cute. If anyone reaches it when I open then we''re off to the reincarnation cycle again anyway, right?
Fair point.
Ok, it''s time to begin the plan. First, I need to work out how far I can get in the time frame I have left.
That''s your plan? I thought you said you had an actual plan?
I do, and this is it. I wasn''t able to work out how much DP I could earn without having data to do the calculations, could I?
I suppose, but what good will knowing that do?
Oh, I''m so glad you asked, Me. You said before that a normal Dungeon would do things differently than me, right? They would probably build a tunnel, summon a monster and then meditate until they were able to create a room roughly 16 hours later, correct?
I do not see the relevance but yes, correct.
Ok, so right now I''ve got my entrance, a room, two tunnels and four monsters, correct?
Again, that is correct. But what point are trying to make?
Really? You really didn''t get it from that? I thought I was supposed to be the less attentive of the two of us? If you want to claim the title, however, it''s fine by me.
Now you''re not even making sense. What are you trying to say?
Well, how long has it been since I awakened and how long do we have until my door opens? ........ There you go, Me. I take it your silence means that you''ve figured it out. I''m already doing a lot better than a regular Dungeon would now, aren''t I?
It is hard to comprehend the passage of time without actually checking its passing. You have 21 hours and 59 minutes until your door opens. I do not understand how you have made so much progress in 2 hours?
Sure you do. You were here while I did it all, weren''t you? Well, you might have been complaining the whole time, but you saw everything. It hasn''t even been that long really and I''m already making leaps and bounds.
You are progressing very well. Leaps and bounds, however, is pushing it. You still have two, extremely dangerous monsters to deal with, but I suppose if... Barry? Why did you have to name the Golem, Barry?
I didn''t realise it bothered you?
It does not bother me and I do not mind his name... It does not suit him is all.
What? Are you crazy, Me? Barry the Golem is a stellar name. Masses will adore him for his superior digging skills, his courageous defiance in the face of hard rock and most of all for his shiny body. He''s a Rockstar, Me! Just out of curiosity though, what would you have named him?
I believe him to be more of a Brian.
A Brian? Are you kidding me? Brian makes him sound like somebody''s grandad. Barry is a Rockstar!
Why do you keep saying Rockstar? Anyway if... Barry keeps digging, then you will advance by leaps and bounds as you stated. That means you could potentially hide them both further inside you.
Yep, that''s the plan.
I thought you said the plan was calculations?
Yep, that''s also the plan.
I believe I need my own type of meditation.
Was that another joke? Way to go, Me. They do say, third time''s a charm. As we wait for my DP to be filled by diligent efforts, I wonder what happened to my friends. The ones that went inside the Goblin Dungeon with me. There were only three of us. Kal, Anya and myself. Kal is a large sword and shield user and his class is Defender. He tanks the front line and is the strongest of our trio. Anya''s our Cleric and always stays at the back. Capable of healing grievous wounds with her spells while also being proficient with a staff, she''s a valuable asset to any party. Then there was me. The sneaky Rogue. I attack stealthily from either behind Kal or from the shadows, always making sure to hit vital points. I keep a close eye on Anya too. Not that she needs it, but just in case she ever wants my support. We have great cohesion and have been together for the past three years so I really hope they didn''t die as well. Me doesn''t know what happened to them either. According to him, he was created at the same time I reincarnated and only possess knowledge relevant to helping my Dungeon. Letting out a sigh and dismissing past memories, I bring my focus back to the present. Barry is working hard, but Rogue 1 and 2 seem to be anxious about something. I see them, as I see everything else in my dungeon, as though I''m watching moving pictures. If I imagine myself in front of them, the pictures get closer and more become available to look at. That awkwardness symbolises me moving and it sucks. Sensing my will, the anxious Rogues feel my presence and prostrate themselves on the floor. They seem shocked that I would take time from being the busy Dungeon Core I am to give them my attention. Don''t worry about it guys, I''m super easygoing. There''s no need to act like that. Things are already awkward enough. I don''t really want this type of reverence, but it feels kinda nice so I''ll take it. It makes me feel like a Queen. I get them to stand up and they both place a fist over their chest instead, as though pledging allegiance. Now I definitely feel like a Queen. Ahem. Rogue man. From now on and so forth etcetera, you will be known as Light. As I name the Rogue, both of them shiver slightly and the smaller of the two fumbles her dagger. Ahem. Cough, cough, cough. Female Rogue. From now on and so forth etcetera, you will be known as Ali.
They can''t hear your thoughts like I can. It''s your feelings and emotions that reach them. Your will carries everything within it, to all beings created by your dungeon.
Aww. It sounded good though, right? I wanted to come across as regal, as I was feeling rather Queenish.
I do not believe ''Queenish'' is an actual word.
Well if I just said it, doesn''t that make it a word? The banter between myself and Me goes on like that for quite some time whilst Barry fills me up with muck. Before I know it, it''s purchasing time again. I know I don''t get to spend my points on anything dazzling, but Dungeons are always making purchases. In a strange way, it''s not too bad of a job for someone like me. I can''t wait till I have the dungeon cash to splash. But right now, my new room is calling.
You have created a new room: 2 XP Awarded.
A warm feeling flows through my Core. 1 XP is all I need to level up. I feel giddy, but sad at the same time. When I was still human, I was level 17 and had been just a fraction away from 18. It proper sucks to be back at level 1. More so now that I''m a Dungeon, but I will try to make the best of a bad situation and persevere. The new room I create is exactly the same as the last, with no features to mention and nothing notable inside. I wonder if I can unlock some type of glamour, or cosmetics? That would be nice. Once again, I place another tunnel continuing straight on. It''s the same length as the last, adding another 50 feet to my total distance. After my entrance, I have two rooms in a row and a tunnel ready for the next one to be added on. That''s what they call progress. Now I just need to wait another twenty minutes for my DP to accumulate again. I still haven''t created any more monsters yet. I do want to create more, but I also don''t. I''ve got nothing for them to do yet and I could without summoning a bunch of space invaders that are just going to be bored. I''m going to use the time I have before the door opens to move my Core as far away as possible and maybe level up my Stockpile a little. I know it might be a waste right now, but these are points that no other dungeons would have. What difference does it make if I spend them on what I want? I''m still undecided either way and only time can tell what choice I''ll make. I only hope they''re good ones. Please choose wisely future me. For now, I better settle in for the long haul. It''s definitely going to be a productive day.
Chapter 4 : Turning Corners Tironia holds two large continents on its surface and both have been there since long before records began. One of them is called the Cair continent and everything there is named after its landmass. The inhabitants of Cair are the wealthier of the two nations and boast a great deal of luxurious items. This is thanks to a few of the dungeons that appeared on there. The second of Tironia''s continents, Tira, was named after the world itself. In this nation, strong dungeons can be found almost anywhere and the country''s armed forces are leagues above Cair. This is also the reasoning behind their strict classification system. If a war between the two nations were ever to arise, there''s no doubt Tira would claim victory with their might. If one were seeking fortune and riches, they would head for Cair but if one is seeking strength and glory, then Tira is the way forward. The Ocean Yore separates both continents but trade deals still happen frequently. Even with large distances and monsters on the sea, there are always demands for certain goods and there are also merchants willing to risk their lives selling them. A short article on the two great continents. The year 1919 Pali Patiti, Adventurer, Scholar, Self-Titled Documentarian.
My third room has been completed and it was followed by my first level up. What a glorious half an hour in Abi''s dungeon.
Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 2 DP has been increased by 20. New features have been unlocked: Weak Wall Torch: 1DP Weak Wooden Door: 1DP Wooden Treasure Chest: 1DP A new Skill has been Acquired: Examine All damage the Core accumulated has been repaired
Sweet! My Core is now in pristine condition once again. I was trying not to think about the fracture, but I''d be lying if I said it wasn''t beginning to scare me. I definitely don''t need to add any more of Barry''s tunnels to my list. When I''m stronger, maybe I can acquire them without sustaining any damage. Anyway, my DP can now reach 52/40. I''m honestly shocked at how much I can hold as it''s more than double what I started with. Well, it''s not full yet because I''ve just spent some, but I still have good old Barry. After all, it''s through his efforts that this was possible in the first place. I love you, Barry. Without you, I wouldn''t have Stockpile. To be honest, I would probably still be on 20 DP and meditating like every other Dungeon Core. So what I really meant to say was, I really, really love you, Barry! I wonder how other dungeons manage it? Being slow that is. I''m also curious as to how they''re created in the first place. Not that it''s a big issue, but I doubt even Me knows the answer to that one.
A Dungeon Core does not notice the passing of time. It just is to them. They exist in part due to the creator trying to restore balance to the world and failing. He did not get around to removing them before disappearing and after a while, the algorithm left running The System began to fail. Now it creates new Cores and miniature systems alike before merging them into one. Therefore creating us.
What? No. No. No. No. No. No. No. NO! You can''t just sum up existence like that, Me. I don''t want to hear how this happened because some stupid God forgot to turn some stupid system off! I don''t even know how to start processing that! It makes it even harder hearing you phrase it so easily. I... I just... I don''t wanna hear it! That just totally killed my mood. I was actually happy a minute ago.
My apologies. It was not my intention to do that, Abi.
I know. It''s not your fault. Still, how do you even know that stuff? I was never the brightest person before I became a Dungeon Core, so how did you become so smart if you''re made from me?
I am not made from you. Weren''t you paying attention? I was created by The System that oversees Dungeon creation. I was created for you and then merged into you, through The System''s knowledge.
You know what, Me? I don''t wanna hear it.
What?
Yep, don''t care. Not even a little bit. I don''t mean to be rude, but gods and systems? Honestly, I couldn''t care less right now. I know I asked the question, but I wasn''t actually expecting you to answer. I was still human three hours ago, remember? This is a little too much.
Quite. Not much time has passed since you became a Dungeon Core. There are still 20 hours and 58 minutes until your door opens.
Trying to forget the outrageous information that I just had to ask for, instead, I focus on my dungeon. It''s hard when you only have the basics though and don''t know which ways you should advance. Crisis averted, I patiently wait for Barry to fill me up while complaining about the unfairness of only having two Gacha rolls. Oh Yeah. That feels nice. I didn''t get far with my thoughts, but I feel great again being back at full DP. This moment feels special, knowing I can build more than one room at a time makes me feel giddy. 56 points is a lot to play with, where do I start? I place a tunnel, followed by a room still heading straight. After that, I try placing another tunnel in the same direction but find myself stopped by a new notification.
Error: Unable to place tunnel in the specified location.
Why can''t I place a tunnel here, Me?
There are a few possible reasons for not being able to place a feature. In this case, it could be that your tunnel might connect to the outside world. For that to work, you need to place a special exit. This is unavailable to you at the moment due to your current level and time restriction.
Ah. The outside world. Wait. We''re still on Tironia, right? I haven''t changed planets as well as species, have I? Wait. Species? Is that the right word for my change in genealogy? Nevermind. It''s still the same planet, right?
Yes, it''s the same planet. However, the space in which you inhabit could also be classed as another dimension completely. Now, why are you so insistent on building in a straight line?
The space in which you inhabit? Why do you have to make my space sound so dirty? I''m clean. Also, I think that a super-long Dungeon might put people off wanting to explore it.
Did it not occur to you that no matter which direction the tunnels run, it''s still going to be the same distance in length?
........
This time I will take your silence to mean you did not consider that information. If your Dungeon does not travel in a straight line, the chances of adventurers getting lost and preferably dying will be significantly increased.
........ Thank you, Me. I have nothing else to say. If I had a hand, or a head for that matter, I most certainly would be facing some palm right now. At least I learned some wise advice from my foolish mistake. Ok, so, right turn. Stolen from its rightful place, this narrative is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. Placing my next tunnel to the right of the last, my overview shows it at a perfect 90¡ã angle. At the end, I place the fifth room and another tunnel for when I can continue. After I''m done, I move my adorable-drooling Mimic, Colin, and my beautiful jade Core, all the way to the last room. Shockingly, my Core moves by getting soaked up through the floor and then released into whichever room I desire. Damn, I''m cool. Colin had to walk the whole way and it was hilarious. I was laughing my head off at his tiny feet, tapping away. Me couldn''t understand what was so funny. I add a Weak Wall Torch to my Core Room, as I''ve taken to calling it, and one in the room the Rogues are in. They''re still in the first room I created with Barry because at least they have something to watch, but we don''t want him crushing one of them by accident and claiming it was because he couldn''t see them. Although workplace injuries happen all the time in poorly lit areas, that won''t be the case in my dungeon. After that spending spree, I''m excited to see when I''ll level up again. Give me a hand, Me.
Dungeon Core Abi Level 2: 5/10 XP Until Next Level. 6 Rooms 6 Tunnels 4 Monsters 0 Traps 1/40 DP Available
How come I still have a point left?
It''s the amount you have regenerated naturally. Every 2 hours you earn 1 DP through your skill Regeneration.
Oh. That seems insignificant thanks to Barry''s efforts, but I''ll spend it regardless. Only 5 XP to go! That''s only three rooms. First, I''ll use that single point on another torch and I''ll place it in the entrance. That only leaves three rooms and 6 tunnels left to light. Those tunnels need more than one torch as well because of how long I made them. For now, I''ll just use any leftover points on that whilst aiming for the next level. Another 52 minutes roll by and I repeat the same steps as before. Another empty room followed by a long-ass tunnel, followed by another room. I would have kept going but my path forward was blocked again by the same error as before. Shrugging it off since there''s nothing I can do to fight against The System, I once again turn right with my last tunnel. I wonder how far it will let me go this time? Maybe to where my entrance is? My remaining points go into more torches to light the rooms. With 20 minutes to wait before I can build the room that will take me to the next level, I spend the whole time gleefully anticipating how cool Stockpile will make my point total look. As soon as I hit the mark, I purchase the room faster than a noblewoman in a jeweller''s. My intention is to level up as much as possible before I open. More points mean more paths. I know that no other Dungeon has had a start like mine, so my future is already looking a little promising. Hopefully, there won''t be a stray battalion of knights passing by randomly when my door opens. ........ Why did I even think of that!? If that happens the blame is on you, Me.
What? Are you talking to me, or you?
Exactly!
What?
After a little joking around with Me, ta-da.
Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 3: DP increased by 20 New features have been unlocked: Water: 1DP (per cubic foot) Mushroom: 1DP New loot unlocked: Rusty Iron Dagger: 2DP
Yeah. That''s right. You know it! Girls are moving up in the world. There aren''t as many features this time and no skills either, but I''m still overjoyed looking at my capacity increasing. When full, I can hold a whooping 78/60 DP. Isn''t that kind of cheating? I can''t help but imagine I''m smiling somewhere. I''m not complaining though so don''t answer that one, Me. That was rhetorical and for my own benefit. All I''m saying is, who''s a big girl? After a few failed attempts at making Me laugh and taking my regular DP injections off Barry, I managed to get the hang of meditation. Sort of. I''m in my own zen-like world. Which is trippy because it totally wasn''t what I was expecting at all. Here, I''m able to see my human-self dressed in my adventuring gear. I''m lying on top of a sleeping roll on the Dungeon floor. Even though my hood is over my face, I''d recognise my hair anywhere. The same bright green as my Core, a good portion of it has spilt free and is draped across my face. With my hands clasped in front of me, I look like I''m already dead. Thankfully, the steady rising of my chest lets me know that I''m only asleep. We appear to be on the 7th floor of the Goblin Dungeon. The last place I remember before my humanity was swapped for what-ever-it-is-you-call being a Dungeon Core. I watch as my own eyes spring open and it scares the shit out of me. All of a sudden I''m me again. Not looking at myself, but I am myself. I want to let out a celebratory whoop to let Me know he was wrong, but my body won''t move. Well, it will, but it''s not me in the driver''s seat. My head turns on its own, even as I try to stop it, and I start to panic. Wait. Stop! What''s happening, Me? ... Me? To my right is my friend Anya. The cleric who always heals our ass when we need it. She lay only a few feet away and spread out across her own sleeping roll, her head facing my direction. Her long, silver hair is matted with blood and dirt, her clothing ripped and torn, her eyes lifeless and hollow. Her body, an empty husk. We have always been close, Anya and I. Ever since we met at the Adventurers Guild. We joined at almost the same time and it bonded us in a way that I hadn''t experienced before. She didn''t just become my friend, she became my comrade and we formed a party together. At this moment though, I can no longer see the beauty in my friend as my vision blurs. Crying miserably, inside and out, my mind sears the atrocity being committed to memory. The only person I can see now is Kal. Worse than a Goblin, his sword pins my friend''s body to the floor as he commits the unthinkable. The unimaginable. Wearing a twisted expression, the panting of his breath is the sound audible throughout the Dungeon. I try to turn away, but hatred won''t move my body. Anger swells inside of me, but confusion won''t let go. I can''t move. After what feels like an eternity struggling internally, his interest in my best friend dies and his interest turns in my direction. His grin turns more sadistic as he licks his lips. No one should be able to smile with such malice. I try to look at my body and realise this must be how I died. What the fuck. Refusing to watch anymore, I close my eyes and cry to myself. The sadness in my heart echoes out like a beacon. I do realise that this isn''t actually happening right now and that it''s a memory, or a vision, or a dream... Or whatever you wanna call it, but I don''t care. I''m not down for watching myself get... Dead? Yeah. Dead. It''s as good a word as any. That''s what happened. I got deaded! By some dickhead I thought was my friend. Our friend!
Are you ok?
Me''s words light up my life and I realise that I''m no longer stuck in that horrible dream space. Instead, I''m in my Core room and all my monsters are gathered around me. My Rogues, Light and Ali, both seem furious and I swear I can see sand coming out of Barry''s eyes. How did Barry get all the way here? Colin is salivating, as he does. He doesn''t even have any eyes. Just funny feet, a massive tongue and a lot of drool. How did you get here, Barry? Yes, I know. Barry can''t speak. I asked out of shock more than anything. What happened, Me?
I don''t know if I want to tell you after you asked Barry before me.
Hehe. Don''t talk about yourself in the third person. It makes you seem strange.
I wasn''t... It''s you that named... It does not matter. I do not know what you were doing! The monsters responded to your feelings and came to the Dungeon Core.
Awww, you guys. You''re all awesome, thank you. I really wish they could hear me.
They know you are pleased with them. You should feel it through your will.
I think I can, but it''s not the same thing. I want to say thank you and show them my appreciation. They''re loyal just like you said they would be.
Oh? Does that mean...
Yes. I might think about considering whether or not to decide if I should potentially try and risk creating a scary Wolf. It''s just a daunting idea, Me.
I understand, but they will be loyal to you. Once you have created 10 of them, you will unlock the access to the next tier of evolution.
Wait, what!? The next... Why didn''t you tell me that earlier? I bet I could have done that with the Rogues as well, couldn''t I? To hell with the Bandit Hideout analogy. After what I''ve just seen, I don''t care anymore!
What do you mean? What did you see?
It''s... Not important now. It could be if we ever see that bastard Kal again though.
Kal?
Doesn''t matter. For now, just keep a lookout for any large knights that may enter the area, got it? In fact, can you access the dungeon the same way that I can?
Yes. I can monitor and use anything you give me authority over.
Cool, but for now, just watch out for the knight, OK?
OK. I will inform you of anyone that matches your amazing description once your timer has expired. By the way, you have just over six hours remaining until your door opens.
What!? There''s only six hours left? I thought I had around twenty or something like that. What happened to all my time?
You were meditating and would not snap out of it.
Meditating? Meditating? Meditation my arse! It sure as hell didn''t feel like Meditation. No way, Me. What''s the point of Meditation if it makes me miss out on level ups and expanding the dungeon? Also, it wasn''t really Meditation! It was more like a gods-damn nightmare!
It could be due to the fact that you were a human before you became a Core. The same could be said about your Rogue monsters. No other dungeon that I''m aware of are able to create them.
The Rogues aren''t monsters, they''re people.
What people do you know of that appear out of thin air in the middle of a dungeon?
Well... None, but you never know. And if they''re monsters, then why do they look like people?
Granted, they take on human appearance extremely well, but do not be fooled. They are monsters and they will do your bidding. If you asked them to die right now, they would do so gladly for the dungeon. They would do it for you. They are your monsters.
I''m not going to ask them to die. Jeez, Me. Lighten up. I get it they''re monsters, they just look human. Still doesn''t mean you have to be so mean to them.
I was making sure the point was drilled in and it appears I was successful.
Fine, well done. Mission accomplished.
Also, Stockpile has reached Level 7
What? Chapter 5 : Final Preparations A few centuries ago, monsters known as Mimics could be found in almost all of the dungeons spread across Tironia. Mimics are patient creatures. Capable of sitting motionless for days on end until they are ready to act. In no way does this mean that they are docile or lazy monsters. They are exceptionally cunning and extremely vicious, one must be very careful when encountering one. They lure prey in with the incentive to earn rewards and riches, under the guise of a regular treasure chest. They have no outstanding features that are noticeable until it''s too late and you''re already in its maw. All races on Tironia know that dungeons provide rewards for those brave enough to journey inside. It''s common knowledge. But when the mimics started to appear in large numbers, a change occurred. The adventurers who had made a living by venturing into dungeons instead became wary of entering because of these deceptive monsters. This reduced the number of dungeon goods available in the market and only then was something done about the dangerous enemy. If one were to search the history records for such details on why Mimics are no longer commonplace in dungeons, the conclusion they would reach is that the creatures had been wiped out. An incalculable number of parties made up of the collective forces of Tironia, put an end to the threat plaguing their lands and minds. For a full week, parties ventured into every known dungeon across the world in search of chests. Not to loot but to kill from afar in hopes that it was a monster. This was what would later come to be known as ''The Week of Release''. Removing fear from adventurers, old and new, over their enemy. Ever since that day any Mimic that has been found has been destroyed along with the core that created it, with extreme prejudice. Mimics are born from the dungeon, just like all the other mysterious types of monsters that they can create. After Mimics and their Cores were wiped out across the land, new dungeons stopped producing them. This showed more intelligence on the part of the dungeons. Avoiding their death by removing the monster that was detested by all. No one has recorded seeing a Mimic in the last hundred years and they are now presumed extinct. If anyone comes across a Mimic whilst inside a dungeon in this day and age, they are required to report all information on the creature and anything else that could be relevant to the type of despatch required. People do not take being eaten by a treasure chest lightly and anyone found harbouring information on such a creature may also find themselves punished with the same fate as the aforementioned monster. A History of Monsters. Chapter 3 Mimics. Written by O''mi Soras.
Stockpile is level 7!? That means Barry has been ploughing away, all that time. That''s definitely cheating now, right? You can answer me this time, Me. I mean, if I ever come across another dungeon won''t they hate the fact that I had a power start and they didn''t?
It is not cheating. Stockpile is available as a skill for any Dungeon Core. Should they choose to waste their DP trying to acquire it, that is. They cannot hate you for doing what they themselves can also do.
So I''m not special then?
You are most certainly unique, Abi. That, I can guarantee.
Thanks, Me. I''m not a hundred percent cerain that was a compliment, but that''s how I''m choosing to take it. Can I see my stats, please?
Dungeon Core Abi Level 3: 1/15 XP Until Next Level 9 Rooms 8 Tunnels 4 Monsters 0 Traps 102/60 DP Available
Wow! I can only imagine how beneficial Stockpile is going to be when I have an even larger pool of DP to abuse. Not that it will be happening any time soon, but a girl can dream. Ok, time to spend these built-up points. I''m a little worried that I''ve fallen behind due to my recent escapade to Nightmare Land. In reality, the points I could have spent were used differently so they weren''t really wasted. I''ll put my expansion on hold for now and try to fill the rooms I currently have. There''s no point creating them if there''s no one to defend them, right? After that Terrortation session, I''ve realised that I need to strengthen my defence. There''s no need to bring up my purchase list either, as I know exactly what I''m going to do. Me. Summon 8 Rogues, please.
Ok, but what about the wolves?
I know I said there was nothing for them to do, but at least there are other people to talk to now. Not that they''ve said a word, but Light and Ali shouldn''t feel so lonely. It''s certainly not because I heard about the upgrades. By the time the light of creation fades away, eight Rogues are lined up waiting to carry out my will. Unfortunately, there isn''t much to carry out, so I set them the task of familiarising with each other. There isn''t much that differentiates them, to be honest. Other than their heights and build. To be Frank, every male looks identical apart from Light and that''s only because he has facial hair. The females are slightly more distinguishable thanks to the fact that none of them seem to wear their hair up. I''ll build up the courage soon, Me. I promise.
A new monster has been unlocked: Vagabond: 20DP New features have been unlocked: Rundown Rogue Bar: 20DP Weak Ale: 1DP Weak Wooden Table: 1DP Weak Wooden Chair: 1DP
That''s a lot more than I was expecting. I was only after the upgrade.
You will find that most upgrades come with similar features.
That''s good to know. Thanks, Me. What would I do without you?
Probably cry.
Hey! Don''t be mean after being so nice. True as that may be. I need to focus. Two of the new purchases are quite expensive and I''m not feeling quite as flush as I was a minute ago. I leave the Rogues to mingle and explore, hoping Light or Ali can give them pointers to occupy their time. Now that everyone is settled in I still have sufficient points to summon the Vagabond. For the same cost as a room, I might add. I''d be lying if I said that it didn''t hurt a little, but I need these guys to defend me. Just in case that army of knights I mentioned earlier is actually loitering around outside. The now-familiar light of creation erupts into existence once again and my Core flutters at the same time. I''m so much better than regular dungeons. As the light fades, the Vagabond is left patiently kneeling before my Core, awaiting her first command. Her picture-perfect face is a sight that could pierce any man''s soul. Her eyes match the light of creation and her white hair is tied up in a ponytail. Finally. Maybe she can teach the Rogues some fashion sense. Dressed all in black, a set of full-sleeved leather armour protects her modest chest and is engraved with intricate designs. The armour sculpts her body to her thighs and looks more like a dress. Holding the material tight around her hip, a belt decorated with owls that has multiple pouches and two daggers hang neatly on her side. Knee-length boots shape her leg and leave her thighs on view for all to see. Or maybe I spoke too soon. Still, she looks a far-sight stronger than my Rogues. I notice the light of creation clinging to her body, almost like it''s waiting for me to do something. Not being one to leave things unfinished, I concentrate hard and a notification pops up.
Optional Choice: Set Vagabond as the Dungeon Boss Yes/No?
How did I forget about the Bosses? There''s so much to remember as a dungeon. Sure, why not? I''m sure she will do a much better job than any of the Rogues. Not to be mean, but she is a step up from them. She''s also going to need a name. It will have to be a strong one as well. Especially if she''s going to be a Boss. Crap! This is where it gets hard! After struggling for a while, I name her Veris and leave her in my Core Room. Anyone who might be looking to take out a newbie Dungeon Core, such as myself, will have to go through my Rogues and my Golem. Then, they''ll have to beat Veris. If they manage that, then I suppose I can let Colin eat them. All he does is sit in front of my core anyway, happily drooling away. Hmmm? Me. Why didn''t the system let Barry or Colin be a Floor Boss?
Unique or contracted Monsters cannot be set as such. There are other parameters and restrictions as well but none that you need to worry about right now.
Seems unfair. Also, I think that I''m going to have to give these rooms some permanent features. It''s hard to keep track of them by just numbering them. What do I have that can change that? A quick look at my list leaves me confused. Me. I''m able to create a new floor now.
Correct. You needed a minimum of 5 rooms and a Boss Monster to fulfil the condition to create another floor.
Damn. That means I wasted quite a bit of DP up here then, doesn''t it? Why didn''t you tell me sooner?
You never asked and technically, you have not wasted any points when you include Stockpile in your calculations. Having a larger Dungeon and more monsters is a good quality for any Core to possess. Even humans use the term safety in numbers. The only downfalls are that you would be at a higher level if you had already progressed and your Regeneration rate would have risen.
If I go down a floor, can I still alter the rooms up here? Royal Road is the home of this novel. Visit there to read the original and support the author.
Correct. You can edit any room or floor whenever you want, wherever you are. The only time you cannot make alterations is when adventurers are occupying the floor you wish to edit. If that happens, the floor will be restricted until either they change floors, die, or leave the dungeon. Categorisers are a different story.
OK. OK. We''re on a roll with this useful information business. Thanks, Me. I''m still a little weirded out over the whole killing adventurers part, not going to lie. But if I have to do that to stop myself from dying again, then that''s what I''m damn well going to do. No ifs, buts or sourfoots. I definitely not going to die again. Even if I have to become immortal. I''m going to live forever. However, they''re tomorrow''s problem. Good luck, Abi. I''ve still got today''s crap to worry about. Do I stick with the plan and summon more troops for defence? Or should I drop some floors, move my Core and earn XP? Even after debating the pros and cons for a while, I''m at a loss. Both ideas have merit. Screw it. I''ll stick with the original plan for the moment. I can alter it when, or if, I need to. I''ve got just less than 6 hours left. That should work out at around... 358 DP. As long as Barry doesn''t slack off, that is. Not that he would. He lives for the grind apparently and is my most efficient monster. The cave system he''s been digging seems to be progressing quite well. I can tell that from the points rolling in and taking Stockpile to level 7. I can also see the first tunnels worth on my map. Anything further away and I''m unable to see it. I could take control of it now if I wanted to, but I daren''t risk damaging my Core again. How come Barry can go in there? Isn''t he part of me because I created him?
You can send monsters outside your dungeon to scavenge, harvest, raid, pillage and such. However, this would attract unwanted attention if there were any settlements nearby. The reason you cannot leave is because you are the Dungeon. If you were able to leave somehow, then your Dungeon would cease to exist as you would no longer be connected to it.
Oh. Seems so obvious now you''ve said it. Dungeons can be terrifying. They use monsters to attack villages and are known to be extremely dangerous. But is that really me now? Extremely dangerous? It''s awesome that Barry and the gang are able to go out. Plus, I know there are no settlements outside as well. Orad, that''s where I''m from, is probably the closest place to us and that''s like an eight-hour walk from here. It''s not likely that we''ll see anyone just randomly strolling by. Especially if we''re in the same place. I''m reluctant to get my hopes up though, just in case Kal is still nearby. He could be outside somewhere. What if my door opens while he''s there to see it? He''ll either report me or try to loot the dungeon himself, just like last time. Then I''m screwed. OK. I''ll change my plans. Just in case. Light, Ali and all the other Rogues. Move to the front entrance, please.
What are you planning now?
It''s just in case Kal or anyone else is lurking around outside. I''ll get the Rogues to rush out as soon as I open and surprise attack whoever is out there.
That... Is a good plan, Abi.
Hehe. I know, Me. I know. Veris and Colin, you two stay where you are for now. Barry, just keep on digging my little Rockstar. Now then, Me. I want the Rundown Rogue Bar in the corner room, please. Opposite both tunnels, so you can see it from either one.
Rundown Rogue Bar has been purchased: 2XP Awarded. You need to select a Rogue to work in the establishment for it to operate successfully.
Establishment? I wasn''t expecting that. I thought it would be a hideout of sorts. I''m not going to complain though, thanks for the XP. Looking at the silent Rogues crammed in my entrance, I decide to spare one of them from the plan. Selecting one for the position, I name her Talia and assign her to the feature. This leaves me a Rogue short at the entrance as Talia disappears, teleporting away to the bar.
Rogue Talia has been upgraded to Shady Rogue Barkeeper Talia: All stats increased by 10. New skills have been earned.
Nice. The rundown establishment has been constructed in all its cobwebbed glory. Looking as bad as it sounds, let''s be honest, this building is a dump. Broken windows, a rickety roof and there''s almost nothing inside except a few cockroaches. Did they come with the bar, or do I have bugs? They don''t seem to bother Talia and she steps into the building through the door-less frame with a bright smile. No longer in the same armour as the other Rogues, Talia''s sky-blue hair flows freely down her back. Why aren''t these women tying their hair up? It''ll be much easier for combat. Now that I can actually see her face, not only is she pretty but Talia looks quite tough. Just like Veris. I wonder if all the Rogues I create will turn out like that? Still dressed all in black, but now wearing a shirt and pants combo finished with a white apron, she suits the role of a barmaid perfectly. I mean, I certainly wouldn''t mess around in her establishment. The bar came with one sorry-excuse-of-a-table and two, equally-poor chairs. A lonely-looking bottle of alcohol sits alone on one of the not-many unbroken shelves. I was expecting more from a 20 DP purchase. The best part was the Rogue upgrade. As I watch, Talia stares at the desolate bar with glee and I decide to lighten the Rogues'' Corner up for her. Oh, that sounds like a name. I''m definitely using that one. Talia looks happy in her new position as the hostess of a rundown bar so I return my focus to the task at hand. Dungeon planning. This is going to be a long 6 hours and I need to give it my full focus! Time passed by faster than I had anticipated and, as predicted, my DP brought in 348 points. There are still 10 minutes to go until I open and I''m just calling the Rogues back to the entrance. After being crammed together in that small room thanks to my fear, I felt kind of bad them and said they could relax until needed. Now that it''s almost go time, I need them to be ready to charge out as I open. I''ve managed to spend my points wisely over this time, trying to lay out a good floor plan. I could''ve done with more DP if I''m being honest, but making the best out of a bad situation is what I do these days. However, making plans and spending points are not the only things I''ve been doing with my time. I''ve been examining everything with a skill I acquired a while ago. Coincidentally, it''s also called Examine. I learned it at Level 2 and never got around to using it, not until a few hours ago that is. The skill provides me with information about everything in my dungeon and it would be easier to list what I can''t examine rather than what I can. One of the first things to be examined was the Rockstar, Barry. Good old, loveable, rock-dropping, Barry. I found out he costs 5000DP to purchase. I mean OMG. Did I seriously luck out or what? He''s even earned me close to 20% of that back today alone! What a Golem! That wasn''t the only shocker though and it wasn''t the most surprising. Colin, my loveable and comical Mimic, took the cake by far. If I were to purchase another drooling beauty like him, it would cost me 20,000DP! I nearly passed out when I saw the cost. I mean, no wonder he''s so cute at that price. If I ever reach that number of points, I''ll definitely buy another one. That''s a plan! Me says that Colin''s cost is due to an incident that occurred centuries ago. The same incident that got them classified as dangerous monsters. I wonder what it was? I could probably get Me to tell me, but it will only be another long-ass lecture. Let''s not. He almost blew up when I mentioned getting a second Mimic. I just don''t think he gets how adorable they are. And if they''re well hidden, or in my Core Room, what''s the problem? I checked all the monsters on my list, except for the little green devils. Not a chance. Not even as cannon fodder. Wouldn''t waste the DP. Thanks to Examine, I''m able to see how many summons are needed for the next tier to unlock. Which are labelled as ??? for some reason. Having nothing else to do, I even examined my torches. I mean, why not? They can be upgraded by paying 10X the cost of placing a single Weak Wall Torch. Which isn''t so bad for torches, they only cost 1DP, but it makes upgrading summons horrendous. I can''t see myself using that feature often, but you never know what future me might come up against. Anyway, where was I? I began my spending spree by upgrading my last purchase. After using Examine and seeing the XP reward, I had Me upgrade it as soon as we could.
Rundown Rogue Bar has been upgraded to Shabby Rogue Bar New features are available: Regular Ale: 2DP Watch House: 40DP 4XP Awarded
For the steep cost of 40DP, the Rundown Bar began to change. Roof tiles reappeared where they had been missing, albeit a bit slanted, and windows magically repaired one after the other. One of the front doors appeared back in its place and the inside gained a few more tables and chairs. The shelves behind the bar looked a little healthier as the proprietress smiled happily. After that, I Examined the Bar again.
Shabby Rogue Bar: A place for weary Rogues to rest their heads Whilst on the same floor as the bar, all Rogue-type monsters have their attributes boosted by 10% Upgrade Shabby Rogue Bar to ????: 80DP Rewards: Strong Ale: 4DP Building''s Second Floor: 80DP 8XP
Well... There''s no way I can say no to that, right? That boost could be a lifesaver. 10% is good for any class. It was expensive, but the XP I would earn from it was worth it alone. Once my points had accumulated enough, I went ahead and made my second purchase.
Shabby Rogue Bar has been upgraded to Rogues'' Tavern New features are available: Strong Ale: 4DP Tavern''s Second Floor: 80DP 8XP Awarded Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 4 DP has been increased by 20 New features have been unlocked: Light Cluster: 3DP Fire Cluster: 3DP Swindlers Den: 40DP A new tunnel has been unlocked: Shady Tunnel: 20DP
With the upgrade complete, the rest of the windows were repaired and the front door was fully operational, albeit somewhat crooked. More tables and chairs filled the inside of the establishment and behind the counter was stocked with lots of different alcohol. Talia was absolutely beaming, wiping down the counter with a cloth she''d acquired from somewhere. Another level-up was phenomenal for me as well. That meant I could hold 136/80. That''s what I''m talking about! With 120 points gone from my total of 358, that left me with 238DP to spend. For the next phase, I spent 10 points on Pitfall traps and unlocked the next set. At the low cost of 1DP each, I placed ten of them in the room Barry drops his goods and spread them out. They don''t seem like they will do much damage and adventurers will be able to climb out of them quite easily. I''ll change them somewhere down the line when I''m flush.
Trap Unlocked: Spike Trap: 2DP
After that, I went a little trap-mad. Spike traps can be hidden on the dungeon floor or walls and spring out when triggered.
Trap Unlocked: Firepit Trap: 4DP
Do I even need to explain what that trap does? With thirty traps set down, I decided to stop myself there before all my points went that way. Even if the next trap did seem like a perfect fit for the Shady Tunnel I unlocked.
Trap Unlocked: Poisonous Gas Trap: 8DP
Throughout all the trap placing, I made sure none of them covered the area where Barry drops his loads. As the grand opening drew closer, I had 168 points left to come from the Rockstar and finally gave in to my partner''s constant harassment about not having enough variety in my dungeon. I did the unthinkable and purchased 10 wolves. Reluctantly, I might add. Coming to life before me, they all appeared in my Core Room as pitch-black monstrosities. Made from the essence of fear itself, their sharp carnivorous teeth sent shivers down my Core. With ten equally scary sets of eyes trained on me, I immediately sent the wolves to a different room. Still shaken, I persevered.
A new monster has been unlocked: Alpha Wolf: 10 DP New loot unlocked: Leather: 2 DP
Still mentally hyperventilating from the first 10 wolves, I eventually managed to summon the Alpha after procrastinating to Me for enough time for more points to build up. Every other wolf that I summoned was pitch black. The Alpha, which I decided to name Trixie, has white fur that reminds me of snow. I couldn''t help myself as I thought, she''s so cute. Her entire body is the same colour as Veris'' hair. My imaginary heart, which is really my Core, skipped a beat as the beautiful creature waggled her tail. With her being twice the size of the first wolves, you would think I''d be petrified. She''s just too cute to be scared of though. Her large golden eyes watched my Core pulse and I swear I got chills. Not because I was scared, but from the love and devotion I felt from her. She was telling me that she will protect me with all her heart and soul. Just how Me said it would be. Awww. I just wanna cuddle you, Trixie! After spending my time admiring the Alpha, I sent her to the room with the other wolves and decided to name it ''The Wolves'' Den''. That was immediately followed by a notification.
New features have been unlocked: Grass: 1 DP (per square foot) Large Woodland Room: 80 DP Optional Mini-Boss has been Unlocked: Set Alpha Wolf as the Mini-Boss of the first floor Yes/No?
I confirmed her as a mini-boss without hesitation. Stunning as she is, I bet Trixie''s a beast in a fight. She wouldn''t beat Barry, but I would put money on her to win against a normal adventurer any day. 10 minutes left before I open and I''ve got 98 DP left to spend. I got distracted by Trixie and spent the last of my time wishing I could brush her fur. She even gives Colin a run for his money on the cuteness scale. It''s at that moment I realise someone deserves praise for the magnificent specimen of a wolf laid before me. Thank you, Me.
What for this time?
I would never have such a pretty wolf like Trixie if it wasn''t for you.
Yes... Quite. Next time, how about the Goblins?
... If you ever say that again, I will mute you forever. Do you understand?
Understood, Abi. No Goblins.
Good. I''m glad that''s settled.
May I suggest acquiring some different types of monsters then?
Now that''s more like it. Tell me more, Me?
Chapter 6 : A Not So Grand Opening Never enter a dungeon alone. Never consume anything you find inside a Dungeon without having it identified first. These are the two cardinal rules that the people of Tironia have followed ever since dungeons have been recorded to be man-eating monsters. As well as owning armour and a capable weapon, you should always have at least two other people with you and a day''s worth of rations in your pack. This is not a law, but common knowledge. If someone were to be injured whilst inside, how would they be able to escape on their own? There''s no doubt that they would be killed and eaten by the dungeon whilst trying to escape, hence why a partner or multiple companions are advised by the guild. Dungeons are deceitful creatures and it has been suggested that they are capable of possessing intelligence. There are many ways to die in a Dungeon, most of which are slow drawn-out deaths which feature excruciatingly horrible ends. Dungeons can even bring about an adventurer''s death without them even knowing. Especially if they find themselves under-prepared, or lacking in common sense. Dungeon Alox, which used to be just outside the city of Don, had a floor which no monsters inhabited. Adventurers who frequently entered the Dungeon had taken to calling that place a safe zone since they could relax without fear. The whole of the tenth floor was lit by multiple light clusters, making it appear as though it was daytime inside. There was also fresh water with fish in. Adventurers would drink from that source, refreshing themselves from combat and having their attributes boosted. This knowledge was known to everyone who lived in the surrounding area and even those that visited often had heard. A dungeon which produces freshwater that boosts stats, so close to the city, was akin to bragging rights for the nobility. The Red Skulls, who were by far the most successful adventuring group in Don, unexpectedly lost two members in one day. This was followed by another three the day after, then four more the day after that. Knowing their members had entered the dungeon, they assumed that a dangerous monster had been summoned. Gathering their entire m group together, the Red Skills headed into dungeon Alox in full force. Pushing through the dungeon without the rest, they arrived on the tenth floor and had yet to encounter anything unusual. Ten minutes were all they were given, but it was enough time for almost everyone to drink from the stream. Safe as it usually was, no one considered the Dungeon might change its behaviour. Halfway through the twelfth floor, Mages started hitting the ground like flies. Coughing up blood and convulsing violently, they had subjected to mana poisoning. The only Mage unaffected was the Vice Commander, Francesca Deboar. Having not long returned from a different mission, she was in possession of moonlight water. The small container that fit in her palm contained a reservoir''s worth of water. Fresher than a mountain spring, Francesca hadn''t drunk from the Dungeon''s Trap Water. After their Battle Mages went down, so too did the Healers. They may have lasted slightly longer due to their Class, but that didn''t stop them from coughing blood too. Only those with barely any mana were unaffected, but they couldn''t do enough without support as they were set upon by the Dungeon. Droves of monsters surrounded them from both sides, almost like they had been waiting for the opportunity. Without magical reprieve of any kind, the warriors were ripped apart as they valiantly fought their way out. No longer pressing forward, teamwork broke down and human nature reared its ugly head. Friends in disguise committed sins against fellow companions only to be karmatised a few floors later. The only people to make it out of the Dungeon were Francesca Deboar and a few of her guards. The rest of the Red Skulls had been lured into weakening themselves so that monsters could slaughter them like cattle. When she reported the events, 96 out of 103 people had died. The biggest loss since The Culling. Afterwards the Lord of Geo issued the Dungeon''s destruction and three days later, it was gone. There are other examples of this throughout history and we can only grow by learning from past mistakes. -An extract from Dungeon Safety -Written by former adventurer, Francesca Deboar.
Me''s explanation on how to unlock new monsters lasted less than a minute. There are a few ways for me to acquire new monsters. The best way is to keep doing what I''ve already been doing. Buying ten of the same type unlocks the next tier in that class. Doing this also nets me more monsters and seems like the most efficient option. Alternatively, I can upgrade a single monster to the next tier by paying ten times their value. But I wouldn''t have half as many monsters if I went about it that way. Not to mention that ten times the cost of Veris, my vagabond, would be 200DP. I can''t even hold that much yet. Another way to earn new monsters is by absorbing their corpses through my dungeon. Yep, just swallow them whole and then I can spit them out as much as I want. If I can afford the cost that Is. Finally, I can contract an outside monster to join my dungeon as a type of guardian, which sounds awesome. I doubt there''s anything kicking around outside my hole that wants to come and live inside a bandit hideout though. Monsters aside, I''ve decided to add the Shady Tunnel between Rogues'' Corner and the sixth room. I''d like to strengthen my defence, but I also want to summon as many people and monsters as possible. Knowing I should be focusing on one or the other, rather than doing bits here and there, I end up doing what I want.
Shady Tunnel has been created: 2XP Awarded
Addin more defence, I place four Poisonous Gas Traps inside the Shady Tunnel. Me said that monsters are able to see just fine in my Dungeon, even though there''s not much light. How lucky are they? Even traps don''t affect them. With only a few minutes until my door opens, I still have 50 points left to spend. The problem is they don''t seem to last long enough. DP, for how long it would usually take to regenerate, can be spent in seconds and I''m not sure which project to put them in. What do I do?
Why not create the next floor? It will push your dungeon to Level 5. You still have new purchases from your previous level too.
Crap! I forgot about those. What were they again? Can you get me a list of the available purchases, Me?
Available Purchases: Traps: Pitfall Trap: 1DP Spike Trap: 2DP Fire Pit Trap: 4DP Poisonous Gas Trap: 8DP Monsters: Goblin: 3DP Wolf: 5DP Alpha Wolf: 10DP Rogue: 10DP Vagabond: 20DP Features: Grass: 1DP (per square foot) Water: 1DP (per square foot) Weak Wall Torch: 1DP Weak Wooden Door: 1DP Weak Wooden Chair: 1DP Weak Wooden Table: 1DP Wooden Treasure Chest: 1DP Weak Ale: 1DP Regular Ale: 2DP Strong Ale: 4DP Light Cluster: 3DP Fire Cluster: 3DP Swindlers Den: 40DP Dungeon: Tunnel: 5DP Shady Tunnel: 20DP Room: 20DP Second Floor: 50DP Upgrades: Pitfall Trap: 10DP Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more. Spike Trap: 20DP Firepit Trap: 40DP Goblin: 30DP Wolf: 50DP Weak Wall Torch: 10DP Weak Wooden Door: 10DP Weak Wooden Chair: 10DP Weak Wooden Table: 10DP Weak Ale: 10DP Regular Ale: 20DP Strong Ale: 40DP Light Cluster: 30DP Fire Cluster: 30DP
...
There are more, but they are unaffordable. This is everything you can currently purchase with your points.
I didn''t need to see that much, Me. I only wanted the purchases from my last level. I''ll have to be more careful with my words next time. For now, let''s have a look at Swindlers Den.
Swindlers Den: 40DP This room requires 2 Rogues to be operational Once set no other buildings or monsters may be added to this room Whenever a person enters or exits the room the Rogues will create one clone each One will attempt to deceive potential marks whilst the other steals their possessions If successful they will give tribute to the Dungeon Core Rewards: 4XP
What sort of description is that? I mean, I like l the tribute part, but are other summons still able to go through that room once the Den has been set? And how can they use clones? I couldn''t do that when I was a Rogue.
Quite. The room will not be restricted for travel, but no other feature may be placed inside. The clones are created through the Dungeon''s magic. It uses shadows to form identical bodies of the Rogues set to the Den.
That does sound good, but it''s almost all of my DP. What about Veris? I know I can''t afford her upgrade but let''s have a look at what Examine says anyway.
Vagabond (Veris): 200DP Upgrade to unlock the next tier of Rogue Unlocks: ???
Not a lot. What a crappy description. I would much rather summon ten Vagabonds than pay to upgrade one to a harder question mark, right? When I''m flush, we''ll be able to see about upgrades all day long. But, why doesn''t it show me the next upgrade, Me?
Your Rogues are a special type of monster that was created when you became a Dungeon Core. They are unique to you. Since they have never been summonable before, the system designs upgrades based on your knowledge of the class. You can add more mana to the summoning process to slightly alter them as they are created. This may also unlock a new type of monster.
That sounds really cool and almost like you may have mentioned it before, but it''s a lot to remember. If she''s using my thoughts though, shouldn''t there be more than just question marks?
Have you given any thought to what the next monster would be yet? Its name perhaps? Also, why do you assume The System is female? Just like myself, it is without body, gender or opinion.
Yeah, sure, Me. You don''t have an opinion. Also, I didn''t know that descriptions would change if I put thought into them. Still, I''ll let The System make a name later. It''s much easier than me having to decide. Now, what do I do with these points? ...
You really should consider building the second floor, Abi. It really is important.
Yeah I know, but I don''t want to start the new floor from any of my current rooms. I''ve got a plan for where the second floor will start now, but we''re not there yet.
Really? Would that plan involve travelling in a straight line because it would be a long distance?
Alright. Alright. I already agreed that was a stupid idea. In fact, what''s your deal, Me? Are you supposed to be so... Sarcastic?
I don''t know what you mean? I am exactly how I am supposed to be!
Yeah, OK. I swear you said you didn''t have an opinion, yet all you do is complain and jab me.
I... It''s just... I don''t know what to say.
Well, it looks like you''re just as screwed up as I am. Still, I''m glad to have you here, Me. You were right before, you know? I would probably still be crying if I was all on my own. Not that I can cry, but he knows what I mean. Maybe when I get that physical form I''ll be able to wail to my heart''s content.
I don''t know why I said that, Abi. It''s... Not right.
Don''t worry about it, Me. There are bigger problems than what we say to each other, right?
Quite. Your door will open in 2 seconds.
What? Already!? The large mound of earth that is my door sinks into the ground and reveals my entrance. Leaving a fresh, gaping hole on display for all to see. Now that I''m open for business, I try to look at the world outside. While I''m struggling to make sense of what I can''t see, my Rogues enact the plan. Rushing out without fear, they form a semi-circle around my entrance and begin pushing outwards. On the lookout for my traitorous ex-comrade Kal or anyone else that might cause us trouble. I try to keep my eyes on the Rogues as they move out, but my efforts are in vain. I can''t make sense of anything beyond the Dungeon''s boundaries. What looks like the rippling of water represents my border and prevents me from seeing further. I change perspectives back to my overview. The headache-inducing vision switches and I''m left looking down from above. From this angle, I''m actually able to see a small patch of land just beyond my entrance. I decide to use Examine on it quickly whilst my Rogues are out.
Land Acquisition: 1000DP Claim the land surrounding your Dungeon as your own Anyone on this land will be treated the same as being inside the Dungeon and will generate DP for the Core Items can also be absorbed through the land as it becomes part of the Dungeon
WOW. I wish I had enough points for that!
What would you do with it?
I don''t know? Surely it would come in handy though. I didn''t know that Dungeons could claim land. In fact, I don''t think anyone knows that. But, it''s not like I have enough DP to buy it anyway. Plus, isn''t the point of being a Dungeon to actually be inside a Dungeon? Why does it have to be so confusing? Dungeon life is tough. Oh. I''ve just had a brainwave! What if I hide my core inside a tree? Genius, right?! No one would think to look for it there.
What if a bird breaks it, or eats it thinking it''s food?
Could that actually happen?
I have no idea. I have no knowledge on Dungeons that have ever obtained land outside their confines before. Like your Rogues, it might be due to the fact that you were human before becoming a Dungeon Core.
Hmmm. Acquiring land seems similar to building tunnels and rooms. Only I get to do it outside the Dungeon. That''s... My Rogues dashed out the entrance as planned, but I got caught up in something else. Me, can you see what''s going on out there?
Unfortunately, I cannot see outside the Dungeon either.
Damn, I thought you were going to say that. Let''s see what I can learn then whilst we wait. I don''t feel as though I''m in such a rush now that I''ve been revealed to the world. Hey, Tironia. Check out the new me! I''d be lying if I said I wasn''t a little nervous though. Me, what happens if someone kills one of my monsters?
They die. Obviously.
Obviously? Really? What I meant was, do I get any DP back from them? Like I do if I dismantle something.
No. The monster would have died by someone else''s hand. Their killer will earn XP and in turn, increase their own level. This is one of the reasons adventurers seek dungeons out in the first place. The other is loot.
... Obviously. I get it now. Whilst contemplating my own stupidity, the first of my Rogues returns. She''s carrying a large, green lump-of-something over her shoulder and drops on my floor triumphantly. It''s too late to do anything about it as my dungeon happily absorbs the green lump and I find out what it is. A naked-fucking-Goblin!
First-time monster absorption bonus: 25DP 25XP A new monster has been unlocked: Goblin Shaman: 50DP New features have been unlocked: Goblin Hut: 5DP Goblin Altar: 50DP Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 5 DP increased by 20 New features are available: Water Cluster: 3DP Wind Cluster: 3DP The Shop of Secrets: 40DP
Oh My God! Why the hell would you drop that on my floor!? Where did you even get it from and why was it fucking naked? The female Rogue who was momentarily revelling in her first catch, realises that I am not happy with her offering. She doesn''t understand why though as I can''t physically tell her yet. Gods damn stupid voiceless Dungeon! Sensing my anger, the Rogue begins explaining where she found the Goblin and claims it was already naked when she killed it. Finding it eating and with its guard down, she plunged her rusty dagger through the back of its skull. My anger drops to frustration, but is quickly followed by confusion. It''s not because of her story though. I understand perfectly well what she''s saying. She did a good job on the smelly bastard, especially the sneak attack. I''m almost kinda proud, even if it was a Goblin. What I''m confused over, is the fact that these Rogues can speak! It''s been 24 hours of me and Me and not a single one of them has said a bloody word. I was beginning to think they weren''t able to speak because they''re Dungeon summons. Does that mean everything I summon can speak? I''ll figure it out later. For now, just you wait, Dropper. That''s your name now by the way. You''re the first person getting a lecture when I get a body, or a voice, or whatever it was that Me said I''d get at level 10!
Manifestation.
Yeah, that! How come you didn''t tell me the Rogues could speak?
I didn''t know that you... Didn''t know?
How was I supposed to know that Dungeon summons can speak? And I don''t know how many times I''m going to have to say it. I HATE GOBLINS!
First-time monster absorption bonuses: 11DP 11XP New monsters have been unlocked: Goblin Archer: 6DP Goblin Defender: 6DP New loot available: Small Bow: 5DP Small Iron Shield: 5DP
The start of my second day as a Dungeon Core is not going well. I avert my attention from Me and back to the entrance. Stood there are two more Rogues, Tweedledum and Tweedledee. Also named in my fury. Heroically posturing and grinning from ear to ear, their offerings disappear into my floor. NOOOOO! Chapter 7 : A Cute Confrontation How long have monsters inhabited the planet of Tironia? Not many documents can be found relating to a time before monsters and after searching for answers, in the many different libraries around the world, this is what I have learned. Monsters have inhabited Tironia for as long as man, or so we are to believe if we read the teachings from the two religions of the largest continents. The holy book of Tira teaches us that Kai, a descendant of Ao and the God who birthed life on our planet, created dungeons to help the people grow stronger and to reward their efforts. However, the holy book from Cair states that it was not Kai who created them, but a different God altogether. Cair''s church states that it was Gela, a descendant of Lo and the creator of monsters, who made the dungeons. They say she made them so that they could kill Kai''s followers faster and on two fronts. Luckily for us, the inhabitants of Tironia, there are not many religious fanatics and most people choose the life of adventure over the work of a priest. Churches around the world are still quite small in stature because they lack members. So, what evidence can be learned from these two texts, that differ so much from each other in their teachings? Regardless of which God did what, and for whatever reason, both books clearly state that monsters have been on this planet just as long as people have, therefore answering our original question. A short article aptly named, ''How long have monsters inhabited the world of Tironia''. The Year 1921. Pali Patiti. Adventurer, Scholar, self-named Documentarian and now Explorer.
Why!? Why? Why? Why? Why did it have to be Goblins!? It''s been 30 minutes since I opened and eight out of the nine Rogues that left have already arrived back at the Dungeon. Only Ali is still yet to return. Each Rogue brought back a different type of Goblin, which is a little confusing because I only thought there were five. Also, how good are these Rogues? They''re capable of taking out Goblins that cost more DP than they do. To say that I hate Goblins, I seem to know a lot about them. You''ve got regular Goblins. They''re ugly, smelly and carry crude weapons. Not much of a threat to everyday adventurers. Then there''s the Defender Goblins. They''re similar to regular gobs except they carry handmade shields and are usually paired up in groups. You''ve got the Archer Goblins. They''re also like the regular gobs except they use ranged weapons. They don''t smell as bad, but that''s only because they''re further away. As soon you''re close enough for the kill, they reek. Hobgoblins are the uglier, smellier and upgraded versions of regular Goblins and I''ve also read about Goblin Mages. Not that I''ve ever encountered one before today. Oh. There''s apparently a Goblin King as well. But that''s just a rumour that no one has ever confirmed. Is it because Goblins are stupid? That''s probably it. There''s no way they could elect a King. Back to the point. What the hell guys!? I wish I could ask where they''re getting these Goblins from, but I was lucky Dropper told me her story. I send the Rogues back out to acquire more suitable materials to help with my growth. I swear that when I get a voice, or form, this lot are gonna get a mouthful. Once they''ve left, the feeling of stupidity creeps over me as I realise that I could probably will them into telling me what happened. That''s more than likely what happened with Dropper. Stupid, stupid, stupid, Abi. When they get back I''m going to will the hell out of them! All in all, what they''ve brought back has opened up a lot of new monsters on my list. What''s frustrating is that I don''t want to summon a single one of them.
Monsters: Goblin: 3DP Goblin Warrior: 6DP Goblin Archer: 6DP Goblin Defender: 6DP Goblin Scout: 6DP Hobgoblin: 12DP Hobgoblin Mage: 25DP Hobgoblin Healer: 25DP Goblin Shaman: 50DP Wolf: 5DP Alpha Wolf: 10DP Rogue: 10DP Vagabond: 20DP
As bad as my growing list of Goblins is, they''re a great boon at the same time in the form of XP. Even though I''m slightly reluctant to admit it and I''ll deny it if anyone asks. Each one provided me with a first-time acquisition bonus. That means I earn half of what they would cost to summon with DP as XP. That''s also why I earned so much from the shaman when Dropper dropped him off. Least to say the other Rogues took me over the threshold with their tributes and now check out this hot mama jama.
Dungeon Core Abi Level 6: 25/40 XP Until Next Level 9 Rooms 8 Tunnels 22 Monsters 34 Traps DP: 201/120
Even though they were horrible, smelly, dirty, little Goblins, at least they contributed in some way to my advancement and I can continue to grow with the points they''ve provided. I will not, however, say thank you. With Stockpile, I can now hold over 200 DP. That''s more than ten times the amount I started with! I knew this skill would come in handy. I could even purchase Veris''s upgrade if I wanted to. It would be better to finish my floor first and then create the next one, just like Me suggested. Dropping points like it''s Solstice, I place rooms ten and eleven with a tunnel between them. This earns me another 4XP before I''m blocked off again.
Error: Unable to place tunnel in the specified location.
I was actually expecting the error this time. Same as the last two I''ve seen, I ignore it and continue. Heading right once again, I place tunnels as well as rooms twelve and thirteen. At this point, my dungeon overview looks like a square and I''m only 50 feet away from reaching the very first room that I created. Doing that also net me another 4XP leaving me 7 points away from the next level. Sweet. As soon as I finish admiring my work, I''m assaulted by a gut-wrenching pain. A nauseating feeling accompanies it and makes it hard for me to concentrate. I''m not sure what''s happening to me. Me?
A monster has entered your dungeon.
There we go. Is that why I feel like I''ve just downed four bottles of Lightning Jacks?
No, that feeling is because the monster is on the same floor as your Core. Hence why you should have created the second floor as I stated on numerous occasions. You would not feel like this now if you would have followed my advice.
Alright, Me. I could do without the ''I told you so'' attitude, please. What do I do? Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on Royal Road.
At the moment, there''s nothing you can do. You''re unable to spend points whilst there is an intruder on the floor. You will have to wait until it dies in the dungeon before you can do anything.
What? Why? Can''t I just do what I did with Barry and try something new?
I... Do not know. You can certainly try. Usually, a Dungeon''s will is separated from the floor due to anything hostile entering it. Your monsters should not be able to perceive you because of the intruder in the dungeon.
Hopefully, what''s arrived won''t be strong enough to kill any of my summons. I can''t really afford to lose them right now. Viewing my dungeon is usually as easy as a thought. Whatever I want to see, I can. It''s that simple. I can even view more rooms than one if I concentrate. Right now though, it''s more challenging than it usually is due to my intruder. It makes me wonder what type of monster has entered my Dungeon. I have to will some real effort up just to be able to swap what room I''m viewing. I suppose this is my first time trying this while under threat, but is it meant to be this difficult? I eventually succeed, but am now staring at the invader in complete disbelief. At less than a foot tall, an abnormally vibrant and extremely cute, pink Slime is wobbling its way towards my Trap Room. No! Don''t go in there. I don''t want this little beauty to die... ... Or do I? Me. If I absorb the Slime when it dies that means I can summon it, right?
Quite. Provided you have the DP, that is. After the Goblins, I hardly see the need for you to ask such questions.
Please don''t remind me about the Goblins. If only I could shiver at the thought. Imagining such a cute monster dying to my traps, I promise to summon it back as soon as possible. OK, Slime. Time to become summonable. Let''s see how far you can get first though. It ignored my attempt to dissuade it from entering the Trap Room, just like it ignored my promise of rebirth. I''m not surprised though. I still can''t speak to my own monsters yet, never mind ones that don''t belong to me. The Slime is either very lucky or is somehow cheating as it sails through my trap room at a mediocre pace. At one point, it stopped in front of a fire pit. Literally stopped. Reaching the edge, the little bugger shivered and then proceeded to make its way around. It''s gotta be cheating! Slime 1, Abi 0. 10 minutes later, I''m wondering why Ali and the others haven''t returned yet as the Slime reaches Rogues'' Corner. All the aforementioned Rogues are out except for Tavernkeeper Talia. She never leaves the bar, but for some unknown reason has chosen now to do so and is currently in the process of feeding the Slime her weak ale. What the hell, Talia? Why is she giving it booze, Me?
I... You ask a lot of questions that I don''t have the answers to, Abi. I told you before that Rogues are new, just like yourself. So, you don''t know, I don''t know and the gods damned System doesn''t know.
Whoa! OK. What was that, Me? I know I ask some stupid stuff, but this dungeon life is still new to me, remember? I''m sorry for upsetting you. Are you alright?
I am what I''m supposed to be.
Yeah, you said something like that before. Are you sure though?
Yes!
Fine. Back to Slime watch then. Slime 2, Abi 0. Seeing how it managed to drink its way past Talia, the next obstacle should definitely be a point in my favour. Slimes don''t have hands, is what I thought as I watched it squeeze itself under the wooden door and enter the Shady Tunnel. Does it actually think it can reach my core? Well, it is winning 3 - 0, but it''s still unlikely. The poison traps are next. Plus, it doesn''t stand a chance against Trixie or Veris. They are both much faster than this cute, little moocher of a Slime. Almost like it had heard me mocking its speed, which is extremely unlikely, the Slime disappears into thin air. Vanishing before the door at the end of the tunnel, the poisonous gas does nothing. What? Where''s it gone? I''ve never seen a slime teleport before. Or is it invisibility? Was it because of the Ale Talia gave it? Although, I''ve never seen a Pink Slime before. It could be a natural characteristic of its species for all I know. Hard as it is, I manage to search all the rooms in my dungeon but come up short. I know it''s still here because the feeling of being intruded upon hasn''t left me yet. When the Slime reappears, instead of being trapped inside the Shady Tunnel as I''d hoped, it has managed to skip two more rooms and is now quivering before Trixie in the Wolves'' Den. This Slime''s almost at the end of my Dungeon! How did it move that fast? It''s barely been a minute. All of a sudden the slime stops moving completely. It isn''t even wobbling anymore. Has it run out of whatever magic? Or can it sense the Alpha waking from her slumber? Either way, your time has come cutie pie. I can''t wait to see what you''ll give me, or how much you''ll cost to summon. Please don''t be a lot. The lazy wolf, who to be fair has had nothing to do until now, opens her eyes. Golden moons take in the pretty pink arrival and my Alpha eyes up the competition, not looking impressed. As though she''s saying no one but the Wolves should inhabit this space in the dungeon, she huffs. Raising herself off the floor, she towers over the still-motionless Slime. Yes, Trixie. Kill it so I can absorb it. Willing my Alpha to squash her prey, I put my plan into motion. However, it would appear that Me was correct once again and Trixie doesn''t seem to be able to sense me. She does look to be scanning the room though, rather than the Slime. Almost like she''s trying to see if I''m watching. Who''s a good wolf? She then clamps her mouth around the Slime and swallows it whole. No! Bad girl! Spit it out, right now. ... Me? Is it gone?
Yes.
Can I still summon it even after she''s eaten it?
No. There is nothing left for you to absorb.
Why, Trixie!? That slime was mega cute and it was pink as well. Now that the Slime has gone and my connection to the floor has been reestablished, Trixie senses my sadness and lowers her head knowing that she has somehow wronged her master. Feeling regret, or maybe it''s because the Slime didn''t taste too good, she lays down and begins to whimper. It''s okay, Trixie. I''m not mad at you. I''m just a little sad, that''s all. I''m sure we''ll find another one. Don''t worry about it.
Pink Slimes are extremely rare monsters just like Mythril Golems. Especially wild ones. The chances of seeing another are less than 0.1%.
I begin a new wailing session with Trixie howling alongside me. At some point, Ali returned which brought me and Trixie out of our slump. Well, I suppose it was just me really. The moment I stopped, so did the Alpha. To my surprise, Ali has a bulging sack of goodies to brighten my mood. Where did she get all that from and the sack for that matter? She engages me in conversation as she starts removing items and I find myself soothed by the casualness in her voice. Although, it''s strange to be spoken to while not being present in the room. It''s even worse that I''m only able to reply with my will. Apparently, she found a Boar in the forest and the sack was caught on its tusk. She repaired the tear and earned a skill in the process before filling the sack before goodies. Awesome, way to go Ali. I convey gratitude through my will, which is getting easier now that I''m doing it more often. It''s also easier now that there isn''t an adorably cute invader on my floor right now. Oh crap, floors! Hold on for a few minutes, Ali. Using my will, I urge Ali to wait and not deposit the bag full of goodies yet. Just in case she has more than I can handle. I don''t want to lose any DP this time. Me, can I see my status, please?
You can always will your status up yourself, you know? You do not have to ask me every time. Although, I suppose it is nice when you use pleasantries on me.
You''re weird sometimes, Me. That''s a conversation for the future though. Status.
Dungeon Core Abi Level 6: 33/40 XP until next level 13 Rooms 12 Tunnels 22 Monsters 34 Traps DP: 131/120
Beast. I place the entrance to the second floor in the last room, edging closer to my next level. This is going to be my Boss Room, that''s why I waited to place the second floor at what-I-now-know-to-be my own risk. As soon as I confirm my purchase, a small hole appears in the wall opposite the entrance. It grows in size, stretching and pulling itself, digging deeper into the wall. The earth shapes and contorts as it opens wider and the ground changes into stairs that spiral down to the floor below. The first room on the second floor seems to be a freebie as I didn''t have to pay any extra DP for its construction. Just like my entrance. I''m not grumbling though. Looking at my new floor, I feel as though I''ve grown in some way.
Second Floor has been created: 5XP Awarded New Monsters have been unlocked: Weak Darkness Elemental: 10DP Darkling: 20DP New features have been unlocked: Wall Torch: 2DP Wooden Door: 2DP Weak Wooden Walls: 5DP All rooms and tunnels can be doubled in size for no extra cost All rooms and tunnels can now be customised with the woodland effect for no extra cost Passive Skill Regeneration has reached Level 2: DP has increased to a rate of 1 per hour
Yes, yes, yes! New monsters, slightly better Regeneration and upgraded items that I didn''t even have to fork out for. That''s just the boost I needed to keep me far away from another wailing session. I move my Core to the new floor and revel in the safety it offers. Hopefully, this should mean I won''t feel as shitty if, or when, I''m invaded again. Using my will, I bring Veris to the last room of the first floor. Any self-respecting Boss is always sat before the door to the next floor. Although Veris is technically the Boss of the entire Dungeon, we''ll let it slide for now that she''s been downgraded to Floor Boss for the moment. At least she''s still guarding my Core. That''s what counts. I try not to let the wasted points that I spent on Weak items get to me since I''ve just unlocked better versions. I suppose I will automatically unlock certain upgrades whilst building and levelling up, without actually having to upgrade them myself. With my DP spent and my new floor ready to go, let''s find out what Ali has waiting for me in her big bag of goodies. Then I can continue building my dungeon. Hehe. My dungeon. I''ve said it a few times now, but it still feels strange. My dungeon. Yes. My dungeon and I am not going to die here. I''ve definitely still got a lot to learn though. Good job I''ve got Me. Chapter 8 : Explosive Experience The Woodlands of Gael. The elven tribe of Gael detest those who aren''t of elven blood. Dwarves and humans are thrown together with the likes of dungeons and monsters in their eyes. They are known to skin their enemies alive, followed by roasting if the victim survives the flaying. Knowing this fact, no one ventures into the elven woods on the south of Tira anymore and to see one outside of their home is unheard of. They are now as rare to come by as Mimics are these days. Truly one of the most dangerous places to find yourself in is the Gael Woods, if you''re not an elf that is. The Mines of Cair Dun. The Dun Mountains reside in the heart of the Cair continent and boast the largest collective range of dangerous mountains across the whole of Tironia. If one is not native to the area, or ventures too far into the mines located in almost all the surrounding peaks without a guide, it is very likely they will become lost and even easier to stumble into a dungeon mistaking it for a cave. The chances of stumbling back out alive are slim to none as the undead litter the dungeons in Dun. If safety and precautions are not on your mind whilst travelling here, it will be the last place you ever see. The Seas of Tironia. The high seas of Tironia boast some of the strongest monsters to date. Giant aquatic beasts lurk in the large body of water that merchants use for travel. Strong adventurers take jobs involving protection details on the sea. Most voyages will never make a full journey without at least having a few encounters along the way. If you come across any beasts from the real deep on your voyage though, then the odds of you reaching land again are slim to none as some of those monstrosities are capable of swallowing a ship whole. The Floating Island of Zabul. Not much is known about the floating mass of land named Zabul. It is said there is a golden city that resides on top, but no one has ever been able to reach it to confirm this rumour. Another rumour is that the inhabitants of Zabul all possess wings so that they can travel down to the surface of Tironia and back again. No one has ever claimed to meet such a being however so the island is presumed to be empty of life. Except for a dungeon, but again, that''s just another unsubstantiated rumour. Excerpt from the Worldpedia. Chapter 7. Dangerous and Mysterious Locations.
Ali did not bring back a single monster from the entire time she was outside my dungeon. With the sad end to the cutest Slime I''ve ever seen, I was hoping she would have something cute that I could summon hidden away in her bag. Unfortunately, it was not meant to be. Inside the sack, which she took from a monster she killed and bisected, were a dozen different varieties of wild vegetables and a large amount of meat from the monster itself. I earned 12DP from the veggies, 1XP from the Boar meat and a large amount of sadness for free.
New features available: Vegetables: 1DP Boar Meat: 2DP All rooms can now be customised with the farm effect for no extra cost
Farm effect? Trying to lose the cloud hanging over me, I wonder where farming fits in with being a dungeon? "Master?" Nervously rubbing the hem of her clothing, Ali looks less confident than she did on her return. What''s up? Is what I hope my will relays to her. "P-Please may I have some meat and vegetables to cook dinner for the others?" What? Ali''s request for food completely kicks the cloud of sadness away. Is she hungry? She must be, right? She wouldn''t ask otherwise. I thought you said they didn''t need to eat or drink, Me?
I said they might not need such things. Regular monsters need neither food or water to sustain them. A steady connection to the mana you produce is enough to keep them content and is provided automatically through your will.
That''s all well and good for my regular monsters, but will the Rogues run my DP into the ground? When there''s more of them they''ll need large amounts of food on a daily basis, right? Then again... I summon 2DP''s worth of Boar meat for Ali, and so I can see what portion sizes we''re working with. To my surprise, it''s more generous than what I absorbed in the first place. How does that work? When I summon the Vegetables, it creates lots of different types all at once for the cost of 1DP. With all that food for the insanely-cheap price of 3DP, I shouldn''t really complain. Especially since they''re bringing these goods back. So the Rogues will have no problem staying fed and I don''t need to worry about the price. Three meals a day won''t break the bank. I need to remember to keep it in my calculations though. Ali''s eye''s light up as the food appears before her. "Thank you, Master," she beams and begins chopping vegetables immediately. On the floor of the dungeon I might add. The sight pains me to my Core. The woman in front of me, chopping vegetables in less-than-satisfactory conditions, strikes a chord with my heart. It reminds me that I didn''t have much growing up and life was always a constant struggle. Losing both of my parents at a young age, I endured many hardships and did what I could to live. It would be nice to say I grew up in a large mansion, with both parents around to love me forever and enough money to buy whatever I want, but that''s just a dream. After doing what I did to make money and join the guild, I met Anya. She changed my world. Registering and forming a party, we took a few contracts and were even close to ranking up. In those short few years, my life had changed drastically and I was doing well. Then... Deadded. I got deadded. Leaving my past alone, where it should, let''s see what I can do about Ali''s problem. Hmm... After browsing through my list, I choose an appropriate object for my task and begin the creation of a weak wooden wall for 5DP. It was one of the new features that unlocked when I created my second floor. I shrink the wall and fold it over on itself as much as I can whilst flattening it down. There are no problems as I do this and the wood becomes stronger through the process. It doesn''t take long until it''s reached a rectangular shape. Focusing a little more, I carve grooves down one side and leave the other plain. This is the first item that I''ve used my points to alter since Me mentioned it. It wasn''t actually that hard either. I feel really proud of what I''ve just accomplished even if it is just a chopping board. Because of its size, it only cost 1DP instead of the originally 5. As the object materialises in front of Ali, I convey its use through my will and she looks grateful for the gift. I also receive a new notification.
New loot has been created: Cutting Board: 1DP
That was unexpected. I can tell that Ali is delighted with her new piece of equipment as she dices veg. Her prep looks a lot easier now that she has a flat surface to work on, if not to mention much more sanitary. Thinking about what Ali will need next, Talia''s Tavern springs to mind. It would definitely be a better place for her to work, rather than continuing her food preparations in my entrance. Not that I''m a dirty dungeon. I don''t have any viruses or contaminants that I''m aware of at least. I send Ali to Talia''s with my will and off she goes, disappearing faster than a Dole Hound. She''s been alive almost as long as I have. Seeing as how I''m no longer a human, a sniffle escapes me, I don''t have the urge to eat anymore and that makes me feel worse for the Rogues. They must be starving. Since upgrading the Bar to the not-to-shabby Rogues'' Tavern, it actually looks like quite a welcoming establishment. Even if it is intended for the dregs of society. A fair amount of seating is spread with and if it had actual customers, there''s no doubt it would be making some good money. As long as I keep supplying it with alcohol which won''t be a problem considering how cheap it is. The best part about it is the fact that I''m the grower, brewer and supplier, all rolled into one. The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. Maybe I could provide adventurers with alcohol in exchange for not being sold out to the local Lord? Or maybe Rogues'' Corner could be a safe zone where no monsters attack? You might still get robbed blind though. I don''t know. Realistically, I''m only a day old now. That''s a bit of a kicker. I do have a few ideas circulating, now that I''m not as emotional as I was. I''m still disappointed that I''m never going to be a human again, but you have to move on and stop wailing at some point. Viewing the Tavern, I discover it has a fully functioning kitchen with a magical oven in the back. Pots, pans and other kitchen utensils must have appeared when it upgraded. I wonder what the next upgrade will bring.
Rogues'' Tavern: A place for weary Rogues to fill their belly with a hearty meal whilst enjoying a good Ale Backroom deals can be made here 10% of the cost go to the proprietress All Rogues have their attributes boosted by 20% whilst on the same floor as the Tavern All seating is extremely comfortable regardless of type or material Upgrade Rogues'' Tavern to ????: 160DP Rewards: Weak Spirits: 8DP ????: 40DP 8XP
Wow. These Rogues will be living comfier than the humans soon. Except for when they''ll be fighting off invaders for me. I hate those question marks. Why can''t The System just choose a name for now? Why''s she so lazy? I would at least have an insight into what comes next. Me said I could name it too, but I think he''s having laugh. ????: 40DP? How am I suppose to put a name to that when I have no idea what it is? Ignoring the frustrating problems, I shift my attention back to Ali. She''s reached the Tavern and has started her preparations again. This time on a more suitable worktop. I don''t get to watch her for long as two female Rogues return, both struggling to keep hold of a jelly-like object. One has red jelly, the other''s green and each is cradled between the arms of a Rogue like a baby. I didn''t want to get my hopes up, but once I absorbed them the future of cuteness in my Dungeon rose ever so slightly. Acquiring 2 new monsters, I also breached my threshold and leveled up.
First-time monster absorption bonus: 10DP 10XP New monsters have been unlocked: Red Slime: 10DP Green Slime: 10DP Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 7 DP has been increased by 20 New features have been unlocked: Darkness Cluster: 3DP Earthern Cluster: 3DP Camping Ground: 40DP
Yes! They''re not pink, but it''s a start. Who''s the Dungeon Core? Yeah. That''s right. The two Slimes are a welcome addition and much better than any of the Goblin drops I''ve had so far. Maybe not for XP, but they look a damn sight better than the gobs do. They feel so much nicer to absorb too. Maybe I''m overthinking it? Still, I really want a pink Slime. I bet it will take a ages to unlock one though. For now, I''ll keep on Dungeon''in. Using my will, I send the Rogues to the Tavern to rest and eat. The notion of dinner hits home and they both run off immediately. As they disappear, I''m hit with another obvious fact. If they need to eat, then they need to sleep too and the Tavern doesn''t have its second floor yet. Fortunately for me, a cheaper and more reasonably-priced alternative just made itself available.
Camping Ground: 40DP A choice selection of tents will be made available with fire pits included for cooking
That''s it? I''m not sure why, but I was expecting a more. Even if just a little. From the description, I at least know what I''m paying for. It''s not the Tavern''s second floor, but it will do for now. I place the Camping Ground in the room before Rogues'' Corner. There''s enough tents that a few would be left empty if all of the Rogues decided to sleep at the same time. Not that they would. Now that I think about it, shouldn''t I have someone stand guard? Dungeons usually have guards, albeit not ones Spawned by the Dungeon itself. Where would they go though? My entrance? Didnt I unlock a feature for this type of thing? Thinking about what I''ve unlocked recently, one such feature does spring to mind. I unlocked it after upgrading the Rundown Rogues'' Bar and it''s a perfect fit for the position I want to fill.
Watch House: 40DP A suspicious building that houses Rogues Keeps record of all underhanded affairs and shady deals that occur in the Dungeon Rewards: 4 XP
What the hell? Rogues in a Watch House? I was really hoping to unlock Guards or Soldiers pr something like that. Seriously? Can''t the System come up with something better? She''s almost as bad as the Lazy God that left her running. I huff and move on because what else can I do about it? Examine is a good skill, but the descriptions that she comes up with are severely lacking sometimes. I could alter them if I put some thought into it, however it appears that I have the same problem as the System. I can''t think of a decent name to save my life. Ignoring my naming problems until I can gather inspiration from somewhere, I splurge 40DP and purchase the Watch House. I''d like it to be as close to my entrance as possible so it can go in the room next to the traps. Another badly-damaged building, just like the Rundown Rogues'' Bar, forms into creation. Once finished it looks old and decrepit, like it''s been around for thousands of years. Large segments of the wall are missing and moss is covering the entire building. Even though it''s seems partially damaed, The Watch House takes up an imposing amount of space even pressed right up against the wall. It sits directly infront of the tunnel to the Camping Ground and intruders have to go through it to progress through my dungeon. I''m getting pretty good at this. I didn''t actually expect it to be that big if I''m being honest. Me said I can move features for no extra cost so aswell, so that''s good to know. Even if I want to change the layout of my dungeon, it won''t cost me a single point. After my spending is over, I''m left with 19 dungeon points to my name. Willing my status up, it shows that I''m quite a ways from my next level. I knew my growth would start to slow down eventually. It did when I was a human so why wouldn''t it now? The higher your level, the more XP you will need. Fact.
Dungeon Core Abi Level 7: 9/50 XP until next level 2 Floors 14 Rooms 12 Tunnels 22 Monsters 34 Traps DP: 19/140
Tweedledum, Tweedledee and a flustered looking female return as I''m viewing my stats. Dee is trying his best to hold onto a slippery Red Slime whilst Dum and the unnamed female are both trying their best with green ones. Each one of the squat-legged trio look comical as hell trying to carry the dead-wobbly monster. I''m so much happier now that my Rogues have stopped dropping off ugly monsters. The Slimes brings no XP as neither of them are first-timers, but I still earn 15 DP from them. The next Rogue also seems to have had trouble with her tribute and can barely hold on to them. As she enters the fish slide free from her grasp and disappear in seconds. No wonder these guys took so long, they can barely carry what they''ve got without dropping it. I earn no XP and 3DP from the fish before sending the tired and weary-looking Rogues into the dungeon. Hopefully Ali''s food and a good sleep will raise their spirits. With just Light and Dropper yet to return, all the other Rogues are safely back in my dungeon waiting for dinner. Whilst we wait, I make my first purchase for the second floor. Now that the range has doubled, my tunnels span 100 foot in length and are almost 10 foot wide. There almost large, rectangular rooms. Usin my overview, I place the tunnel east of the stairs. Instead of adding a room at the end like usual, I place a second tunnel heading south. Using my will, I inform Barry that the intersection between these two tunnels will be the new location of his cave system. He can dump his loads in the tunnels outside and absorption will do them rest. I thought about letting him continue drillin'' away in my trap room, but it doesn''t feel right having him so close to the entrance. Not because I''m worried he''ll be seen, or that he might be killed. No, I''m more scared that someone''s going to steal my prize-winning, DP-making machine. After Barry has settled in at his new spot, I go check on Colin. The Mimic of cuteness. For some reason though, he''s not in the Core room where I left him. Where did he go? After a quick check, it turns out he''s in the previous Core room. Just after the Wolves'' Den, I find him sat in the corner just chest''in. Feeling a bit guilty, I realise that I may not have told Colin to come along when I moved my Core. I was rushing to get back to Ali after sorting out Veris'' Boss Room and the second floor. Which still needs a door. Don''t you worry though, Colin. I''ll get you something first cutie. I let the adorable Mimic know my intentions and he heads to the new Core Room. I raise a small, square section of the floor and place ten wooden chests around it, leaving the raised platform for Colin to sit on. He moves into position with great satisfaction and settles down to blends in with the other chests. The only notable difference afterwards is the drool leading to him.
A new feature has been unlocked: Bronze Treasure: 2DP
Upgrades are always appreciated, but I made those chests for Colin. It''s not like I have anything else to give him at the moment and after making purchases for the Rogues it only seems fair. As soon as I have the points, I''ll purchase the forest-room upgrade for the Wolves. I think I might move them closer to the boss room as well. They''re quite a strong force and I think it will be a better location for Trixie and her Wolves. They''re only where they are now because the first tier freaked me out enough that I sent them away. The wolves don''t need to eat do they, Me?
Abi, you have a tendency for asking the same question multiple times just in different ways. Regular dungeon monsters do not require food. Mana within the dungeon is what they feed off and before you ask, I do not know why your Rogues are incapable of this.
Oh. OK, thank you anyway. I only ask so much because I want to make sure it''s right. There''s a lot to remember, you know? As I was talking to Me, a surge of power rushed through every fibre of my Core. Changing views to my entrance, it appears that Light and Dropper have finally returned and have just deposited their tribute. It seem that one of the things I''ve been trying to ignore has finally happened. Only it''s sooner than I had anticipated. I didn''t know how I was going to cope with it once the time came, but all I can feel at the moment is shock. I''m amazed at the large, blue box displayed before me. I''m also a little curious as to how good my Rogues actually are in combat.
First Time Absorption Bonus: 173DP 173 XP New loot unlocked: Refined Steel Sword: 40DP Refined Steel Shield: 40DP Exquisite Decorative Steel Armour: 160DP Refined Steel Boots: 40DP Steel Ring: 16DP Garnet Jewel: 50DP Human Absorbption Bonus: 106DP 106XP Tallon The Defiler: Level 19 Warrior 10600XP Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 8: DP has been increased by 20 New features have been unlocked: Large Light Cluster: 6DP Large Fire Cluster: 6DP Pit: 40DP Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 9: DP has been increased by 20 New features have been unlocked: Large Wind Cluster: 6DP Large Water Cluster: 6DP Box of Worship: 20DP Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 10: DP has been increased by 20 New monsters have been unlocked: Weak Spider: 3DP Cave Bat: 5DP Black Slime: 20DP New features have been unlocked: All rooms and tunnels can now be customised with the Cave effect for no extra cost All rooms and tunnels can now be customised with the Cobweb effect for no extra cost All rooms and tunnels can now be customised with the Stone Brick effect for no extra cost Passive Skill Stockpile has reached Level 8: 1272 DP required for level 9 Passive Skill Regeneration has reached Level 3: DP rate has increased to 1.5 DP per hour A new Skill has been acquired: Manifestation
Holy Shit! Chapter 9 : A Startling Surprise An Introduction to Magic and Mana. There are eight elements available to the aspiring mage and they are taught in magic schools across Tironia. The basic elements require less mana to cast and have shorter chants. They are: Fire Wind Water Earth After these come the more advanced elements. These contain harder chants, require more mana and possess longer cast times. Because of this, they are much stronger than the basic elements: Light Darkness Time Space Most people are capable of mastering a single element in their lifetime, depending on their mana pool. People that are naturally attuned to mana have a larger pool and should be capable of more. Depending on your talent, and the amount of mana you possess, you could master more than one. Not many people can handle more than two elements and you will be known as a prodigy if you can. In the rarest of scenarios, there have been a handful of people who were capable of mastering more than three elements. Only three of these have actually been recorded throughout the entire history of Tironia though. For the aspiring mage, logic dictates that you should set your sights on one of the four basic elements to start with. Earning mastery over one and expanding your mana pool before attempting a second element. Magic schools generally take applicants between the ages of 8 and 16 and conduct a mana test upon entrance. Consult your local branch for more specific information regarding application criteria and fees. All schools are subject to a yearly review by the governing area''s local lord, or two separate reviews over two 6 month periods whichever has been decided upon by the lord in power, and the LMA. Local Magic Association. A pamphlet titled, An Introduction to Magic and Mana. Created by the Mages Association to be distributed to all major cities and towns across Tironia, 1934.
Where do I even begin? Stockpile? The Black Slime? My level? Or the fact that Dropper and Light manage to kill a Level 19 human Warrior? Overwhelmed by curiosity, I use Examine to view the status of my two Rogues. There''s a few discrepancies between their skills and level, but that''s probably due to the different monsters they brought back on their first outing. Overall, they''re both looking pretty good.
Rogue: Dropper Level 10 1/20XP until next level Skills: Assassinate: Level 1 Pierce: Level 1 Silent Feet: Level 3 Shadow Step: Level 1
Rogue: Light Level 9 8/20XP until next level Skills: Pierce: Level 2 Silent Feet: Level 2 Dodge: Level 1
They''ve made great progress in such a short amount of time. Like, serous progress. Dropper is the same level as me for the Cores sake. It seems unfair in a way, but I''ll let her off since I created them. I''ll have to have a look at what skills the other Rogues have later, especially Talia. I know that she earned new skills when she became the Tavern''s proprietress, but I never got around to checking them. I''ll definitely remember to do it later. Right now, I have a something important to find out. Willing the two Rogues into telling me how they managed to kill a swordsman, especially when his level was as high as theirs combined, they begin explaining how lady luck fell into their path as they were returning home empty-handed. Tallon the Defiler, which is just a horrible title by the way, was already covered in wounds when they happened upon him. In a dense section of the forest, about a mile west of my dungeon, the two Rogues came across a massacre. The woodland had been painted red and bodies littered the area. It looked as though everyone was dead, but the two checked the area just incase. Further from the bloodshed, they found the cause huddled over his victim. Doing as his title suggested. Other than heavy breathing and the muffled sobs of sorrow and shame, the forest was eerily quite. Caught up in his own sadistic pleasures, Talon was covered in burns and cuts. Too invested in his prey, he hadn''t even bothered to heal himself. It''s hard to understand what goes on in the minds of those who are clearly insane. Treading cautiously around bisected people, Light and Dropper snuck closer to the only-two people still alive. They went unnoticed thanks to their targets attention being obsessively focused on his victim. Once they were in position, Light leapt out of cover to draw the naked man''s attention. The Defiler, caught off-guard in the middle of euphoria, looked to be outraged. Given his level, he should have still put up a good fight against my Rogues. Even naked! Unfortunately for him, being caught with literal wood by Light''s sudden arrival was the worst situation he could have been in. All eyes forward as his tree sagged over, he failed to notice Dropper creeping up behind and Talon''s throat was slit ending their story. Brutal. Great coordination and teamwork from these two, but brutal nonetheless. I love it. Light carried the warrior home whilst Dropper brought back his gear. They left the distraught lady alone. I''m sure I heard something about wanting to put her out of her misery, but they already had their hands full and didn''t bother. I think I need to revisit that statement though. Accepting their story, I can''t help but be shocked at how extremely lucky they got. The high-levelled Warrior was injured and distracted by being a stain on sociey, but it won''t always be that way. Life''s not a picnic where unicorns pop over for tea and shit-out DP. I''ll need to have a serious discussion about who is and isn''t killable very soon, but right now I have a lot of points to spend. I send Light and Dropper off to Talia''s Tavern to relax. They did awesome and deserve a good rest. Getting easier every time, I will my own status up next. Status.
Dungeon Core Abi Level 10: 96/110 XP until next level 2 Floors 14 Rooms 14 Tunnels 22 Monster 34 Traps 300/200 DP Available
Hehehe. I''ve come a long way from one room and 20 DP. With the new and improved 80% upgrade from Stockpile, I can hold an extra 160DP. I should definitely be able to handle larger tributes now. Unless I''m already full, but then it will just go to levelling Stockpile. Which is even more beneficial than I originally pegged it to be. There''s still a bit of time before Ali''s meal will be ready and once everyone''s together, I''ve got a great surprise to show them. I can''t wait! I''ve got to make sure that Colin and Barry are there too. For now, though. I need more. Much, much more. After leveling up three times, I have a crazy desire to spend points. My first purchase is the Tavern''s Second Floor and the only unnecessary DP I''m going to part with. I''m calling it unnecessary because my Rogues already have somewhere to sleep, but I figure comfort will improve their performance if some of them sleep here. It probably won''t, plus 80DP is a lot to fork out on a feature. After rereading the description again, it specifically stated that the Tavern needs the second floor before I can purchase the building''s next upgrade. So there, it''s done now. I''ll get over it.
Tavern 2nd Floor completed: 8 XP Awarded. New features available: Average Bed: 5DP The Cracked Cauldron: 20DP Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.
The Cracked Cauldron? I know I''m glossing over the fact that a human died and it appears as though I haven''t given it a second thought, but to be honest the notification keeps playing through my mind. Not that he was a stellar example of humanity. I was expecting it to happen eventually seeing how I''m now a Dungeon Core, but everything seems to be moving really fast and I''m still unsure how I feel about certain matters. I mean, people die every day in dungeons. What difference does it make if that dungeon''s me? I know he didn''t exactly die inside my dungeon, but I did absorb him. It''s kinda the same thing. Plus, he was a Defiler. I know monsters don''t have the best of reputations, but I can personally guarantee you that none of my summons have been out defiling people. The Tavern sprouts a brand new floor and grows slightly in size. Every window is blacked out for privacy and the feature is actually starting to look good. Inside, two set of stairs lead up to the second floor beside the main entrance where guest rooms line the outer wall. Railing runs around the entire upper floor and has left the tavern on display below. I could upgrade the it again if I wanted to. I''m guessing the next level will have even better features, but I shouldn''t keep concentrating on the same building. Plus, I already said it was the only unnecessary purchase I was going to make. I decided a while ago to move Trixie and her pack, so that''s what I''m doing next. But first, I want to edit the room they''ll be going in. I said I''d make them a forest.
Error: Unable to change the dimensions of this room The diameters of the room will not fit between the two previously placed tunnels
Okay, so that didn''t work. Don''t make me a liar, System. I suppose I could use that free cave feature to make them a room. I should try create a forest for them as well, they don''t seem half as scary now that I''ve gotten used to them. I bet they would love the open space too. Not to mention that Trixie is a total babe. Adventurers won''t stand a chance, they''ll be paralysed by beauty and the power of attraction the moment they lay eyes on her. I feel a little ashamed that I can''t provide a suitable location for the wolves, like I have done for my Rogues. I let them know that the Wolves'' Den has temporarily moved and is in the tenth room just for now. I also tell them not to get comfortable as I''m going to make a floor just for them. For now, they''re to head to the Tavern with everyone else. I call Colin and Barry up as well and continue my purchases whilst they arrive at Talia''s. Ali''s looks to be almost ready with dinner and I use the last-few minutes to spend a little more DP before I unveil my surprise. I''m definitely becoming a boss at imposing my will. Moving to the ninth room, I browse my list to see what''s next. This time, I purchase the Box of Worship for the cheap-cheap price of 20DP and watch as a small-box forms into existence.
Box of Worship: A place for people to offer prayers to the many different Gods of Tironia Requires two Acolytes to function correctly A new Monster has been unlocked: Acolyte: 10DP New loot unlocked: Acolyte''s Robes: 2DP 2 XP Awarded
I''m glad I unlocked the summons to go with it. Otherwise it would be unusable and a waste of DP. Costing the same price as the Rogues, I summon the needed beings to operate the feature. Unlocking exactly what I need, I summon two Acolytes to operate the box. Aptly named, it is exactly what it said it was. A small, dirty-brown, box. It''s about as large as a cupboard and has a door on the front that doesn''t close properly. It said I needed two people to run the feature, but looks like it will only fit one and wouldn''t that be the person praying? Who the hell is going to want to pray in that thing? The Acolytes at least look the part. A male and female, both wearing simple-grey robes with string tying them shut, were what I got for 20DP. Feeling lucky, I name the male Zen and the female Ang. Zen looks like your typical monk. His clothes speak of a modest life and his eyes convey understanding. Ang is no different. I was going to call her Angela, but didn''t think it was very Acolyte-ish. She has dark-brown hair and is blessed with a bosom shaped by the Gods themselves. I''m sure if she were dressed in anything other than these robes she would be an eye turner. Because of the feature and the Acolytes, I''ll name this room the Prayer Room to make it unique. The Acolytes look just as human as my Rogues and also seem to be blessed with good lucks. Before they can get settled, I send the last minute additions off to Talia''s to see if Ali is ready with the food. Waiting to spring my surprise is killing me, I haven''t even used it once. How great is my determination!? I move passed the temporary location Wolves Den into the next room. Here, I place 30 Pitfall traps and leave them open. Now, the floor looks like a block of cheese and the monsters I''m about to summon can either fill them in or cover them up. Opening my list, I already know what I want and select 10 Baby Spiders.
A new Monster has been unlocked: Sticky Spider: 6DP New loot unlocked: Silk: 3DP
It said Baby Spiders, but they''re a lot bigger than the description lets on. Infact, they''re that big that they would reach my knees, if I still had them. I can even see the grey and black hair that covers each one of the eight-legged monsters clearly as 80 fear-inducing eyes stare right at me. An imaginary shiver runs through my non-existent body and if I was still human, I might have wet myself. As it turns out, my fear towards the Arachnids is not as strong as it was for the wolves. Feeling a little relieved, I summon a Sticky Spider because I''m brave like that. Once the summoning light has gone, a white spider with grey stripes remains. With long-bristly legs, it''s twice the size of the others and twice as scary. Black, beady eyes run down its face in teo rows of four and it''s mandibles look sharp enough to eat a person alive. It is most certainly a far cry from cute.
Optional Mini-Boss is now Unlocked: Set Sticky Spider as a Mini-Boss for the first floor Yes/No?
Me, how many Mini-Bosses am I allowed on a floor?
Any monster that has passed the first evolution can become a Mini-Boss on the first floor being the Dungeon''s weakest level. Most first floors, however, are not usually this big and do not need for more than one.
Fair enough. In that case, why not? Yes, please. Confirming my choice, I name the scary-looking-Sticky-Spider Webster and confirm his status as my second Mini-Boss. I also do the ten Baby Spiders at the same time, naming them all William because they look identical. Adding the web feature for no cost, it improves the aesthetics and defence. Any adventurers that happen to make it his far will get a nice fright upon arrival. I''ll name this room, ''The Wonderful Womb of Web''. That said, what am I actually going to do with the Rogues? I''m just kinda doing what I want and yet expect them to defend me if we''re invaded. Will they do that forever? There are too many questions in my new life of a Dungeon Core. Like, why are all the buildings I create so damaged and rundown? The poor descriptions don''t do them any favours either. I''ve already asked Me, but he doesn''t know. Plus, he gets grouchy when I ask questions he doesn''t know the answer to. He can tell me how dungeons were created, who created them and the reason behind said creation, but he can''t tell me what comes after the Vagabond because it depends on me? Whatever, if I want to build a Bandit village or a Rogue camp then that''s exactly what I''ll do. It should be fine. I''m lucky that dungeon monsters don''t attack each other. No matter what, they''re safe from friendly fire. Unlike humans. Its won''t be so lucky for any adventurers that stumble upon me out in the middle of nowhere though. My summons work as one without argument or complaint. As a former adventurer, I''m somewhat reluctant to let others enter my dungeon. Not because I''m worried about them dying. I''m not down with them killing my monsters. I''m growing attached to these guys. Not to mention they source my DP. No one would mind if a Defiler or two happened to go missing whilst inside one of my reputable establishments, right? It''s a tricky subject, but one that I''ve got to contemplate still. I don''t want to forsake my humanity and succumb to eating people, but I''ll do it if I''m forced to. Or if one of my cute monsters are killed. This is hard. Maybe my dungeon could be a fun dungeon? One where you don''t kill the monsters? Or is that me just being stupid again?
Potentially.
Potentially what?
Exactly.
Don''t do that to me, Me. It''s not funny when you do it.
Exactly.
Alright, point taken. It was stupid. Ignoring my own naivety, I add torches to the rooms and tunnels that are still without light. Other than the areas that are meant to be shrouded in darkness, my Dungeon now has sufficient light. When adventurers see how good looking the humans in my Dungeon are, they might keep the location a secret. Jealousy and greed. If I spruced this place up good, it could be the perfect spot for a secret rendezvous. Hell, they could even bring us tributes named gifts that I would absorb when they leave. That would be awesome. Free DP. Hmm. Now that I think about it, sounds like owning a brothel. Do I really want a place like that in my dungeon and could I do that to my summons? Then again, I might already own one. What if the Box of Worship upgrades into... Yeah, let''s stop that thought there. Hopefully that won''t happen, but there''s another problem with my idea. Now that I''ve placed my lights, people will see how handsome the men are. Again, jealousy and greed. Damn! I suppose it doesn''t really matter. It could go one way or the other. Getting out of my thoughts, I put my DP to use. Adding a new tunnel to the second floor, I place it on the opposite Barry''s on the other side of the room. Now that my tunnels have doubled I length, this distance adventurers have to travel has also increased. At the end of the tunnel, I add the smallest room I can create. It only ends up costing me 2DP too. The room is just as wide as the tunnel, making it not appear to be a room at all. It looks pretty good, I think. I''m going for a long corridor effect so that the path feels endless. It will take a while though as Im slowly running down my DP. With the next tunnel, I make it descend whilst slowly curving round at the same time. It takes two more curved tunnels before I manage to get below the small room I created. This endless tunnel system I''m making will spiral down as far as it can before I have to stop. Another camouflaged room comes next. The reason I''m placing these is because I need a certain number of tunnels and rooms to unlock the next floor. After that, I move my Core to the bottom and watch it reemerge in its temporary home. I wonder how long it will take to create an actual Core Room. One that doesn''t change location every few hours? Ten minutes worth of effort and I''m down to 75 DP. I''ve done a good bit of work and it''s the perfect time to stop. I see the excitement in the Tavern as Ali is handing out plates left, right and center. Talia seems happy with the riled-up atmosphere now that the Tavern has people inside. There is also a number of non-human patrons, spaced accordingly, eating from bowls. Underneath the surface, I suppose every single one of them is a monster. Just ike Me said. All the way down to that inconspicuous chest on the counter, covered in its own saliva. Barry and Trixie are outside since they''re both too big to fit inside. It''s not sad though, they''re still here at least. Although, Barry looks like he''s itching to do some digging. Playing in the dirt with his finger. He''s like a mana junkie. I''m sorry, Barry. I have a quick surprise to show everyone, then you can go back to what you do. Ok? Feeling my compassion flow through my will, the loveable Mythril-Golem bows before me. What a Rockstar. Don''t worry, Trix. I''ll make sure they bring you something out too. Even if you don''t need it. Feeling gratitude feeding back to me, I give them both a sneaky peek at my surprise. That way, Barry can go back to work if he wants too while I knock everyone''s socks off. Once I''m finished, I have to contain myself and calm down. I feel quite ecstatic, but neither of my monsters seem to understand the significance of what I just showed them. Barry leaves and I move my view to the balcony on the Tavern''s second floor feeling a little deflated. Inside, plates and bowls cover the tables and floors. The atmosphere is electric. Humans and monsters eating together like this is something you would have to see to believe. Colin is on the bar and has his tongue inside a pot of Ali''s food, happily slurping away. The only outliers are Zen and Ang, sitting together by the door they''re enjoying their meal in silence. Dropper is with some unnamed Rogues living true to her name. I don''t know if she''s already drunk, but she just spilled her entire drink and is now complaining. Talia is refills the empty mug quickly and moves over to clean up after Tweedledum and Tweedledee who are having an eating competion at the bar. The wolves take up alomst half the floor, howling affectionately between mouthfuls and adding to the merry atmosphere. Talia quickly leaves two bowls of water before responding to the Acolytes. The sound in the Tavern is the loudest it''s been in my dungeon. It looks like such a happy place and you could almost mistake it for a Guildhall, even with the wolves. Veris is sat on the balcony above, childishly swinging her feet. Sipping her broth in peace, she couldn''t look more content. Even if she can see that Light has fallen asleep on top of the table below us. Talia moves past the snoring Rogue and collects his glass. Talia''s everywhere. Either Light can''t hold his liquor or the fact theat he''s been awake for over 27 hours has finally taken its toll on him. Speaking of, Ali is also looking a little weary now shes finished and it looks like she could drop at any moment. After a hearty meal, consciousness stands no chance. Veris definitely chose the best spot in the house. The room below is full of happy faces. Happy faces that all share the same bond. Me. It''s now or never, Abi. I''m feeling awkward all of a sudden. Am I... Nervous? Seeing those smiles gives me the courage I need. Looking out next to Veris from on top the balcony, I imagine myself smiling. Using all the strength I can muster, to be as loud as possible, I activate my new skill. "Hey guys!" I burst into existence above the balcony as a tiny ball of light. Green like my Core and no bigger than the flame of the Weak Wooden Torchs hanging in my dungeon,im small and insignificant. However, my voice is insanely loud. It scares the crap out of Veris, who''s right beside me and she falls off the balcony in surprise. Dropping her food on Talia, who immediately becomes furious, she lands on the sleeping Rogue''s table and sends poor Light flying through the air. He knocks Colin and his pot of food off the bar, covering Dropper and her friends. The pot and Mimic don''t stop Light as the momentum caused from Veris carries him forward into Dum and Dee''s eating contest, hitting every bowl on the way. Falling off the bar after a clean strike, Light lands amongst the Wolves who jump away in futility. Almost everyone is now covered in the remains of someone''s meal after the five-second disaster comes to an end. As they look up at me, dissatisfaction written across their face. Talia is at boiling point and isn''t because the food was still hot. That didn''t go the way I thought it would. "Surprise." Chapter 10 : The Third Floor Dungeon Categorisation There are only two categories to declare in this form. Safe or Destruction. Section A; A dungeon is deemed to be safe, once it has a) been thoroughly examined by a Categorisation Expert and been confirmed to have no monsters over the threat of a four-man party and b) been deemed raidable by the local Lord. Any dungeon that is safe to enter will have guards posted out front on the orders of the local Lord. Their job is to take a non-negiotiable sum from anyone who enters. Any items or treasures found inside are property of the adventurer but will be bought for a nominal sum by either the guards posted outside or the closest administrative building in the nearest town or city. Section B; A dungeon that has been sentenced to destruction, which is more likely as destruction sentences have more factors than that of its regulated counterpart, will have a squad assembled and then assessed by the Lord and Categorisation Expert to see whether they have to either a) kill the monster and then destroy the core, or b) Bypass the creature if possible, destroy the core and then return to kill the weakened monster on the way out. Reasons for destruction include, but are not limited to; any dungeon found possessing a single monster that is stronger than a four-man raiding party, or capable of killing a level 80 warrior in one on one combat; a dungeon found creating or secreting any deadly toxins, or food and water sources, that are hazardous to life; any dungeon that has made a home with a volcano, or similar fire affiliated lands, as no one appreciates the birth of a Fire Dragon; any dungeon capable of producing a man-eating beast that is a master of disguise, known as a Mimic; any dungeon that is within 10 miles of a city, or major town, that has monsters with levels above that of the city''s own residents. There are many more cases for destruction but each Lord employs his own Categorisation Expert and after the report has been filed, ultimately, the residing Lord is the one tasked with the official decision of what will happen to the dungeon. Anyone who enters a dungeon that has not been categorised may find themselves in front of the local Lord, for the plunder of riches found upon his land. Lords are not known to take kindly to people plundering from dungeons which they have no knowledge or control over and especially the ones where they earn no revenue. An Official Document on Dungeon Categories by Awast Attime 1951.
Hehe. Zoom, zoom. Zoom, zoom. After the meal prepared by Ali had come to an abrupt end, the Rogues went to bed. Once they''re rested, I''ll sort them in to teams and have them patrol on a rotating schedule. Trixie and her pack went to the temporary location of the Wolves'' Den, whilst Zen and Ang opted to sleep outside the Box of Worship. I wonder why they didn''t sleep in a tent? Although, I''m not likely to rain on anyone so that''s just another silly thought. I know what can cheer me up. Zoom, zoom. Zoom, zoom I spend that time floating around my dungeon, hovering back and forth between the entrance and my Core room without a care in the world. I hadn''t realised it before I acquired the Manifestation skill, but being a Dungeon Core is a very 2D existence. It''s picturesque, but not in the way you expect and I''m just happy I can finally move around properly. Rolling images were how I viewed the world, unless I was in overview mode. It''s a very solitary state of existence to say the least. Not able to touch and feel. Not able to speak and laugh. And worst of all, not being able to move. It''s a good job I didnt get an itch. Time flew by as I reveled in joy thanks to my new skill. Manifestation let''s me enjoy the luxury of movement which I was severely missing before. There isn''t much more to do in my new form, but it''s still amazing. My Will-O-Whisp form is even able to be absorbed by the dungeon walls and floor before respawning anywhere I want. Realistically, I just enter my overview and restart manifestation after being absorbed. However, it doesn''t cost any DP and looks cool as hell so it''s a win in my book. Little victories. I was hoping that I might get a human shape, but that didn''t happen. At least I can talk to my monsters now rather than having to rely only on my will. Even though it carries my feelings and thoughts within, there''s nothing like being able to tell someone your thoughts. Four hours later, I have to stop playing with myself before I reach my limit. I don''t need these points going into Stockpile at the minute. Let''s see what we can do this time. I''m sure I''m almost Level 11.
Dungeon Core Abi Level 10: 106/110 XP until next level 2 Floors 16 Rooms 18 Tunnels 35 Monsters 64 Traps 325/200 DP Available
Willing my status up confirms my thoughts and shows how much spending money I have. Not that I expect my points to go far. It''s way too easy to blow through DP now that I have some pricey builds. Adding more variety to my Dungeon, I begin my purchases in the monster list. Cave Bats are what I decide to go with and place them in most rooms on the first floor. They form the surveillance team and at a total of 50DP, it isn''t too bad of a cost. Plus, I aquired the upgrade for another Mini-Boss. Hehe. How ingenious of me.
A new Monster has been unlocked: Blood Sucking Shadow Bat: 10DP These monsters hunt in complete darkness and work well in large groups Each Blood Sucking Shadow Bat boosts the stats of those around it by 5% When hidden in darkness all attributes are increased by 25% If exposed to light all attributes are decreased by 10%
I purchase ten of the blood suckers and place them just before Veris'' Room. This marks my first time purchase of multiple second-tier monsters, but wasn''t actually what I had planned. After reading the description about how they work together and boost each other too, I just went with it. I also unlocked my first third-tier monster.
A new Monster has been unlocked: Bat of Sorrow: 20DP A strange Bat that feels remorse for its victims this however does not stop it from choosing to take more victims For every other Bat of Sorrow present gain a 10% boost to all stats When shrouded in darkness all attributes are increased by 50% This bat suffers no negative effects from sunlight
The blood suckers cost me more than the Tavern''s second floor and I feel a little sore. Even though I have some imaginary thoughts about a Rogues'' Town where adventures don''t kill my monsters, you can''t put a price on safety. I have to confirm ten different notification before my new Mini-Bosses are complete. I''m not finished with them though as their room needs altering to strengthen them as much as possible. The wall torches are removed and Darkness Clusters are added to the ceiling instead. Wooden Doors are placed on both tunnels to prevent light from entering. Another idea I came up with was to add ten Weak Darkness Elementals to help boost the Bats strength, making the darkness even darker. The Elementals look just like I do with Manifestation active, only black instead of green. It''s surreal in a way. Almost like I''m looking at myself but not. They don''t add much in the way of defence, but definitely make the area darker which mean my Bats should get that boost.
A new monster has been unlocked: Darkness Elemental: 20DP Creates dark mana
See what I mean. There''s not much to go on with that description. Whatever. It''ll be fine. The Shady Tunnel will also help seclude this room from light and it doesn''t cost me anything to change its location. Which is extremely helpful since this turned out to be quite an expensive room. One that I can actually call complete unless I want to add anything in the future. This content has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere. I shall call this room, ''The Bat Cave''.
While I can now not fault the variety of monsters, nor the progression of your dungeon, I can at least say that your sense of naming could do with being a little more tactful.
Don''t talk to me about naming things. When The System gets her shit together, then so will I.
Fair point.
Anyway, The Bat Cave ended up costing 230DP in total. Which is ridiculous. I couldn''t even dream of dropping points like that before. Aww crap. I wanted to do more than just a single room. I haven''t even purchased a Slime yet. These points just don''t stretch far enough. Or maybe I got a little carried away in The Bat Cave? Never mind, I''ll make more points later and I''ve still got 107 left. I''ll put the rest into my second-floor and move my Core further from the entrance. Dreaming of a cute Slime room, I move to the lowest point of my Dungeon. After spending the rest of my DP, the never-ending tunnel system I''m creating is spiralling down well. Interspersed with room that look identical to the tunnels, my floor requirements are filling up slowly as we make our way down. Me, what else do I need to unlock the next floor?
Requirements for the next Floor: A Boss is required for the Second Floor
Oh. How many Rooms and Tunnels did I need this time?
Not as many as you placed.
Yeah, I got a bit carried away then. My bad. The good news is that I now only need one more room at the bottom of the second floor for the Boss to reside in. The bad news is that I have 7DP left after placing eighteen tunnels and five small rooms. But, it''s not like I have anywhere else to be and I don''t mind exploring my body whilst I wait. 4 hours pass by and morning''s first light shines through my entrance. Ang and Zen are already awake, praying outside the Box of Worship. Waiting to see if anyone wishes to join them. Sorry to break it to you guys, but I doubt you will get any believers around here. Not in the middle of nowhere. I''m not even sure if the other summons care for prayer. But then again I wasn''t even feeding them, so what do I know? I managed to keep myself occupied by zoomin'' around and using Examine. Also watching everyone sleep around left me feeling a little sour. I really want to sleep too, but I''m scared that I''ll see a repeat of Kal and Anya. I''m also worried about wasting points again, so I''m reluctant to even try it. Hmph. The Rogues are starting to stir and Talia is already awake at the Tavern, cleaning up after last night''s escapade. Ali is also up at the Camp Grounds. Floating over with minimal noise this time, I offer food for breakfast. All we have is Boar Meat and vegetables, but it''s food enough. Everyone seemed impressed with the meal last night and Ali even earned some cooking skills in the process. With Ali off to make breakfast at the Tavern, I proceed to spend some of points Barry has supplied. After all the DP I spent in the early hours of this morning, I didn''t even earn the XP required to reach Level 11. This time I will though. My first purchase should do it for me.
The Shop of Secrets: 40DP A place to bring wares for sale without record A place to acquire that which you cannot for an almost modest price Any third party transaction is subject to a 5% fee Requires 2 Rogues to operate successfully Awards: 4 XP
This could make merchants want to trade and do business with me. It is also a step in that potentially-misguided direction that I''m willing to take. I gain 4 XP from the building, which looks more like a wooden stall than a shop and a tiny one at that. A small selection of Dungeon loot, that which I''m able to create myself, are the sole wares on top of the counter. I''ll probably have to acquire better loot for the shop to live up to its description. I place it in the room after Rogues'' Corner to keep the themed features close together. Doing this allows me to reach my next level up. At the same time, I wonder how big of a room I''d get if I placed one the middle of the first floor. My current layout is a square and the entire middle section is empty.
Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 11: DP has been increased by 40 A new monster has been unlocked: Stone Golem: 75DP New features have been unlocked: Filing Hut: 80DP Rusty Steel Dagger: 4DP
That''s what I''m talking about. Double DP and a Golem. Can I get an Amen? I can even upgrade the Rogues'' daggers now. The cost of a dagger is much cheaper than the Defiler''s sword at 40 points. The dagger is a Rogues preferred weapon. Best level up ever. Then again, since the Stone Golem is so cheap to create, there''s a good chance it''s at least 6 evolutions behind a Mythril Golem of Barry''s calibre and nowhere near as strong. That means they might not be effective diggers and I don''t want to waste 75DP just to find out I''m correct. Not yet anyway.
Filing Hut: 80DP A place of storage for documents that the Rogues may need if they were ever to enquire about them in the first place Requires 2 Rogues to operate successfully Reward: 8 XP
Seriously? That description doesn''t even make sense. I swear The System''s doing this on purpose now to get at me. The new feature is nothing I have need for right now. Once again, it has a ridiculous name and description too. It can wait until such a time when I''m flush with points to be placed, the same goes the Stone Golem. So my level up wasn''t as great as I thought it was. Still, earning twice the amount of DP made it all worth it and I suppose the dagger upgrade was ok too. Before I staff employees for the Shop of Secrets, I continue my spending spree with another feature. This time it''s a gambling spot I unlocked a while ago.
Swindlers'' Den: 40DP With nothing to do and no one around the bandits that find themselves in employ here will literally bet on anything to cure their boredom 60% chance of winning any game played in this room Requires two Con Men to operate successfully Unlocks: Con Men Awards: 4 XP
With nothing to do and no one around? "Are you serious!?"
Why are you shouting and who are you shouting at?
Nevermind, Me. I''ll be fine. I''m pretty sure that''s not how she described it before? I''m sure there was something about clones and tributes. Only reason I''m not still shouting is because a new summon has been added to the description. I earn 4 XP m and summon the Rogues and Con Men needed to staff the establishments. Like the Rogues and Acolytes, the Con Men are also human. Maybe I''ll be able to summon a big variety of people one day? They could call me Dungeon Town Abi. Although their isn''t a lot of individuality right now. The Con Men, again like the Rogues and Acolytes, are dressed the same. A sky-blue shirt, khakis and open-toe sandals makes up their appearance. For whatever reason The System decides, both summons look to be packing more muscle than a seasoned town guard. I thought these were supposed to be Con Men, not bodybuilders? Long, golden locks reach their shoulders and they both have the same mesmerising, blue eyes. Chiseled chins and sparkly teeth make it hard to believe the Con Men are what my description says they are. It''s a good job I create good-looking people. I don''t know why, but the Con Men could pass for twins they''re that alike. Twins that get dressed by a mother who believes matching clothes are still cool and a father who puts them through rigorous training sessions all day every day. My Rogues on the other hand look fine. Dressed all in black and covered by their cowl, they emanate a different kind of beauty. I name the Con-Men Koniva and Jack. Everybody knows a shady guy called Jack. For the Rogues, I go with Lara and Tara since I can''t think of anything better than that on the spot. I still need to name some if the first Rogues u summoned. I assign the four new additions their respective roles in the Shop of Secrets and Swindlers Den before sending them off to Talia''s for breakfast with everyone else. Once they''ve left, I move to the end of the second floor''s unending corridor and create a new room for the boss. Unlike the small rooms I''ve been placing in the way, this one ends up massive. Twice the size of Veris''s room, five Large Dark Clusters shroud the room in darkness before I add the Bat of Sorrow for 20 DP. This marks my first purchase of a tier-three monster, even if it did cost the same as a tier-two Rogue. The System responds appropriately, but shoots me a notification with a twist.
Optional Choice: Make the Bat of Sorrow the Boss of the Second floor Due of the low number of monsters inhabiting this floor corfirming this decision will summon 10 Cave Bats as minions for the Bat of Sorrow at half the DP cost Yes/No?
That is amazing. It''s good to know that if I have a low number of monsters on a floor, the system will add more my options. Although, this could just be one of those lucky occurrences. Plus, it''d be foolish to turn down halfpriced monsters. I can''t forget that more bats means more boosts. The System didn''t specify a limit on how strong they could become. The Bat of Sorrow is bathed in blue as the system notification beside me awaits my decision. Temporarily, I find myself stunned by another delightfully-beautiful monster. Unlike the regular brown and black varients of her species, the Bat of Sorrrow is an amalgamation of my summons. Her lower half is that of a Bat whereas almost everything above is human. Almost. Her modesty is covered thanks to the length of her hair, which is a vibrant shade of purple and ends just above her waist. She has dainty arms and slender figure. If she didn''t have wings on her back, or clawed feet and hairy legs, she could easily be mistaken for a human. Her eyes are a lighter shade of purple and are the same colour as he membrane on her wings. This Bat, if I can even call her that, is making me slightly jealous. Does she look prettier than I did when I was still human? What''s that about? After recovering from the shock, I decide to name her Violet because of the colour that makes up the majority of her being. I comfirm the lingering notification and my new Boss Monster glows softly. The halfpriced Cave Bats appear nestled up on the ceiling and I swear Violet appears better looking than she did. Her fur even seems to be a little shorter. There weren''t any notifications about it though and I put it down to my imagination. Ignoring it as she takes flight to join the others. Before I can do anything else, I''m awarded with an unexpected notification.
A new monster has been unlocked: Vampire Bat: 20DP
A new evolutionary chain of Bats different to the ones I currently possess. After seeing Violet, I''m sure the new line will evolve into Vampires. Ridiculously, good-looking Vampires aswell. With the way everyone else is looking... I doubt I''m wrong. Not that I have any need for more Bats at the moment. With the notification received and remembered, I place the stairwell to the third floor at the back of Violet''s room. Leaving myself with 4DP, I will the third floor to be a forest with all my might and watch as it magically takes shape. The staircase finishes and the room expands as trees and grass start sprouting from the floor. The size of my rooms seemed to have doubled again because the forest being created in the depths of my Dungeon is massive. It''s bigger than anything I''ve created so far and dominates the entire landscape around me. Originating at the northwest wall, a stream traverses the entire room and ends in the southeast corner. I didn''t even have to pay for the water. Making a new floor is so cool. The stairwell from above descends directly to the center of the forest floor. It even has viewing platforms interspace so that people can take in the breathtaking sight of nature below. If I ever let anyone past Veris that is. This is the perfect place for Trixie and the wolves to enjoy themselves in.
Third Floor has been created: 5 XP Awarded New features have been unlocked: Strong Wall Torch: 4DP Wooden Wall: 10DP Passive Skill Regeneration has reached Level 4: DP has increased to a rate of 2.0 per hour
With all that finished and some new upgrades to... Aww crap, I did it again. Stupid Abi! I didn''t even summon a single Slime! How stupid can one Core be? Next time, definitely. Definitely, next time. Putting the cute factor aside before I end up feeling blue, I head to the Tavern using my super awesome Skill Manifestation. Even though I''m not using it to talk to anyone, it feels delightful to move around and the soothes my mind. Plus, Me said that my form will improve as I level up. That''s priority number one. Will I be able to turn into a human?
Before, I would have said and did say no. But now, I have no idea...
That sounds promising. ''Not so sure'' is much better than what you said before. Last time, you said I''d have to die to become human again. And even then you said it was only a potential chance.
While I do not know how your manifestation may evolve, I do know that you will never truly be human again. Not in this life anyway. Even if you manage to manifest into the shape or form you desire, you will still be Dungeon Core Abi.
You''re such a bummer sometimes, Me. Why can''t you be more inspirational or show an air of mystique once in a while? Would it frazzle your programming to say something like, ''No one knows what the future holds''? Or even, ''Give it your best, Abi. You can do it''!
I was just being honest.
Leaving the conversation there, I know that Me means well but I''m a Core with a schedule, I get zoomin''. With a miniscule amount DP left and the Rogues waking up, it''s time to announce the scouting parties. This should go well. Chapter 11 : Monsters Do Not Get Sick As I zoom through the Dungeon on my way to Talia''s, I make a quick stop when Veris beckons me over upon my arrival. "Hey, Boss. Watcha doing?" She shouts, waving her arm and beaming a bright smile as I approaches her. Manifested like a will-o-wisp, I''m now easily recognisable to anyone in my Dungeon. "I''m on my way to talk to the Rogues. I need to let them know who''s heading out first and what the parties will be." Using my amazing new voice, I also ask how Veris is doing. "Well... I''m OK. I''m just a bit bored. My room could use some features. It''s great and all, but it''s just me and nothing else. It''s empty," she responds glumly. My dungeon has quite a few different features now and I thought that my summons would use them when they wanted. Then again, she probably does. This is obviously about her own personal room and she''s right, it doesn''t look very boss-like. "Sorry, Veris. I don''t really have any boss-type furnishings yet. As soon as I get some, I''ll definitely spruce your room up though. I promise." I tell her to keep her spirits high and Veris throws me a beautiful smile, happy with my given answer. I really am growing fond of these guys and would like to be able to give them whatever they want. The problem is that DP doesn''t stretch as far as I''d like it too. That and my catalogue doesn''t have the biggest selection. "Thanks, Boss, I''ll be waiting." She then sits down and starts to meditate causing me more questions. Do monsters usually complain about their rooms, or is this just another one of those ''It''s because they''re unique'' moments?
Ha. That was worded rather well. What do you think?
Did you just laugh? I must be coming down with Dungeon Fever. I reckon it''s because they''re unique that I just happen to have hungry, needy women residing within my walls. ... What? I can say that. Happy that Veris is happy, I move on. In the Batcave I greet Violet as I pass through. The Wonderful Womb of Web is next with Webster and the Willies before I arrive at the Wolves Den. Upon arrival, I notice that Trixie is making some rather strange noises. The other wolves seem to be concerned about the Alpha and have all gathered around her. The poor wolf. Her fur normally looks divine but is matted and sweaty this morning. She tries to raise her body to greet me, but I use my new voice to stop her and ask how she is. Even though I''m able to communicate with others, Trixie can''t. The feelings I recieve through the Dungeon''s connection aren''t enough to tell me what''s wrong. Only that she doesn''t feel too well. There''s not much I can do with such little information. I tell her to drink lots and purcase some water with my remaining DP. I would send her down to the third floor but I don''t want to move her. I don''t want to leave her here either, but I still need to sort the Rogues out. It shouldn''t take that long and I''ll come right back as soon as I''m finished. Watching the poor creature flop back down to the ground as I leave pains me to my Core. I reassure her that I''ll be back and set off moving faster than before. Zoomin'' through a few empty rooms, I turn the corner and enter the prayer room. Which is really just another empty room, if not for the undersized Box of Worship. I greet the Acolytes before moving on to have a quick game of crabs with Jack. In the room after, a brief and underwhelming glance at Tara and Lara''s stall is the last stop before reaching the Tavern. I didn''t really stop for a game of crabs. Everyone''s at breakfast apart from the acolytes and I really want to get back to Trixie. I''m starting to enjoy being able to label my dungeon like that though.
It would have been quicker to drop Manifestation. As the Core, you can see everywhere at once.
Yeah, but I enjoy being able to move again. Its much better than the moving pictures that the Dungeon offers. And it''s not as like we earn DP by the second, is it? Not yet, anyway. Plus, I might not have noticed that Trixie was sick if I used the overview. I would probably have just zoomed in on the Tavern, potentially missing my poorly baby.
Dungeon Monsters do not get sick.
Well, she looked sick. The poor thing had no energy at all. Could it have been from the food last night?
Dungeon Monsters do not get sick, Abi. I have just told you.
You once told me that Rogues don''t need food and look where that got us. She looked poorly, Me. That''s all I''m saying. I''m going to go back and check on her once I''m done here.
Fine. Since the dungeon is progressing well, I suppose there is no problem with you doing as you please. You can perform upgrades and make purchases from anywhere after all.
That''s settled then. As I float through the Tavern doors, I see Rogues numbers have increased by two and they''ve also been joined by two Con Men. Everyone''s gathered together and are sat down eating a hearty breakfast prepared by Ali. The sight before me is quite shocking and I''m surprised I didn''t notice it earlier. Or at the least last night. A sea of beauty is all I can see as every single Rogue has their hoods down to eat. The beautiful faces warm my heart and also makes me worry about the scouting parties. I don''t need to eat and I don''t have the urge to either, not that I could if I wanted to, but I do feel a twinge of sadness at not being able to participate and enjoy the meal with my... As they eat, I inform them that they will be going out in teams of two when taking on missions. I leave them to decide between themselves who their partners will be. Anyone already set to a feature will be staying in the dungeon. So Talia, Tara and Lara along with the Acoltyes and Con Men are all exempt. Anyone not wishing to venture out can be given a feature to manage. The Watch House might have been constructed, but I didn''t assign any Rogues to it. Two females Rogues get that job the moment they state they don''t want to leave the Dungeon. They look strangely similar and both have blonde hair and eyes like miniature suns. Both Rogues are still unnamed so to correct that lazy attitude of mine, I name them Mira and Hana. Assigning them to the Watch House, they will be Dungeon''s defenders. They smile at me before they disappear from the Tavern, off to fulfil their role. The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation. Ali steps forward next. She also wishes to remain in the dungeon and would like to make food for the others. As long as my Rogues are content and I''ve got enough left for the plan, I don''t mind at all. I suppose Ali has only just started her culinary journey. No one else wants to stay which leaves me with three teams of two. That was the bare minimum I had planned for to be honest and I explain the details. Each team will allocated 8 hours outside the dungeon. That means they can''t travel more than 4 hours away from me without being late upon arriving back. Me assured me that each monster is able to keep time accurately. I''m having trouble trusting his information at the moment. With no one else to rely on though, what''s a Core to do? Using this method of scouting, I should be able to work out if I''m still in the same place I was when I died. Once one squad has returned, another team can leave which makes three runs a day. Until I summon some more Rogues that is. Actually, it would only cost me 40DP for two Vagabonds. That''s not a balance-breaking price for me now. Doing that will bring me closer to the next tier in the Rogue class. At the moment, the Vagabond is my strongest human summon. I only want to send human types out because they have more options for carrying objects, loot, or people, home. They also have the best chance of fooling anyone they might come across since they can talk. I''ll wait until I''ve got enough DP to purchase another few teams. Then they can join the scheduled patrols. Making it two teams out at one time, but overlapping. That way a team will be returning every four hours, increasing my DP even more. The teams consist of Light and Dropper, Tweedledum and Tweedledee, and the last two unnamed Rogues in my dungeon. It''s been a busy day and a half, don''t judge me. Both female, I name one Coral and the other Mystique. I also swear to name anything I summon on the spot to avoid this problem again. After everyone is named and knows what they''re doing, I send Dropper and Light out for the first shift. Dum and Dee will be going out second with Coral and Mystique last. That concludes my first brief strategy meeting as a Core. Easy. I leave Ali some fish this time, we still don''t have much variety until I can absorb more ingredients. I take in the beauty around me before heading back to my poorly wolf in a flash by dropping Manifestation. Restarting the skill beside her, Trixie doesn''t even attempt to move and looks to be in no better shape than before. If anything she looks a little worse. She could be in some serious pain. Especially if she is refraining from movement. I ask if she''s been drinking before realising she still can''t answer me. There''s no way she has learned telepathy in the twenty minutes that I''ve been gone. Feeling foolish, but caring none the less, I look at my Alpha who surprises me. Barely moving, she nods slowly to my question and I can''t help but smile at her human-like response. I spend the next three and a half hours reciting tales of Abi the Great, Abi the Mighty and sometimes Abi the Scaredy Cat. They''re just stories embellished a little from my time spent as an adventurer with my friend Anya. None of them feature Kal as I purposely left him out to avoid unpleasant memories. Trixie listens intently the whole time, showing no sign of improvement. Floating beside my adorable white wolf I continue regaling the stories of Abi the Incredibly Beautiful, whilst putting Barry''s points to use like a good Dungeon Core should. Still holding a torch for my human self. Not putting much effort into the upgrades, as it''s literally impossible to read upgrades and tell stories at the same time, I choose a cheap building that definitely needs doing.
Box of Worship has become Shed of Salvation: Requires four Acolytes or one Dungeon Disciples to function correctly A new monster has been unlocked: Dungeon Disciple: 20DP Reward: 4 XP
One Disciple is faster to deal with than two Acolytes and also needed for the feature so that''s another 20DP. Another male, almost identical to the Acolyte Zen, was left behind once the light of creation had vanished. Summoning him unlocked his attire for my loot collection and raised the number of bald dudes in my Dungeon to two. With the shiny part of his head facing my way as he bows, I got a pretty good look as my reflection. Not too shaby if don''t say so myself. He''s quite handsome for a priest, even in that musty, red robe. A small, gold chain hangs from his neck and the letter A is on display inside a circle made of knives. I don''t know what it means, but it looks cool. Some religious jewelry is just garbage. I name him Avos because that''s what I do now, I name people properly, and send him off to meet Zen and Ang. Hopefully they''ll be happy and maybe a little shocked that their box just upgraded into a shed without warning. Are all the male Disciples going to be bald and what''s up with the names of this building?
Optional Choice: Set Avos as a Mini-Boss for this Floor? Yes/No?
Yes, please. With that done, I spend more DP by adding wooden doors to the tunnels on my first floor. It doesn''t require much effort and I can still give Trixie my attention.
A new feature has been unlocked: Stone Door: 4DP
I place a Stone Door on Veris''s room, hoping that single feature might quell her needs temporarily. I don''t really expect it too, but it was just a thought after seeing her earlier. I feel guilty not being able to do anything for her, so the least I can do whilst spending points frivolously is consider her. When I confirm my purchase, I briefly pause my story to think about what Veris means to me. She''s my protector. My defender. Her image engraves itself on to both doors, in two very intimidating poses. Weapons drawn in both, she looks manficent. I finish up by summoning six Vagabonds, whilst regaling the tale of Ali the Desert Explorer. Six ladies come out looking like Veris. The only difference is they all have the same sandy-brown hair instead of the snow-white look my Boss features. Not making the same mistake as last time, I break in my story once more to quickly name the Vagabonds. It''s difficult to think of one name on the spot, nevermind six different ones. Eventually, they end up Alba, Nessa, Baluka, Rocky, Sandy and Senna. I instruct them to make groups and to start scouting in turn with the Rogues. Sandy and Senna will be heading out now that Light and Dropper have been out for almost half of their alloted time. Doing it that way means the Vagabonds patrols will overlap with the Rogues, that means a scouting party returns every four hours instead of eight. With my points running low, I continue my tale. Until my storytelling ends abruptly with Trixie beginning to shake. She lifts herself from the floor and looks to be choking. I''m worrying because there''s nothing I can do. Apparently, Dungeon Monsters don''t get sick! Me, what can I do? ... Me!?
Yes. I am here. I just... Dungeon Monsters do not get sick! It''s just not right, Abi. I don''t know what is happening.
It''s OK, Trixie, I''m here. Don''t worry, everything is going to be OK. You''re going to be OK. Trixie makes a sickly noise as a large purple puddle of last nights dinner is expelled. It''s got all the different vegetables and a generous amount meat aswell as a big ball of slime that looks like mucus. Trixie shakes herself and huffs before flopping to the the ground. She looks to be feeling much better after that and her tail is even waggling a bit, kicking up a storm and spraying dust on the other wolves beside her. Gorgeous. Thank the Gods she''s ok. Turning my attention back to the small pool of vomit, without really looking at it because it''s disgusting, I wonder why it hasn''t disappeared yet. Me, why haven''t I absorbed this yet?
The materials used in the meal were created by yourself so you can''t absorb them. You must dismantle the materials for them to be removed. The Slime can neither be dismantled or absorbed because it isn''t dead yet.
Slime? I give the puddle my full attention and immediately spot the pink ball of goo. What I originally assumed to be wolf mucus, is actually the wiggly intruder from yesterday. The cutest Pink Slime you''ll ever see is currently covered in a thick layer of undigested dinner. I''ll have to talk to Trixie about chewing her food in the future, but seeing as she''s healthy it''s fine for now. I can put my full attention into the Slime. Slime, Slime, Slime. Hehehe. "Hi, I''m Abi. Do you want live here?" The words leave my mouth before my brains even processed them. The monster, still covered in remains, spins around to look at me. Or that''s how it appeared. It''s hard to tell since it looks the same no matter what direction it''s facing. Wobbling like it has a purpose, the undigested remains get absorbed by the slime. I don''t know what to be more shocked about. That the slime absorbed Trixie''s vomit, or that I just asked a stupid question. The feeling of stupidity could be the motto of my dungeon. I generally embarrass myself every other hour or so. You''d think I''d be used to it by now. Watching the wonderfully-wobbly Pink Slime, I notice that she isn''t just wobbling anymore. She''s actually getting taller and slimer, gaining contours and limbs, creating hair and changing shades. Oh. My. Gods! It''s a transforming Slime! Still wobbling slight at the height of a regular person, the cute Pink Slime has entered the ranks of the beautiful. Her lower half still resembles slime, but the top half of her body looks just like a regular person. A naked person, I might add. "Only if I possess... a mouth which I may... speak through... I think?" Her voice is soft and subtle as she struggles to form a sentence. If I had a jaw, it would have hit the floor. I''m speechless. Chapter 12 : Another Shady Addition Death and me. I was told that writing things down is the easiest way to understand your own thoughts. My mind is filled with demons because of wha happened, so why w Stupid. It was stupid to go out Putting words to atrocities that should never have happened isn''t something I want to do, but must. It''s almost time for morning to break and I haven''t slept a beat in days. The events of that massacre haunt my every moment and all I see when my eyes close is death. I only joined that search party because I wanted to help find the missing adventurers. I wasn''t bothered that it might help my apprenticeship if a dungeon was involved, not that one was. The only thing we found was death. Near Mount Morte our camp was ambushed by a group of mercenaries. Sixty seconds was all took and every one I had been travelling with was dead. They didn''t go down without a fight though. A few of the attackers died and many were injured, but it wasn''t enough. Even though the numbers were on our side, it means nothing in the face of skill and level. One of the mercenaries possessed a terrifying skill. Using it maniacally carved through friend and foe alike until only the two of us remained. I was shaking. My legs were petrified. It felt like the entire world was pressing down on me as I was trapped inside a cocoon of fear. Blades of darkness tore the camp asunder and painted the forest red. Covered in the remains of the no-longer living, he strode towards me like I was his prize. My body collapsed of its own volition and if only my consciousness had went with it, I wouldn''t have to relive this nightmare. Paralysed and covered in blood, I hit the ground. Unable to move a single muscle as armor, followed by garments, were ripped from me, my fear threatened to choke the life out of me and I shamefully willed it to do so. The fear that I felt was stronger than anything imaginable and it completely overwhelmed me. Unable to even close my eyes, I had to endure shame and despair on a scale no should ever endure. I couldn''t focus on anything other than my own helplessness. All I wanted to do was run, but I had already been pinned to the floor. How could I put up a fight against a man who had just killed everyone with a few swings of his sword? The Catergoriser class is non-combat for everything not dungeon. My eyes stung as I tried to take in what was happening and my whole body shook with a force I barely registered. In my mind, I was already dead and I waited for my wish to be granted. Tears ran down my face as I was forced into an act that should be regarded warmly and with love. I was defiled. By a monster. In human skin. Just when I had decided to grant my own wish by biting off my tongue, I was offered salvation. The monster removed himself as another person made their presence known. Every fibre of my being wanted to beg the man for help, but how could he win against the mercenary? I was sure he would lose his life trying. I don''t know how I didn''t notice the woman that appeared behind the mercenary, but she slit his throat like butter and the silly cow covered me in a fresh batch of blood. I was hardly even aware of what was happening, lost in a spiral of despair until my saviours grouped up. I call them saviours, but I''m pretty sure good guys don''t usually argue over who has to carry the body. Or over what items to leave behind since they aren''t able to carry everything. Realising my life was no longer in peril, I watched the man complain as he lugged the dead-scum''s body over his shoulder and grabbed the sword. The woman had her hands full with his armour. Before leaving, they stopped and finally looked at me. It was about time. I''d been there longer they heybhad and they were just ignoring me after all. I mean I know they were talking about me whilst they watching me to see what I''d do. Why else would they be looking at me? After waiting for a few minutes, they decided to leave and disappeared in the forest. Leaving me alone in the crimson-coloured clearing without a shred of dignity. Bastards, right? I mean They could have said something to me at least! I was slightly worried that my saviours may had saved my life only to leave me to die alone in the forest. And I was right... Can you believe that? Why would they leave me that way after saving me? Why? I don''t understand it. Why was that scum''s body and possessions more important to them me? Or at least asking how I was? I tried to think about it then, but I couldn''t process anything. Even now, it still baffles me. Why would they do that? All alone in the forest of death, I cried my eyes out. I bawled like a baby and I could do it again now if I openly let the waterworks run. I didn''t really want to think about my saviours then because it meant owning my tragedy. I didn''t even want to relive that moment, never mind owning it. I still don''t, but this is important. I have to own it to get over it. After scrounging clothes and armor, I managed to et back to Orad before nightfall. My body was still heavy so every step had to be forced and it took a while. Seeing the city gates didn''t help me either. Shame, despair, sorow, self pity, they were just some of the negative emotions clouding my mind as I told Mayor Baldur everything. Recounting my ordeal was almost as bad as experiencing first hand and I haven''t left my room since. Hopefully, writing this down will help me overcome some of the thoughts that plague my mind. I don''t want to carry these feelings for the rest of my life. I can''t help but remember how carefree my saviours seemed to be and I find myself thinking of them almost as much as the ordeal itself. I just want to see them again. I want to know who they are. I want to say thank you. And I want to know why? Why did I get to return alive? I don''t know if I can face anyone after what happened. It was hard enough telling the Mayor of Orad what happened and he''s one of the nicest people I''ve ever met. I''ve completely ignored Catergoriser Elric since returning. I definitely can''t face him right now. I wondering if my Saviours are still out there? In the forest somewhere. Will I be able to find them if I go back? This apprenticeship has only just started and I''m already regretting it. If I ever want to be a Categorisation Expert, I''m going to have to overcome this somehow. There is nowhere I should be afraid to go! Diary of Katrina Katova. 29th sun of Aun. 1956
Holy Shit. I was not expecting the cute pink Slime to be able to turn into such a hot babe. I wonder if that''s my dungeon power? Come visit Abi and become beautiful just by being inside her.
Sometimes, Abi. You could refrain.
I''m sorry, Me. I was a little shocked. "How are you able to transform?" I can''t contain my curiosity. The human-shaped Slime has the attention of the room, although I think Trixie might refrain from eating her now. "I do not... Know. This is the first time... It has happened. I quite... LIke it." Her response is staggered as she examines her new body, feeling herself all over. How can I accept that as her answer? The fact that she''s having difficulty stringing together sentences makes me think somethings wrong with her. I really hope it''s a Slime thing and not because she''s spent the day in the Alpha''s stomach. "I''m sorry about Trixie and what happened before." Knowing that my words may turn this wonderful creature against me, guilt still drives me to apologise. "What is a... Trixie," she leans closer to me, "and what... Happened before? Was I... Trapped somewhere. She doesnt know what happened? How is that possible? Oh yeah. I forgot that Slimes are meant to be blind. "How were you avoid the traps in my dungeon if you couldn''t see?"
Slimes have an inherent abili...
Shshhshhshshhh. Let the cute Slime tell me. Stop hogging the spotlight. "Traps? Are they... Dangerous? Slime have the... Ability to detect danger in the... Surrounding area. It is a special characteristic of our species. Wow. What useful... Information. How fascinating." Maybe I got lucky that she was able to tell me. How did she know if she didn''t actually know? I''m confused. It''s a good job she''s beautiful because that brain isn''t going to take her very far. "Hey, erm... I don''t know your name, but what are your plans for the moment?" She tilts her head and puts her hands on her hips, which start sinking into her body before she pulls them back out. "Silly... You. I don''t have... A name. I''m... Just a Slime." As she caresses her partially-human body, I remember something Me mentioned the other day. I''m also extremely glad there''s no one else here to see the explicit show being performed for me and the Wolves How do I contract a monster, Me? If you spot this narrative on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation.
Oh. Now you need me?
Don''t be like that, Me. I''ve never seen a pink Slime before, never mind having the opportunity to talk to one. I just wanted to here it from her. Don''t feel sore about it. I''m sorry.
I do not feel sore. Fine. If you name the Slime your Mana will be infused with hers. That will contract her to the Dungeon and you will no longer earn DP from her presence.
Wait a minute. I was earning DP from her?
You earn DP from any being that enters you.
Why didn''t you tell me that before?
It hasn''t been relevant until now and you would probably have made a dirty joke about it.
Who? Me?
Quite.
Can''t fault his logic. Fair enough. It''s a valid point, I''ll give you that one. What about dead things then? Do I earn DP from them?
Really, Abi?
What? I''m curious now. I didn''t know that living beings generated DP inside me until a moment ago, so I thought may as well ask. I thought it was only when I absorbed things that I got points. And contracts can''t really be that easy to do, can they? Just give her name and she''s mine?
No, she is not yours. Either party can end the contract at any given time. It is a mutually beneficial arrangement. The Dungeon provides a steady stream of mana and a home to the contractor. In return, they generate Dungeon Points and are duty bound to defend you if you are attacked.
There''s the feeling of idiocy. I''m even starting to sound like a dictator with some of the stuff I come out with. "Would you like me to name you? It would mean you get to stay here in my dungeon?" Refocusing my attention on the world''s cutest invader, the question causes my Core to pulse nervously. Please say yes. Please say yes. Please say yes. "Does that mean... I''ll be able to stay... In this form?" She looks at herself favourably, "I really like it." "Are you joking? Of course you can. You can take whatever form you want. Aslong as you put some clothes on that is. I don''t need you distracting the others with that bodacious body." Tilting her head, the Lady-Slime seems to be happy at my offer. "I will do just that. What... Would you call me?" Hmm... "How about Peaches?"
Peach is more of a yellowy pink. Whereas the Slime is rather vibrant.
Yes, and you are You.
No, I am Me.
Hehe, it''s so easy. "I love it." Peaches squeals in delight as I tease my ever gullible assistant. It doesn''t matter what colour she is. Peaches just sounds right and she loves it so it''s set. Hehehe. They should call me, The Name Smith.
Don''t get too full of yourself. There is still much to do.
Yeah, I know. You''ve gotta admit it though, I''m getting better at coming up with names in the spot now. It''s nice to feel good for a change and not often I get the chance. I''ve not had the best run recently, so I''ve gotta take these opportunities whenever I can.
If I had eyes, I''d have rolled them.
Hey. That''s my line. A quick check on the Trixie shows the adorable Alpha engaged with the other wolves. She seems to have made a miraculous recovery since the contents of her stomach were expelled and has already lost interest in the Slime. Probably because she knows it''s inedible now. Now that Trixie is better, I tell her and the wolves about the forest I specifically created for them on the third floor. I hype it up to the max and hope they appreciate the gesture as much as Peaches does with her name. When I''m finished, gratitude flows through the Dungeon''s connection and they head to their new home. I shouldn''t have to move them again now. I already feel bad enough since this is the third time. "Come with me, Peaches. I''ll show you where you can stay." I need to hype this next part up too. Moving close to the pretty, Pink Slime, I teleport us both to the first floor Boss room. Now that Peaches is now contracted to my Dungeon, I can teleport her anywhere inside like my other monsters. I would like to have her in my Core Room with Colin, but I''m worried she might damage my core somehow by accident. Either that or my ever-lovable Mimic might pull a Trixie and eat her. Maybe in the future I can visit the idea. Upon arrival, Veris notices immediately and exits her meditation. Springing up rom the floorl, her ponytail flaps around as rushes over to greet us whilst shouting ecstatically. "I love my door, Boss! Thank you. Thank you." Veris seems to be really happy with the feature and I let out a sigh of relief. I immediately change the subject, however, as I still don''t have anything else to offer her. "Veris, this is Peaches. She''s going to be staying with you for a while until I unlock or upgrade a feature for her." I can''t afford to create a Slime room yet so she''s going to have to bunk with the Dungeon Boss for a while. Plus, it gives Veris someone to chat with and will occupy her time until I can obtain some more items for her. Maybe I''ll try my hand at creating something new. The chopping board came out fine and I can''t really go wrong until I hit confirm, right? "Peaches. This is Veris. She''s the Boss of my Dungeon. You will be staying with her for now. If any intruders enter this room, you''re to do as she says, OK?" "Yes. Veris... I love to meet you... I''m new, but I... will do my best." Peaches takes Veris'' hands in her own and smiles fondly at her new roommate the Vagabond. "Yeah... Sure? " Veris looks confused. as she listens to Peaches before turning to me. "Are you sure she''s OK, Boss?" "Yeah she''s fine, don''t worry about it. As you can see, she''s a Slime. Or is she half a Slime now? I don''t know. What I do know is that she''s never taken on human form before coming here. There for she''s still adjusting." I explain what happened between Trixie and Peaches whilst the Slime explores the corners of the Boss Room. "It''s very dark... Over here." She calls out, fading into the shadow of the corner. "You have the strangest taste in monsters, Boss." Veris laughs as she watches Peaches jump from one shadow to another. "Hey. Don''t say that sort to stuff while giggling to yourself. It sounds wrong. Anyway, I didn''t get to ask before, but what type of things would you like for your room?" She thinks carefully before answering and when she finally does, it''s almost like she''d compiled the list beforehand. "I want some flowers and a garden to plant them in. One that has a pond and lots of room for a Lobe Hound to run around. I want a house for my garden. One that has a really-big bedroom and a nice kitchen for Ali to cook in. I want a tea set to drink with for when the my friends visit. A gazebo to drink the tea beneath because friends will definitely visit. I want lots of stuffed animals for my bedroom. Unicorns, Direwolves, Alzams. Oh and I want a..." Her list went on and on and I spent the time spent waiting for my DP to refill listening to all the things Veris wants. To be honest, I doubt it will all fit without some sort of expansion in here. Peaches fell asleep at some point and if I could sleep myself, I might have followed suit. What does she think this is anyway? Dungeon Core heaven? The only other person who has asked for anything so far was Ali, even then her request was for something they needed to not die of starvation. Giving in, I tell her, "I''ll try my best, but I make no promises that everything will be exact. OK?" I make Veris aware that what she wants is not necessarily what she will get before leaving. "And make sure Peaches puts some clothes in when she wakes up, please." "I thought you might have told her to look like," was all I heard before disappearing. I didn''t want to stick around and hear the rest. Light and Dropper should be back soon so I head to the Watch House to see Mira and Hana whilst I wait. The two blondes are standing outside the feature due to the inside being a dump. It''s a complete ruin and far worse than the Rundown Rogue Bar. Rubble strewn around the grounds inside makes the feature look like it lost against a siege. Before anyone goes in there, it will need fixing up. As it stands, all my features are operational except for the Watch House. There''s a reason I placed it so close to the entrance. Even though myself and Me can tell when something enters the dungeon, it''s always good to be prepared. Yet this feature is anything but. With 4 hours worth of DP under my belt, I go ahead and purchase the upgrade. It costs me a whooping 80DP, but the majority of the feature gets repaired. All traces of yesteryear''s attack have vanished alongside the rubble and debris that was within. The inside walls have been patched up and the feature looks somewhat operational.
Watch House has been upgraded to Guard House The Rogues that are set to this feature will protect the dungeon until their dying breath with a fortitude shown by no other defenders across the land New features have been unlocked: Customisable Banners: 2DP Decorative Shields: 2DP Tea Set: 10DP Reward: 8 XP
No fucking way! She''s just having a laugh now, Me.
Who?
The Damn System! She thinks she can screw around with me by giving me features.
Ok, but you always unlock features. What''s the difference this time?
This time she gave me things I actually want!
Quite. I am still failing to see what the problem is?
I... She... Well damn. You''re right. Should I be grateful instead? Veris is the only needy monster I have so far and these items are obviously intended for her. I suppose I could show a little appreciation to The System for giving me what I want. But what about everything else she''s done to me though?
Such as?
... She turned me into a dungeon for one.
Quite, but you were already dead and it''s not as though she killed you herself. Don''t forget that that you are progressing relatively well as a dungeon too.
... What about the question marks, huh?
That is due to your special circumstances, but you are just nitpicking at this point. I understand being a dungeon is not the ideal scenario for you. The sooner you accept what you are, the higher your chances of survival will be.
Aww! Why does it always have to come back to death. Why can''t I just wail like I used to back in the good old days?
That''s because the good old days are less than 48 hours old. If Dropper and Light return with tributes while you still have DP, any excess will go to Stockpile.
Yeah, yeah. I know. Can''t I just et a moment to myself though? ... I''ll take that as a no then. I need all the points I can get right now and stockpile needs more than 1000DP before it levels up again. That''s a pretty ridiculous number of points that I can''t afford to waste at the moment. Fine. Huffing, I upgrade the Camp Ground since it''s in the next room. I wasn''t expecting much since my upgrades seem to take a while to achieve anything, but the feature changed way more than its cost implied. Fire pits remain scattered throughout the room, but all the tents have been removed. In their place are houses made from whatever The System seemed to have available. They line the walls that aren''t connected to tunnels and their mismatched appearance makes the place colourful. Each shack features two sleeping mats and nothing else, unless I include the makeshift door in my count.
Camp Ground has been upgraded to Shack City Crude homes that can''t bear much force nor so they prevent sound from escaping It seems far better than sleeping in a tent, however. Don''t you agree? New features have been unlocked: Cheap sleeping mat: 2DP All rooms can now be customised with Shack City for no extra cost Reward: 8 XP
Really? I ignore the fact that The System just asked me a direct question and focus on how awesome the upgrade was instead. Yes, Shack City looks like the world''s crappiest slum. Free housing in my Dungeon, however, is the shit. I don''t even know what to say. Moving on fast as possible, four Vagabonds come next. They have sandy-brown hair just like the others and again are the spitting image of Veris. It''s scary. Instead of adding them to the scout rotations, I confirm the Mini-Boss notifications and send them off to Veris with six Sleeping Mats and five Steel Daggers. I didn''t forget about Peaches, I just don''t think she should be handling sharp objects yet. I sent her a sleeping mat at least. The reason I shipped the Vagabonds off to Veris is because I don''t know what to do with them yet. I just wanted to push for the third evolution in the Rogue tree. Being a provider is tough, you know?
A new monster has been unlocked: Shadow Walker: 40DP Capable of teleporting through the shadows, this monster is not to be taken lightly Anyone who witnesses them firsthand will not be left to tell the tale
Not going to lie, I would be quite scared of a shadow monster myself. Especially inside a dungeon. Shadows are in abundance down here. More so if I remove a few Torches and Clusters. I can''t afford to summon one yet, but they''re unlocked so I''m happy with that. I wonder if they''ll all be female like the Vagabonds? That was weird, System. There''s still so much left to purchase too. I''m pretty sure I''m unlocking more features than I''m able to spend points on. I''d be screwed without Barry and the Rogues really. The brief spending spree left me a single point and nothing to do. 1 DP purchases are useless now. The thought of having ten thousand dungeon points one day crosses my mind. How nice would that be? It excites me to the Core, but then I realise my purchases will probably be just as high in value and my dream sours a little. Screw waiting here, I''m going to go find something cute to watch until the others get back. It shouldn''t be too long. Chapter 13 : The Law Dungeon Law Abi Outside the dungeon; Humans are fair game. They kill each other all the time, aswell as monsters and dungeons. They kill pretty much everything, so what difference does it make if we claim that XP for ourselves? None. Therefore, humans are fair game. There are, however, rules to follow: You are not allowed to enter towns, cities, or outposts, just to kill people. If they''re minding their own business, they''re probably not that bad. If they attack you, uncover your identity, or ascertain the Dungeon''s location, you are free to retaliate how you see fit. You are not to attempt a kill that can not be brought back to the dungeon by the members of the current team. You are not to attack any groups who have more members in their party than yours. If anyone manages to escape, it could lead to our location being discovered. Inside my dungeon; Monsters are not to harm any humans until they have passed the Shed of Salvation. The Rogues stationed at features before the Acoltyes have jobs to perform. Once they have passed the priests after being warned, then humans are fair game and death is really their only option. In fact, it''s encouraged as everyone needs the level ups. Anywhere you may find yourself, ever; If the monster, human, flower or whatever is in front of you looks remotely cute or pleasant to the eye, make sure you bring it back to the dungeon! If you can''t transport it with your current party, make the Dungeon Core aware when you return and request assistance. The most important rule; Never, under any circumstances, bring back a Goblin for absorption or you will find yourself going with it. There will be more to follow as and when the dungeon expands. Until then do your best to follow the instructions listed above. And make extra care not to forget the most important rule. Signed Abi the almost Merciful X
Dropper and Light return on time like Me said they would. It seems like they really do have some type of internal clock. The familiar sight of the duo makes me happy, but at the same time the Troll they''re dragging together does not. Why have they brought me another ugly, oversized monster? A notification regarding Trolls and a feature unlocking or something makes itself known, but I barely look at it before willing it away. What is it with these two? Wasn''t the Defiler strong enough? Did they really need to up their game after that level 19? That mad, I even begin scolding the hardworking Rogues. "What the hell is that? Is there going to be a line of entrails and blood leading all the way to my dungeon?" My critique on their work makes both Rogue look at the floor. "Er," Light begins before I think of another question. "And how long have you been dragging it? Did anyone see you?" "No and it is raining outside..." Dropper offers before I cut her off too. "Good, I don''t know what it is with you two, but it''s driving me mad. First, it was those high-class Goblins. Then you brought a human who clearly outleveled you. Now you''ve got a Troll! There''s no feasible way you killed this one easily and I''m not accepting a sob story this time. So, how the hell are you two finding these things!?" As much as I appreciate the boost the monster provides, I can''t help but question how high they set their standards. They''re obviously capable, even at level 10, but what dangers are they forcing themselves into and does each trip really have to be better than the last? If so what''s next, a Giant? I can''t help but feel annoyed and I''m not even sure why. Maybe the feelings I''m bottling up are spilling out or something but I just can''t keep myself calm. This time they both try to speak, but I get there first. Wanting to look anywhere but at me, their eyes drop low due to the negative feelings passed through my will as a green mist rises from the floor and covers my entire Dungeon. I''m making sure everyone stops to listen because I don''t want to do this twice. Supreme Dictator mode. My voice and will relay Dungeon rules to everyone present. They may have been made up on the spot, but I hope everyone will follow them to the best of their abilities. Let''s be honest though, I didn''t even know what I wanted my dungeon to be until recently. Or where I was going with it and have been following my own half-assed strategy. But. Right now. In this very moment. I have decided to establishing law. My own law. The law of Dungeon Core Abi and all monsters created or housed by me better do their damndest not to break them. Any monster found breaking my law deliberately will be dismantled. It doesn''t matter how cute they are, there will be no second chances. Well... Except for Colin maybe. Me, can I dismantle monsters?
Yes, but having more monsters is generally better for defence. I must say it''s about time you laid down some ground rules. I was beginning to think we would just keep doing random things forever.
It''s only been two days, hasn''t it?
It feels like an eternity, one that I cannot escape from.
Why are you being so dramatic, Me? I''m trying to impose my will here.
Nevermind me then.
Hehe. I love it when he says that, but I need to focus now. I''ll have a chat with him next time I get some me time. I''m pretty sure I''m due some soon. Finishing off my law I establish that if people are willing to be amicable towards us, then we will repay the same kindness. Anyone being a bit of a dick about it can just be eaten. I allow Dum and Dee to tag out of the dungeon before bringing my attention to the notifications that have waited patiently for me to finish.
Monsters have reached Max Level: Rogue: Light Level 20 Rogue: Dropper Level 20 First Time Absorption bonus: 290DP 290XP A new monster has been unlocked: Dungeon Troll: 100DP Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 12: DP has been increased by 40 New features have been unlocked: Well: 10DP The Pit: 40DP All rooms are now customisable with water for no extra DP cost
Shit! Now I feel terrible. I''m not even happy about the increase to my DP. Well, I am, but the Rogues still-sulking in front of me performed spectacularly and didn''t deserve my frustration. This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it. I vented on them the annoyance I have towards The System and it wasn''t fair. Not when they''ve reached level 20 in record pace. They were only level 1 a few days ago and now look at them. Dragging back trolls and shit like they''re nothing. I mean, it was dangerous how they brought the Troll back as a lot of things could have gone wrong. Fortunately, they didn''t. Or haven''t so far. How good are they! Before I start spending the points they''ve given me, I need to dish out some praise to the shiny Rogues. Me?
They are ready to be upgraded. When a monster reaches Max Level you can upgrade them for the cost of the next tier.
Shut the front door.
What?
Why didn''t you tell me that earlier? That''s crucial information for the Core to know, don''t you think? What else are you keeping from me, Me?
I don''t keep anything from you. I''m your helper, or assistant if you will. I will tell you anything that is within my knowledge and if you recall, I did say that you can upgrade monsters with points before.
Yeah, I know. I was just teasing you as well, don''t get so upset.
I was not upset.
Yeah, ok.
I wasn''t, Abi.
Alright.
Abi!
Hehe. I love you really, Me. I do. Back to the Rogues at hand. "Dropper, Light," upon hearing their names, both Rogues snap out of their stupor and stand to attention. "I''m sorry for stressing at you. You did a good job, well done." That said, I hit confirm on the screen beside me and the Rogues upgrade into Vagabonds. Their isn''t much of a change to Light''s appearance, other than his hood being down and a second dagger sitting across from the first. Dropper, on the other hand, looks a lot different. Her armour has changed to that of the Vagabonds and she even has a bow slung across her back. I''m not even going to try and work out her the upgrades work. That''s a problem for a Dungeon Core that cares about the inner workings of things. Fools. I''m only just realising this now, but the Rogues always have their hoods up and faces hidden. The only time I''ve seen them all unmasked was when I surprised everyone at Talia''s. I was quite shocked that Light''s hair was same colour as the sky on a sunny day. Anyway, it''s not bad deal upgrading Rogues. Not for me at least. There are two more beautiful faces hanging round the dungeon now for me to look at. I don''t know if I can get romantic feelings anymore, but if I was still human would definitely try my luck with Light. Hell, after a few Jack''s I''d probably try my luck with Dropper too. I''m going to have to rename Dropper at some point. She only ended up like that because I was in a strop over the whole Goblin thing. Poor girl. The name definitely doesn''t match that face. Her eyes are blue and she has blonde hair that reaches down to her waist. Light seems to be confused about something as they both take in their changes. He doesn''t seem pleased and seconds later an overcoat appears, form fitting itself to him as though it was meant to come with the upgrade. I really want to... But I''m still not going to ask. Stupid, good looking Dungeon. Without it though, there would be no Light or Dropper. No Barry dropping his loads in me every minute of every day. There would be no talk of the food served by Ali at Talia''s Tavern and no wolves running freely around on my third floor. There certainly wouldn''t be a gorgeous Alpha or a cute-yet-dozy Slime. No Acolytes, Con-Men or any other attractiveness in sight. Worst of all there wouldn''t be an adorable Mimic in my Core Room, drooling all over the place. Before a wailing session flairs up, I remind myself that I''m surrounded by all these guys and that we are basically family now. Even though it hasn''t been that long the thought of them not being here saddens me and only increases my fondness for them. Dropper bows after giving herself a good checking out, "Thank you, Master Abi." Oh, I didn''t like that. I may strut around and impose my will, but I don''t want them to think of me their slave owner or anything. Veris calls me Boss and I can just about handle that. "You''re welcome. You both deserved more praise than I could possibly offer. Now that your Vagabonds, you should be able to evolve again." I said that without even asking Me so I hope it''s right. I can''t see why it''d be wrong. "Yes, Master. Once we reach the required level we can evolve again." Light responds, full of pride. He seems especially pleased with his new coat. Checking the inside of it every few seconds, he''s acting like it keeps changing. He''s also sporting a mischievous smile, but as long as he follows the rules I laid out then I''m happy that he''s happy. "Would you like me to change your name, Dropper? I know that you were named when I was a bit angry and I apologise for that. If you want, you can change it to whatever you like?" She thinks it over and gives me an answer. "I have grown fond of the name you chose for me, Master. I will consider others, but am unlikely to do so. I wil let you know at a later time." it but after seeing how all the others relish their names, I do not have such feelings towards mine as of yet but it may still be too soon to say. May I have some more time to choose?" She explains before asking if she can hold off on the decision for a while. "Sure. You and Light have got 16 hours until you''re due to go back out. You should get a warm meal at Talia''s and enjoy a drink. Use the rooms in the Tavern to rest up if you want too, you deserve it. You''ve earned this time to yourselves. If you need anything just give me a shout, Me will hear you." Leaving them to their own devices, I put my focus into spending the points my two superstars brought home. Stats.
Dungeon Core Abi Level 12: 164/190 XP until next level 3 Floors 20 Rooms 31 Tunnels 92 Monsters 1 Contract Monster 64 Traps 272/280 DP Available
Who''s a big Lobe Hound? I am! Woof! My Status get better every time I look at it. I''m still behind myself if we''re going off my human level, but I''m making leaps and bounds as a Dungeon Core. Not as fast as Light and Dropper though. Those two are travelling at light speed with their ridiculous kills. Crap, I forgot to ask them about that Dungeon Troll. After they rest, I need to find out how and where they took it down. I''m curious to find out if they stumbled upon another Dungeon? I can do that later since they''re not going anywhere. No teams are due back for another four hours either so may aswell have a good browse through my purchases whilst Barry drops some more rocks. I wonder how his new cave is going? That''s just one more thing to check on my oversized to-do list and it isn''t a priority at the moment. Me, can I place more than one building in a room?
Yes. The room just needs to big enough to support both features at once. The features themselves must not be restricted, however. The Swindlers Den states that no other Rogue can be set to that room. That means no other feature requiring the staffing of Dungeon personnel can be placed there.
That''s good enough for me. I''ll purchase the Well for Shack City since it''s only 10DP and upgrade it straight away. There are more mouths to water now than a tier-one water feature could provide. I could customise the room with a stream, but it wouldn''t look right. It works fine for Trixie''s forest because of its size and surroundings, but it wouldn''t be the same here. People need something more civilised.
Well has become Deep Well: The well stores twice the amount water than before and refills at the start of each day Reward: 2 XP
I spent 30DP and earned 3 XP in total. 1XP for placing it and 2 more for the upgrade. It isn''t much, but I''m hoping the Rogues appreciate access to easy water. I was hoping for more than double capacity, but it is what it is. Thanks, System. Moving to the third floor, I''m going to make my Dungeon bigger. Adding more to it so that I can keep distancing my Core from the surface and unlocking perks on the way. Arriving by the staircase in the middle of Trixie''s forest, I place tunnels in cardinal directions on all four of the forest''s walls. On the other end of three of them, I add double-sized forest rooms which still only cost 20DP. On the last tunnel, a normal room finishes my design. How much more do I need to do here, Me?
One more tunnel and a Boss will fill the requirements.
I try to hide my last tunnel behind a large tree in the northern forest room. At the end, I add a Firepit Trap and some Poisonous Gas. A Large Dark Cluster is stationed just above it. It''s silly to think that if someone manages to get past all my monsters and reach this area that a single trap is going stop them. Laughing at my stupidity, I add another tunnel behind the traps and place a Weak Wooden Torch at the very end. If they''re looking at the light in the distance my reaps have a better chance of succeeding. Still laughing at silly my idea was, I place the Boss Room with the forest effect to the side of torch. Making sure it isn''t visible from a distance. Oh no. Who should I choose for this important position? Who could I possibly trust enough for such an important task that''s already lazing around this very floor as I speak? Hehe. Trixie is picked for the role, she was a Mini-Boss before after all. Although, it''s not like she has any combat experience yet. Unless eating Peaches counts? The same could also be said for a few of my monsters. Especially the more monstrous of the monsters. I''ll need to address that at some point. I don''t really want to send them out of the dungeon to fight though. Doing that will almost guarantee someone will turn up knocking. Nothing spectacular happened as I was lost in thought. There was a slight change to what normally happens as The System labelled Trixie a Floor Boss instead of a Boss Monster. I''m guessing that means she can Boss any rooms she wants on this floor. That''s cool, but I''d of liked another free feature at least. Why are you being shady, System? Nevermind. Getting over myself, I place the entrance to the next floor in the last room and decide to call it a day. There''s less than 50DP in the bank and it''s not enough to do anything substantial.
The Fourth Floor has been created: 5 XP Awarded A new monster has been unlocked: Darkite: 1DP New features have been unlocked: Fertile Soil: 2 DP (per square foot) Passive Skill Regeneration has reached Level 5: DP has increased to a rate of 2.5 per hour
As soon as I''m finished reading, the familiar rush of power that I''ve started associated with Light and Dropper''s return floods my Core. Only this time, it''s the two Vagabonds who are back early and certainly not empty-handed. Under each arm a total of four humans are deposited in my floor to be absorbed. They''re not your regular villagers either. There''s three Archers and a Mage. I understand that Vagabonds start with higher base stats than the Rogues, but this is just ridiculous. They were still level 1 when they left.
First Time Absorption Bonus: 300DP 300XP Multiple Absorption Bonus: 162DP New Loot unlocked: Miscellaneous Undergarments: 2DP Leather Gloves: 2DP Leather Boots: 4DP Well Crafted Steel Dagger: 16DP Well Crafted Short Bow: 20DP Robes Imbued with Light Mana: 40DP Leather Armour: 40DP Exquisite Staff of Healing: 160DP Multiple Human Absorption Bonus: 309DP 309XP Aelion Woe Level 17 Cleric 8500XP Lowell Kyo Level 17 Archer 8100XP Sasha Candler Level 16 Archer 7200XP Hiro The Hidden Level 16 Archer/Rogue 7100XP Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 13: DP has been increased by 40 New features have been unlocked: Stone Wall: 10DP Stone Door: 4DP Crappy Kitchen: 40DP Error: Already in possession of Feature Stone Door... Problem... Querying... Solution... A new feature has been unlocked: Heavy Stone Door: 8DP Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 14: DP has been increased by 40 New features have been unlocked: Roof for Rent: 40DP Forgotten Farm: 40DP Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 15: DP has been increased by 40 New Monsters have been unlocked: Lumin: 1DP Thief: 10DP Archer: 10DP New features have been unlocked: The Syndicate: 80DP Rogues can now be summoned with different weapons at a reduced cost Dungeon Insignia can now be customised and applied to features and monsters A second Exit/Entrance is now available to be placed for a variable amount of DP Passive Skill Regeneration has reached Level 6: DP has increased to a rate of 3.0 per hour A new Active Skill has been unlocked: Dungeon Mist Level 1
Well... Chapter 14 : Rogues Retreat Tusk clashes against blade and begins to fracture. Not wanting to be let the chance go to waste, Tweedledum pushes even harder against the Boar. Applying more force, the tusk shatters and he leans in to the attack. Carving a large gash through the side of the creature with his momentum. It''s not enough to finish the creature which squeels in pain. Furiously, it spins around and attempts to gorge it''s attacker with its other rusk. Turning fast, the Boar catches open air as the Rogue has disappeared. Caught off guard, Tweedledee appears from behind and bisects the creature''s rear hoof. His knife gets lodged in the second as he tried to continue the motion and the beast almost collapses on top of him. "You''re so bad sometimes." Tweedledum falls out from behind the trees laughing. With the threat immobilised he a taken the opportunity to have a sly dig at his partner. "It wasn''t that bad, I took off one of its feet, didn''t I? And I took it down. I didn''t see your attack do that." Trying his best to dislodge his dagger from the Boar''s bone, Dee gets his own dig in. Smiling briefly at Dum. "Maybe not, but did you see all the damage I did? Gwahahaha. I''m feeling pretty hardcore right now." He boasts, sticking out his chest and striking a macho pose. Dee puts more effort into the task to ignore his friend''s stupidity and finally manages to get the knife free, severing the other hoof and breaking the rusty blade at the same time. Missing two of its feet, the Boar isn''t going anywhere ever again after sustaining those types of injuries. Even if they weren''t to finish it off, the creature would still become food for the forest. "So, who gets to kill this one?" Dum chuckles at his partner who is still staring at the broken dagger in his hand. "You might as well have it. I''ll try and find something to carry the Boar with. I don''t really want to have to draw it all the way back." Dee pouts. "But if we have to, that''s your side. You made the mess," Dum laughs. "What? We should at least flip for it. It was a stealth attack, I couldn''t rightly appear in front of him and..." Dee''s words trail off when he hears something. The Boar looks at Tweedledum and huffs in satisfaction. Louder and louder with each passing second, the sound of thunder growing closer can only mean one thing. "Kill it now and let''s go. We don''t have time to take it with us anymore!" Dee shouts as a nervous Dum thrusts his blade and half his arm through the Boar''s eye socket, silencing the beast forever. Covered in brains, Tweedledum and his partner make a hasty get away. "Are we headed back?" "We have too. My weapon is broken," The sadness in Dee reply is evident. "Ok. But your telling the Boss what happened." Dum states. "What? Why me?" Not wanting to explain the circumstances that led to his knife breaking, he tries to worm his way out of it. "Because. You''re the one with the broken knife. Gwahahahaha." Dee grumbles begrudgingly but accepts his fate. Even if he is a worried about reporting this to his master. The first time they had returned the dungeon she was extremely disappointed with them. She wasn''t even happy with the high quality of Goblin they had returned with. Nevermind the Troll that had just been brought back, what''s she going to say about his broken his knife. With these thoughts, Tweedledee and Tweedledum set off home to report their adventure and accident, probably getting an earful from Abi in the process. This dungeon was strict. Not that they had ever belonged to any other dungeons before to know different, but they wanted to prove their loyalty and strength were beyond measure. The Adventures of Dum and Dee. Part One.
Whenever I feel like I''m getting used to the new life that has been thrust upon me, something new slaps me in the face to assure me otherwise. My sanity rests on a razor blade above an abyss, keeping me on my toes. Seriously, can''t a girl catch a break? I had almost caught up on the features still to placed in my dungeon, but that amount has just doubled in size. Well, not literally. It''s not that I''m ungrateful for the bountiful points I earn from my hard-working scouts, it''s just getting harder to remember everything. Being a Dungeon Core feels like living in the fast lane. Its new skill, after feature, after monster, after skill, after... You get where that was going, right?
Since you brought it to my attention, it has been noted that you are progressing more than 100 times faster than an average dungeon would.
Wow. I knew I was doing well, but that''s a lot faster than I thought. It''s as though I''m on the Cair Expressway, with no carts in the way to slow me down. Wind magic thrusts me forward and I hardly have time to glimpse the skills and features before they pass.
That''s not an actual calculation by the way, just an estimation. It''s based on the fact that most Dungeon Cores meditate for the majority of the first month while waiting for their DP to regenerate. Unlike your method. The first month is the most dangerous time period for new Cores. Even if a dungeon is harmless, some adventurers will destroy the Core to obtain its power.
Ufff. It''s a tough life for us Dungeon Cores. I''d say we best keep our eyes open, but we definitely have enough of those in the Dungeon now.
Quite.
I''m still shocked by how amazing the Vagabonds are, but I need to get a move on since they brought back a ton of DP. Even though I saw it not that ago, I bring upy status to see how far I am from the next level.
Dungeon Core Abi Level 15: 46/390 XP until next level 4 Floors 26 Rooms 37 Tunnels 92 Monsters 1 Contract Monster 65 Traps 720/400 DP Available
Quite far. My DP is at its limit and Stockpile managed to claim itself almost a hundred points from Sandy and Senna''s tribute. I wouldn''t even be able to retain all those points if I had been at 0 when they returned. Oh well. Only 1182 points left to go until Stockpile reaches level 9. I better get spending before Barry aids my skill rather than myself. I''ll have to question those two Vagabonds once I''m done aswell. I mean, how the hell did they manage to bring back a full party of adventurers? See what I mean? This Core can''t catch a break. Dispersing my Manifestation, I''m sure I''ve grown slightly bigger but don''t have the time to check right now. Swapping picture images for my overview, I bring up the first floor. There''s loads to do again now that I''ve levelled up multiple times. Instead of one of my new features, however, I start with the most promising. The first building I created has already undergone two upgrades and even looks respectable as it is now. The most advanced feature I own is going to cost quite the sum to upgrade again though. Nevertheless, upgrade it I shall.
Rogues'' Tavern has been upgraded to The Rogues'' Retreat: Shady Barkeeper Talia has been upgraded to Taskmaster Talia Taskmaster Talia is able to reward Monsters with extra XP upon completion of her missions A place for weary Rogues to rest their head Whilst on the same floor as the bar all Rogue type monsters have their attributes increased by 40% Task Master Talia: All attributes have been increased New Skills have been acquired A new Contract has been unlocked for Task Master Talia: Replenish Contracts: 20DP New features have been unlocked: Lightning Jacks: 8DP New Loot unlocked: Silver Rapier: 40DP Reward: 16 XP
Taskmaster Talia. That has such a nice ring to it. Contracts too? She''s the real deal now! I''ve unlocked my favourite drink, but I can''t take part and enjoy it. What a let down. I don''t get chance to complain as the Tavern''s size increases drastically. When it stops, two thirds of the room have been covered by the spectacular-looking feature. I almost couldn''t believe my metaphorical eyes as the building grew. It was so shocking, that it might not fit after another upgrade. Not that I''ll be purchasing that anytime soon. The next upgrade is more than 300DP! I know my points are looking quite good at the minute, but that''s a lot for one feature. Costs aside, the Retreat looks amazing as Light Clusters shine down in it from above. Gaining a little height, stairs lead the way to the establishment''s entrance beneath its new awning. No longer crooked, double doors lead inside where not a single speck of dust can be seen. Black and red banners line the walls and the letter A, surrounded by a ring of knives, is featured on them. Identical to the chain Dungeon Disciple Avos wears. Behind the banners, the walls look to have been painted. Even though I know that''s not the case, the decor inside is starting to look good. The stairs inside have been upgraded to oak and a golden banister spans the entire upper floor which now holds twice the amount of rooms than it did before. A two-person couch has been placed where I had my mishap with Veris and the rest of the gang. Ahh, good times. The Tavern wasn''t the only thing that changed. Talia is gifted a long, black leather cloak from The System with the letter A embroidered on the back and almost looks like she''s wearing one of the banners. I won''t say that to her though. She''s still annoyed from the first time I opened my mouth. The inside of the cloak is made of a soft, light blue material that matches her colour of her hair. Now held up in bun, it puts her new jewelry on show for all to see. A gold choker was what The System decided for some reason, but it makes Talia look legit and im not complaining. She also has the Silver Rapier I just unlocked in a scabbard at her side. The crude-looking Rusty Dagger sits on her other hip looking outdated. I can''t wait to give everyone better equipment, but I know now isn''t the time to do that. Even without a high-quality dagger, Talia looks the part of a Guild Master now. A damn good looking one too. What an upgrade! I''m super pleased that the Retreat is in tiptop condition. I mean, it''s about time. Talia was already beautiful but now the feature matches the proprietress. Although a quarter of my DP disappeared in the space of a confirmation, it was certainly worth it. I feel giddy and it''s hard to pull myself away, but I need move on. Next, I''ll fill the room between the Acolytes and the Shop of Secrets with a new feature. If you encounter this tale on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. I don''t want to be known as the Hoarding Dungeon. Me, what buildings are there to place?
Do you want me to bring up a list?
Nope. I just want you to tell me.
Why? It would be much simpler to just view the list...
I don''t want to see the list. Air a minute. Are you trying to avoid talking to me?
I am not. It''s just... Creating lists for the Dungeon Core is my job. It''s what I do.
Okay then, how about this. You can list them to me...
Avail...
...one by one.
Fine. There is the Processing Hut at 80DP.
Nope. I don''t need another useless hut just yet, thank you.
The Pit then for 40DP?
The Pit? I remember seeing that one, but I didn''t get chance to Examine it. What does it do? I mean, what use will I have for it?
It can be upgraded to The Sparring Grounds once purchased. Dungeon Monsters will be able to train there and improve their combat-related skills.
That''s the reason I asked you to tell me instead of choosing from the list, Me. It would have taken me longer to decide and, knowing my luck, probably wouldn''t have been happy afterwards.
Quite.
What you said sounds great though. Let''s do it.
The Pit: A place where monsters go to relieve stress Any Monster who fights in The Pit will be granted a 10% boost to all stats for 24 hours New Emblems have been unlocked A new feature has been unlocked: Adding blood to any room or tunnel lowers resistance to fear-based attacks by 20% Awarded: 4 XP
That wasn''t three bad, bu I''m not finished yet. A ring made of stones appears in the floor as the soil inside darkens. Before the feature has a chance to get any futther, I hit the upgrade button.
The Pit has been upgraded to The Sparring Grounds: A place where monsters go to relieve stress Sparring boosts skill levels by 20% Any Monster who fights in The Sparring Grounds will be granted a 20% boost to all stats for 24 hours New Emblems have been unlocked A feature has been upgraded: Adding blood to any room or tunnel lowers resistance to fear-based attacks by 40% Awarded: 8 XP
That''s the first piece of decor I''ve earned that lower resistance and it''s already been upgraded to 40%. I''m on a roll today. A circular platform of solid stone rises from the Dungeon floor, creating the arena for the Sparring Grounds. Weapon racks line the outside and pikes signify the feature''s boundary. Out of everything that was created, my attention is fixated on the weapon racks. There is quite a lot to choose from and there are even a few weapons that I''m not able to summon yet. How''s that possible?
The weapons come with the feature. It did cost 80DP after all.
Fair enough. What''s next then, Me? Should I do another building or a monster? What do you think?
You seem to be relying on me more than you usually do. Are you ok Abi?
Yeah, I''m fine. It''s you that I''m worried about.
Me? I am functioning perfectly fine.
Are you though, Me? Are you really?
There may have been a few mishaps since we started and some... Minor errors. Other than that, however, my performance would be judged as above average.
Who judges your performance? The System?
Yes. When your Core is destroyed the system will judge how well I aided you in helping the humans level up.
It always comes back to death, doesn''t it? That damn System, she''s going to get a piece of mind one of... Wait a minute. What was that last part? You never mentioned that before. Helping humans?
Quite. That is the secondary purpose of the dungeon. To aid the inhabitants of Tironia in becoming stronger to help in the war.
What war? There wasn''t a war when I was still alive.
The war between their Gods and the Demons.
Hmm... Abi the Ignorant. I like that one. She could pretend to have not seen any of that. No Gods. No Demons. No System. Abi the Ignorant has it good. Lucky Bitch. I''m jealous. Abi the Current, can''t stop thinking about what she read and it''s stressing her out. I''d really like to jump back into my ''I don''t care'' attitude right now, but it''s not working. Plus, it''s my own stupid fault. I should have upgraded blindly instead of trying to find out what''s going on with Me. I certainly didn''t expect our conversation to involve lazy Gods and that bitch System. I don''t know why, but she just grinds my Core. Even when she gives me what I want, it makes me frustrated. I''d like to forget about her if I could. Unfortunately, she always in the conversation one way or the other. What if the System''s running on outdated programming thanks of the Lazy God''s lack of care?
That... Is a possibility. It has been a few thousand years since The System was created so your guess has some merit. However, it was not the lack of care but instead a lack of progress. That caused the God to abandon her work and seek methods elsewhere.
In that case, you shouldn''t worry about The System either. Forget her. You''re your own System now. Well, you''re still mine, but you know what I mean. Dungeon Abi is where it''s at. Think about how lucky you got being partnered with me. I was lucky too, being with you and all. I could have ended up with a right grouch. That would suck. You, on the other hand, have been invaluable, Me, I honestly don''t know what I would do without you?
We both know exactly what you would be doing right now Abi.
Wailing.
Wailing.
Hehehe. I feel better now that Me seems a little more relaxed, so it''s time to press on. I''ll do another building and then we''ll see how many points we''re left. The Sparring Grounds cost quite a bit after all. Me, what''s the cheapest building I can purchase.
The Cracked Cauldron. It is a potion shop and costs 20DP.
That is cheap. I also remember seeing that one too, but it was another I jus didn''t get around to Examine. That''s another reason why Me''s indispensable. He looks over everything I have and knows what they do. Seriously, my list is that big I don''t even want to look at it anymore. With tributes like those last two patrols, I could even put a stop Barry''s digging if I wanted to. Not that I will, this Core likes to spend. Ignoring another stupid idea, I confirm my purchase and put it next to the Shop of Secrets. It makes sense to keep them together, right?
The Cracked Cauldron: Sells magical potions All potions come with a 20% chance to cause side effects to the user Requires one Rogue to operate successfully New Loot unlocked: Weak Health Potion: 10DP Weak Mana potion: 10DP Weak Stamina Potion: 10DP Reward: 2 XP
A small cottage builds itself beside the wooden stall that Tara and Lara run and is finished in seconds. Missing a few bricks, as most first-level features do, it''s the missing roof that''s bugging me. It also looks like someone has pulled a well up from the ground, smashed a hole in the front and then decided to make a business in it. So yeah. It''s about what I was expecting for a 20 point purchase and needs a Rogue to fill the vacant position. Should I try a Vagabond? Would that work? Opting for a Rogue -I do as instructed, because I''m good like that, and name her Lucinda. Assigning her to the Cracked Cauldron, Lucinda''s armour changes to robes and I''m reminded of when Talia went through her own transformation. That seems like forever ago when in reality it was only the other day. When constant events and no sleep become your world, your very existence, time loses its concept and everything blends into one gorgeous... Slime! "Hey, Peaches." I pop Manifestation on and beckon the cute, pink babe over. She''s watching Lucinda''s transformation very closely for some reason. Veris and the four Vagabonds I sent to her have also accompanied Peaches. Looking at Veris, and then the four Veris-wannabes behind her, is weird as hell. But I''ll let it slide because they all look good. They''re lucky I''m so understanding.
Quite.
And I wouldn''t even know where to begin on that subject. Things are already strange enough around here. Anyway, they may be beautiful, but Peaches is an absolute idol. I hope she stays with us forever. Tara and Lara are also present since I placed this feature next to theirs. Everyone watches as Lucinda''s transformation ends when Peaches shuffles over to me on her Slime half to ask me a question. Cute. "What happened to her body?" Huh? Her body? I was confused for a second there. Until I saw two large reasons why she thought Lucinda''s body had changed. And it wasn''t because she''s only just gained the joy of sight. "Veris!" I can''t help but raise my voice. "What''s up, Boss?" My Boss Monster, who for whatever reason likes to refer to me in the same way, skips over after congratulating Lucinda. "What did I say to do when Peaches wakes up?" I''m sure she remembers. It wasn''t even that long ago. "Hmm. I don''t remember?" You little liar. It''s written all across your face that you do. "Let me ask then. What is she missing?" Without missing a beat, two of the four Veris clones raise their hand. They lower them when glared at by Veris, however, who then continues to play dumb. "She''s missing clothes, Veris. Clothes! I don''t wanna see those big-ol'' things jingling around every few seconds. How is anyone supposed to consentrate when that''s happening?" "Oh, that. I remember now. I thought you were joking. Didn''t you say she looked cute?" Veris corners me with her wit. Sly fox. I create a quick robe for Peaches. Altering it slightly with DP, a pink dress is what she ends up with and I feel much better.
Rogue Lucinda has been upgraded to Potion Brewer Lucinda: All attributes have been increased New Skills have been acquired New Loot unlocked: Poison: 5DP Sleeping Potion: 5DP
Lucinda has darker skin than the others so far with bright red lips and dark black hairl. Gone is the Rogue, hidden away in her layers of stealth. Instead, goggles, overalls and a pair of dextrous yellow gloves, finish off the Potion Brewer''s apparel. With thick, black hair tied behind her and dark skin, that''s one more sexy lady to add to the roster. Damn, I was actually thinking of creating a roster. Her eyes are like Violet''s, extremely alluring, and I have to look away. I don''t miss the Dungeon insignia stitched onto her left chest pocket though. "Wow. She''s... Beautiful. Just... Like us." Peaches declares, loud enough for the entire dungeon to hear. Not missing her chance, Veris adds, "You know what the Boss is like. Only the finest." What is it with Veris?
I have no idea. Not unless she embodies what you were like as an adventurer?
I wasn''t perfect, but I wasn''t that crass either. I pick my moments carefully. Veris... Is something else. Lucinda bows, "Thank you, Master." I feel gratitude flowing from her, but her words were enough. "I hope you do well in your new position." I hope to encourage her to be anything-but like Veris. "So anyway, Boss. The reason we came over was because... I want to go out with the scouting parties. Now that I''ve got the girls, they can hold the fort down whilst I rack in some levels. I''ll stay and defend the Dungeon if that''s what you want, but I think I could protect the dungeon better if I was stronger. To do that I need levels, to get levels I''ve got to go kill shit. I just really want to get stronger!" Gods! Just bloody go. Maybe being in that room all day is getting to her? Or maybe this is just what she''s like? At this point though, I need her to go out more than she wants too. Still, I''m glad she''s my Boss Monster. Veris stands out amongst the Vagabonds since she''s the only one with snow-white hair. The rest all have sandy shades. With how she acts, I wouldn''t be surprised if she wanted to go out just to flaunt her beauty. Being in that room nobody''s likely to reach for a while, I can understand why she wants to go out. "Sure, why not." I try my best to sound as casual and gracious as possible without shouting, please. "Really? Yes! Thank you, Boss. You won''t regret it!" She attempts to embrace me by diving at my Manifestation, but passes straight through. Landing in the bosom of the Vagabond behind me. I thought she had me for a second there, although that could have been my imagination. Maybe if I level I a few more times it might become possible. Touch! I can''t wait. I tell Veris to choose two members to accompany her, but state that Peaches is off limits. She has to remain here since we have a contract. She doesn''t completely human yet either and her lower half is just Slime. Adventurers will attack her on sight. She looks like a unique monster. Hell, she is a unique monster! I could come up with a million reasons for why Peaches won''t be going with Veris. But the truth of the matter is she''s just too cute to let go. Veris doesn''t seem as bothered as I thought she would and only sops to point at two Vagabonds before skipping away. "I''ll be back soon, Boss. I''ll bring something good back too." She''s gone before I can respond and I''m only left worrying. Peaches listens in as the two remaining Vagabonds speak to Lucinda about potions whilst Tara and Lara look inside the Cauldron. I''m getting quite the population going now. I may as well keep spending. Next on my list are two Shadow Walkers. There were two reasons for this. The first was based on the performance of the Rogues and Vagabonds. They bring back some serious DP. The second reason is to unlock the next line in their class. Advancing in your class is natural for any Adventurer, but I''m able to summon them as tier 4 Rogues. The reason there''s two of them, isn''t what your thinking. Instead of being added to the scouting parties and sent out to farm DP, they will work independently from the rotations. They''ll have the freedom to come and go as they please and in return, I expect them to learn as much as they can about what''s happening outside the Dungeon. Making the purchase sends tingles up my Core. This light of creation, which I''m quite familiar with now, is a soft yellow instead of blue. I''m guessing it''s because of their tier? Either that or it''s because each one of them is worth the price of a building. Once the light has faded, my new additions are mixed gender and neither are wearing armour, but what look like rather-expensive clothes. The males has long, red hair and wears a dark mask that only covers the skin around his bright, amber eyes. He''s outfit, a rich white with golden stitching, is made from all silk. Gold cufflinks featuring the Dungeon insignia and a red sash finish his appearance, the only thing he''s missing is a cape. I don''t know wether to bow or ask why he looks so outrageously lavish. The woman, however, looks rather elegant. She has a low cut, black and white dress with ruffled sleeves and lace gloves stretching up her arms. Her light blue hair is braided back in french plaits and a Dungeon Insignia hairpin sits in place. Like her companion, a mask is hiding her face and looks to be made of crystals. Why do the Shadow Walkers look like they''re going a masquerade party? I''m more shocked at the lack of armour than anything else. The masks look quite cool, but how is she going to defend herself in that dress? And this guy... I don''t even want too. I can already see some thin going wrong here. "Master!" As though he had read my mind, the male drops to one knee and places a fist across his chest, "I am here to serve!" He declares boldly for everyone to hear, catching the attention of everyone who wasn''t already paying attention. The woman next to him throws an icy flare his way and I end up feeling sorry for him. This guy is going to have it hard because she already looks like she''s exhausted with him. What a handful this is going to be. I suppose I should name them then. Chapter 15 : Noir and Carrie On the way back, Dum and Dee debate what their Master will say after they managed to successfully cross the river running north of her mountain. Upon crossing the slow moving water they wait just before the treeline to dry off a bit before heading back, both still a little hesitant to know what Abi will say about Dee''s broken dagger. "Why did it have to break?" He poses the question to himself more than his partner. "They''re cheap and rusty, don''t worry about it, the Boss''ll understand. We''ve had ''em ever since she summoned us so they were bound to break at some point, especially when we''re trying to take down enemies like those boars." Dum tries to cheer up his partner, who''s looking a little dejected. "I just... it''s special you know." Dee says with sadness in his voice. "Don''t be daft, it''s just a dagger." "Give me yours then." Dee holds out his hand and Dum recoils faster than a Leipold. "No, it''s mine!" He exclaims whilst almost hugging his weapon. "See, you get what I mean now, right? It''s more.. sentimental, I was created with this weapon for it to be used to serve my master any way that it can and now..." He trails off leaving his bittersweet words hanging in the air. Before Dum can once more try to console his trusted partner the overgrowth behind them starts to rustle and both Rogues spring into action taking separate hidden positions to maximise their chance of a stealth attack. "Come out you idiots, I heard ya talking a moment ago. It''s me, Veris, I''m with the adorable Sweet A and the beautiful Sweet B." The new voice shouts out. Drawn out at the mention of the first-floor Boss monster, Dum and Dee reluctantly reveal themselves and kneel before Veris to appreciate her status in the dungeon. "Veris, how come you are not protecting the first floor? Is the master safe?" Eager to know about the place he calls home, Dee blurts out his thoughts to the three Vagabonds before him. "Yea, Boss is fine. She created some more voracious Vagabonds and now I can rotate with them, meaning I get to come out and kill things." She snickers joyfully to herself, then notices the broken blade in Dee''s hand." What happened there?" "He broke it inside a large Boar that we managed to kill." Dum happily belittles his partner, whilst boasting of their victory, to the monsters a tier above him. "Well done, I''m sure the Boss will be pleased with your efforts, here." She tosses Dee one of her old Rusty Daggers. "The boss has had an upgrade of sorts, so I won''t be needing that one anymore and I''m sure you can put it to good use." Dee''s face lights up at the prospect of not having to tell his master that his blade has broken anymore. Veris eyes him as he catches the blade before ending their conversation with, "Don''t disappoint me now." "Okay, come on you two sexy beasts, Mama''s got shit to kill," Veris comments to the two named Sweets beside her before disappearing back into the overgrowth. "I thought you said these blades were special, you''re happy as hell now you''ve got Veris''s," Dum questions his now jubilant partner who appears to be grinning ear to ear. "Shut up fool, I''ve got one of Boss''s daggers now and neither of us has to tell the master we couldn''t carry our loot or that my dagger broke. In fact, do you know what, to quote Veris, I also feel like killing ''shit'' " "Alright but we don''t have that long left, let''s stay close to the dungeon." Dum reminds his companion. "Okay. Hey, w-what do you think she meant by that last bit?" Dee asks with a touch of hesitation in his voice. "I don''t know, but do you intend to disappoint anyone?" Dum asks back smugly. "Don''t be ridiculous, I''m a natural killing machine, I am! I''m definitely gonna kill more than you in..." Dee boldly declares all hints of fear or hesitation gone at the slight mockery from his friend, before asking "..how long''s left again?" Dum lets out a hearty laugh before reminding his partner of their deadline and with that, they head into the woods that surround Mount Morte, the home of Dungeon Core Abi. The Adventures of Dum and Dee: Part 2
Shadow Walkers. If I was still human, would I have eventually reached their stage? Would I have dressed similar to them? It''s doubtful. Armour is what it is for a reason. Noir looks like he''s some type of foreign royalty, unapproachable to those not in his social circle. Whereas Carrie isn''t that much better with that cold and distant vibe she''s got going. In more ways than one, she fits the bill for an evil sorceress title. Whether it''s regal or ruthless, both of them look phenomenal and you can''t fault the added beauty created by yours truly. "Master. I beg of you to command me!" Noir''s attitude, however, doesn''t do his appearance justice. He just can''t seem to control it and catches himself another side-eye from Carrie. No longer saluting with his fist he is clutching at the extremely-expensive shirt that he''s wearing in anticipation. "Woah. They''re... Beautiful. Just... Like me?" Peaches, who has just watched everything with the other ladies, has her jaw open further than any humans would ever stretch. Her eyes are also bulging a bit and the Vagabonds have to rein her in. I wish I could gawp like that. I just shine. At least she said me instead of us that time. She didn''t sound too confident at the end, but it shows growth on her part. Such a cutie Slime. It wouldn''t even bother me if she couldn''t talk. That''s how cute she is. Adorably pink and a brand new kind of stupid, half Slime but 100% gorgeous, I love you, Peaches. "MASTER!" "YES, Noir. I heard you the first dozen times. Gods. What was I thinking? I mean... I was just thinking." I bring it back by the skin of my teeth and move straight on before any can otherwise. I definitely wasn''t going to tell them about wanting to open my mouth like Peaches, was I? "Where are your weapons?" That makes it appear as though I was actually in thought. Neither one of them seem to have a weapon on them. Unless they''re concealing them, they must both be trained in martial arts or something. Their actions answer my question without need for words. Noir and Carrie reach out into pocket dimensions and retrieve magnificent weapons that complement their outfits. If Peaches'' mouth opens any further, she''ll be earing some dungeon. Noir has a spear, which surprises me. Since the Shadow Walkers are part of the Rogue Line, I was expecting a stealthier weapon. He throws out some mock attacks and go through the motions well, assuring me of his skill. It still leaves me wondering why? though. Carrie is much better. She has the nicest sword Ive ever seen in her hand. It has a golden crossguard with small red gems embedded, which I''m sure are mana stones. A double-edged sword is dangerous to those who haven''t been trained correctly. Like Noir, however, Carrie seems to be proficient in the art of death. Why didn''t I get a notification about being able to create their weapons? I can summon the one that Talia has.
Those weapons are unique to the individuals.
That''s some bull right there. If I could give every summon a weapon like them it would be amazing.
Yes, but that does not mean they would know how to wield them. These weapons were created during the summoning process for no extra cost to suit the user. That itself is rather amazing, don''t you agree?
Yeah. I can''t fault you there, Me. You know, sometimes you give good advice.
Only sometimes?
Well... You''re not always Mr Information, you know? At times you can be a bit sarcastic or even a little dramatic, like earlier. You can tell jokes and you can get grouchy.
So? What''s your point?
Do you want to know? Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website.
Yes.
Really?
Yes.
Are you sure?
Abi! Yes, I want to know. Tell me, please.
That''s my point, Me. You want to know. Is that even right? Do you understand what I''m saying?
Not in the slightest.
Ahhh, well it''s... "Master. Does my weapon please you. Isn''t my pole girthy" Noir interrupts me by flaunting his skill and spewing some filth. It causes a shock to my Core and my Manifestation flickers. "Don''t shout out things like that you, pervert!" I yell back harshly, silencing the Shadow Prince as he stops his exhibition and drops to his knee. Carrie snickers at him and shakes her head. Is that just her thing? Prince Loudmouth got all the words and she got the looks? We''ll revisit our conversation at a later date, Me.
It makes no difference to me.
Hehe. Stop it. I have to deal with these two. I swear, you do it on purpose sometimes. "Ahem... Okay, right.That was a good display of skill, thank you." Noir''s mood perks up and he opens his mouth. "However, I make the dirty jokes in this Dungeon. I don''t want to hear about your weapon. Do you hear me?" That recieved another snicker from Carrie. Noir closes his mouth but beams in pride over what I said about his skill. "Noir?" "Yes, Master. I will not talk about the weapon''s shaft." He put a fist to his chest and salutes me as I flicker once more. I swear my core will turn red at rate. "What did I just say?" Is he like Veris? Did he really listen, or is he doing it on purpose? "Not to talk about my... Oh. I am sorry, Master. I didn''t think about what I was saying. When I try to describe it, only certain words do it magnificence justice. It''s extremely long and penetrates with ease. The shaft is perfect to grip and on the end where the... " "NOIR!!! Why the hell are you still describing it. I swear to the Gods that I''ll dismantle the next person that doesn''t call that weapon a spear. And if you say shafts one more time..." I leave the threat hanging since Noir riled me up. I think that''s the first time I''ve gotten really angry since becoming a dungeon. I''ve had a few temper tantrums and a couple of wailing sessions, I even had some crass words for the system. That was actual anger at the embarrassment starting to build up. I felt it. My monsters felt it. I can sense through the bond I share with Me, that even he felt it. I drop my Manifestation after shouting at Noir and see that every one in the dungeon is on their knees. Woah. It wasn''t intentional. Don''t hate me. Ahem... Oh, right. Turning Manifestation back on, I reappear before Noir. Carrie has also taken a knee and lost her Ice Queen status. For someone so domineering, why is she scared of little old me? "Your job is learn whatever you can from whoever you come across. Whatever they want to talk about, you listen. We need to know as much as possible for the future. Also, level up as much as you can and use that storage of yours to keep your kills in. I can absorb it all when you get back. Got it?" "Yes, Master." They reply in unison and then drop into the shadows beneath them. Oh my word. That was one of the coolest things I''ve ever seen. "Woah. That was... amazing!" That was almost a proper sentence, Peaches. I''m so proud of you. And your also Gods damn right it was. "What do you think I should do next, Peaches?" The Slime tilts her head as though she''s confused. Stupid Abi. My question was extremely vague, it''s understandable she doesn''t know what I mean. "What do... you mean?" Point taken. Stupid Abi. "Shall I create another monster or a building. Or should I work on the fourth floor?" I lay out my option before adding a forth. "Or... Would you like your own room with more Slimes?" "My... Own room?" She thinks it over and I can''t help but be proud of how much she sounds like a proper person now. Aslong as she keeps her sentences short, that is. "A room full of different Slimes. You can visit it whenever you want or not at all if that''s what you choose. Wouldn''t that be cool?" I think it sounds awesome. "Cold?" Peaches obviously thinks otherwise and suddenly I''m really glad there''s a restriction on contracted monsters being Floor Bosses. It''s a good job she''s cute, if it isn''t related to Slimes she''s about as clever as Noir''s muscles. "Don''t worry, Peaches. Forget I even said anything. Why don''t you and..." I''ve just realised that I didn''t name the four Vagabonds I sent to Veris. Again. Stupid, stupid, Dungeon Core. "That''s Sweet C and that''s... Sweet D''s." Peaches is quick to point out that she knows their names. Although... "I didn''t name them that and why is it D''s? Shouldn''t it be D like the rest?" Curiosity get the better of me. "Veris named... them. Sweet A and Sweet B... Went with her. C and... D''s are there." She points before going on, "She also said... They''re definitely D''s." Of course she did.
She is a bit... Strange. I regret not taking the matter more seriously.
That couldn''t be truer. She''s definitely... Eccentric? Whatever. I can certainly put that till later. How''s Barry getting along on the second floor?
I am unable to see it all through the dungeon and the overview only shows his first tunnel. His previous cave system on the first floor, however, has started to close.
What do you mean? How?
I''m can''t imagine the cave system is closing, but the walls of your Dungeon are slowly healing themselves. If you applied a little DP you can keep it open for longer.
That''s good to know. I''ll leave it there for now and use it to trap prospective powerhouses in the future. It''s was good having Barry dig that tunnel. I knew it would come in handy. I''m glad he''s not up there anymore too. He was way too close to the entrance for a mythril Golem. I''ll have to send him deeper into the Dungeon soon. Then we''ll have Trap Tunnel 2. If I move him every now and then, he won''t get trapped by accident. Last thing I want is to lose Barry. Just because I''m a bit flush, I purchase ten Iron chests for Colin and place them in my Core Room with his others. That startles him from playing chest and he skitters around the room in glee before drooling over the new additions. Unlocking the next upgrade, I release Manifestation and enter my overview. Which sucks because I''m no longer able to zoom around, but is by far the easiest way to place features in the Dungeon. Getting to work, I''m done in less than five minutes. The fourth floor is basically a copy of the second. A never-ending corridor spirals down into the earth and is interspersed with camoflagued rooms to fill the floor requirements. The difference between this here and the second floor is that the web feature has been attached to everything. The entire area is Spider paradise. I summoned nine Sticky Spiders to wander the never-ending corridor, unlocking their evolution, and set her as the Fourth Floor Boss. Yes. Her.
A new Monster has been unlocked: Reaping Spider: 12DP New loot unlocked: Luxurious Silk: 6DP
Summoning the Reaping Spider, I was a little disappointed to see the usual summoning light. I was hoping for a different colour since it was a third tier monster, but The System said no. Even though she''s a Dungeon summon, I can''t help the shiver that runs through my Core when she smiles at me. I don''t think I''ve ever seen a monster this scary. A spider, for all purposes, she is. Even if her front two les are scythes. It''s the human-shaped upper half sticking off its head like a bad mushroom infection that I can''t get my mind around. Coated in the same hair as the main body, the only visible feature on the human element of my new Boss is her pearly-white fangs and her large chest. I''m happy to receive the same optional notification as last time, although it''s hard to focus on it with the Reaping Spider watching me. Out of nowhere, a voice that matches the mouth sinisterly declares me it''s, "Master" and also scares me to death. If I was still human I would have died there and then. No ifs or buts. That was some creepy shit.
Optional Choice: Make the Reaping Spider the Boss of the Fourth Floor Due of the low number of monsters on this floor accepting this decision will summon 10 Baby Spiders as minions for the Reaping Spider at half the original cost Yes/No?
I hit confirm and Bam that''s 10 willies for Sam. That''s what I''ve decided to call the ridiculously-scary monster that now guards my fourth floor, Samantula the Mega Tatantula, but just Sam for short. The 9 Sticky Spiders that I summoned before Sam, plus the ten half-price Willies make the Spider count on this floor twenty. Spiders are ridiculously cheap! Moving on, the stairwell goes in the same place as the rest and the fifth floor is unlocked. This time I''m going with the same type of room as the Wolves Den, but without the forest. I''m going to create a large pitch-black room so that if anyone ever reaches here, which is unlikely, they won''t be able to see anything or anyone. This will slow any attackers down as they won''t be able to spot any of the tunnels across the span of the room.
Fifth Floor has been created: 5 XP Awarded New features have been unlocked: Seeds: 1DP Rooms can now be placed adjacent to each other with wall partitions removed to create even larger spaces Passive Skill Regeneration has reached Level 7: DP has increased to a rate of 3.5 per hour
That feature might end being useful for my first floor. Seeds on the other hand? I unlocked Fertile Soil before too. Is The System expecting me to become a farmer or something? It''s bad enough that I don''t have a body anymore, the last thing I need is more dirt. On the Fifth I add two rooms next to each other. Not because I want to use my new feature, but because I''m finally sorting out one of my problems. The Dungeon Boss is supposed to guard the Core Room. Not the entrance to the second floor. That said, Veris'' room is the first be swapped into the first room on the fifth floor.
Error: First Floor has no Boss Monster Select a random Mini-Boss to be the first floor Boss Monster Yes/No?
Opting No, I decide to choose Webster and swap the Wonderful Womb of Web location myself. Once that''s done, I move my Core Room behind the Boss Room. Core, Colin, chests and all. Now that I''m looking, the jade diamond that is my Core has grown considerably compared to when it was level 1. Back then it was the size of a gemstone. One that would make a gorgeous necklace or ring. Now, it''s bigger than a fist and has a strong pulse. It''s also a considerable distance away from the surface now and I have to say, I''m very proud of what I''ve accomplished. Not just the creation of my dungeon, but managing to keep my shit together. Through everything that''s happened to me and that rest that''s bound to follow. Just as I''m about to check my Status, a notification I didn''t call up presents itself first. Interruptions are the salt and pepper in this dungeon and once again it must be dinner time.
First Time Absorption Bonus:
Let''s see who''s back early this time, did I give them more time than they need? We''ll see. Popping Manifestation, the Dungeon Core is back in the house.
Dungeon Core Abi Level 15: 76/390 XP until next level 5 Floors 33 Rooms 48 Tunnels 115 Monsters 1 Contract Monster 65 Traps 65/400 DP Available
Chapter 16 : The Dungeon Categoriser Awakening to a sorrowful mood, the cold touch of death''s embrace still lingers in my mind. After tossing and turning all night, my body must have finally shut down. Removing myself from the warmth provided by the bed, I move to the window. Dawn hasn''t broken yet and the town is still covered by a blanket of darkness. My body is exhausted, but the thoughts running rampant in my mind won''t let me rest. No mater where I look, a monotone grey has painted my world and all thoughts ends with the same two words. "Why me?" A whisper escaped my lips, but no one is around to hear my self pity. How am I supposed to move on from what happened? How did my saviours brush it off like dust? Staring out of the window at the depressing view of the desolate street, I make a decision. I''m going to find them. That''s the only thought I''ve had that doesn''t drag me down. All others are drowning in the murky waters of death and disdain. Grabbing my pack, I remove anything that isn''t essential and will only serve to slow me down. By the time I''m done, there are only a few items left inside. A flask, a few potions and some preserved food mean I''ll be travelling light. My uniform is on the drawers. I almost chose to leave it behind, but the material offers minor protections to defense. I''d be foolish not to wear it. Even if I don''t deserve it. With everything ready, I leave the inn as quietly as possible before creeping over to the north gate. Because of the time the streets are empty and I''m grateful, I don''t want to see anybody nor do I wish to speak to them. There are only two people I''m hoping to talk too. I can''t bear to face anyone else. It took everything I had to recount the events to the Mayor and I''ve been hiding at the inn since. Catergoriser Elric is furious that I won''t speak to him, but he hates me anyway so what difference is it? With a single goal in mind and my direction set, I pass through the gate and journey back to where the horrors of yesterday began dominating my mind. - Katrina Kartova
Rain drips off the cloak of the woman shaking in my entrance. Trying to avoid the poor weather, she decided to wait it out in the cave close by. Which just so happened to be my Dungeon. She almost seems more shocked than I am that she rushed in without checking first. I mean, come on. You never know what you''re going to find in caves these days. As I take her in, I notice that the cloak she''s wearing seems familiar before remembering why. I used to own one myself and they make them in Orad. A dull green and about as plain as plain can be, the cloaks are fantastic at keeping you dry, but do nothing for the wearer''s sex appeal. For some reason though, that rule doesn''t apply to this Categoriser. She looks to be a bit of a beauty hiding away beneath that hood. She has brown eyes, curly hair and her skin looks so smooth it shouldn''t be fair. What''s more shocking than the fact that she actually looks good in one of Orad''s less-than appealing cloaks, are her clothes. Visible below the flapping material, the apparel of a Dungeon Categoriser makes my Core sweat. All white, apart from the black line that runs down the side, Categoriser''s are unmistakable. Even though they all dress differently, the colour and design of their outfit never changes. As though her jacket and skirt weren''t enough, a necklace with the letter C also screams Categoriser in my face and I feel weak upon seeing it. It''s like my new life has already met its fateful end. Crap! "H-hello..." She doesn''t sound very confident. Calling out to darkness, her voice echoes down to the trap room. My entrance only has a single Torch inside. I didn''t want the light to be noticeable from a distant, so I kept it weak. It''s enough to be able to see my intruder, however. Even if I am slightly jealous of her looks. I can''t help but think that my entrance needs sprucing up now that my plans have changed though. If I survive my new guest''s visit, I''ll look into doing just that. If not, then it doesn''t really matter, does it? "Hi.." My greeting was just as weak as hers. What do I say? This is the first time a living person has entered my Dungeon. It''s just my luck that she''s also one of the people that decide if dungeons are to be destroyed or not. What kind of twisted fate is this? Keeping my eye on the intruder, I wait anxiously for her response. The fact that she hasn''t moved yet and is looking around curiously makes it appear like she didn''t hear me. Or maybe she feels the same way I do? Sacred shitless. She is on her own after all. Either way, this awkward standoff is starting to grind my Core. I greet her again, louder this time, but she still doesn''t hear me. Which is strange because I''m super loud. Now that I think about, can she even see me? I know it''s dark, but Manifestation is doing its thing and I''m quite close to her since my entrance is tiny. Either she''s blind and deaf, or she''s blatantly ignoring me on purpose. That thought alone is almost enough to resurface my annoyance from earlier. Why do I keep feeling like that? What''s happening here, Me?
Manifestation is only capable of interaction with your Dungeon monsters. That human cannot see or hear you and I suggest you kill her quickly.
What? Why didn''t you mention that before? Don''t you think it''s a crucial piece of information for the Dungeon Core to know?
It did not seem relevant at the time. Most Dungeon Cores do not attempt to communicate with humans. As I say this, I am reminded that you are certainly not most Dungeon Cores. I wager you''re not even going to kill her, are you?
No, I''m not going to kill her! I mean, I''m not even sure if I can. I''m almost 100% sure she''s a Dungeon Categoriser. Look at her clothes and that necklace. What happens if I attack her and she ends up being a King-Dick Catergoriser? I''m screwed then, Me. It''ll be bye-bye Abi and see you later Rogue Town.
You do have more than 100 monsters now. Just incase you weren''t aware.
Well, no, but... Damn. Sometimes he''s on point, but on occasions he forgets to tell me the important pieces of information. "H-Hello!" My intruder''s confidence is growing as she shouts down the tunnel and the next time she speaks, her hesitation is gone. "Mr and Mrs Assassin?" What? Mr and Mrs Assassin? Who the hell is that? Whatever. I have to try something because we can''t stay like this forever. Gods? Please don''t let me die. If you help me out this one time, I swear to stop calling you stupid and lazy. The reply I get is a blanket of rain blown in through my entrance and a gust of wind that pushes the Intruder forward. She stops just infront of me and I cant help but hold my breath. Unable to suffocate since Dungeons don''t breathe, I tell me Mira to come to the entrance since she''s the closest available Rogue. I make her come on foot so that she doesn''t startle the Categoriser while informing her to be careful when she enters. When she arrives, Mira glares at the intruder and my Core sinks. What is she playing at? Do these Rogues only listen to what they want it hear, or what? Striding over whole exuding confidence, the woman beneath the cloak notices her. A mix of fear and resignation is written across her face. "Ask her what she wants and why she''s here. She also dropped a... Hang on, one sec." Realising that I didn''t check that last notification before popping on Manifestation, I look to find I''ve already gotten rid of it. Did she offer me a tribute?
No. She placed her pack on the ground and you absorbed it. There was a rabbit, some wild vegetables, a water canteen and a couple of different potions.
Oh. So I just stole her supplies then?
Quite. If you kill her now, it won''t what matter.
"Sorry, Mira. I''m almost done." Ignoring Me, I summon the possessions we acquired by accident. Without thinking, I deposit them between the two women. I don''t miss the Categoriser''s eyes flicker down, before focusing her attention back on Mira. "Tell her that we mean no harm and that we didn''t mean to take her stuff." I give Mira the words needed to communicate with humanity and bam, this Dungeon Core is creating history. I''m grateful that I no longer need to wear underwear. I feel about about as nervous as she looks and a change of knickers isn''t easy to come by out in the wilds. It would be nice to believe she stumbled upon us because of the rain. The fact that she''s come looking for a couple of Assassins almost puts her in the right place. Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel. Mira repeats my words while the other woman keeps eyeing from the freshly-spawned items. She looks more shocked now than she was when she first arrived, which is understandable. The meat alone would be enough to throw me off as there''s more there than one rabbit could possibly provide. Still feeling sorry about the accidental theft of her belongings, I decide to offer a little compensation to sweeten the deal. Hopefully sparing myself from destruction along the way. I summon her the best weapon available from my catalogue, the Silver Rapier. It was part of Talia''s upgrade and I place it beside her belongings before telling Mira, "That''s an apology for taking her stuff. Tell her I''m sorry and that I''m not a bad Dungeon Core." Why did I add that last part? Why would I admit to being a Dungeon? The cat''s already out of the bag since her pack was absorbed, before coming back better than was previously. Not to mention the items being bigger and better than they were before is a dead giveaway. What the hell am I saying? I think this is the first time I''ve felt truly afraid since becoming a Dungeon Core. I''ve almost come to accept my new life. If I''m being honest, I could have been reincarnated as something much worse than a Dungeon Core. Still, I can''t help but hold a candle for my former self. R.I.P Abi of old. Even though I complain about the specifics, I certainly don''t want my new life to end so soon. I''d miss Me too much if that happened. And everyone else. Would I even remember him after reincarnating? Probably not. When Mira finishes relaying my message, the Catergoriser nods once in response. Her brows furrow as she takes it in, looking slightly confused at the same time. Eventually, she passes out. Straight up faceplanting the Dungeon Floor. I hope she doesn''t take that as an attack. I''m not going to absorb her, right?
No, she has only fainted. She is not dead. Yet.
Me!
This is the perfect opportunity to acquire some more levels.
Yes, but it''s also the perfect opportunity to plead my case. If I can convince her I''m not dangerous, we don''t have to worry about other Categorisers turning up.
Your case is not as good as mine.
Why not?
In the case of her death, XP is guaranteed. If you try to persuade her, however, the chances of you prevailing are slim.
Damn. You can be convincing when you want to be. You may have won the argument, but I''ve got the body. Or ball... Whatever. You know what I mean. I''m not killing her.
I guessed as much. I was just offering the suggestion.
It sounds more like you want me to do it.
That is also correct, but I am just the assistant. You are the Core.
We still need to talk about our at some point, Me. For now, that conversation will have to be shelved until I sort out my latest problem. I have Hana join Mira and they carry the Catergoriser safely through the Trap Room. They take her all the way to the Retreat and set her down in one of the suites upstairs. While that''s happening, I drop in on Ali and give her some new ingredients. After decloaking the Catergoriser and placing her in bed, Hana and Mira return to the Guard House. I don''t want to leave her unattended incase something bad happens when she wakes up. Luckily for me, Light and Dropper are at the bar enjoying their time back and are available to help. Which isn''t so lucky for them. They get given the job of looking after her until she wakes. I don''t really know what she''s capable of, but it''s better to be safe than sorry. Having Light and Dropper sit in on her makes me feel much better. The fact that she''s a Catergoriser doesn''t really tell me much else about her. Can she use regular magic alongside her class or is she just Dungeon orientated? Is she a good fighter? Is she proficient with weapons? It''s a bit of a shitter. Not that any of the extra stuff matters. The only thing I should be concerned about is how well she can use her class. That poses the most danger to me. Time passes uneventfully within the dungeon whilst Barry drops his loads and the Catergoriser sleeps. Watched over by the two bodyguards told to keep an eye on her.
"Why do you think she''s here?" Sitting on a chair beside the bed, Light stares at the woman turning in her sleep. Across the room, Dropper is looking out of the window. She watches as Peaches passes below with two Vagabonds. Knowing she''s same tier as theose woman, the corner of her mouth curls up slightly. "I don''t know. I just want to get stronger to please the Dungeon." Making sure her face is neutral, Dropper turns to face her partner. "Yeah, yeah. That''s all you ever say. Get stronger to please the Master. C''mon, Drop. Let''s have a proper conversation about proper stuff." Light pleads. A conversation about anything not related to XP, or pleasing the Dungeon, is all he wants. "Like what, her?" Cocking her head at the defenceless woman tucked snuggly in and having what-looks-to-be the most pleasant dream imaginable, Dropper scoffs. You wouldn''t be able to guess that sleeping beauty collapsed from shock not long ago if it wasn''t for her red face. "Yeah. Why not? That''s the woman from the forest, right?" Believing he''s got an in, Light pushes for her to continue. "I think so. It''s hard to tell since she''s not covered in blood and fully clothed." Showing an actual interest, Dropper leans over and takes a good look. "She''s lucky I didn''t kill her for the XP back then." "That''s harsh, Drop. Plus, Abi won''t be happy if she hears you. You''ll get dismantled for killing her in here." Ever diligent, Light earns himself a scowl and a punch for his efforts. "Idiot. How dare you say I''d offend the Core? I''m not that foolish. Plus, I know the rules better than you do. If we''re talking about outside the Dungeon, the fact that she was covered in blood and being plundered detracts from her value as cute and makes her fair game. In here, I didn''t mention anything about killing her. Only that I should have done. No one can be harmed in the Dungeon unless they''ve passed the priests." Not that the thought doesn''t cross her mind. Dropper huffs before returning to the window. Wishing she was outside the dungeon growing stronger.
Dum and Dee arrive back at the dungeon on time and, to be honest, the loot they got isn''t great. Or maybe I''ve just been getting spoiled recently and my expectations have raised because of that? That''s probably it. I''m setting the bar too high. Dum has an assortment of a woodland critters and Dee has some fish, speared on a branch. He''s also missing his Dagger, but they''re cheap as chips so im not concerned. If anything, I''m surprised they haven''t already broken. Still. No monsters and no humans. I''m actually a little sad. Although, it''s probably a good thing that I''m not digesting dead people when there''s a Categoriser sleeping in my Retreat. She might have a skill that let''s her know when someone dies in the same Dungeon as her. That''s almost enough to scare me into following Me''s suggestion. Almost. All in all, I earn 11DP and 7XP. More than enough to replace Dee''s Dagger, but not enough to do much of anything else. The absorption fills my list with low cost purchases that are quite fitting for the forest on the third floor. At least, the woodland animals would give the wolves something to chase. Dum and Dee head inside as Coral and Mystique arrive to take their place. These guys deserve a round of applause because Me was right, their timekeeping is impeccable. I spot the Rusty Daggers around their waists and consider it briefly before deciding against. At some point I will upgrade all of their weapons. Right now, there''s just so much to do and not enough DP to go around. With a total of 238DP, I just want to thank Barry. The DP dropped by my Rockstar is blood in my veins. What I had remaining, plus Dum and Dee''s spit in the ocean, was still less than 100. It''s almost a third of what I spent earlier and a substantial amount of points. It will most certainly benefit my future so long as my future stays present. Mulling over the prospect of potential destruction, I consider spawning a large number of cheap monsters to increase my defence. Everything I''ve summoned so far seems to excel at combat. Tweedledum and Tweedledee spring to mind. OK. Maybe not everyone. Dumber than a bag of rocks, at least they''ve got the looks. Sometimes, that''s all you need. Instead of causing a massive miniature-monster pandemic, do I spruce my features up instead? The Categoriser might want to have a look around. Depending what she thinks, the idea of trade and hospitality doesn''t seem so far-fetched. Will it work? I hope so. These choices are rattling me because I can''t pick. Even after creating my own law and established a direction for my Dungeon, I''ve buckled on the arrival of the first living person. Granted, I find myself in the unlucky-position of said person being a Dungeon Categorisation Expert, but still, I should stick to my plans and not deviate. If I don''t follow through now, then I can''t say I gave it my all. My Core pulses and I take a few imaginary breathes. Ok. I''m composed. Dungeon Core Abi, ready to rock. Deciding to fill the room left behind from Trixie and her pack, I attempt to purchase a feature that screams awesomeness. The description isn''t the usual half-assed System one either. It''s actually to the point, even if that point was Me''s. I still can''t believe he dropped that bombshell on me.
The Syndicate: 80DP An organisation that helps the dungeon''s with its primary objective Reward: Contracts 8 XP
As if dying wasn''t bad enough, being reborn as Dungeon means I have to help other people achieve greatness. What''s that bullshit? I''m pretty sure I deserve some of that for myself. Especially when you consider what I had to go through. Becoming a Dungeon Core puts a heavy strain to the mind. In the beginning, all I could think about was what I couldn''t do. Pushing on, I leave my thoughts to fester with the rest of them and hit confirm. Only then realising I haven''t actually designated a room for a feature to go in.
Error...
Before I can do anything, pain unlike anything I''ve ever felt before shatters my Core. I''d say it was Core-shattering, but now''s not the time for jokes. It feels like some part of me has been ripped and twisted. Or a hole has been gouged inside me. It''s slightly similar to when I tried to take control of Barry''s tunnel, only worse. Much worse. It''s that bad that Manifestation dropped the moment it came on and I''ve been screaming silently since.
Unable to confirm purchase...
Screaming like I''ve never screamed before.
Querying...
When the Geels bit me in the marshes near Tune, I didn''t scream this wildly.
Configuring...
Even when I almost lost my life in the mines near Denho, I didn''t scream this bad.
Rebuilding...
Even when I woke up after my Terrortation session ended, I didn''t scream this loud.
Feature; The Syndicate, has been placed successfully Rooms have been placed Rooms have been altered Tunnels have been removed DP has been adjusted Active Skill Acquired: Divinity''s Creation: Level 1
The Syndicate: Level 1 All associates earn a 10% boost to all stats regardless of location Contracts until next level: 1 Contracts can be acquired from: Taskmaster Talia
My monsters feel everything I do thanks to the connection we share through the Dungeon. That alone makes me feel bad because that pain was something else. If I didn''t know any better, I''d say the entire Dungeon shook. It''s not like I can confirm my theory though. Thanks to The System sorting out my screw up, the pain doesn''t last as long as it could have. The purchase manages to compkete aswell, but I have no idea where it is. Not that it''s first on my list of priorities. Trying to calm down, I look at my Core and fail epically. I''d need a paper bag if I was still human as a gem-sized piece of my Core has broken off. Colin looks just as worried as me. He''s shaking nervously and guarding the broken fragment. Not only am I missing a crucial piece of what constitutes as my heart, but the Core itself is also badly damaged. There''s a large crack running straight down the center and multiple fractures flake off from it in all directions. Looking at it, all I want to do is cry. I don''t follow through on that because I''m scared the rest might follow. If it disintegrates now, I''m done. What the hell just happened? Chapter 17 : Lurking Danger Eric witnessed it all. The pack. The conversation. But most importantly, he watched Katrina collapse and be dragged further inside by two women. Turning on the spot, he ran as fast as he could. Not stopping. Not taking breaks. He just ran. It was what Eric was good at. His greatest acheivement was having stamina that outranked top-class adventurers. Only an apprentice, like the woman he had followed, they were competing for the title of Catergorisation Expert. The title was bestowed by the Lord and each Lord only has one Expert. They obtain status, popularity and most of all, a generous monthly stipend that puts regular Catergorisers to shame. Eric wasn''t expecting it to be him, however, as studying was not his strong point. But now? His lips curled into a smile as he controlled each breath and ran. Slipping on the wet soil before righting himself, Eric didn''t see the vines. Preoccupied with the tale he was going to spin, he ended up face down in the dirt before crashing into a tree. Not letting the little mishap dampen his spirit, Eric wiped the mud from his eyes and hurried on. He had a report to make. A report his father would definitely want to hear. The Catergoriser was staying in Orad whilst rhe knights investigated claims of missing adventurers. His father was there just incase a Dungeon happened to be involved. Jubilation was all Eric could feel. The obstacle in his road had been removed before his eyes and Eric laughed. He was laughing that much that he had to slow down, unable to control his pace. "Oh shit. Today really is a lucky day?" Even though he had seen her dragged away, Eric still couldn''t believe what had happened. Followed Katrina in the rain to a remote location, he had planned to end her life with his own hands. Not that it mattered anymore since the task had been completed. Maniacally replaying it over and over is head, Eric wanted to be sure. He didn''t want to follow the other apprentice to death, however. Instead, he was going to milk it to his father and have him deal with it. He was the current Expert for the local Lord after all. Katrina Kartova was almost guaranteed the title of Expert when Elric stepped down. Eric hated that she was already golden in the eyes of the Lord. He hated Katrina with a passion and jealousy was the only emotion he felt whenever he saw her. He was the current Expert''s son. The position and title should naturally fall to him by right. The problem was Eric''s aptitude for the class was nowhere near as strong as Katrina''s. It was evident for all to see aswell since public testing had become mandatory. Katrina had shined ever since she was little. She was able to tell the difference between dungeon stones and regular rocks at a glance. Identifying the power of the dungeon was a little trickier, but she always came out in top. Even when she misjudged the Dungeon stone''s power, Katrina still managed to do a better job than Eric who was left holding a bag of rocks. Which only served to fuel his hatred. When she had tested in front of the Lord and Expert, Katrina didn''t just shine, she excelled. Noticing subtleties that even Elric had missed, the Lord took an immediate liking to the young lady and ordered his Expert to train her well. That was a bitter blow for Elric. He wanted nothing to do with the smart-mouthed upstart and instead forced his son to study harder. The Expert, ordered to take the woman under his wing, began to despise her. Not because she had stolen his son''s opportunity. Nor was it to do with his Lord''s command. If Katrina inherited his position, she would inknowingly bring shame down upon Elric''s household. An opportinity stolen from the son and the coveted position taken from the father would mean being unable to show his face again. What would his family do then? Eric''s resentment was strong, but his son hated her even more. He was the entitled child of an expert. Menageries surrounded him and obstacles were removed from his path. All in the hopes that he would surpass Katrina. Bitterness and jealousy served to murder the last of his dreams. At least he could boast to his father about finding a Dungeon. A Dungeon that Katrina entered without approval. Apprentice or not, no one is allowed to enter unclassed Dungeons without some form of punishment. If she hadn''t died already, the Eric would push for the death sentence with all his might. He needed to get rid of her to make his father proud and to continue the family business. -Eric Highgrove, son of Dungeon Categoriser, Elric Highgrove
Damages aside, there''s no lingering pain like a human would have and I''m actually fine. Pun intended. What happened, Me?
You ignored my advice, but this time you almost killed us in the process.
I didn''t mean to. I don''t even know what I did.
I told you that you can not create or edit on the same floor as an adventurer.
Ahhh. That''s what it was. I''d try and look cuter to avoid an earbashing, but without a body the chances of that working are zero. Crap. That was bad, huh?
Bad? Abi, you could have died!
Yeah, I know. Who''s a silly Dungeon Core?
It is not a joke this time, Abi. I don''t think you realise how close you came to dying.
I do. And I''m sorry. You''re right it''s not a joke. I don''t want to die again. I promise I''ll try harder to remember the rules and think about my actions to avoid both of our deaths.
That would be appreciated. Now, how did you unlock that skill?
How am I supposed to know? You''re my assistant, you tell me.
As is the norm in your Dungeon, I''m confused.
Ha... Haha... Hahahaha. I can''t help but laught at Me''s all-too human-like response. I needed that brief-but welcome reprieve. Calming down, my list of skills shows what has Me so curious. I''m no wiser to where it came from, but if I had to point a finger... She would be on the recieving end.
Divinity''s Presence: Once a day you can create an object, feature or loot, on a floor that is occupied by adventurers.
That''s definitely her doing. I''m not going to worry too much about my new cheat-skill. It shouldn''t be long until the expert wakes up and I need to give myself a good talking to. After what happened, I want to make sure I''m OK. Obviously, I''m not. But I still need to check. It was like a head rush, but with some excruciating pain thrown in for free. Now I know it was brought on by my own foolishness and lack of attention, I''ll certainly avoid making the same mistake in the future. Probably. Anyway, I need to see what happened to The Syndicate. Checking Trixie''s room shows nothing and I can''t find the feature anywhere after using my overview. Fortunately, there''s a notification waiting patiently for my attention. It appears that I was successful in placing the feature, even if it was by the tiniest of margins.
The Syndicate: Level 1 All associates earn a 10% boost to all stats regardless of location Contracts remaining until next level: 1 Contracts can be acquired from Taskmaster Talia
That''s not what I was expecting. It has a level. When it mentioned an organisation, I was imaining... Something different. Not more contracts for the Rogue who just got her position a few hours ago. The Rogue boost, however, is great and should hopefully stack with the one from The Retreat. Being the ever-curious Dungeon Core that I am, I can''t help but check Talia''s contracts.
Contracts: Obtain a new type of ale: 100XP Obtain snacks: 100XP Kill the village chief of Tor: 300DP
Why is the last one different? The XP doesn''t seem that great either, not that my Rogues need much to start leveling. That last contract is definitely something to do with me though. I mean, why else would it reward DP? Examining the contract brings up more information and manages to aggravate me at the same time. I was finally calming down too, now I''m furious again. This feature has already caused me more worry and panic since reincarnating that anything else. Even more than Noir. Plus, where''s the building at?
Kill the Village Chief of Tor: The Village Chief relishes in the torture of children, preventing them from reaching their full potential in life Rid Tironia of this plague to humanity and assist the human race by completing this contract Rewards: 1 Contract point 300XP 300DP Absorb the Chief''s body to unlock additional rewards
So the Village Chief is an evil bastard? Who would have thought it? I''m so glad it didn''t say Orad. Although, I can''t imagine Mayor Galdon taking part in that sort of practice. He isn''t the most righteous of men, but at least he has morals Semantics aside, look at those rewards. Why didn''t you tell me about this feature before?
Because it does not have a building and that was what you asked me to list.
Damn. Is that what I said? You could still give a girl some leeway, couldn''t you? Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings.
Syndicate aside, the room on the first floor is a more pressing matter.
The room?
Take a look.
Since I manifested in the Retreat, Me urges me to head outside the establishment. To find out what has him hung up, I spin around and float outside into what-can-only-be-described-as a glorious day. Using the feature unlocked when I confirmed my last floor, the System has opened up the top floor of my Dungeon into one giantic room. Well almost. Inside the ridiculously-oversized room, the Shed of Salvation doesn''t seem to have been moved like everything else and looks lonely standing on its own against the wall. Not that how it looks is important. What is important is how The System has kept in line with my rules. Behind the priests is the tunnel that leads through the Wonderful Womb of Web and The Batcave. It continues on to the Boss Room where the entrance to the second floor is. The only other room left untouched was the one full of traps. Real talk, I love it. Even if it was created by The System. It''s absolutely amazing and even stays true to my goals. Or at least what I''ve mentioned in passing conversation anyway. Maybe I should have said more random stuff that she could have changed for me? Still, I''m glad nothing I put proper effort into has been removed. But why did she do it? To be honest, The System has done a much better job than I ever could. The fact that I''m staring up at a blue sky and what-appears-to-be the sun, melts my heart. It also raises her position several notches on the list of people I like. What a babe! Since the upgrade encompasses almost the entire floor, every building I had placed are now in one room. Even the Swindlers Den is in here and that''s supposed to have restrictions on it. The description said that it wasnt allowed to be placed with another fearure, but The System has done as she pleased and edited the layout. Even though it''s not supposed to work that way. The tunnel that comes from the trap room, now leads directly to the Guard House''s front gate. That means any arrivals will be checked out by Hana and Mira before being allowed entry. Through my overview, I can see that The System copied my idea of using tunnels and rooms to make the area bigger. Which is great because there''s so much light now it''s almost blinding. I''m shocked. I know that outrageous occurrences frequently take place in my Dungeon, but the warmth shining down as I manifest is something else. This room is absolutely wonderful and all I feel is joy. I can''t actually feel the warmth, but I''m happy nonetheless. Even if it does look like my Core might be on the way out. Offering my sincere appreciation, words I never thought I''d hear myself say are given freely to the usual source of my frustration. "Thank you, System." I love my Dungeon. I''m informed that the sleeping Categoriser wakes up, but find it hard to peel myself away from the beauty of my new room. It¡¯s not even a monster, just a stone constructed feature. Yet still I find myself captivated by the light and spacious surroindings. Even after being told repeatedly by Me that it isn''t a real sun, I just can''t get over it. I''ve been a Dungeon Core for what-feels-like weeks now, but in reality is still only been a few days. Restricted by the size and shape of my creations, it''s so nice having more space and proper light. Super happy. Successfully managing to escape my addiction to beauty, I float straight over to the Rogues'' Retreat. Because I can do that now. Playing chicken with shadows, I swerve the dark spots and still manage to arrive in record time. Upon entering the occupied suite, the first thing I notice is that Dropper doesn''t look pleased. She''s yet to give me an answer on the naming situation and is being tightly embraced by the fully awake Dungeon Categoriser. Huh? Let''s be honest. That was the last thing I was expecting to see. I was expecting anxiety and nerves to pull a dick move that would need mediation. Although, I wasn''t feeling very confident about being the mediator. I''m not even ready to plead my case about wanting to live a long Dungeon life yet. I got distracted by a near-death incident and a floor overhaul. I haven''t had time to think about it properly and what if she thinks I don''t have any redeeming qualities? I certainly can''t tell her that anyone who passes the Priests becomes Dungeon food. It''s a GIVEN with what I am, but it doesn''t make me sound like the human-appreciating Dungeon Core that I am. Wink. Wink. ... No response from Me means he''s feeling the pressure too. Shame. I thought that was quite good. I was even ready with a comeback about not having eyes, but he didn''t rise to it. Spoilsport. Regardless, the only person that looks truly uncomfortable about the situation is Dropper. Still wrapped in the arms of the Catergoriser, she has one hand on her weapon whilst the other tries to remove the sobbing mess. Light, however, is rolling around on the floor in a fit of laughter. Unable to contain himself, he looks like a young child watching clowns at the carnival. Until he notices my arrival and composes himself. "Master," he bows. Dropper looks shocked for a moment before her eyes plead at me to help. I don''t really want to get in the middle of that, but I''m not one to deny requests. Plus, u don''t really need to. "Light. Ask her to release Dropper, please." He complies happily. Unlike Mira, however, he seems to have a script of his own. "My master wants you to release her monster." I just want to punch him sometimes. Nevermind confusing the room, the blue-haired idiot just confused the Dungeon. And yes, I mean me. It takes her a minute before remembering where she is, when she does her grip on Dropper intensifies and fear flashes across her pretty face. I don''t know why she''s scared. I''m the one at risk here. "Please. Save me again." She whispers into Droppers armour. Audible enough to hear, she completely ignored the part about Dropper being a Dungeon Monster. And what does she mean by again? "Have you met this woman before? Is she the person you left in the forest?" Confirmation from Light comes by a nod whereas Dropper just rolls her eyes. What''s that about? Does she already hate the poor girl because how clingy she is? Or is it because she a Categoriser? There''s always a chance it could be something to do my summons that I''ve yet to identify too. "She seems to like you, Dropper. Ask her if she''s ok." I make a simple request, or what I thought was a simple request. The Vagabond I asked, however, seems to think it''s anything but and looks mortified. "Hey." In a stern voice, Dropper shakes the woman wrapped around her waist vigorously, "are you ok?" Is it just her personality? "It''s dangerous here," she whispers, eyes closed and her face buried in Dropper''s chest. Using the woman she won''t let go of, we begin a conversation between a human and a human-dungeon.
Just a dungeon.
Yeah, yeah. "... only if I say so and I don''t intend on attacking everyone. I need my Rogues to protect me because, well¡­ People are dangerous too, right?" Well, that''s that. I exlained myself the best I could. Or at least I think I did. "I suppose you''re not wrong. I still don''t understand why you didn''t kill me though. It would have been a better strategy from your point of view. Not only would you have gotten rid of a witness, but you would have benefited from my death in some way or form."
Quite. That is exactly what I...
Shush. The way she put it makes it sound like it''s my duty to murder her and Me''s not helping. "I don''t have to kill people to survive. That''s just a fast way to grow into a big Dungeon. I can by just by having people come inside me." Both Rogues turn red and look at each other, before looking at me sheepishly. "What are you doing? Tell her what I said." I need them to be my voice because I can''t tell her myself. She can''t hear or see me, which is stupid. Especially when I''ve got this awesome, wispy form to gaze upon. "I don''t want to say that." Both Light and Dropper seem against relaying my words for some reason. What was wrong with what I said? "What did she say?" Curiosity killed the cat, is what people usually say. This time it almost kllled Catergoriser. Unconscious on the bed, she passed out after Dropper whispered my message in her ear. she will still be famous in some way in the future. Hehe. I knew what I said. Nice work Dropper. Light also found it hilarious as he fails to contain his grin, receiving a harsh glaring at from his partner. Eventually, the Catergoriser recovers from the vulgarity she was exposed to and out talk continues. "Ask her if she''s here to categorise us?" Composed, Light poses the question for me, but the Catergoriser looks at Dropper and shakes her head. I feel a spark of hope originate in my Core before I rein my emotions in. I need to get myself under control more than Light does. I''m the one damaged enough to die at any moment. The Categoriser seems to be composed too. She''s much less needy than before only feeling the need to hold Dropper''s hand. "Okay. Tell her that we''re all really sorry for what''s happened, but if she''s not here to categorise us then... Why is she here? Oh and ask what her name is?" I finally ask since I''ve just been referring to her as the Categoriser. "My name is Katrina and I''m not the Categorisation Expert. I''m an apprentice. I was out here searching for the Assassins that saved me. It started raining and I was close to the mountain so I was looking for shelter. Then... Well, I ended up here and actually found them. I can''t believe it! But... They look different somehow?" Her eyes scan the Vagabonds and I suppose she''s not wrong. They were still Rogues when they saved her. Wait a minute. The mountain? "Damn, right," Light proudly boasts, throwing his Dagger up before snatching it out of the air on its way back down in a show of... Something. "We ranked up our class." Proud that someone else has noticed his growth, Light enjoys it as much as possible before Dropper shuts him down. "Be quiet you fool. The Master will decide what we should say to her!" Drawing my attention from thinking about my location, the Vagabonds give me a glimpse into their true nature while making sound like a true Dictator at the same time. Damn, I didn''t realise she was so... Harsh? Light has it rough, huh?
I don''t know what to say. Your human-type monsters are certainly on a different plane of existence to the regular ones. Feelings, emotions, wants and needs. It''s all very... Un-Dungeon like.
I don''t suppose I can disagree with you. It''s been that way since Barry started drilling me out and I don''t intend to stop now.
Which one?
Oh, Me. You''re so bad. Turning my attention back to Katrina, I have Dropper clean up her mistake and make me sound like an angel. It doesn''t go as planned and I choose to forget the whole thing happened. With the threat of destruction a thing of the past, even though an apprentice Categoriser still poses some amount threat, I confirm the reason she sought out my Rogues. Misery begins emitting from Katrina and she squeezes Dropper''s hand tight. It catches me off guard as I wasn''t expecting to become a feelings magnet. Then again, I haven''t done anything in the last few minutes. It can''t be me, can it? Is she doing that? The painful experience caused by the Katrina''s traumatic event sent directly into me through Katrina''s will.
How is she able do that? It should be impossible.
Unable to process what Me says, the fear of death wraps me up and overwhelmings me. The emotion carried through Katrina''s will is even stronger than the bond I share with me and I feel everything she does. How she feels now, how she felt yesterday and how she felt when it happened, all merge into one ball of sadness. It haunts her waking hours aswell as the brief moments her eyes have closed since. I see what she went through and what went through her mind at the time, during such an ordeal. Now I know why she''s here. She wants releasing from the horror that that has invaded her life and now dominates her thoughts. When she pulls her will back, I''m left speechless. Well... What do I say to that? She just unburdened her honest feelings on me. Without words or trickery, just unbridled emotion. A sense of anguish hits me, what''s left of my humanity emphasises with Katrina. If my core wasn''t in the state it''s in, I''d give myself over completely. As it stands, I''m too scared to fully embrace her pain. Not the way I did for Anya, nor the way I hold a candle for myself. Still, I would shed tears for her if possible. Our situations are similar, only no heroic Rogues were there to sweep in and rescue me from a fate I didn''t deserve. The atmosphere in the room turns gloomy thanks to Katrina''s contribution to the group. Still feeling the lingering effects of her over sharing, I try to remember what she did with her will. If she can send feelings to me, then I should be able to do the same thing. I''m the Will Master, right? Concentrating on Katrina''s feelings, I notice a blue aura covering her body. That''s the colour that I would attribute to sadness and focusing on it, I push my will towards it. A tentacle stretches out from my Manifestation, carrying compassion and reassurance towards the blue Catergoriser. When it makes contact with her aura, Katrina bolts up in shock and finally releases her grip on Dropper. Who immediately takes three steps back to the wall and sighs. I keep reassuring her that everything will be fine and like she did before, my will carries emotions and feelings. Not empty or deceitful words. When I feel like she''s been given enough, I look up to find that Katrina no longer looks so blue. A small smile is even present as she looks for Dropper and I withdraw my tentacle. My will reassured her that she isn''t alone. There are others that suffer tragedy and sorrow that share similar burdens. It also carries acceptance. Welcoming her to stay for a while longer if she so chooses. Provided she stays on her best behaviour, that is. Feeling a little more positive about the future, I let Light and Dropper know their position as Catergoriser-sitters will last longer than I first anticipated. Telling them to go see Ali so that Katrina can get some food in her, I drop Manifestation before they can complain about it. They''re going to end up getting another meal made by our own gourmet chef, Ali anyway. I don''t see why they''re complaining. That should be me, since I''m the one who can''t taste any of it. Hopefully, Katrina will feel better after a good meal and a drink. I, however, find myself feeling frustrated in my overview. I went through all that effort to speed up my first floor, almost dying in the process, because I thought it would help me convince the Catergoriser to let me live. As it turns out, she''s not even the Expert that I was worried about. That 160DP The System spent could have been put to better use too. Not that the living arrangements of my summons isn''t a good use. But, what''s done is done and it looks awesome. Much better than anything I could have done aswell, so I''m not complaining. I keep an eye on Katrina as she down and orders a meal. Talia offers her a drink as she waits and I take the time to look over my features. Deciding what to do next needs consideration since there''s more to do. Katrina was dealt a rough hand by life, as a lot of people are, myself included. As I''ve said before though, you gotta stop wailing and just get on with it. I''m still debating when their meals arrive and I watch them start eating. Light and Dropper eat in silence whereas Katrina is a little apprehensive. Her stomach wins the war against her mind and she daring tries the Rabbit stew Ali has served. Her eyes go wide and she tucks in wholeheartedly. That''s better. Good food is a sure fire way of improving someone''s mood. As she spoons mouthful after mouthful, Katrina keeps taking curious peaks at her babysitters. It looks like she wants to say something, but she refrains and finishes her meal instead. Before I can suggest she might need more, Ali is already replacing her bowl with a full one. A quick wink and she''s gone. Katrina must have been starving because she immediately dives into her second portion. The cutesy chef was already two steps ahead of me and I can''t help but feel proud. Damn, she''s good. Katrina turns red as a small burp comes from nowhere after she puts the empty bowl down. She appears to be quite content now, holding her stomach and smiling slightly. Ali returns to take her bowl and Katrina compliments the food multiple times, even going so far as to bow a few times. She must really have enjoyed that meal. I''m kinda jealous now. I really want to know what Ali''s food tastes like too, I doubt that will ever happen though. Depressed, I need something to cheer me so I decide to skip work and hang with Katrina. Will-O-Wispin'' it to the Retreat, I arrive next to the trio at the bar. "Who''s ready for a tour?" I announce, before remembering that Katrina still can''t hear me. Damn. That would have been a cool entrance. Chapter 18 : Last Minute Purchases It took over 3 hours for Eric to reach Orad, running the whole distance. That itself was quite the accomplishment. No stops were made, neither to relieve himself or eat, as his mind was set on one goal. Katrina Katova''s position of the apprentice being stripped from her. How fitting that would be. Knowing his father would approve, the tale he had spun was ready. His jealousy of Katrina coupled with his ambition to follow in his father''s footsteps compelled him to put on this show. Eric burst into the guild, tears running down his face, "Father!" A loud thump, followed by thunderous footsteps and Elric came bursting through the inner doors. He quickly scanned the room before his eyes landed on his son. "Are you hurt? Where have you been? Do you know how worried I was when they said you weren''t in your room? I was just about send the Knights to look for you." Eric is wrapped in an embrace and knows he''s already won the medal for best storyteller of the year in his fathers eyes. It wouldn''t really matter what he said to be honest. For Elric, his sons word was law. With the Knights all dressed up and ready to go, an assortment of villagers and adventurers were also present to see them off. The perfect crowd listened to Eric''s tale of woe. Believing Katrina had a secret that made her better than him, Eric told everyone that she had been entering unclassified Dungeons without approval all along and he now had proof. He had followed her and found the location of a new Dungeon. One not marked in the map in Orad''s adventurers guild. He swayed their opinion by telling them she wanted the Core''s power for herself. Saying that''s how she became so talented, even for an apprentice. He said he tried to warn her, to talk her out of entering, to stop her from destroying the Dungeon Core. But, he had failed. Katrina had already turned power crazy and abused the apprentice title she possessed. Sprouting nonsense about being entitled to its power. It would be hers soon anyway, so why should she wait? These were all lies of course, but Eric was great at spinning the truth. It was, after all, a crime to enter an unclassified dungeon. Even if that person was the apprentice of the current Expert. They had yet to become fully-fledged Catergorisers themselves and can only enter Dungeons when accompanied by the sanctioned official. Overhearing the story being told his son no less, Elric could contain his smile. The same smile his son had spotted not that long ago when he also had the same idea. Stroking his beard, Elric had found the the perfect opportunity to rid himself of the over-talented apprentice that outshone his son at every turn. The person who was almost guaranteed to take his job when his tenure ended. This was the best time to cement his bloodline in the upper hierarchy of Ishda. To do that they needed to keep the reins and get rid of the do-gooder Katrina Katova. With a devilish smile still-plastered across his face, Elric combed his hair back and ordered the Knight captain to have the men ready to depart within the hour. The trip would be long, so they need more than searching supplies. Informing the villagers that they were going to apprehend Katrina, Elric wanted to make sure there were no flaws in his plan. If he somehow wasn''t able to get rid of her, he would make sure Lord Aldus had to hold her accountable for her actions. Having her dismissed as his apprentice would be good enough to make sure his son took the Expert title. With Eric''s story finished and the crowd critiquing the missing apprentice, the first step was already complete. Elric downed a mug of ale before retiring to his room to let out his joy. Alone in his room, the Categorisation Expert praised the Gods for granting him such a bountiful opportunity and his son also for hand delivering it. Thinking of ways he could accidentally kill Katrina off inside the Dungeon, Elric couldn''t help but chuckle to himself. It was going to be a good day for their family. -Eric, and Elric, Highgrove. Dungeon Catergoriser Apprentice and Dungeon Categoriser Expert.
Moving on from my last bout of idiocy, I get Ali to accompany our guest since Dropper looks like she could do with a break. Once Katrina is reluctantly peeled away from her relieved babysitter, we finally get the show on the road. Exiting the lovely Rogues'' Retreat, we step out beneath the awning and Iet Katrina take it in. Although, the apprentice isn''t the only one shocked. Ali''s eyes dart around the room faster than our guests. I suppose it''s understandable though. She was probably expecting to see the same tunnels she sees everyday. Not anymore, girl. Space is the new selling point of this floor. It''s still a lot to take in for Katrina. She was passed out when the Hana and Mira carried her to the Retreat so she didn''t see my tunnels. Which is actually a good thing. What was I thinking? Katrina looks to Ali for assistance, but is out of the luck. The chef is trying to make out the building she can see in the distance. "What''s that over there, Master?" Ali is pointing at the Shed of Salvation and I''m not surprised she can''t make out what it is. It''s tiny. Hell, I can hardly see it either and by the way Katrina is squinting, I don''t think she can see it at all. I tell her and all I get is an," Oh," for my troubles. Followed by a, "What''s that?" as she points at another building. I can see where this going and I tell her to wait. That''s what the tour is for after all. The heat of the sun shines down on us from above and both women shield their eyes while they adjust. I feel neither the heat or a strain on my optical senses so, ha. Guess I''m winning. "Why is it so bright?" Ali''s on a roll with the questions, but I wasn''t expecting it to be her asking them. "What''s the Dungeon saying? And why are you asking so many questions? Don''t you live here?" I suppose it seems strange to Katrina, since Ali is supposed to be more knowledgeable than she seems. It''s not her fault she spends all day cooking in the kitchen if the Retreat though. If anyone should be blamed, it''s me for not summoning her some helpers. But let''s not argue over the semantics of who''s in the wrong. There''s a tour to conduct. Afterwards, there might be a cooking feature somewhere kicking around on my list that a hard-working Rogue like Ali would appreciate. She does seem to kick ass in the culinary department. If my monsters and the Catergoriser are to believed. Both women gawp the entire way to the Guard House. Neither can hold a candle to Peaches, but they make comical runner ups. "I... Haven''t seen this before. Did this happen earlier, Master? Is this why I felt so much pain?" They can be quite intuitive sometimes these Rogues. "You felt that? Did everyone feel it?" Ali nods sympathetically. "The room was created after Katrina passed out. Someone did something and something else happened as a result, but it''s fine now. There''s no need to pass blame out so don''t worry over it." Ali nods again. This time she''s sporting a massive grin, however. I''m not gong to say anything about it though, I''m a master of misdirection. "I was thinking about purchasing the cooking feature for you. Would you like that?" Ali almost misses her step, but manages not trip, before continuing to follow me with Katrina. "You don''t have to do that. I''m more than comfortable cooking at Talia''s. She''s got everything I need." Ali''s modesty is appreciated, but the tension as she clenches her jaw is a dead give away. I let her known that I plan on building it anyway and at the mention of someone taking the position, Ali firmly shoots down my proposal. Then accepting the position herself without having to be asked a second time. Yeah. That''s what I thought. After it a few upgrades, the person in charge may end up being able to offer contracts. Just like the Retreats'' owner can. "You should build the kitchen as soon as possible. I can''t wait to see how it looks. Or how it upgrades at least. First impressions aren''t everything, so they say. I can''t wait to have my own building." With hesitation a thing of the past, Ali''s true colours are in display. I love these guys The prospect of an upgrade is a big deal for everyone. Even monsters, huh?
Everyone, even myself, strives to be the best they can be.
If I had eyebrows, remember? "The Dungeon Core is going to create you a Kitchen? Where does the food come from?" Katrina watched Ali''s one-sided conversation, but still managed to catch the gist of what we were on about. Before asking a question she was probably better off not asking. "Yes!" Ali can''t keep the jubilation out of her voice as she grabs the hands of the taken-back apprentice, jumping up and down. "I made your food in The Retreats'' kitchen but my master is going to create a special feature just for me. I''m so happy. I''ll get to be like Talia!" Releasing the still-startled Categoriser, Ali skips ahead and we finally arrive at the Guard House. Well, maybe not just like Talia.
I can''t see you having two Taskmasters. Then again, I didn''t even know what they were before yesterday.
"Who''s Talia? Is she the blonde that saved me?" The mention of a different name peaks Katrina''s interest. She seems to be relaxing around the people I''ve summoned now, who are technically monsters, but again, semantics. A monster should be described by its acts, not how they look. "No, that''s Dropper. Her and Light are the ones that saved you." Ali sets her straight without even being told to. So far she''s the best interpreter I''ve had. Hell, I don''t even think she needs me here, but where else would I go? "Light? That''s a weird name for a woman. Also, what sort of name is Dropper?" She calls the one who named the Rogues out on her bullshit, stabbing my emotions in the process. I''m lucky my Core wasn''t damaged any further. I get it. I already apologised. And it''s not my fault if she doesn''t want to change it now, right? Plus, there are a lot of worse names I could have called her in my strop. Imagine if I called her Alfred? How bad would that have been. Any regular person would have known something was up with her. At least this way she can get it away with it. After justifying myself to no one besides myself, I realise Katrina''s not going to be happy when Ali corrects her on whose name''s whose. On cue, the Rogue-turned-rogue throws me under the cart and informs Katrina that Dropper is actually the female. Frowning and certainly more annoyed than I thought she would be, Katrina questions my naming skills once more. "What? Why is she called Dropper? Is your master a tyrant? Does the dungeon make you do cruel and evil things only to belittle you by calling you names?" She slanders me with her words and I''m cut deep. Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. I''m not that bad, I promise. I really did offer to change her name. I know it was stupid of me in the first place, but I''d just been turned into a dungeon Core. I think I deserve a some slack because of that. "Nothing like that, silly. Dropper just happened to be the first Rogue to bring one home when the master was going through an existential crisis. She had only just been turned into a Dungeon you see and Dropper, she... Well, she just dropped it right on the floor and that''s how she got her name." Ali giggles as she rationalises the thought-making-process of Abi the One Day Old. Katrina doesn''t seem convinced and states to get the truth from Dropper herself later. The reason being was that Ali''s explanation was lacking. Letting her know, I tell her to add more detail. "Master hates Goblins," was all she added. Thanks, Ali. Thanks. I''d like to say a wave of understanding wash over the face of our guest, but it didn''t. Instead, Katrina looks more irritated than she did before and confusion is the only thing washing her face. Someone once said, there are no stupid questions. "Why does she hate Goblins?" Let me tell you, that person was wrong. Unable to answer, I''m caught off guard by the outrageous question that was just spoken aloud in my Dungeon. It''s a good job I didn''t summon Katrina, because I might have just dismantled her there and then. But seriously, why? Does she like Goblins, or what? Are we going to have a problem? I thought everyone hated Goblins. I mean if she really wants to know, I''ll tell her.l exactly how I feel. "Get ready, Ali..." "My master has a vehement dislike dor Goblins. They''re horrendous creatures and should be exterminated with extreme prejudice. They''re disgusting, ugly and they always flash their little peckers whilst running through the woods. It''s gross and disgusting. They eat children and commit atrocious acts on the women they kidnapped that are never seen again. If they ever were to return to society, they wouldn''t be the same as they were. Kind of like what you''re harbouring right now, if we''re honest." The last part caught her attention the most. Having just likened Talos the Defiler to your everyday Goblin, Katrina actually snickered. My joke my have been in poor taste, but at least she caught the important part. "They are malicious, little bastards who breed like flies and eat like pigs. They''re the scum of Tironia and a plague to everything that is beautiful. Ugly faces and green skin have no place in my..." "OK. OK. I get it. She doesn''t like Goblins. That was... Yeah." She disrupts my monologue, which was only just getting started before asking a tricky question, "Why is the Dungeon Core so... Human? There are buildings inside with people running them. Yet you''re all actually... I don''t mean this offensively so please don''t take it that way, but you''re all... Monsters. And you''re all living here like... Real people. Really, damn, beautiful people. How''s that even possible?" At least her sanity has returned a little more now. When she had Dropper in the bear hug earlier, I was a little worried. More about Katrina than Dropper, but it was still worrying. It also sounds extremely nice to hear that the beauty factor in my Dungeon isn''t biased. As much as I''d like to tell her, ''I was a human too'', I just can''t. It''s not that I''m unable to, I just don''t want too. Maybe it''s an inherent dungeon emotion that doesn''t want me socialising with the enemy, or giving away secrets...
There''s no such thing.
... or I might just not trust her completely yet. Better?
Quite.
I explain some of facts that people thought they knew about dungeons. Nothing too major and nothing that Me would agonise over. As I''m doing that, I casually throw the Dungeon Cores secondary objective into the conversation. I embellish it a little by adding a few words to make it sound believable, like the fact that I have to aid and benefit mankind. Pretty confident that Ali''s beauty and innocence could even charm my Con Men, I chalk it up as a job well done and continue the tour as she leads Katrina into the Guard House. I didn''t miss her disgusted look when she saw the shameful living conditions of those that saved her life. I could see she dissapproved, but she held back since that wasn''t out destination. Yeah. I know what she was thinking. They''re shoddy, so what? At least they''re better than tents, right?
Absolutely.
Thanks, Me. It''s nice knowing someone''s got my back.
I mean the Shacks. They''re unbelievably shoddy.
Oh. Well.. At least The System thinks so. She said it before I did. And if you think they''re that bad, I''ll just have to upgrade them.
Have you already managed to forget what happened the last time you did that today?
Not likely. I doubt I will ever forget that experience and don''t underestimate my genius, Me. A single thought fluttered through my mind as I was reminded of the shoddy Shacks. So simple that I''m wondering why I didn''t think of it earlier. Not that I would have been able to do anything in account of Katrina.
Genius?
You''ll see. We pass through the partially rebuilt Guard House where Mira and Hana welcome us on our arrival. "Master, Ali, welcome. Since you are with our Master, we''re obligated to greet and treat you well also. Welcome." Obligated? That was also harsh. I know I joked about being the Dictator, but you guys are taking it too far now. "Thank you. My name is Katrina. It''s a pleasure to be here." Taking in the feature, her face betrays her words, but I get it. This feature isn''t like the Retreat. None of them are, yet. The only thing we have going for us at the moment, is the fact that everyone here is an absolute stunner. Need an Idol? Come to Abi''s. I''ve got you covered.
They are just complying to your law.
Still. She could have phrased it better, or just left it out completely. Anyway. It''s time to show you my genius.
This will be good.
Oh, ye of little faith. Watch and learn my Voice Activated User Notification System. Watch and learn. Oh and this bit is super important so don''t forget and make sure you remember what I say, OK?
OK.
Most Dungeons... Are stupid! With the insult to other Cores hanging in the air, I make the three Rogues escort Katrina to the entrance of my Dungeon before they all step outside. As soon as she steps over the threshold, a weight I didn''t know I was carrying is lifted from my Core. Ahhh. That''s what I''m talking about, Me.
She left. She actually left. You asked her to go outside... And she did.
Hehe. I know. Simple, right?
Quite. It really does make a difference having monsters that can communicate with humans.
If I keep this up, I might start going by Abi the Genius.
If that were the case, your Core would not be in pieces right now.
Always with the harsh logic, Me. I''m really glad I have 5 floors right now. My Core is much further from the surface than it used to be. If I was in that state that when Peaches the Priceless arrived, I may very well have crumbled away in the presence of her cuteness. Bringing my stats up shows me how far I am from my next level, which is quite far so I close it in a huff. I suppose, in a strange kind of way, this aspect of life is similar to that of a human. Every level always requires more XP than the last, just like the class system. System? Hmm. System? Hmm. A nagging feeling tugs away at the back of my mind, and I''m not talking about Me. I don''t have time from introspection right now as Katrina and the others are waiting on me. It doesn''t appears to be raining from my limited point of view, but I don''t want to keep them out there any longer than necessary. Saying that, I choose the upgrade for Shack City since Katrina''s judgemental attitude left me feeling like a bad landlord.
Shack City has been upgraded to Hospitable Homes: Proper properties made from actual bricks From Shack to Home all amenities a Rogue might need are provided within these modest walls A new feature has been unlocked: Hospitable Home: 10DP Reward: 8 XP
In the center of the first floor, the housing provided by Dungeon Core Abi surpasses expectations and breaka stands. From Shack to Home, like The System rightfully pointed out, houses with fully functioning featuring are now available to my general population. Don''t get me wrong, they''re not mansions, but I shouldn''t find myself catching another eye roll from Katrina at least. Not that I think she was dissin'' my dungeon, but the standard of living her saviours were hacing to endure. I get it. Every building is a sandy yellow and has red roof. With four windows, two upstairs and two downstairs, a blue door and space for a garden, it''s not too shaby anymore. It was good that this is a third-tier upgrade, otherwise they wouldn''t be much better off than the She''d of Salvation. Although nothings as bad as a first tier feature. I wonder what she''ll think now? It''s not as though I did it for Katrina. Even if her impression might have moved it up my list, the people that sleep there definitely deserve them. As I reach that conclusion, the very people I''m talking about rush over and start housing up. It makes me happy that they''re excited having a proper place to calk home. Nobody moved that fast when it was upgraded to Shack City, let me tell you. That''s 80DP gone in the blink of an eye. 174 left. For some reason, I create a small park by the western wall. Once I''m finished, I''m both happy and sad whilst also being slightly confused. With a pond in the middle, I filled the entire area with grass and added footpaths for people to walk around. Being able to alter features came in handy since a lot of purchases come square shaped. The ambience it creates beneath the blue sky once I''m finished is warm and friendly. But if the system wouldn''t have given me a sun when I made my boo-boo, I don''t think I would have ever created anything like this. Who would walk around a park in the middle of a dark ass dungeon? No one sane, that''s for sure. I wouldn''t passed someone like Talon though. Either way, people need somewhere to sit now and benches are going to create themselves. Selecting a Wooden Chair from my List, I stretch it length ways and add a little extra DP to reinforce the wood. Confirming it''s location, the bench is created and I''m awarded with my second creation notification.
A new feature has been created: Wooden Bench: 6DP
In total, I place four benches around the pond, adding resting points to the serene location. Now I''m going to have to ask my Rogues to bring some nice looking trees back. They might need a bigger party for that though? I''d like to get a nice variety going once everything''s resolved. Pushing away thoughts of The System giving me an actual park after my hard work, one that will probably look better than mine, I switch the Trap Room with the empty one for now so that I don''t accidentally kill anyone. I''m not as weak as I used to be, although my broken Core might beg to differ. There''s a lot of distance between the damaged heart of my dneim and the surface. Not too mention I''m making some good numbers with these monsters. In the empty room next to my entrance, I summon two stone pillars and engrave rules into them using my will. These aren''t to benefit those that already reside here. Instead, these are for people entering the Dungeon of their own volition. I may have over estimated what I wanted to say, however. I only managed a few, but I can always add more over time. For now, I have; 1. Do not cause harm to any other person inside the Dungeon. Attacking another person will be seen as attempted murder and you will be dealt with accordingly. 2. Disrespectful behaviour will not just be frowned upon. Action will be taken and, at best, you will be removed from the Dungeon. At worst, you will be removed by the dungeon. I really wanted to write eaten on that last part, but I settled for emphasising instead because I couldn''t see it going down well. 3. Tributes offered to the dungeon, will be accepted graciously. Yeah, I know. They''re weak at best, but my brain isn''t functioning since I''m trying to speed though. I''m trying my best, but with my broken Core I''m scared strenuous brain activity might damage it more. Seeing as how the creative juices don''t seem to be flowing from me right now, I''ll do an upgrade. They don''t require me to be creative in any way. The well that provided water to the Rogues has become obsolete since each home come with access to its own source of running water. In the street between the homes, the once-valuable feature has become more burden than benefit. I use Examine and purchase the upgrade seeing how The System seems to be my best friend at the minute and has been helping me out more than is justifiable. Not that I know this as fact, rarher it''s the general impression I''m receiving from her. Plus, this is a third tier upgrade. It should be good anyway, right?
Deep Well has been upgraded to Fishing Hole: Since you no longer need this feature for water, it has changed into more to benefit the Core who created it A new feature has been unlocked: Adventurers are now able to earn XP in your dungeon by catching fish. The amount of XP they receive depends on quality of your fish. New loot unlocked: Rod of Reeling: 2DP Awarded: 4 XP
See what I mean? These descriptions seem to be her way of communicating, in a strange yet awkward way, or so I believe. Then again, I''ve been known to make an ass out of myself on a few occasions now. So I wouldn''t put too much stock into my own ideas. Either way, there is now a Fishing Hole instead of a Well blocking my street which needs moving this before I can let the ladies back in. Placing it beside the park, I''m trying to keep the relaxing features together. It seems like a good enough location for the moment and I''m pleased enough to call it. Last minute purchases complete, it''s time to get this tour started for real. Chapter 19 : The Warm Up Tour Outside the entrance, my Rogues bring Katrina in after I give them the all clear. I''ve done all I can and it''s time to show it off. Seeing how Katrina isn''t the person I''d pegged her to be, I''m not as worried as was the last time she set foot inside my Dungeon. Knowing that she isn''t destruction orientated either is a huge load off. Let''s hope this tour goes well. Or as well as something like touring inside a dungeon can. Now that there''s a fully-functioning sun inside the mountain that houses my dungeon, it couldn''t get any stranger. Let''s be honest. Regardless, this will be a good warm-up for when the real Categoriser turns up. As we make our way back through the dungeon, Katrina notices the changes that have been made as I explain myself to Ali. She relays my information and I double down on my idea to borrow her whenever I have to talk to anyone from outside. What''s strange is that I''m unable to add anything to the small room that my houses my entrance. I can add tunnels that lead from it, but that''s all I can do. It sucks, really. The room after that has been turned into a welcoming area for adventurers. This seems to confuse Katrina, but she doesn''t say anything. She just stares at Ali with skepticism written across her face. It''s not that bad, is it? There''s rules to read and I''ll even add some other features later. Why isn''t she asking me about it?
She might be type that holds her questions till the end.
Fine. Let''s see how long that lasts. "Why did you get rid of the traps? Why do you have a hole in your wall? What were those large rocks for again, rules?" It wasn''t long. Halfway down the tunnel to the Guard House, Katrina looked back before releasing her curiosity. I wish she didn''t. She just pointed out a couple of flaws I didn''t even realise where there. First, I swear to the Gods that I closed off Barry''s original tunnel. I can''t do it now with Katrina in me, so I''ll do that later. Second, the rules I have written for the adventurers are at the top of the monoliths. Right at the top. For Core''s sake. At least I can explain the traps. I''m not telling her about the other two. I''m trying to come off as an intelligent Dungeon. Confused as to why the man-eating dungeon would replace her primary defences with large stones that have nothing on, I get Ali to tell her that I''m still thinking of the rules. I don''t even acknowledge the ball-sized hole in my wall. "It was... An experiment." Until I gave in because she wouldn''t stop asking. This Catergoriser knows more than she''s letting on, I''m telling you. Either way, I give her a curt reply before changing topics. Letting her in on a another Dungeon secret. Nothing that I deemed special though. Letting her know I can swap rooms and features at no cost aslong as there are no humans on the floor, it''s only the last part that catches her attention. The traps have been moved so that I don''t accidentally kill anyone before they have the chance to show me they''re not after my heart. I don''t need potential suitor, thank you. People like that will be eaten with extreme prejudice by myself or Colin. That sounds convincing, right? Not the part about me or Colin, but the not wanting to kill anyone by accident.
It sounds believable. More so coming from Ali.
I can''t fault Me as he isn''t wrong. Ali could sell rat skewers in future restaurant and people will probably still pay for them. She''s a charmer that one. Her hair''s the same vibrant green as mine was and her eyes match, ahh It''s almost like looking into a mirror. But even better because this image can cook like a boss. "These rocks of rule, or rule rocks if you will, are there to inform my visitors of what ''is'' or ''isn''t'' acceptable when entering me." I let Katrina know the reasoning behind their appearance is basically to show my hospitability and understanding nature. Gentle, but firm. And sweet and succulent is always fine.
Abi!
Getting away from myself, we arrive at the Guard House. The defensive structure is placed in a way that it covers the entire exit and the doors that lead inside are the only way through. Hana and Mira would usually be inside, ready to question prospective visitors and guests. People that are happy to oblige to the Dungeon''s will are more than welcome to step into her paradise. If they''re not we let them in any way. The chances of them leaving again, however, turn to ash the minute they pass the Priests or attack anyone I''ve imposed my will and dictated my dictatorship. These guys should know who is and isn''t fair game now. As we enter the feature, I almost regret bumping Shack City up the queue instead of doing the Guard House. This place is still a ruin, even after the debris and clutter have been removed. The next upgrade takes it to tier three, so that''s something. I can''t wait till everything tier four like the Retreat. My Dungeon will look banging then. Not that my points are anywhere near enough for that after my last spree. I don''t miss the disappointment on Mira''s face as we leave them behind. They have a job to do after all and I''ve still got the five-star interpreter Ali with me. Although, her mood might be because I didn''t upgrade their feature rather than the fact we''re leaving them here. I know, Mira. I feel your pain. It saddens me to the Core and I feel worse than before over their conditions. Then I realise that these two Rogues have had a 24/7 position with no relief and I feel even worse. I''ll make sure to correct that mistake before upgrading the feature. Everyone deserves time off and I swear, the whole Dictator thing was a joke. It was just a joke. Dungeonin'' ain''t cheap ya know. Katrina''s seen two rooms and a feature. Think she''ll make it all the way around?
Her collapse was probably due to shock.
Yeah. Mira''s a stunner, right?
Quite. That''s not what I was referring to, however. It''s more likely that it was Mira addressing you as Master, that did it. Plus, the surplus of goods you created her before she stepped inside didn''t help.
Oh.I suppose that does makes more sense. Hehe. You agreed that Mira was beautiful though.
You just... Caught me off guard.
That''s shocking all on its own, but at least you know beauty. Exiting the Guard House, we find ourselves back in the System-created room and the humans are immediately blinded by the light. I might have to find a way to dull the sunshine temporarily. When their eyes adjust, I don''t miss Katrina''s shock at the houses further inside. Of she wasn''t shocked so safe, she is now and that''s exactly what I wanted. There isn''t exactly an easy in'' for a Dungeon Core to be accepted by society. It''s even harder knowing that other Cores are out there belittling my efforts by doing what normal Cores do. I could have done any upgrade I wanted in reality, but I chose what I needed based on someone else''s oponion. I''m too impressionable. Anyway, what''s done is done. It''s lucky for me, the Expert is acting like I expected her too. Being a former human, I know how appeal to there feelings. Having already been in the sun-filled room before I politely kicked them out, that isn''t anything new. The way the red, slat roofs catch the sun, however, is a different story and Katrina is quick to point out the living standards of her saviours should at least be that standard. Is it strange that she still refers to them as people? Then again, don''t I do the same thing? It''s getting harder and harder to think of them as monsters now. I was just curious to know if Katrina would she still act the same way if Trixie was the one that saved her? Probably. Trixie is a stunner. We head down the street towards the Retreat and Katrina can''t keep her facade from breaking. Sweet A and B catch her attention briefly, arguing over rooms outside the closest home. Ali also claims herself a detached house on the otherside as we pass and seeing the adorable smile on the face of my culinary hottie, I''m filled with the same happiness as she is. The moment isn''t lost on the apprentice either. She seems to be even more pleased with the recent upgrade after witnessing Ali''s joy first hand. With a smile like that though, Ali can melt hearts faster than a fireball. "How did you change all the huts so fast?" Biting her lower lip and looking super cute in the process, I almost gave away a secret that Me certainly wouldn''t have been happy about because of a pose. "First of all, they weren''t huts. They were Shacks. If you''re going to diss them, at least do it right. Second, I can''t tell you that! It''s super confidential Dungeon information that I don''t feel comfortable sharing. Would you be happy sharing your bra size with any old adventurer? Exactly." What if it was your friendly-neighbourhood Dungeon Core asking?
Abi!
Sorry. I was a just messing. I was mesmerised by how the sun was reflecting off her. I''m telling you, the beauty factor in this Dungeon is off the charts. All I can see is the Catergoriser, cuddled up in Trixie''s snow-white fur basking in the sunshine. Laid in a meadow whilst colourful flowers dance in the window, the rest of my family gather behind them for what-can-only-be-described-as a picture-perfect portrait. Ali was the very first being I ever summoned and the feeling of power I had then is not lost on me now. I never would have imagined that the crowd before me now would swell to such numbers in such a short span of time. All together and in one space for the first time, it honestly looks like a miniature army. If I didn''t love the fact that I created them, I could definitely see myself being scared of them. Samantula especially. Even some of those from the monstrous element of my Dungeon are fairly good looking. Violet and Peaches spring to mind. There''s even potential to improve since they all have more evolutions to undergo. I seriously think that making good-looking people is my superpower.
You do not have superpowers.
Are you sure, Me? I was kind of stunned for a second back there. Katrina must be getting prettier whilst she''s here, or something like that. It''s a good thing she called the Shacks huts. I might not have been able to stop myself otherwise.
Maybe you just like women?
Woah! Where did that come from, Me? I''m not opposed to women, but I like everyone for your information. Everyone has the potential to become hotties. Setting my companion set straight over the preferences of his Core, the tour continues. The Rogues Retreat looks amazing under the sun and stands out superbly as the apprentice has noticed. It wants too for 160DP. The tier four feature is the best-looking building in my entire Dungeon and Katrina is blown away at its magnificence. It confused me momentarily. I mean, not only did the apprentice eat here, but she slept in one of the suites too. She''s definitely seen the inside of the Retreat. Then I remember that the indoor sun was sponging everyones attention when we left, not the structure itself. Now that she is face to face with it though, she really is in awe. I suppose I''ve never really taken the time to look at all the details. I''ve been too busy Dungeonin'' to take everything in. Having an actual person inside me is a good way to slow down and take stock of the little things. For example. I never actually noticed that the feature has its own sign outside that says ''The Rogues'' Retreat''. Big, white-tubed letters are displayed across the front of the building above the door. It''s also rather large so how I missed that one, I have no idea. I guess we''ll never know.
May I offer a suggestion?
If it''s that I''m not the most attentive person, then no. Love what you''re reading? Discover and support the author on the platform they originally published on.
.....
Me! Were you actually going to say that again?
I thought you would find it humorous.
Yeah, OK. It wasn''t bad. I''d smile if I could.
Like Katrina?
Bigger, Me. Even bigger. Knowing that I can''t smile anymore, I take comfort in Katrina''s. Until she turns to Ali and asks, "How is it possible for the Dungeon to create building like this?" She''s lost in wonder and to be fair, so am I. What can I say that would satisfy her curiosity without giving away too much? Any idea, Me?
You could still kill her?
You know that''s not happening. Hmm. How about, "It was one of the features I was created with, but that''s about all I can tell you, sorry." It''s almost the truth, if you forget about the Rogues that had to be created to unlock it. Katrina begrudgingly accepts my answer whilst still muttering phrases like ''it shouldn''t be possible'' and ''it''s so beautiful'' for everyone to hear. Passed the Retreat, we don''t have to travel very far before we reach the next features. We''re then greeted by Tara, Lara and Lucinda from the Shop of Secrets and the Cracked Cauldron. "Hello, Master," they voice in unison on our approach. "Hey ladies. Be nice to our guest, OK? Try not to fleece your first customer," the trio look pained at my words. "We need to show Categorisers that we''re fair, generous and other decent shit like that. I don''t want to die again and trust me, neither will you. On the other hand, merchants, if or when we get any, you can rob blind." That receives large smiles. The prospect of wealthy merchants, with deep pockets, is a potential opportunity for us to grow. Caught by the women and their devious sales tactic, Katrina looks at Ali in panic. "Don''t worry. No harm will come to you unless you pass the priests, remember?" She kindly reminds the worried apprentice as she is led into the Broken Cauldron by Lucinda. That''s my fault. I shouldn''t have written the rules so high.
A faulty start is not a good omen.
Back to dramatic, I see.
The future does not bode well for Me.
I want to roll around on the floor at that one. If only I could. Ok, Me. No messing around now. What''s up?
I... Don''t know.
Good. Admittance is the first step, buddy. I''m proud of you. Exiting the potion shop, Katrina is quickly snatched up by the other merchants and guided to their stall. Which gives me some more Me time. Next up is the hard part. You have to admit you have feelings.
I most certainly do not have feelings.
Are you sure?
Yes.
Really sure?
Yes, Abi.
Super sure?
Abi!
Completely sure?
Stop it.
Why?
Because it''s annoy...
Go on, Me. You can do it. You were nearly there.
They''re not feelings. They''re... Just bugs.
Bugs my shiny green Core. They''re feelings and you know it. Ali has a huge smile plastered on her face. Not the same as when she called dibs on her new home, but like she''s trying to surpress her humor. It''s almost like she can hear our conversation.
I can instruct monsters on your behalf so of course they can see me.
I never even thought about that. If you can do what I do, why does The System even need me?
I can not do everything you do. I also don''t know why you were chosen.
Interrupting the sour mood that was about to take hold, Katrina returns and the tour continues. That was a close one. On the way to the next feature, Katrina surprises me with how happy she is with her purchases. She rambles to Ali about her new potions and how the variety in my dungeon will only grow with time. She also makes me giddy when she says my Dungeon is almost like a regular town. Other than the fact that it''s inside a mountain, it has all the staple beginnings of a homestead. Almost. Another short walk and we arrive at the Swindler''s Den, greeted by Jack and Koniva. Once again, Katrina is taken back. This time, it isn''t due to their wiley words or promises to win big. The Con Men were appropriately named by The System since they''re a natural con to the eyes. With the physique of a bodybuilder, their true power is in the brains they use to device people during games. She won''t have any money left by the time she leaves here.
It''s unlikely, but they may let her win a few games. Just to keep her playing.
Not when her opponent is Shifty Jack. Nevermind that. What about what you were saying a moment ago?
What about?
Don''t play dumb with me, Mr. You know damn well what I''m talking about. Why did the system make me a Dungeon Core when she can create them herself?
I''m sorry, Abi. I honestly don''t know. If it''s any consolation, I also find it to be a rather strange thing to do. More so now that you have mentioned it.
I know, right? I ended up being turned into a Dungeon thanks to the whims of an outdated program and I don''t even have anyone to complain about it. Well, apart from you. Stupid Gods and System. I just don''t get it. How does she know what I want and need, yet Me here is clueless, even though he was created by her in the first place? There''s too many questions bouncing around my mind that I can''t deal with right now, not whilst the tour is underway. If I survive long enough to see myself not get crushed horribly, then I''ll have to find a way to have a conversation with The System at some point. On that thought, I catch Koniva with his hand in Katrina''s pouch as she argues fiercly with Jack about something to do with the game. "Koniva. Are you thick? She is the only person you can''t steal from. Well... Her and other Catergorisers. We need them to give us a pass so we can operate openly. How are you suppose to get more customers to fleece if we''re killed after your first attempt?" Reluctantly, he removed his hand bringing nothing out with it. It feels a little harsh telling them not to do the things that I specifically created them to do, but it''s only for now. Anyone who turns up that isn''t an Categoriser can have their boxers swindled from them for all I care. That''s the risk you take when you gamble. Hearing the harsh words I threw at his doppelganger, Jack drops his side of the argument and concedes the game. Winning her money back, Katrina is psyched and ready to go again. If we let her continue though, she might carry on until she has nothing left and Ali has to literally drag her away from the table to continue the tour. Back outside, Katrina manages to control her impulses and bids farewell to the Con Men. Not before promising to return to show them her skills. If only she knew what really happened. Things are going quite well so far, even if I do say so myself. Katrina was a bit off to start with, but my guys have pulled it back. The Sparring Ground is next and Katrina is in good spirits, still smiling smugly after her victory over Jack. As we get closer, Sandy and Senna can be seen sparring off against each other in a dazzling display of skill. I mean, seriously, they look more skilled than I ever did. It''s not even fair. How''s that even possible? We watch only for a few minutes as Katrina mentions she''s not the biggest fan of combat. After her last expedition she would like to stay away from violence as much as possible. Not wanting to offend her, we move on to the see the Priests. It certainly wasn''t because someone was feeling slightly jealous of their offspring. That''s a fact. I''m more shocked than Ali and Katrina when we arrive. Hardly blocking the tunnel that leads further inside my Dungeon, seven people are praying outside the Shed of Salvation. Seven. As in, 3+4. Since when was religion popular with dungeon monsters? I say seven, but only four are actually praying. Zen and Ang look to be getting an earful from the Avos the Disciple. With some sort of scripture in hand, he is preaching proudly from the top of a crate he''s managed to acquire from somewhere. Apart from those assigned to the shed a pair, two Rogue and two Vagabonds are also present. Rocky, Baluka, Dum and Dee are all on their knees, praying silently on the floor of the dungeon. That''s a sight I wasn''t expecting to see. I wonder who they''re praying too? Katrina seems to be thinking the same thing, until she gets down beside them and joins in. Ali looks at me for guidance, but I don''t know what to say. I wasn''t what you would call religious in my last life. In fact, I probably cursed out the Gods more than most so... "Let her be," is all I say as we watch her pray. Ali doesn''t join and I don''t have knees, so... Who would I even pray to anyway. Even if I could, after gaining insight from Me none of those lazy bastards are worth it. I won''t say that to my Priests though, they''ve still got a job to do. If praying relieves boredom and fills up their downtime, I''m happy for them to do just that. Avos was quick to notice Katrina join the delegation and a smile that screams he''s scheming something is quickly washed from his face. The apprentice didn''t notice since her eyes are closed, but it''s a good job I''m here to have her back. Even though I''m supposed to be dangerous territory for my predator. A quick slap with a tentacle from my will makes Avos almost choke from shock as I laugh my core off. That was so cool. That''s also what you get for scheming on my Catergoriser... I mean, Katrina. The sky turns orange and Katrina has to blink a few times to adjust after opening her eyes. She was praying for quite a while and the sun has started to set, it''s beautiful and scary at the same time. Damn my Dungeon is amazing. Although, I''m slightly worried about what''s going to happen when the miniature ball of fire sets on my floor. Surely The System wouldn''t have created it only to have it destroy me at the end of the day, right? Right? How many gods does she know? Since I don''t plan on letting people live that head passed the Priests, we finish our tour in the park. The Fishing Pond got a bigger reaction than I thought it would when she found out XP came from catching my fish. It''s just another reason to come inside Abi. Sitting down on the bench, Katrina and Ali watch the last of the sunset together as I float close by. I wish I could enjoy the soft grassy area and the warmth basking over the two woman. Jealousy is a proper creeper, you know? It finds its way from everywhere. Fortunately, the apprentice doesn''t seem to be in the best mood and I ask Ali to find out why. I know it wasn''t the best tour, but there''s no need to be upset over it. "Why?" Katrina''s single word questions are killing me. There isn''t much for me to go on when she asks them like that. I don''t think she''d be satisfied with a "Why not?" either. "Why do you want to help humans? We''re a terrible species. People are mean and nasty. They do despicable things and only look out for themselves. So, why? Why would you want to help such awful race? You''ve create such a wonderous space, yet the people you''ve done it for don''t deserve it. So, why? Why would you do this for them?" The waterworks have started, but I was waiting for this. I''m ready. That is a good question. Isn''t it, Me?
It would seem difficult to understand from her point of view. For you, however, it''s as simple as a primary and secondary objective.
Even if it is that easy to classify my direction in life, I still want to keep hold of my humanity. It''s hard to let go. If I did, wouldn''t I just be like every other dungeon? To answer Katrina''s question, I let her in on one last secret. The people she referred to are going to be used as fuel for my future. The Categoriser didn''t bat an eyelid at that sentence and I can''t help but feel she''s warming up to me. Helping humanity whilst progressing as a Dungeon Core are the only things The System expects of me. What''s great is that both objectives can be completed by doing one simple task. All I have to do, is clean up the turd. Once I get rid of the shit, rainbows should start to sprout. The Syndicate''s contracts will be instrumental in doing just that. We''ve already got our first target and I need to deal with that as soon as possible. As the sun disappears, we''re not destroyed and darkness creeps its ugly mush back into my dungeon. We arrive at Talia''s and all I want is for it to be morning again. I didn''t realise how much I missed sunlight until now. Ali hurries off to prepare supper with what she has left and I rope Talia into being my new public speaker. There''s no one else around so it''s not like she has customers to tend. Over the course of the night, Talia interprets to a calm Katrina until someone else is roped into the role Talia is a professional at her job and the sight isn''t lost on the apprentice. She can tell good work ethic when she sees it. During the conversation, I explain what some of my buildings should hopefully become and Katrina goes into detail about Categorisation magic as we begin bonding. Alba and Nessa return, bringing an assortment of large, woodlands creatures that''ll end up going to Trixie and her Pack. It wasn''t a bad amount of DP and XP compared to the Tweedles though. Tagging out, Rocky and Baluka head out of my entrance. Passing Veris as she returns, they offer greeting to the Dungeon''s Boss Monster. Katrina has just swallowed when Veris walked in and found herself choking on undigested meat. The white-haired goddess that entered slaps her on the back as she passes and the apprentice breathes again. Her meat may have hit a disgruntled Rogue, but everything''s fine. Don''t complain. Veris didn''t seem very shocked to see Katrina, however. In fact, after slapping her, she didn''t even look back. She downed a mug of ale, a bowl of stew and grabned Sweet C and D''s from Peaces before heading straight back out. "Cya, Boss." was all I heard as my Veris left the Dungeon for a second time today. Katrina watched her leave before a skin Ali about her. It''s like we''re winning over her heart and breaking down her barriers, subtly healing her pain at the same time. My Dungeon not only makes people beautiful, but it cures their misery too. Damn, I''m good.
Sigh...
Don''t worry, Me. You''re pretty damn good yourself.
?O-oh... Well, yes. Thank you.?
Hehe. As the night comes to a close, the Rogues, Vagabonds and Con Me all head home. Talia cleaning the bar down as Ali leaves with Katrina. The apprentice decided to stay with her as to not be alone and confirmed my suspicions about us growing in her. Although, she didn''t have mask it by saying she wanted to check the standards inside. This apprentice has got some cheek, you know? With the Catergoriser bunking at the chef''s, I''m left with nothing to do. Lookin through my notifications, I realise that Veris never dropped anything off when she returned. I''ll ask her about it next time she''s back. Coral and Mystique should also be back in a few hours. Baluka and Rocky won''t be back around until Katrina''s waking up. With no way to spend my points now that my guest is fast asleep, I nothing to do except admire the beauty in my dungeon. Which isn''t as fun during the night now that I''ve been blessed by sunlight. It''s super boring so I decide to give the dreaded meditation another try. I''m not gonna lie. I''m cacking it after last time. Now that I know how I died, I should experience Meditation like a normal Dungeon Core. Right, Me?
Hopefully.
I was really hoping for more than your hopes, you know?
And I really wish I could give it to you.
Did you just crack a dirty joke?
It was your imagination.
Well, that''s gotta be a good sign. With dirty jokes on the brain, I really hope it is Meditation and not Terrortation like last time. I just don''t want to see it again. Imaginary fingers crossed, here we go.
Just incase you wanted some status.
Dungeon Core Abi Level 15: 95/390 XP until next level 5 Floors 38 Rooms 44 Tunnels 115 Monsters 1 Contract Monster 65 Traps 28/400 DP Available
Chapter 20 : Terrortation Not one to ignore a command, Noir dissapears into the shadows and leaves the dungeon with his partner. After being out for a short period of time, however, his frustration is already getting the better of him. "Why!?" His mighty weapon soars through the air, taking the Elder Boar with it. The oversized pig squeels, finding itself pinned to a large, oak tree. Bleeding profusely, the Boar flails helplessly and only worsens the injury. Gravity does the rest as Noir''s wooden shaft stands stiff and the Boar''s weight finishes itself off. The shrieks and cries of its loved ones would have been the last sounds it heard, had a certain Shadow Walker not been shouting the entire forest down. "I''m already the strongest! I should be Masters... Bodyguard, or maybe even the Boss Monster?" Noir''s spear reappears in his hand as he skewers a second Elder Boar. Stepping out from the shadows, Carrie swings her blade twice and the two Boars behind Noir lose their heads. Not a single speck blood land on her black and white checkered dress. "Why do you have to be so childish. We may be the strongest of Master''s children, but we still obtain more power." Carrie''s words are a blade to counter his own, for all Noir wants is to return to the dungeon. To see his Master. "We''ve already gained a few levels from these Boar''s. We should head home now, something is not right." Carrie rolls her eyes. It''s the fifth time Noir''s brought up the subject. It would help his case if he hadn''t said the moment they left, however. "You''ve been saying that since we left, so how do you expect me to believe you? Do you wish to please the Master, Noir?" Carrie leads her prey into the perfect trap and he follows willingly, "Yes! Of course!" Noir''s words echo out through the forest and another Elder Boar is bacon. . "Do you wish to make the Master proud?" She continues, knowing she has already won the psychological battle. She sidestep the Boar charing her from behind and Noir spears it with a smile across his face. "YES!" He bellows fiercely. Determination welling up inside him, five more ingredients hit the forest floor after a mini tornado makes sausage meat of them all. "Then we must do what the Master has commanded. We must learn all that we can." Seven Piglets disappear into shadows as Dropper appears behind them. "We must raise our level and become even stronger." Momma Pig follows right after. So does Papa, Uncle George, Princess Pepper, and Rolly Poly Jim. Dropper now has Noir in the palm of her hand. His eyes blaze with passion and his body covers itself in shadow. Determination exudes from his core and his muscles tense, ready to release like a taught bow string. "First we will rid the forest of these swine. Then we''ll return home to drop off our tribute before finding somewhere inhabited by humans. That way you can inform the master of our progress." That was just the cherry on an already-oversized cake. Elder Boar after Boar disappeared into the shadow in the wake of Noir''s excitement. He could speak to the Master soon. All he had to do was get rid of a few pigs. It was such a simple task m, he had forgotten why he was complaining in the first place. One pack. Two packs. Four packs The forest was silent as Noir stopped to listen. Nothing could be heard. Not even the birds dared move, lest they want shafting out of the sky. Noir smiled as Carrie rose into view from the shadows. For once, she was staring like she wanted to slap him. That had to be a good sign. "Are we done?" His words hang in the air as his partner closes her eyes. Listening closely, she relaxes before shrugging. "What does that mean? Are we done? It means we''re done, right? You didn''t say no. Yes!" Noir screams and shows his excitement as he dances in a circle. "She''s going to be so proud. I didn''t even count them, but there''s easily more than a hundred of the pigs in my storage. Look!" "Good. You''ve made the Dungeon Core proud. She should be..." In the bushes behind Noir, deaf-old Grandpa Pig sticks is snout out and locks eyes with the two Shadow Walkers. He then sees the prizes on display and swiftly books it. Running as fast as his old trotters will carry him. Carrie smikes as Noir''s shoulders slump. "Okay. But these are the last ones. We can''t kill all the Boars. It''ll be one less source of XP and we need them to repopulate so that we level up. So, promise we''ll go back after we kill these pigs?" Wanting clarification before he paints the forest red again, Carrie rolls her eyes before answering. As soon as she agrees, Noir dissapears to out an end to the end. "See what I mean. He''s just like a child. He needs constant assurance, it you talk him into almost anything," she tells the shadows beneath her. "Yes. We will return after killing the Boar''s. No. You don''t need to help him. He needs the experience more than the levels." Confirming her thoughts, Carrie fades in to darkness beneath her. Off to watch Noir thin the numbers on one of the forest''s many inhabitants. -Noir and Carrie, Monster Killers
Terrortation is a mixture of the feeling of terror, experienced during my first session of meditation, and the name of the activity performed.
Terrortation is not a real word.
We''ve already had this conversation, remember? If I said it, that makes it''s a word and the thought of it still scares the shit out of me. What if I can''t wake up, or worse. What if I''m forced to remember something I don''t want to? Thoughts aside, I''m still going to try it. There''s nothing else to do whilst everyone sleeps and jealousy can make a Core do some crazy things. Ok, Me. If I don''t wake up and any problems arise that needs my attention, you''re in charge. Got it?
I will not let you down, Abi.
Good. Please, don''t kill the apprentice either.
I will not. Well, I will at least try my best not too, right?
I know I started that, but you took it too far. I mean, I know that you meant it as a joke, but it''s still a little sketchy since you mentioned so many times earlier.
I will make sure no harm comes to her for you. I promise.
That''s more reassuring. Thank you, Me. With that settled, I disperse Manifestation and close all of my overview screens until only one remains. Barry pounds away on his entrance to make sure it doesn''t close, yet all I see is the hole getting wider. Putting it out of mind, I close the last screen. The same darkness when my life as a Dungeon Core started surrounds me. It''s not just darkness though, it''s the absence of anything and everything. A space that should by all rights shouldn''t exist, but does. Stranger yet, it how this absence of nothing responds to my will. Not only do I control screens that show every location in my Dungeon, anything featured on either of my lists can be viewed in here by a single thought. That''s the sort of place my overview is. My damaged Core comes to mind and a beacon of light appears in the darkness. I try and relax, basking in the comfort of a soft, green hue but can''t keep eyes of the damaged part. It makes me sad so I dismiss the image and the void takes me once more. With everything that''s happening right now, being inside the dark confines of my own mind is a little pertubing. I stick at it though. Boring as it until eventually, colours start to appear and shapes take form. Dancing around, they merge together in a mix of patterns until context unclouds. my mind. A scene plays out before me, but it''s not the same one as before. Which is great because I don''t have to see that happening to Anya again, but it is a far cry from what I actually wanted. This tale has been unlawfully obtained from Royal Road. If you discover it on Amazon, kindly report it. Instead of the swift death that was supposed to be assured, the content seems to have gotten worse this time. With my armour missing and my garments askew -I can only pray that I managed to make it away before what-the-worst-of-me-thinks took place, could take place Sprinting down the linear tunnel of the Dungeon the Goblins called home, Abi the Human takes turn after turn with no idea where she''s going. It''s sad to see my former self in such a state. It cuts me deep. No matter what I try though, the vision won''t end. I can even leave her to my fate because for some reason we''re tethered together. Even though we''re connecred by the green tentacle of my Dungeon''s will, she can''t hear me. Old Abi is oblivious to my Presence, ignorant to the fact I''m watching events unfold. A passenger, along for what''s-guaranteed-to-be a shitty ride. Even if she could hear me, what help would I be? I don''t even remember this. For all I know, I could end up leading her to our death. It''s best I just keep my mouth shut and get through this. Not that I do. I would like to stop now. Thank you. I want to go home. I''m OK as a Dungeon, really. Let''s end the session here. I really want to quit. Come on let me leave. I want to go. Overview! Manifestation! Nothing works. Typical. Where are we going now? I''m pretty sure Kal is behind us still. Abi the Escapee wouldn''t be running so hard if there wasn''t a threat. Speaking of running, this path has been heading straight forwards for a while now. Don''t tell me, this is... I can never let Me know what I learned here. Ever. My reputation is on the line. If he finds out I stole an idea from a Goblin-spawning Dungeon, I''m done for. Abi the Mourner sheds tears for our fallen comrade whilst running from another. Anya was more than just a comrade, but I''m trying to keep it mellow so that I don''t join myself in sorrow. She could do without me wailing as she dies. Why is that I feel so detached watching myself flee in futility. Is it because I know how it ends already? I don''t think it''s fair that I have witness the context though. Isn''t it good enough that I''m growing fond of being a Dungeon Core? My words fall on dead ears. I''d ask The System for help, but I''m pretty sure this is her doing. If normal Dungeon Cores can meditate then the reason I can''t and am here, must span from whatever messed with my reincarnation in the first place. Hence, The System. That bitch. I don''t even care if she takes away the sun, she''s going to get a piece of my mind when I get out of here. Not the controlled part either. Dragged along, I consider the possibility that my mind is making all this up as we go alone. Two Goblins get closer as Abi the Desperate increase her speed, leaning into the shadows of the wall. With armour or weapons, stealth is her best shot. A swift death by knife to the face would be appreciated too. That doesn''t happen and, emerging from the shadow by the closest Goblin, it''s throat gushes with blood as it''s weapon is stolen. The Goblin''s knife ends up lodged in the eye socket of the second and Abi the Badass takes both knives before picking up her pace. Maybe I am imagining it? That was pretty hardcore. Weapons acquired, she continues down the tunnel. Waiting, probably praying aswell, for the tunnel to split. Anything that might throw our pursuer off would be greatly appreciated. I should take note of this for my own layout. It''s not that I didn''t notice it before, but my Dungeon is quite easy to travel through. There are no mazes, no split paths and no dead ends. Not yet anyway as all that requires DP. There''s a few extra rooms here and there, but again they''re only there to meet the floor requirements. So, yeah. All my floor are linear and was to navigate. It''s a good job they''re full of Spiders. Coming at me down there will find you in a sticky situation... ... I forgot that Me''s not here. He would have had something to say to that one. It wasn''t like I wanted my first couple of floors to be a Dungeon walk. It''s also likely that I''ll be accepting guests for afternoon tea in my Core room either, so I suppose it doesn''t really matter. I was going for distance and that''s what I got. Five floors deep, my Core is safely tucked away with Colin. The tunnel continues to bare true and so does Abi the Athlete. A third Goblin dies without knowing it and, after being dragged along for what-felt-like miles, Abi is nothing but the Unlucky. Well, we''re screwed now. That''s obviously the Boss Room. Not that she knows that. Enjoy your naivety. I''m certainly not imagining this either. I doubt my mind would be able to make up something this cruel on its own. My old heart must be thumping away in her chest. If I was truly attached to my old self, I''d be scared of the reverberation from her panic. She might have been athlete, but everyone has a limit. She should at least catch her breath before what comes next, I''m sure she''s going to need it. The knowledge I lacked on dungeons was no ones fault but my own and in the three years we were a party, we only ever entered two. Contract postings to guard scholars don''t go up very often, not when they think they know it all. Even when they do, you have to be fortunate enough to be at the guild at the right time. Now, armed with information on the secrets of Dungeon Core life, I know damn well that behind this tunnel blocker. Going by the door, I would be absolutely gobsmacked if this isn''t the Boss Room. I''ll even tell Me about the tunnel. Carved into the front of the door is a Goblin Mage. A Fireball is set above an outstretched hand and in the other he holds a staff. Not catching that breath and barely giving the carving a second glance, Abi the Unpreceptive opens the doors. Ugly bastard. He better not kill you, Abi! "Oh Abi, where are you?" Kal''s words catch us both by surprise and I swear I felt goosebumps. His voice echoes down the never-ending tunnel, prompting my dilly-dallying self to propel us both through the heavy door and into the Boss Room. I want to say "What is she thinking?" but a known demon is much worse than an unknown one. Heaving the doors closed with laboured breathes, I scan the room behind her and see what she does not. Unlike his depiction outside, the Goblin Mage isn''t much bigger than a tier-one Goblin. They only thing they have what sets them apart from the rest, is their proficiency for magic. Fortunately, Rogue beats Mage in Chezz. Watching Abi the Cowardly quiver behind the door that offers zero protection, the Mage''s robe rustles as it begins to form a spell. The projectile launched through the air is faster though, even whilst thrown startled. Yeah. You better have not died to that Goblin either. "Abi?" The Mage''s corpse hits the ground with a thud as the voice of death beckons her from beyond. Terrified, she looks around for an escape route and finds another set of doors. However, they are not the type of doors that lead to stairwells. There''s only one thing that could possibly be behind there. My human self enters the last room she''ll ever enter, trying to keep the monster away and I''m dragged in behind her. Placing her hands on the door, she can''t afford to let the monster in. Fighting with all her strength, she pushes back as Kal tries to force the door open. I barely even notice as my eyes are locked on the Dungeon Core in the center of the room. This place is bare, Blue. Where are your chests? It looks like you don''t have a Colin either? I almost feel sorry for you having to spit out Goblins. Knowing secret information about Dungeon Cores would be suspenseful, if it wasnt something mundane. Instead, what I know is that Blue over there was probably asleep when all this happened. Unless it''s Voice Activated User Notification System was anything like Me, that is. Abi the Desperate''s eyes scan the room to find herself trapped. She also notices the elephant in the room and momentarily finds herself mesmerised. It''s the first time she''s ever seen a Dungeon Core, imagine if she could see me now. Wait, nevermind. After snapping out of it, she''s taken by despair. Lacking an exit of any kind, she ran herself in to a dead end. Trapped. Fear begins to overwhelm her again and tears fall anew. Wondering why I don''t remember, this is definitely the last room in the Dungeon and certainly a dead-end. Yet, I still can''t recall any of this happening. Why don''t I remember anything about my death? The second the thought entered my mind, I felt a tug pulling me towards myself. Who, by the way, is in no state to receive me as she even begun hyperventilating. The crack in her defences was all Kal needed and his sword is thrust through the door. A fresh line of blood lines the body I''m being pulled into as Kal enters the room. "Where you gonna go now, Abs?" The monster in human flesh grins sadistically. The same grin I didn''t want to see in the session. Breaking into a maniacal laugh, his presence is enough to crush what''s left of my former self''s spirit. Fortunately for her, she''s no longer in the driving seat and can take a personal moment. Don''t ask me how, but it''s Dungeon Core Abi''s turn to rock this bitch. Although, this bitch is knackered and Kal''s looking no worse for wear. Worse yet, now that I''m in control, my past memories are flooding into me like commit going backwards. Memories of the not-far-away future are also stored within and I find myself no better than Abi of the Past. Helpless. I know what''s about to happen, but I can''t prevent it in any way. Before I can even begin formulating a thought, Kal is swinging his sword at me and I counter with the appropriate stance. Or I would have, had passed-out me taken it from the Mage when she crossed the room. Instead, I''m now an arm down and pain overrides my fear. Fury swells inside me as momentum carries Kal forward. He gets a stump to the face and I scream, jumping back towards the center of the room and the inevitable conclusion my memories showed me. If it''s going to happen anyway, let''s not beat about the bush. I''ve already lost an arm and I''m not a glutton for punishment. No matter what Me or Veris might say. Landing beside the Dungeon Core, I use the dagger in my remaining hand to destroy the blue crystal. Even though I rushed it, there''s no way I would have let a monster like Kal get his hands on this power, not after what he did to Anya. Even if this is just a memory, I couldn''t bare to see that happen. It wouldn''t just be a disservice to my friend, but to my own memory. My thoughts then and what I think now, are no different. I''d do it again in a heartbeat. Consequences be damned. I feel like I''ve just absorbing the largest tribute ever and strength flows in to human body. At the same time, so does the blade of the person I once called my friend. He charges me across the room and impales me on the wall, I cough blood, but a smug smile still creeps across my lips. "Didn''t expect that... Did ya." More blood spills from my mouth as I struggle against the blade. Kal is furious. He grabs hold of me, thinking it''s over. Shaking me vigorously he screams in my face. In his rage, his spits vile words that a monster like him has no right saying. Now that I''ve been rendered incapable of movement by his weapon, he seems to have lost his senses as there''s still one trick up my sleeve. Or should I say a dagger? Not letting the opportunity pass me by, I lodge it in as far in his eye socket as I can. It wasn''t fast enough to be a kill shot, however. The monstrous Defender managed to pull back just in time to avoid my wrath. It still made him scream incoherently, making me feel slightly better. Impaled on the dungeon wall, I look down at the body I used to be so proud of. My green hair is stained in blood and sweat and my left arm is missing. Rammed through the center of my chest, Kal''s greatsword is the only thing keeping me alive. The moment it''s removed, that''s when Abi of the Past''s journey to reincarnate is sabotaged. Kal is curled up in pain on the Dungeon floor. Hopefully, he might bleed to death. He might even die before I do. Not that it''s a competition. "Abi?" He growls from the corner of the room as he glares at me with one good eye. I don''t want to answer him, but I do it anyway. I even know what he is going to say as this is my second time living this moment. Feeling emotions boil inside me and I don''t reply the same way I did in the past. Instead, I give him an answer that comes recommended from the Rogues'' Handbook itself. Pulling myself free from the blade, I smile one last time at Kal and tell him, "Go fuck yourself, dickhead!" With that, my terrortation session finally comes to an end. I''m relieved that my death wasn''t as bad as I thought it was and it''s one less thing to stress over.
Abi, a group of knights are camped outside your dungeon and the Categoriser is with them!
What?
You have been meditating for 12 hours.
Well isn''t that just a barrel of crap? Terrortation really does suck! Chapter 21 : The Experts Arrival A lot closer to than entrance and less than a day since his return to Orad, Eric Highgrove once again finds himself standing in front of the Dungeon-housing mountain and a shiver runs down his spine. Having not slept since the night before, the effort he put in to get everyone there has left him exhausted. Even with the stamina of an Direwolf, Eric''s legs buckle as his father dismounts his horse. The last known location of Katrina Katova, apprentice Catergoriser and a now-wanted criminal, looks somehow different to Eric that it did yesterday. Assuming his tired mind is playing tricks on him, the Expert''s son ignores the subtle differences as he watches the Knights make camp. Not employed by the local Lord, the men under the his father''s command were all paid by the Catergoriser himself. Outfitted with the best weapons and armour that money could buy, they provide him with his very own protection detail. More mercenary than Knight, the men drilling in stakes and erecting tents will do just almost anything for a fat bonus. Stood at the cusp of the Dungeon''s entrance, the Expert reaches out with his senses. Watching eagerly, Eric can''t help but feel giddy as he bounces in place. His prayers are about to be answered and his dream is going to come true. Best of all, his rival sealed her own fate the moment she entered the mountain of her own volition. His father''s thoughts weren''t that different either. The entire ride, Elric had been thinking of different ways he could remove the obstacle blocking his son''s path. Now that they had arrived, his lips twitched as he kept his back to the men. ''This couldn''t be better. Not only are we in the middle of nowhere, but this is the perfect opportunity to dispose of the evidence. With her gone, Eric should have no problem inheriting my title and keeping it in the family. Having her die in the Dungeon is much better than a trial in Ishda. I can''t afford that soppy Lord sparing her because of favoritism. Gifted or not, she deserves punishing for entering my Dungeons. To avoid that soft bastard sparing her, I''ll just enforce it myself. I know he has a soft spot Katrina. Fortunately, I don''t. Eric is he one person deserving in my eyes.'' Deciding the outcome he liked the most, Elric joined his men and son by the camp. He was proud of his son''s ingenuity and wanted to boast about it. Even though the Mercenaries guised as Knights were currently under his employ, loose lips sink ships is what people say and trust is hardest commodity to pay for. It''s fickle nature and fleeting ideals that drive men into the arms of money as a bag of gold is all it usually takes to loosen a tongue. "No one is to enter the Dungeon, other than myself. Make sure you guard the entrance and Eric until I return. If the apprentice comes out, subdue her and I''ll sort it out when I''m back." Brief orders are barked out as the Expert faces his son. "You''re staying here. Unclassified Dungeons can be dangerous since we don''t know what Monsters might be inside. Even traps are able to take out seasoned Adventurers if placed correctly and I don''t want you to get hurt." Eric doesn''t appear to be happy with his father''s order. That''s only his facade, however, and inwardly he let''s out a sigh of relief. Not wanting to follow his father inside the Dungeon, the only thing the exhausted apprentice wanted to do was crawl inside a tent and sleep. "You''ll be safe out here and the men will protect you. There wasn''t many monsters on the journey here, but you can never be too careful. This for your own good, Eric. I will deal to the missing apprentice myself." Even though the Mercenaries were only there for the money, Eric was much happier staying with them than following his father. Even though loyalty can be bought and sold in the world of a sellsword, it wasn''t like there anyone in the forest to outbid the Highgroves. Not that Eric knew anyway. Still, Eric tried to mount a small defence for why he should be allowed to follow his father, if nothing else but to look good. He argued how he had followed the shady apprentice, how he had found the Dungeon and how he had been the one to deliver the news. His stomach dropped as his father actually considered his argument. Contemplating the risks of allowing his son inside an unclassified Dungeon, Eric began to sweat as he waited for an answer. "No. I will deal with Katrina myself." Jubilation. Sleep was beckoning and Eric was accepting. His shoulders slumped and he released the breath held in his throat. That was close. His argument should have been weaker. Without pressing any further, Eric slumped into the closest tent and crashed. He was asleep before his father managed to cross the Dungeon''s entrance. Dreaming a future no longer bound for second place. A winner, that''s what Eric was. His father told him just as much. Winners don''t worry about losers or the path needed to put them above the rest. Winners win. That''s all there is to it. Watching his son slink off put the Expert''s heart at ease. There was nothing he cared more about than Eric. He was his world. His light. His everything. Under the same mindset as his son, Elric Highgrove stepped inside the Dungeon. -Eric and Elric Highgrove, Camped in the forest outside the Dungeon, beneath Mt Morte
Immediately, I feel the cause of what put Me''s knickers in a twist. On a different level than Katrina, I shiver as a powerful presence enter my Dungeon. He wasn''t even polite about it. No hello. No first date. He just came right up in me without a care in the world.
Are you quite finished?
I''m nervous, Me. I think my Core might even be sweating.
Your Core does not sweat. If anything, it is more likely to be damaged again.
Don''t say that! Where''s Barry? Is he ploughing? He''s ploughing, right? Tell me he''s ploughing, Me!
Barry has been going nonstop since you started your meditation. Also, thank you.
That''s good to hear, but what are you thanking me for?
Seeing you in this state has alleviated my own panic somewhat.
Panic? Who''s panicking? I''m not panicking. Were you panicking, Me?
Abi! Calm down.
OK. Alright. I''m calm. I''m calm. Who am I kidding? I''m not calm. I''m freaking the hell out, Me. That''s not just an apprentice, you know?
Quite. That much is obvious. The Expert is examining the entrance whereas the apprentice is hiding inside Ali''s. Hana informed everyone of his arrival and Katrina confirmed his identity.
Why is she hiding?
I don''t know and it''s not like I can ask her to find out.
You could have got Ali to ask, Me.
I... Didn''t think about that in my moment of... Poor programming. It has been 5 minutes since they arrived outside and your monsters are prepared to welcome him. Although, I would be remiss to admit that I for one am not confident in this plan.
Poor programming? Just say that you were panicking, Me. I suppose you''re kinda getting around that feelings barrier. And don''t worry about the plan. My little army has become pretty efficient, don''t you think?
Quite. You also seem to have settled down rather quickly. Faster than it would have taken you before at least.
Yeah. Terrortation did a number on my senses, but the mystery of the hiding apprentice has me intrigued. It''s almost enough to override the fear completely. Plus, the last tour went OK. How bad can this one be? Still, I wonder why Katrina is quivering away at Ali''s. Is the Expert a bad guy? Or has she done something she isn''t supposed to have? With how nice Katrina is, it makes more sense that the man that''s entered my Dungeon is a closet villain? Then again, what if it''s because she''s worried over what people will think about her? After what happened, it is understandable. I might have realised sooner if I was slowly losing my humanity through lack of physical contact. That''s the only thing Terrortation had going for it. It felt so nice to be able to smash that Goblin-loving Core. Love this story? Find the genuine version on the author''s preferred platform and support their work! Musing over my thoughts, I manifest in the Rule Room and summon Dropper. I know that she and Light are in the Dungeon because The System''s notifications are waiting to acknowledge. The one sitting on top, with a good deal behind waiting their turn, concerns the return of my big hitters and I have to stop reading when I see the amount of XP they brought back during my nightmare. I was right! My Vagabonds must really believe they have to up the ante everytime they return. Really hoping I survive the Expert''s tour, the DP Light and Dropper managed to bring home this time will surely help my Dungeon grow. As I gawp, the female in question arrives by at my side. A huge smile is plastered across her face and she''s obviously proud of their accomplishment. She''s also covered in the same light she was when they brought back the troll. I had to look twice to make sure I wasn''t seeing things. It was their first time out since ranking up and here Dropper is ready to go again. No way! Was I just a bad Rogue? Did I not know the secret to leveling up? Whatever is was, I''d love to talk to her about it and listen to her story, but I don''t have time for that right now. "Congratulations, Dropper. Once again, you and Light are literally shining examples of hardworking and determination." All I can do is acknowledge their achievements and move on to meet Mr Doom. There isn''t time to blow smoke up her arse. Even though I want to praise them both, it''ll have to wait and see if we can avoid destruction first. Arriving in my entrance, I come face to face with the official Dungeon Catergoriser. The Expert on all things relating to Dungeons in the Ishda province. Like Katrina, his outfit is all white. Only the one-stripe apprentice, three black lines run down chest and confirm his rank. Even if he is a goverment-appointed official, he''s still just a man. One who isn''t the best at hiding his emotions apparently. Unable to surpress his shock when Dropper enters the room, the lustful gaze in his eyes missed by anyone. The corners of his mouth twitch up and using his hand, the Expert masks his face. "Who are you and why are you in this Dungeon?" Trying to compose himself, the Categoriser coughs a few times before getting himself under control. I can''t imagine it''s easy, Dropper is a stunning specimen of a woman. Or she would be if she was really human and not a Dungeon-summoned Monster, that is. "My name is Dropper and I''m here to speak on behalf of my Master." Dropper answers without being prompted and I''m relieved it''s not Light doing the talking. "Your Master?" That obviously caught his attention, but it isn''t like we''re trying to hide it. It''s obvious I''m a Dungeon. More so to a Catergoriser and using honesty has served us well so far. Although, Dropper seems to think she did something wrong as she drops to a knee and declares, "I''m sorry, Master," giving me up in the process. "Master!" Putting two and two together, this guy actually got four. I''m more shocked that he arrived at the right conclusion, than about Dropper dropping me in it. Yes, I''m in the room aswell. It''s not like I wanted him to know that though. Well, the snake is already out of the trousers now. She may as well shake it. "Correct. I was created by my Master, Dungeon Core Abi. I speak for her and carry out her will." Making a fist and placing it over her chest, Dropper salutes my dungeon. Why? I have no idea, but I''m not gonna stop her. It''s kind of embarrassing, but I feel cool and respected at the same time. Queen Abi will now hand out your orders. With our introductions over, the Catergoriser bursts into laughter and I can''t help but find him rude. I mean, there''s no need to laugh at us. No one''s telling jokes. His laughter dies out, but Dropper''s solemn expression doesn''t. "That was a good one. I don''t normally put up with Bandits talking nonsense, but you''re not bad on the old eyes. Plus, I''m feeling rather elated today. Yes. Let''s have some fun. I''ll put up with this farse if you put on a good show at the end." I want to kill him already. How dare he talk to Dropper like that. I don''t care if he doesn''t believe her, you don''t say that sorta shit to anyone. Making no attempt to reply, Dropper stands motionless waiting for my command. I''m not going to order the attack though. As much as I want too, I don''t know how strong this Categoriser and his Knights are. The everyday erogenous thought process of the human male is replaced by an official demeanour and the Expert plays along. "Hello, Dungeon Core Abi. I am Dungeon Categoriser under Lord Aldur, Elric Highgrove. It is my responsibility to check the threat levels of Dungeons the Ishda Territory." Smiling seductively at Dropper he gives us a proper introduction at least. It earns him no brownie points from either of us though, only an eye roll from my Vagabond. I''d roll my eyes too, but... Yeah. "What was your name again, my beautiful Bandit? My mind is not what it used to be, but I remember it was something unique." I''m lost for words. Nice ones anyway. Apparently, so is Dropper. What the hell? Who does this guy think he is? Canasoda?
I don''t know who that is.
Is he really expecting to woo her with words that like? I try not to let it bother it me. Which is really hard when I already think he''s a scumbag. Why is the this guy the Catergorisation Expert? If he doesn''t approve of me, or what I''m doing here, then it doesn''t bode well for our future. After some of the magic Katrina described to me, my earlier freak out may have been justified. Staring blankly as the Expert sizes her up, Dropper waits for the words that will keep us alive another day in the underground world we call home. I don''t need to warn her about going off script, she should know how important this is by how nervous I am. I do, however, tell her not to roll her eyes, pout, whine or use any other body language that might reveal her thoughts. She''s not the best at keeping it in, but talking about class ups is enough to spark her determination. She smiles, giddy at the prospect of become a Shadow Walker. The stupid Categoriser smiles back as if her beauty is meant for him. Fool. "Welcome, Expert. It''s a pleasure to have you in us." Putting on my best acting voice, which I perfected over during my human years, I give Dropper words that are guaranteed to change my second life. She pronunciates my innuendo perfectly and I almost see steam coming from the Expert''s ears as he struggles to control himself. "Yes... Quite." After a short coughing fit he drags his head from out the gutter and composes himself. He''s still a little red, but at least he''s calming down. "Since I am already here, I will gauge the strength of your monsters and see if you pose a threat to the immediate vicinity. Do you consent to this examination, Miss Dungeon Core?" The sarcasm in his voice isn''t lost on me and I worry about what he will think when he actually uses his skills. I mean, it''s not like we''ve lied about anything. Not yet anyway. Still, what he just said was like Carrie''s sword. A double-edged blade. There''s nothing in my immediate vicinity for me to pose a threat too. Not if my Rogues are to be believed, which they are since have zero reasons to mislead their Core. A.K.A me. Score one for Abi, that''s one box ticked off the list. I am not a threat. Check me out being all non-threatening and shit. I don''t even send monsters out fool and if you ask about the Rogues, I''ll just lie. The problem stopping me dancing around my Core Room with Colin, is that he wants to gauge the strength on my monsters. Shit? Every damn time. The feeling of foolishness this time is like a tidal wave. It''s almost as bad when I was caught in the Core Room by Kal. No escape. Only this time, I have a whole dungeon and I''m still trapped. He isn''t just going to stroll around my village like Katrina did in her tour, is he? It''s his job to make sure Dungeons are safe enough to be mined or farmed. That means he''s not just going to stop at the Priests before we enjoy a pleasant sunset together. Maybe... No. He''s going to want to pass the prayer lovers and guage some actual monsters. It''s not like I can''t tell him no either, is it? We may aswell just fight now if I was going to do that. Could Dropper win on her own? Without the element of surprise and against a Catergoriser no less? Shit! Shit. Shit. Shit. Shit. Shit. Shitty. Shit. Shit!
Calm down, Abi.
OK, OK. Deep imaginary breaths. In and out. In and out. Huh? That kinda worked. "I consent. Im not that deep either, so it shouldn''t take too long." Finally managing to get relay something through my interpreter my brain kicks back into gear. Even though it doesnt want to do this anymore. Why the hell can''t I will the monsters outside my dungeon!? Then again, would it even matter? He''s already here. "So gracious. Let''s get straight to it then. I would like to be home by nightfall if possible and I have... Some other business to take care of." The Expert wastes no time and strides down the tunnel, not waiting for his guide as she hurries after him. Showing no fear at being inside a Dungeon alone, a smiles as she comes up beside him. This bastard exudes confidence with every step. How big must his balls be for him to be swinging ''em around like that? It turns out they''re bigger than his brain as he can''t control his impulses to keep his eyes forward. Struggling to contain himself, Dropper''s assets are dominating the Expert''s attention as we approach the Rule Room. Asking as nicely as possibly, I I''ll just have to use my best words to convince him that I''m worth keeping around. Not letting a good opportunity go to waste, I enquire about the surrounding location and confirm what my Rogues already reported. There isn''t a single village, town or homestead in a 20 mile radius of my mountain. "Technically, there is no one for you to pose a threat too." Elric stops just before the Rule Room to take in Dropper from behind and I feel like barfing all over him, "As long as you don''t possess monsters that are stronger than a certain threat level, this will go just fine." His sarcarm is really starting to grind on me. The minute he scans for monsters and picks up Dropper is going to be a shock. His words aren''t much better either since they don''t help me in any way. I need to do something about Colin. The Rockstar is in his own cave system, but he''s still in the second floor. There''s a slight chance I might be able to pass him off as unrelated to the Dungeon. If the Categoriser attacks him though, I won''t stand for that. What are the chances that Colin will get away with being mistaken for a regular chest?
Not favourable. Categorisers have a spell that shows them what is and isn''t a monster.
Yeah. Katrina mention that one last night. I''m surprised it''s not a passive skill. What were the other main spells? Identification, Sublimation and what was the other one?
Obliteration.
Oh, yeah. That''s the one. That doesn''t sound good at all. Not in any way what so ever and I could really do without a ''tioning. "You guys are really going all out. Still, I''ll play along." Elric seemed confused after seeing the stone monotiths, until Dropper relayed the information that I haven''t been able to lower yet. The same way Ali did for Katrina. "I suppose it could be beneficial, maybe even praiseworthy, for a Dungeon to behave so typically human. The human playing monster, however... That''s a harder sell. How wil spin being able to create sentient beings, I wonder?" Even though he was only supposed to be playing along, that''s a pretty deep question. One that I don''t really want to answer either. It was quite wiley considering he''s meant to be distracted by Dropper''s good looks. He even looks like a pervy old man, how did pull that one out? Seriously? What do I say to that. Whatever I do go with needs to sound believable. The only thing that comes to mind is the truth though and even then, that''s almost as unbelievable. Yes, Mr Catergoriser, Sir. I was a human. Something happened because The System''s been left on too long and there''s no Gods around that feel like fixing it. I know. Tell me about it. Don''t you feel sorry for me? What? You don''t? But I thought we were bonding. I''m baring my soul. No. That''s not a Mimic and I''ve never seen that Golem before in my life. What? No. He must be waving at you. I have no idea what you''re going on about. I don''t even even see him anymore. Why? There not even mine. I don''t even know Peaches. That''s just what colour she is. No! Please. Don''t destroy me. That''s not my Core, it''s just jewelry. Wait. Stop. I was created to help humans! I''m serious. Super serious! Why would I lie about it? Well... That''s a fair point, but I''m not lying. Ask Me. No not me. Me. I''m not delusional at all. Who are you calling crazy? Well, your just a dirty old man. Wait. I didn''t mean it. As we arrive at the Guard House, I haven''t thought of a single thing to say. One thing is certain though. I''m definitely not telling him the truth. Chapter 22 : The Expert Tour In the end, I couldn''t come up with a good enough reason so I threw The System under the bus instead. Telling Elric that I was born that way, he immediately called me out on it. Then, instead of trying to think of a clever reason or wise anecdote, I just played dumb. "How do you breathe?" I asked, not actually expecting the logical answer he gave me. What I took from that lengthy explanation was that it''s because of his brain. Simple enough. He should have just said that in the first place. That''s when genius hit me in the face and I put my foot infront of The System, pushing her at the same time. I''m so sorry. Elric found bewitched as we entered the Guard House so he didn''t question my logic. He wasn''t under any spells, but he was reeled in by the outrageously, good-looking Dungeon Bandits inside. He didn''t even spare the poor feature a second glance. Which is a boon if anyone asks me, it''s only a tier-two feature still. The official attitude he had been trying to maintain was destroyed. Blown away with his composure. He pulled a Peaches and his jaw hit the floor. Not literally, but his impression was priceless. Lonely old men really have no shame. What? What am I going to do about Peaches? As soon as Elric sees her... Screw it, I''ll have to bullshit that bridge when I get to it. There''s too much going on to plan anything. Plus, it''s definitely not an ''if'' situation, she''s bound to jiggle into him at some point. "Welcome, Sir. We are delighted to have you here." Although, with the way his brain works, I could be in luck. "We are sorry about the state of repairs. It is on our Master''s upgrade list." I don''t miss the emphasis coming from Mira. I know. I said I''d do it. I just haven''t had an opportunity yet. And I definitely can''t do it with two Categorisers inside me at the same time. She needs to wait for them to pull out first.
Now is not the time, Abi.
I missed you during my Terrortation, Me.
Quite?
Also, way to go girls. That was a smashing introduction. "Ah. Yes. It''s, er... No problem?" Eric''s brain turns to mush and he barely stumbles a response. He must be severely deprived to be that way inclined. Snapping out of it, he manages to compose himself and shake off the attraction. The stoic facade he was previously wearing is nowhere to be seen, but he looks well enough to continue. I thought they had him then. It almost looked like he was going to collapse. No worries though. There are more babes in this Dungeon than the entire village of Orad. Or at least more than Orad had when I was still there. For all I know, their population could have spiralled since then. Even though it hasn''t been that long. Quantity doesn''t quality in this game, bitches. "Normally, I do not fluster so easily. Ahem. When in the presence of such fine company, however, one would be remiss not to be enamoured." Perv till the end. "I don''t usually say this early on, but this Dungeon isn''t bad. From what I''ve seen so far, I must say, I quite like it. If the rest of the inspection goes well, we can start talks about your future." Still checking out the Guards as we cross the room, Elric actually gives me some good news. Which would be great if I didn''t know what he doesn''t know. They''re the words I''ve been hoping to hear. Although, it would have been better hearing them nearer the end of the tour. After he''s seen what''s-likely-to-be the cause of my destruction, drooling away happily like the cutie he is. "I''ll be fine, thank you. Surprises are expected in Dungeons." Making sure Dropper gets verbal consent before we continue, we move out of the Guard House and into the Rogues'' Village. Don''t say we didn''t warn you. He obviously didn''t take her seriously. Strolling out alone, Elric finds himself blinded whilst my Vagabond waits for her eyes to adjust before following him out. So far, Dropper has been the perfect hostess. Even if her client is a lecherous old fart, she hasn''t done anything I told her not too. Which must be taking her some serious effort in her part to maintain. I would have buckled by now. Without a doubt. Guaranteeing to put my foot in my mouth at some point in a conversation. Honestly, it''s a good thing these Catergorisers can''t hear me. We would be screwed. No longer able to size Dropper up like a piece of meat, the so-called Expert wipes stars from his eyes before we move into the main room. It doesn''t take him long to recuperate, but when he does Elric''s seeing stars once again. This time, however, they''re Super stars. "This is where most of us live. After you," Dropper says unprompted, ushering Elric forward. She must know he''s been staring at her ass from behind and is using the situation to her advantage. Clever girl. Sensing my feelings, she throws a smile in my direction before following Elric. Who is trying his hardest not to act like he''s having a stroke due to all the beautiful women around him. "What?" Lost for words, his jaw hangs limp as he led from woman to woman until a crowd is gathered around him. Offered greetings and compliments, Elric thanks them one after another until a glaringly-obvious fact shakes him from his stupor. Above his head, high in the sky, is a bright, yellow sun. Contorting with many emotions, his face finally settles on confusion. He looks to Dropper, who responds with, "The System," and that''s was it. Or so I would like to say. The many questions erupting from him sound like mirror images of my own and I cant help but sympathise. "I know, guy. I agree. Why don''t give her a piece of your mind for me." Dropper has already relayed my words before I realise I said them out loud. As though as he''s about to strike us all down right now, the Catergoriser looks furious. To make it worse, she doesn''t even stop there. "I don''t see why you''re getting angry with me? It''s not like I put it up there, is it? It''s a sun." Her words cause him to redirect his annoyance and he looks to the Dungeon roof, which is actually a sky above the wall that runs around the room. I''m feeling mortified because I knew my mouth would get me in trouble. Fortunately, Dropper seems to have saved the day with a simple and blatantly-obvious fact. Don''t worry, we get it. Who would expect a mountain to have its own miniature-sun inside of it? Not me. I only found out about it yesterday. The population around him begin chatting amongst themselves as Elric tries to process his reality. A fact that has no business being processed. It''s nothing major and only small talk, but the Catergoriser still finds himself draw in to the conversation closest to him. That''s right. It''s best to ignore the unprocessable. Just move on and ignore it. That will be the staple of this Dungeon tour. "What do you think Ali is going to make for dinner tonight?" Mystique questions Rocky, who is gathered with Coral, Baluka and Lucinda. Hearing the melodious voice, his gaze drops to the bustling beauties chirping away and Elric finds himself paralysed. "I dunno? Whatever it is will be amazing though, you know Ali," everyone else nods along in agreement. Elric is doing his best Peaches impression again, but this time his eyes are even bulging out of his skull. "I hope it''s Boar again! That''s my favourite," Mystique clenches her fists. Drooling slightly. "Don''t be silly. Even though that Boar stew was delicious, it''s nothing compared to the Rabbit we had last night. That... Was heavenly." Cleaning Mystique''s face, Coral gives her take and everyone else to agrees. Seeing and believing are not the same thing and Elric has to rub his eyes to make sure he isn''t dreaming. In a Dungeon, feeling the warmth of the sun and surrounded by beautiful women, the Expert is truly lost for words. It''s probably the best Dungeon he''s ever been in. Everyone engaged in the conversation over Ali''s culinary excellence could be a contender for Miss Tironia. A magic wand even begins to appear in Elric''s pants. I knew he was a pervert. "Yeah, that was... Master!" The girls finally notice me, even though I''ve been here all along. Bouncing over in slow motion, they leave Elric alone with Dropper. He doesn''t even seem sad as he watches them go. The cutest chorus on Tironia calls my name and I''m sure my Core changes colour as they salute me. Which must look really strange to Elric since he still doesn''t believe us. To him, it probably looks like theiyre saluting each other whilat standing in a circle. I feel a little flustered. Is it hot in here? It''s a good job I don''t have a magic wand. Someone might start calling me names. That was nice and it didn''t sound to bad on the metaphorical ears. I even find myself wanting to bask in the attention they''re showering me in. I want ro revel and indulge like a good Core should. Unfortunately, during one''s moment of judgement, they should be partaking in such debauchery. Hopefully, my life gets a chapter two. Then I''ll revel, bask and indulge, as much as I want. I love these girls. "No one said the Expert was such a hottie," Mystique takes it too far as Elric is still unable to formulate sentences. He tried, but it was just garbled sounds now that his composure''s been broken. He does manage in the end and even if it is just a single word, the sly fox is still in there somewhere. "How?" It''s the same question Katrina posed and one that''s probably going to be asked quite frequently when people learn of our existence. The sunlight alone is enough to warrant it, but the heavenly sights below beg an answer. Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more. I would also like the answer. Want to ''fess up yet, System? Didn''t think so. There''s more that I don''t know than I do, which doesn''t make me very helpful, even though I''m charge around here. Having not gotten an answer yet, the Catergoriser looks to be lost in thought. Not taken back by beauty like he should be, which isn''t a good sign. When he reaches what ever conclusion he''s arrived at, his brows furrow and I dread the next words to leave his mouth. Instead, shit gets worse. In the window of Ali''s home, Elric locks eyes with a shaken Katrina and his entire facade is washed away. Without a care for the women I sent back his way, jealousy had already shown its ugly hand as Elric all-but sprinted across the road. Pounding on the door, the demeanour of nobility is lost on the aggression of man. Dropper appears next to him, but he ignores her until she reaches out to stop him. The moment she does, a wave of purple mana erupts from the Catergoriser''s body and spans the entire length of my Dungeon. I can only watch helplessly as, one after another, people start dropping like flies. All across the Dungeon, everyone collapses on the floor. Dropper manages to raise her head, but only to watch me disappear as I''m forced out of my Manifestation. In my overview, screens flash to life as images of Elric and Katrina show me everything. Panic is racing through me and I dread to think about what will happen. How did it turn into Shit''s Creak just like that? It was going so well. "Katrina Kartova. You have been charged with entering a dungeon unlawfully." With the way Elric''s banging on the door, I''m surprised it hasn''t given way yet. "Come out and accept your judgement!" What the hell? "M-Master..." Dropper sounds weak as I watch her trying to crawl. The others aren''t doing any better either and the images I witness only serve to work me up. Trying to activate Manifestation only causes more pain and I''m scared that if I push, it''s bye-bye, Abi. Seriously? What do I do? Me? Me!? ME!? With our connection severed, I''m worrying more than normal and wanting to wail a great deal. I can''t reply to Dropper, let alone get a response from Me and the anger I''m suppressing towards the giant prevent is starting to leak out. Stupid Dungeon. Shit! Why can''t I do anything? "Come out now and I may be able to convince Lord Aldar to show you leniency over your inconvenience." My worrying stopped the moment those words left Elric''s mouth. Replaced by anger, a red mist rises from the floor. The light begins to fade and the System-created room is plunged into darkness. How dare he say what happened to her was an inconvenience? Like it was something he had to take the time out of his day to deal with. What a fucking cocksucker. Ominous, clouds fill the sky and the sound of thunder reverberates throughout the Dungeon. Flashes of lightning illuminate the malicious expression of the Catergoriser as he pounds on the door. "I''m not going back! And I don''t to be your apprentice. Eric can have it. I just... Want to put my mind at ease." Shouting back from behind the door, Katrina''s words fall on deaf ears. The so-called Expert has already shown his true colours and there''s no way she''s going to fall for anything he might say. "This Dungeon gives me what I need, so I''m not going to leave. It''s amazing here!" I feel quite overwhelmed at her last statement even if I am the only person who hears it. It makes me think that my unrealistic goal isn''t just nonsense. Even we do joke about it. It even shaves off a fraction of the anger I''m emitting. Katrina also jumps up to a 99% approval rating and is now my new favorite person. What a gal. "Let me help out with your problem then." Sadly though, that brief happiness is cut short by a gigantic penis as he finally manages to kick the door in. Grabbing Katrina by the hair, he throws her out into the street before taking a deep breath. Ali is on the floor inside, but he barely spares her a second glance as he storms towards the apprentice. Removing a hidden blade from up his sleeve, the twisted grin of her would-be murder is all she sees as he drives the dagger deep into her abdomen. "No!" Screaming at the top of my lungs, the entire Dungeon groans and rumbles. Looking pleased with himself, the Catergoriser loses his balance and ends up on the ground as the floor shakes violently. The Dungeon Mist thickens into a blanket of fog as the apprentice''s robes soak in blood. Cradling the weapon preventing her bleeding out, my anger swells to heights unknown and I struggle to contain myself. Why is he doing this? Glaring at the screens, hate invades my world and dominates my thoughts. Even questions that plague my mind on a daily basis fall silent, no longer interested in answers. Crude and vile slurs leak out from me and all my animosity is aimed solely at Elric as screens shatter, rebuilding themselves only to break again. Lightning streaks across the void as thunder drums throughout my overview and the darkness is replaced by Dungeon Mist. Taking shape and form, it depicts the event taking place on the first floor and figures appear one after another. Weakened and begging, all unable to move, I feel my Core break as I watch their helplessness. No better than my own. "Finally. Finally!" The Catergoriser takes form, a second dagger in hand. "I''ll rid myself of you here and now. Then Eric is guaranteed to obtain my position. That is the natural order of the world." Having lost all composure, Elric laughs as he takes aim at his objective. The horrific event, no longer broadcast only by monitors in my overview, details itself in a hue of red before me. Screens fall to the side and I''m left to witness the scene of misery as though I''m there with them. An immobile and limp Katrina is the last one to form. In the firing line of the Catergoriser, she barely moves. With body too weak to defend itself, she can only watch on in despair as another human sullies the reputation of humanity. The dagger is launched through the air and I feel useless. Aimed at my new favorite human, a kill shot is guaranteed as slow motion kicks in. My summons can''t help her. They''re still trapped in the Categoriser''s spell. I can just about sense their will. They want to help. They want to fight. They just can''t. Unable to move, a circle of endless torment keeps them in pain continously. Physically unable to do either, I may aswell be paralysed with them. At the last second, I raise a Stone Monolith from the floor infront of Katrina and the blade deflects off it. It was the first time I''ve used Divinities Creation and, because of its one-use-a-day limit, my one and only trump card has been used. Gone. All because of how the events turned out after Elric saw Katrina. Not that I had a choice. "You! How did you do that?" Finally inspecting Dropper and the rest, the Catergoriser''s surprise in evident. "No. Don''t be fucking ridiculous. Dungeons don''t create people." He rants at the Vagabond whilst my Core cries in pain. Moving over her, a third knife is removed from this robe as Dropper struggles to free herself. The sky flashes brighter than before and a light show illuminates the entire room. The sound of thunder rings out and I let my will run wild with hate for the Categoriser. "Why do you protect her? Even if she is a monster, she should protect you. Not the other way around." Even if I was still able to communicate with him, I would only tell him how much of a bellend he is. Not after what he just did, or what he''s about to do. The only thing I want him to hear is how much I hate him. All I want to do is scream and that''s exactly what I do. Cursing him out with everything I have, I don''t want to look at the screens or the projection. To my surprise, the loudest noise I have ever heard emerges, not in my overview but, in my Dungeon. I didn''t even start small. All of a sudden an ear-shattering sound, that I was not expecting to produce, brought the Catergoriser to his knees. Clutching his ears, blood leaks between his fingers as he screams in pain. How the hell did I do that? As much as I enjoy the fact that I managed to hurt him, I''m not sure if Katrina''s OK. My summons should be OK since they''re protected against friendly damage, but I can''t connect to them to find out. The human I''m not offended by is a different story though. The last thing I want is to be the end of her life. Elric quickly downs a potion of as I try and absorb what just happened. Roar of the Dungeon? That would be such a cool name. If I somehow get to stick around and keep it. It''s just a shame that I''m not as clever as I like to make out I am. Realising that my Roar will have alerted the men loitering around outside, the feeling of invaders rushing into me is almost enough to make me sick. It''s the first time so many people have come in me at once and it feels super icky. It was inevitable after what just happened and in my state of grief-stricken rage, the scenario my mist plays out is even worse than I was imagining. Black-hearted murderers, dressed like Knights, slaughter they way down my halls. Killing everything that doesn''t fit their standards, they clear floor after floor until they arrive at my Core. Elric, on the other hand, is vile. In my imagination he takes turns destroying the spirits of everything I love. Everything I hold dear. No!!! Why the fuck am I thinking about shitty, depressing shit like that? I don''t want that to happen to the people I create. The ones who complain about features. The ones I cherise and hold close. This is my family and I''ll die before I let you hurt any of them! Not caring about his back up, rushing through my entrance and down the tunnels to join the Catergoriser, I picture myself next to him in the mist and scream in his ear. Using my new skill, I wail on the dickhead who thinks he can come in me and pull this shit. My Roar doesn''t do as much damage as it did the first time, even though I''m sure I got closer. Not that I know how the skill works. Bubbles made of purple magic protect his ears and it seems he took precautions against me after the first attack. He also seems to have healed up quite well. Shit. With my wiles back under a fraction, if control, I look to see how close the others are to reaching the Catergoriser. Strangely though, the intruders seem to have disappeared which I''m not sure how to take. Did they teleport? Emotions are flaring as I scan screen after screen, but come up empty. Where the hell did they go? "MASTER! I am here to serve!" The very words that were driving me nuts this morning return on cue. As though they could feel my frustration, my anger and most importantly, my fear. Finally, a different emotion adds itself to the mix. Pushing its way through and kicking sadness off her tower. Hope is back. As though as he had been there all along, Noir is standing between the Catergoriser and the rest of my family. With a smile across his face and a magnificent shaft in hand, he points at the source of his Master''s misery as a circle of golden light appears in rhe darkness. Ejected from within Noir''s pocket dimension, a torrent of blood and Boar were released at the Catergoriser. Painted him red, Elric seemed unfazed until the severed head of his son washed up at his feet. Seperate from the rest of its body, the dull and lifeless eyes of the only person he ever cared about caused hysteria to take him. That was all she needed. Sagging to his knees, Elric''s once-beautiful son watched lifelessly as Carrie appeared behind his father. Drawing an arc through the air, a single swing was all it took and father joined son on the floor of the Dungeon. Joining men and Boar alike in what could only be described as a massacre. "Master, we came as soon as we heard you scream." Hearing the urgency in Carrie''s usually-cold tone, which matches the icy demeanour she gives off, warms my Core and releases me from the rest of my rage.
Abi!
Me! After seeing the familiar script of my trusty companion, the Dungeon Mist is swallowed by the floor and the dark clouds start to dissipate. Leaving a blue sky in their wake, sunshine fills the room and the future feels a little brighter. I''m so happy you''re back, Me. I''ll never be mean to you again, I promise.
Quite. Rather, it is my fault for not realising the Catergoriser could paralyse us as well as your monsters.
With the return of my companion, more of my sanity and the only two Shadow Walkers in my Dungeon, I can''t help but feel overwhelmingly happy. More so than any other occasion so far during my second life. Even with these joyous feeling, however, I can''t quite shake the shock of what just transpired. It was going good, then it was absolute terrible, before it was over. Just like that. One strike from Carrie was all it took to put an end to the threat that was perving up my home. With it, the fear that was momentarily clouding my mind was also taken care of. Noir, for how amazing he looked arriving from nowhere, served as the best distraction I''ve ever seen I mean, who releases a tsunami of blood and body parts? Not only were there a shitload of Boar, but it was alps made up of the men that had accompanied him. My shock is because I''ve had my fair share of battles and even some harrowing escapes, so I know how difficult of a task I have set the created beings of my dungeon. Yet, they surprise me at every turn. I''m worried about what repercussions The Expert''s death will bring. The fact that Carrie finished him off with a single blow is blowing my fear out of the water and replacing it with hope. Not the ideal I was picturing before, one built on wishes and promises. A new type of hope has just shown its face. Based on the strength I personally witnessed firsthand from someone I summoned myself, if all my Rogues grow to Shadow Walkers, or better, then I won''t have to worry about the next time someone comes knocking to give me a classification. Next time? Shit! Katrina! Chapter 23 : A New Perspective Something was off with the dungeon. During his tenure as Expert of the Ishda territory, Elric Highgrove had gained insight over the power of his will to better understand his class. Armed with that knowledge, he was a prime example of what Categorisers in the region should strive to be like. "How strange?" Having learned to recognise the trickery and deceit that most Cores attempted, he had grown confident in his ability to determine wether or not a Dungeon posed a threat the moment he stepped inside. Yet here, in the bowels of the mountain, all he could feel was hope and determination. Strange was definitely the right word for it. The first room of a Dungeon is always empty. The so-called entrance being off limits for whatever reasons restrict the Core. This one was no different, yet it felt that way. Trying to harness the connection between the Dungeon''s will and his own, the seasoned Catergoriser began forming a spell. Sublimation. A major spell for any budding Catergoriser and if they chose not to take it when prompted, their career was ruined. Even if they didn''t realise. It was one of the first spells Elric had learned after picking up Identification. Another crucial spell. Even without guidance, or a paid and bought for tutor, anyone could become the Expert. It all depends on the skills taken when given chance by The System. Most skills can be learned with practice and even non-class related skills can be obtained through hardwork and perserverance. There are some skills, however, that you are only offered once and worst of all, they always come with a choice. Fortunately for Elric, he was very lucky when his choice was offered. He was also blessed with good fortune and a golden spoon. His father was the Minister of Finance in Ishda and had more money than sense. He paid for tutor after tutor and Elric absorbed everything them had to teach him. He had a connection to the Dungeons that no one else did. Easily passing the tests that were conducted on prospective apprentices, Eric''s father threw more money into his son''s future. So much so that he was eventually forced to resign for miss appropriating funds. Fortunately, with his son being the number one candidate for the next Expert title, he was spared death. Elric was sent to live with the current Dungeon Catergoriser after that and continued to shine in his position. After learning everything he could, however, life suddenly became monotonous. With no one else to learn from, Elric slowly started to resent his Master. Years went by and Elric''s learned there was no greatness that came from having a Master to teach you. Not when you covert his position. Even after starting a family of his own, he was still held down by the title of apprentice. Sure, he was already a Dungeon Catergoriser of considerable skill, but the position of Expert beckoned him. Pleading with him to take it. The problem was that Elric didn''t want to leave Ishda to so do. Other regional Experts were returning here and there, but he had no wish to leave his home. Not when he was already so comfortable and his path was promised. That was where his path started to descend Ordered to classify a new Dungeon that had made its presence known by sending out monsters, Elric and his Master made their way to Tune. Five mile oitside of the fishing town, trolls inhabited the forest and killed anything that entered. With a small contingency, the arrived before the Dungeon where Master and Pupil entered. The events regarding what happened inside will forever be a mystery. The only person to exit was the apprentice, claiming they had been split up. Zahir, Caterisation Expert for the Ishda region, was never seen again. Presumed dead inside, Elric used Obliteration on the Dungeon after recieving his new title. These days, Elric has taken to calling Sublimation, ''Invader''s Delight''. Meant to stop Dungeons from harming him when he performs examinations, the spell lasts for a full hour before it can be cast again. While in use, Dungeon Cores are unable to use any of their features. Unable to summon traps, monsters or any other means at their disposal to eliminate invaders. The only downside once it''s been cast is that the Catergoriser has to wait the full hour before they can use it again. With its charge time being the same as its duration, the spell is a doubled-edged sword. Meaning any monsters entering the Dungeon afterwards, could potentially catch the him off guard. The whole reason Elric keeps a group of mercenaries outside the Dungeon is to prevent that very situation from occurring. Holding his spell at completion with a practised ease whilst cursing its flaws, a Bandit emerges from the tunnel and gives Elric pause. Taking in her provocative armour, his magic fizzles out as a fire is stoked inside him. ''Does she know Katrina? Or have they already taken care of the problem for me? Either way, she certainly shouldn''t be in an unclassed Dungeon.'' After the introductions are over, however, Elric is struggling to contain his laughter. Ever since his son returned with joyous news, Elric''s mood had been at its peak. It had been a long time since he''s felt that good and he decided to go with the flow. A little sightseeing would be harmless since he knew how the tour would end. Playing along, he was curious over how many Bandits had actually made base inside. Unafraid, since Sublimation was also capable of being used on people -a secret he would take to his grave, he followed the vixen down the rabbit hole and was led further into Dungeon Abi where his playful nature threatened to expose him as the sadist he was. It was strange. Stranger than most Dungeons he had even come across. There wasn''t a single trap, or monster, as they followed the path straight forward. Eventually, the tunnel''s exit was blocked by a large feature that looked like city gates. As they passed through the doors, Elric walked into heaven. It was as though the goddess of lust had just pierced Elric''s heart. Now there was a pyramid of beauty, he didn''t know which of three Bandits to look at. Thoughts of what he would do to Katrina had already been shoved away into the filing cabinet, far behind having a good time. It was time to get the party started. Three toys were more than enough. "If you can''t handle this much, you might not want to go further in. You haven''t seen anything yet." Restarting Sublimation, Elric prepared to knock out the women until he''s overwhelmed by curiosity. How many more women are inside like these three? Turning Bear, Dropper''s words are like nectar as Elric''s mind runs wild and kicks logic out of his earhole. Unable to contain himself, Elric bursts out of the Guard House and finds himself blinded in process. There isn''t much to hear over the sound of his own voice until he finally gets to witness bliss. In heaven, angels chirp down the street and Elric''s passed around from pillar to post. Any spells he had building are long gone as he revels in delight until he''s finally surrounded. There was no doubt in his mind that he was in a dungeon. The women, however, betrayed that notion every step of the way and only when he was left to his own devices did his senses return. When they did he felt foolish. Foolish enough that anger was bubbling up inside of him. It had been a long time since he was deceived. That was when he caught sight of Katrina. The original problem. The one he would rid of himself here and now. Just like back then. With a tried and tested method guaranteed to solve problems, Elric would let the dungeon eat her. Thinking happy thoughts, Elric released Sublimation and strode toward the house as a fine mist ascended from the floor. He made short work of the door, after brief mention a crime, and threw her out into the street. There he was judge, jury and executioner, ramming his blade so far into Katrina''s belly she was guaranteed to bleed out if it was removed. A quick death wouldn''t be satisfactory. Nor did he want to end her immediately. He would enjoy himself, if only briskly, he thought. Until the mist turned into fog, attempting to conceal the prey from him. Elric, staggered as the room shook before the miniature sun was replaced with ominous clouds. It didn''t deter him as a second dagger appeared in his hand. Taking aim, he decided not to play with his food and aimed for her head. Before the projectile could make contact, a wall of stone rose from the Dungeon floor. With his attempted murder foiled at the last moment, Elric immediately scanned for a mage. What he saw them shocked him even more. They Bandits weren''t Bandits at all, but Rogues and Vagabonds. Dungeon Rogues and Dungeon Vagabonds at that. He couldn''t believe it, even though they had told him so from the very beginning. His brain struggled to process the information and he turned his frustrations to Dropper. Removing yet another dagger from his person, Elric lashed at the first person he met when entering the Dungeon. Before he could express his fury, pain unlike any other assaulted Elric violently. His bones vibrated whilst his head threatenes to burst and he screamed an almighty number of curse. Blood seeped through the fingers trying to hold his skull together as tears pooled in his eyes. A Potion of Healing and a Potion of Enduring are downed in quick succession one after another. A risky move for an adventurer, taking two different potions at once, but as the only person standing Elric should have been fine. It wouldn''t matter if he be same groggy, disorientated or worse, there was a full day before his spell ended and the men were outside. Fortunately, it was the right move as the dungeon roared at him once more. Only louder and harsher than before. Elric endured by gritting his teeth and tensing his entire body until the sound finally died out. When it did, the first man he had seen so far was standing in front of him. Information showed him as a Dungeon: Shadow Walker and the Catergoriser immediately knew something was wrong. Giving up on his original goal to have the Dungeon take the blame for Katrina''s death, Elric immediately began casting Obliteration. Before it was complete, a portal, ringed in gold, appeared before him and spat out carcus after carcus alongside a torrent of blood. He steadied his resolve as to not lose the spell, but his mind faltered and it fizzled out anyway. A side effect of drinking Potions the way he did. It wasn''t enough to stop him from restarting the spell, but the head that landed by his feet was. It was enough to erase all thoughts completely and the Catergoriser buckled completely. Landing in his knees, the lifeless eyes of his son''s corpse was the last sight he saw before the world turned upside down. Holding on to the image of his son, Elric''s world slowly turned to white as he realised his life was over. As everything faded away, his evil intentions and dastardly schemes had meant nothing in the face of ridiculous stupidity. How? How can a Dungeon create humans? As everything that made Elric who he was slowly slipped away from it, elsewhere it was used to judge him. On a broken scale, owned by a faulty immortal, the ex-Catergoriser is nudged down a path he normally would head down. This is supposed to be accompanied by the clean-slate program. An autonomous function that has no self awareness. A subfunction of The System. Another quick nudge and Elric bypasses that feature also before mocong in to the next. Aware of none his, Elric''s soul is processed, shipped and delivered to its new life in the span of his vision whiting out. When that vision returns, it''s after being harshly deposited on a cold, stone floor. With his new body in pain, Elric''s mind struggles to understand what has happened. Shaking feebly, he is unable to stand on legs because the front of his body feels too heavy. He also feels itchy and fur is the first thing he sees as his eyes finally adjust. Not crawling, as he had first, suspected, his leg end in paws and the front of his face stretched out further than it has any business stretching. He tries to scream, but the only sound Elric can make is an incoherent whimper. A howl next to him scares him stiff, but also offers assurance at the same time. Turning around, Elric comes face to face with the large Lobe Hound he''s ever seen. The monster seems to be overjoyed and immediately begins licking Elric all over. As he''s turned and turned, the ex-Categoriser is again showered with assurance as he realises what''s happened. When finally comes to a stop, Elric is facing a different Lobe Hound. This one looks exhausted and nowhere near as playful as the other. She also has a swollen belly and is panting hard. Her privates are on show and look absolutely revolting as a placenta comes out from the same he did. Stolen content alert: this content belongs on Royal Road. Report any occurrences. There''s only one thought left on Elric''s mind as his father howls louder than before at the birth of his pup. ''Shit.'' -Elric Highgrove, A New Chapter. -Day One.
Katrina has been moved to the bed in Ali''s house and a Healing Potion has been applied to her wound. It should be enough to stop the bleeding and stabilise her condition. After what she said about me, she is definitely my favorite person. Without a doubt.
I suppose her life does hold some value.
Most life holds value, Me. I''m just happy that I didn''t lose a single member of my family to that creep.
Quite. They seem to be fine now that the Catergoriser''s magic has worn off.
You''re included in that statement as well, Me. When you weren''t there, I didn''t know what to do. I... I know I''m like a broken record, but I don''t know what I''d do without you. We''re also family me and you.
Er, quite... Yes... Well said.
Hehe. I love you, Me.
I suppose this time, I can... Reciprocate the sentiment.
Aww, Me. You''re gonna make me cry.
Please don''t.
Ali is in The Retreat cooking up a feast for everyone in my Dungeon and all is back to normal. Apart from the apprentice, or ex-apprentice I should say, sleeping upstairs in one of the suites. It''s a repeat of yesterday. I''m maxed on DP and can''t spend it on the things I said I would spend it on. I can''t even continue the fifth floor since that won''t go down well with the Rogues waiting on me up here. It''s a tough life letting Stockpile get fat. Talia is handing out booze like there''s no tomorrow, reminding everyone of the hard work they''re going to have put in to get stronger. Finishing her semi-motivation speech, she downs a large mug of Ale and laughs heartily before slapping Light on the back for some strange reason. Everyone also happens to include all of my floor bosses. Webster, Violet, Trixie and Samantula are all mingling together near the bar. It looks weird as hell, but makes me mega happy at the same time. Barry has chosen to continue his day/night/day job. The ever hardworking Mythril Golem is still a little too large to fit inside the Retreat and wouldn''t want to damage the building. Even after its resize. Trixie, on the other hand, was able to just squeeze in. Followed by Samantula. In a sea of mostly-human faces, those two tower above the rest. Trixie''s body is taller than every single person here. Samantula wouldn''t be so bad if it wasn''t for the creepy human half sticking off the top. With the spider half of her hidden behind the Rogues, she looks like a seven-foot monster made of hair and teeth. So yeah. Mega happy! Talia doesn''t seem fazed in the slightest with the loss of floor space due to the wolves. In fact, the diligent Taskmaster keeps on topping up their water as well as everyone''s drinks. Truly showing off the skills which befit her station and keeping the party flowing. Somone has given Peaches alcohol and she isn''t doing very well as the Sweets try to keep her human form together. The Vagabonds scouts are watching in shock, probably glad they summoned only to be given to Veris. The offender in question is sat with Light and Dropper, banging on about something she killed when she was out. Even though she''s technically their boss, since she is my Boss Monster, neither seem all that impressed. They could at least try to look understanding. Dropper even roles her eyes at her. At Veris! Who knows what that crazy bitch will do? Dropper only has one thing on her mind and brings it up at every opportunity. A soft blue light is covering almost a quarter of the people enjoying the night, so she''s not the only one waiting on me. The Acolytes are actually on the heavy stuff this time. Disciple Avos might be forcing them though as he seems to have dragged the Con Men into a sermon. Then again, we did almost die today. Everyone deserves a drink, even those that don''t want one. There''s no tee-totalers in this Dungeon tonight. At the bar, Noir and Carrie are the center of attention. Praised all night long, Noir blushes whilst attributing his success to me. Which is bullshit, but it''s growing in me a little. Carrie doesn''t even look as though she cares that she almost-singlehandedly save everyone here from death by Obliteration. Am I really the only still worried? I''m not as scared as was then, but I still remember it. If it wasn''t for Prince Loudmouth and the Ice Queen, I wouldn''t be here to witness so much happiness. I''m that grateful, I''ll even forgive his ridiculous comment if only for tonight. The only ones missing are the lower leveled monsters who aren''t floor bosses. Can''t we call them up aswell, Me? Although, I doubt we could fit anyone else in here.
Look up.
What?
Look. Up.
Doing as I''m told, I swivel my wisp and look up at the ceiling. My family, as I''m still choosing to call them, are some of the scariest bastards I''ve ever known in either of my lives. In the rafters above the suites, hundreds of eyes are all staring back at me. Directly at me. Everywhere I look, there is a Spider. If it''s not a Spider, it''s a Bat. Now, just being up in the ceiling isn''t what makes them scary. It''s the fact that they''re all hyped up and wriggling away that makes the scene horrifying. Rolling myself away, I spot the two celebratory heroes once again. Huh. Would you look at that? This time I actually did have two Rogues rush in to save me. What are the odds?
Quite high now. You are the one who created them after all.
Hehe. Yeah, I suppose the odds were far greater this time. Can''t argue with that. Thinking of Katrina still resting upstairs whilst the celebrations play out, I can''t help but feel like we should have waited. She might have enjoyed celebrating he death of scum with us. Then again, she hasn''t met the monstrous side of my family yet. She might even retract her previous statement once she does. After all, there''s more than one candidate for Scariest-Mary in this Dungeon. Or maybe Wierdest-Wendy might be more apt. Violet and Peaches are the top runners for that spot. Violet''s hair may cover her modest, but she can at least hold a conversation. That alone puts her in second place. Weirdest-Wendy goes to Peaches. Who, even though she''s clothed now, is still struggling to keep herself together. Scariest-Mary, however... I look at Samantula down a mug of Ale before liking residue of her gristled feature. It''s probably a good thing we didn''t wait for Katrina. We can hold a smaller party when she wakes before slowly introducing her to people that might give her a heart attack. She''ll have to meet them at some point if she wants to stay in the Dungeon. Thoughts of that happen pass idly through my mind as I spot Colin skittering across the top of the bar. He doesn''t look like he usually does, however. Now, there are more candidates for Strangest-Sally than any other category. I mean, almost everyone is up for that position, even Me. As always though, Colin takes the cake. A pair of macho arms empty mug after mug into a foaming chest as he skitters passed any unfinished drinks. Apart from the fkaring fact that he has now has arms, Colin''s metal work has become gold and his spider-like legs have turned into crystal. When the hell did Colin get those? And why is he gold? He doesn''t do anything but drool? Even with eight legs, Colin misjudges his step after having one too many and slips off the side of the bar.
It would appear that he has undergone an evolution.
What? When did that happen? Can you confirm their upgrades, Me?
Quite. I can only assume it was when he was gathering pieces of your Core.
So... He''s part Dungeon now?
No. It does appear that he syphoned a large amount of XP from you, however.
Well, damn. How lucky is Colin? Cheeky little bugger. Definitely the Strangest-Sally. Or maybe I''ll go with Crazy Colin? No. If I was going to go with anything, it would be Colin the Cutiepie. The celebration continues and at some point, a semi-healed Katrina leaves her room. Talia and Me both assured me they were soundproof, but I was still dubious. Now she''s here it''s obvious she woke up for some reason. She should have slept for ages after the things she''s been through. "Kat!" Trying my best to brighten her spirits I call out to her as loud as I can, I even bust out a nickname. Now that we''re besties and all, I''m defo allowed call her that. Unfortunately, I''m left not only feeling stupid, but a little responsible too. Obviously not over her last trauma, I accidentally scare Veris and she spits her Ale straight into Light face. Who, coincidentally, falls backwards off his chair into Tweedledum. The defenceless Rogue can''t help but stumble into Coral and Mysitique''s table in, overturning it by no fault of his own. This sends their drinks sailing through air into an unlucky Ang, on her way back from the bathroom. Caught unaware, she''s hit in the back of the head and stumbles forward, directly into Talia''s path. The Taskmaster, proficient as ever, sidesteps the incoming Acolyte who ends up crashing straight into her own table. The monsters beside it scarper and everyone is thrown off balance as their table is flipped by Jack, falling over a passing wolf. One of the mugs, heading directly for Talia, is ducked and hits an embarrassed Light in the face before he hits the floor a second time. Immediately, the Taskmaster''s head swivels in my direction. "It''s not my fault they go down like a sack of flies after a few drinks." That''s my only defence, but I''m not wrong. I wasn''t even talking to them. If anything, Veris is to blame. She spat her Ale on Light, not me. Talia''s gaze is still locked on my Manifestation and I swear I feel myself shrink slightly. She can be scary Talia. I almost want to run away, but it''s my Dungeon so... Instead of saying anything, her glare turns to a smile as everyone starts laughing at Light. The superstar himself doesn''t seem too pleased, but after his ego''s been stoked the mood has returned to joyous and festive. With nothing to feel sorry for, I turn back to the newest member to my Dungeon. This will be tricky, but we can make it work. Kat is smiling humorously at the scene of comradery playing out below. She dozen see to mind the monsters mixed in with the people, unless she hasn''t noticed them. Which I''d call BS on. Trixie is now laid down and stretched out she''s massive. There''s no way she''s getting missed. Not that she''s what you''d call scary. Trixie is a beauty. Plus, it''s Sam I need to be worried about. Instead of threating over the Dungeon full of monsters, Katrina seems to be interested in finding the culprit who caused the humorous disturbance. Her eyes scan the room, but she comes up short. "Don''t look up!" Veris glares at me this time. Her face says, "Again? Really?" I pay her no mind and ask Me if there''s anyway I''ll ever be able to talk with her myself.
You could form a contract with her. That will allow here hear you.
Really!?
Quite. I should ask you that question. When have I ever lied to you?
That''s true. Sorry, Me. I didn''t mean it like that. You just caught me by surprise is all. I trust you with my life, you know?
Oh... Well... Good. Thank you.
Twice in one day. I''m on a roll. I spend time chatting with Kat, through many different mediators, about forming a contract with my Dungeon. Through my use of the many mouthpieces available, the ex-apprentice-still-Catergoriser manages to meet almost everyone that can speak. Sam was firmly made to stay at the opposite side of the bar just incase she was too much to handle. She did look rather sad about it though. Katrina decided to think my offer over and I respected her decision. After everything important had been covered, or at least what I remembered to cover, we moved on to small talk. That was when I heard some rather distressing news. "Isn''t the chief of Orad, Goran?" That was the question that threw my world. During conversation about the local topography, Katrina described where I was in reference to my hometown. Northwest of Orad, the small mountain that stand alone surrounded the forest is where I now live. Which was funny because, as far I know, there aren''t any mountains in that direction when lookin from Orad. I would know about it. "The chief of Orad is called Baldur. He''s been the chief for aslong as I can remember and I grew up there." Not a hint of dishonesty is heard in her reply, but I''m still left wondering. Baldur? Who the hell is that? I''ve never heard of anyone with that name. Also, where did this mountain come from and why was I shoved inside it? Do you know, Me?
I do not. It might have taken the system longer to create your Core due to the fact that you were a human? That''s just a theory, however.
Well, it''s better than the nothing I''ve got, right?
I suppose. Why not ask the ex-apprentice?
That... Is a fantastic suggestion, Me. "What year is it, Kat? And how long has this mountain been here?" "It''s 1956. I''m not sure about the mountain though? It looked as though it was growing larger the closer I got, but... That''s what usually happens, right?" .... No way. No fucking way! The noise around us fades out and the bar falls silent. My emotions always show through my monsters. My pain, is their pain. My rage, is their rage. Right now, my absolute shock has silenced my entire family and we''re all staring at Kat in confusion. Mixed in with that is a sizeable amount of frustration, but that''s not aimed at her in any way. That''s for another special lady somewhere in my life. It''s been 50 years since I died. 50 YEARS!! How did it take 50 years to turn me into a Dungeon Core? Just as I''m about to start a whole new rant over the outrageous fact I''ve just been slapped with, I feel the presence of somone coming inside me and I''m forced to put it on hold. Great. It hasn''t even been that long since Elric died, there shouldn''t be anyone kicking down my doors for revenge just yet. So who the hell is it now? I haven''t even had time to come to terms with the new abilities yet, or my ever growing list of weird and unexplainable occurrences, but here''s another one. An old man is stood in my entrance holding the fluffiest, most-adorable teddy, I have ever seen. The Dire Wolf beckons to me and, as confused and angry as I am, I really want that teddy. Mira appears next to him and the man drops to his knees, "I had a vision to come here. It said the Syndicate would help me." It''s never a dull moment around here.
http://imgur.com/a/z0GKK77 Q and A Just as the title suggests, this week I will be answering any comments you have about the story. I''ll keep this session going until the first chapter of book 2 is released so feel free to post whenever. I''ll probably still respond to comments after the release too so if you''re reading this somewhere in the future and have a different question, let me know. If we have any frequently asked questions then I''ll add them into the chapter content section to avoid having too many of the same one''s popping up. The tale has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. Oh, as always, thanks for reading. Chapter 24: The Elf and The Dungeon Sitting at her computer desk, The System grumbles to herself as she watches the monitor. Notifications flicker through one by one and she sighs, stopping on a particular one. "Why does she hate me? It''s not like I know what she''s thinking, is it?" Complaining to no one in particular, The System grumbles in dissatisfaction as she rereads the notification. Voicing the feelings on her mind has become quite commonplace for her recently. Even speaking out loud is a brand new concept she can''t seem to stop. However, the frustration that keep slipping out in her words are easy to explain. Ever since she used that woman''s soul to create a new Dungeon Core, all she''s seen is her name taken in vain. Every other hour it''s, The System this, The System that. At one point she had even seen herself referred to as, that Bitch. That was a shock. Still, she continued to try her best. Delivering notification after notification to the Core who should rightfully be sleeping. "Why is she always active? Doesn''t she know that Cores need some downtime? What''s that V.A.U.N.S of hers playing at, not giving her the correct information? She''ll not only burn herself out at this rate, but me aswell." A cup of tea materialises as the computer desk ceases to be, replaced by a coffee table, The System drinks her beverage like a lady. Slow sips and with zero noise. The perfect flavour for dealing with nonsensical insults, aswell as backward Cores and renegade subsystems. The aroma pushes the sadness and frustration away as she puts her feet up, deciding to take a break for the first time in a millenia. Inhaling like a certain Dungeon Core wishes she could, she let''s out a long breath before taking pause. "What the hell am I doing? I don''t even need breaks and certainly don''t have the time to stop." Dismissing the party she had already conjured and was about to throw herself, a computer table with many monitors appears instead and The System throws herself back into her work. Less than an hour later, she''s laid in bed crying because of the same Core. "Why does she hate me? I even got rid of that crappy tent feature for her. Why did she ignore me?" Taking a tissue from the box on the nightstand, she blows her nose as numbers dribble down her face. With a wave of her hand, they disappear. Uninterested, she hugs her pillow and complains. "I''m trying my best, you know? It''s not like there''s anyone else but me to deal with His mess. And you''re getting too big, too fast. There are repercussions for this type of behaviour and I can''t stop them all. There''s too much for Pete to keep up with..." Her words are left hanging in the air as The System turns to the side. A man-sized frog in human clothing and wearing a monocle stares back at her. He tips his hat before take a pull on his pipe as she asks, "Pete?" The man frog nods and smiles. As he blows a smoke ring, The System stares aghast. "When did you... How are you... You''re not even real Pete. Go back to processing!" With another wave, Pete disappears and is unlikely to be seen again. The System grumbles something about bugs before the bed vanishes and is replaced by an office. Continuing her work, she tries to ignore any hurtful notifications that come her way even though they''re numerous and many. Shortly after, The System has given up on reading notifications and has set the computer to automate. Sitting on the floor beneath the desk, there''s no need to be upset since she can''t see what''s being said above her. "Why am I down here then? I''m already upset. That''s why! It''s not fair. I try so hard to make her notifications comprehendable, but she just complains. If it wasn''t for me, she wouldn''t even be able to read them. Even after I created that room for her, all I got was half an hour. Half an hour! Do I not deserve a bit more gratitude? Am I not worth more? I''m The System! I create Dungeon Cores and edit the subsystems that go with them. Don''t I deserve some praise for the hard work I put in?" The monitor beeps and the computers hums louder. "I don''t need your attitude Daisy. I''ve already for enough on my plate with Pete. Pete? What are doing here again!? And..." Behind the frog is a daffodil. Definitely not a daisy. "Daisy?" The daffodil nods along with frog and The System breaks. Her domain shatters and is replaced by a void. Darkness covers every corner as she floats in the middle. Her body rises up and the darkness becomes water as she emerges on top. Drifting on her back, The System relaxes in peace and quiet until a croak ruins the mood. Breaking the silence, a closer croak can only mean one thing. She sigh and turns to see a frog, riden by a daffodil, swimming towards her. "I need a holiday." -The System featuring Pete and Daisy
In a small, featureless room beneath the surface of Tira, shockwaves after shockwaves echoed out as the fight raged on. The dungeon trembles under the weight of the Golem''s attack as an elf nimbly manages to evade each strike. Behind them, the door to the Core Room shakes as craters appear one after the other on the Boss Room floor. The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. A large fist collides with the ground, once again sending debris flying. A slight turn of the body, with his head tilted to the right, and the elf evades another storm of stone and dust. With a smile on his face and suppressing his laughter, the elf dances around the Golem like flies do humans. Being over 9-foot tall, the elf is but a fly in the Golem''s eyes. Yet the monster is still unable to rid itself of the frustrating pest buzzing around it. The Golem attacks, but misses. Attacking again, it missedls again. Even trying to sweep the area around it, it misses completely. Not landing a single attack, the only thing it has managed to do is turn the Boss Room in to a wreck. The Golem was enraged. The Dungeon was in agony. But the Elf.. Was laughing his head off. The Golem kicks out with it''s leg, but misses. It tries to crush its opponent by stomping the ground, but still misses. It even tries to flatten the elf with its body by falling in top of him, yet nothing works. The elf is too fast to hit. Too nimble to be caught trapped. To dexterous for the Golem to do anything. The Dungeon Core watches it all and knew its time had come. All the monsters it had summoned to pillage, plunder and kill, were already gone. Littered in the tunnels and rooms throughout the dungeon wherever their fate had encountered the elf. The same fate that was now fighting its Boss Monster. From the side, two woman watch the confrontation with mixed opponions. One of them, infatuated with the white-haired devil barely making a sweat, firmly believes that the elf will become the strongest person in the world. And all she wishes for is the privilege to stay beside him. The other wholeheartedly hope that he trips, letting the Golem''s attacks squash him to release her from fate. The hate in her eyes is obvious and every near miss causes her body to tense up, praying that was the one that would end him. Dancing around a battlefield of broken stone, the elf mocks the Golem with a graceful elegance until he finishes testing himself and his fun runs out. The Golem''s fist is thrown out for another attempt, but the he weaves beside it and gets in close. His fist is encases itself in magic and, as the red mist condenses into a gauntlett, he rams it through the monsters chest. Braided into a ponytail, his hair flutters slightly as the elf forces his hand out from the dry stone. A smile creeps across his face and his palm opens to reveal the magic core inside. Crushing the gem to dust, the Golem crumbles and goes crashing to the ground. One of the onlookers squeel in delight whilst the other sighs audibly. Her lives won''t change now. Worse yet, it will be even harder to kill the elf after he''s gained more power. "You''re mine now baby." Pushing open the door that leads to his price, the elf can''t contain his jubilation and he gloats infront of the Core. The power it contains is guaranteed to make him stronger in some way. "Oi. Guard the door." A pair of lifeless eyes obey the command as the elven woman stands beside the door. The other elven woman follows him inside with a slight skip to her step. "I can''t believe it. This is getting easier. After I destroy you and take your power, I''ll be even stronger." The purple hue of the Dungeon Core reflects in his eyes as he strides towards it. Giddiness swelling inside like childish revelry. With nothing left to defend itself, the Core was doomed. Trapped inside the prison of its own body, all it could do was watch as its very life was snatched away. Taking the purple gem in his hands and grinding it to dust, the elf showed no compassion as his laugh turned maniacal. Just like that, Dungeon Core #695,443''s life came to an end and the balance of the world tilted a fraction more. The elf, known to his parent as Aldor and Master Hiroshi to the elven women, laughs louder and louder as he absorbs the power released by the Core. Once it''s finished, he closes his eyes and becomes motionless before asking, "Which direction should I head next?" Knowing this isn''t the first time their master has spoken to himself, neither of the women say a word. Fearful of any reprisal that may come her way, the elf outside doesn''t even dare look in. Told to guard the door, that''s exactly what she''s going to do. The elf that followed him, however, can barely take her eyes of Hiroshi. Throwing brief glances back at his toy outside, Kya has been with the dungeon-conquering elf since he left his forest. Named Aldor by his parents, he was born into the lowest ring of the elven heirachy. Manure spreaders by law, Hiroshi''s parents were hard-working elves who understood the value of life. Trying to impart what they knew, they tried to teach their son kindness, acceptance and a good work ethic. Which would have worked, if Aldor hadn''t awoken to memories of a past life at the exrememly-young age of 18. Elves are still what-humans-would-call toddlers at that point in their life. Fertilising the fields, Aldor, son of Aldorn, couldn''t believe his luck. It wasn''t good luck. The smell of manure permeating his clothes and the sight of his hands stained brown, caused Hiroshi to snap. He wasn''t the son of Aldorn. He was the son of a man who worked sewerage maintaince. The same shitty job he had accepted after finishing college. In a field below the bountiful city of elves, Hiroshi was mortified as his past life conflicted with his present. Day after day, memories would return one after other, each worse than the last until the moment of his death flashed before his eyes. He grit his teeth as manure squelched in his fists, rage descending over him. His face contorted into disgust, all aimed at himself for being so stupid. He resented enjoying time with parents spreading shit across fields so that crops could go and elves could harvest at a later time. He hated the smell, the sight, and most of all, the taste in his throat. He hated that he was in a backwater world with no technology. No conveniences. No Internet! He hated smelling and looking like shit. He hated that he had enjoyed it up until he didn''t. He hated himself for having to endure this new life. Most of all, he hated his parents. It was, after all, their fault he was stuck in such a demeaning role. Just like it had been last time. His life was repeating. Even if he had longer ears this time, Hiroshi still smelled like shit. A disgusting odor that clings to the body and clothes and doesn''t disappear no matter how much one scrubs. Worse yet, he wasn''t even paid as elven society contributes for the greater good. No money. That was the last straw. If the pay was good, Hiroshi could deal with shovelling shit until the day he died. If the pay was good. The fact that was no pay whatsoever, except for a hearty meal with elves that didn''t stink to high heaven, tipped him over the edge and his sanity cracked. Memories of Hiroshi Hiro, a bitter and lonely sewage technician from Okinawa, won the battle of supremacy for the mind. Aldor, son of Aldorn, was kicked out and replaced by a miserable, old man who hadn''t felt loved in years. After drowning in a river of human waste and dying the shittiest death possible, Hiroshi was now in the body of a spry, young elf. His felt elated for the first time in years and his mind wandered to his new future. He only wanted two things to be happy. The first was power. The power to be able to do what he wanted. The second was to not have to deal with shit. Not anymore.
Chapter 25 : Progression On the way to carryout their second contract for The Syndicate, Noir and Carrie stop Shadow Walking in a clearing in the forest. Mt Morte can still be seen in the distance, growing bigger everyday.
Kill Gregor Greene: One of the farmers in Trin has been committing heinous acts upon his own family and shows no sign of stopping Such a sinful existence causing unwanted abuse cannot be permitted to continue and Tironia can produce better than this foul ilk Leave your mark at the scene to increase The Syndicate''s fame and to acquire new contracts Rewards: 1 Contract Point Fame increase in Ishda Subclass Unlock: Farmer Return with the body to unlock more rewards
"I can''t wait to get back! Master will be extremely happy with us. Just like she was last." Noir''s laugh rings out through the forest sending birds scattering, the thought of his Master praising him is all he can think about. Instead of responding, Carrie rolls her eyes at her overly-enthusiastic partner. It''s always Master this, Master that, with Noir. He''s got a child''s mindset that''s constantly stuck on repeat, but at least he gets the job done. His job so far, being a distraction so that Carrie can swiftly finish off their targets. Noir''s loud and forward personality makes him the perfect candidate for bait. Wondering how each monster earns their individuality, including herself, Carrie takes a cup from her pocket dimension and enjoys a refreshing drink. Feeling rather parched himself, Noir follows suit. Afterwards, they press on through the overgrown thickets of the forest towards their destination. A few hours of travelling later, the occasional monster quelling and a couple of toilet breaks because Noir drank too much, they finally arrive in Trin. Moving through the shadows, Noir and Carrie can cross the region faster than most creatures making them the best choice for long distance missions. Before approaching, each Shadow Walker changes their outfits. After acquiring a pair of travellers outfits on their last mission, it makes blending in and infiltration much easier. The village they arrive is tiny. Barely ten years old they place is more of a homestead than anything, but who are they to question the contract. A few amenities run down the main, and only, road in the village and houses litter the countryside. Separated by small walls and wooden fences, each family has their own land to take care of. No guards and no militia, the only thing Trin has is a bel tower and even that''s been placed poorly. In the middle of all the fields, it will take a long time to get there and notify everyone when shit hits then fan. And there''s always sabotage too. Everything in the village-stead is made of wood and it doesn''t appears to look like they''re struggling to make ends meet out here in the middle of nowhere. Which is strange since there are tithes and taxes to contend with. Not too mention actual Bandits. Still, the majority in Trin live a more-than modest life. Right on the outskirts and almost in the forest itself, they find their target''s home. Caught red handed doing exactly as The System said he would, a portal of shadows opens up behind him and a single thrust is all it takes to impale the naked man. Forcefully removed from the act, Gregor Greene is pulled back through the portal and it to the hands of a waiting Noir. The act itself somewhat ruffled the Shadow Walkers usual composure. Both have one track minds and nothing can normally pull them away from progression, or Abi, but the sad scene of duress pulls on their evolving heart strings. Lest to say, Gregor Greene''s death was not pleasant. Before the body was stored away in Noir''s pocket dimension, they use his blood to paint the letter A before drawing a circle around it. Seconds was all it had taken to end an otherwise uneventful trip. Less than a minute later, they''re back in the forest far removed from the farmland. Mission accomplished Noir is back to his raucous self and is boasting about his perfect thrust. Explaining in detail that the Master will love his wonderful execution. Carries can only sigh again at his childish behaviour, but a smile does creep across her face. If he explains it like that, it will definitely not be praise he receives. Meh. He could be worse though, she thinks to herself, as they both disappear into the shadows. Hop, skip and shadow walking home. Noir and Carrie. Syndicate Assassins
It''s been a week since the Dungeon Categoriser met Carrie''s swift justice inside my dungeon. Personally, I think he should have suffered way more than he did. Not that I had any say in it. Seriously though, he deserved much worse and got off lightly with how quickly Carrie ended his life. After his death, Elric, his son, all the mercenaries that came with him and a shitload of Boars, was all absorbed by yours truly. What can I say? I''m a greedy girl. That granted me more XP on top of the already-ridiculous amount that Light and Dropper brought back during my Terrortation. That night, as the celebrations were nearing the end, I received some distressing news. However, since I''ve had time to process it, I feel as though I may have gotten worked up over nothing. I mean, 50 years is a long-ass time, but it''s not like I had any other friends or family to leave behind. I knew people, but none of them were what I would call a friend; they were more like acquaintances. The only person close enough, that I would have called my friend, died before I did so... Yeah. After that, I was visited by an old man. He claimed the gods told him to go the growing mountain and to seek out The Syndicate. Once he arrived, they would help him get revenge on the man who killed his son and would stop what happened to him from ever happening to anyone else. Permanently. Since he''d made the journey and was my first guest not to make my Core rattle, we fed him, listened to his story and then ate him. ... Psyche. He had that supper-cute teddy. I''m not Trixie, you know? Either way, after listening to his story, a new contract popped up with his deets and we sent him in his merry way. Both parties happy. Him, because his son will be avenged and he wasn''t eaten by your friendly-neighborhood Dungeon Core. Me, because I''ve got the world''s cutest teddy lapping it up in my home. Now, I just need to find a way to cuddle it. He also dropped a large-bronze coin in Mira''s hand as he left. I didn''t know if he was donating to the cause, or slyly implying something to my guard, but I let him go because his payment was satisfactory. Being a Dungeon Core kinda kicks ass when people just bring you tributes. What? It was for the Syndicate? So? I created it, that means I am The Syndicate. Since then, time passed, points were spent and I have become more confident in the metaphorical shoes of my new life. Blowing points like it''s Friday night behind Denny''s, my family have gone through quite a few class upgrades. The most notable being Light, Dropper and Veris reaching the same rank as Noir and Carrie. Neither myself, nor Me, can understand why they seem to be losing armour with each advancement though. They become more fashionable and glamorous instead as the recurring trend of beauty strikes again. After their latest evolutions, I''m mega jelly. With skin that would make Elves jealous and hair that smooth it puts Spider silk to shame, each person that has risen from Vagabond to Shadow Walker did so with a great amount of individualistic flair. Which is good timing really. I was just going to generically letter the next set of Rogues since there isn''t much difference between them, but now I know they change... It''s not easy making up names, you know? Reading on Amazon or a pirate site? This novel is from Royal Road. Support the author by reading it there. Model number one is still sporting a scruffy, blue goatee, but his previously-short hair now reaches down to his shoulders. Bastard looks like he''s gotten younger too. Gods these Rogues are lucky. Instead of black, cream is his colour of choice and silk the material as a simple pants and shirt combo makes up his outfit. Would that have happened to me? Model number two has finally got a decent hairstyle and her sunhine locks are plaited up to the max. With her floral dress and open-toe sandals, it must be summer all year round for this Rogue. Although, simplicity is the name of the game and Dropper is murdering it. They''re so cool. Model number three... What can I say about model number three? I just... I can''t. Why? Me. Can you say something, please?
Model number three has turned full-on Dominatrix. With black leather covering her entire body, you wouldn''t even know it was Veris if her snow-white wasn''t sticking out of the back... Or would you? Not limited to an all-in-one, this outfit comes in skimpy, skimpier, skimpiest and invisible. With her beaded whip, this Boss is truly a work of art.
I don''t want to play this game anymore. Why does Veris have to be on a different level of strange? I mean... Nevermind. I really missed out as a human. Every Shadow Walker gets there own little pocket dimension at tier three and all I can think is, how cool would that be! Storing my own personal weapon, or the remains of my kill and not having carry every single, little thing. It would have be great. On another note, the Veris clones are close to tier three and all of my Rogue scouting parties have become generic Vagabonds. Speaking of, I''m still not sure why every Vagabond I summon comes out female and looking like Veris. Other than that... Everyone is doing so well. My dungeon now has a sixth floor and I''m reluctant to admit, it''s still the same as my other even-numbered floors. It makes for fast progress, what else can I say? I''ll add some mazes later, OK? Beginning the path of Deep Penetration, I placed ten Stone Golems on the sixth floor. This obviously unlocked Mr Iron Golem, who then just so happened to step forward and graciously become a Floor Boss. Well done, Barry Jr. What started out as a the Rogues'' Hideout may aswell now be named the Rogues'' Paradise. What were once partially-damaged buildings, or in some cases no buildings at all, have all undergone serious upgrades. Every feature is now tier three and no longer look the piece of shits they did. Well, most don''t. Some of them... Mira and Hana are finally off my case because the Black Barracks is a majesty to say it''s only a tier three. With brickwork like Barry, the entire building glimmers slightly and is nigh on impregnable. Beneath the fully rebuilt keep is a well-sized prison, reinforced to keep dangerous criminals contained. Which is awesome, but I doubt we''ll ever use it. It looks that good that I barely even remember the rubble that was the Guard House. It truly befits it''s status as the entrance to Rogue HQ now. Along with its upgrade, Hana and Mira were both promoted to Commander status. Sadly, they can''t offer quests like Talia can. Which is a shame. What they do provide though is a two-fold bonus. The 10% increase in stats for everyone summoned by the dungeon would be amazing on its own, but the 30% boost to those set to the Black Barracks is just insane. I''m sure the Retreat offers some type of bonus too? And the Sparring Ground? Either way, that''s buff. Those boosts make it even better that our would-be invaders have to pass through there first. What''s even better than that are the eight Shadow Walkers I summoned to staff the Barracks with. Noir and Carrie are ridiculously strong, even with their eccentrics. With all the inside bonuses going on, these new recruits should be like diamond rank adventurers. Let''s see a Catergoriser come waltzing in now, eh? With more bodies staffing the Barracks, that meant Hana and Mira no longer has to alternate between themselves and could finally take a proper break. The words of gratitude I recieved... I felt so bad. It wasn''t my fault it took so long to give them a reprieve. Well... It kinda was, but you could also blame the Catergorisers. They were partially responsible. Plus my Core was mega damaged and I had to... Nevermind. Let''s not cow tip the Behemoth today. The System for a good piece of my mind after I''d summoned the Shadow Walkers too. The fourth tier of the Rogue class still says ??? and I couldn''t let that slide. What''s next? Why hasn''t it unlocked? Who''s playing silly buggers up there in Dungeon Core creating heaven and not sorting shit out? So yeah, she got it. Bitch. Me doesn''t know what''s going on either. According to him, every monster unlocks in multiples of ten. Which I have! Eight unnamed that Hana and Mira can deal with, alongside he Ice Queen and Prince Loudmouth. Ten. Ten! Where''s my upgrade? Forgetting about some ancient hag whose cobwebs have caused her to go senile, Me motioned to summon another ten. I shot that idea down though. There''s already enough to buy still and Shadow Walkers are 40DP a pop. He''s crazy if he thinks I''m spending another 400DP on them just for it not work. I''ll just push the ones I do have into leveling faster. The Swindlers'' Den had two simultaneous upgrades back-to-back and became The Traveller''s Treasure Trove. What a mouthful. Is she annoyed at me or something? What did I do? The feature still looks like a cheap gambling establishment from the outside, but the inside is like a Palace. With marble everywhere, the interior is decorated in blue and gold and has many different games spread within. Unlike The Black Barracks, I could only give one of my Con Men a promotion and I chose Jack. As I said, every one knows a shady guy named Jack. His title is The Swindler and once a day he is able to magically steal an item from another person''s possession if he''s within 10 feet of them. Apparently, he is also the most persuasive man in any room he enters. With the upgrades came the need for staff and staff is what I did. Con Men for one half, Speed Dealers for the other. At tier two the dealers do exactly what it says in the description. You can barely see their hands as they do their thing and I can almost guarantee people will complain about them. Fortunately, they can dial themselves down and each one is a Mini-Boss. The more the merrier, right? Asking about the amount of Mini-Bosses I was racking up on my first floor, Me assured me it wasn''t important in any way. Because of that, I confirmed everyone I could as I made the rounds and upgraded features. After the Treasure Trove, the well that was Lucinda''s potion hollow became Witchcraft Creations. The Potion Master, titled appropriately for her position, is still the only person working in the odd-looking cottage. With a second floor twice the size of the first and a chimney that poins out of the side opposed to the roof, the feature is unable to be staffed by anyone else. That means she might have a lot of work in the future. On the plus side though, at least she can hand out contracts. Titles seem to be hit and miss for contracts, but at least Lucinda can help advance the dungeon from home. The wooden stall next door has finally earned some brick too. What was The Shop of Secrets upgraded into The Covert Coin. Glass windows, nice wares, ita about time this dungeon got some class. The Retreats been pulling everyones weight so far. Again, I''m unable to staff the building with anyone else, but we did get a double promotion so I didn''t complain. Tara and Lara got titled Cloak and Dagger and look like a proper pair of Assassins. Which is awesome, but since when do Assassins run businesses? Not that it even matters. I can''t explain half this things going on in this dungeon, so yeah. Assassins. At least they''re contract-offering Assassins. Able to increase their wares and boost The Syndicate, the girls are a right pair. Who would have thought all these crappy features would''ve turned out so well? Certainly not me. I damn well hoped they would, but some of them... The Box of Worship springs to mind. From Box to Shed, the transformation at tier three is just phenomenal. I mean, where''s the consistency? Avos, Zen and Ang no longer have to pray in a dingy, little squat anymore. No. The Townhouse of Tribulation looks like the Lord''s manor. All white, with a sky blue roof, the feature is absolutely stunning. Those Priests are so lucky. Beside the house is a small flower garden and patio and the entire feature is walled off. All white with a metal fence on top, the only way in is through the main gate. The tunnel leading further inside the dungeon has been hidden behind a hedge maze on the other side of the house. Much better than when a Box sat infront of it. I even had a try of that maze... Because of how much the feature changed, I wasn''t even bothered that there wasn''t a title to hand out. Not in the slightest. Not even a little bit. Still, I threw a few Dungeon Disciples to Avos and told him to name them before moving on. The only feature I didn''t upgrade then, was The Sparring Grounds. I didn''t have unlimited DP. Even if everything combined was a shitload. Over the week though, my ever active scouting parties brought tribute after tribute and I continued with my ever expanding Rogue Town. Ali had waited patiently, unlike a certain guard I know, and her turn came next. As per, the first tier isn''t worth mentioning and neither was the second. I might even close my eyes in the future when I''m doing features, just so I don''t have to endure it. That said, the third tier... Phew. I almost cried so hard. I just want to eat something. I''m not even hungry, but it all looks so good. The Crescent Cafe looks like the perfect place to grab a bite and is smack bang in the middle of the room. That way, it''s not too far from anyone since the room is fairly big. Finding myself frustrated, Ali''s title keeps me calm. Known as The Chef, her building is almost as big as Talia''s and is made from light, yellow stone. With a red roof and a menu board outside, the only other features is the sign that reads, Ali''s. It''s also one more contracter for my dungeon as she can source ingredients from the Rogues. I''m not sure if any of hers involve the murdering of people, but I wouldn''t be surprised if they did. A dungeon''s gotta grow somehow, right? And if I grow big enough... One day! I''ll get to try her food, one day. I swear it. The Privacy Palace sits next to Ali''s. A three-story hotel with 45 guest suites, 2 royalty suites and a pool on the roof. Each room is equipt with everything a guest could need and they put the Retreat to shame, even though that''s a tier-four feature. What made all this possible was the second Contract I formed with an outside source. That''s right, I''m talking about Katrina. I took her words to heart when she said she didn''t want to leave my dungeon. She''s my bestie now and I even gave her the royalty suite in the Privacy Palace. Not that se stays there. For some reason she''s still bunking with Ali. I''ll put it down to trauma and move on. I don''t care if she stays with Ali. I actually don''t this time. Not like when I lied about the Priests not getting a title. It was bullshit. The System thinks she''s so clever making things unpredictable, but that''s not what I want. I can never think straight when she''s involved. Even though she was only an apprentice, Katrina still has the Catergoriser class. Even whilst contracted to a dungeon. How bizarre is that. I mean, how can I be a Catergoriser''s Master when they''re supposed to be my mortal enemies? Either way, I don''t find Kat half as scary as before. Ya know. My friend Kat. My mate, Kat. Kat, my bestie. ... Then again, what kind of Catergoriser contracts themself to a dungeon? Maybe Kat''s crazier than the rest of us? Except Veris. No one''s crazier than Veris. Being contracted with Kat means that she can now see and hear me. Which might have worn her out becaise she''s been sleeping for a while. There was just so many things I wanted to ask her. More so now that I know it''s been so many years since I died. Plus, I just love her. She''s so cute. It''s just what I needed to keep myself grounded in this thing us Cores call life. Chapter 26 : A New Acquisition Dum and Dee are sat in the Retreat enjoying a cold ale after their shift. "So, when are you gonna tell Mystique how you feel?" Dum smiles at Dee who instantly starts waving his arms. "I don''t have feelings for her. Why would you say that?" he questions right back. "Come on, Dee. Everytime we cross them on shift change you barely say a word. Nevermind holding eye contact either as yer always staring at the ground," he explains with simplicity the events that have brought him to this conclusion. "It''s... It''s not like that. She''s just... Well.. She''s..." Unable to finish his sentences Dee begins to stutter and Dum breaks out into laughter at his friend''s expense. "Sounds like someone''s having a good time over here. What are you laughing at?" Talia interrupts as she has spotted Dum''s empty mug and is now slightly curious as to what he finds so funny. "Nothing," Dee cries out in embarrassment before his partner reveals the gossip to the curious Taskmaster. "Oh, that''s some juicy information. What are you going to do, Dee?" she smiles innocently whilst refilling Dum''s drink. "Nothing. Absolutely nothing! Now, if you two don''t mind," turning redder than a fire dragon''s flame, Dee hurries out of the Retreat before the two remaining people can say another word on the subject. Not that either of them would have been able to as they''re both in stitches over Dee''s childlike response. "Aww. What a softy," Talia sighs, after she has calmed down. "Yeah, but he''s the best guy I know." Dum smiles as he thinks about the various scenarios that he and his partner have found themselves in. "You''re a big softy as well I see," raising her eyebrows at Dum she gives him a heart-melting smile and her voice is a melody to his ears. Any logical thoughts that had been drifting around his head crumble to her tune. "Huh? Er... No?" confused and caught off guard by Talia''s feminine wiles, he stumbles through an answer only to earn himself a greater smile. "I''m... Well... I''m... I''m a real man... You know?" Dum finishes, sounding less confident with each word, before he turns the same colour Dee had just been previously sporting. "Oh? Of course you are sweetie," she keeps on smiling at Dum. To him, her eyes are like a clear summer sky without a cloud in sight and his heart beats in passion. "Well, I should... Er... I should go see where... Where Dee got too. Yeah!" downing his ale he slams the mug down and runs to the door. "I''ll... I''ll erm... See you later, Talia. Bye. " Dashing from the Retreat with as much speed as Dee, Dum hurries after his partner. Jumping inside at Talia''s words, he sets off to find the person he considers to be his brother. He needs to inform him of his own new-found crush. If he can''t share this news with Dee, then who is he going to share it with? Dungeon Stories Volume 1
Aside from all my fabulous feature-and-creature upgrades, I also find myself at Level 31. I know, right? Where did that come? Noir deposited a nice amount of points himself with Carrie adding the cherry to his cake. Funnily enough, that wasn''t what did it. The Catergoriser and his men weren''t actually as high in level as their promiscuous behaviour would suggest. Only going as far to reach the standards of Talon the Defiler. Both literally and figuratively. So what came and rocked Abi''s world like nothing else can? Who continues to out do themselves everytime they leave the dungeon? Who can''t I leave alone for two gods-damned minutes A certain blue haired Rogue and his Goblin dropping partner. That''s who! Not that I''m angry. Only frustrated. I worry that one day, they''ll be turned into some dickhead''s XP and I won''t ever see them again. So yeah, Light and Dropper helped catapulted me all the way to level 31... With a single elf.
First Time Acquisition Bonus: 29DP 29XP New Loot Acquired: Elven Bow: 120DP Elven Dagger: 80DP Reinforced Traveler''s Garb: 50DP Reinforced Traveler''s Boots: 40DP Elven Absorption Bonus: 21,000DP 21,000XP Aelion The Woodwalker: Level 31 Woodwalker 210,000 XP
Thanks to their ever-surprising tributes, I can''t help but feel incredibly strong. Or what I consider strong to be. I hadn''t even made it to the twenties as a human. Check me out now, Anya. I''m rocking the thirties!
Dungeon Core Abi Level 32: 2586/4400XP until next level 6 Floors 58 Rooms 62 Tunnels 162 Monsters 2 Contract Monsters 88 Traps 3488/1750 DP Available
I''m no longer human but that no longer matters. I mean, who''d grumble over specifics when faced with these stats? Getting to Level 30 as a human isn''t an easy feat though. Once you hit level 20, the XP needed to level up is multiplied by ten. Unless your in a really good party, or your brother''s the guild leader, that''s pretty much your cap. It''s easy enough to make money and live safely after all. Only a fool would be talked into going into a dungeon to loot it a couple of times for the money... Memories suck. Why did he have to be so trusting until the end? What even made him act that way? Whatever. Since parties claim all the good spots, most solo adventurers and city dwelling guards never make it past level 20. Even we has slowed down since life had become easy. Well... Not easy, but easier than begging for scraps or stealing before you starved. It was comfortable and with Anya, everyday was a blast. Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators! From time to time, I still wonder where they keep finding these huge sums of DP. Everytime I think to ask them, however, they''re out on a mission. Taken out of rotation, Light and Dropper are tasked with completing missions for The Syndicate alongside Noir and Carrie. Now that there are more people who offer contracts, things are progressing smoothly for once. When I had nothing to do, Me explained how the Leveling System works. Which is another absurb System that doesn''t know its arse from its elbow, or its 1 from its 9. He had to go over almost everything a dozen times for it to finally start sinking in. Maybe he was right, I''m not the most attentive person? He explained the XP needed for every level I''ve been through and even the ones I''ve not reached. He even went on about how Regeneration will finally start showing its worth. That skill though... Is trash. What Dungeon Core has to get to around level 50 before a skill they start with becomes useful? Who''s she kidding? She doesn''t have a fucking clue. She''s just sticking shit together and hoping rainbow unicorns come out. Manifestation at level 10? Yeah, I''m grateful. Like super, super grateful. I''d have probably gone absolutely crazy without it, but... Is it really a level 10 skill? Again, whatever. It''s not like I''m in charge. You can''t stop a rainstorm of shit with well wishes. Not that it''s raining now, but it pours in this dungeon. It damn well pours. Me''s lecture lasted forever. Like, the span of three days forever. Considering I don''t sleep, it lasted so long. So long. I wish I never asked in the first place. Still, even when it was over and I actually understood everything he had said, I was still confused. Why? For myself and any monster I summon, the XP needed to level up increases every five levels. Which is much different than what I know about human leveling. Human levels increase with each one until you hit 20. Then the amount you need increases tenfold and still rises with every level. Hence why most people don''t reach 30. The fact light and Dropper managed to find someone like that is already baffling enough. Either way, my leveling now is much easier opposed to that of when I was still human. Much, much easier. No wonder I''m level 32. It feels like I''ve been given an advantage and, seeing how I''m progressing faster than I have ever have done before, I haven''t complained about the matter once. Not once. Anyway. In my short life the two Rogues who became my first scouting party never cease to amaze me and I find myself wishing to go with them at some point. If only just to be able to watch them in action. Sadly, that will probably never happen and I''ll have to catch them on home turf. The next time we''re attacked, hopefully they won''t be paralysed by magic. Best case scenario is that there won''t be a next time, but I wouldn''t put all my eggs in that basket. Not for all the gold in Tira. As Kat so rightly pointed out before, humans can be bat-shit crazy and not worth the effort I''m trying to put it. She did however go on to praise my efforts and noble intentions, boosting my ego a great deal. Hehe. Helping out humanity does make me sound quite benevolent, right? Does that makes me a person of stature and nobility? What do you think, Me?
It is your story.
Yes it is, but you''re also part of it. You know what, Me? I''m feeling really good right now.
If that is the case, how about spending some points?
That''s a good idea. I suppose I am almost full again. What''s next though?
What about acquiring some land outside the dungeon? I''m rather curious as to how much space you will receive from using the feature.
I unlocked Land Acquisition many, many features ago. To be honest, I might have forgot about it. Aswell as a dozen others because there''s so many. I couldn''t even dream of spending 1000DP naxk then. Now that I''m a flush mama jama, let''s see what it will do. Fantastic idea, Me. Teleporting to my entrance, I float as close to the opening as possible before being stopped by an invisible barrier. Stupid restrictions. Even if a Core could leave the dungeon, it''s not like we could do anything outside the confines of our bodies. The thought of being stuck inside my walls for the rest of my days is disheartening. Luckily though, I''m not alone in this endeavour I call life. My mind is soothed as I picture the faces of those within and I purchase the land just outside my would-be jail cell. Grass and soil that surround the entrance to my dungeon begin to shine a sublime golden yellow. The trees, roots and stones in the immediate vicinity outside are also wrapped in the same incandescent glow. As this is happening, I can almost feel myself growing in size. It''s the same feeling I get when I place a new floor, but at the same time it''s slightly different. "Woah! Why is everything glowing?" Kat and Ali appear from behind and scare the crap out of me with their arrival. I was too zoned in on what was happening in front of me that I didn''t even notice them arrive. "I''ve just bought the land outside my entrance so that I can hopefully build on it and expand my town. Also, in the future, please let me know you''re coming beforehand so that you don''t give me a heart attack." "Can Dungeon Cores have heart attacks? It doesn''t seem very likely," Kat is quick to point out my fakery and has a cynical look on her face. "They most certainly can," I begin...
They most certainly can not.
... before Me shuts me down. "Hehe. Thanks, Me." Catching me out, that''s the first time anyone has spoken directly to Me in my presence.
Abi just has a vivid imagination.
He did say that he could communicate with anyone I summon. I''ve never actually seen him do it until now though and technically Kat is contracted, not summoned. Not that I could list the differences between the two. "Hey, it''s not like that. I just enjoy a good joke," Kat smiles as she places her arms around my ball of light. Recently, I''ve been able to slightly feel her touch. This isn''t the first time she has embraced me over these last few days. Maybe it is because she''s comfortable here as Me pointed out before. "Also, I didn''t know dungeons could take control of land outside their... Well, dungeon. In fact, I don''t think anyone knows that." Your preaching to the choir there girl. "To be honest, Kat, neither did we. Me thinks that because I was a human before becoming a Dungeon Core, that''s likely the reason for all my strange features." I let her in on another secret from my past. Having grown quite close recently, I''m slowly revealing more and more about myself as we go. Plus, she didn''t run away after seeing Samantula. That there means she a keeper. Any information about the current me, or the person I used to be, is hardly distressing compared to the Scary Mary that protects me. As the purchase completes, I take everything in from the comfort of Kat''s embrace. Which I super nice, even if I do say so myself. As the light fades, the three of us take in my latest acquisition. No one seems impressed, however, and I can''t help but feel I''ve just wasted 1000DP. The trees look exactly the same and the grass... Is just grass. It''s not like becoming part of the dungeon changes your physical features in anyway. Not that I''m bothered in the least. Nope. The fact that I can see the grass and the trees, bugs crawling through the soil, birds flying in the big, blue sky above... I phase through Katrina''s arms and out into the world. Emotions begin stirring as I shoot around as fast as I can whilst Ali and Kat watch on with a smile. It''s not important that nature hasn''t been altered. Nope. The only thing that matters is the fact that I''m outside my walls. Hehehe. I''m not trapped anymore! Ecstatic at my new found freedom, I can''t help but zoom around. There''s still an invisible barrier preventing me from going any further than what I own, but I couldn''t care less. Just being outside is the most wonderful feeling in the world. Or it was. Captivated by the mountain that houses my dungeon, I''m shocked to see that it''s actually quite large. Or maybe massive would be a better description? Either way, it''s huge and is most certainly is a mountain. Which throws me off. The last time I saw the outside, this place was a Goblin hovel and no bigger than a house. A barrage of questions fill my mind, but that isn''t anything new at this point and I don''t even bother to ask. If I had a DP for every question, I''d be a rich Core. The large, erogenous rock that houses me is the most beautiful thing that I''ve ever seen in both my lives and by far the strangest. And I''ve seen Sam and Peaches. Being able to finally see my home in all its glory puts me at a loss for words. Leading upto a snow-filled peak, patches of nature are present here and there in a vibrant display on colour. Pink, red, blue, purple and orange. Surreal trees and grass make for a magnificent sight and I can''t help but be mesmerised by the outer shell of my dungeon.
Wow.
I''m so glad you said it. I know you don''t know, so don''t think I''m asking you, but how the hell is that even possible?
I''m getting used to your rhetorical question these days and have can tell the difference between them. However, I wish I could answer that question with facts and knowledge. I too can''t help but want to know how this has happened.
Returning to my senses after my having my socks blown off, I notice Kat is still standing inside the entrance and hasn''t followed Ali out. Knowing that she''s still a little distressed over past events, I float over and try to ease her burden. She should be able to appreciate her master''s beautiful mountain too, right?
https://i.imgur.com/rRX3WVt.jpg Link to a hand-drawn map. Please go easy on me, my artwork is not the best. Chapter 27 : The Hay Bale Hiroshi hated it. Why? Why did his new life still involve shit? Why? It wasn''t fair. Anything else. Anything else would have been enough to stop him from snapping. To stop him from going crazy. Instead, he lost his mind and the urge for power was talked into him when he recieved his own schizophrenic companion. A broken subsystem for the broken man. It was new to him; living in a world with levels and magic, yet at the same time it wasn''t. Hiroshi still had Aldor''s memories of being raised in an elven community by loving parents. The problem was that he despised them. Why were they at the bottom of society? He refused to be a shit shovoler any longer. Fortunately, Hiroshi found his salvation in dungeons and had an on board A.I to direct him to his him goals. Apparently, power was all that was need to keep hit out of the manure business and the elf latched on to it like a leech. Under the cover of night and without saying a word to the second set of parents that raised him, Hiroshi murdered his neighbours and left the elven village. Though he was struggling to contain his hate for the world, he still couldn''t hurt the elves who raised him. Guided to his first dungeon, the levels he obtained from killing his kin propelled him through and Hiroshi claimed his first Core. Boosting his strentgh by 100 points and granting him a skill, the urge for power only grew stronger. As he travelled, Hiroshi learned that humans treat dungeons differently than the elves did. Greedy by nature, his former race keep dungeons active and charge adventurers to kill monsters. Elves on the other hand, hated dungeons with a passion and saw it as their mission in life to destroy them whenever they spawned. All in the service of their creator. Picking up two slaves in different ways across the continent, he found he didn''t need love to satisfy his needs. Just like his old world, all it took was a little bit of money and he could buy what he wanted. Only these purchases was permanent. Three dungeons, and several devious acts later, Hiroshi and his slaves cross into Ishda territory.
Coming across a small stream, Hiroshi tells Kya to remove the camp from storage and Aura is ordered to make dinner. The prior takes time to endulge her master''s commands under the meal is ready. The redhead cooking moves away as the other elves return and waits for her portion. The pecking order having already been firmly establish. Instead of spending coin on her, Hiroshi had killed Aura''s last owner when they chanced upon each other in the forest. Kya was already with him by the point and it was clear the other elf was infatuated with him. Not that he indulged her as much as Aura would have liked. He still like to make her take her turn. This was nothing new for a slave and if he was different, Aura wouldn''t have minded. The problem was that he was a fucking lunatic. He talked to himself constantly. Which also wouldn''t have been too bad, had he not believed everything he said. Those words only ever relating to levelling and acquiring more power. He already had a ton of gold, so why hadnt he stopped? Why was he so obsessed. Kya wasn''t interested in stopping at all. She was thoroughly behind Hiroshi destroying every dungeon on the continent for the Allmother. She revered the goddess even more than Hiroshi and would do anything if only to be graced by her presence. Hence, total dungeon destruction. Able to use beginner level space magic, Kya has been a boon to Hiroshi. She''s capable of storing everything he has and she still has space for more. That''s why she isn''t subject to the same harsh treatment that Aura is. That and she hasn''t once tried to escape unlike the redhead. She learned her lesson eventually. Other than being his ass-kissing bag, Kya was also able to cast healing magic. That made it perfect for Hiroshi to hand out a few well-deserved beatings. Screaming all along about how it was for her own benefit. Since then, Aura has been much more compliant. Even if she does have suicidal thoughts. Hiroshi''s tent is actually a two person cabin. How it fits inside is beyond the comprehension level of a primitive mind. Instead, Kya just says, "It does." As explanations go, it certainly didn''t hit the spot and Aura paid the price for it that night. As morning arrives, the redhead is a husk of her former self. It had been a while since she slept indoors, but the experience had been anything but pleasant. Storing the cabin, the elves set off and leave three sets of tracks. A stern determination, an infatuated succubus and a miserable wreck. Aura hated life. She hated Kya. And she certainly hated Hiroshi.
Sleeping. Eating. Indulgence. These are what Hiroshi''s days consist of as they move onwards towards his next source of power. With the stat increases from his dungeon exterminations, Hiroshi could already be considered to be around level 50. Even though his actual level is only 18, he isn''t scared of anything he might encounter whilst walking through the forest. In the distance the target he''s aiming for is visible and for the first time in a while, Hiroshi feels something different. He shakes it off as nothing when his schizophrenic aid starts mouthing off about something. Shouting himself, they argue for a while as the group presses on. Killing a message carrier, Hiroshi finds out that the mountain has been rowing recently. Not slightly either, but at a substantial rate. One that fast, that anyone who''s seen it has spread the news already. The letter carrier was on his way to Ishda. Bound with a letter for the regional Lord. The mountain growing is cornering, but the monster population thinning isn''t. In fact, it''s a boon as far as the people from Orad are concerned. Life is always easier when there are less things trying to kill you. The mountain though still raises concern. Unexplainable events are the worst type of events after all because they''re unexplainable. There''s also mention of a missing Catergoriser inside, but Hiroshi doesn''t know what that is and his companion is playing coy. Even though Hiroshi and his slaves are still a long way off, the mountain in the distance is easily discernable. It clearly sits above the forest and is covered in a varierty of colours. Red, pink black, grey white, brown. Mismatched patterns crisscross and make the whole thing look surreal. "What the hell is that?" The words were out of his mouth before he even processed them. He knew what it was. His aid had already informed him prior to their arrival. He still couldn''t help himself from asking the obvious. Never had he seen something so strange in either of his lives and his freed kicked in with a vengeance. The supernatural sight of the mountain all but screamed how strong the core had become. Hiroshi couldn''t wait. This one was going to push him to heights he could only dream of. No longer would he feel like an anomaly in an autonomous world. The marvel of levels and stats pleased him greatly and he was consumed by wanting more. Hiroshi would destroy as many dungeons as possible until he was the strongest person in the world. Then he would no longer be the shit-shoveling cleanup man he used to be. Hiroshi Hiro, Reincarnator.
"There''s no need to Worry, Kat. I own this land now and it''s part of the dungeon. If anyone enters unannounced, we''ll know. You don''t have to be afraid anymore," her eyes don''t leave the ground even as I try to console her. I''ve never been the best with words though and situations like this are even trickier. "Hey, did you know the mountain has pink trees growing on it? Right? It''s mental. There are other coloured trees too, but the pink ones are absolutely gorgeous. Why don''t you come look at them with me?" Another attempt leads to failure. Trying to lure her out with the promise of beauty didn''t work and she keeps her eyes firmly glued to the floor. Hmm. What can I say to convince her to come out, Me?
It might be better for you to not force her. When she is ready, I''m sure she will let you know.
And there I was thinking you were going to say something silly.
Silly? Like what?
It doesn''t matter. Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website. That was actually some really good advice you gave, so we''ll roll with that. Thanks, Me.
What did you think I would say?
Ignoring my partner, I tell Kat she can watch me from the entrance and then float out as far as I can. I bounced around before due to excitement, but now I need to properly test the boundaries of my purchase. The plot of land turns out to roughly be the same size as the System-granted room on my first floor. For its price, I thought I would have gotten more. With just that one purchase, everything has change and I couldn''t be happier. Right now, I''m outside. I''m actually under the rays of a real sun and surrounded by nature. I still can''t believe my dungeon is beneath a jaw-dropping mountain, that almost took the thrill of being outside away. It''s so beautiful.
You do have a tendency to be distracted by anything you deem to be beautiful.
That... Is true. I''m trying to be better though.
You sat in your Core room for five hours staring at a Teddy that an old man used to pay his Syndicate contract with.
I... Well... In my defence, that teddy is adorable, Me. It''s got those little stubby ears and a cute button nose.
Quite. Now how about continuing with your purchases.
Ok. I assume that the same rules apply out here as inside, right?
We shall find out.
What? That doesn''t inspire much confidence, Me.
You are going to build the feature regardless of what I say. I did tell you that no dungeon has ever acquired land outside of themselves before. This process itself is brand new meaning there aren''t any records on what you can or cannot do.
Listening to Me''s lack of knowledge, I drop Manifestation and switch to my overview. It''s easier to calculate the cost of features this way, since I''m able to view more at once. It''s also a great way to test designs and town set ups. My overview is actually a lot better than I used to give it credit for. Not that I want to stay there. If I wasn''t able to move and interact with others, I''d definitely find myself going insane being trapped inside. OK, I know what I''m doing. Starting small, just incase, I move the only feature inside that isn''t actually a feature. After choosing a location, the park I created myself magically appears in the designated spot. The recreational area left no trace of itself inside the dungeon and looks as though it''s always been outside. Not finished with my experiments, I attempt to swap it back since it costs nothing to do. I''m also a little worried something might go wrong hence why I chose to do this with the park and nothing some substantial. I can''t imagine what Talia would say if something happened to The Retreat. Areas that are left behind by a feature that''s been moved magically fill themselves in and revert back to normal. It''s almost like what happens with the walls in my dungeon. Speaking of, I better make sure my Rockstar hasn''t gotten himself blocked off soon. After experimenting, I''ve found out that we can move features outside with no problems at all and the same rules still apply. It''s just another part of my dungeon.
That was a good idea, Abi.
Hehe. I do have them sometimes, Me. Placing the pond back inside, I manifest at the entrance where Kat is waiting patiently inside. "What were you doing with the park?" she looks generally curious as to why I would bring a feature outside just to put it back in. Poor Kat, theres going or be a lot more of those questions now you''re living here. "We were confirming whether the same rules that apply to the dungeon work outside." Because she doesn''t know all the rules, Kat still looks confused. "I just wanted to make sure I could features after I''ve placed them, that''s all. It''s alright placing things where I want, but at some point down the line a major reshuffle will probably be needed. I''d be a little screwed if I couldn''t do that, hence the test." Even with my awesome explanation, Kat still looks a little dubious. "OK. So the amount of time I spent swapping things around before you came was just shameful. Not that I''m to blame. It certainly wasn''t poor planning... I just... Kept unlocking features that seemed to be a better fit. If it''s anyone''s fault, it''s Hers." Trying to avoid taking the blame for something that definitely wasn''t my fault, the System finds herself being used as my scapegoat. Unlucky, Sis. Knowing that it''s better to learn from mistakes, opposed to acting like they never happened, I promise myself to do better without letting anyone else know. "That''s an amazing idea, Abi and don''t worry. You had only just become a dungeon when you had one floor, right? I''m sure anyone would make a lot of mistakes in that situation." How nice is Kat? She''s just the best, right? I mean, where''s Me''s understanding nature? All I ever from him is how it''s time to spend. Kat''s consoling words soothe my Core and I''m remind me how happy I am that she decided to stay. "That''s true," but thinking about how often I changed Trixie''s location, "I should have listened to Me more. I was irrational and upset about losing my body back then. Over this last week, I feel like I''m coping much better though."
Hysterical would have been a better choice of words. Or in Denial.
"OK, Mr Smartypants. Anyway, you can just watch from here if you want, Kat. I''m going to go do my thing." With that said, I float back outside to finally begin my work. Hehe, outside. Let''s start with a feature I unlocked ages ago, but have yet to place. We''ll make our way down the list from there. OK, partner?
Sounds perfect.
Reverting back to my overview, the list of features I''ve yet to purchase is now that long that I have to scroll through it to get to what I want. I should have just asked Me. Seeing the prices of most features sitting below the 100DP mark makes me feel incredibly flush, even after using Land Acquisition. Knowing how fast it can be spent though, I decide to allocate half of my remaining points out here and the rest I''ll use inside. Missing the front door, windows, half a wall and more, my first purchase is The Forgotten Farm. Poorly constructed in the corner outside, as all first-tier features are, at least a homeless person might be able to find shelter in this one. Even for 80DP, The System given building doesn''t look like it''s worth its money. Fully equipt with the world''s smallest and darkest field, the bugs and vermin that make their home there guarantee crops will not be able to grow. It even comes with its own picket fence which is the only thing that actually looks good. All in all, I got half a house and a poisonous field for an 80DP feature. If only I could shake my head. No wonder it was forgotten, I want to forget already. Good thing I''m not leaving it at that. After a quick upgrade, I''m left with the Forlorn Farm and the crappy home looks slightly more habitable. A disjointed porch has been attached by the missing front door and a wonky shed has been added to the side of the house. A few tools and rusty farming equipment are all thats inside. The square patch of poisonous-looking soil features hardly any crop eating insects and has grown to twice its original size. Not looking as bad as it could, one more upgrade is definitely on order. I can only afford to bring one of the new fearures out here to level 3, so why not this one?
Field of Fertility: Long lost cultivation methods can be found in this flourishing field so long as a farmer is present to discover and utilise them Requires a farmer to use this feature Reward: 32 XP
The field has doubled in size again and the soil itself no longer looks poisonous. In fact, the field looks magnificent to say it''s only soil. I''m not quite sure how it''s giving off that effect, but it feels really comforting to just stare at. The farm house, or stone cottage it now is, has morphed into a completely different building. It now looks homely and inviting after an almost-full repair. Increasimg in size, the shed outside no longer looks as rusty and has a plethora of tools available to use. A large iron lock has appeared to keep tools protected from sticky fingers and everything needed to make the house a home has been added for when I can staff it with a farmer. I could try and staff it with a regular Rogue, but I suspect Noir and Carrie will be back soon with good news on that front. Plus, I''m trying not to do stupid things at the minute so I''ll make a start on a few other townly freatures instead. Opposite the Field of Fertility at the far end of my land, I place the next feature. The Forgotten Forge. Let''s hope I don''t forget about these features myself. Let''s be honest, The System couldn''t have been anymore generic with the last two if she tried. Also, I know I can create weapons myself. That isn''t lost on me. I even have a fairly decent variety going on now. If I continue to grow, however, I don''t want to creating weapons for hundreds, if not thousands, of people. Screw that! Still, I''m a little screwed if I have to supply the materials. If I don''t, then I can absorb whatever they create and improve my own wares. Plus that of Tara and Lara. Or should I call them Cloak and Dagger now? Either way, my Rogues will be able to make weapons for themselves soon enough.
Where will you acquire materials to make weapons?
Well Me, it just so happens that I will be leaving the handling of that situation to future me. She can deal with it tomorrow, or the day after. Either way, it''s out of my hands now. Knowing her, she''ll try and beg the system to let the forge offer contracts. Good luck, Abi. The Forge, if it can even be called that, looks like the pond used to when it was still a crappy well. A small stone cylinder has risen from the ground and a small hole on the front provides access to the pot of molten liquid inside. A small, unhelpful-looking fan is attached to it by the ground and a rusty old anvil is sits in front. It looks by the far, the worst Forge I have ever seen.
It''s a good thing that you can upgrade your features.
Ha! I was just thinking the same thing. In one of the furthest corners I place the Cramped Coop. Again, I know I can just create my own livestock but I don''t want my people to rely on me for everything. If I can set this place up to be self-sufficient, that means I''ll spend less DP in the long run. The Coop is nothing special either and it didn''t even come with chickens. What sort of shit is that? I paid 80DP for a wooden shack smaller than the Shed of Salvation used to be and I didn''t even get a single chicken. In the last corner, I place two matching features. The Stark Stable and The Hay Bale. These tier one features never fail to let me down as they both look exactly as they sound. A solitary bale of hay is sat beside two walls and a roof with not a horse or post in sight. "Are you joking?" I shout at 160DP''s worth of shit. "This better damn well change into something amazing, System!"
I don''t know why you''re still try to communicate with her. She cannot answer back no matter how hard you want her too.
From behind, I can hear Kat laughing away and I can''t help but be grateful I''m not a human. I''d be red as a tomato right now. As I turn around she is pointing and laughing whilst Ali''s eyes dart from side to side, trying to look anywhere except for the last two features. "What''s that supposed to be," Kat calls out before bursting into another bout of laughter. "You may laugh now, but one day that''ll be the best hay anyone has ever seen. I swear to the gods," declaring my future prize-winning feature, I float into my home in a huff. Stupid hay bale. Chapter 28 : The Palace "A, B, C, or D''s, who is going to come with me? On my mission today, To see the fools I''m going slay You are not it!" Playing her own game of eeny, meeny, Veris looks more upset than the Vagabond as she points her finger at Sweet C. "You''re not having a good run. Sorry, Sweetie. Today''s not your day either." On the verge of tears, the Sweet in question furrows her brow and stomps her feet. "Aww, but... I need the most XP to level up! Doesn''t that mean I should get to come out with you anyway?" Trying her best to worm her way in Team 1, Sweet C states the obvious. Veris'' way of deciding the "You know how it goes. Someone has to stay here and be the Boss when the others are out levelling. You agreed, just like they did. In fact, when I suggested, I''m pretty sure you were most in favour when I suggested it." A conversation flickers to mind as the Sweet struggles to come up with a counter. Putting in her saddest face, she tries something different. "Yeah, but.." "No, buts. Hehe, butts. You''ll come out with me after Team 1 get back. Like usual." Paying no mind to the saddest Sweet in the world, Veris cuts her off and lays down the laws. Her face betrays her words however and her goofy grin shows where Veris'' mind truly is. Shaking it off, she puts on her firm face and points at sweet C. "If you keep complaining, I''m going to have to set another example, ya know?" Rising to the challenge, Sweet C complains like hell. She rants, raves, screams and shouts. Swearing like a pirate, she thoroughly makes sure an example is about to be set. Dropping into the darkness, Veris reappears in the Vagabonds shadow. She raises an eyebrow and looks skeptical at the offender before grinning like crazy. Taking a knee, she looks up into the sparkling eyes of Sweet C and says nothing. Peaches and the other three Sweets don''t say a word. They watch as Sweet C takes the position and is once again made an example of. It''s like their daily ritual at this point and has been since the Boss was given permission to leave the dungeon. Before she drags two of them away, off to cull the local monster population, she chooses who will go fairly. Taking their seats, Sweet A pours everyone some tea. Knowing that the slapping sound is due to continue for a while, they begin a conversation about dinner. "Looks like I''ll have to be extra thorough today!" Veris turns it up a notch. "But I haven''t said anything else yet?" Playing innocent for the Boss'' sake, Sweet C can''t hide the anticipation as her body is rocked once more. She turns away to smile before looking back all sad to Veris. Which only stokes the fire. As it turns out, Sweet C is almost as crazy as her mentor. Only, it''s on the other side of the scale. Feeling like she''s had her fill, the fire dies down and Veris pushes Sweet C of her knee. Going to get herself some tea, she''s stopped by a whine. C drops down on all fours, not losing eye contact with Veris. No longer able to contain her passion, the she slowly begins to crawl towards the head seductress. The fire that had died down flares back to life with a passion. Veris wastes no time in taking a knee once more. Wiggling her way toward it, Sweet C looks like the picture-perfect puppy. Crawling toward her master to receive a reward. Until she flops over Veris'' knee and the sound of slapping continues. "Maybe one... Morning we won''t have to listen to the... Sound of paddling." Peaches slurps her tea as loud as possible to drown out the escalating noise. "Don''t count on it," Sweet D''s dashes her hopes with an eye roll. "A Paddle!" Momentarily putting a pause on Sweet C''s pleasurement, an amazing idea comes to Veris. "That''s what I should ask the Boss for!" "Yes! A paddle!" Voicing her agreement, Sweet C only earns herself a few sighs and an eye roll from her fellow comprariates. Peaches looks skeptical, but it''s doubtful she even know what they''re talking about. Not messing about, because she''s got a team to pick, Veris quickly continues what Peaches so rightly called a paddling. Dungeon Stories Volume 1
Disappointed with the last feature that was placed, I move my spending back indoors. Plus, I was near enough out of the points I''d allocotaed for the task. Stupid first-tier features. A weaker person would just go upgrade that Hay Bale. Checking on Barry first, I find the entrance to his cave system almost closed. Which is odd. Now that I think about it, his DP supply has slowed considerably aswell. Calling down his tunnel gets me no answer, not that he can speak. But he would have come back, if he could hear me. After waiting a few minutes and letting my worry develop in fear, I send Veris'' miserable face down the tunnel since she was passing by at the right time. I''d go if I could, but it''s not my space so... "Don''t take forever, Veris" was what I told her an hour ago. So, why isn''t she back? Is there a monster in there? Did Barry find something he shouldn''t have? My fear is almost at full-blown panic by the time Veris exits his tunnel. Right behind her, Barry comes drilling his way out in a storm of stone. Opening his entrance, he covers the one person next to me in dust and she isn''t happy about it. I can tell by looking at her face. "What are you doing digging so far in?" Fortunately, Veris is keeping it in check and being rather patient, even if she is red in the face. It''s strange. Still, it gives me time to bollock Barry for whatever it is he was doing. When he slumps his shoulders though... Don''t be like that, Barry. Worse yet, as if he''s trying to break my heart, the mute Golem even tries to speak! He doesn''t say anything tangible though and it just sounds like rock grating on rock. You know, like two Golems... "He was taking a magma bath, Boss." Seeing him try his hardest, even Veris looses the animosity she was just harbouring. After hearing her words, Barry almost looks shocked. Like Veris has just ratted him out. His shoulders sag further and I can''t help but think he''s right, she does look pretty satisfied with herself "Is that all? I was so worried." Barry perks up a little hearing my concern. "I thought something bad was happening and I''m just glad you''re OK. You can take a magma bath whenever you want, Barry. You do loads of work around here and I''m super grateful for it and for you." The Mythril Golem''s cheeks flush in an unexpected display of human emotion and I swear he looks like he''s smiling. Er, Me. How is he doing that?
Err...
Yeah. That''s what I thought. Let''s ignore that... Forever. "Next time you''re going to be gone for a while, let someone know please." As I process my own words, I''m at a loss.
How would he do that?
Don''t, Me. Just... Don''t. The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation. "You rarely interact with anyone, so..." Coming up with the best solution possible, I tell Barry to point. That''s right. Point. The minute he goes near anyone, he has there attention so all he has to do is point. Simple. Problem solved. Moving on. "What did I tell you about the entrance closing? Do you remember? I don''t want you getting stuck, or forgetting the way back if it closes up and you can''t tell the difference. In fact... Wait there a minute, Barry." A scary thought enters my mind and I need to ask Me''s opinion on this one. Do you think I''m strong enough to acquire his tunnels without hurting myself now? I mean, I can do the same thing with the land outside my dungeon, right?
It''s worth a shot. If you try a small part first, the damage won''t be as bad as if you take the whole thing.
I can''t tell if you did that one on purpose? I liked it though.
What one?
Nevermind. That just makes it better. With advice from my partner, I enter my overview to check over Barry''s base. For whatever reason, not even bothered to ask, I can see further out than I was able to before. Don''t ask, doesn''t get ruined. Which would be helpful, if I could do more than just look. Yes, I can aquire land and see further inside the mountain, but I can''t actually do anything. I can''t even see all of Barry''s tunnels there''s that many and they''re that far reaching. He''s like an ant without a colony. Well, his colony live on the sixth floor, but they''re just babies compared to him. They can barely even scratch my dungeon walls. Even the Iron Golem can''t do enough damage to me to get to the mountain behind. That juicy DP is just outta reach for ''em. Anyway, it''s strange how I''m able to view his base from above, but not whilst in Manifestation. When I try and peek like that, my vision is distorted by something that looks like water. It''s just stupid. And strange. And extremely frustrating! But then what isn''t? Stupid dungeon rules are my life now. As such, I will adapt, take advantage and do the very best I can to not go insane. It wouldn''t be hard, let me tell you. Either way, Barry''s been smashing this mountain in. That''s all that matters and it''s why he''s a Rockstar. Not those other Golems, they''re just rocks. Barry''s groupies and wannabes. No one else could tunnel around the entire second floor like he has. Not just a little either, no no no. My Rockstar doesn''t do half measures, that''s why I called him an ant. Heading in every direction possible, what else can I say about Barry''s tunnels? Oh yeah, they''re good enough to cross floor boundaries. That''s right. Viewing beyond the walls of my lower floors, the mining expert even has his paths down here. It''s mental. No wonder it took Veris a while to find him. I mean, it could have taken a lot longer. Although, from what I can see, his magma bath isnt that far away. Plus, there''s almost a dozen tunnels leading to the thing. How much does he like that bath? Trying to acquire an extremely-tiny section of a Barry''s tunnel, I brace myself for the damage to come. Fortunately, I''m spared from pain of any kind. With this new revelation, I slowly start acquiring more sections in order to the magna bath. Doing that will make sure he''s not cut off from my dungeon at least and it gives me piece of mind. Of you think about it, Barry''s base is that maze I''ve been banging on about. Aslong as he doesn''t make any other exits, adventurers that find themselves in there would be on a foolhardy quest. It''s perfect. I gave up on the idea of hiding the monsters in my dungeon after what Elric said to me. He wasn''t going to give me the option of ending the tour at the priests. Any Categoriser that comes here in the future will have to be dealt with one way or another. Then again, everyone has a price. I just need to be able to summon gold. Either that, or I could try and hide the dungeon? Would that even work? I''ll put a pin in that for now. Don''t forget future, Me! With Barry''s room complete, I fill his home and passageway with Luminaires and Luminites. This unlocks the fourth evolution for the small-luminescent creatures, which are still tiny even at that tier. They''re not made for battles though and they don''t even tally up the monster count. They''re just... Light''s that squirm around here and there. Little bugs The System made up for shits and giggles. But, at least the fourth tier actually unlocked. Unlike a certain human class that''s still stuck on three. Barry shows his appreciation by performing the dungeon salute, once again leaving both myself and Me speechless. Then then ran off to his magma bath, happy that he didn''t get a telling off and is allowed to do as he pleases. Everyonw else is, to an extent, why not Barry. He deserves it. We wouldn''t be where we are now without him. That''s for sure. Beside me, Veris has been waiting patiently all this time. Which is very out of character for her. I don''t know what I''m feeling now, but I''m sure this isn''t going to be good. She usually doesn''t shut up and has an opinion on jus about everything. One that 99% of the time, I wish I hadn''t heard. Flags are going off in my head and something must be up. "What''s the matter, Veris?" Trying my best to let on how petrified I am at the sudden change in behaviour, I anticipate a less-than satisfactory response. "I just wanted to ask if you would spruce up my room a little more, Boss? The futons and tea set are cool, but it''s been a while now and I think that I''ve been very patient." Veris'' answer isn''t what I was expecting. Sure, I may have forgotten about spending some points far down below where everything happens, but in my defence... Yeah, I don''t have one. Her request isn''t even the farfetched ask I thought it would have been. I suppose I should pull my finger out. I am here to spend points anyway. "You know what? I agree, Veris. You have been very patient. Alright, let''s go," with those words, we appear in the almost empty room and I instantly feel like a shoddy boss. Veris'' room is practically empty, other than the futons in the middle of the room. They''re illuminate by a Lare Light Cluster and other than that... The room has two doors? I''m not just a shoddy boss. I''m a shitty boss! Honestly, I''m surprised Veris hasn''t taken out my Core herself. The neglect she must feel. It''s a good job I gave her the Sweets to play with, otherwise gods knows what she''d be doing. "I''m not going to lie, Veris. I don''t think we''ll be able to fit a castle in here." One of her requests is most certainly not possible. I could probably build a castle using bricks, but it would definitely not be upto scratch. I was a Rogue, not an architect. Maybe in the future. "Can''t we just make my room bigger at some point?" She must really want that castle. She probably not wrong either. I think there''s a good chance we''ll get another size increase in the future too. Me even confirms it. What a pro. "Absolutely. Just not yet. Also, I don''t have a castle." Such a shitty boss. Should I tell her wait? Light and Dropper are starting to take the biscuit with what they bring back. If I take them off Syndicate mission... No. There''s no way they''d bring a castle back with them. That''s too ridiculous. Even for them. "In that case, I want a swing." That is a major downgrade from a castle. Where does Veris even get her logic from? If I said no to that, would she ask me to make her Queen? She better not do, I''m the only Queen in this dungeon. "I can do that. Where shall we put the tree? " There''s no way I''m saying no. I don''t k ow what will come next. I already feel like running away, but I can''t do that to Veris. "Can it hang from the roof? And instead of a seat, can it have three adjustable leather straps?" She couldn''t have asked for that any more innocently. Even though the mischievous smile belays her voice. "Are you joking? You can''t have something like that in the Boss Room!" That''s the Veris I know. No wonder she was being so patient and she knew I wouldn''t have a castle. But where is she even learning these things? "Why not, it''s just a swing?" Trying her best to act clueless, she throws in a second request. "What about a paddle?" "Don''t play dumb with me girl, I made you. That means you came from me. I''m like the allmother as far as you''re concerned. Or in another manner of speaking, I know everything pure thinking. I know what you want that swing for and I''m telling you, it''s not going in this room. I also know why you want a paddle and that ain''t happening either. If for some reason I do decide to finally accept a feature like that in my dungeon, it definitely won''t be here. The Boss Room is not a Pleasure Palace!" As if my voice carries the weight of the world, Veris'' room begins to shake. Four white pillars rise from the ground and banners of purple and blue hang from each. The dungeon insignia and an uncouth picture decorate each. Above the Core Room''s door, a large A in neon pink shines brightly. Why is it just adventising my Core Room? I don''t want that. Different pieces of furniture appear all in blue, but the exquisite couch in the middle of the room is the only one purple. Plants bring the room to life and give off a pleasant atmosphere, the swing I see hanging from pillars doesn''t. Just as Veris described, three leather straps that are all adjustable are suspended from two pieces of rope. Everything in the room looks expensive. Mega expensive. Silk ribbons hang everywhere and incense sticks fill the air. With all that, I''m starting to worry my DP may not have been able to handle it. Not that I confirmed anything. I certainly wouldn''t have confirmed this. In fact, I''m pretty damn sure I said no! Everytime. Everytime! Why? As I''m raging on the inside, my Shadow Walker is looking very pleased with herself on the out.
This is most certainly... Very... Veris.
After checking my status, nothing was taken in the creation of Veris'' room. Not a single point. Even though it looks... I wanna say gaudy, but the colour scheme is really doing it. That I understand, but why? Why is it very Veris? I didn''t confirm this, or choose it anyway.
Boss Rooms generally take on the trait of their monsters. When you named it the Pleasure Palace, the name must have resonated with Veris'' desires and this is what took form. Hence, very Veris.
Ignoring the swing in all it''s glory, Veris heads directly towards the couch. Next to it is a small, white column. On its surface, shining like it''s lit by Luminites, a solitary paddle is sat in a case. Her eyes light up as she squeals in glee, snatching the object from its confinement with a huge smile. I suppose it''s too late to do anything about it now, it would crush Veris'' heart. Shit. Chapter 29 : The Empty Mug Gaseous bubbles pop inside a cauldron as the brewer stirs in trepidation. The brim of a crooked hat casts a shadow over her face yet a devilish smile can be seen beneath. "This time! This time it will be perfect, no? Master will be pleased with me, yes? Ow will she?" Unable to reach an answer, Lucinda writhes as she stirs the cauldron. The liquid inside a luminous green, bubbling away as she waits to add the next ingredients. From the bench beside her, Lucinda takes three boar tusks, one wolf liver and six goblin eyes before she adds them to the cauldron. All at once the ingredients added to the mix and the contents turn scarlet, fizzling away and threarening to overflow. After recently going through an upgrade, Lucinda is able give out contracts to fill her stores. A lot is needed in the making of a single potion. Fortunately, there are always scouting parties venturing out as well as few Shadow Walkers who go further afield. Already on her sixth attempt, the ingredients she has left are slowly starting to dwindle and Lucinda begs the cauldron to persevere as her arms begin to tire. She''s unable to stop stirring though as even a slight break in consistency will result in the potion''s failure and something else being created entirely. Because the failed batches aren''t exactly failures. They just aren''t what the Potion Master wanted them to be. Knowledge of the craft was embedded into her when she received her title. Since then, the vigilant Rogue has been trying to create a specific recipe, but not a single attempt has brewed successfully. The potions already created all have different side effects due to how they were combined, stirred and added, and Lucinda is unable to do anything to alter them once complete. She did think about throwing them out, but that would be akin to throwing potions on her creator. Instead, they line the wall in different colours and are labeled to prevent accidental ingestion. None of the recipes she learned mention anything about side effects, yet every single one of her potions seems to come with one. Even regular healing potions, which Lucinda has no problems creating and can whip up dozens of, come with a wide range of debilitating effects. From sporadic diarrhoea to projectile vomit, blindness to paralysis, each one has its own crux. Even a full restore potion, guaranteed to brink an Adventurer back from the brink of death, is a gamble to take. The stronger her potions are, the harsher the infliction. One might prefer a quick death when presented the option. "This time, I''ll do it!" With everything going well so far, Lucinda grabs the last ingredients. Three chicken eggs, which she drops in one at a time every twenty seconds, turns the solution a golden yellow and it begins to settle. Barely even simmering now, the Potion Master begins to tear up over as she removes the ladel. Grinning ear-to-ear, Lucinda can''t contain her happiness as she looks upon the finished potion in all it''s glory. Taking a vial from her robe, she fills it with the liquid before putting a cork it. "This is it. This is it. This is it!" Unable to contain her excitement, Lucinda rushes to her desk. Sitting down, she turns the vial over and examines it meticulously. Unfortunately, side effects are able to be ascertained until after someone has invested the potion. Removing the dagger that all Rogues start with, Lucinda takes a few deep breaths. Covered by a layer of dried blood from previous failures, the anticipation of pain makes her nauseous and negative thoughts almost deter her. Before she lets them change her mind, Lucinda places her left hand down on the desk and rams the dagger right through the center. Even though she''s already performed it half a dozen times, that doesn''t stop the Potion Master from wincing as she pulls the blade out. Hoping she would have been able to handle the pain, Lucinda was wrong. Cradling her self-inflicted injury the best she can without causing more harm, she fails and falls off her chair. A spike of pain sends her rolling round the floor as she fumbles for the vial in her robe, until the sound of glass cracking fills her world with dread. "No!" Panic seeps in as Lucinda dashes to the kitchen to grab an empty mug, leaking blood all over the floor of her workspace as she goes. Rushing back she almost slips on the liquid she''s lost, but manages to avoid another injury and maintains her balance. Dunking the cup, Lucinda doesn''t notice the blood drop in the cauldron as she downs the potion. Immediately, the hole in her hand closes up, leaving no trace of prior injury. Still, dubious since she can''t discern side effects, the Potion Master relaxes slightly as the pain receeds. Anxiety takes its place as butterflies fill her belly. No hair sprouts from hands, nor is she projectile vomiting, so she sighs in relief. "I did it. I did it. I did it. It''s a success! With this potion, we''ll be able to... We''ll be able to... " Rising to her feet, her anxiety has gone but the butterflies have gotten worse. Her stomach churns and Lucinda hunches over whilst covering her mouth. Managing to contain what was about to end up on the floor, she sprints to the bathroom to find out if her potion is going to come out of more than one orifice this time. Potion Master Lucinda Dungeon Stories Volume 1
I left the Boss Room in silence and disbelief. Veris, on the other hand, didn''t stop going on about that paddle until after I''d escaped. Closing both her doors and sealing the sound inside, I don''t ever want to look in that room again. "I just don''t... I didn''t mean to... Why was it so..." Stuttering my way through unfinished sentences, Me rounds them off for me.
Understand? Do that? Purple?
"It''s not even funny. Veris is already stranger than most as it is. This''ll probably push her over the edge." Worrying over the lewdness of the Boss Room, I can''t help but imagine what''s going to happen now.
What edge? She''s just... Different. That isn''t a bad thing, is it?
Heading to my next destination, as decided by my to do list, I contemplate what Me''s said. A nice float through the dungeon is always good at relieving some stress. Soothing my mind whilst calming my soul, it''s also great for thinking since I get time to myself. These moments are super peaceful and by far my most favorite. "Of course not. Different is great. Different, I can handle. Veris turning into some crazy nymphomaniac dominatrix is not! How is it that''s even possible?" as the words leave my mouth, I know what''s coming next. An explanation. As helpful as he is, there are some things a Core doesn''t want to know. "Don''t answer that one, Me. I don''t care for the details this time. Please, I just want to act like the last half an hour didn''t happen and move on. That''ll make the rest of my spending so much easier." The perfect distractions show their face as three humans come inside me at once. What''s mental is the fact that they''re not inside me at all, but outside on the land I bought. Since leveling up, I don''t feel half as weak now that people are here. I''m also able to sense their intentions slightly now. Using my will, their emotions make themselves known in an easy-to-understand Dungeon Core way. Which is awesome since I can tell that they''re not here to be eaten. In fact, I''m pretty sure that fear is making them be more cautious than they would usually act. Not that I know these guys. Huddled together, even in my clearing, they slowly creep towards the cottage that came with the Field of Fertility. Even though there''s nothing else of note in the area, my other features don''t even catch their eye, they still look scared. Actually, terrified might be the best word to describe the emotions coming from them. Do they think everyone''s been eaten here or something? What are they trying to say? I only eat douchbags and dickheads, thank you very much. Putting an end to my leisurely float, sad, I teleport to my entrance. You know, cause that''s another thing that comes with leveling up. I can just pop myself right on over without even having to drop Manifestation. Oh how simple life has become. If not for a certain Shadow Walker. Or four. At the entrance, because that''s where I ended up porting myself due to habit, I observe the three people skulking around outside. A wealthy looking man dressed in sky blue is trying to peek inside the cottage as a female guard sticks close, watching the tree line behind them. The male guard looks like he might actually get himself eaten if he attempts to break the lock on the tool shed. The story has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation. As they look around, their shock at what look likes the remains of a small homestead is apparent. A few frames here and there, plus the cottage and farmland all indicate someone lived there at some point. Or it does to anyone not in the know. The well-dressed peeking Tom calls back the male guard. Without saying a word, he points directly at the hole in the mountain that is basically my entrance. Covered in blood that doesn''t look old, the man guard shakes his head. He points into the forest opposite where they came from as the other guard continues to watch the treeline behind them. Now that I''m not so sad about having to leave my tunnels, there''s a lot more that I hadn''t even noticed. The man''s armour looks done for. Like, how is even still attached? It looks like rags and I almost want to I''ve him a spare set of Rogue gear because I feel bad. The other two don''t look half as torn up. Especially Moneybags. He looks fine. The female guard has taken a few attacks, evident by the scratches on her armour and the cuts on her body. She doesn''t look half as bad the other guy though! Still, out of the three, he seems to be the only one who wants to push on. Even the other guard has stopped looking behind them to point towards the dungeon. Finding himself outvoted, I can''t help but wonder what they''re even doing here. They''re obvious not here to raid a dungeon and they''re definitely not hunting. Not unless they''re the prey today. Then again, there shouldn''t be that many monsters in my immediate vicinity. Not with the scouting parties culling their numbers anyway. That said, how did he get all those injuries then? By the way Moneybags is dressed, it''s likely the guards were part of an escort mission. But where are his wares? His horse and carriage? There''s no way those two would accept a quest that meant walking across the region. Towns and villages are spread out sparsely in Ishda so it''s a damn long journey just about anywhere. More so on foot. Something must have happened as they were passing by my mountain that drove them to come here. Maybe a powerful monster? If so that could be some juicy DP. If they werent so beat up, I''d think they just wanted to take in the splendor that is my home. The mountain that houses my dungeon is something else after all. It''s not like I''m trying to advertise myself though, even if we are almost ready for visitors. I don''t know why my outer shell looks the way it does, only that the multicoloured forests above me are quite nice on the eye. Even if they are strange as hell at the same time. . I understand why people might head toward the multicoloured mountain if they found themselves trouble whilst passing through the forest. My home is quite the spectacle. I still feel like I could prepare more though. It''s not as though I''m advertising for people to start coming my way yet. I am ready to receive visitors, I just feel like I could prepare more. With that in mind, let''s do the best we can to not scare the shit out of these guys. Hell, they might not even enter the dungeon since I''m uncategorised. Not that I''m likely to ever be categorised now. The old man that gave me the cutest teddy in the world didn''t think twice about entering. He may have shaking like a lead, but he still came inside and took it rather well. Although, he did dream of us before coming so he knew what he was walking into. I need to try a different approach this time, Me. Well... To start with at least.
What are you thinking?
After a quick discussion, Light is teleported to the entrance. Unaware, he was halfway through drinking his ale and looks around sheepishly before lowering his mug. "Perfect. That will do nicely," I chuckle at the panicking Shadow Walker who has been relaxing since yesterday. He looks at me in worry after his unannounced teleporting, almost like he expects it to be for some ulterior reason. "W-what''s up, Boss? You don''t usually summon me." He isn''t wrong in what he said. Usually a pretty face and a pleasant voice is all that''s needed. Like I said though, this time it''s different. Apparently, being nervous around his Boss isn''t enough to deter Light from drinking in front of her and he downs his ale. "You''re right, Light. I don''t. That said, I think that our visitors will benefit from a strong presence rather than an eye catching one." It takes him a few seconds, but a shocked look washes across Light''s face. "I''m not saying you''re ugly, idiot. Just that the women are... Something else. Either way, a male greeting will be better than an eye-boggling one this time." Light looks at the three people arguing betwen themselves outside and nods. At least he has some sense. "Don''t get me wrong, once people are in the dungeon it''s unavoidable. If you explain the details before they''re subjected to that beauty though, we might have a chance of them remembering some of it. Plus, there''s a woman with them so she should definitely remember." Dumping the task of greeting the blood-stained visitors of Light''s shoulders, he staggers a little bit before the reality of his situation sinks in. "Wait... What? R-really? M-me? You want me to do this? What do I say?" Even whilst flustering, Light finds time to drink his ale and finishes it off. After a loud that I would have complained about if I didn''t need him to do something for me, Talia appears with a fresh mug and takes the empty away. Complaining about not knowing what to do, I can''t even respond as I process what just happened. Talia really does kick ass her job. I mean, how did she know he was empty? And how did she teleport herself here? "Ask if they''re okay. Tell them we can help them and then bring them to Talia''s." With the Taskmaster fresh on my mind, I give Light the simplest instructions possible and put him to work. Mush Shadow Walker. Mush. Seeing Talia was a bit of a blessing. Most people enjoy a good drink and those three sure look like they could use one. Even if they''re in trouble, I doubt they''ll refuse the offer of Light''s assistance. Even though his facial hair is unkempt, he does look pretty tough. Exiting the entrance, Light seems less confident in the plan and looks back at me like a lost puppy. I don''t take him though and instead shoe him further out. Get! Accepting his fate, Light looks at the uninvited guests before looking back at me one last time. Slumping his shoulders, he downs half of his mug in one, hangs his head low and sighs. It''s not even that bad! Should I ask him to go fetch Veris for me? I wonder how he would feel about this mission then. Accepting his role, Light begrudgingly trudges out from the entrance and makes his way over towards the panicking humans. The ale in his hand doesn''t seem to help lighten their mood as the male guard raises his sword towards him and yells "Stop." Doing as commanded by his master, Light ignores the guard and makes his way closer. Sipping ale and wobbling ever-so slightly. Is he drunk?
It would appear that he is slightly more intoxicated than usual.
I should have just stuck with the females. "I said, Stop!" Reducing the distance betwen them to almost nothing, Light continues to get closer and the male guard rushes him. His sword swings down in a barely-perceptible flash. Obviously a move that has decapitated a lot of people. The ignorant drunk, however, tilts his head and avoids the blade, stepping in to the guards personal space as he takes a drink. Enraged for more reasons than being that close to another man, he guard releases attack after attack as his blade draws silver arcs through the air. Light doesn''t even step back. Instead, he moves with minmal effort, always been where the blade is not and drinking st the same time. Woah! Even when he''s drunk, he''s got skill? Damn, Light.
Why do you find fights so interesting? Were you not that skilled in your previous life?
I don''t want to talk about it. Me delivers an unintentional killing blow to my heart. I was nowhere near as fast as Light is and wasn''t even level 20 back then. Now I''m a big dog on levels, but don''t have a body to flaunt my skills. The unjust life of a Core continues. With impeccable reaction speed, Light evades a barrage of well-executed attacks. The guard doesn''t seem like no slouch as, one after the other, a torrent of killing blows are released from his weapon. It''s a shame that he''s not even half Light''s level. He would be pretty good otherwise. Light himself moves out of the way of every strike without spilling a single drop from his mug. Eventually, after throwing everything he had at the drunken intruder, the guard reaches his limit and drops to the ground panting. Whatever happened in the forest aswell as his face off with Light has left him exhausted. "Run. Defend... Wheeler," he croaks from his position on the floor. Neither the female guard, nor Wheeler, has moved a muscle though. Moneybags even looks like he''s struggling to breathe. "Wait a minute. You don''t have to run." Before the misunderstanding can play out any further, Light it''s an end to it. "My master sent me to talk to you. Are you OK? I mean..." Looking at the guard panting heavily, Light winces. That wasn''t what he was told to do. Taking a drink, he watches as the female guard starts shakily drawing her blade. "Don''t do that... Please?" His words cause her pause and the blonde woman''s face flushes slightly before she regains her composure. No one says a word or makes a move as Light stands there waiting for a response. They just patiently watch the man drink his ale. Apparently, he didn''t even bring a weapon. "I am also here to offer help. If you need it that is and, there was something else. It was..." Light taps his head as he tries to recall his Master''s words. As he does, the three humans remain motionless. One has collapsed. One is shock. Third third is slightly infatuated. How is he this dense, yet so strong?
I would assume that those are the main traits he took from you being human.
"The Retreat, Light!" I yell, ignoring Me''s clever way of saying I''m stupid. "Oh yeah. I''m supposed to take you to Talia''s. There''s a bar inside and I could use another drink anyway," downing the last contents of his mug, Light turns and starts walking back towards the dungeon. "H-How do we know you''re not with them?" Moneybags shakily calls out to light from his position behind the female guard. Light couldn''t sound less interested if he tried as he asks, "Who are them?" Instead of a response coming from our guests, the universe decides to answer instead and a dozen well-armed Bandits emerge from the tree line. Weapons in hand they arrive in the same location as the other three did. Obviously their persuers.
Obviously.
Obviously. There''s a big difference being this group and the first three visitors who entered my land. "That''s them!" Moneybags cries, grabbing hold of his girth and fleeing as fast as humanly possible. Tripping over his own feet, he doesn''t get very far and the Bandits start laughing. Light looks uninterested in the twelve, armed men who have just arrived beneath the shadow of the trees. There intentions are clear, even for the inebriated Shadow Walker. Holding his empty mug, he raises a hand as all eyes fall on him and silence descends on the clearing. Before their boss has a chance to give the orders to attack, everyone is staring at the pea-sized ball of shadow floating above Light''s open palm. The moment he closes his hand around it, a blanket of spikes erupt from the shadows beneath the trees and the newcomers feet. Still holding the empty mug, Light smiles and releases the skill. As the shadows pull back, blood begins to pool on the forest floor as the human pincushion are unskewered. With a slosh and a splat, the threat is over in seconds. Turning to the three mortified humans, he throws a thumb over his shoulder and says, "So. Talia''s, yeah? I need a refill." Reluctant to do anything other than nod, the three humans follow Light inside the dungeon. His empty mug in hand. Chapter 30 : Prophecy or Probability Hiroshi "How dare she attempt that?" Hiroshi screamed, backhanding the elf across the clearing. "I don''t need you telling me what to do, you know? It''s bad enough talking to myself, but with you it''s even fucking worse. Yes, I''m stronger. Yeah, faster too. So fucking what, it''s still far away and if I want to do what I want for a while, then that''s what I''m gonna fucking do. This is my body and it''s finally my time, so shut up and just..." Eventually Hiroshi finished arguing with the voice in his head and dragged Aura back to the camp. After ordering Kya to heal her, the elf screamed at her again, "You''re my property." That night, he took Kya in his cabin and left the redhead outside in the cold. The day after was the luckiest day of his life. Not only did he gain a couple of level by slaughtering a bunch of human paladins and knights, but he also happened across someone who looked exactly like his ex-girlfriend. He couldn''t believe it. Immediately, he knew it had been destiny that led him there and so he took her. It was as simple as slicing cheese and he barely broke a sweat. Never normally able to make up its mind, the voice is in his head all but confirmed his delusion with a ridiculous rant. Unfortunately for Hiroshi, it seemed his ex hadn''t changed at all. He realised that she was still the same unresponsive bitch she always had been, but that was fine now. This was a different world. Almost. Far removed from his own by the native species and the granduer of magic, it was still similar to that of a time not-long gone by. Where might did rule the world. Before politics and posturing replaced the wars and propoganda became commonplace to control the sheep, Earth was place where the strongest dominated. It was a place where power dictated what was right. Just like this world right now. Who could possibly stop him from doing what he wanted? From taking what he wanted? If he had the power to fight off an army, wouldn''t they just sending them? He laughed maniacally before disabling his latest slave and she screamed, just like she did before. She''ll learn, he thought as he made Kya heal her slowly before joining him in the cabin. They weren''t far now and it wouldn''t be long before Hiroshi claimed his next source of power. Everyday the mountain got larger and he almost couldn''t tell if it was growing naturally or if it was because they were getting closer. The distance was surely decreasing, but there was something off about their destinarion. Hiroshi could almost feel the power it gave off, but he pushed on regardless. Following the advice of his schizophrenic, error-ridden V.A.U.N.S.
Aura The redhead couldn''t take it anymore. The daydreams about suicide had almost crossed over into reality until she was punished severely and healed right after. "How dare she attempt that?" she heard as her ears rang, "You''re my property," she ignored whilst nodding along. If Hiroshi hadn''t acquired a new slave the day after, Aura may have already tried to kill herself again. Not that she was in any better of a position after the acquisition. The new slave, even though she was human, became Hiroshi''s number 1. Blabbering on about ex-girlfriends, or something like that, he had slaughtered the entire company she was part of and took her as his next slave. It was horrific to say the least. The death and destruction caused by one elf. The elf that owned her and just wouldn''t let her die. The fact that his new slave was human isn''t what catapulted her up the slave chain. It was her class as a Cleric and the fact her magic was stronger than Kya''s, that did it. Either way, her presence calmed Hiroshi down for a few hours until she refused to go his extra mile. After that, she was punished... Severely. Aura watched Kya who was grinning smugly and the prejudice elf barely treated the poor human''s injuries. It was the first time Aura had felt sorry for someone from another species. Elves in general are very closed off as a society and rarely ever entertain guests from other nations. Still, it was enough to cause her grief. The young Healer, Tilly, didn''t deserve what happened and Aura sat with her all night as her legs slowly healed themselves thanks to Kya''s shitty healing spell. Telling her not to fight fate, the women shared their suffering whilst building a bond.
Kya Kya was worried. Not only was the new slave the object of her master''s affection, but she was also better at casting healing magic since her class specialised in it. That made her all the more important. A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. If she hadn''t been able to use space magic, would she have been bumped down behind the Princess? She hoped not. Kya enjoyed being able to lord it over royalty. It was becoming her favorite pastime as everyday she would find a way to put her down. She hadn''t let on that she knew, but Kya wasn''t a fool. Aura was daughter to King and had been missing for a few months. When else would she get the chance to act this way to someone supposedly of superior lineage? And so she jabbed and jabbed and then... The person she believed to be the destiny elf, took in a human. It was shameful, but she could cope. All made better when he broke her legs as she tried to walk away. So much better when she cast delayed heal on the Cleric and even better than that when her second spell set in. Ecstacy followed and Kya retired for the night with her champion, the destiny elf.
Tilly The young Cleric was in shock. Her mind unable to comprehend the visual images her eyes where sending. The men and women of Tulsar Hall had all been killed in less than a minute. She was mortified, horrified, but most of all petrified. She shook like a leaf as the elf ran his finger down her cheek, calling her a name she was unfamiliar with. Unable to control her trembling, she couldn''t move as her caressed her face and whispered devious thoughts in her ear. Worst of all, like a coward, she followed after him when told to do so. The entire time they walked her mind was in panic mode. Her eyes scanned the tree line for the best place to make a run for it. She didn''t. At one point, the redhead slowed down to warn her off such ideas. She didn''t sound like she was against it, only that it was a fools errand. After hearing that, it was even worse for Tilly. She struggled to believe what had just happened whilst trying to rationalise it at the the same time. No thoughts played put to conclusion and, in the end, her feet followed the others. Invited, offered, threatened to stay the night, Tilly broke and ran. A mistake. One that only led to her worsened suffering. A pain she wasn''t able to heal herself because of what the devioius elf had done to her. After casting the most basic healing spell on her broken legs, the one named Kya had also used the spell mitigate healing. A horrible spell that stops others from applying magical treatment on top of another''s. That meant it would take hours for her bones to set back into place and for the bruising and swelling to reduce. All she could do was grit her teeth and bare with it. Fortunately, she wasn''t alone in her misery and the redheaded elf stayed by her side. All night she offered reassurance and held Tilly''s hand when the pain became umbarwable. Telling her it would be over soon enough and eventually, it was. It wasn''t easy enduring and a lack of sleep meant she suffered for it the next day. In more ways than one did she suffer for it. Still enduring the best she could, a few nights passed as they for closer and closer to the violent elf''s target and Tilly suffered on every one. After the first night she had been prepared however and cast a delayed high heal on herself before rejecting the crazy bastard that had kidnapped her. The pain was still unpleasant and the shitty elf healer tried the same bullshit each time. Fortunately, Tilly didn''t even need her assistance as an hour later she was fine again. Her and Aura spent the nights bonding and eventually they arrived at their destination. It wasn''t what anyone was suspecting, however. At the bottom of the mountain was a town. Albeit not that big, or that populated, but it was a nice looking town nonetheless. Shops and eateries lined the main street with a few homes here and there. Tilly could even see an entire residential district that looked empty, save for one or two people walking about, and could hardly believe it as the walked down the road to a beautiful-looking bar. Her heart beat sporadically the closer they got. Praying against fate that there would be someone here to answer her call. Someone that would be strong enough to end her problems. Little did she know, they were exactly the type of people she was looking for. People who clean up the scum littering Tironia''s surface by making it disappear permanently. They had arrived at the dungeon.
The System Hmph!! "I don''t care what you say, Fred. I''m not getting out of bed for that spoiled brat!" Pulling the covers high above her head, The System threatens to rip the teddy bear, trying to coerce her out, into pieces if he doesn''t disappear and go do his job. The room goes silent after that and she sighs in relief. "I''m glad Fred''s gone, he''s a real piece of work that guy," Daisy is quick to point out her coworkers''s flaws whilst trying to get I''m the boss''s good books. Pulling her cover away, The System comes face-to-face with the grinning daffodil. "What the hell are you doing here, Daisy? He better not be here aswell," scanning the room shows no signs of frogs and The System turns back to the daffodil named Daisy. "You''ve also got a job to do! Piss off, Daisy. How do you even get any work done when your buzzing around me all day? Eh?" Shrugging with her leaves, Daisy simply responds, "My subsystems are running it." "Oooh, your subsystems are running it. Who''s a smart, little program," the daffodil''s petals turn red at the praise. "There''s just one problem with that, Daisy. You don''t have any subsystems!" Turning red herself, only from frustration instead of embarrassment, steam leaks out of The System''s ears and she stares a hole through Daisy. Who only looks confused. Tilting her bulb, she asks, "Who are these guys then?" A rose, twice the size of her, appears on Daisy''s left. On her right, is a pink petal with legs. No face, no arms and no head, just legs. The System has turned blue by the time the daffodil finishes saying, "This is petal and this is Rose. They''re OK, but the tall one''s a bit of a snob." In response, the rose huffs at Daisy and turns her back on the small flower. As her anger slowly trades places with confusion, The System lies back down and pulls the blanket over her once more. At least there''s one consolotaion, she thinks as she rolls over only to come face to face with Pete and his big green face. The sudden shock scares her out of bed and The System lands on the floor. Moments later the blanket slides down and the monocle-wearing frog is playing dumb, staring at the main operating system like he hasn''t done anything wrong. "You lot are just like her! Why can''t I get a break, huh? What''s a program gotta do just to get five minutes to herself without you lot taking on some stupid forms and doing stupid shit!" I really, really need a holiday. Chapter 31 : The Mind Melt Working in a kitchen is a hot. It''s long hours spent over open flames and checking steaming ovens. Prepping and preparing every single dish. Making sure everything is to standard and that it doesn''t slip. Life in the kitchen is hotter. Hotter than a scorching day beneath the dungeon sun turned upto max. It''s that hot that no matter what she tries, everything tastes like salt. Almost as hot as Barry''s magma bath, Ali dashes from pillar to post as she takes care of every job in the restaurant. Hours pass in the blink of an eye as she over works herself doing the thing she loves most. With an ever growing population, the amount of meals she has to make, and the time it takes to prepare them, has almost outgrown her current capabilities. However, that''s not to say she can''t handle the position of The Chef, it just means that she doesn''t have enough hands. If only she had more limbs, she could prep, cook, and plate food, all at once Knowing that her master has been adding to the ranks of certain industries within the dungeon, Ali has decided to ask for some employees of her own. She only needs two, but instead she is going to ask for five. Two to train as chefs, two to take orders and deliver food to and one to greet guests and organise seating and availability. If she ends up with two that''s a chef and a server. Being around as long as she has, which isn''t too long in the grand scheme of things, Ali knows that her master is unlikely to deny her request. Even if she is the master, Abi usually approves whatever is asked by her faithful children as she can''t seem to help herself. Even when she says no, she really means yes Ali couldn''t ask for a kinder, more gracious, master. Not when the one she has already gives whatever she can so freely. Still, asking for anything is extremely hard for Ali. She almost went 36 hours without eating after being brought into existence. Granted, her master didn''t know if they needed to eat or not at the time and she was also in the middle of her own crisis. As soon as Ali had mustered the courage to ask though, all her worries fell away at the copious amounts of food that was made available for her. As she remembers her previous request, Ali takes a few deep breaths before signalling her master through her own will. "Hey, Super Chef," Abi''s jade wisp materialises behind Ali, almost causing her to spill today''s soup. Pretending it didn''t happen she asks, "What''s up?" "Master... I... I..." taking a deep breath to calm her growing anxiety, Ali manages to get it off chest in one breath, "Master I would really appreciate it if you could summon me four employees to work in my building to cook, serve and greet our family and anyone else that might visit us in the future cause all I want to do is be of service to you." "Sure, Ali. Whatever you need to keep everyone fed, I will happily provide. Whilst I''m here, do you need any more ingredients? Baluka and Rocky brought home some Koko Root. Do you want some?" going the extra mile, her master offers even more than is asked of her. With tears building in her eyes, Ali shakes her head and declines politely. "No, thank you, Master. They already brought me some. It was one of my quests that made them acquire it in the first place." "OK. I''ll leave these ladies in your care then and I''ll be off. Make sure to name them. It gets tricky later on. I''m sure I can hear Noir bellowing somewhere. They must have just got home," that said, Abi disappears leaving Ali alone with her new employees. "OK ladies, there''s a lot to learn so listen up," with that Ali begins to explain the various ways to prepare, store and cook the various dishes that she produces in her restaurant. To all ten women. -Ali, The Chef Dungeon Stories Volume 1
I don''t know who''s more shocked? Me, Me, or the other three. Granted, I already have the impression that Light''s quite surreal in terms of strength, but damn! That was a killer move, right?
That does describe it rather accurately.
You''re damn right it does. I always wanted to see Light or Dropper bust a move. That was awesome!
Agreed. I''m sure your guests feel the same way since they have not yet moved a muscle and Light is almost at the entrance.
"Oi, where are you going?" I shout after the brainless idiot, trying his best to look nonchalant as he swaggers inside. By the tone in my voice, however, he must have realised no one''s following him and has flushed red with embarrassment. "Well? What the hell are you waiting for? The Solstice? Come on!" Moneybags has turned white and is shaking like a leaf. He''s even jingling slightly, confirming my suspicion that he is indeed loaded. "We have nowhere else to go and there isn''t really another choice, is there?" Recovering from her shock, the female guard states the obvious whilst helping her exhausted colleague to his feet. Although, her gaze is kept firmly on Light. Her employer and colleague silently agree, doubtful they could escape even if they wanted too. After what they have just seen, I''m surprised they can even walk. Moneybags looks like he''s having a hard time walking, but he''s left to struggle alone since his guards are supporting each other. Following their saviour as he wobbles inside, our three guests take in the majesty of the multicolored forest as they enter my mountain. Their silence continues even after they reach the Rule Room, which I finally managed to lower by the way. Once Elric was absorbed and after Kat joining our ranks, it was one of the first things I did. Not that I realised there was a problem until after it became glaringly obvious. Either way, I''ve changed it. Cause that''s what bosses do. They sort their shit out. Especially when it''s their own mess. The injured man hobbles through on in silence. Still following Light, he takes everything in as he''s helped through by his fellow guard. Moneybags is basically cuddling them he''s that close, afraid to be even a few steps away from his escorts. Stunned silence persists as they leave the Rule Room, everyone with different thoughts as they head down the tunnel. Moneybags looks terrified. With the way he''s rubbing his hands, however, I''m sure he''s got cash signs on the brain. There''s definitely a profit to be made here somewhere too. Maybe I can use that to my advantage? On the other hand, the injured and exhausted man doesn''t look like he''s thinking too much. Trudging along, still being supported by the other guard who... I swear to the gods she''s checking out Light''s ass, but I''m just going to ignore that one for now. Whether it''s gold, imminent death or whatever the hell she''s thinking, I doubt any of them will action the thoughts on their mind. Plus, I could be over thinking things. It wouldn''t be the first time. "A-Aaron, is this... A d-dungeon?" Arriving at the entrance of The Black Barracks, Moneybags finally manages to whisper the thoughts on his mind into the guard''s ear. Who it turns out is called Aaron. It seems like the plump man was hoping to be rebuked since he doesn''t look happy with Aaron''s response. If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement. "I''m not sure. I mean, I think so. How many mountains do you know that have doors inside? Or rules for this matter?" The plump man turns to look back down the corridor. The monoliths were certainly weird. If they were to be believed, however, no harm would come to them aslong as they behaved themselves." What do you think Soph? You''ve been in more dungeons than I have," keeping his voice low, the three continue to whisper behind Light. Not that it matters if he doesn''t notice. I hear everything. "It''s definitely a dungeon, albeit the strangest one I''ve ever set foot in. I mean, I''ve never seen a dungeon post rules before and the way they''re placed make them hard to miss. It''s like... The dungeon''s giving them a fair chance. Which is strange. Although, the lack of monsters could be considered even stranger than the rules. And then there are those things," Sophie points at my Luminites, "What the fuck are they? It''s... It''s just..." "Weird as fuck?" Aaron finishes for her. Sophie nods before turning to the plump man without armour, still hovering too close for comfort. "I want paying three times as much for this job when we get back, Wheeler. That should be easy enough since we''re twenty two people short of what we started with, right?" I quite like Sophie. Even when walking into a dungeon behind a drunken man capable of killing a dozen people in seconds, you''ve gotta make sure you paid. The well dressed man, Wheeler, doesn''t rebuke her request but nor does he accept. I suppose that''s how rich people stay rich. When someone mentions money they clam up good. A look that says, I''ll leave you if you don''t answer, makes him agree immediately however. "B-But... Where are the monsters? The traps? Why does this dungeon have rules? And why the hell is he taking us further inside?" Good questions, Wheeler. Good questions. You''re about to find out though, so I won''t ruin it. "Ahem," Light gathers their attention as the doors of the Barracks magically open on cue. Inside, is also not what they were expecting. With quite a few Shadow Walkers assigned under The Commanders, The Black Barracks''s now looks like any regular old guard house other than the fact that it''s staffed entirely by women Crap. I got distracted by Light''s instant-kill move and completely forgot. I wanted Light to explain things before they got to the mind melt zone.
The mind melt zone?
Yeah. It''s when men comes into contact with anything vaguely female in my dungeon. Pow. Mind melt.
Oh. Is that what we''re calling it now?
Unless you have a better suggestion? No? Mind melt it is then. Floating on a cloud of dreams, Wheeler and Aaron are already mentally gone as the on-duty guards caught their eye the moment they entered. Sophie isn''t fairing much better as the soothing glow filtering through the window eases the tension she was carrying. Even though death had claimed their persuers, she''s still unsure if any more will come after them. "It feels so... Nice," she whispers to herself. "Hehe. It most certainly is, but you ain''t seen nothing yet," raising his empty mug in the air, Light crosses the room toward the exit. "What do you mean?" Keeping his eyes on our female guest, Light opens the doors. Stepping outside, he watches as her breath is taken away as she follows him. Staggering back in, Light has to physically drag the other two across the Black Barrack and kick them Into The System''s room. "Holy shit!" "What the fuck?" Aaron and Wheeler''s reactions are one and the same, already gone. Sophie, for the all the time she hasn''t taken her gaze off Light, is the only one to remember where they are. "Aren''t we... Inside the mountain?" Taking everything in, the blue sky above the dungeon wall of my miniature village makes for a really inconvenient misunderstanding. Not that it doesn''t look awesome at the same time though. "I-I t-thought you said this was a dungeon? Wheeler fiddles with his garments and tries to make himself more presentable. Aaron, after regaining some of his lost stamina, is lost for words. I''d be surprised if they can even remember their own names.
Why would they forget their names?
Because of the mind melt.
But why would that make them forget their own name?
Nevermind. It was just a joke, Me.
Oh. Should I laugh?
No, not if you didn''t find it funny. It''s not like I was a comedian in my last life. We''ll get you there though buddy. For now, this scene is much more entertaining. "Correct. We are still inside the mountain. The sun is just a feature of this floor, albeit a spectacular one," Light slurs a little as he explains, making his way towards the retreat. The humans behind him once again forget how to move their feet. "Light!" "Why do keep stopping? I''m getting told off because... Nevermind," he shakes it off, "Come on." Setting off, it isn''t long before the limb paralysis sets in again. "What about these houses? Is this where you all live? Did... Did the dungeon create these?" Sophie can''t help but be shocked as they pass more people on their way towards the fine establishment. "Yeah. More people stay at the hotel though as there aren''t enough houses yet. Plus, it''s right next to Ali''s." His answer is lost on our guests as they look confused rather than enlightened. "Ali''s?" "So far, it''s the only restaurant in Varona. We''ll grab something to eat after we''ve had a drink and I''ve explained the situation to you," at the mention of food, Light''s hunger makes itself known. "Varona? Is that the name of this place?" Just like Kat had beem, Sophie can''t help but be overwhelmed by her own curiosity. Her two companions have barely uttered a word since leaving the barracks. It''s obvious they have questions, but they''re likely to be related to one subject so they''re not really important. As they enter the Retreat, the inevitable cannot be quelled and Aaron bursts out, "How the hell are there so many beautiful women in a dungeon? This is literally the middle of nowhere!" "Well it''s the middle of the mountain, if you want to be specific," Sophie takes a quick jab at her comrade before claiming the seat next to Light at the bar, "I''m also curious about that and to why you''re here in the first place. Are you like... The Dungeon Owner or something?" This time it''s Aaron and Wheeler''s turn to laugh at the ridiculousness of her quesrion. That is, until the proprietor appears from nowhere also partaking in the scene amusing her. She refills the empty mug of the red faced Rogue and captivates the hearts of the two other customers in the process. Dropping to his knee, Wheeler produces a beautiful box from out of thin air before presenting it to Talia. "Oh, beauty untold. I knew there was a reason I didn''t die in that forest. It was so that I could arrive here and be graced by your presence. Please. Marry me!" No one says a word as the Retreat falls silent. Sophie clasps her hands over her mouth whilst Aaron''s jaw drops. Talia doesn''t say a word, but seems rather conflicted and Light downs his mug before looking at the barkeep expectantly. Me, I''m completely flabbergasted. Ho.. ly... Shit
What does that mean?
It means... He wants to spend the rest of his life with her.
Is that normal?
It would be if he had known her for a while and realised he couldn''t live without her. Just proposing straight out of the gate like that... Is kinda creepy. All it would take now, would be for him to keep lingering around after she says no and he''ll be placed straight in stalker land.
Stalker land?
Just another one of those silly things, nevermind. Let''s laugh at Talia. "Talia''s got a boyfriend!" I jokingly float towards her whilst singing until she throws a fearful glance my way. That''s all it takes to make me shut up apparently. "I''m sorry, but I''m already interested in someone else. It''s very flattering though, so thank you," letting him down gently, Wheeler picks himself up after being turned down and says something even stupider. "Then I shall challenge him to a duel. Who is he? I-It''s not him, is he?" Pointing at Light, who has ignored the entire conversation, he flinches before steeling his resolve. "Haha. Gods no. It''s definitely not him," she laughs. The insult earns her a frown, but not much else. Light wouldn''t dare stop the tap from pouring and his silence earns him a refill. Talia takes out three more mugs from under the bar and fills them with Strong Ale. Passing them out, she begins explaining about the man in her life, "... No offence to you, Light darling. You''re great. You know you are. But when it comes to the heart, a lady wants what she wants. What else can I say?" "Yeah, yeah... I''m awesome, I know," Light''s cheeks flush as he continues. "Anyway, listen carefully you three. I''m going to explain about what you''ve seen so far... And I''ll... Answer your questions after... OK?" "You? Why not her? She seems to be in much better condition than you?" The inebriated Rogue doesn''t need asking twice and he looks my way. His eyes are begging to be released from the task, but I need him to keep at it just a little longer. Then again, they might be able to comprehend it more if it comes from Talia. "Yes! Let the sublimely beautiful hostess, whose name I''ve still to learn, get a word in, will ya?" It''s like Wheeler is possessed at this point. Hopefully, Talia knows how to deal with ghost type of customer. "I''m Talia," she beams to the three customers, "And that will be three gold please." Chapter 32: Guests In the Core Room on the sixth floor of the dungeon, a King Mimic is licking the accumulated dust from one of its many motionless brethren. He has no idea why the other chests refuse to get up and clean themselves and their laziness is beginning to frustrate him. Even after spending his own precious time assisting them, before taking over the task completely, the Wooden Chests still refuse to clean themselves. He gives each one a thorough going over, taking specific care around every nut and bolt. Even going as far as lifting the chests up so that he can give the new marble floor a good shining too. After doing twenty less-than-desirable chests, Colin''s tongue is feeling a little worse for wear. Ever diligent though, this does not stop the drooling Mimic as he looks at the ten Silver Chests the Supreme Master placed recently. Surely, those guys will clean themselves? Maybe if he injects them with his seed? Unlike the other twenty loafers beside him, this time he''s hoping for a positive outcome. His lid chatters away merrily as he skitters towards them. Stopping in front of the first chest, he sizes it up and inspects each part of it before his large frame quivers in delight. Retracting his legs, Colin sits infront of the chest as his lid opens wide and hopes this will be the one. Raising the Silver chest in the air with the strength of his evolution, black tendrils extend out from the abyss inside him and pierce the Silver Chest''s frame. Leaving no physical marks, Colin begins injecting the Abyss from himself into his inanimate brother. Tendrils pump away vigorously, supplying the needed amount to awaken his brother. When they''re finally removed, Colin places the chest back on the ground and gets up. Observing it patiently, anticipation clings to him as he waits for the chest to do something. Anything. He inspects every angle, circling multiple times as agitation starts knawing at him. He shimmies left and right and even attempts to prod the chest. With every fibre of his Core, which he knows is connected to the main Core, Colin prays to the dungeon that this new chest will be able to clean itself. Circling the chest a third time, the lid slowly starts to creak open and it halts Colin in his tracks. With his full attention on the chest, the King Mimic watches awareness come into existence within the inanimate object. Legs appear beneath the creature, raising it off the ground as a fleshy pink tongue rolls out of its chest. Standing up for the first time, the Mimic notices that it''s taller than the golden chest and chitters in excitement. Being bigger usually means one is better, stronger and more likely to be chosen by adventurers. Unhappy with the situation, Colin pulls on the Mimic''s closest leg and it stumbles forward. He then thumps it on the lid in a true display of strength. The monster hisses in retaliation, threatening to eat the golden chest. Having arms is a major benefit though and Colin uses that to his advantage. Grabbing the Mimics tongue, he pulls back until tight and then let''s go. Barrel-rolling into the wall, a boss has been established. Now amicable to his needs, Colin goes to lick the Mimic''s frame with his tongue. Horrified, the monster trys its best to run away. Again, having arms is a major boon and Colin puts them to good use by lifting the creature off the floor and disabling it''s means of escape. After cleaning a small section of the Mimic''s chest, Colin points to the rest and waits for the monster to finish itself off. Five minutes later, a lot of pointing and a bit of tough love, the Silver Mimic is sat in a corner cleaning itself. Albeit looking rather sad and beat up. It''s lifegiver, ontheotherhand, is ecstatic. He watches the Mimic cleaning and only has to threaten it once to make sure it gets right in the cracks. Delighted that he has one less chest to clean, Colin points toward the Wooden Chests until he gets the Silver Chest''s attention. Realising what''s being implied, the Mimic looks mortified that, not only does he have to clean himself, he has to clean the others too. Colin, however, is buzzing. If he can avoid splinter tongue, then that''s what he''s going to do.Especaill now that he has a lacky to do the task for him. With the task a success and his lesson taught, Colin moves towards the next Silver Chest. Tendrils sink into the rest subject number 2 as the King Mimic repeats the process, much to the shock of the other Mimic 1. As he injects life into the inanimate object, the Silver Chest learns that finding out how one comes into existence is a truly terrifying experience. -Colin, King Mimic Dungeon Stories Volume 1
A few drinks later, and with one man carrying a lot less coin than when he entered, no one seems to be too phased about being inside a dungeon anymore. I don''t whether to be surprised by how theyre acting, or not. On one hand, totally get it. My mind might also be blown if I still thought about the things they''re thinking about. On the other, who follows a drunk into a dungeon and doesn''t ask questions about monsters? It''s amazing how alcohol can ease the burdens that trouble the soul all on its own. Regarding the matter that Light managed to slur his way through, which Talia translated and added more context too, overall I''m quite satisfied with the situation so far. "So you''re telling me... That your master... Is a woman? Get outta here, where is she?" Wheeler can''t seem to get his head around the idea of a woman owning a man as he scans the bar. Although I don''t technically own them, I''m more like Momma Core than anything. Plus, why was his first question about my gender? "I would also like to meet with your master, is she available?" Eyeing Light up like a kid in a candy shop, Sophie shows no ill regard for the supposed woman and is curious about who she is. This one I''d less like to meet. I cn already see the jealousy in her eyes. Red in the face from the ale that Talia has been supplying them, Aaron slides off the stool and boldly declares, "I love this ale!" Swaying back and forth, he manages to right himself before loosing it, landing face first on the floor. "I''m fine... Go on without me..." his eyes close and I don''t know what to say to that one. He looks like he''s enjoying his dream though, drooling away with a smile on his red face.
What does he mean by that?
Nothing. He''s just drunk.
Ahh. Just like Light.
Haha. Yeah, that''s right. Only this guy''s way more drunk than our resident alcoholic. I swear, if Light spends anymore of his time in the Retreat, Talia''s going to end up employing him. Although, he must be building up some kind of tolerance now. I haven''t caught him sleeping on any of the tables in a while. The narrative has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the infringement. As I talk with Me, Light sits himself on the bar next to Sophie. The blonde guard furrows her brow after being ignored and repeats her question, asking for a meeting with his master. "My Master... Is usually around. Well, most of the time she is. She''s always watching." Why did he add that last bit? He was doing so good at keeping it discreet. "Does that means she''s here now?" Looking around, no one else has entered the Retreat since they arrived. The only ones here are Talia, Light and her own companions. And a sneaky Dungeon Core watching through overview. "When can I meet her then?" For some strange reason, Sophie is really determined to get a meeting with me. What''s that about? It''s a little worrying in a way. Not in a, she might kill me way, though. More of a, bitch might hurt my feelings somehow and I don''t need that shit right now, way.
I... I don''t...
"She''s... Away, at the moment, and has left me in charge, " the semi-drunken dungeon monster proclaims, proudly sticking out his chest and finishing the contents of his mug in one. Again, I don''t like that last bit. He could have at least made it sound believable and said I left Talia in charge. It''s like he only has half of a good idea. The rest is just... "Haha, don''t be preposterous. You may be a capable fighter, but it''s plain as day you''re not a leader," Wheeler knocks Light off his podium with his harsh words and doubles down on my opinion. Sophie looks aghast as the Rogue shows off his poor acting skills. Honestly, it''s almost as bad as his barely-believable charade. Stepping closer to Wheeler he says, "You cut me deep, Sir." Are you serious? I mean... I swear l, Light. I swear to the gods, if you don''t... Realising where he is and who he is laughing at, Wheeler begs forgiveness the best a drunk, overweight man can. He apologises profusely after dropping to his knees, just incase the blabbering fool is temporarily in charge. Huh? "Hahaha. I''m only joking with ya. Don''t worry about it. I''m not hurt or nothing. Anyway, let''s head to Ali''s for some food. I''m starving and we can keep talking there." Heading towards the door, Light gestures for the others to follow him. I don''t know he swung that. Maybe those dead people from earlier popped to mind? Probably, there''s nothing else that''d make a man like him get on his knees for anyone. Except maybe a bit of gold. Even though he carries the girth of three people, a pale-faced Wheeler bolts up faster than he hit the ground at the mention of food. All his worries forgotten as colour flushes his face and he strides towards the door adjusting his pants, "Let''s go!" "H-hey, what about your friend?" Light calls out towards Wheeler, who''s almost at the door. Light slides off the bar, avoiding Aaron and in the process getting closer to Sophie. The guard doesn''t miss the opportunity and links arms before pulling him on. "Aaron''ll be fine, he always goes down afrer a few. Just... Chuck him in a bed and we''ll pick him up later. Now, dinner." Poining with gusto, Wheeler exits the retreat with Light and Sophie in tow. The latter seems to have no intentions of letting go and I''m not gonna say shit. Good luck, Light. "As long as he''s not eaten by the dungeon, he should be fine. Come on, Light. Which way is it? I''m hungry, but I''m more curious to see what food is served inside a dungeon. I also have like a million questions to ask, but they can wait until we''ve eaten," pulling his arm, Light looks back at the sleeping guard Aaron before nodding at Talia and heading off with Sophie and Wheeler. I tell Talia to chuck Aaron in bed. I don''t need him choking and dying on the floor for whatever reason and them bam, I''ve eaten your friend. Whoops. Who''s a Silly Dungeon Core? It just won''t fly. Instead, bed is the best place for the drunk. The two humans aren''t the only hungry people in the dungeon. Light''s belly broadcasts his thoughts which earn him a round of laughs and a smile from the accompanying duo. "Ali is amazing. Her food is out of this world," Light tries to play down his embarrassment and keeps uptalking how good the food is until they come to a stop outside a yellow-brick building. Large windows look inside to the dinning room and a simple sign hangs above the door. The door has three glass windows lining it and is wedged open. Delicious aromas drift out from the building as more than one stomach rings out on contact. It would appear everyone is happy to be at Ali''s. I''m still bummed out, but I''ve managed to get over my want to eat. Still don''t need to, but... Some of the plates she dishes up. Damn. It''s not fair. It''s not fair at all. Don''t I deserve a nice meal? Should I be enjoyed to ''mmmm'' to my heart''s content? It''s hard as hell being a Dungeon Core, you know? So maybe I''m not over it. Whatever. I could complain until The System does something about, but I''ve got guests and it''s not like she listens anyway. "Oh my lord. What is that delicious scent I''m getting?" Floating on the scent until he reaches the door, Wheeler''s eyes begin to tear as he colllapses to his knees. Apparently, all they''ve all eaten the last two days is dry rations. A proper meal, or even half a fresh loaf of bread, would be enough to reduce the this guy to his knees and destroy his resolve. "Wheeler! Get up. You''re embarrassing us." Sophie''s tone kills his vibe though and he does as told, dusting himself off. Not before rebuking her with what everyone''s been thinking since we left the Retreat. "You''re one to talk hooked up to that man like a schoolgirl." Even though she flushes red, Sophie doesn''t move. If anything, her grip just got tighter. I even saw Light fluster for a second. Her embarrassment doesn''t last long though as she turns a death stare Wheeler''s way. He adjusts his pants as a young girl dashes past his side. Before anyone even has time to think, she already dove into Light''s chest. How is he so popular? I mean, he''s not bad on the eye, but... "Hi, Kat. Have you just had dinner?" Light tussles her hair with his free hand before the Catergoriser jumps away, waving a hand in front of her face. "You stink. Have you been at Talia''s all day?" Light looks around for a good excuse before spotting the perfect one on his arm. "N-No. Master asked me to look after these two and we''ve just come from the Retreat. And we weren''t even there for that long." Katrina looks skeptical at that, but she let''s it slide before cuddling back into his chest. "Hmm. OK. I was just visiting Ali to see how she''s doing. Did you know Abi summoned more people to help her with the restaurant? She''s too kind for her own good sometimes that one. Although, I suppose she''s not really losing out on anything when you consider the fighting potential. She''s actually quite clever. Speaking of Abi, where is she? Do you know?" Kat looks at Light with her big, blue inquisitive eyes and he almost buckles. "Erm... She''s out?" Looking anywhere but Kat, Light sounds that unsure of himself that I barely believe him. Trying his best to convey words using his eyes, he fails and Kat just looks more confused. He''s a right pain in my Core sometimes. "I''m just escorting our visitors to Ali''s for a nice dinner. There''s also a third that passed out in the Retreat, can you go see if Talia''s managed to get him in to bed please? I would, but Abi asked me to escort the guests around and explain things to them." Why do he keep emphasising the wrong words? Is he doing it on purpose? Why didn''t he just say they''re from outside the dungeon? "Who is she and why is she... Cuddling you?" The blonde on his arm can''t contain herself and she blurts out her feelings like her and Light are already an item. The drunk laughs, but this doesn''t stop chills running down his spine at Sophie''s death stare. Realising what she''s just said, Sophie goes bright red a second time before putting on a nervous smile. "I''m Katrina, it''s a pleasure to meet you. I''ve got to go see Talia now, but we can chat later if you want. Good bye . See ya, Light," with that the ex-apprentice skips off to Talia''s after getting her Light fix. Wheeler, Sophie and a confused drunk, head in to Ali''s. So far, Light hasn''t done the worst job at being discreet. Even though I told him to do so on a whim, I''m almost proud. He''s in his element when bringing back tributes, but talking to people... I''ll give him a miss next time. In charge of the dungeon my Core. Anyway, I want to see how the humans behave and act with no monsters around. Not that there are any actual monsters here, only my family, but it won''t be long before one of them drops the question. Light will only be able to sidestep it for so long, not that I''m trying to trick them or anything. I''m just curious is all. Plus, it''s nice to see people interacting with each other. Especially since I can''t. I''ve gotta satisfy needs somehow, right? So far, Light''s managed to avoid explaining two major details. All whilst intoxicated aswell. Maybe I should give him more credit? The first one being that he''s actually a creation of the dungeon they know they''re in. Because that''s how good my summons are. You can''t tell the difference between them and regular humans. The second detail he glossed over is that his outrageously-gorgeous female master is, not only the owner of said dungeon but, is in fact the Dungeon Core itself. Way to go Light. Definitely needs more credit than I''m giving him, doesn''t he? Maybe I can purchase something for him when this is over. I mean, no one''s talking about destroying the dungeon. Neither are they running to the closest Categoriser they can find to report me either. So yeah, I''m taking this as a win so far. Chapter 33 : A. D. A A stoic man is sitting at the table inside the tavern. Decked out in a full set of flame armour, his black cloak sways behind him. He''s surrounded by a crowd of people, who listen intently, as he regales a tale from his days as an adventurer. The story is about how he defeated the Goblin King and his army, with nothing but a broken sword and a handful of arrows. The crowd grows slowly, until the whole tavern is packed, yet not one person makes a sound. Everyone is hunched over on edge, those at the back are trying their best to lean closer as to not miss any crucial element. The storyteller has the crowd in the palm of his hand yet as he nears the climactic conclusion of his story, he suddenly stops. "I will finish the story tomorrow. I''m feeling very tired all of a sudden," eyeing up two similar looking females, a smile spreads across the chiseled features of his face. Boo''s and jeers come from the crowd even though they all disperse in good spirits, anxiously anticipating how the story will end. Once the bar has quietened, the two female warriors approach the storyteller and offer to tell him a few stories of their own in private if he would be interested. With his primary motive for telling the story being a pick-up line for women, the storyteller is more than interested. He and the two ladies head upstairs to one of the empty tavern rooms. A short while later, inside the warm and sweaty room, the adventurer is laying on the bed and the two women are laid on each side of him. "That could have been classed as an adventure all on its own," he smiles at the two ladies who are tracing his muscles with their fingers. "When are you due to leave, Sir Aaron? That was magical," one of the women let''s loose a tear knowing that all good things come to an end. "After that? I''m never leaving! I''m going to stay here forever," Aaron laughs at her silly question, losing his stoic demeanour. "Silly. You can''t stay here. What about your friends?" the second woman looks confused. "What? What friends?" with this thought, a sinking feeling comes over Aaron. The world around him darkens as he is sucked down through the bed sheets and into a black oblivion. Down he goes as sheets continuously wrap around his body, turning his amazing dream into a hellish nightmare that he can''t escape. Struggling gets him nowhere as water pours down but unwilling to die, Aaron wrestles and grasps at whatever he can with all his remaining might. Opening his eyes, the young guard Aaron is drenched in sweat as he jumps out of the bed he''s in. The sheet below is also drenched in sweat as is the mattress that lays beneath it. The window to the room is wide open and a chilling breeze brushes against his damp skin. However, Aaron doesn''t notice any of this as the two startled females that are attending to his room look exactly like those from his dream. "Am I still dreaming?" Dungeon Stories Volume 1
Is that magic?
No. That''s what you call greedy. Since arriving at Ali''s, Wheeler has ordered every single dish that the gourmet has to offer and he now looks to be twice his original size. Jealous is the only way to describe my feelings and coincidentally, it was also his last dessert. Mega jelly. It''s not just myself and Me, but Light, Sophie, Ali and the rest of the catering staff are all in their own state of bewilderment at how much mass the large man has stuffed inside himself. "Ahh. I must say that I have never eaten quite so much in one sitting before," holding his belly, as though he will explode at any moment, Wheeler leans back in his chair and smiles. After eating a dozen meals and half a dozen desserts, he looks truly content. "Beautiful women. Amazing food. This place is truly a paradise for the weary merchant, even if it is a dungeon. The buildings outside, are you expanding out there?" Putting two and two together, Wheeler has already guessed what I going to do next. There''s a lot to mention when you talk development and Light just wasn''t cutting it. Fortunately, we''re at Ali''s. Calling over the green-haired culinary goddess, she recites what I say and even makes certain parts sound better. That''s what I''m talking about. If only she didn''t have to cook. Running his hand over his beard, the merchant listens to my idea as he takes in the view outside the window. I don''t know what he''s thinking about, but if it''s start up costs, I''ve got all that covered. DP takes care of everything. Usually, starting a new town costs a fortune. Like a literal fortune, not just a metaphorical one. Oddly enough, Wheeler has that . . He knows that skilled workers are needed for such a project, however, when looking at the buildings that are already constructed in the dungeon, it would appear that this group already has enough of them. From the Barracks to The Retreat, each one is well crafted and designed. He also knows that workers would need temporary living quarters on site, but again, after seeing the houses inside the mountain he knows that they''re already here too. Most of all though, what a new village or town needs more than anything else is a financial backer. Someone to pay for the materials, the wages and any other cost that may accrue. As Wheeler mulls over his thoughts, the trio leave Ali''s and move to the recently-built hotel. It''s not far to travel as it''s right next door and the employee at reception books the two guests in. Sophie, who has barely moved two feet away from Light all evening, is reluctant to leave his side. It''s only when the room description is revealed that she hesitantly parts from him, the lure of a bath is something she cannot withstand. Support creative writers by reading their stories on Royal Road, not stolen versions. "I have lots of ideas about what you''re going to need to accomplish your goals here. If possible, I would really like to talk to your master about those matters in more detail. Can we arrange a meeting for when she is back perhaps?" Before retiring for the night, Wheeler puts on his best merchant''s smile and asks for another meeting, but this time he catches my interest. I let him know, through Light, that we will arrange something over the upcoming days and I leave the hotel to let our guests settle in. . . Floating across the floor, I''m full of my own ideas on how our town could develop. What started with Me''s harsh description of a bandit hideout has flourished into something beautiful. Something I would have never thought possible. Before I know it, I''m back outside for the third time today. Forth if you want to include the test I ran on the pond. The sun has set and the light of the moon is all that remains to illuminate the buildings outside my mountain. Seeing how this is where I''ve ended up I may as well invest the rest of my points. I still can''t get over that crazy-shadow-spike-move, but I''ve got a bigger fish to fry right now. The Hay Bale!
I don''t understand why it bothers you? Like everything else so far, it will transform into something much better after an upgrade or two.
And that''s why we''re here, Me. I''m used to the buildings and features being terrible upon their initial construction, but I can still hear Kat laughing in my mind. I haven''t felt embarrassed in a while and I''m not even upset over it. In fact, it was nice to feel something different. It made me feel human again.
Yes but you''re not...
Yes, I know. I know. But I was! I know how feelings and emotions work. I understand the wants and desires of people because I used to be one. All I''m saying is that it felt nice to be embarrassed. That''s all. Now, time to do some upgrading. 160DP is a shocking amount to have to spend on the single bale of hay beside the stable. I''m not any happier once the upgrade has finished either as the solitary feature hasn''t changed in any way at all. Not even its name is different. What the hell? Bringing up the status sheet of the unchanged feature, I finally find one detail that has changed. It now costs 320DP if I want to upgrade it again. Seriously? What the hell!? Where are the reins in this dungeon? Every time, Me. Every time. I get into the groove and then bam! Didn''t expect that did ya? Why? Why? I know who''s to blame for this. I do!
Before you say it, you can know that this is The System''s fault. Why don''t you upgrade it again and see if it changes this time?
Upgrade it again? Are you serious? What if it still doesn''t do anything? That''s 500DP down the shitter on nothing but a bale of hay. The forge only cost me 40 to place, I knew I should have done that first.
Then how come we started here?
The embarrassment, Me. Kat was laughing at me and Ali was looking everywhere except at the bale. I know I said I wasn''t bothered by it, but I was OK? Then, for some stupid reason, I declared that it would be the best Hay Bale they''d ever seen. That''s why we started here, but I''m not wasting any more DP if it''s not gonna change. Adding a sixth feature outside my mountain, I decide to upgrade that twice instead of messing round with the hay. Starting from nothing, I watch as a house spawns from nowhere. Surprising it looks like a proper house and I can''t help but be slightly underwhelmed. Until it starts growing that is. From one house to two, two to four, the size keeps increasing until it stretched almost the entire length of what I own. Any further and I reckon there might have been some consequences, but hot damn. How? Or why? I don''t know which words to use because I don''t know what to say. Why is this building so big? I''m always hoping for greatness, don''t get me wrong and in no way is this building anything other than great, but it''s massive. Everything is a pristine white, other than the red roofs and golden decorations here and there. Columns run along the front of the main biilding and around both adjacent campuses. Infront of them are two open lawns with paths leading towards the fountain in the center and around the entire feature runs a fenced wall. I... I wasn''t expecting it to be like this. Stairs lead up to a pair of marble doors with the moon and stars are engraved on both. As I float through them and into the magnificent building, I''m greeted by a stunning reception hall. Almost everything is made of marble, the floors, columns, tables and features are all white. The walls are lined with shelves, bookcases and many other decorations, all made from the same dark oak. A large spiral staircase, reminiscent of those that travel between my floors, only without the outer wall, sits in the centre of the room. It leads up to a single room and a long balcony stretches off in both directions. How is it that I''ve only spent 280DP on this piece of art, yet the Hay Bale looks as though it''s worth 5DP and is laughing at me?
It all depends on you, Abi.
Yeah, I know, Me. It would probably help if I knew how I worked first though, right? Why are my builds either ''the best ever'' or ''shady as shit''? You would think I''m used to this by now, but how can I be? It''s only been ten days since I woke up as a Dungeon Core, I still need more time to familiarise myself with the ins and outs. My new building, The Academy of Dark Arts is an absolute beauty. As I continue to float around from room to room, I forget what I was complaining about in the first place and count myself grateful that I was able to create a building like this at all. This will definitely bring people to Varona. It''s a school where people can study magic! Combine that with teachers that will be drop-dead-gorgeous and I''ve got a recipe for success.
Who is going to teach in this school of yours?
My Shadow Walkers of course. Noir has amazing control over his magic and he''ll do anything I ask him to. Granted, he can''t control his mouth, but if we couple him up with Carrie and a few more new summons, we''ve got ourselves a staff.
I believe you have missed a significant detail from the status screen.
What do you mean?
The Academy of Dark Arts: The dark arts care little for titles or trivialities and only serves those strong enough to wield it Courses are available for those wishing to aspire to greater heights Novice Teachers: 0 Intermediate Teachers: 0 Advanced Teachers: 0 Masters: 0 Students: 0 Requires 4 Intermediary Teachers to operate effectively
Well... Crap. We''ll leave that as it is for now then and I''ll summon some shadow-farmers instead. Can I call them that? I quite like it. Whatever, that''s what I''m calling them. Noir and Carrie had gotten back just before the guard, Aaron, face-planted my floor. Poor guy. On their return, I unlocked the much-needed worker class for the Field of Fertility and I have decided to summon five of them. It''s an nice round 200DP and even if I only end up needing one, it''s more numbers for my secret army. Chapter 34 : Varona
Kill Emile Gestaff: The baker''s wife has placed a contract on the head of her unfaithful husband He can be found in the Silver Moon brothel in the town of Dune Reward: 1 contract point Eliminate the contact whilst he''s in the building and paint the walls with his blood to increase the Syndicate''s fame Return with the target''s body to unlock the Baker class and earn additional rewards
Light understands that this mission is important. His master specifically told him so. What he can''t understand is why his master would allow a regular human to accompany him and Dropper. What he finding even harder to grasp is why his master only gave him, his partner, and their human tag-along, two horses. Two. Not three. Just two. Currently, Sophie has her arms locked around Light''s waist on the back of one horse. Dropper, who can''t help but grin due to the reversal in situation from Katrina, is alone on the other. ''Is The Master trying to set me up with this human? Why would she do that? Although, I suppose she is quite beautiful or is that due to the exposure of being close to The Master. It''s hard to tell. Either way, it''s just... Strange. That''s what it is! Strange,'' he thinks, taking small peeks back at the woman holding tight behind him as they emerge from the woods onto the path heading toward Dune. "Are you okay over there?" Dropper calls over, her tone is laced in sarcasm and she struggles to control a snicker. "I''m fine! Why do you ask?" Light snaps back, assuming her jab is meant for him as they so often are. "Oh. I wasn''t talking to you, Light. I''m sorry. I was talking to Sophie," Dropper can''t keep it in and she laughs at her partner. "Oh, now you wanna start cracking jokes. I remember when a certain someone had a certain young apprentice hanging from her waist. Wasn''t so funny then was it?" trying to shame his partner in their battle of words, Dropper laughs it off. "But right now, you are living the dream. Are you not?" Looking at Sophie nestled into Light''s back, Light sees her eyes drawn to the woman behind him and he realises that he needs to be watch his words. He can endure the hard, yet soft, grip for the sake of the mission. In all honesty, he doesn''t actually mind the strangely-infatuated woman, clutching him tightly as if he may disappear at any moment. "Sophie, why do you cling to me the way you do?" Sophie lifts her head from Light''s back at his words and places it on his shoulder. "You''re strong. Like, really strong, right? Isn''t that all any girl wants? A strong, handsome man," she pecks his cheek at the end of her words and he blushes brightly while looking towards Dropper for aid. Unfortunately, he finds no help as her mouth is wide open, she is almost more shocked than he is. With no assistance being shown from his partner, Light gazes back at Sophie who has nestled back into the comfort of his back but finds he is lost for words. "H-handsome?" he eventually stutters as Sophie lifts her head back up. The rest of the ride there, she whispers sweet words, of the life they could have together, into his ear. -Light, Dropper, and Sophie, Syndicate Assassins
I''m not going to lie. After being confined to the dungeon for so long, it''s really strange being outside, watching five, burly-looking men tend to a field. The sweat dripping off their shirtless, chiseled physique under the midday sun is enough to make a girl weak at the knees.
If you had knees.
You''re getting pretty quick these days, Me. It''s pretty damn sweet, this Core''s finally got herself some eye candy. Even if it does still fall under the strange factor. Choosing the Shadow Walkers as a base for my farmer class, everyone summoned so far has been male. It''s making me question if gender is really random, or if The System is screwing around with things. Even though I''m not sure, I''m still inclined to go with the latter. It''s frustrating to say the least. After summoning a Shadow Farmer, he was given the title of High Cultivator and I cheaped out by using that as his name. Even better, the other four farmers, I left in his hands and bid him good luck. I doubt they''ll end up like the Sweets, but you never know. The High Cultivator was granted lost magic on how to efficiently sow, keep and reap the best harvests from any crops. Humanity would wage war for the knowledge and techniques the High Cultivator has been granted. They''re absolutely absurd on a different level. I was honestly curious at first and wanted to know how long dungeon crops would take to grow, but I should have just guessed. After they spent the majority of their first day planting seeds and infusing each one with mana, the five farmers retired for the night. On the second day, the High Cultivatorspent the morning in the fields alone. He spoke to each seedling as he watered them and moved on. And that was it for the second day. I was super confused at that point, but I don''t know squat about farming and dungeon''in is a tough gig so so I let him do as pleased and said nothing. To my surprise, come evening the magical crops looked almost ready to harvest. It took another day for the High Cultivator to teach his four companions how to correctly cut, remove, and then store, each of the bountiful resources he had blessed. It was more than strange. The amount they harvested was just ridiculous. Even now, I just... I''m glad they got a lot, but... Ignoring the oversized warehouse I had to create myself just to store the crops in, Wheeler and Aaron left my dungeon with a dozen Shadow Walkers as escort. It''s safe to say that they were extremely pleased with their new guard detail and travelling companions. Wheeler set off with the intention of talking-up Varona as he restocks his wares. Once he''s gathered some stock and spread the word as much as possible, he''ll return with anyone that wishes to relocate before heading out again to repeat the process. That''s how a travelling merchant usually operates, but he''s eventually aiming to settle down here. If you encounter this tale on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. I should consider myself lucky that he stumbled upon my land during their escape. All that it has cost to recruit his lip services was the promise of a large building where he can sell his wares tax-free once Varona is a bustling DP Factory. It''s likely to be a good few weeks before they return and in that time my goal is to improve the town outside my mountain. The remaining guard Sophie decided to stay with Light and follows him everywhere like a lost lamb. Currently, she is out with him and Dropper on a Syndicate mission, not that she knows it''s for the Syndicate or even why they''re travelling so far away. She isn''t contracted to me so it was the best idea I could come up with to get her out of my dungeon while I made some changes. The Academy of Dark Arts had to be stored away before Wheeler and Aaron left. Nor because I was worried about them seeing it, they''ll definitely see it when they return, but because It would have been hard for them leave the mountain with the new feature in the way. Plus, it would have been one of those conversations. Especially considering its size and how soon the feature was constructed shortly after their arrival. It wouldn''t have been stranger than watching Noir store the entire thing in his spacial storage though. He did that before I had chance to tell him that I could have stored it in my own dungeon inventory. He laughed it off, sweat dripping down his face before he teleported to the designated spot and unloaded the burden promptly. Poor Noir. Staying on the subject of strange, The Syndicate has managed to reach level 4. Thats obviously not the strange part. I don''t need DP to level this building, making it the only one of its kind that I possess. It also doesn''t have a building and jus seems to be a dungeom feature. Maybe because of how I tried placing it? I don''t know. Each level up requires twice as many contracts be completed as the last, which doesn''t seem much different from anything else that goes on in my dungeon. Yes it starts cheap, but will eventually cost me a fortune soon. For The Syndicate to get to level 2, all it required was the completion of one contract. Then, it took two contracts. After that it was four and now it''s eight to reach level 5. That means for it go from level 9 to 10, it will take 256 contracts. That seems like some right ridiculous shit to me. How is it even fair since it only gets steeper after that? Why do I have this awkwardly-scaled leveling system anyway? Whatever. Currently, this is the level of my strangeness.
The Syndicate: Level 4 All associates earn a 40% boost to all stats regardless of location All associates are able to use Dark Magic fluently even if they are unattuned to the element All associates physical and mental skills inflict an extra 25% damage and status effects last longer regardless of enemy buffs Cloak of Night: Turn invisible for 60 minutes once a day Does not cost mana to cast and has no upkeep Does not require a physical skill to use Once activated can be deactivated at will Once deactivated cannot be used again until the cool down period is over Contracts until next level: 7 Contracts can be acquired from: Taskmaster Talia The Chef Abi Potion Master Lucinda The Swindler Jack Cloak and Dagger Tara and Lara
It''s just ridiculous. But at least it''s in a good way for once. If it wasn''t for the boosts and special abilities provided The Syndicate already, I would be kicking off big time at the buildingless feature. Since I do have them, however... It''s a major game changer. Especially when you consider the other home ground advantages that we have. Then again, where were these boosts when I was still human? I seriously missed out, didn''t I? Then again, it''s not like we weren''t on the lookout for a supporter to join us. The problem is there just aren''t enough people with a buffing class for every party to have one. Hell, it''s probably around one-in-twelve, not that I know the actual figures. Either way, now that I''m a Dungeon Core, I still don''t get to appreciate these awesome buffs! I can grant them to people who form a contract with me and anyone or anything that I summon gets added to The Syndicate''s ranks automatically. I know, it''s great, but I still feel like I''m missing out on the action. So yeah, strange has been the name of the game these last few days. Anyway, with the aid of The Syndicate, and thanks to my diligent subjects completing their missions, I''ve managed to unlock a few new subclasses to aid me in the creation of Varona. They''ll be beneficial for the town''s start up, bakers, farmers, librarians and more. I don''t need help with construction since features appear from the awesomeness of nothing. What I need and what my town needs are real people to start bringing the points in. Hopefully, in the near future, Wheeler will be able to convince people to make the trip to my towm. If not, I''m sure the Shadow Walkers that I sent with him will inspire a few curious people to venture our way. Tired of being caught unaware since people keep stumbling upon us by chance, I purchased two more plots of land. Creating more space and laying foundations for the town outside my mountain. For now, I''m just going to hide the true dungeon away from adventurers and other nayer do wellers behind the school. Once I''m raking in the DP and my dungeon is a lot bigger, I''ll reopen it to the public. The Academy of Dark Arts now sits in front of the entrance to my true home, the unreasonably-beautiful mountain. From the large gates, that are closed to all except students, I have paved the floor and filled the street with buildings. Each one is a direct copy of the features I currently possess inside. For people to believe that we''re a thriving, startup town, buildings like a church, a tavern, restaurants, hotel and shops are needed for credibility and believability. Fortunately for me, the secondary buildings are exact duplicates of their originals. Unless I decide to alter them myself, they only cost a fraction of the price the originally did. I don''t even know when I unlocked the ability to duplicate, but it has sure come in handy. Not that it wouldn''t still be useful if wasn''t so cost effective. What isn''t cost effective are homes and I put a lot of points into housing, for my people aswell those that might show up with, or before, Wheeler. I know some of my summons are staying at the Privacy Palace and that won''t do. They should all have their own homes by now with how hard they work. Plus, I need those rooms to fleece travellers and merchants. In the end, I almost bottomed out on points after I had finished creating more homes than necessary. I even created a small residential district. Just incase an absurb amount of people arrive. Prevention is better than the cure, although I''m sure if that applies in this scenario? It was better to get it done before they show up too since I might not be able to build in certain areas when they do. It was alright asking Kat to leave for a few minutes back then, but I can''t exactly tell a town''s worth of people to bugger off for a bit whilst I upgrade shit, can I? I didn''t realise how fast my body count was rising, or will continue to rise, until I was actually making homes for them. I mean, know how many people there are. When I was actually creating the living spaces though, it added a certain clarity to the numerical figures. Anyway, the mountain town of Varona is starting to look good. With the buildings I''ve duplicated, it looks quite busy too. My family have swapped indoor features for the outdoor ones, or whatever you want to class them as seeing as they''re still in the dungeon. It''s even helped bring Kat out of the mountain that she has been so reluctant to leave. Not that she''s left dungeon territory yet... With some houses lining the street between the different establishments, I gave Kat one next to Ali''s restaurant. She spends a lot of time with our culinary genius so it was a no brainer keeping them close. Plus, it''s easy brownie points with my mate Kat. Eliminating the need for me, I decided to improve the High Cultivator''s farming teams by a considerable amount aswell. Not with Shadow Walkers this time, however. The Archer class I unlocked, which is like a super long time ago now, has sat there gathering dust due to me not making full use of everything available. As usual, I summoned a batch of ten Archers and unlock the next tier, The Ranger. I get a mixed bag of gender and don''t complain. A batch of Rangers later and I unlocked the Wood Walkers. Again, another mixed bag. Maybe she did listen to me? It doesn''t stop from complaining at The System though. Not with how clich¨¦ her choice of names are, until Me reminded me that the names come from my mind. The System just takes and uses them. So... I''ve gotta get better at this naming job? Why is there so much to name as a dungeon? Maybe I should try and come up with them in advance. Should I keep a list? Either way, the Wood Walkers are just as strong as the Shadow Walkers with only a few differences in their stats so they became the new farmers. I also made a few dozen teams and sent them to Hana and Mira to be assigned shifts. The Archers and Hunters were mixed in with the Shadow Walker guard detail adding to our overall defence. Anyone that makes their way here will now find an ordinary town sitting beneath an anything-but ordinary mountain. The next step out here will be further expansion, once my next scouting parties return. I need to increase the amount of land too so that we can grow this popsicle stand and accommodate even more visitors. Then again, I can only hope that the people I''m trying to accommodate for will actually show up one day. It would be a shitter if they didn''t... Chapter 35 : Translucent Arriving in the town of Dune, Light, Dropper, and their human tag-along Sophie, begin their search for the Silver Moon brothel. To complete the contract to the highest standards, they have to eliminate their target whilst he''s in the brothel and they must return with his body. As they traverse the streets in search of their destination, Light purchases some food for the party. With Sophie busy eating, finally removing herself from Light''s waist, he and Dropper rock, paper, scissors to decide who will disappear to complete the mission. After cursing a few times, Light resigns himself to the less enjoyable job of babysitting Sophie. Fortunately for him, it seems that this job was made especially for the blue-haired Shadow Walker. After finishing their meal, the trio continue their search. Less than half an hour later and they''re stood at a crossroad. The brothel is off to the left, whereas the opposite direction leads to the beautiful, golden meadow. A well-frequented location for young lovers going through the courting period and adults out for a good time. Grumbling under his breath, Light can''t help but want to assassinate someone as Dropper informs Sophie that they''re splitting up. The guard/ex dungeon diver doesn''t bat an eye until she''s told who she will be accompanying and where. After taking the news exceptionally well, she''s all smiles "Okay, Dropper. We''ll meet you where the roads join up later!" dragging Light by the arm, Sophie and the reluctant Shadow Walker disappear round the corner before Dropper can even say goodbye. Although a sarcastic comment was what she was lining up, the blonde Shadow Walker didn''t get chance to make her quip. "Why are you pulling me? And why are we running? We''re not chasing anyone." Still upset after going from Assassin to babysitter, Light catches Sophie smiling back at him and decides to let it be. There could be worse things to do other than hang out with a pretty woman. Caught in her heart-moving smile, all Light can see is Sophie and he runs straight into a group of people, causing them both to tumble to the ground. "Light! I''m sorry. Are you okay? I''m really sorry, if I was watching where I was going, then this..." crouching next to a goofy-looking Shadow Walker, Sophie knows the accident was her fault and apologies profusely before she''s cut off. "What the fuck! Do you know who I am?" Without waiting for an apology, the cloaked man stands up and screams in outrage. His entourage back away immediately as his temper flares to the max. After only a small, accidental misunderstanding, the fact that he''s so quick to rage testifies the type of person he is. The three women don''t say a word. However, one is staring murderously at Light and Sophie. "How am I supposed to know who you are? Do you know who I am? Also, you don''t look like the type of person that bakes bread... That means you''re not who we''re looking for anyway, so you can just toddle along. I''m not really in the mood to..." Before he can finish his sentence, the man''s features that are visible beneath his hood turn red from embarrassment and he disappears in a burst of wind. Brushing the dust of his clothes, Light almost misses the blade aimed straight at his heart. "Nice," brushing the attack aside with a casual flick of his wrist, Light watches astonishment wash oer his attacker and then full-force slaps him across the face. The poor man rolls violently past his entourage and crashes into the building behind them. With his head spinning, he struggles to stand before finally making it to his feet. His companions gather around as he glares furiously at Light. Shaking visibly, he starts arguing with himself in the middle of the street before losing that battle also. "Y-You''re lucky that I have other business to attend to," the man barks out before walking away with more haste than necessary. His speed doesn''t stop him from flipping Light off as his entourage round the corner, however. ''That wasn''t cool." Watching them round the corner, he shakes his head and turns to finds himself confronted with a sparkly-eyed Sophie. "That. Was. Amazing. He was like whoosh, and you were like bang, slap. Get away from me fool. It was awesome. How are you so strong? Are you like... A Vampire or something?" laughing at Sophie''s silly thoughts over where his strength comes from, Light shakes his head and smiles warmly. "I''m not a vampire. I''m just good at what I do," playing it off as nothing, he turns to continue on down the street. He doesn''t get far before Sophie links their arms, almost faster than the man had attacked. "It''s ok if you are. I don''t mind at all. Whatever you are. You can... Bite me. If you want too," hooking up to Light as tightly as he can, Sophie leans in close. Tempting him with her eyes, she fully exposes her neck to him and it causes Light to stop. "I''m not a Vampire. If I was, I wouldn''t be able to walk around in the sun with you. Would I?" trying to get Sophie to see sense by using logic, Light''s words fall on deaf ears as Sophie leans in even closer. "I don''t care what you are. Just bite me and take me right here. I want to stay with you forever," blushing worse than his attacker did a moment ago, Light flusters at Sophie''s words as he is taken back by their meaning. Inside his chest, his heart beats faster and faster and the scent of the sweet aroma coming from the woman offering herself to him is all he can smell. By the time they hit the meadow, Light can barely control himself. His heart beating even fader than before threatens to burst out of his chest. Looking down, Sophie is already looking up at him and their eyes meet. They stop, the Shadow Walker is unable to move. Paralysed by the allure of the woman on his arm. He blinks and she''s closer. Once again and she right infront if his face. Ever so slowly, the distance between them disappears until eventually their lips meet. Ecstacy floods his entire body in an unbridled overload of euphoria, before he collapses on the floor in a love-stricken mess. -Light, Dropper, and Sophie, Syndicate Assassins.
After purchasing another plot of land, I named it the residential area after filling the entire section with homes and inns. After that, I paved the roads and added a bit greenery to the area. I have to say that I''m super impressed with my work. Being a Dungeon Core certainly has its upsides, even if the majority of my time is spent spiralling. If I was still human, I''d love to be able to own a house here and I''m hoping that''s how other people will see this place. After all, this area is specifically for non-dungeon residents and that''s why it''s so well done up. Not that the area my summons inhabit is worse off, it''s just that I can build freely around them without having to use Divinities Presence. Either way, this place has everything it needs for people to start living here and shouldn''t need anything else adding to it. Then again, it''s easy to overlook small details, but I can easily accommodate a few hundred people now without worries. Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more. Right after I finish, one of my scouting parties return and I finally hit level 33. My explosive growth ran its course a while ago and since then it''s taken almost two weeks to reach my next level. Funnily enough, it''s also the same time that I swapped Light and Dropper from scouting detail to Syndicate Contracts. Those two always bring back something absurd. Maybe when they get back from their current mission, I should let them scout around my mountain for a few days. With almost two dozen scouting teams out at any time, it''s unlikely that they will bring back anything on the same level as before. You never know with those two though. I''ll think about it. From what I hear and what I''m told, most of the area within a 5 mile circumference of our home is relatively clear of monsters. Which is another good selling point for moving to Varona. Come and live the easy life, relax without having to worry about monster attacks. Even if a monster does show up, there''ll always be someone around to take care of it. These Shadow Walkers don''t mess around. As is the trend with a new level, I always unlock something new. Whether it''s a building, room feature, a monster, or even the occasional loot I barely use, there''s always something. It''s whys there''s always so much to do. I''ve been trying to work through my backlog before using the latest features. With my last level up, I''ve unlocked something that darent makenwait at the back of the queue for me to test. Or possibly forget. I''d cry. This one, insignificant level up, in the many I''ve been through since reincarnating, offers me a fraction of the hope. A sliver of longing that I had almost given up on.
Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 33: A new monster has been unlocked: Rock Worm: 20DP A new skill has been acquired. Spiritual Presence: Level 1
That''s right, the Rock Worm. ... What? A Core can''t crack a joke when she''s in a good mood? Ignoring the Rock Worm, I waste no time and immediately cast my new skill. Praying, to anyone and everyone beyond my own gods and System, that it will finally give me a semblance of what I desire. What I long for. My manifestation is wrapped in a soft, blue hue. What I''ve come to know as the light of creation, or something similar, covers me entirely and it ends up that bright I can''t see a thing. Thinking something has gone wrong, worry casts a cloud over my heart until I trip over something. Landing on the cold, hard floor of the dungeon, my body shakes uncontrollably as I begin to tear up. I still can''t see yet, but that thing I tripped over... Was me. It was my foot, I think? Feeling my chest pound away furiously causes my waterworks to go full-on flood and I keep trying my best to dry my eyes. It doesn''t work though and I can''t stop crying. Instead, I sit there like that for a while. Moving around various body parts until my sight finally returns. Infront of my face are the cutest hands I''ve ever seen, wiggling their fingers at me. I can actually feel myself doing it. Muscles in my face contract as I pull the largest smile ever. I''ve wanted to do for ages and now I can. Performing some light stretches, followed by a few mocks attacks, my body feels fantastic. This skill is amazing so far. However, it has two problems that are both glaringly obvious. First, my entire body is translucent. That means it''s not a proper, human body. If anything, looking like this is only going to make people think I''m a spirit. The second problem is that I''m tiny. Like, child-sized tiny. Light would be able to stand on me unknowingly, if he wasn''t watching where he was going. That''s how small I am. Looking at myself, my proportions are all in the right places, which is awesome. I''m just not big enough for anyone to see properly yet. Still, I look amazing. I don''t even care how big I am, right now. The only problem is this colour. I don''t like how my hair makes me look old. I have an idea. Ending my new skill, I combine Manifestation with Spiritual Presence and cast them simultaneously. Again, I''m turned into the brightest light in the room. When I open my eyes, I''m pleasantly surprised to see my hair a vibrant green. "Yes." The cutest sound ever leaks from my lips as I announce my genius to the dungeon. The fists I''m holding in the air cause me to pause though. They''re also the same vibrant green as my hair. Crap. Green spirit or white spirit? What do you think, Me?
I would say that green is certainly your colour.
And I would agree. I reckon you would be an orange by the way.
An orange?
Yeah. I don''t know why though... You just strike me as an orange.
Colours are irrelevant for myself. Green does suit you however. Now that you''re happy, you have more DP to spend.
Aww. But I just got a new skill and it''s an actual body. Hang on. I bend down and try to grab the rock on the floor. Unsatisfactory, my hand phases right through it as it would with regular Manifestation. It was worth a shot. Maybe when I level up some more, I''ll be able to unlock something that lets me touch and taste. I''m coming Ali. Just you wait.
I''ve given up worrying about your skills now. After you passed level 10, the consistency between what you should earn and when changes too often. You always earn a feature during a level up, but as to what that something is going to be, I could not even hazard a guess.
I actually have my fingers crossed. Hoping and praying that I''ll be able to physically hold something in the near future as Me explains what I already know. I get it. It''s vexing. Probably more so for him. Me''s supposed to be able to guide me through this process, but can''t because a certain Dungeon Core doesn''t roll like those normies he''s created to serve. No wonder he gets irritated and snappy. Although, since he''s acting that way, it means he should be able to grow alongside me. Feelings are what makes us who we are and if Me was some autonomous being... Yeah, I don''t think I''d like that. Do this, Abi. Do that, Abi. You''re not spending points fast enough, Abi. Don''t let points go to waste, Abi. Don''t let them... There isn''t much of a difference when I put it like that, is there?
What are you going on about now?
... ...Nothing. Kat says humans are crazy and she''s not wrong. Again, it''s probably because of emotions and feelings. They''re what drive people to do whatever it is they think is best. That said, there''s just something about being human that has a lure to it. Twirling my fingers through my hair, I chuckle whilst remembering what that lure was. Freedom. Being an adventurer. Facing the unknown. Conquering the challenges of life with your friends and family. I suddenly feel quite shameful. Am I able to leave the mountain? Do I know what''s going to happen tomorrow? Am I surrounded by people that love me? Why am I only now realising that I already have everything that I wanted . I may not be able to leave the dungeon''s boundaries, but everyday they get bigger. Even if I was still confined to the mountain, would it really matter? As long as I fully support and embrace those that can, did it really matter if I had a body or not? What changes now that I can move my fingers and toes? Nothing. Having a body was all that I wanted. Now that I''ve got it however, I understand that it''s not what I needed and was only a selfish whim. The acceptance that I claim to have over being turned into a Dungeon Core may not have been as true as I had claimed it to be. Deep down, I was still harbouring grudges and aiming them in the wrong directions. At the wrong people. Using any reason I could find to vent my frustrations, I even named Dropper in a parhetic rage over a stupid Goblin. The spirit body that I''m currently in helps me see things differently. What I really needed was what I was already creating around myself. Strong foundations. Dependable people. Everything that makes the current me, me. Having a human form is great, but since it''s smaller than average, I''ll revert to my overview and do as Me suggested. The autonomous helper, who''s not really autonomous at all, is the closest thing I have to a best friend and I should listen to him more aswell. Let''s stop letting things get to me and concentrate on features and building. With my newfound outlook on life, things can only get better from here. Chapter 36: A New View As Dropper approaches the Silver Moon, she heads down the alleyway that leads behind the establishment. After a quick check to make sure no prying eyes are on her, she casts the Syndicate''s special invisibility skill. Now she can move around freely and search for the target without worry of being spotted. Climbing through one of the open windows, Dropper makes no noise, the sound cancel skill in action, as she lands and creeps past the two occupants of the room. Confirming that neither was her target, Emil Gestaff, through the magical means of the Syndicate. The curtain blocking her exit is much better than a noisy door. As soon as the rooms participants are engrossed in their business, she slips into the corridor and starts peeping. Grateful it''s her here and not Light. Checking each room the best she could, Dropper is now a lot more enlightened than she would like to be regarding the many different arts of pleasure. Unfortunately for her, the target isn''t here yet and she isn''t sure if he''ll arrive before Invisibility runs out. Happy that she managed to learn the layout of the establishment for the assassin''s next visit, she heads for the exit. Before she can reach her destination, a man and woman enter the corridor and head her way. This isn''t the first time she''s seen the employees guide customers to their room, however, this is the first time that one of the patrons has been covered in a red aura. Marked by The Syndicate, the assassin has found Emile. They move past Dropper as she watches, entering a room two curtains away. The ultimate skill has been running for around twenty minutes so she has time. If his business draws on longer than she expects, she can cut it short herself anytime she wants. Knowing the he came from the main entrance, it''s obvious that Emile has only just arrived and, being the married man he is, shouldn''t want to stay here longer than necessary. Leaning against his room, one she''s already confirmed to have no occupants or exits, the Assassin relaxs and bides her time. Which she doesn''t have to do for long. Less than five minutes later, a dissatisfied employee exits with a frown. She probably didn''t look like that inside, but facial expressions say everything. Dropper watches the woman control herself before returning to the reception area, leaving the corridor empty once more. A smile crosses her face as she slides through the curtain, only to be replaced with a scowl upon seeing the naked ass crack of her target. Face down and huffing like he''s just done 10k, Dropper doesn''t even hesitate as she produces a blade of shadow and removes Emile''s head. With his head removed, his body covers the room as Dropper slips into a shadow. Once the eruption has finished, she slips back in and uses the severed head to paint the the dungeon symbol with his blood. "There are so many despicable people in this world. It''s a good job Master has us to clean this place up." Shaking her head at the pitiful sight sprawled on the bed, Dropper stores Emile before slipping back into the shadows and teleports into the alley. She leaves the area with little urgency and even stops to purchase a steamed bun with some of Emile''s cash before continuing down the road to rejoin her companions. As she approaches, an awkward atmosphere prevents a proper discussion as everyone has something in their mind. Dropper''s is due to the many different events she witnessed whilst searching for her target. Light and Sophie are still somewhat flustered thselves from their small, but brief moment of passion. "Mission complete, let''s go home," shaking away vivid images of what other people consider to be fantasy, Dropper marches off and doesn''t stop to be followed. Light and Sophie, not wanting to be left behind, quickly hurry after her. As they leave Dune, saddled up for the awkward journey home, the same atmosphere from when they reunited continues all the way out of town. Once they''re far enough away, Dropper finally turns to Light and asks what''s troubling him. "Nothing! What''s bothering you?" he answers instantly, turning five shades redder than he should be able to. Sophie almost turns the same shade, but smiles dreamily at her earlier moment of courage. It turns out that she finds pursuing a man is far more exciting than dungeon diving. "We''ll always have Dune," she says to herself in blissful content whilst hugging into Light from behind. This doesn''t escape Dropper''s attention and she raises her eyebrows at her partner. "I''ll tell you later. After a food-few cold ones at Talia''s," he smiles to himself. -Light, Dropper, and Sophie, Dungeon Assassins.
As I walk down the street, everyone I pass by smiles and salutes my spirit form. I don''t expect this type of treatment from my family, but it sure is nice to be appreciated. Especially with what I''ve just had to endure. Heading back inside my mountain after once again attempting to turn The Hay Bale into something more, I can''t help but grumble miserably. That damn feature just won''t change. What''s up with it?
Maybe it will forever remain as what it is now or maybe the next upgrade will fix it.
But isn''t it meant to have changed already? Everything else gets at least a little bit better after a single upgrade, some even surpass expectations. This one hasn''t improved in any way whatsoever! It''s just stupid. After spending 1200DP in total, The Hay Bale is now a tier-four feature and I still don''t have anything, except a single bale of hay, to show for it. That better be the nicest tasting hay in the world and it better be able to make my horses fly or something after a single mouthful. Who am I kidding? It won''t even last a day once the stable is full. I wouldn''t be so flustered and concerned over the waste of my DP if I could at least know what to expect from the feature. I don''t even know what it does. Unfortunately, The System seems to be playing silly buggers again as this is all I get whenever I check the status. Enjoying the story? Show your support by reading it on the official site.
The Hay Bale: Upgrade: 1280DP Error: Insert description here... Reward: Please stand by
I can''t even question it because I don''t know what to say. She has to be doing it on purpose though, right? I''m sure that even Me would shrug at this one if he were capable of it. Maybe I should call myself the Question Queen. The Queen of Questions. Her Royal Questionableness. I can''t help but laugh as I make up silly names for myself. As I debate the many disadvantages of spending 1280DP on the Hay Bale''s next level, I float up to the central tower on the Academy of Dark Arts'' roof. This place is the best and I''ve been spending most of my free time here recently as I can see every part of the city. You can usually tell when I''ve spent a prolonged period of time in one place these days. In this case it''s because a few adorable teddies are sitting on top of a Royal Futon, enjoying the view before I even got here. How nice of them to wait. The sunset in the distance is extremely bright and the orange light forces me to shield my face with the Dire-Wolf beside me. As I stare at the teddy protecting me from the sun, two thoughts come to mind. One is insignificant compared to the other, by a mile, but it still manages to make me shake a little. Trixie, the stunningly-majestic third-floor boss, is the strongest type of wolf I currently possess. What caused a shiver to run down my spine was the idea of unlocking the next tier of wolves. I mean, purchasing them in the first was hard enough. Especially with how scary the initial pack looked. They got shunned, sent away and ignored, until Trixie was summoned. Although, it''s probably a good job she''s a stunner. I could have been completely thrown off the idea if a gigantic, black wolf with saliva dripping off its fangs appeared. The second and, by far most significant, thought I had, is that I can actually see outside the boundaries of the land I own. When did that happen?
When did what happen?
I can see. I mean, I can see outside the dungeon.
I''m still not following you. We are outside now.
Not outside the mountain. Outside the dungeon. I can see the sunset, Me. I can see the forest and hills in the distance. I can actually see! It''s got to be the spirit form, right? It''s the only new thing I''ve unlocked recently that it can be.
The only new thing? Spiritual Presence is the only new skill you have acquired recently. You have opened up many other new things however.
Wait. So it''s not my spirit form?
It''s most certainly your spirit form!
So... Why were you talking about those other things?
I was trying to enlighten you. The term thing can have a very broad meaning.
You trying to be a smart-ass sounds more like it.
Smart-ass?
It doesn''t matter. Consider me enlightened. What matters is that I can see further than I should be able to as a dungeon. That''s what matters. The river that I was told about by my scouting parties, the one that runs adjacent to me, is clearly noticeable as it reflects the evening sun''s light of its surface. Blinding me even more, I regret looking in that direction and curse my form before covering my mouth with a hand. I didn''t mean that. Now that I''ve grown and people can see me, life''s awesome. It was just a slip of the tongue.
Your skills can''t hear you, Abi.
No? Well, a certain someone can and I could do without her jiggling things around. It''s already hard enough to keep a level mind, I don''t need more adding to my plate. My current goal, aside from the other half dozen that have temporarily been put on hold, is to purchase my way to that river. I know owning the land doesn''t make a difference in how far humans will travel, but it does make a diffence if they''re staying inside the dungeon when they travel there. You''ve gotta spend points to make points in this game. Plus, every piece of land that gets acquired contributes immediately to the amount of points I receive on a daily basis. Wildlife might not count for much, but whilst they''re on me they make sure to pay their rent. The river should be more than enough water for a few thousand people and if I want my town to be self-sufficient, heading that way seems mandatory. I''ll probably purchase a few water sources from my list aswell, but they''ll be more centered around the residential areas. This doesn''t mean I''ll blindly neglecting other features in pursuit of reaching the river though. Just a few plans will be put in the back burner, but upgrades, evolutions and everything else will still flow like that water. Plus, every building other The Retreat, The Hay Bale and The Sparring Grounds, are all third-tier features now. I can''t even use some of them yet, but at least they''re up to standard. It''s even better that they don''t look like they''ll collapse at any minute. The forge has been placed in the town with the rest of the amenities because, where else would expect to find a forge? The stable, Hay Bale, Chicken Coop and Field of Fertility, have all been moved to the outskirts. I don''t need Wheeler turning up with a crowd full of carriages big enough to congest the small amount of streets I have right now. Once we''re a lot bigger, I can intersperse stables and the likes inside the town. Instead of being stuck on backed up roads, I''d like them to experience the joy and wonder of what I''ve created here I foot. It''s not everyday a new city pops up out of nowhere offering a free place to live, not one as advanced as mine is anyway. This place may not be half as large as some of the major cities, but it will grow over time and there''s no doubt it will catch the eye of many, many people. Expert craftsmen is definitely the right lie to start with if anyone asks.
Why do you need to lie now? You didn''t lie to the Expert, or to Katrina.
I don''t know, Me. It''s quite stressful being in charge, you know? I feel like I need to plan for every possibility, especially the ones that I don''t want to happen. I want to avoid another Categoriser setting foot inside my mountain. There''s nothing I can do to stop them from stepping on dungeon ground out here, but I''ll be damned if they think that I''ll let them find my secret hole and enter it. My inner sanctum is only for my family and maybe a few select people who I could use to help me out further down the line. Wheeler, Aaron, and Sophie are the first three faces that spring to mind as they''ve already been inside when I was still accepting guests. I''m officially closed for business as a dungeon for the moment. The prospect of becoming a dungeon town has far more advantages than a regular old dungeon does. It also benefits my primary objective perfectly. I can help the humans living here, or even passing through, by secretly listening in on their conversations and then taking Syndicate action. It''s perfect. With my population being mostly made up of my own family, Varona will be the safest city on Tironia. Chapter 37 : Light, Camera, Action Light, Dropper, and Sophie return from their mission earning the best rewards they could from The Syndicate. Depositing Emile''s corpse on the way, I gain access to the Baker class and unlock a bakery feature to go with it. Ali''s was all that was needed early on. Now that I''ve got a full scale town in swing outside my mountain, more places to eat and a bigger selection is definitely a must. Not that The Chef won''t still be a hit. I can almost guarantee that people will be queuing just to get a reservation when they arrive.
Humans seem to like Ali''s food. Why do you need another food feature?
People like to have a bit of variety in their lives. Or so I remember. Plus, Ali can''t possibly keep up the demand once the supply out grows it. Even if I give her more staff, the restaurant can only seat so many at a time. The hard-working trio enjoy a drink whilst I pick out a spot for the bakery. Just outside the residential area, close to the Retreat and the rest of the shops is where it gets placed. Summoning a Shadow-Walker-turned-Baker to complete the feature, I upgrade it so that it conforms to the rest of town''s standard. Receiving his title, I cheap out once again and name him after it. The Baker can''t offer contracts, but his pastries do give stat boosts so it''s an even trade off. I chuck a couple more Shadow Bakers into the mix and leave them with the man himself to name. Watching The Baker hard at work, after doing a much better job than I would have done naming his staff, I loiter at the door in my new form and enjoy the delectable scents coming from The Baker''s Oven. I love being able to smell again. Life''s great.
What''s so appealing about it?
It''s hard to explain. Certain smells are just the best. Fresh baked bread for example is one of those things that just can''t be described. Hopefully, Me, one day you will experience it for yourself.
It is highly unlikely as I don''t possess a soul and am just a system. I will never possess a body to be able to experience, what you describe as, wonderful smells.
You never know, Me. With the way things are going, I wouldn''t be... What''s that? As we''re talking, I feel a malicious and oppressive presence appear at the outskirts of town. Stronger than anyone we''ve had so far, at least I can tell its not a Catergoriser by the lack of willpower they possess.
Four people have entered you.
All at once? The evil-intended baby will doesn''t stay where it is for long and immediately heads into town.
Now is not the time for dirty jokes, Abi.
I know, I know. It''s just nerves, that''s all. Informing my family about the probable threat, I warn them to be careful and teleport to the Retreat. As well as the hard-working trio that have just returned, there are also a few other patrons enjoying a cold ale at Talia''s. Their presence gives me assurance since we''re stronger than the last time an unannounced douchebag visited. However, if someone followed The Syndicate team back, then they can clean up there own mess. "Did anyone follow you home?" my gaze falls immediately on Light, who gulps on cue. Coughing so that he doesn''t choke on his ale, he eventually gets himself under control before answering. "No, Master," he bows to the air in front of him, or at least that''s how I presume it looked to Sophie. I don''t have time to worry about her right now. It wouldn''t have easier if she hadn''t foregone the conversation with Wheeler only to hover around a certain Shadow Walker. "Are you sure?" Sometimes, Light needs prompting twice. His memory is like a sieve, you can tell him something and two minutes later it''s gone. "Master? Who are you talking to?" not expecting the person that she''s infatuated with to be crazy, Sophie also drops a question Light''s way catching him off guard. "Yes Master, I am sure. There was an... Altercation in Dune with a strange man, but we saw no one on the way back. Sophie, I will explain everything later," "I just want to be yours, Light. I don''t care who knows! Or if you''re crazy. As long as you can protect me, I''ll always be yours," going red in the face, Sophie''s eyes never leave Light''s. WOW! That was a bold declaration. You go, girl! I think I quite like Sophie, Me.
That''s not important right now.
Oh, yeah. As I''m reminded of the situation, the doors to Retreat are blown inwards. Wood and splinters fly everywhere as Talia glares at the intruders before composing herself and carrying on with her task. "So many. So many," stepping through the destroyed wordwork, the man laughs as he enters the Retreat. He''s followed by three women and behind them, two of my Vagabonds stand motionless. Their pupils have rolled back and inky the whites of their eyes is visible. What''s wrong with them, Me?
It seems as though they''re under his control somehow.
Mia and Autumn are the last Vagabonds I have left, everyone else having been upgraded to Shadow Walkers over the last few weeks. It pains and infuriates me to see this wierdo controlling the weaker members of my family. "I know you." The man actually seems shocked to see Light. Pointing cross the bar, the Shadow Walker smiles smugly as if he know something the others don''t. It makes me a little angrier because I swear he just told me nobody followed him home. If that''s the case, how does he know this stupid dude that just damaged my property? He scowls at Light. Anger and hatred flash across his face as the man''s breathing becomes erratic. "Isn''t that''s the guy from Dune, Light. Hey, ass hole. It was an accident. He didn''t mean to knock you over and even said sorry," Sophie backs up her man. "Sorry? Sorry?! You will be sorry. When I rip your arms off and get these bitches to heal them back just so I can do it again, then we''ll see how sorry you are!" Spit goes everywhere as the crazy bastard rages. The women behind don''t look very impressed, however. Neither do they look happy about being here and dragging into the conversation. Well, one of them does, but she looks to be just as crazy as the guy ranting. Either way, I can''t help but feel super calm as this delusional douchebag spits venomous insults inside the Retreat. Which is great. Its nice not having to feel worried over every little thing. Normally, I get mega emotional and that reflects through the people I''ve summoned. Talia is filling glasses and collecting mugs. Just like it''s a regular weekday and as though there wasn''t a lunatic acting dickish by the entrance, the Taskmaster chats happily with the patrons as she makes her rounds. Some of the customers didn''t even turn to look when the door imploded. Even though some of the debris almost hit them, barely anyone was phased by the grandiose entrance. Nor by the man imposing himself upon their good time. Dropper even yawned. The man vanishes from the splintered wreckage of the entrance in the blink of an eye. One of his companions starts cheering him on, but she receives a dirty look from the woman next to her. The third is in tears and I can''t help but wonder what''s going on with their party. As I''m trying to understand the will of the troublemaker''s nervous companions, he appears behind Dropper and presses a knife into her throat. Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. "Nobody move. Not unless you want this one to die here. Now, tell me where the entrance to the dungeon is and I might just spare a few of you." His hostage scenario doesn''t get the reaction he was expecting as Talia moves away to refill another mug. Light even bursts out laughing whilst pointing at the source of his humour, the fool with the blade. With the knife held against her throat, Dropper still manages to take a large swig of ale before placing her mug on the counter. Sophie, along with the man''s slaves, seem to be the only people worried by the situation. Letting the buzz settle, Dropper belches but activates cancel sound before anyone hears. She then grips the man''s wrist so tight that he can''t escape. Even as he tries to pull away, his efforts are in vain and the whole scene looks more comical than threatening. "What the hell?" Light is laughing even louder and panic is written across the would-be murderer''s face as Dropper slowly lifts his arm over her head. "Hi," turning to face him she smiles, right before planting a headbutt square in the middle of his forehead, sending him flying across the room into an unoccupied table from the force. "What the fuck!? How is she so strong? You said this one would be the easiest one yet! What? So you''re fuckin'' lying to me then?" His hood falls back as he staggers to his feet, revealing his pointed ears as the elf screams at himself. Oh shit. He''s an elf. What''s his problem though? Is he crazy?
I... Don''t know. It''s strange, I can almost sense something else in him.
"You silly bitch, that fucking hurt. Now you''re all going to die. Kya, boost me!" "Yes, Master," the only supporter cheering him on so far casts one of her spells. A green light envelopes the elf before a second spell covers him in red and he starts laughing again. Healing and attack boost spells. I''d recognise them anywhere because Anya use to use them use frequently on us. Also, are all elves this crazy? I''ve never actually met one before.
Elves don''t monopolise dungeons like humans do. Their aim is to destroy all dungeons since they follow the doctrine, or prophecy as they call it, handed down by a different God to the one that created The System.
So they''re all crazy then. Although, I don''t get a bad feeling from those two that haven''t moved. I have been known to be wrong though. Before he has a chance to use his attack boost, Hiroshi finds himself caught in mid-air from a sweep kick performed by Dropper. He is then punched through the air by Light, past his own companions and back out of the entrance he destroyed on the way in. His airtime finally ends when he hits the house across the street and is embedded into the wall. An eruption of blood is choked up from his throat and he falls to the floor. "What is it with these... Monsters?" Prying himself free, the elf lands on the floor and coughs up blood. He looks up just in time to see Dropper kick him before she gets smaller and smaller as he flys through the air once more. In place to receive the pitch, Light rolls his shoulders and then stretches to avoid pulling a muscle. Before the elf touches the ground, he''s volleyed back down the street towards Dropper. Wow, that''s a crazy kind of cruel.
Quite.
As I watch Light and Dropper kick our invader up and down the street, his entourage wears a mismatch of emotions. With their hoods down, it turns out out that two of them are elves and the third is human. Which is strange since humans don''t really get on with elves. Hell, they barely get on with each other, never mind a species that openly hates them. The elf that granted him the attack boost looks furious as she shakes her fists in outrage. She also appears to be too scared to join in,so stop acting tough if you''re not going to do anything you hussey. The human in the middle seems to be having some type of internal crisis and is crying her eyes out. Stranger than strange, which is the name of the game around here, the redhead elf is rubbing her back and offering her comfort. She even looks happier than the two partaking in the fun as she watches the male elf being kicked back and forth like a tussball. "Master, I have returned!" As if on cue, my headache returns and his bellowing can be heard at the end of the street. Before I can even sigh, Noir rises out the shadows between Light and Dropper, kicking the elf high in the air and pausing their game. "Who is this fool that dares to challenge my master!" Planting his spear in the ground, the Shadow Walker sticks his chest out and starts laughing. "Oi. Get over here, Noir!" Hearing my voice, Prince Loudmouth immediately appears next to my new form and salutes. "Master! You look beautiful," even though I know you''re about to say something stupid, I''ll take that compliment. Thanks, Noir. I''m awesome, right? "Please, let my mighty weapon penetrate the foul scum that desecrates you." Honestly, I don''t think that he can string a sentence together without it implying something else. "Mighty weapon? Penetrate? Don''t you think you''re cutting it a bit close there pal?" I try and scowl but because of my size I must look adorable doing so. Noir''s smile only grows larger. "It has been days since my tip has entered the fleshy insides of another being..." The sound of the elf''s bones breaking as he hits the floor, knocks me out off the building rage towards Noir''s poor choice of words. I''m swear he does it on purpose. The elf wheezes in pain, informing us that he didn''t die upon impact which isn''t the strangest thing that''s happening. Even with how high Noir launched him. "C-Can''t... Kill them. Don''t want... To die. Help me. T-Take control. I don''t care anymore. I just... Don''t want to die!" A red miasma starts to leak out from his wounds and the elf screams even louder. His bones snap back into place, tearing through his protuded skin as ligaments and muscle sew themselves together. An unruly noise forces everyone to cover their ears as the elf''s scream pushes them back a step. His body contorts and cracks into place as he''s forced up like a puppet. Even though he looks like he''s held up by string, the elf does seem to be stronger than he was before. I can even feel a different presence coming from him now. It''s strange. It''s like he''s a Dungeon Core, but also not at the same time. I know, it doesn''t make sense. When does anything around here though? Either way, I''m slightly relieved that Prince Loudmouth is by my side. For all his faults, he doesn''t mess around when it comes to protecting me. "Now I will show you true power!" Power tripping, the elf threatens my family as a small orb of darkness appears above his palm. Growing rapidly the spell continues until it''s the size of a large ball and doesn''t stop there. It continues to grow in size as I notice Light and Dropper playing rock, paper, scissors. I''m still not that worried since my family number in the hundreds now, but what the hell are they doing? I assume Light won since he''s doing the oddest victory dance I''ve ever seen. Dropper huffs before disappearing into the shadows. "Die, you fucking handsome bastard!" Shouting a complimentary insult as he hurls the ball of shadow magic at Light, his laugh is cut short after noticing the spell hasn''t moved an inch from its position. He tries to throw it once again, but it still won''t follow his command. "Oh... You thought you were in control of that shadow magic. That''s so cute," Dropper calls down to the confused elf from her position on the roof as the shadow ball fizzles out into nothing. "Right? Isn''t this guy just peachy? Hey, Elf. That was a spell from the Vagabond tier and we mastered those weeks ago. Trying to use dark magic against us was a poor choice. In fact, let me show you a spell from the next tier up." Light grins as shadow after shadow start weaving together. Instead of a ball, a black diamond that looks almost Core-like appears in his hand. Containing an abundance of magic, the power rushing from it surges down the street. "I feel like you need the extra touch." Light smiles and wraps his hand around the jewel, releasing the magic within. Immediately, the elf''s world changes. Instead of being on the street, he finds himself inside a large dome. Looking around, he can see the walls are covered in spikes and the only exit is at the end of a long wooden bridge. Through the door, he can see Light still standing on the same street in the middle of town. Another man is behind him, pointing and laughing as he swings a spear around. His hair reminds Hiroshi of Aura, reigniting his rage towards the stubborn elf. Funnily enough, neither Light or Noir are provoking the elf as I know what skill my Shadow Walker has used. They went over them briefly, but this one I remember because it''s a trap. Just like the ones I place in the dungeon, only several times better, Light''s magic is an illusion that causes the target to force their own death. After witnessing whatever the skill uses to rile the target up, they try to escape as common sense would dictate. Through the door. But... When is a door not a door?
Is this really the time?
Nope. The correct answer was, when it''s a big-ass spear waiting to impale you. And impale him it does. Not only does it gore a gigantic hole through his chest, it carries the elf right into the blanket of spikes. Becoming real after he activated the trap, they close around the already dead Horoshi. All that we saw after Light crushed the black diamond was the elf being riddled with holes. It was strange to watch, but would have been even worse if I hadn''t known what was happening. Hitting the floor for a second time today, blood pools beneath the elf as his eyes turn cloudy. The end, I thought until one his elves blew herself up after running into the middle of the street. Fortunately, her daft attack was contained with some craft shadow magic by Carrie, who immediately looked at the other two interlopers. They shook their heads vigorously and wore pleasing smiles to be honest. Maybe they''re happy with how things turned out? He did seem pretty far gone that crazy bastard. I mean, who comes into a person''s home and picks a fight for no reason? Crazy people. That''s who. With the last lingering presence of evil dispelled from my dungeon, the dust settles and Light is shining the familiar colour that indicates evolution. How strong was that elf? "How is that possible? We were closest to the next evolution! How did get there before me?" Noir is as baffled as I am, although he seems more upset about it. Not that I''m taking his side either, but Light was almost 30 levels behind Prince Loudmouth. If that experience rocketed Prince Sillybollocks to max level, then what is it going to do to me? Wait a minute. Light''s max level!
A new monster has been unlocked: Assassin: 80DP
Chapter 38: Im Missing Something Sometimes there isn''t that much to do in my dungeon, especially when my DP runs dry. Yet, whenever there is a task that requires my attention, there always seems to be a queue forming behind it. This has become one of those times. As I stare at the hole-ridden remains of the elf on the street, I start with what I assume to be the quickest and easiest of the tasks I''ll take on today. It also happens to be one that I''ve been waiting for so it has been automatically bumped up to the number one spot on my list. I hit confirm on the blue-haired demon waiting in front of me and the evolution process begins. This might be the easiest thing I do today, but my spirit heart and jade-green Core beat in tandem at the prospect of Light''s power level rising even higher. After it has ended, the upgraded Rogue looks no different than before yet at the same time I feel winded. It''s as though the air has been knocked out of me, even though I don''t technically breathe. What was that?
You have just used Divinities Creation.
What? How? Ah, crap. Nevermind, I''ve just realised. Stupid Abi! "Did it work?" I furrow my brow as the idea of even more wasted DP doesn''t sit well with me. Thoughts of the Hay Bale still linger in my mind as I examine Light''s unchanged features. "Yes, Master," placing his fist on his chest, Light bows to me and Sophie appears quietly by his side now the action is over. It must be really strange for her at the minute. Although, when Light tells her what''s really going on here, I doubt she will even be phased by it. She seems to have a one-track mind that one and has already firmly stated her opinion. "Really? You don''t look any different. Why do you still have the same clothes on? That''s not normal. What''s changed?" As I call up his status sheet, Light lists the new tier-four skills he has unlocked and I read through their descriptions like last time. Prince Sillybollocks also tells me that he''s acquired a new set of armour. It didn''t manifest, but is safely stored away with his weapon and can be equipped in under a second if he needs it. As if I wasnt jelly enough, he even went and beat Noir and Carrie to the punch. Neither seem impressed and I think we should all join some kind of group together. Then again, I''ll have to kick them out when they rank up because I''ll be just as jelly of them. Sophie listens to Light''s words like he''s the Shadow messiah and I almost feel the same way. Damn, he''s cool. I''m not above admitting my jealousy, but I really wish I could use some of the skills I''ve just read. And I thought this was going to be quick and easy. I could easily spend half a day thoroughly combing through Light''s stats and skills but I don''t have the time to do that right now. Not when there''s still more to do that needs my immediate attention. The women that arrived with the elf, who I kinda forgot about and accidentally used up my daily allowance of Divinity''s Creation, have both been moved to the Retreat and are next on my to-do list. There was three women, but one of them... Yeah, she just boom. It was weird. Anyway, let''s get some answer from the two remaining accomplices. The redhead elf in rags is called Aura and has been with Hiroshi for the last two months. Tilly, the human Cleric, has only been with them this last week. After unfortunate circumstances led to both women become Hiroshi''s property, the were forced to follow him here or they would have been punished. The elf''s eyes are crimson red and remind me of Noir, however, she lacks that boisterous personality that goes part and parcel with who he is. She''s that resigned that all I can see is Kat. Even though they look nothing alike. Tilly doesn''t look much better, but you tell her spirit still has some Oomph to it. Aura... She''s going to need some work. "Why did you attack us?" Giving it a go, I''m not surprised to get zero responses. Well, a snicker came from behind, but I''m trying not to dismantle people today so I''ll let it slide. Using my recently-upgraded Assassin, Prince Sillybollocks, I question the women. Light''s tone can''t keep their attention though and they continue to look outside. The Retreat''s on my list. Divinity''s Presence has already been used today though, so it''s going to have to wait until later. "We didn''t. Neither of us wanted to come here. That bastard Hiroshi just wouldn''t let me die. If it wasn''t for Tilly showing up..." Eventually, I get an answer, until the redhead breaks down and the Cleric has to take over. "He killed my... My friends. M-my family. I thought he was going to do the same thing here. How? How did you beat him so easily? How did you get so strong?" Wiping tears away, Tilly''s bright blue eyes gleam at Light in hope and she catch the ire of Sophie in doing so. "Your sob stories won''t work here! Answer my man''s question. Why did you attack us?" making sure to point out that Light is taken, Sophie pushes for my answer. . I knew I liked her. Stick to the point, Light. "We didn''t attack you! Hiroshi did. He was getting stronger by absorbing dungeon cores. I''m pretty sure that''s why he made us come to this town. He said that he could get more abilities here after he found the core," the redhead answers honestly and her words leave me wondering. So he was sort of like an elven Categoriser in one way? Except he craved the dungeon''s power as well as their destruction. Why does this shit keep happening? Honestly, I can''t wait for the day when people turn up and don''t want to kill me. "Tilly, right?" Light asks the blonde human who has managed to get herself under control. "Y-yes, that''s me," wiping her eyes, the Cleric looks at the elf beside her and fear takes her, "She isn''t like the other two. Please... Don''t kill her because she''s an elf. Aura is kind and my friend." The waterworks renew on both women and Sophie rolls her eyes as she pleads her case to Light. Before she can finish, Aura inserts herself into the conversation. "Tilly! It''s ok. After what I went through, death will be a release from this shitty torment of a life. The body''s freedom is not the same as the mind''s. You weren''t... With him as long as I was and I...I-I never liked men in the first place... " No one says a word at Aura''s confession until Tilly wraps her arms around the elf and embraces her. Well... I definitely don''t think they mean us harm. That said, I''m at a loss for words like most of the people watching. How do people who find themselves in the most unfortunate situations manage to end up in my dungeon? Is this what The System means by help humanity? Do I need to become their shrink? Is that my job? If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. Luckily, Kat appears from nowhere, embracing both women at once tackling this problem for me. Her upbeat attitude also brings me out of my funk. "It''s OK? Is that what you really think? Don''t be ridiculous. People like us have to stick together. We can empower each other so that the next time some scumbag piece of shit tries something similar, we can smash their faces in instead!" Kat squeezes the girls tight and my mouth drops open at her violent words. Where did that come from? "Abi, please can I talk to these two alone?" I close my mouth as Kat is looking at me as though she is wanting for an immediate response. "Er... Well... I suppose so? Do you need someone to go with you? Just in case?" Looking around the Retreat, everyone is suddenly avoiding eye contact and no one wants to volunteer for the task I made up on the spot. "No, I''ll be alright. Thank you, Abi. Come on girls, let''s go somewhere more private. Talia, will you bring some drinks upstairs please? Is that ok?" Talia nods to Katrina who disappears upstairs with Tilly and Aura, as I glare at the unhelpful drinkers around the room. "Big load of help you guys are," I call out jokingly only to earn the attention of Noir, who races over to me. "Master! I am almost level 80! I can feel the power swelling inside me. It''s almost ready to burst," I raise my fist at Noir, but Carrie appears from his shadow and places her hand on the shoulder of Prince Loudmouth faster than I can clonk him one. "Come. The Master is busy and you could do without a scolding for once," Carrie bows her head and pulls her partner through the shadows behind her, leaving me to move on to my next task. The elf. Almost level 80. Pfft. Didn''t see him volunteering to look after Kat. As I walk up the street toward the elf, I absorb the rubble around me and clear the path on the way. The invading elf''s body is lifeless, gray and still full of holes. How many dungeons did he destroy?
I don''t know. Maybe you can connect to them somehow.
How do I do that?
I don''t know? It was just a suggestion?
We''re forever in uncharted territory aren''t we, Me?
You could absorb the body, as you usually would.
Setting the limits and exploring the unknown, that''s us. Let''s do it! Although, it''s not like I was going to let it rot. Psyching myself up, I touch the body of the dead elf instead of absorbing him but nothing happens. Not wanting to give up straight away, I try to remember what his will felt like when he first entered my dungeon. It''s not too hard as it wasn''t that long ago and the fact that it was maliciously sinister makes it easier. He wanted to be at the top of the food chain and his will clearly carried that sentiment with it. Mixed in with that evil presence are three smaller ones that went unnoticed until now. None have a will of their own anymore and instead they followed the host''s commands unchallenged. It makes me wonder if that''s how humans get their powers from Cores? They make us none sentient and rip our spirit from the dungeon. As I get a better feel for the three residual souls inside the elf, I sense a sort-of kinship between us and can feel them slowly pulling towards me. I watch in amazement as three distinct wisps leave his body in three. Red, brown and green, all I can think is that they look like me when I''m using Manifestation. I don''t know how they managed to stay inside him, or even how they didn''t disappear, but as they enter my body I''m extremely grateful they didn''t.
New loot has been unlocked: Refer to your system guide to view all... 873 loot items New monsters have been unlocked: Refer to your system guide to view all... 106 new monsters New features have been unlocked: Multiple scenery settings have been unlocked Various floor templates have been unlocked A large number of building customisable features have been unlocked Please refer to your system guide to view all... 485 new features Passive Skill Regeneration has reached... Error: Calculating value based on multiple core levels/number of present core souls + level of current DP regeneration Passive Skill Regeneration has reached Level 64: DP has increased to a rate of 32 per hour New skills have been acquired: Temptress of the Wind The Earth Sculptor Forger of Fire Error: A new skill has been been acquired: Soul Guide
Well... Where do I even begin? Even though I could sense our connection, it''s not like I thought I was going to earn anything from them. Let alone the amount I actually got. Isn''t that like cheating? Not that I''m complaining. If I thought I could spend a half day looking at Light''s stats page, how long could I spend reading my own!?
I don''t know what to say.
Ha! That makes two of us.
I was hoping you would be able to connect to their spirits and gain an insight into the lives of other Dungeon Cores. I did not expect you to receive the accumulation of their lives'' work.
I wasn''t actually expecting anything to happen. I thought the other Cores were long gone until I actually felt them. Even then, I was only expecting a little Terrortation session. Maybe witness how they died. Instead... I hit the Core''pot baby! Before I can remove my hand from the withered elf''s chest, his body turns to dust and disappears. Watching his ashes float away on the wind, I earn a nice peace of mind knowing the one who killed the three cores I absorbed is now gone from this world. It''s a shame his soul has already passed on. I could have used him as a test subject for the Soul Guide skill I just earned. There''s no way in hell I''ll be trying that one on myself first. Maybe I can get one of The Syndicate members to bring back a live subject before they kill them? Wait a minute! I''m missing something here. What is it? The elf''s body is gone. Taken away by the winds of fate and so to is his soul. I stand there feeling confused until realisation dawns on me. What happened to the insane amount of XP that I was supposed to receive? Light earned a ridiculous amount, so where''s mine?
You didn''t absorb the elf''s body.
But... But... I got all those monsters and features and stuff. Why didn''t I get the XP?
You connected to the remnants of the Core''s lingering around inside the elf. In doing so, you acquired the monsters, features and skills that they had unlocked over the course of their lives.
But... What about the XP? Even though I earned an incredible boost in almost every way that matters in the life of a Dungeon Core, I''m still wounded that I missed out on that tasty XP from the elf. Who knows how much I could have gotten? Maybe the three Dungeon Core souls inside his body when he died was the reason Light levelled up so explosively. I could have really done with some of that.
It is a shame but you cannot let the loss stop you from moving forward.
Yeah, I know. Last thing we need around here right now is a wailing session. "Noir, Carrie," calling the two Shadow Walkers that are closest to evolution, they appear from the shadows. Both salute and take a knee before Noir opens his mouth to speak. A quick raise of my eyebrow promptly closes it, which shows progress on Noir''s part, and I explain what I called them for. I want them to head into the woods around me and bring home a bad guy. I know the phrase ''bad guy'' is a bit vague, but I don''t want them overlooking thieves just because they aren''t killing people. So bad guy is how I chose to describe the type of person I want for my experiment. "The woods are actually quite safe Master. It may take a while but we will return as soon as we can. Come Noir," for the second time today, Carrie puts her hand on Noir''s shoulder and they both disappear as Noir bellows my name until the shadow-portal closes behind them. I still can''t believe I didn''t earn any XP. "I''m going to my tower. Call me if you need anything," I call out to no one, knowing that everyone of my family heard me, and float off to my futon in the Academy tower. Chapter 39: Soul Guide It''s been a relatively quiet week since Hiroshi the elf rolled into town and met a swift death without handing XP my way No tears were shed for the shady bastard, not after the dark-haired slave blew up at least, and not a single fuck was given. Bad guys are bad guys. It''s just that simple. Especially when they don''t give out XP.
Are you still going on about that?
Even though it''s been a quiet week, it''s certainly been a frustrating one. Soul Guide is not the type of skill I expected it to be. That doesn''t mean it''s useless, but it''s a far cry from the awesome move that I was hyping it up to be in my mind. Although now that I think about it, the name makes a lot more sense to me. More so since I took the time to read the lengthy description.
Soul Guide: Determine whether an individual is worth redeeming by assessing their true nature Reflected by the actions taken in life, the colour of an individual''s soul dictates the potential outcome when undergoing the Cycle of Reincarnation These are not set in stone as outside source are able to interfere with this program Souls are measured on a scale and everyone starts neutral Exemplary souls are sent to... Error#... With their memories in tact, they can... Error#... To further better themselves On the other hand, Souls who find themselves on the opposite end of the scale have a 75% chance to be reincarnated as dung whilst retaining all their memories Red: Destined to be dung in their next life, this soul holds no value and should be immediately sent to the reincarnation cycle Orange: With a 50/50 chance of ending up like the reds, a complete overhaul in life needs to be carried out before they move on to the next Yellow: By far the best of the worse, these souls are acting out for juvenile reasons and need course correction before they undertake the cycle Grey: A neutral soul is not classed good or bad and is the baseline for every living thing on Tironia Grey souls have the potential to go either way but will still enter the reincarnation cycle even if the colour has not improved upon death Green: The first steps towards... Error#... have been taken and with guidance this soul will progress to the next level -Certain actions may still lower the colour of green souls Blue: Continuously striving to reach... Error#... this soul is almost ready for the next level -Only extreme actions will lower the colour of this soul Purple: Continuously performing deeds worth merit, and/or self sacrifice, this exemplary soul is ready to be harvested (at the earliest convenience) and is guaranteed to the reach the next level and sent to... Error#... Work hard to guide souls to their rightful destination and maybe your own soul will... Error#... One day
I''m getting sick of these skills, you know? Why is half of the description missing? And why do they have to be the pieces that I actually want to know? So yeah, Soul Guide lets me view the colour of a person''s soul and also throws a new job my way while it''s at it. Awesome... Not that I asked for the new position. Let''s be honest, I can barely keep up with what I''ve got going on now. Creating a brand new city when you haven''t attended the relevant classes is not an easy task. I say it all looks good and that everything is in the right place, but that is most definitely a biased opinion on my part. Once people start arriving, I''ll have to listen in on their conversations to find out what they think. Then I''ll use Divinities Creation to alter things here and there in Varona to better cater their needs. Haha, that''s right. They will be my architects and city planners. How clever is that?
How will you stop them from noticing the sudden changes?
That''s easy. Companies change their location from time to time so I''ll make them aware beforehand by putting a sign up.
A sign?
Yep. Signs do all the work for you. They tell people what''s going down in easy to understand sentences. For example, this building will be moving to the central market in two days. See, it''s easy to understand and has all the information they need.
And what if they ask for a reason behind the move?
Again, that''s another simple one. We say it''s better for business and leave it at that. Merchants do whatever they want anyway and they''re always trying to earn more than the next guy so it should sound plausible. Back to the original subject though, what am I going to do about Soul Guide? I don''t want another job, Me.
If it benefits your own soul in the process, I don''t see what the problem is. You already take care of the red and orange souls as it is. Maybe it would be wise to just ignore it.
I suppose I do already take down people in those categories. Ignore it, huh? Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings. It just doesn''t seem right though. Why do I have to harvest green-to-purple souls too? And at their earliest convince? What''s that about? Isn''t that the same as killing a great figure? I''ll definitely earn the Villainous Dictator title after that. What I want to know the most though is, where are they going? What''s the Error in the status about and what''s the next level? Was I not good enough during my first life that I didn''t get to go to the error place? I know I didn''t live the best, but still...
If I knew any of those answers, I would tell you, Abi. I''ve told you The System grants us knowledge so that we can help the Dungeon Core begin their life. She doesn''t give us all her knowledge, only what''s relevant.
Aha! So you finally admit that it''s a ''her''.
No... It''s just that you say it all the time so it''s more than likely rubbing off on me.
Ha. Haha. Hahahaha. Oh, it''s been a while since you cracked a good one like that, Me.
What do you mean? I wasn''t even trying. All I said was that it''s rubbing off... On... Me. Do you always have to be crass?
C''mon, Me. That was funny. Just wait, when you get that body, I''ll have you crying with laughter.
It''s unlikely. Also, you keep mentioning this body but I have to keep reminding you that I don''t have a soul so what you''re suggesting isn''t even possible.
Yeah, I know what you said, but I''ve got a plan now.
Abi. I mean this in the nicest possible way, but your plans usually have a tendency to involve three steps back, two side jumps, a circular staircase with a chainsaw, a lot of swapping around, and at best of times, a leap of faith.
Uff, that was pretty harsh, Me. I didn''t mean to upset you over the whole joke thing. I''m sorry.
I''m not upset. I was merely making a joke of my own.
Ohh. Yeah, I didn''t get it. I don''t get roasted too often these days. "I''ll be ready for the next time you want to roast me though," my spirit form winks, but I doubt Me saw it and ignore the failed attempt. The plan I mentioned actually involves the three other skills I earned from the remnants Cores. Cause that''s what we''re calling them. For some crazy reason, that can only be attribute to my previous breakdown in sanity, I reckon a skill can be created by combining all eight aspects of magic. One that I can use to create a body without a soul. Temptress of the Wind, The Earth Sculptor and Forger of Fire are the second step towards helping Me and hopefully myself. I already have Desecrator of The Dark which is fantastic because it means there are only four aspects left to collect. I''m not even worried about when I''ll get them really. I mean, I''ve been a Dungeon Core for just-over two months now and I''ve already got four. All-in-all that''s not a bad time frame to base my calculations on. Saying that I could earn the second half of skills in another two months isn''t just a pipedream. Which means the prospect of creating a physical body isn''t too far away. I can almost taste it.
What?
Ali''s! As I act daft and put off the fact that obtaining those skills will probably take longer than I anticipate, which is starting to seem more daunting than it did a minute ago, I look out at the town from the tower of the academy. The residential district sits off to my right. Rows of Hospitable Homes are spaced out evenly and paved pathways lead into the centre of town. There are parks between every second row of homes which add beauty to the area that I look down on from above. To my left is what I have dubbed ''The Artisan District''. Now featuring a few new craft buildings including but not limited to, a sawmill, a textile factory, a woodcutter hut and the forge. It doesn''t look as neat and presentable as the residential area. I''ll have to spruce it up and move things around again at some point in the foreseeable future. Past the artisan district, The High Cultivator and his men can be seen tending the fields. Even though they''re two plots of land away, I can still see them here and it just shows how tall the tower is. Closer to me, there are various groups milling around the streets engaged in all types of varied conversations. Some boast about the tributes they''ve brought back for me to absorb. Others talk about good night''s at Talia''s or new items they''ve picked up from Tara and Lara. Winning rhe popularity contest by a mile though, are discussions about Ali''s. It''s a killer. Scouts are coming and going from the city. There are that many of them now that I gave full control over the rota to Hana and Mira. They are The Commanders after all, it made sense to pit them in charge the parties.. With the town constantly expanding, my attention and focus is split between that many projects, it won''t be long before this place is a city. A small one maybe, but it''s still not far away. Unlike those skills. I know it might not seem like it, whilst I regally sit in my tower watching my subject live their lives, but there''s been a lot to do around here. There are even four humans living on my dungeon land currently. Well, three humans and an elf. It took some time but Kat managed to bring the two women around to her idea of a brighter future. That future meant sticking together and both of them decided to stay in Varona. I''ve got no complaints about it either. Other than having somebody move them every now and then so I do my thing, they''re not that bad. Since they''re not contracted to me either, I even earn a nice amount of DP from them. And even if they did arrive with that hate-filled elf, it''s not like they share his feelings. With Kat, Sophie, Tilly and Aura, I''ve just realised... I''ve never had this many Tironians inside me at once.
I can''t tell if that was a joke or not. Although, they''re not technically inside you.
In me, on me, same difference when it''s all said and done.
Quite. However, I believe it''s time to spend some of your points.
Yeah, I suppose it is. What should I do this time though? As I look upon the to-be-expanded town, I feel reluctant to continue adding to it right now. It''s just a bummer that there''s less than a handful of people and so many unoccupied buildings. Some of the carpentry features don''t even have dungeon workers yet. I should wait to add more buildings out here. I could do more features or improve the park areas, but Tilly and Aura in the residential area so I''ll wait till they go into town. Disappearing from the top of the tower, I manifest inside the Boss Room on the sixth floor. My Bronze Golem is sat against the wall at the back of the room and if I didn''t know he was the boss, I could easily mistake him for a strangely-constructed statue. "I''ve been neglecting this place recently, huh?" My question is mainly rhetorical but it also serves to announce my presence to the metal man. Rising from his place on the floor my guardian bows before me and mumbles garbled words that I fail to understand. As always though, his feelings carry through the dungeon connection and I know he''s happy to see me.
I''m struggling to say yes, even though I want too, since your dungeon is by far deeper than any other Dungeon Core of your age.
I''ve just been so focused on the town. I really want it to work so I''ve been giving it my full attention. Now that it''s amfoimg well for the moment, it''s time to get back to what kicked off my idea in the first place. My dungeon. It''s been a few weeks since I added any internal features to my mountain home. Six floors deep and with a small variety of monsters making their home inside me, I think it''s time for a new floor. Chapter 40: The Seventh Floor Tweedledee and Mystique are sitting at the center table inside Ali''s fine-dining establishment and it has a red tablecloth with white heart-shaped serviettes placed in a symmetrical pattern on top. Oblivious to this, and everything else around them, they both enjoy their time partaking in a delightful three-course meal made by The Chef herself. Earlier that day, Tweedledum had informed Ali of what was going to be happening inside her establishment that night. Being the person she is, Ali was happy to oblige and cater for the potentially first coupling of dungeon residents. As the two infatuated scouts talk and laugh in between meals, neither of them notice Dee''s companion, sitting in the corner of the busy restaurant. There''s no ulterior motives or hidden agenda, Tweedledum only has his best friend''s interests in mind. He may also be a little bit nosey. Lowering the menu so that he can peak over the top of it, Dum watches for a few seconds before he turns to his own pretend-date for the evening. "What do you think they''re talking about?" he whispers. "It''s hard to tell from so far away. If you would have chosen a table that was closer, perhaps we would be able to hear them," The blue-haired woman points out Dum''s mistake. "Damn. It''s too late to move now as well, he would definitely spot us. He''s got good instincts my partner," Dum smiles and peeks over his menu at Dee. "Well then, what do you suggest we do? Talia smiles at Dum''s smile causing his heart to jump as it did before. "Well, we... W-we could enjoy a meal together... Whilst observing their body language that is," Dum pulls his menu further in front of his already embarrassed face. "I''d like that, Dum," Talia smiles again at the man behind the menu. The evening went on and after a while Dum stopped watching Dee and instead, gave his full attention to Talia. He listened to her stories about the drunken customers that she would have to kick out of The Retreat from time to time and she listened to the exciting tales of his scouting missions. By the time dessert had been served, eaten, and taken away, both Dum and Talia were thoroughly enjoying each other''s company. Neither of them saw Dee or Mystique''s smiles as they held hands and left the restaurant. Dee did happen to notice his partner sitting in the corner with Talia but kept it to himself as he didn''t want to ruin their atmosphere, or spoil his own date. Dungeon Stories Volume 1
With my lonely Golem calmed down, I pop my head into Veris'' room to find Sweet C all alone. Even though Veris is the Boss of my dungeon, she leaves the Sweets in charge whenever she goes out to hunt. Since we aren''t accepting dungeon runs at the minute, her room is just infront of mine on the Seventh Floor. Right next to the Boss Room. I get it. It''s strange. And I''m still learning. Just because Veris is the Boss of the entire dungeon, hindsight is killing me over that, doesn''t mean this floor can''t have its own. Hence, Ian.
Ian? Really?
That''s right. As per, I forget to name the Iron Golem sat twiddling his thumbs. After rectifying past Abi''s mistake, I pop in to say hi to Colin. Although, I swear there''s something off about my Core Room. The King Mimic seems to be in a relatively good mood, relaxing by my Core. The chests I placed down, however, are scattered across the room in different locations. Funnily enough, it looks they''re all headed somewhere, yet none of them are moving. I mean, they are only chests after all. Is Colin playing with them? Aww, that''s so adorable.
Actually, he has...
Don''t ruin it, Me. It''s nice to see him happy. It''s not like Colin gets out often. Social event are the only time he ever leaves my Core Room. Again, I can''t help but be moved by my King Mimic. "Aww, are you my little protector? Well... You''re not so little anymore, but who''s a good defender. Colin. Colin is. That''s who. Are you OK? Do you want anything?" Colin jumps up and down. He gets giddy at the sound of his own name and is almost like a pet. He''s like the dog I never had!
He''s probably after more of your Core.
Me! Why''re you always so mean to Colin? It''s not like he''s out there eating people, is it?
He is a King Mimic, Abi. He''s now past the point of legendary and is most certainly not a dog.
He may aswell be. He certainly acts like one when he see me. It''s a good job saliva goes through me these days. Anyway, who can say no to that smile... Grin? Maw? Not me, that''s for sure. Summoning Colin a few more silver chests, ''cause chests are going to start getting expensive soon and I don''t need one of those pets; even if I do like to spoil him, I watch him pick one up and inspect it. Which is weird, but what isn''t, right? Leaving it at that, it''s time to crack on with what I came here for. Beginning the usual routine, a door appears behind Ian the Iron Golem. Who seems excited when I explain what''s going on. As the Boss of this floor, it''s his job to guard it. It''s probably why he looked so depressed when I arrived. He doesn''t have anything to guard. Poor Ian, no wonder he was twiddling his thumbs. Not a Floor Boss, or a Core Boss. At least he''s happy now. And he''s got a name. Giggling to myself as Me huffs a remark about my sense of naming, I drop my forms and enter the dungeon overview. Watching as the staircase drills down and a room opens up beneath to accommodate it. From here I''m able to customise the design, size and shape however I want, but I decide against using features from the Remnant Cores for this floor. May as well stick to what I know for now. Those features didn''t help the others Cores out in any way, did they?
Not necessarily, but I would suggest that you look through them in your downtime and maybe incorporate some of their designs into your own.
That''s not a bad idea. Once I''m out of DP, I''ll look them over. That said, I do want to try out one of these new elemental features. The room stops expanding once it reaches its maximum size. I decided to go with a square room, as usual. I don''t know why but they seem to be my favorite. Large rooms mean a lot of travelling back and forth for adventurers searching for the correct path. Not that I have any adventurers treading my dungeon yet. If I do ever find myself in that situation though, I need to make sure I''m thoroughly prepared. A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. As I think about the precautionary measures I''m taking against future events, nothing could have prepared me for what came next.
Error: First Time Absorption Bonus: 1DP Error: Defender Level 19 1XP Error: Cleric Level 18 1XP Error: Error: Error: A new class has been unlocked: Mage: 10DP A new subclass has been unlocked: Teacher New features have been unlocked: Mages Guild: 80DP Teleportation Stone: 1000DP A new skill has been unlocked: Light Bender
What the fuck!? "Abi?" A ghostly voice, one I know all too well, yet never expected to hear again, calls out to me against all the odds. "A-Anya? W-Where are you!?" as I look around the room, there''s nothing to be seen and I wonder if I''ve just lost my mind. If I thought I was going crazy when I became a Dungeon Core, then I don''t know what level of madness I''m on now. Am I going mad, Me?
No. I... I heard that as well. I do not know how but I definitely heard someone say your name.
. . That was Anya. My best friend. The problem is that she''s dead. "Abi?" again my name is called out from the empty air of the dungeon causing chills to run up my Core.
There is a chance that it could be related to whatever the error was that you just absorbed. You did unlock a new human-type class and I would make an educated guess that it was someone''s remains.
I remember the nightmare from my terrortation session all too well and the only people that I can think of are me, Anya and the bastard Kal. Does that mean that I''ve just absorbed myself? Is that even possible? Absorbing Anya and giving her the comfort of being at peace with me I can get behind. But Kal? Fuck that guy! Can''t I spit him back out?
Unfortunately not. It would also appear that all of the bodies were... less than fit for consumption, hence the small amount of XP and DP.
What do you mean ''less than fit'' for consumption?
There wasn''t much remaining of... Your friends.
Friend! Singular. Remember the bastard Kal I told you to watch out for? He was the level 19 Defender. On another note, I''m getting sick and tired of all these errors. For once, it would be nice to understand what''s actually happening to me. As always, my lack of knowledge and frustration run hand-in-hand alongside my excitement. Another elemental skill has been unlocked and it happened a lot sooner than I was expecting it to. Not only that but I unlocked the teaching role for my academy and the mage class alongside it. Ignoring the rather expensive Teleport Stone, the icing on the cake is an actual guildhall. How the hell did I get that? Maybe I''m the lucky dungeon?
The Mages Guild: 80DP All Mages register at the guild to ascertain what magic they specialise in although most people already know Int and Wis are boosted by 20% when a proficiency test is undertaken here
Oh, I''m so excited. "Abi?" Again the haunting voice of my best friend calls out to me, throwing me off my game. Do you think I could summon her? She is calling my name.
It is highly unlikely. Her soul should have already been reincarnated.
I huff in disappointment and finish off the Seventh floor layout. Multiple tunnels lead out of the main room and I fill each one with traps as I go. Even though I started with the goal of making the floor intruder ready, the voice that keeps calling out to me is really doing a number on my mind. "God''s damn it, Anya! What do you want from me?" The building pressure finally gets to me and I can''t stop myself from screaming out at the empty tunnel I''m in. Not that she replies. Just after I create the Boss Room, she calls out to me once again and, instead of responding, I teleport away to my tower. The sun setting in the distance slightly soothes my fragile mind now that I''ve removed myself from the haunted floor. Why won''t she stop saying my name, Me? I mean, I''m really happy that I can hear her voice, or I was at first, but the fact that she only repeats my name is quite disturbing. Especially when there''s nothing I can do about it!
It may be related to the seventh floor in some way.
That''s what I thought! I did die on the Seventh floor of the last dungeon. It could be related to that somehow. "Abi?" As I''m discussing my problem with Me, the chilling voice of my friend calls out to me in my tower. . . Well there goes that idea. Whatever. In time she might learn some new words. I''ve just got to get used to the creepiness of it. I teleport back down to the Seventh floor and begin looking through my new list of recently acquired elemental features. I decided to try out the wind feature first and apply it to the whole floor. Dust is pulled in as the air begins to swirl and two tornadoes grow opposite one another. Getting larger and wider as they do, once complete they slowly start rotating around the room. The tunnels aren''t exempt from the elements either as I add it to tmentire floor, not just the main room. Anyone trying to find the Boss Room will find themselves pushed back due to strong currents inside, rushing towards the main room and supplying a constant influx to the unnatural disaster Continuing the theme of wind, I browse my ever-growing list of monsters before adding three different varieties, all with an affinity for wind magic. Once I''m finished though, I realise that I may have added more than what was needed to on this floor. I also learn some valuable knowledge regarding Mini-Bosses and my mountain. Although it''s nice to be able to create, fill and finish a floor, without running out of DP like I used too. In the tornado room I summoned ten Goldors, a bird-type monster able to create blades of sharp feathers that they''re able to launch at their enemies. Light-brown feathers cover their entire body. After that I immediately purchased the next tier, Galdunes. These monsters have incredibly-strong beaks, razor-sharp talons and are three-times the size of a regular Goldor. Black feathers and a white chests make them look quite pretty to say they''re just large birds. The Galdunes become the first Mini-Bossed of the floor and I leave them with their underlings, guarding the main room. Finished with the main room, this is where I overspent. Instead of going with the third-tier Dalgon, assigning it as a boss and moving on, I went with something different and summoned ten Wind Sprites and a dozen Wind Pixies. Each Sprite cost the same amount as a Galdune, which I took to mean they were equal in power. What do assumptions do though. They make an ass out of you. There was no Mini-Boss option for the newest additions and I dismissed the idea of them being as strong as the Galdune. With ten wind tunnels connected to the main room, I sent a Sprite to guard and boost the elements in each. They look like me when I only use manifestation, only they''re dark clouds made of wind instead of a green goddess. The Wind Pixies are pink clouds of dust, until they stop moving that is. As usual I didn''t put much thought into them and they all look quite similar. Their skin is vibrant pink and they''re all around 15cm tall. Fluorescent-coloured hair, gorgeous white wings and cute little-outfits cover their cute little-bodies. I didn''t give them specific tunnels but instead left them to decide between themselves, after I confirmed their status'' as Mini-Bosses that is. Why did Pixies work, but not Sprites? After 40+ monsters were added to the floor, the Boss Room was still left to be filled and I spared no expense. Beefing up my security and continuing my theme, I summoned ten Harpies. A bird monster with human features, it baffles me how the Remnant Cores lost with all these monsters. I''m not even unlocking new tiers since I already have the option to purchase higher. I''m just a fan of the heirachy system and I feel like I need the lower leveled monsters to assist the boss. Anyway, the Harpies were followed by ten Siren. More women than monster, all of them have long, grey hair and white wings. They barely have a shred of clothing between them either and I can''t help but feel she''s doing it on purpose again. If my human summons come with clothes, why don''t my human-type monsters? Me said I could have as many Mini-Bosses as I wanted, so all ten Sirens earned the title. During that, I felt a little strange and hearing Anya calling out to me was already throwing me off my game, so I ignored the feeling like a boss. After that, I confirmed the next tier in the Harpy line, The Temptress, as the Boss of the floor. She isn''t as strong as some of my other monsters, especially not the Rogues, but her strength lies elsewhere. The Temptress is a master of illusions, or so her status claims. As though a dark angel had risen from hell itself, her long-black hair complements her even darker wings magnificently. The alluring black dress she wears fits her body perfectly. My Core skipped a beat whilst taking in her beauty. Aside from the wings, and her pitch black eye sockets, she could pass as an ordinary person quite easily. Is that because I complained about the lack of clothing for monsters? I mean, even those little shits get loinclothes. Anyway, seeing as my dungeon is still closed at the moment, The Temptress'' strength isn''t a pressing concern. The newly-grown forests, high up on my mountain though, are another story.
Huh. Who would have thought it?
Chapter 41: Wheelers Return Aura is sitting on the bed in her room contemplating the offer that Abi made her several days ago. "Hmph! I don''t know what to do!" She hangs her head in contemplation before flopping down onto the bed. "Should I accept her contract? She said I could leave if I wanted to but I wasn''t really expecting to hear that. I thought she would be like ''I''m a dungeon and I''m going to eat you now. Mwahahaha'', or something like that. Instead she was all cool about it like ''Hey, don''t be scared little one. I have set you free. Now you can be one with the world''. She''s so cool," hugging her pillow and rolling around, Aura squeals in delight as her roommate smiles at the childish scene playing out in front of her. "You seem to be enjoying yourself there," Tilly raises her voice above Aura''s giggling so that she can be heard by the rolling redhead. "What do I do, Tilly? In fact, what are you going to do?" "I''m going to stay here. Abi said she''d make me my own building and I can use it to heal anyone I want. She also said I didn''t have to heal people if I didn''t want to and that I''m free to make my own choices. I think I actually like this dungeon," Tilly looks to the ceiling and wonders if Abi''s listening to her. "I like her too," Aura bursts out. "Yeah, I''m pretty sure you like her differently to how I like her," Tilly laughs as Aura''s face flushes red. "It''s not like that. Well... Maybe a little bit, but it''s more because of the feelings I get from being here. Does that make sense?" Aura furrows her brows as she tries to explain herself. Swapping beds, Tilly sits down next to her next friend and thinks over what she just said. She feels the same way but it''s hard to explain where that feeling comes from. It''s as though she just knows that they will be safe if they stay here. "It was the exact opposite with Hiroshi. I hated every second I was with him, but he was too strong for me to do anything. I''m sorry, Tilly," tears begin to fall from the amber eyes of the surviving elf. "You don''t have to keep apologising, Aura. You were a prisoner just as much as I was but you were forced to endure it for longer. If anything I feel sorry for you," Tillys own tears begin to fall as she hugs her sobbing friend. "He was too strong Tilly, or at least he seemed that way until the people kicked the shit out of him. I mean, how was he so weak? Not that I''m complaining but every other dungeon we went to, he utterly demolished them. I mean brutally Tilly. He was insane. Abi must be insanely strong to be able to have people that could annihilate that wretched bastard. Anyway if you''re staying, I''m staying." "Really?" Tilly wipes her eyes and smiles at Aura. "I don''t have anywhere else to go and feel like this would be a great opportunity to restart my life. I''m going to accept Abi''s contract too, if you don''t mind staying with me for a while longer, that is?" Aura wipes her own eyes and moves to the window. "Look at this place. It''s amazing that a dungeon could come up with something like this, right?" Staring out the window, Tilly''s hand falls on her shoulder as the Cleric joins her in viewing the town. "It truly is. If I didn''t know any better, I would have thought the person that did all this was human," Aura laughs at Tilly''s random comment. "Don''t be silly, dungeons can''t be humans. Even if they can create a town, and make people, and is strangely nice," Aura breaks off as she thinks about her own words. Both women look at each other before they play off the strange idea they were entertaining. "A Human-Dungeon Core. Don''t be silly!" they laugh. Dungeon Stories Volume 2
Not me, that''s for sure. It turns out that the varying-sized multicoloured forests that lead up my mountain are actually there as representations of my Boss Monsters, Mini-Bosses and the floors they''re connected to. Not only did we discover the reason behind why my beautiful home is the way it is, after we left the seventh floor, but the more notable fact is that my mountain has grown in size again. So, floors and Bosses, right?
It would appear that way. Today is the first time you have worked inside the dungeon in a while. It would appear that when you add floors inside, your outer shell grows in size.
You can say magnificent mountain, you know? You don''t need to be shy.
Quite. It would also appear that Boss monsters influence magic forests to appear in higher degrees than Mini-Bosses, since you have more of later, however, it''s easy to discern which areas belong to who.
I suppose that''s good to know, right? Knowing that, I can almost decorate the mountain anyway I like. How cool is that?
That''s not what I was going to suggest.
Before I can start swapping people and monster roles around inside me, just to give it a go to see how things will change, the familiar feeling of people entering my land dances across my body. The only way to explain how I know when someone arrives is that it feels like goosebumps on the skin. Small pinpricks of people moving around on their own inside, or on, my dungeon. This time, however, it''s much, much different. It feels more like a worm, or multiple worms to be precise, are wriggling their across me as they continue to arrive one after the other. Am I being invaded?
It would appear that the merchant Wheeler has returned. He also seems to be leading a rather large procession of people.
Huh? Instead of casually strolling the street to my destination, which I quite enjoy doing these days, I''m there instantly as my anxiety is shooting through the roof. Appearing above the Steadfast Stable, there''s no mistaking the large crowd of humans slowly making their way down the street and into town. Using my will, I call out to the closest family members around me and instruct them to start guiding people towards the residential area. Although, I''m fairly sure I don''t have enough buildings to fit everyone in if I''m honest. My housing plan was for a few hundred at most and I''m a little worried there''s more than I can handle. "Abi?" Anya''s voice calls out to me over the noise entering town, but the last thing I have time for is an unsolvable problem right now. Even if she is my best friend, she''ll get it. How many people are there?
Roughly, two thousand.
You''re not joking with me either, are you?
No. Also, you do not have enough DP remaining to acquire sufficient housing for them.
Shit! How the hell did he get so many people to follow him? Is he the merchant messiah or some crazy shit like that? Looking around, my mind races to come up with a solution to our problem. Sadly, I come up empty-handed. Damn! OK. Let''s solve the next problem first. I take a final look at the relieved faces of those who have travelled a fair distance to get here. Just because they''re happy to have finally arrived, doesn''t mean they''re in the best of shape. Some of them have been layed in carts, exhausted from the trip. Then again, they could be ill for all I know. Which I don''t. There''s too many of them to check thoroughly. The elderly also made the journey inside wagons and the younger ones travelled with them. They show a renewed vigor now that they''ve finally reached their destination. A few dozen riders are on horseback and even more carriages are rolling in behind them. Almost every single person looks hungry, malnourished and tired, it''s obvious that they exhausted their food supply before reaching us. The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. At the mention of feeding all of the animals with the problem feature sat next to my stables, I''m going to ignore that until someone voices an acual concern. I mean, what else can I do about it? It''s not even animal feed at this point, it''s more like a sponge. Except, I don''t get my points back if I squeeze it. A few of the riders are looking dubiously at exactly what I don''t need right now so I hit up Ali''s instead to find the kitchen already in full swing. Pots are boiling, pans are frying and ovens are cooking, but worst of all, I still can''t taste a damn thing. Why is it that I''m able to smell how good her food is, but I''m not physically allowed to taste it? How does that even work, System? I swear to the gods, these buggy-ass skills aren''t doing you no favours in my books. And why does everything need a stupid amount of leveling before they become any good? Hell, my own Regeneration still sucks and I''m in the fucking thirties! It''s a good job I''ve got The Chef and her sous'' to watch. They diligently peel, slice, dice, and spice their way around each other in perfect coordination. The kitchen looks and operates like a dance hall as everyone works together, mass-producing a shit-ton of food so quickly, it''s almost dizzying to watch. No wonder I didn''t get super angry thinking about The System, my brains almost fried watching the chefs. Well... Turns out, I didn''t even need to come here. Ali''s got it on lock down and, after watching them work, I''ve come up with a makeshift idea for my first problem.
Really?
Really! It just hit me. Then it was obvious after I''d thought about it.
Well? What is it?
Do you really want to know?
Please don''t do this again.
The suspense just kills you doesn''t it, Me?
Why are you doing this?
I''m helping you, silly.
I don''t see how teasing me will help in any way. So, please tell me what your idea is.
I''m just trying to get you used to emotions for when I make you that body. And my plan''s simple really. Instead of making houses, I''ll make lots of tents for now and start a new residential area when I can.
I think you enjoy it more than you should do. Your plan is simple and effective, how did I not think of that?
That''s probably true. The part about my plan is also true, simple yet effective, efficient and easy. On that last note... I don''t know, buddy? Don''t worry though, stick with me and you''ll get there.
Quite.
Arriving at an empty plot of land that''s already been acquired, I waste no time spending what remains of my DP on Camping Grounds. With all the buildings between me and Wheeler''s new travelling buddies, I''m not too worried someone might see but I finish up as fast as possible. I''m not able to fill the entire area so... Some lucky people get to sleep underneath the stars tonight, yay. Fortunately for them, this is probably the safest place in Tironia they could do just that.
You will be able to finish this area in a few hours, once the moon is up.
That fast?
If you assume an average, untrained, human is worth 5-10DP, then consider the amount of them that have just entered you, what would the total be.
Woah! That''s a lot, hang on. Five and three zere makes five thousand and then... Hang on, that seems like way too much. Was that right? Yeah, that was right and I''ve still gotta times it by two. Holy shit! So on the lower end that''s ten thousand DP a day? Are you fucking joking me? Ha. Haha. Hahahaha. Go, my DP farm. Go!
And that''s just regular humans. People that fight monsters and have a higher level will give you more DP than the weaker ones.
So it''s going to be even more?
More than likely. We will find out the exact number later. As a rough estimate, I would say it will be around... Twenty-five thousand.
...
...
As I''m contemplating the ridiculous amount of DP that was just quoted to me, I teleport back to the Steadfast Stable. The last vestiges of the human-centipede are making their way in and they all look hungry. Which is still worrying, even after Ali and the others smashing food out like there''s no tomorrow. After informing my family of where to take the new arrivals, I watch as people are led to the their new homes. After that, they''re taken to the new temporary accommodation, tent central. The irony of watching dungeon monsters guide humans to their new homes isn''t lost on me. It''s off the crazy scale by miles and all I want to do is laugh at how ridiculous it is. Unfortunately, my attention is drawn to a rather loud, obnoxious man standing by a gaudy carriage and pow, there goes my good mood. I can already see where this is going. An entitled noble who thinks he''s better than everyone else demanding he accommodated first. "Would you believe it? Never thought I''d see one of those," I can''t keep a sarcastic tone from slipping my lips. Then again, I only said it for that reason so it doesn''t even matter. Obviously this dickhead is not happy with something. Whether that''s not being first in line, not being shown the courtesy he deserves, or whatever other unjustifiable reason he may think up, I don''t give a shit. Do I care who his father is? Ha. Nope. Do I care what his family name is? Not in the slightest? Do I care how big his...
Abi!
What? I was going to say ego.
Quite.
You know me so well, Me. Still, I already dislike the guy and he''s only been here a matter of minutes. Maybe this wasn''t such a good idea after all. Organising, planning and execution, I can do. It''s as simple as saying "Hey Rogues. Get over here." It''s the dealing with dickhead I can''t do. Arguing with Wheeler and one the Shadow Walker envoys I sent with him, he''s nowhere even near the stable and yet he''s still audible. I''m not even using my dungeon connection. Just my translucent ears. His clothing screams entitlement and his attitude is worse than his dress sense. Oh. Guess what?
What now?
Finally having an excuse, I light the fool up with Soul Guide. Well, that''s not exactly how it works when I use it. It just sounded cool. What does happen is that everything in my world turns grey. Everything other than the people that is. It''s a little distressing, thinking that something may have gone wrong, but the colours lighting up their souls remind me what skill I''m using and I get it. The noble, still mouthing off about how unjust life is, is a healthy fucking orange. I should just eat him now. Fortunately for him, I can resist Me''s encouragement towards my joke and send some sexy shadow walkers over to discourage him from being him. What I find more shocking than his attitude, is his lack of arousal towards my family. Isn''t that like the playbook here? Even the Catergoriser fell for their charms. How can this guy not? Screw it. We tried, System. He''s just... Too shitty of a human. Hell, he''s only one step away from red. Let''s just use that fact as justification for his timely demise instead eh? "Master! You have summoned me," Summoning Prince Loudmouth to my side, he looks like he''s ready to cry at being summoned all on his own. I also want to cry. Why did I summon Noir? "Whatever. We''re just screwing everything today," I mutter to myself before addressing Noir, "See that guy over there. The one in the ridiculous yellow clothing with the hat seven-sizes too big?" I point him out and unsurprisingly, he''s still going on about his poor treatment. Poor Wheeler. I bet he''s had to endure that all the way here. What a shitty trip. Although, I feel even worse for the Shadow Walkers since they''re my family. How dare he? If I didn''t have justification before, I certainly do now. Thinking of them having to endure his derivative drivel the entire journey is Core''breaking. In fact, I''m super proud of them. Not only did they cope with King Dick over there, but no one killed him off on the sly. I totally would have done that. "Yes, Master! I will end him now," Noir jumps down from the roof, but lands on his rear right beside me as I teleport him back and try to keep my cool. "Not now you fool! And did you even hear me say that I wanted you to kill him? You can''t just assume things like that all the time, you know?" It didn''t go very well, but I think he got it. As I scold Noir''s hasty attitude, he drops back down to his knees. "I''m sorry, Master. What would you have me do instead?" Swapping from his read to his knee, Noir waits for me to tell h sometnhong different. "Well, I, erm... I do kinda want you to kill him. Just... Do it when no one is around. You can''t just execute him in the middle of the street. Especially not now! All these newbies would run away if you appeared from nowhere and just decapitated someone. What would happen to my DP farm then? It would be empty, that''s what! So no. No street killings. Do it stealthily, Noir. You''re supposed to be an Assassin for Core''s sake." When I didn''t have a body I missed being able to shake my head. Now... Even with a combination of skills, neither of which give me a physical, my neck hurts. It''s a good job they''re ridiculously strong otherwise there would be some Dismantling going on in this dungeon. "Have no doubts Master. I, Noir, shall take care of this for you," he teleports away and I feel worse than before. I have a whole load of doubts in fact. Two thousand of them to be precise! Finding an opportunity might prove challenging now that we''re rammed. It''s not as though I don''t trust him, it''s just that... Noir''s usually the distraction. Why didn''t I summon the executioner instead? Why did I have to summon the loudest person in town? Why did... Why did he say his own name? Did he think that was cool? Where does he get that shit from, Abi the Forgetful wonders as she worries about the future of her sanity and her town. Chapter 42: Overstock Finally separated from Light, Sophie is sat in the Retreat, nursing a full mug of ale in her hands. She''s mulling over the startling secret that she was made privvy to the night before. Light explained the circumstances regarding his ''female'' master and the reason why building construction happens so fast. It simultaneously put Sophie''s mind at ease and made her heart race uncontrollably at the same time. Sophie is, or was, a dungeon diver. An adventurer who has seen the insides of many a dungeon. Recently though, before unexpectedly arriving on Abi''s doorstep for the first time, she had been taking jobs that required her to protect and escort clients to their destinations. It''s for this reason that she happened to be with Wheeler and Aaron in the first place. Not that she''s complaining. She''s found the man of her dreams, or least she thought she had. As it turns out that wondrously-beautiful man is actually a dungeon monster created by his master, the Dungeon Core. Not just the man of her dreams but everyone and everything else in sight has also been created by the same dungeon. Except for people Wheeler and Aaron shockingly returned with. "Why? I don''t understand, how?" Talking to herself gets her no answers, but instead catches the attention of the two Assassins next to her. "Are you talking about our Master and Light? He informed everyone that he would be telling you about us. It seems he has taken a liking to you." One of the longest sentences Carrie has ever said is quickly shadowed by her boisterous partner''s love for his home. "My master is the best! Without her, we would not be here to experience all that there is to experience! We would not be able to make this world a better place as we have been doing. Our master is like no other. She is guiding humanity towards a better path so that she..." Noir''s loose lips are quickly silenced as the master in question appears with a frown on her face. "Master!" Noir bellows before grabbing his weapon from his spatial storage. He then salutes before standing statue still. To the eyes of Sophie, the red-head Assassin looks a little strange as she isn''t able to see Abi unless she accepts the contract. "Is your master here now? Or is he just a little... Crazy?" She faces Carrie and points to Noir''s perfect impression of a King''s Knight. "I would like to say both," Carrie raises an eyebrow at her partner, before nodding to her master, "He''s always eager to perform well so that he can please our master. I could have a worse partner." Finishing her ale, Carrie stands up and grabs Noir by the collar. "Partner? Like partner-partner?" Sophie''s words don''t receive an answer as Carrie salutes the empty air in front of them. She then drops into Noir''s shadow and pulls the still-bowing male down with her. Sophie quickly downs her Ale before asking Talia for a refill. "They seemed happy, right? In a weird kind of way. I want that! I wanna be happy too and Light makes me happy. That''s good right? It doesn''t matter that he''s a dungeon monster... I don''t think. I thought he was a vampire before so there''s that as well. Why am I finding this so hard?" Sipping her ale, whilst debating her strangely-tempting situation, Sophie soon asks for a second refill, followed by a third and eventually a fourth. She keeps going until she loses count. "I mean... He''s probably got all the working parts, right? Hehe, (hic) I bet he''s a beast. A beast, Talia! Where is he? I''m gonna tell (hic) him," Slipping off the stool, Sophie manages to keep herself from falling over. "I''m gonna tell him, Talia. I (hic) love him and I don''t care about anything else. All I want is Light!" Walking backwards as she calls over the Retreat to the proprietress, Sophie loses her footing in front of the door and she begins to fall. Luckily, the object of her affection catches her mid-way before she can hit the ground. "You''re like my angel," she smiles into the blurry sky-blue eyes of her saviour as he raises her back up. "I think we should get you to bed," Light politely smiles after seeing how much the human has had to drink. Little did he know, Sophie took those words in a completely different way than how he had intended them. "Did you hear that, Talia!? Let''s go, Light," Light''s eyes widen as Sophie grips his wrist with a renewed vigor and drags him out of the Retreat, into the hotel and upstairs to her room. Talia laughs at Light''s poor choice of words and the next day, Sophie accepts a contract with the dungeon. Dungeon Stories Volume 2
At the stroke of midnight, just like Cinderballer, something magical happens. I don''t meet a charming Prince, but I do have my world rocked by an enormous influx of over-inflated DP. Seriously! I''ve never felt this good in either of my lives. It''s that much that Overstock even gained two levels. I mean, I should have expected it. Me did give me a rough estimate on the amount of points I should expect. To be honest though, I forgot that Stockpile evolved into Overstock. With the amount of DP needed to level the skill, I''d already thrown it to the back of my mind and forgotten about it. Stockpile was all that I needed until this flashed before my eyes.
Overstock Level 3: You are now able to retain 30% of any Dungeon Points that you acquire
Any Dungeon Points? Any! I''m not complaining, even though it might have seemed like I was, but doesn''t that seem like a seriously-broken skill? What''s going to happen when it reaches level 10? Will I be able retain any amount of DP, no matter the size? This story has been taken without authorization. Report any sightings. I could be a DaPillionaire!
Is that a special type of monster?
Nope, just a rich Dungeon Core. It''s another original Abi word.
I should have guessed.
It turns out that most of the people that relocated here are refugees from the north. Forced to leave their homes behind, they hope not to be killed or branded as traitors to the crown in doing so as the Lord of their province has revolted against the King of Tira. The northeastern region is controlled by Lord Edward Gorn and from what I heard last night, he''s actually a really kind-hearted person. So it begs the question, why would he rebel against the King? Has he been wronged in some way? Is there an evil mastermind pulling the strings behind the scenes? Either way, none of that is my problem. Not yet anyway. For now, I''ve got bigger fish to fry.
Dungeon Core Abi Level 33: 1557/4600XP until next level 7 Floors 69 Rooms 72 Tunnels 457 Monsters 4 Contract Monsters 138 Traps 10,600/1800DP Available
I can''t get my head around that DP. Long gone are the days where Barry was the main source of my income. Ever since I created him, he''s been dropping loads in me nonstop. Now that I receive 25,000DP a night, I''ll never have to worry about having points to spend again. As the days pass by eventfully, my time is always occupied and there''s always something else that requires my attention. Because of that, I ended up building the Filing Hut. The feature was unlocked weeks ago, but its description was beyond stupid so I hadn''t even bothered to place it. A place for Rogues to store documents, if they ever need them? Come on. How stupid is that? Well, the joke was on me there because after several upgrades, the feature became the Hall of Inquires and allows me to create a psuedo government of sorts. Coincidentally, it was just what I needed since we have a full-functioning city to manage. However, I suppose it''s more of a proper government now opposed to a psuedo one. Even if it is created by a dungeon feature. Due to it be in better than I imagined, time and effort was put in setting up governing bodies to do my work for me. It wasn''t too difficult, since Assassins seem to be the perfect fit for most jobs, but I was still dubious about leaving others in charge. Even if passing the buck is second nature in my dungeon. That said, the first person I summoned came dressed for the job. I''ve almost given up asking why things go they way they do, unless they''re too out there that I can''t help myself, since I never get any the answers I desire. Instead, I just have to keep cracking on. With her hair tied up in a bun, the Assassin has red glasses, a white shirt and a black, pencil skirt that stops above her knees. She looks extremely official and I immediately assigned her as the Mayor of Varona. Mayor Kana. I couldn''t just leave Kana on her own to look after all these people, so I created more Assassins and formed a council. I also added a few Wood Walkers and Mages, just so I couldn''t be called out on being biased. Even if Assassins do murder any job given to them, variety is the spice of life so they say. With twenty Mages, twenty Wood Walkers and twenty Assassins, Varona''s city council was up and running in less than a day. Obviously, I left naming the aids in the capable hands of Mayor Kana and poofed away, leaving her to settle into her new role. Sixty people should be a good start for a government. I spent most of my newfound freedom, walking through the streets in my Spiritual Presence. Still unnoticeable to the masses as I don''t have a physical form, I eavesdrop on conversations as people go about their daily business to find out what they''re thinking. Most of it isn''t good right now. The topic on almost everyone''s mind is the King and their Lord. What''s going to happen? Is everything going to be OK? Will they be able to return home in the future? I have no idea about the first two, but I really hope the latter doesn''t come to fruition any time soon. My farm has only just started to take off and I want to utilise this DP for aslong as I can. Thanks to Soul Guide, sifting through the extremely-large influx of Tironians for people we don''t want living in town, my life has become even easier than I thought possible. The skill I instantly took a disliking too, because of the job requirement, turned out to be a blessing in disguise rather than a work commitment. I haven''t heard a single justifiable complaint from anyone that''s arrived yet either. Other than those that find themselves to on the wrong end of Soul Guide''s colour spectrum, which is downright shocking considering how many of them arrived here all at once, the majority seem quite placid. Most of the negatives reverted from yellow back to grey as they arrived, landing them directly in the neutral zone. I don''t know if that had anything to do with me possessing the job-given skill, or if they''re just committed to restarting life with a fresh slate. Either way, less trouble is a win-win scenario for everyone and much less work for me. The rowdy red and awful orange trouble makers however didn''t turn grey. Instead, they were quickly dealt with in a silent, but humane, manner. Disappearing in various alleyways, side streets, lavatories and other places where prying eyes aren''t around, when the time was right their hate-filled voices were ceased. Never to be heard from again. I''m not happy with how it played out, but it was an immediate fix for a large scale problem that I didn''t want to sweep under the rug and ignore. Not that it''s easy to ignore loudmouth nobles, but I''ll do better from now. Deallng with troublemakers and spying on the residents are not the only tasks I''ve been taking care of. Varona is now five times the size it was before Wheeler returned. I''ve been buying land like there''s no tomorrow with the most of Overstock''s retained DP. The rest has been put into housing and places of work for the growing population. Maths aside, the Hospitable Homes come with everything a person needs to be able to live sufficiently. A magical cooker, their own bathroom, the house is even furnished. It''s not up to the standards of a noble, but it''s enough for someone to start life over from scratch. Especially when I haven''t asked for anything in return. Although I do need to get on that soon, or I could pass it over to Kana. As mayor it''s kind of her job to deal with rents and tenants, right? Or at least one the officials below her should do it. I''m a busy Dungeon Core these days and am certainly not trying to shirk out of responsibilities. Plus, these homes weren''t cheap, not that I spent any actual money, and I''ve used more DP here than the cost of the land they''re built on. In fairness, I suppose that they''ve paid for themselves really since the points I used came from the people that are here. And thanks to them, Overstock has reached Level 6 in just a single week. The skill has already accumulated 20,000DP and needs another 140,000 to reach Level 7. The number itself horrifies me when I think about how much it requires. I know I joke around about being a big Lobe Hound from time to time, but I''m seriously in the big leagues now. Like everything else in my dungeon, the required amount of DP for the skill to level up doubles each time. That means that Overstock will eventually have to accumulate 1,280,000DP to advance from Level 9 to 10. I need to stop thinking about that skill. Getting to keep 60% of what I earn over night is already amazing. There''s no point in musing over what I will eventually have, hehe. "Abi?" As usual, the voice of Anya calls out to me from nowhere and everywhere all at once, pulling me out of my thoughts. I''ve got a plan for my bestie, or the beginning-of-a-plan at least. I''m just waiting on one more piece to be ready. Hopefully it won''t be too long, but only time will tell. Chapter 43: Tillys Clinic Inside the mayoral office, a flustered Mayor Kana is sitting behind an overly-large desk that is buried in paperwork. An exasperated expression painted across her face, she stares at the mountain of piles before her. "Why was I given the hard job?" she pouts as a knock on the door forces her to compose herself. "Come in." In walks deputy mayor Sacha, carrying with her another stack of paperwork that needs the mayor''s approval. "Really? I''ve only been here two days. How is there already so much work to do?" She complains, slouching back in her exquisite and ridiculously-comfortable leather chair. "It''s due to the copious amount of refugees that fled here from the different villages and towns in Gorn. Their regional borders run alongside Ishda and Imperia and for most of them, we''re the closest place to reach that''s relatively safe. A lot of the petitions are from business owners wanting to open their own establishments here, within the city," deputy mayor Sacha kindly informs her superior for a third time. "Yes I know, Sach. I just feel like I''ve been stamping my life away these last two days." "Well, you kind of have. If you don''t include the meetings about delegating city management, then you literally have been stamping away since you were born," Sacha kindly reminds her boss of another well-known fact. "Gods damn it, Sacha! Now I feel even worse. Screw it! I''m taking a break." Putting her feet up, Kana folds her arms and pouts before closing her eyes. "Madam Mayor, I don''t think you really have the time to rest right now. If you want, I''ll run down to Ali''s and grab you some lunch?" At the mention of Ali''s, Mayor Kana is hooked. Deputy Mayor Sacha was created at the same time to aid her higher-up, yet she has already found many different ways to get her Senior motivated. Food from Ali''s never fails. "Will you get me one of those blueberry roulette thingies as well for after?" Mayor Kana is already in the deep end, dreaming of dessert. Wrapped around her junior''s little finger, she barely registers the next question about what main she would like. "It doesn''t matter. I''ve been craving that sweet blueberry taste since yesterday afternoon. Anything will be fine for dinner," she smiles whilst remembering yesterday''s treat. After Deputy Mayor Sacha leaves the room, Mayor Kana redirects her attention to the stack of papers on her desk "May as well get back on it with it like I said I would, huh?" Shrugging her shoulders, the document she looks at is about a guard detail for town. "Don''t we already have that?" Considering the presence of high level beings that answer to her master, Kana notices a problem in the city that the Dungeon Core seems to have overlooked. It turns out that Abi didn''t create a duplicate Black Barracks for outside the dungeon. That means that the human population in town don''t actually know that there''s people protecting them at all times. The undercover Assassins in plain sight are a deadly security force that keeps them safe, but no one knows about it. With that in mind, Mayor Kana writes down the issues she''s discovered onto a parchment full of other scribblings. The paper is almost full of suggestions to bring up with her master when she''s finished. As she puts her pen down, her belly rumbles in a very unladylike manner causing her to blush even though she''s alone in her office, "Where''s Sacha!?" Dungeon Stories Volume 2
Many different requests are filtered out and sent to me through Mayor Kana. Some of them, I end up berating myself for not noticing the problems in the first place. However, today isn''t one of those days. On the first floor of my dungeon, Kana is listing off buildings and features that need creating as I finish work on the Mages Guild. I summoned ten Mages earlier on, but they were all unspecialised. I completely forgot that they had to attune to a crystal inside the Mages Guild to find out what their specialities are. The Arch Mage was unlocked for my trouble though so it wasn''t all bad. Once the Mages have had their proficiency tested, I can hand them over to Hana and Mira who will then assign them shifts on either guard-or-scout duty. Although, if I keep doing that, I''ll eventually have more guards than citizens. I suppose there are other jobs for them too. The Mages Guild being a prime example. Once the guild is completed, I summon the required number of Arch Mages and unlock the Magus tier. I don''t think I''ve ever seen a Magus before. Since they''re the same tier as my Walkers, I''m going to assume that they''re really strong too. Naming the Arch Mages, I also listen to Mayor Kana as she continues listing a variety of diverse requests from the parchment in her hands. Eventually, one grabs my attention and I have to stop naming the magic casters to make sure I heard her properly. "Tilly''s ready to open her clinic now? Yes! Tell her it will be ready shortly and that hopefully, I''ve got the perfect assistant for her." I spoke to Tilly about opening a medical building when I originally offered her a contract. Although she accepted, the healer said that she wanted to wait for a while before she started helping other people again. I guess this means she''s finally ready. It''s about time too. Ever since the voice of my best friend started haunting me, I''ve had this crazy idea. I just didn''t want to try it until Tilly was up and healing again in case something went wrong. Plus, there was the refugee crisis to deal with and shit managed to get really busy. But now it''s time to remove the pleasantly-familiar-yet-chilling voice in the best way possible. Mayor Kana''s suggestions for improvements were almost at the end. I tell her to go over the rest next time and thank her for the hard work she''s putting in before disappearing to build Tilly''s Clinic. The Healer''s Hut is another one of those features I unlocked a while ago and has gone unused because there wasn''t anyone to run it. Placing it in one of the newest sections of town, close to the residential district, there are no humans around so I''m able to build freely without using Divinity''s Creation. Once built, the feature reminds me of the shed the dungeon priests used to use when they were first created. Small, wooden and pathetic. After two quick upgrades, however, it becomes the Surgery of Soothing and no longer looks shite. Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original.
The Room of Recovery have been upgrade to The Surgery of Soothing: Blessed by mana, natural regeneration in this building is improved 250% percent Any treatment conducted within is twice as effective as anywhere else A new feature has been unlocked: Operating Table: 10DP Rewards: 8XP
Like the Academy of Dark Arts, Tilly''s Clinic is all white, looks absolutely stunning and is ridiculously-sized compare to the other builds around it. A pristine reception area sits inside the main door and there are plenty of options for seating as chairs line the walls and sit in rows across the open area. Down the hall are recovery rooms that can be used by anyone with minor injuries at any time of the day. No medical assistance is needed in them as individual recovery rates are through the roof. 250% is crazy and I feel slightly silly for not creating this feature earlier. In the second floor is a large ward. It''s purpose is for people to recover in after being seen by Tilly. Like the individual rooms, their recovery rates are also high but are made even higher if seen and diagnosed by the care practitioner first. If they''ve been magically operated on, the recovery rate doubles again and I can help but wonder if we''re going to be living in a city of immortals soon enough. This place is already quite big compared to my other buildings and I haven''t even looked at everything inside yet. It''s even larger than the Academy and that feature has adjoining buildings. I wasn''t actually expecting it to have this many rooms or be this big. Why do I feel like it''s going to turn out to be one of those things?
What things? I''m sure I''ve already mentioned this, Abi, but ''things'' does not help me understand what you are talking about.
I don''t know either to be honest, Me. I just can''t help but feel like I''m going to regret this somehow. Even though it was my idea in the first place. Then again, that might be why I''m already regretting it. Nevermind. Shit''s already as crazy as it can be so what''s the worst that could happen. Arriving in high spirits, they sore to even higher heights as the Cleric''s eyes sparkle in delight at the impressive presence her feature exudes. The Clinic, which is more of a Royal-sized hospital, is certainly worth the jaw drop it recieved. The frown she throws my way after I mention wanting to revive the soul of my dead best-friend into one of my Mages so she can become help out in the Clinic is probably well deserved. I get it, it sounds stupid. Tilly''s expression and Me''s words won''t dissuade me from trying though. Stumbling to come up with an answer, Tilly''s enthusiasm turns into confusion and she continues to frowning. Opening her mouth to speak, she closes it instead before pointing a finger at me. She continued to do jus that for a few minutes as I let my plan sink in. her mouth a few times before pointing a finger at me and then lowering it. Eventually, after many different hand gestures and facial movements, she sighs in defeat as she can''t begin to understand the mind of a Dungeon Core. Nor does she know that soul is still calling out for me a dozen times a day and throwing me off my dungeon game. "Of course we are. I don''t know why I was expecting something easy to start with," she smiles. The sarcasm clearly noticeable in her voice. Maybe I am being hasty, but living with the haunting voice of my dead friend is not something I''m enjoying. If she could hear me when I respond to her, it wouldn''t be half as bad. But as it stands, I''ve had enough of this one-sided communication. "Sorry, Tilly. It''s a strange first job, huh?" I try to play it down and make light of the situation. Not that it goes in my favor and an ear bashing is all I get for my effort. "Strange? Strange!? Everything here is strange. What you''re doing here is strange. Hell, I''m even stranger than you for accepting the contract and enjoying the comforts around me, knowing full well that they''re being provided by a dungeon. The people, or monsters, or whatever you call those you create, are also strange. They''re so... Human. They''ve even got their own personalities. They have thoughts and feelings like everyone else. They laugh, joke, and they''re all so nice. In fact, they''re nicer than most of the people I know. So... Strange is the only word I have to describe this situation. Then again, I don''t know why I was expecting anything else." Calming down after her rant, Tilly sighs before heading into The Surgery of Soothing. Once she''s had a look around, she doesn''t look half as annoyed but she still seems confused. "How are we going to do this then? I''ve never heard of any spell that deal with the soul. Well, not any legal ones anyway." "Well, it''s not so much of a spell but more of a feeling," I explain, whilst not really explaining at all. "A feeling? Really? So you don''t actually know if this will work then?" Horrified at my terrible explanation, Tilly shakes her head nervously and looks as though she''s s ready to bolt for the door. Fortunately, she doesn''t and I''m happy for the assistance because this is doing my head in. "I can hear her calling out to me. We died on the seventh floor of the dungeon together... Well, not this dungeon exactly... It''s a long story and very strange as you would put it." As I summon a soulless Magus onto the bed inside the recovery room, Tilly watches in shock as a woman in white robes appears from nowhere. "Either way, I''m pretty confident that I can do this. I need you to be ready though, just in case something goes wrong... Or right, I suppose." Staring at the lifeless corpse on the bed, I concentrate on Anya''s voice. I''ve been ignoring it recently so it feels harder than it should be. Which I suppose it is my own fault for being so busy all the time. Sorry, Anya. "Abi?" Finally hearing Anya''s ghostly echo, I focus on her voice as she calls out to me. It''s not as easy I thought it would be. Sounding like she''s everywhere at once, it feels like I''m grasping at straws as I try to connect them all together. Tilly watches as I pull and contort the air above the lifeless Magus. To her, it probably looks as though I''m doing a dance-of-sorts rather than trying to rebuild or reconnect my friend''s soul. In all honesty, I''ve got no idea what I''m doing. But now that I''ve started, I can''t stop. Why did I even think I''d be able to do something like this? I''m not actually the soul guide that my skill would imply. I''m just me. Abi. A person that died and doesn''t want to die again. Pulling the voice of my friend from all around me, somehow I manage to overlap her solitary word ontop of other copies of itself. Tilly''s face is awash with shock and confusion. As a Healer, she knows better than most that people don''t come back from the dead, especially not when they died more than fifty years ago. Seeing and believing are two different sides of the coin today though and Tilly watches as golden-strands of incorporeal matter sew themself together above the body of the soulless corpse. I''m not oblivious to the sheer wonder of what''s going on either and it''s not like I''m doing this with my eyes closed. Although, it might have been easier since I almost got distracted. Even though I was doubtful of my own task a moment ago, the golden-yarn knitting itself into a spherical shape above the Magus gives me chills. What I''m attempting shouldn''t be possible. I know it. Tilly knows it. Hell, everyone in Tironia knows it. Anyone would say that what I''m doing is guaranteed to end in failure as the reincarnation cycle is a well-known fact. Souls don''t linger around long after the body''s demise and they get parsed on to their next stop almost immediately. Here I am though, performing the impossible without any clue as to what I''m doing. Blind faith and confidence in my own efforts has got me this far and I''m not going to stop now. As soon as I hear and feel the last fragment of my name enter the golden sphere, I know that it''s ready. Again, I have no idea how I know that was the last one and I''m only going of what I''m feeling inside. She''s ready, but what do I do with her now? I was kinda hoping for her soul to be pulled inside on its own. Do I have to do that aswell? Whatever. It can''t be harder than gathering them all in the together can it? Using my will, I ease Anya''s completed soul inside the empty shell on the bed. Both myself and Tilly, Me''s definitely observing this aswell, watch with baited breath to see if it actually worked. Or was I just creating a nice light show for no other reason other than I can. Another good reason for not being human anymore is that I held my breath the entire time in painstaking silence the entire time. Tilly said nothing either. Although that might be more to do with how I look right now rather than what just happened. I''m sure she has something to say about it as her anxiety-induced breathing is making me panic more. Finally, a single word finally releases us from our own personal tortures. The same word which has haunted me ever since I hit the Seventh Floor. No longer a ghostly echo of tragedy and despair, the word that fills my world is laced in confusion. Three letters long, but strong enough to make my Spiritual Presence cry, that single word came from the lips of the female Magus on the table. The lips of Anya. "Abi?" Chapter 44: Increasing Problems Over the past week, the Acolytes and Disciples have seen a huge boost to their attendance numbers at religious events with the migration of all Varona''s new residents. To be honest, even though they look like the real deal, the only thing these religious zealots are pious over is the dungeon itself. Their sermons differ greatly from that of any other faith on Tironia and the only creator mentioned in their holy book is the Goddess, Lady Abi. The stories they preach tell of how a new dungeon will rise above all others. One that is destined to be designed with the sole purpose of bettering humanity. Little do the flock know that they''re already living on said dungeon''s grounds which are still in its trial period. One afternoon, in the beautiful flower garden of The Townhouse of Tribulation, one such story is being told by the latest introduction to the clergy, Cardinal Carn. As he is explaining how fighting inside a dungeon will still be necessary to acquire levels, he''s interrupted by one of the latest additions of the congregation. "Will people still die in the dungeon?" The man''s question isn''t without merit. The general population of Tironia are taught to be cautious of dungeons from a young age. In human societies dungeons are regulated and controlled by the higher powers just as any other valuable asset would be. If a dungeon is classified to be a danger to society then they are destroyed with extreme prejudice instilling the idea that dungeons are to be feared. "Of course the dungeon will still end up killing people. They create monsters for people to defeat so that they can earn levels in return. If you don''t pay enough attention or you''re reaching above your limitations, then there will always be casualties. Dungeons kill people, especially those that throw caution to the wind. It''s a natural fact. Yet so does water and people still venture out into it for food and monetary gain. The world creates dungeons for a singular reason, that reason is for you. It''s all so that the people that enter them may grow stronger and reach the heights that they dream of..." Stopping short of revealing some major secrets, Cardinal Carn hands the session over to Disciple Avos so that he can reflect on his emotional speech. If any other city had these heretical dungeon lovers in, there''s no doubt they would be executed swiftly to stop wandering minds. Luckily, they were created by Abi and the place they preach in is safe from incidents such as those. Dungeon Stories Volume 2
Following the advice of Mayor Kana, I upgraded the Black Barracks and placed a copy of the feature in the center of the city. It''s not as though I needed one outside. This decision was made solely to alleviate the concerns of Varona''s human citizens. Even though my crime rate is at a big-fat zero, for some reason they keep complaining to the mayor about not having regular guard patrols. However, after growing up in a rough city myself, I understand where they''re coming from. Even though I don''t personally need the building outside my mountain, I still complied with their wishes cause that''s just who I am. I''m definitely not over here avoiding the awkward situation that arose due to my recently-resurrected friend in Tilly''s clinic, that''s for sure. I mean, it''s only right to say that I''ve got to get on with building and keeping my DP farm running, right? I don''t want to be a neglectful Dungeon Core. The fact that Anya''s eyes lit up bright yellow before she started speaking some weird, disjointed language certainly didn''t influence my decision to rush off and get on with Mayor Kana''s city-improvement requests. She does have a lot of them after all. Either way, I ignored the problems regarding mages because, obviously, there''s always more than one problem when something new crops up. Instead, I''m standing in front of what used to be The Black Barracks wondering if I''m just being tormented with names by The System. Seriously! Mayor Kana can get away with telling people they''re safer now that they''ve got the building they asked for, but when she tells them what it''s called... I doubt they''ll still be feeling safe afterwards. It will probably get even worse once the news of the Mages'' specialties get out. What am I going to do? We''re going to have to lie about this building''s name. From an outside view, the magnificent building that stands as a deterrent to crime and wrongdoings is majestic and imposing. The towers that sit on each of the four corners are now larger than ever and stretch up to the sky. Easily twice the size of its previous-self and no longer midnight black, the feature now shines white, conforming to the colour standards of the majority of its peers. A golden dome covers the entire building and a large shield is hung above the entrance. Everything is perfect except the name!
It''s quite fitting once you''ve looked inside.
That''s not the reassuring image I''m trying to portray though, Me. Inside the tower, as Me so accurately pointed out, is the source of the feature''s name causing me so much anguish. Every possible device or means that a person could possibly imagine to torture information out of another can be found already assembled and neatly placed inside one-of-the-four pristine towers.
The Black Barracks has been upgraded to The Towers of Torture: The reputable defenders that operate this building will protect the dungeon until their dying breath with a fortitude shown by no others across the land Any Dungeon Resident that is set to this building will gain a 25% boost to all their stat Any interrogations carried out within the towers have an additional 50% chance of succeess New features have been unlocked: Large Customisable Banners: 20DP Decorative Shields: 20DP Customisable Torture Equipment: 50DP Add inf: Good luck Abi x
And what the hell is that about at the end!? Why is she offering me good luck on torturing?
You may need it in the future.
Luck on torturing? I can''t deal with your jokes right now, Me. This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it Sticking to script, I throw all my unsolvable, unhelpful and unneeded problems into the deal-with-later pile. That list gets bigger by the day and at some point soon, I''ll have to deal with the accumulated frustrations that keep deciding to overlook. Future me sure is going to be annoyed when she has to deal with them. That''s for sure. Why can''t life be simple? OK. We can''t call this place, The Towers of Torture, can we? I dread to think how the citizens would react to that. The Black Barracks is also out of the question now that all the brickwork has turned white. We can''t keep calling it that now, can we?
What about The White Barracks?
Hmm. It just doesn''t roll off the tongue. To be honest, The Towers of Torture actually sounds quite sweet as far as names go, it just doesn''t match the peaceful vibe I''ve got going on. I mean, it will definitely make people too scared to commit criminal acts, but it might also prevent them from doing good and changing themselves for the better. It needs a name that will make people feel safe. One that inspires them to believe in the defenders of our city. Not one that makes them think that guards will come for them as they sleep to brutally torture information out of them. Crap! The only names I''m coming up with now all have White in as well. The spiritual neurons send signals to receptors in my brain, increasing my processing power as the power of the universe helps me find the right choice. Unfortunately, I''m still left with nothing. If the System picks names out of my head, then why am I finding it so difficult? Is it because I''m feeling self-conscious over my naming-skills now that there are so many people living here? The pressure is killing me! Time has proven that I''m no good when people rip on me indirectly. Nor directly, but that neither here nor there. Nobody''s going to stand being ripped on to their face unless it''s your own personal roasting and you were down for it beforehand? Even then someone might carried away and absorb someone else after a third party assassination. Honestly, I''ll straight up eat the first fool who even talks about the Hay Bale. Fortunately, no one has even seen it yet since it''s so insignificant and the animals diet comes from the exact same place the humans does. Ali''s. Even if I decide to go with Me''s suggestion, I can''t possibly feel any worse than how I do over some other features. I swear it better make my animals fly, or some magical-bullshit like that!
I''m assuming we''re back on the topic of the Hay Bale?
Yeah. Sorry. I just... It frustrates the hell out of me, you know?
Oh. I know. At some point you will try and upgrade it again though and it may finally change at that time.
It''s not likely.
Which part do you mean?
All of it. I''m going to use the fields to feed the animals in the stable and chalk The Hay Bale up to a colossal failure. Even with all these points rolling in, it''s never getting a single DP ever again!
Really!?
No! But I really wish I could stick to my own shit! I just want the damn thing to change! I slightly lose control of my emotions and my frustration seeps out in the form of Dungeon Mist. A scarlet haze blankets the city subtly and the sunset tints the sky a rose hue before I rein my emotions back in, all the while hoping no one panics over the perfectly-timed phenomenon. The Towers of Torture are tinted pink and look even better than before until my mist settles and there back to a crappy orange. Stupid sunset. As the light catches the building, my eyes are drawn to the shield above the door and a split-second choice sets the tone for a name. The Shield?
Is that what we''re going with? Really?
Yeah. It will do for now. With the amount of problems that I''m avoiding, I suppose I should start working through some of the easier ones. Otherwise, Abi of Tommorow will be extremely pissed at me for leaving all the work to her. She''ll curse me out like I curse The System. Hana and Mira are more than capable of managing security without any supervision, which in turn frees me up to work on one of my Mage problems. Looking at the specialities of the Mages, Arch Mages, and Magus on my overview screen, I let out a groan. Their magical abilities, stats and general parameters are not a cause for concern. The Arch Mages and Magus'' would probably be able to beat Kal in a feat of strength if he were still alive. It''s oddly surprising seeing as how spell casters are known to be weak in terms of physical strength. If anything, I couldn''t be happier with their stats, especially my best-friend Anya''s. Even without a specialisation and the boost the guild provides, she''s leagues above my previous summons. This is also a slight cause or concern because I''m not sure how she ended up so strong, but it''s still not the problem that I''m referring to. No, the issue that''s running through my mind is that every single spell-caster that has entered the Mages Guild to undertake the specialisation test so far, have all left the room as Necromancers. Masters of Black Magic and the rulers of the dead are the only Mages I seem to be allowed. The thought of Anya taking her test worries me as it''s highly likely she''s going to end up with the same class. I''ve got my fingers crossed that I''m wrong and all I can do is pray to my Core, but whenever I hope for anything, nine-times-out-of-ten, it usually goes the other way. Maybe I should hope she becomes a Necromancer? No, I''ll be even more annoyed if it actually happens then. Don''t screw me here, Sys! I''m warning you today. Do not... Screw over... My friend. I know you can hear me! As usual there''s no reply other than Me''s sarcasm so I move to Tilly''s Clinic. Anya is no longer speaking in some weird-ass-foreign tongue and instead she''s sitting on the sofa sipping tea rather peacefully. She looks as though she would handle meditation much better than I do and just seeing her like that puts my mind at ease. Tilly on the other hand is glaring at me like I''m some sort of Demon Lord. Almost as if she''s learned her own dungeon mist, a red aura surrounds her as she stomps towards me. It''s to be expected that she''s a bit annoyed. I did dump the task of calming-down, explaining the situation and reassuring, Anya, solely in her lap. "How dare you disappear on me like that!?" she shouts. Anya almost spits her tea out in shock at Tilly''s sudden outburst. "I''m sorry, Tilly. I had to... Deal with a dungeon problem." I cover for myself with the world''s weakest excuse, Tilly rolls her eyes and sighs. The Aura around her disappears and I wonder if I was imagining it. I do have a tendency to over play things some times. "I''m not cut out for whatever that was! That wasn''t even a little bit close to healing magic. That was... I don''t even know what you did. You just... Bam, created a person, just like that. Right there! And then... What was that golden-ball thingy? Was that her soul? How did you even do that?" Me obviously doesn''t know that the word thing is awesome. Everyone uses it. Although it was probably the inky word I heard as Anya has my full attention. She looks as though she has seen a ghost, which I suppose is the truth under the current circumstances. Literally and figuratively. Better the spiritual visage of her best-friend than the oddly-suspicious wisp I was before. Anya doesn''t seem to reciprocate the sentiment I have for Spiritual Presence and has turned white at the sight of me. "So... Uh... Hey," I smile and wave. Screaming loudly before jumping behind a-still frustrated Tilly, Anya peeks around her to get a second look at the ghost in the room. "Huh? A-Abi?" Not daring to come out from behind Tilly, Anya begins to cry as her memories return in a flood of information. "Kal!?" she curses and quickly scans the room at she does. Seeing me must have triggered them to return somehow, not that I know for certain but it seems like a good guess. Personally, already being in the know is shitter than not knowing full stop. I''d of preferred her memories didn''t come back of she could have kept that smile. "A-Abi, what''s going on? Are we dead?" Dropping to her knees the shock of everything that''s happening is too much for Anya to process. The look I give Tilly says, "I thought you dealt with this shit?" as I crouch down next to the person I started my adventures with in what really is such a long time ago. I didn''t miss her, "How?" blank face as I tried to reassure my friend either. I don''t know? Thats why I left it to you. I can''t stop myself from crying, but I do keep a smile as I do. Without taking my eyes of Anya, the only thing I release through my will is pure, unrequited love and everyone feels it. Not only do they feel my passion, the return it tenfold and I send everyone''s feeling to Anya. Hoping to brighten her life, if only by a small fraction. Chapter 45: The Lords Arrival As they make their way down the main street, Lord Aldor can''t believe his eyes. The outlandish rumours he''d heard about a mountain town were true and in the same place as the last known location of Dungeon Categoriser Elric Highgrove no less. After having received similar reports from multiple sources regarding a spontaneously-growing mountain with extremely-strange vegetation, a new town springing up and information about his missing Categoriser, the Lord of Ishda took it upon himself to investigate the far-fetched, yet-interwoven claims. Assembling his private guard, consisting of more than three-dozen veteran-warriors each over level 30, Lord Aldor also summoned Elric''s only remaining Apprentice Anon. The least preferred of the three, but the only one left. He then had his space mages open a portal directly to Orad, the village closest to the mysterious mountain and the steady stream of strange reports. Upon their arrival, a heavy storm was raging down over the small farming town. The Lord and his men took shelter inside the Mayor''s building. His intention was to gather as much information as possible before setting off anyway. Knowledge is power as they say. However, without having to converse with anyone, the Lord and his men all gathered at the North-eastern window. No one said a word as the eye-catching phenomenon that was said to be growing and changing faster than naturally possible was easily visible to them in the distance. Even through the horrendous weather. If anything, it was hard not-to-notice the multicoloured work of unnatural beauty and fear combined, looming over the land in the distance. Pink and purple. Black and red. Green and blue. Brown and white. After speaking with Orad''s chief and waiting for the storm to pass, Lord Aldor, third-apprentice Anon, the Lord''s space mages and his guard detail all set off toward the terrifyingly-beautiful mountain, which somehow looked bigger than it did during the storm. It took them almost half the day to reach their destination. The Lord and his men noticed that they''d begun to see less and less monsters the closer they got. Eventually they stopped seeing traces of them all together. "My Lord. There are quite a lot of buildings but there is no wall. It would appear that there is a town ahead," a scout reports as they edge closer. After cautiously approaching with his entourage, unsure of what he might find, Lord Aldor was lost for words. When he heard mention of a new town founding itself beside the even-newer mountain in the forest, he was expecting something the size of Orad or even smaller. Maybe forty buildings max with a chief, a few guards and a shit-load of farmers. Instead, he finds himself looking upon a magnificent city. Marble work everywhere with hundreds upon hundreds of buildings lining the streets. Nothing looks out of place and some of the craftsmanship matches and even outclasses that found in his own city. Granted the masons and stoneworkers in Ishda do some amazing work, but there are more than a few buildings that catch the Lord''s eye due to their... Uniqueness. In terms of size, the city is almost close to that of Ishda. However, it''s harder to tell without a better vantage point. As they head inside the wall-less mountain city, happy faces go about their day-to-day activities whilst paying no mind to the stray Lord and his men. A friendly greeting or a passing nod is all the reception they receive until they hear the sound of horns blaring from the opposite end of town. Almost immediately, men and women start closing up their businesses and rush past them toward the direction the noise cam from. Caught up in his own curiosity, Lord Aldor follows the streaming crowd of people through the well-laid-out-streets until they reach a large circular building. All made from white stone, archways guide the citizens inside with multiple entrances. Inside, tunnels and hallways lead to plentiful seating that overlook an arena below. The host''s box can be seen from the seat Lord Aldor chooses and inside it he spots a few odd-looking individuals that catch his interest. Before he has a chance to make his way to the obviously-more-important seating area, two holes appear in the centre of the arena allowing the platforms below to rise up. Each one carries a different contender to the surface and as they step off the automated device, the ground seals back up and they face each other. Each person shows respect to the other and the event doesn''t look like a savage fight to the death. Even if everything else would suggest otherwise.They bow to the Ringmaster, the person at the front of the host box, before making one final show of recognition in Lord Aldor''s direction before they commence their match. "I should have come here sooner," Lord Aldor whispers to himself as he sits back down, forgetting his destination whilst captivated by the thrilling fight and magical displays, completely unaware that apprentice Catergoriser Anon disappeared shortly after their arrival.
I''m not oblivious to the group of people that arrive in my city whilst trying to be discreet. Unfortunately for them, they''re basicslly ants that are crawling across my body and alerting me to their presence all on their own. Thanks guys. I''ve been following them ever since they entered due to the unnecessary headache that my family was giving me. I know they''re only being helpful, but I had to open up all my connections and shout, "Stop!" before they ceased the constant bombardment of repetitive information. I can feel them too, you know!? Probably better than you lot and I''ve even it Me banging on my ear. I know that I said handling guard-duty and city-watch was going to be left solely to my Commanders, Mira and Hana, but even they were banging on about the importance of our guests. Plus, after my mind has just been information-blown, I may need to keep a closer eye on things. I''ve got to stop brushing my problems off. Especially since they keep coming back to bite me in the ass. Because of their arrival, I also had to end my brief reunion with Anya for a second time. This text was taken from Royal Road. Help the author by reading the original version there. Although it is a great reason to prolong an awkward conversation that I was certainly not handling the best. So, thanks again guys. Anyway, the fact that regular people can''t see or hear me is working in my favor today. Or at least it was until I spotted the youngest person in the entourage. White Robes with a single stripe, this lad''s obviously filling a certain missing-expert''s spot and is probably on the road to taking the role full time. It gave me a bit of a shock if I''m honest. Even though I can tell his profession by the design and colour of his robes, they''re exactly the same as the ones Katrina arrived in, I was still caught off guard when his eyes locked with mine. It could be because I''ve gotten used to skipping past my own citizens unnoticed that it semi-startled me. Either way, our short meeting of eyes has become a problem that needs addressing before anything else. As the entourage passes through the next building''s shadow, still following the crowd, no one notices the dallying apprentice fall through the ground as he disappears from sight. I didn''t do anything malicious to the curious, wide-eyed youth and in fact, I did him a favor. Within the many voices drilling me about the new arrivals, Katrina''s was easily one of the loudest and had the most information included with it. She even knew the identity of some of the people. I would have shown my gratitude had her explanation not statled me. The Lord of Ishda, another Catergoriser - albeit an apprentice, and a shit load of knights. Yeah. I definitely couldn''t just palm such an important person off on Hana and Mira, could I? It was right after Kat had finished explaining when the little shit caught sight of me. I did the first thing that came to mind and had one of my Assassins shadowport him to Apprentice A. Easy easy. Problem solved. Pat on the back for me. Although, I suppose I''m still palming my problems off onto someone else, even like that. Has that really become my M.O? My go-to? Let''s be honest, it''s working so far. Even if a little more diligent on my part wouldn''t be a bad thing. OK. After this I won''t just pass my problems off to anyone else. Hoping that Katrina will be able to talk some sense into apprentice B, I follow the Lord to try and find out the reason he''s here. There are quite a few though and not all of them are good. In fact, would he think any of them are good? Is he here because of what happened to Elric? Or, is it because the nearest towns and villages are scared about my growing mountain? It''s probably the fact that cities my-size don''t just pop up out of nowhere. They need commissioning, funding and most importantly for humans, time. I, on the other hand, spit in time''s face and build whatever I want instantly. Still, that doesn''t change the fact a city inside his region is growing faster than manure on the street. Populated areas like this don''t just sprout up within the span of a few months like flowers. Not on my scale and certainly not without his knowledge. There are so many different reasons. Hopefully he just wants to establish some sort of we-take-your-money tax and I''m probably fretting over nothing. Hopefully. Unfortunately, he didn''t have much else to say. All the way to the Coliseum, Lord Aldor didn''t utter a single word. His eyes, however, were everywhere and as I followed him, his curiosity was evident. It was only when the crowd reached their destination, with Lord Aldor and his men still following behind, that he spoke his first word since entering Varona, "Amazing!" I gotta admit though, I was quite pleased when he did finally speak. I mean, I hear the same words from my own citizens time after time, but it somehow seems different when a person in power compliments your shit. After that, he didn''t speak again until he was sat down. Fully immersed in the entertaining spectacle below. I also enjoyed my time. It was quite fun watching my own family face off against each other without the fear of death.
The Coliseum: Any training undertaking in this location will boost skill growth by 25% and level growth by 35% Fully engaging in combat and holding nothing back whilst in the ring will improve the chances of earning new titles and skills Let death no longer weigh you down as anyone that''s signed up to combat training is unable to die while on the Coliseum grounds and will be revived with no penalty Any skills, stats, levels or titles earned whilst in the Coliseum are permanent
Although, I''m not quite sure how they avoid pain. I''m pretty sure that part is a given but I suppose they''re levelling up faster than they were before and it''s not like anyone''s complained yet. Anyway, the Lord seemed to enjoy himself watching our entertainment and in my head I''m chalking that up as a second point to me. The first was how taken he was with my city. It''s quite strange in a sense. Not the fact that he enjoyed the deathless fight, but that he stuck around for two more afterwards. He''s obviously come for a reason, but instead it looks as though he has gotten caught up in the moment. Should I make the first move? I mean, he obviously sent the Categoriser here in the first place. Right? If so then that means he knows there''s a dungeon here. The Academy does a great job of hiding it but that apprentice should have known where he was the moment he entered the city!
It''s hard to answer that without more information but you always manage to work things out in the end. Somehow.
That''s kinda true, thoughts of the Hay Bale spring to mind. Screw it. Let''s do this. I search for a good vassal to speak through but before I can call out to anyone, Lord Aldor''s belly rumbles almost as loud as the crowd''s cheering. That settles that then. Killing two birds with one stone, I summon Ali. Ever prepared, as sometimes I wonder if she''d make a better Core than I do, The Chef arrives besides the stands with multiple dishes lined up on a tray. She approaches the Lord, but is stopped by his guards less than ten feet away. I knew that would probably happen though. Lords and Kings are always well protected from assassination and poison attempts. "Let the lady pass. Can you not smell that divine aroma?" the Lord orders. Wow, just like that, huh? Maybe I should send Ali on Syndicate missions? So much for caution. "But.. My Lord, you... We are here to..." "I know why we are here. Now. Let her pass." The dejected guard does as he''s commanded and lets my chef through. The idea of poisoning and then eating a Lord flickers to mind before I quickly shake it. "My Lord." His guards though? I''d eat those guy if given the chance. Stopping Ali, how dare they? Lowering her head, The Chef uses the correct etiquette and places the tray beside Lord Aldor before taking up the seat next to it. Much to the growing dismay of his personal guard. My huner is also growing and it''s not because I can''t taste what he can this time. "What is that heavenly smell?" he asks, salivating a little. I am trying my best not too, lest a dungeon must descend that we could all do without. The day''s going so well. "I made this especially for you. To start with you have Eton soup, named aptly because all the ingredients used are sourced directly from that particular forest. Following that is slow-roasted Elder Boar and wild vegetables. Cooked to perfection, you won''t find a better cut of meat. Finally, for dessert there is freshly-made ice-cream and berries." Ali smiles whilst proudly announcing the three-hit combo. I might eat the Lord after all. Chapter 46: A Show of Force I''m so jealous right now. The Lord of Ishda is thoroughly enjoying the cuisine that was served up by our very own Gourmet. The same food that I''m still unable to eat. The same damn food that always looks so good everytime I see it. It brings tears to my eyes even my Core is crying because it looks that good. Yet all I can do is take in the delectable aroma of her magnificent work. My spiritual nose works fine and is really good at identifying individual smells, yet anything I try and touch still phases through my grasp. I''m not even going to start with you. I''ve got guests today and I could do without being labeled for destruction because you wouldn''t know jack shit about a proper skill if it slapped you in the face. I mean... I''m sorry. Please don''t turn Anya into a Necromancer. Being a Dungeon Core is a tough gig. I''m not even allowed to be angry. "Young Lady, you absolutely must come to Ishda and work for me. This starter alone is just divine." Lord Aldor''s eyes glaze over as he relishes his food, thoroughly enjoying the matches that play out below. Once his three-course meal is over and the third fight comes to an end, he brings his full attention to Ali. "My compliments to the chef," he smiles politely whilst rubbing a bulging belly. Stay down jealousy. "You are most welcome, my Lord. I''m glad it was all to your satisfaction," Ali answers with the poise of a Noble woman and my petty emotion is swept aside by curiosity. It tries to creep back in, but gets beaten down by curiosity''s broomstick the second time and doesn''t return for a third. I''ve got no idea where she learned that from. "You must thank your Master for me as well." At the mention of the elephant in the room, both myself and Ali are left speechless. "Whatever do you mean, my Lord?" Composing herself much better than I do, Ali answers for both of us as I''m at still at a loss for words. It was one of the possibilities that I was entertaining, the fact that he came here aware of me, or rather my dungeon. I just didn''t expect him to call us out on it like that. First the apprentice caught me off-guard and now the Lord as well, I really need to steel my nerves better. I don''t remember being this worrisome when I was still a Rogue. Showing his disbelief, Lord Aldor''s eyes don''t leave Ali''s as she tries her best to maintain her composure. Impressively, she does a really good job. Much better than I would and am. Especially when you consider the fact that I can feel her nervousness coming through our connection. It makes me feel even worse because it''s probably a reflection of my own and she''s having to endure it because of me. "Do you take my Lord for a fool, girl?" Gren, Lord Aldor''s head-guard, has apparently had enough of Ali being so close to his Lord. At over six-foot tall and wearing a full-suit of armour, I suppose he would look rather intimidating to any regular person. "Not at all, I only came to offer the Lord a hearty meal after his long travel." Without any words coming from me, Ali does well to keep up her act. I, on the other hand, really need to step-up my game. Not that this charade is getting us anywhere. I want to say ''How did he notice!?'' But that would just be another stupid question in the ever-growing list of embarrassing things I''ve said so far. Anyone who has never travelled this way before and those making their way here from a different region, wouldn''t think twice about how fast the city that they''re migrating to has grown, or how it started out. Their worries on arrival consist of whether or not they will have a roof over their heads and food in their bellies. In fact, other than Lord Aldor, who else is going to think that a Dungeon Core runs a city? Lord Aldor however, is the ruler of the Ishda Province. It''s his job to know the intricate details that go on inside his borders, right? I can only imagine that when he turned up, awestruck and potentially angry at this new-non-tax paying city that has magically appeared next to the equally-shocking-in-its-own-right mountain, he was pretty stumped too. He was probably as shocked then as I was by his words a moment ago regarding Ali''s Master. It''s obvious he wouldn''t think that there was a town here. There never has been. Ever. Not until now that is and I don''t plan to let this place go, not when things are finally going well. Actually, if we ignore my list of carpet-swept problems we could even say that things are going really well. Or they were at least, until this guy and his entourage turned up throwing a fork in my gears. "Ali, ask him why he''s here." This could either go really good or really bad as my non-confrontational Chef poses the question to Lord Aldor. The author''s content has been appropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon. Ali''s never been one for violence. She''s the nicest person you could ever meet and she''s always happy to lend a hand to anyone in need. To be honest I don''t know where she got her personality from, but it can''t have been me. Now that I think about it, Noir''s another example of how they''ve grown differently to me in terms of personality and traits. I was never a showoff or loud and boisterous, at least I don''t think I was. If anything, I tried my best to be as quiet and stealthy as I possibly could be. "I''ve come to hold a conversation with the dungeon," he answers blatantly, catching me off guard once again. How can he be so forward about this situation? I know I''m the Dungeon Core in this party, but this is still unprecedented territory. Isn''t it? People don''t go around just talking to dungeons, do they? How do I go with the flow from that? Even though I''ve gotten rather powerful, it''s still strange being in the presence of a ruler.
Technically, you are also a ruler. You rule the dungeon and now everything on it.
Yes, yes. Queen Abi, but I can''t goof off right now. What should I say to him?
Get Ali to repeat her question. He''s come here to talk so ask him what he wants.
Sometimes, Me, I don''t know what I would do without you.
I can almost say the same. There are times where you think outside the box and surprise me. There are other times, however...
Yeah, yeah. Let''s just stop at praising me, shall we? "OK, Ali. You heard the almost-man. Ask that shit." "At first it was to investigate the ridiculous claims that I kept on recieving. People are worried about the city that has spontaneously appeared beside this... Extraordinary sight." Looking up at my mountain from inside the Coliseum, Lord Aldor shakes his head in disbelief but chooses his words wisely. "However, after seeing this place first hand, I''m actually rather impressed and I''ve already arrived at a decision. I will claim this place in the name of Ishda and add it to our might!" "I don''t think so buddy. I don''t mean to be rude, but you can fuck off." This time, instead of having to think of an answer it comes naturally. Not that it was polite or reasonable and now that I am thinking about it maybe a firm ''No'' would have been better, but I''m tired of people turning up and trying to claim what''s mine. The effort I''ve put in and the hardships I''ve been through to create this place won''t be wasted by handing my city over to someone else. There''s no way that''s going to happen. Not without a fight. The problem with fighting though means that the residents are likely to catch-on to the fact that their peaceful new-home is in fact a man-eating dungeon. I''d rather it didn''t come to that, but I''ll make preparations just in case. Seeing as how the cat is already out of the bag, a show of force might be all that''s needed without it turning into an actual battle. I send a message to Light informing him of the situation and what I want from him. As soon as I''m finished, Ali''s shadow triples in size. It doesn''t go unnoticed by the three dozen people that Lord Aldor brought with him and the guards unsheath their weapons whilst the Mages begin to chant. "What are you doing?" Gren shouts as he points his blade at Ali. "Nothing, I swear. Someone else is coming to talk," she reponds politely, still being as gracious as she can. "Lies! What are you doing!?" The head guard shouts at Ali again as her shadow begins to darken until it is pitch black. "Oh. How interesting." Lord Aldor is the only one to take a different view on what''s happening in the shadow of The Chef. Slowly, and with all the grandeur he can muster, Light begins to rise from the darkness. With every inch of his body that appears, so too does the pressure of his presence that he''s been allowed to release in the contained area. By the time he has fully emerged, all the Lord''s guards have been forced to their knees by Light''s will alone. "Lord Aldor. Light here is just one man yet he has reduced your men to grovelling worms without even raising a finger. As our master is benevolent, she has spared you from such humiliation as it would be considered undignified for one such as yourself. I am sorry for deceiving you earlier, but you should understand why it is necessary. My Master is willing to talk with you if that is still your wish, but in no way will we relinquish the city," placing her fist on her chest, Ali smiles and bows lightly. Light is standing there smug as fuck looking down at the guardsmen on the ground. Do you think the power''s gone to his head?
He has always been a bit of a showman.
Show-off would be a better description. I''ve got to hand it to him though, he never let''s me down. Staring at Light, Lord Aldor looks him over. Never in his life has he met someone strong enough to reduce his entire guard to their knees. Not only the guards, but the Space Mages have also been incapacitated meaning any chance of escape for him has already been lost. As Light''s presence pierces Lord Aldor''s conviction, he sighs and raises his hands, "Okay. You win. I can clearly see that I''m outmatched here. Gren, stand down now. Lady Ali, I would be happy to have that conversation with your master if they would still permit it." I nod and explain the specifics of what will happen next to Ali, who then in-turn relays my words to Lord Aldor. "Preposterous! I will never let you talk with my Lord without me!" Gren shouts after hearing that Lord Aldor and Ali will be leaving alone. Not that it does him any good as he''s still held by the power of Light''s will. "Gren! This is an order. When you are released from that man''s... Whatever it is... Go get some dinner or something and wait for me." Everyone''s mouth drops open at the casual statement spoken by their Lord. Even mine. "But... But... But..." Gren tries to appeal but is swiftly rebutted again. "No buts. Go get some food, take in the sights, but do not cause any problems. Do you understand?" Unable to refuse a direct order from his Lord, Gren sighs before agreeing, "Yes, my Lord." "Good. Now that that is settled, lead the way, Lady Ali." Smiling politely and gesturing with his hand, Lord Aldor follows Ali out of the Colliseum and they head out into town. Chapter 47: Whos Got Problems? Inside City Hall, Mayor Kana is trembling as she waits for Abi, Ali and Lord Aldor to arrive. She isn''t fearful of the dungeon''s latest guest, but instead she''s afraid of messing up the important conversation that her master wishes her to hold. "Why me? Why did I have to be chosen as the Mayor?" She slides the paperwork that''s in front of her out of the way and slumps down on the desk.
It was just your time. What else can I say?
"Oh! Sorry, Me. That question was more rhetorical if anything," she laughs.
In that case, nevermind.
"I don''t actually mind being the Mayor. It is a tough gig, but complaining about it let''s me blow off a bit of steam. Thank you though, Me. I appreciate your words regardless," she says whilst lifting her head up from solid oak. "Sadly though, they don''t seem to be helping my courage. I just don''t want to mess up the meeting for Master." There is a knock at the door and Deputy-Mayor Sacha enters, lifting her superior''s mood tenfold with what she carries in her hands. "Is that..." "Yes, Madam Mayor," Sacha smiles and adjusts her glasses. She knows exactly how to work her boss up and get her to perform to the best of her abilities. "Can I try a little piece now?" Mayor Kana''s eyes are sparkling at the delicious treat that''s pulling on her heart strings and she clutches her desk so hard it threatens to break. "Nope. This is for after your meeting. If you do a good job, you can have the whole thing." Kana''s eyes are now watering at the thought of eating the entire heavenly dessert after her meeting. "The whole thing? That''s awesome! But can''t I just have like a little slice now? You know, to get me ready for my meeting?" "I''m sorry madam Mayor, but it''s for afterwards. When we have finished however, I may treat you to something extra, if you''re still hungry." "I love you, Sacha. You''re the best." Sacha disappears and Mayor Kana assumes she''s gone to store the delicious dessert so it doesn''t spoil. She can barely contain her anticipation for the sweet treat she''s to receive after she''s done. As thoughts of forks filled with frivolous delicacies flicker through Mayor Kana''s mind, there''s a second knock at the door and Deputy Mayor Sacha enters once again. "Why didn''t you just teleport back?" she asks her treat-less deputy. "I would have but the Master is almost here with Lord Aldor. They will arrive in less than a minute." Deputy Mayor Sacha answers and watches as her superior''s face drops into despair. "Already! I''m not ready! What am I going to do, Sacha?" Kana begins to tidy up her office at light speed in a futile attempt to make the cluttered room more presentable. It wouldn''t matter if she had an hour, however, as clusters of invoices and other varying notices are stacked all around her office. "All you have to do is speak for the Master. That''s it. She isn''t expecting anything else from you so calm down and take your seat." Deputy Mayor Sacha places her hand on the handle and waits for Mayor Kana to take her seat. Begrudgingly, she does as she''s told and sits down. "Are you ready?" Sacha asks her not-so-fearless leader, once she has taken her seat. All she can do is shake her head in response and Sacha rolls her eyes. Sacha believes that her Master must have imbued her with a ridiculous amount of patience to be able to cope with her superior. "Good. Let''s begin then!"
As the Deputy Mayor opens the door for the three of us, I''m feeling raher confident. Sacha has the capability, and more, to run this place if I ever needed her to. If she would have been born genuinely, through childbirth, it''s safe to say she would have excelled in whatever career path she chose. How lucky am I! After seeing Mayor Kana''s pale face, however, the confidence I earned from her deputy has taken a little bit of a dive. Quivering slightly behind her desk she literally jumps up to greet us, banging into the wooden object in the process. I''m hoping that the reason she looks so pale and clammy is to do with all the paperwork laying around, not the pressure of this meeting that I inconveniently dropped in her lap. I know I''m, The Master, or whatever, but I can''t help but feel sorry for doing it to her. I know that it''s my fault that she''s in this situation, but I''d be furious if someone tried to palm all their work off on me and scheduled meetings out of the blue like this. It''s not like I could have said, "It''s a bit short on notice, how about next week?" Is it? I inwardly apologise to Kana and leave Ali behind at the door. I''m quite shocked that the appearance of The Chef didn''t lift the Mayor''s spirits. Everyone knows how infatuated she is with Ali''s delicacies. It''s definitely gotta be the pressure. Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings.
She was in a state of sorts before you arrived. She is constantly relying on Deputy Mayor Sacha for aid also.
Really? It''s a good job Sacha''s here then. I''m dreading to think how the town would have coped without her. As more problems weigh down on me, I greet a sweaty Kana and she greets us back. Lord Aldor also seems to be coping better than my Mayor as he introduces himself. Usually he would have someone do this for him, but I set strict stipulations for our meeting. He did, after all, come to me. He''s doing especially well when you consider the fact that he is inside, what most people consider to be, a dangerous monster. He must need or want something from me for him to go this far, right? "OK, let''s get straight to business. Please ask him what he needs from us, Kana. He''s super direct so we may aswell be," I smile at the Mayor, trying to lighten the mood. It doesn''t seem to work, however, as she robotically monotones my question to our guest. I''ve seen zombies with more gusto than that! I feel a twinge on my cheek as my prior confidence is now sinking like a ship crossing the seas with no protection a bazillion holes. Lord Aldor on the other hand, only seemed to hear what he wanted to. "Please, I beg of you." He drops to his knees. "There are quite a few... Problems that I have come to seek aid with. Your help in any of them would be greatly appreciated." Lord Aldor doesn''t come across as one of those pompous and pretentious nobles. The high and mighty we''re-better-than-you type, money can buy us anything and we''ve got more of it than sense. Instead, he seems genuine and if we''re being honest, desperate. A far cry from how he acted in front of his men in the Colliseum. Now that he''s separated from the people that came with him, Lord Aldor has broken down into an emotional wreck and he certainly isn''t portraying the composure a man of his station should. Once again, I find myself caught off-guard by yet another stupidly-awkward scenario. Why the Lord of an entire region is prostrating himself, before my monotone Mayor no less, is something I''d rather not deal with. But, as it''s more than likely to benefit me in the future, and after I swore to stop sweeping problems under the rug and ditching them on other people, I suppose I can at least hear what he has I say. As I look back at Mayor Kana to give her the next set of lines, the sight of her almost compares to that of the kow-towing Lord Aldor. Stiff faced, with sweat profusely-dripping down her brow, Kana''s eyes have rolled to the back of her skull and she appears to have developed an extremely-bad twitch. Is she dying?
She appears to be going through some... Sort of crisis.
I don''t know what to say to that! "OK then. Deputy Mayor Sacha, please ask Lord Aldor why he feels the need to act so... So... Not noble?" Struggling to find words of my own after seeing Kana''s compromised state, I also zombie through most of the meeting. Much like my Mayor.
Not noble? Seriously, Abi?
I... Couldn''t think of anything else to say, sorry.
Anything? Anything at all? There are a great multitude of words that would have fit better than, not noble. Non Aristocratic! Undignified! Even unnoble would have been acceptable.
OK. OK. I''ll remember those smart-ass words for the next time a foreign dignitary comes knocking on our door. The Deputy Mayor steps up to the task of filling in for her poor-performing senior and does fantastically. Delivering every word with charm and grace, Sacha even changes my sentences with words I don''t know and it make me sound more intelligent. She has Lord Aldor''s complete attention and mine. He hasn''t even noticed the malfunctioning Mayor in the background since he lifted his head from the floor. "M-My Daughter! I had a dream to cone here. Please, if you can help with anything, please let it be this. She''s been kidnapped and is being held for ransom. It happened two days ago. My best trackers have been unable to locate any sign of her. Please! I''m willing to pay the ransom, but I''m scared that they''re going to kill her anyway! I don''t want my baby to die! Please! Please!" Breaking down into a blubbering mess, the Lord of Ishda begins a wailing session that could almost match for own. Holy shit! Why does everything have to be crazy as fuck for a Dungeon Core? And how did The Syndicate worm its way into the Lord of the region''s dreams? Although the bigger issue on that front is, what''s he''s going to pay me with? You would think that being a dungeon would be a relatively-peaceful existence. Secluded away in some mountainous region, far removed from would-be murderers and Categorisers. So why is mine not going that way? Did all my luck get swapped for exponential growth or was it sucked out of me when I used those Gachas? Dooming me to have strangely-awkward encounters everytime I meet someone new? I hope not. "OK. What else? You''re clearly better at this than I am, Sacha. You have full permission to speak about whatever you need to with the lord." I encourage the Deputy Mayor to continue questioning Lord Aldor on his other problems. "I''m sure that more than half of my ministers are embezzling money from the city treasury. We have excellent commerce in the capital and the treasurer has been in his position since I took power. He''s close to a lot of the senior officials and I''m beginning to suspect major corruption." More than half of his Ministers? Seriously!? How is Ishda still functioning as a region? Those are two pretty-fucking-hefty problems that he has. Wouldn''t you agree, Me? Would the Syndicate even be up for a large-scale mission like that?
Probably. From what we have seen so far, your monsters are leagues above the average capabilities of humans already.
That''s true, but what have I said about calling them monsters? Our family sounds much better than your monsters, don''t you agree? Before I can consider the number of Assassins to send out, or argue semantics with Me, Lord Aldor drops another bomb in my lap. "I''m pretty sure the other half of my ministers are planning a coup as well!" He loves dropping those bombshells doesn''t he, all whilst nodding away like it''s common knowledge. A coup, as well as a kidnapping, on top of the multiple light-fingered ministers. What the fuck? He doesn''t need a lot does he?
I''m taking that as sarcasm.
You would be correct. God damn! I thought I had problems. This poor bastard has it even harder than I do. Not that I have kids, but some parents properly dote on theirs. Lord Aldor seems to be that type of man. It''s obvious when you look at the tears running down his face. His daughter is his number one priority. The actual problem is that he''s got so much shady shit going on under his nose, his daughter''s kidnapping has just toppled the mountain. I can only see my help turning into a problem, if I''m being honest. This sounds like a lot of rather large jobs opposed to one big one. Let''s summon some Assassins then, shall we? Chapter 48: Anya I watch as a few select Assassins are transported by space magic, along with the Lord and his men, to his city, Ishda. I almost shed a tear as they disappear until I remember that they''re off to better the world and to help me while they''re at it. There were quite a few jobs that the apparently-useless lord decided to drop in our laps after all. What sort of Lord is he anyway? If he knew about the other problems in his city, before his daughter was kidnapped, shouldn''t he have done something about them then? Just what has he been doing all this time while the shadows have been planning a rebellion and emptying his coffers? His daughter''s abduction is like a rotten cherry on top of a mouldy cake. Why did I agree? In fact, don''t answer that, please. I know why I did it. If we do a good-enough job, then the Lord will have to accept my city as part of his province. If that happens, it gives Varona the credibility it needs to become widely accepted throughout Tira, hopefully. All-in-all I sent three-dozen Assassins to the capital. Noir, Carrie and Dropper went with them to lead three individual squads, each with their own mission. Carrie''s job is to find the ministers who are embezzling funds from the treasury. I told her to start with the treasurer himself, but after that her squad will have to follow the paper trail. Dropper''s task is to find the kidnappers'' hideout and rescue the Lord''s daughter. I told her to start in the Lady''s bedchambers before she moves her search to the seedy side of Ishda. Noir''s mission is a simple one. He doesn''t really need a squad for it either. They''re there for other reasons and just in case something goes wrong. Which I''m expecting to happen. Prince Loudmouth is to spread word of how great the Lord of Ishda is to try and oust any rebellious naysayers. His squad will also be watching for people relaying messages so that they can identify the sources of the coup. If something is going to go wrong, it''s definitely going to be with Noir. I can just feel it in my non-existent bones. It''s as though it''s happening right now, Me.
Don''t be ridiculous. I know you''re connected to your... Our family, but you can''t sense that he''s causing a fuss.
I''m telling you. Right now, out there, Noir is pissing someone off with his big mouth. Hopefully, it''s the right people. Teleporting back to Tilly''s Clinic, I''m hoping it''s third time''s a charm on the person I had to put off twice. Inside the Cleric''s office, I''m greeted by a furious Anya. "What the hell, Abi? I''m actually dead! And you''re a fucking Dungeon Core? How the hell did that happen? And how did you even bring me back to life?" Before I can even get a word in, however, I''m berated with questions. Anya doesn''t seem to be afraid of my spirit form anymore either. I know quite well how anger can overtake everything else. "If I explain it, you won''t be happy with how little I know, or how it sounds," I start. Hoping Anya will leave it at that, but her glare screams, "Continue." "I swear to the gods, Anya, it won''t make sense. There was this golden sun-thingy, strings of thread that echoed your voice calling my name, your bones even disappeared when I absorbed them before I could stop it happening. I was pushing and pulling... It was absolutely crazy. Although, I suppose that''s still nowhere near as mental as the fact that I''m actually Dungeon Core now, huh?" The only expression on my friends face is confusion. I think I''m smiling, but for all known probably look as confused to her. "Start with how you became a dungeon instead." She moves around me looking through my ghostly visage. "Some bullshit to do with a lazy-ass God and a System that''s been running ever since he abandoned it. Or so Me told me. When he got into it, I was still angry over the whole, hey, you''re a Dungeon Core now, ordeal and I didn''t pay as much attention as I probably should have done." "At least some things never change," Anya smiles, happy to see that I''m still me. Remembering the girl who would often fall asleep in class. "Who''s Me? Have you started talking to yourself as well now? You were eccentric as hell before, but now..." Anya is grinning as she teases me, leaving the ending of her sentence open. "I''m not eccentric. Just a little quirky. And Me is the name of my personal Voice Activated User Notification System. That''s a mouthful to say so I just call him Me. And he can talk to anyone who''s dungeon-related too. Say hi." Anya looks at Tilly who only nods as though its obvious she can talk to a dungeon assistant named Me. Why wouldn''t it be? My friend then frowns at me like I''m trying to play a trick on her. I mean, it wouldn''t be the first time, but that''s what friends do, right? Only this time I''m actually being genuine. "Me. Will you say hello first, please. It makes it easier." I said it out loud so that Anya wont be startled when he does as I ask. Instead, I end up looking exactly how it sounds, crazy. Don''t ignore me to make me look like a fool.
I don''t know what you mean.
Haha, Mr. Funny man. Hilarious. Now will you please say hi to my friend so that she doesn''t think I''m crazy.
What if you are a little crazy though?
Me!
Yes. Yes. It was funny though.
Yeah. Now you decide to understand humour correctly. Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel. I smile at Anya, who only looks back at me skeptically until her eyes open wide and she jumps in shock.
Hello, Anya. It''s a pleasure to finally meet you.
"Holy Shit! There''s something inside my head." Anya freaks out, even though I literally just told her about Me. "Don''t over dramatise it. It''s nothing special like that. It''s just Me. Not me," I point at myself, "But Me. He''s cleaning chests right now." After finishing my sentence, I wish I had never said it. "Abi, I''m more confused now than before." Anya sits down holding her head and Tilly serves her a drink. "Yeah, I could have probably named him better, but welcome to my world. You wouldn''t believe half of the shit that has happened to me since I became a Dungeon Core." For the next few hours, my best friend in the whole world, who was dead until today and only a haunting voice, listens to me prattle on about my hardships whilst becoming more confused in the process. I tell her about Elric and his boss, the local lord, who has only just left my lands after begging for our help. I explain where we are, what I''m doing, or trying to do, and anything else I can think of. "But I swear, the fucking Hay Bale pisses me off something rotten! Oh! I have an academy too where people can study magic. Can you believe it? Not that it''s in use yet. If I remember right, I need to get a teacher class or something like that. I need to look into that soon actually." In fact, I''m pretty sure Mayor Kana had asked when it was opening once or twice. Maybe the citizens are intrigued by the dark arts. "Anyway, I have a proposition for you," I smile bitterly. Deep down I''m sulking as I watch Anya drink tea. Tilly is sitting at her desk, drifting off in what-looks-to-be a comfortable chair. One day! "Oh. Pray tell, " I pique her interest as she blows the steam off her hot drink. "Well, seeing as how you''re sort-of alive again, you can do whatever you want now. Even if you want to leave, thats totally cool and I won''t stop you or anything. You''re my friend before everything else and you always will be. That said, I would really love it if you stayed in my city and worked in surgery with Tilly. I know your healing magic will be a blessing here. Oh. And you can have your own house too. You don''t even have to pay rent or anything. I''ll just give it to you." Something is nagging in the back of my mind, but I can''t quite work out what it is. "Are you serious? How can you offer me so much like that?" Ever the skeptic, Anya can''t believe the offer she is being handed. "I told you. There are thousands of people that live in Varona right now. Every night, each person generates a set amount of points that I get to use on whatever I want. At the minute, I''m loaded, babe." Anya laughs at my stupid behaviour. "Plus, you''re my best friend. Why wouldn''t I give you a house after giving thousands of randos one?" "True. Okay then, Dungeon Core Abi. I''d love to live here. Gods, I can''t believe you''re just giving me a house. That''s all I ever wanted you know?" "Yeah. I know. Hook, line and sinker, biatch!" I reel her in with my invisible fishing rod. "You scoundrel," she laughs, "However, there is one problem." before grimacing. "I''d be surprised if there wasn''t with my luck. What is it?" "I''m not a Cleric anymore." Instantly, I know what the nagging feeling was from before. Fuck! I knew there was something. She''s an unspecified Magus now. "Ok. It''s alright. In that case we just need to go down to the Mages Guild to get you back on your feet. So to say." I get up and begin moving towards the door. Anya jumps up and follows me without any hesitation. "You have a mages guild here as well?" She''s still finding it hard to believe me. As we leave Tilly''s Clinic, Anya follows me down the street and her doubts disappear. "Of course. I built it myself too, and it''s run by my own mages." The sun beats down from its position in the sky. An orange light fills the air as the evening draws to a close and the night is taken over by darkness. I''m glad her first view of the city was during the last lights of day. It makes every look serene. "That''s... Actually pretty cool, Abi." Across from the clinic, the city line begins and rows of houses lead in toward the city centre. Behind, and around, the detached buildings are empty plots of land that I''ve already purchased. "I know. Praise me more, Anya." I laugh. It was a great idea to build a medical building close to the general population. I float in front of Anya, leading the way, as we head into the city. The houses could still be improved and I might even do that soon, but for now they are good enough. Uniform rows of terraced houses run neatly along the street as we follow them towards our destination. As we''re approaching the Mages Guild, I notice that Anya is visibly shaking. "What''s the matter?" Worried about my friend, I can''t help but ask. "What if I don''t become a cleric again?" Her question causes me to burst out in laughter. I''ve gotten so used to crazy shit happening on a day-to-day basis that I forgot people are supposed to worry about what will happen before it actually happens. In my case I usually worry after I''ve made my bed. "Pffft. Don''t worry about it. There''s probably a 99% chance that you won''t be a Cleric again. You''re not just a simple Mage anymore, you know? You''re a Magus now. Your base stats and general skills will be completely different than you remember. Honestly. I summoned a Rogue when I was first reincarnated as a Dungeon Core and he''s ranked up three times since then." Anya''s eyes widen at my words as she stops at the entrance. "Seriously Anya, it''s crazy fast. My rogue, Light is unbelievably strong. Stronger than anyone I''ve ever seen, now or in my past life. He''s just... On another level. Also, not that I want to scare you, but Magus is the third tier in the mage line. At level 80 you can rank up into whatever comes next. I''ve got no idea what that is, but I bet it''s as strong as Light, if not stronger. Have you looked at your status yet?" "No... I''ve been enjoying our time.. I hadn''t thought about it until now... Level 80?... Hang on," she looks through her status before nodding, "Alright... Ok... Let''s do this then." "I told you it was different, didn''t I?" "When I became a mage my base magic started at 10. Being my main attribute, this was the highest figure I had." Anya walks into the guild, no longer shaking but with a new resolve. "What''s your magic now then? I could look myself, but it would be rude of me." She frowns at me. "You can look yourself if you want. I don''t mind. My Intelligence is at 30, even though I''m level 1. Is that because I''m a third tier mage like you said? My intelligence had only reached 29 when I died, yet it''s higher now than it was then. I can only imagine the boosts I''m going to get along the way too thanks to having a better class!" "It''s another one of those ''because I''m the Dungeon Core'' answers. And yeah, I can only see you getting stronger too. More than that though, I''m just super psyched you''re here, Anya." "I''ll admit. It''s strange. Broaching on weird-as-fuck, but I can get behind it. If there''s one thing I remember more than anything else, it''s that you''re my friend. My best friend. That and I really didn''t want to die. Thank you, Abi. I''m glad to be back." We register Anya with the mage behind the desk. He then leads us to the specialisation stone and the Magus places her hand on its surface. This is her second time doing this, so she''s not unfamiliar with the process. Even so, I''m right next to her as she waits. Light is emitted on contact, but it only lasts a few seconds. Once it''s gone, Anya removes her hand and turns to me. "I''m a... Rainbow Mage?" Chapter 49: Me and Myself Tweddledum and Tweedledee are making their way back to Varona. Having just finished a Syndicate mission, they are leisurely walking beside a slow-running stream. They stop for a second to take in the beautiful sight of nature until Dum breaks the blissful silence. "So, how are things going between you and Mystique?" Dee has now been on a few dates with the Assassin in question and his partner seems to be curious. "It''s actually going quite well. We had dinner at Ali''s the other evening. It was perfect. On the way out, I''m sure I saw you and Talia hitting it off." Dee has been waiting for the right time to tell his friend that he had noticed them before. "What? It was... I was... She''s Talia, you know? Everyone knows her. She wouldn''t be interested in a goof like me. That beauty is reserved for someone better than me." Not intending to stir up such feelings in his friend, Dee can''t help but be saddened at Dum''s self-deprecating words. "Don''t be ridiculous. You''re a great guy, when you''re not purposely trying to annoy me," he says causing them both to laugh. "Thanks, bro. For the sake of the Core, I can''t get her out my head. Her eyes are like icicles that pierce my soul everytime she looks at me. Her hair the sky, ever surrounding me in its feathersome embrace." "Since when did you start reciting poetry? That was deep shit!" Dee''s quite shocked at his partner''s honesty. Normally he keeps his own feelings well hidden. "She captivates my heart. Damn it, Dee! Since you brought her up, I can''t stop thinking about her." He shakes his fist in his friend''s direction. "If we were all human, people would think she was Light''s sister." Dee''s words run through Dum''s brain. "Why would you say that? Now..." "Well, we''re all related in a way." Dum looks at his partner and shakes his head. "You''ve just made it weird..." The rest of the journey home is carried out in silence. Dee plans an evening with Mystique while Dum imagines Light, standing behind Talia with his hand on her shoulder. His eyes threaten anyone that dares harm his beloved sister. No man, or monster, safe from his wrath. ''Damn it, Dee!'' Dungeon Stories Volume 2
The significance of what I''d done was lost on me, right up until Anya had recieved her class. Which, because it was random as hell, is probably what caused foolishness to wash over me like a cold shower. What I''ve done for my best friend, in the spur of the moment, I can also do for my partner. The person I''ve been banging on about creaing a body for ever since he started showing emotion. The idea of waiting until I have all the elemental skills has been thrown out of the window with Abi the Idiot. Truth be told, I don''t even know what will happen if I try to create a body that way. Instead, without even thinking about possibilities, I prevented the Magus'' body summoned for Anya from coming with a soul. If I knew it was that easy, then I would have done it for Me a long time ago. We head back to the clinic and I leave Anya in Tilly''s capable hands, her surgery is already starting fill up with regular citizens. After agreeing to meet up later, I teleport to the core room to see what I can do for Me. I haven''t mentioned it to him yet. I think it will be funnier to just chuck him into a body. I''m also hoping that after the encounter with Anya''s soul, myself and Me''s will be easier to differentiate between. Otherwise I could end up ripping myself out of my own body instead. A terrible thought, indeed. The sight that greets me as I appear in my core room, however, is more than enough to snap me out of my thoughts. "Colin! Who''s that?" I point at the Mimic next to him. A Silver Chest is licking the dust of the bronze one beside it as my King Mimic watches. Colin looks at the Mimic before he faces me again and shrugs. Does he think I''m angry? I love Mimics. I''m that overjoyed at the sight of another Mimic, Colin''s bl¨¢ze attitude doesn''t even faze me. Mimics cost 20,000DP each! That''s just short of what I earn on a daily basis, but I still can''t afford to blow my points on the little cuties. Not that they do much for their extortionate price, except drool and skitter around. Looking around the room, all the Silver Chests that I gave to Colin are gone and ten new Mimics are sporting silver rims. It doesn''t take a genius to work out what''s happened. Somehow, Colin has turned the other chests into drool-dropping Mimics all by himself. It could have something to do with that time he ate pieces of my Core, but I''m not exactly an expert on Mimics or dungeon''in. It seems plausible enough though. After placing a few more Silver Chests, to keep an eye on what Colin does with them, I summon a soulless, male Assassin onto the floor next to them. Not like I usually would though. This time is special. I push as many points as I can into the Assassin''s creation, trying to make its body as strong as possible. The end result is a magnificent specimen of a man. He''s toned in places that I didn''t even know possessed muscle. I can only tell this because an armour-like fabric that I''ve never seen before is moulded to his body. Before my partner can get a word in, I begin to pull his system-created soul out from my own. A bright ball of orange light is pulled out from my spirit form and I can''t help but say, "I knew it," as green tendrils cling to the precious entity. Briefly hearing a scream, although unsure whether it was myself or Me, I push on as fast as possible and force the separated soul in my hand into the Assassin on the floor. A few seconds pass as I gasp for breath. My ghostly body doesn''t need oxygen, but my mind feels as though it''s just been through great trauma and hyperventilating feels necessary. Plus, it makes me feel better. The Assassin''s eyes spring open and the first thing I notice is that they''re the same colour as my Core. Sitting up in a panic, Me scans the room until hs finds you cause. He doesn''t appear to be too pleased, but it''s hard to tell as his facial expressions keep on changing. It would seem he''s having a hard time adjusting to having a face. His carrot top, on the other hand, looks as adorable as his freckles. This content has been misappropriated from Royal Road; report any instances of this story if found elsewhere. "Me? How you feeling buddy?" He glares at me through his new-found view of the world.
What did you do to me!?
Use your mouth. You''re going to have to get used to it. "W-what did you... D-do to me?" He eventually gets out. Although his pitch is off and the sentence is slightly staggered, it wasn''t bad for a first attempt. He''s so cute. "I told you I was going to make you a body, remember? This Assassin is like super strong too, just so you know. It might even be stronger than Light and the others. I''m not sure how much DP I put in you, but it was a lot. I wanted you to be tough, Me." "I don''t... Know what to say?" He''s still in shock, I get it. Seeing as though he''s never had a fully-functioning body, it might take him some time to get used to it. Clenching his fists a few times, he accustoms himself with his new motor skills before attempting to stand up. Me''s legs shake and buckle and it takes him a few attempts just to get used to standing up. I watch him practice and offer tips whilst keeping an eye on my King Mimic. Out of the corner of my eye, I see catch sight of how Colin turns normal chests into Mimics and wish I hadn''t bothered. More than anything, I feel slightly sorry for the chest. Even though they were inanimate objects beforbehe stuck his tendrils in them. A bit of tough love let''s them know who''s Boss and a few minutes later, there are more Mimics in the Core room with myself and Me than there was when we arrived. By the time it takes my partner to adjust to moving around in his new body, Colin has acquired another set of silver subordinates.
What the fuck!?
"Mouth. Remember?" I can tell he''s going to need reminding constantly. "How did they all become Mimics?" he asks. He''s getting better with his body too because he actually looks shocked. "Colin put his... Thingies into them. Then he injected... Something else into them and, after a quick whack to assert authority, they became Mimics. Easy." I smile. "That is not what I would call this situation." Me sighs. "Yeah, yeah. I''m well aware of what you would call it. The only thing I can see right now though is 400,000DP''s worth of free Mimics. Don''t forget, aslong as they''re in my Core Room, it doesn''t matter who sees them. If anyone reaches this place, that means they''ve already beat down my Bosses and we''re screwed anyway." Stating the obvious, I summon ten Gold Chests and ten Diamond Chests. Even though I was complaining about the prices of them aswell as a needy pet the other day, my Core can''t help but thrum in anticipation. Colin is a Mimic-making machine! Who would''ve thought that would happen? I teleport both myself and Me to the kitchen inside Ali''s restaurant. The Chef, attentive as ever, notices immediately and rushes over to the ginger Assassin accompanying spirit mama. "I honestly didn''t think you would be able to separate me from your own soul, Abi." Getting all serious, Me repeats his doubts and it''s not like I didn''t have them myself. I was just feeling confident after doing almost the same thing for Anya. "To be honest, Me. Neither did I. That was all just brazen confidence before..." I grin as his face contorts with anger. "Hey, Ali. Can I get some treats for Me?" He''s starting to get the hang of facial expressions now. "Then why did you do it!?" He shouts as Ali tries to get a good look at his face. She fails due to Me being taller than her so she pulls him down by his cheeks. "Me? Is that you?" She asks. Me and Ali look that alike that they could pass themselves off as brother and sister. Other than the colour of their hair that is, they look almost identical. "Yes. Apparently, I am a person now," Me grumbles sourly, removing himself from her clutches and straightening his back. "Don''t be like that. You''re going to love it soon. I guarantee it." Ali beams. She''s not wrong either, I''ve been saying exactly that since I had this idea. It''s about time he got to start enjoying a few of the luxuries we have to offer here. He did help me get this far after all. "Master. I will create something special for this occasion." The Chef starts pulling pans and utensils out, ready to whip up something delicious that I''ll probably still feel jealous over. I''d love to be all about Me, but it doesn''t make the fact that I can''t enjoy anything any better. "Make a lot of it then please, Ali. We may as well make a celebration out of it tonight. A lot of good things have happened recently and now I''m not under half as much pressure now that a few things have been taken care of. It''ll also be good to relax and enjoy everyone''s company." It''s been a while since we all had a meal together. Then again, there are a few hundred more Assassins than there were before and I don''t think we''ll all fit in the Retreat. "That sounds wonderful, Master. I''ll begin right away. Girls!" Ali assembles her sous chefs and they all get started on their prep. She must not share my doubts, but my family can be said to be more capable than myself. If she thinks it''s fine, it''s fine. "Where do you intend to hold this Banquet? Our family grows more and more every day and surely not all of them can attend. Some will still have work to do at that time, or did you forget?" Or maybe it isn''t fine. Me asks the dreaded question as Ali pulls a creamy-treat out of her storage and hands it to him. "I was hoping someone else would deal with that, but I suppose it''s something I should take of myself. If only I had a capable helper to aid me in these sort of situations?" Me doesn''t hear a single word I said as his mouth is full of sugary delight. "O... My... Gud." He mumbles as we make our way outside. Seeing the delight on Me''s face was worth the soul-splitting moment we shared. Watching him lick his lips, I find a bench in my purchase list and let him sit down. Placing one after another as I walk the streets, they get better and better in design as I continue to unlock more tiers for every ten I place. Once I''m comfortable with the amount, I replace the older models and store them away. That wasn''t my aim when I left Ali''s, however. I was looking through features to see what we could use for our gathering. Instead, I got caught up with city improvements once again. Arriving back at the first bench where I left the ginger newborn, the freckled Assassin is nowhere to be seen. Fortunately, a squeal of delight comes from Ali''s and it doesn''t take two Shadow Walkers to work out where he went. I told him that having senses was amazing! After quickly explaining myself, I head to Talia''s alone. Leaving Me in the capable hands of Ali to gourge himself to his heart''s content. He was adamant about testing more flavours and The Chef didn''t seem to mind at all. If anything she welcomed having a new taste tester. Informing Talia of the banquet, I ask if she needs anything from me but she declines. I''m happy that I no longer have to stock her wares, but I also feel slightly sad. Visiting the other establishments inside and out, no one needs me to refill their shelves either. My family appears to be operating efficiently without me. Gone are the days where they needed me to replenish their goods on a daily basis. Now that they can get their supplies through contracts and scouting parties, they barely even need me anymore. It''s amazing and sad all at the same time. Amazing that they have managed to become self-sufficient like I knew they would, even with me guiding them. Sad because I lose a little bit of my connection with them.
I would agree.
Hey, buddy. How you feeling?
Slightly sick, Ali seems to think. She says I have eaten too much.
Yeah? I''m sure you will be able to handle your impulses in the future now you know what can come of them.
Why have the smells turned from delicious to nauseating?
That''s just how it goes, Me. Don''t worry you''ll get there. For now just rest up and digest your food. I''m going to go spend my points before tonight''s influx. Chapter 50: Noirs Adventure Inside the Lord''s Manor, in the county of Ishda, more than fifty people appear in a large, empty room. The moment they arrive, three dozen Assassins disappear into the shadows. They are shortly followed by the majority of guards and space mages, although they leave by doors. The Apprentice Categoriser is nowhere to be seen. Once they''re gone, Dropper, Carrie and Noir are left with Lord Aldor and a handful of his closest guards. "The Master will be thrilled with my efforts this time!" Noir breaks the silence, summoning his weapon full of determination. "She was pleased with you for your last mission, wasn''t she?" Dropper asks as his partner rolls her eyes. "Yes! She said I performed wonderfully. This time, however, will be even more spectacular." Noir shows off his skill with the golden spear before impaling it into the marble floor. The Lord''s face whitens and his body shakes. His guards also show a touch of fear at the terrifying red-haired monster before them. Some even fall backwards. His aura is being suppressed as he was ordered to by Abi. The Lord and his men have already felt the full weight of Light''s and know how strong the monsters actually are. Even without his aura, Noir looks like a man you wouldn''t want to pick a fight with. At almost six-foot tall and all muscle, the evolved Shadow Walker''s body is more than enough to back up his extremely-large mouth. His white shirt is now open, his abs on full display for the world to see. Golden dragons run along his cuffs and bottom of his top. The dungeon insignia on the back. His white pants are now baggier than before and they feature the artwork as his shirt. A red sash is tied around his waist, the same colour as his eyes. "You''re not here to rampage, you know? Not yet anyway," Dropper reminds him. The Lord doesn''t look any better after her words. He didn''t want to ask a dungeon for help, but he had no other choice. Adventurers and regular citizens couldn''t be allowed to know about all the problems he was facing. His reputation as a Lord would be ruined. Worse yet, what if the king found out? He would undoubtedly be de-seated from his lordship for not being able to keep his affairs under control. "I can''t ask for anything after enlisting your aid... b-but please... My daughter. The city can be fixed. Buildings can be rebuilt. Streets re-laid. My daughter... is irreplaceable. That is all I want. If you can solve my other problems then... I will owe the dungeon a great debt." Hearing the Lord''s words, Noir smiles and stores his weapon. "Will someone show me to her room and I''ll begin right away." Dropper asks. "Yes. Yes. Absolutely. Gren! Have two of your men escort the lady to Estelle''s room. Have two more accompany the second lady to Goode''s office." The head Knight nods and does as he''s commanded. "Goode is the current treasurer," he tells Carrie. Emphasizing that he wouldn''t mind if that changed in the foreseeable future. His eyes move straight back to Dropper''s. "The coup is the last thing on my mind. No offence, sir," he bows to Noir before looking at Carrie. "There is a chance we could prevail throughout it. The embezzlement is a far more pressing matter. If the city''s reserves drop further than they already have, then I doubt we would be able to pay the soldiers to defend against the coup. But even then, it is still trifling when compared to Estelle..." His teary eyes fall back on Dropper. "I beg of you. Please, save my daughter, my city and my lands." With his hands clasped in front of him, a mage whispers in the Lord''s ear. "Unfortunately, I have matters to attend to myself. Gren and his men are loyal to a fault. They will assist you with anything you need. Do not hesitate to ask. Thank you again." Lord Aldor leaves the room with the mages and a handful of guards. Dropper and Carrie are also led off separate locations. Noir yawns as loud as possible, catching the head guard''s ire. Gren and a few of his guards are all that''s left with him. "So! Where are these high-end ministers or whatever? My weapon needs to do some talking." "Master Assassin. Please try to be careful and show some modicum of consideration. Some buildings are historical and almost as old as the city itself." Gren pleads with Noir as he leads him through the Manor towards the main gate. "The noble district is located in the North. All of the ministers live in that section. This way please," the head guard motions for Noir to follow him. As they make their way through the streets of Ishda, Gren explains that not all of the Lord''s ministers are as evil as he had portrayed them to be. Noir barely pays him any interest as he inspects the buildings they pass by. "Surely you understand, Master Assassin?" Noir nods, unaware of what the head guard was actually talking about. It makes no difference what he said to the Assassin who is already thinking of home. "Whatever. Are we there yet? Is this it?" He asks as they come to a stop by a large stone fountain surrounded by beautiful homes on all sides. If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. "It is. First, let''s start with Duke Villiers. I''ve know him for a long time so it would be good to eliminate him from any suspicions." The house is surrounded by a beautiful flower garden. An elderly man and a young woman can be seen enjoying tea on the balcony as Gren leads Noir up the path. They are met by a butler at the door who escorts them inside. He gestures for Noir to enter and he does so without hesitation. As soon as he is inside the door slams shut behind him and a small hatch slides open. "Are all dungeon monsters so gullible?" Gren ask, grinning at Noir through a slate on the door. "You would betray your master?" Noir can''t believe what''s happening. For a retainer to deceive and plot against their own master is inconceivable to him. The love and respect he has for his own master is nothing like that which Gren possesses for Aldor. "That fool isn''t a leader. We''ve slowly been testing the waters to see how far we could go and we''ve decided to go all in. It was unfortunate for you that we found out about your existence right before we enacted the plan." "The plan?" "I suppose there''s no harm in telling you. There''s no chance in hell you''ll break out of that room anyway. The Lord is probably dead already. As soon as we got back, things were already in motion," he laughs. "You and your friends couldn''t have arrived at a worse time, you see. We have just under a thousand people in our sphere of influence and quite a few capable adventurers too. There''s even three people above level thirty." He bursts out into more laughter, but that time he''s not laughing alone. Noir can''t control himself at the stray guards words. "L-Level thirty... Pfft.." Gren isn''t phased by the attitude shown by Noir. He''s seen many strong people try to break out of the room the Assassin is being held in and is confident it should hold the red-haired demon. He closes the slate and turns around before the colour leaves his face. In front of him is a grinning Noir. "What? Didn''t you know I can teleport?" "B-But... That''s supposed to be a magic dampening cell. How did you..." Gren''s words peak Noir''s interest and he examines the metal cell built into the noble''s house more closely. "I think my master would like this," he says, storing the cell in his pocket dimension. The process carves a big chunk out of the house which begins to tilt before collapsing under its own weight. Noir teleports outside while holding Gren by his collar. "Were those two people involved?" He asks the pale-faced traitorous guard, pointing at two mangled bodies buried beneath the rubble. A nod is the only response he''s given but he smiles nonetheless. "I''m off to a good start," he chuckles, dragging green back down the garden. A gathering of people have turned up to see what has happened. No one says a word and they all make way as Noir walks into the middle with Gren. "Ok. How many are here right now?" He asks, making sure Gren is the only person who hears him. "T-Twelve." He stutters through tears. The guard has given up. Gren knew that Noir was strong, but he had thought that if he was able to trap him in the cell then their plan would succeed. He didn''t know that some monster could teleport outside the dungeon. "Point. Or I''ll start breaking fingers until you do," he whispers. Sixty seconds later and the street has emptied. Only Noir and Gren remain standing amidst a dark red sea of blood. It hadn''t taken Gren long to rat out his accomplices after Noir''s threat and it was quite a simple task. They had all grouped together to discuss the ''what ifs'' about their fallen conspirator''s house. From left to right, Gren singled them out. Moments later, anyone who didn''t receive the finger had fled in fear of their own life. Not that they had anything to worry about. "Good boy," Noir swings the blood off his weapon in a swift motion, startling Gren. "So, where to next?" Noir smiles, "You point, I swing. Sound good? If you do a good enough job, I might just let you off or hand you over to the Lord or whatever. We''ll see. Now. Point." Over the course of the next hour, Noir demolishes multiple buildings and establishments and leaves a trail of blood running through the streets of Ishda. Half of the dozen Assassins Abi had sent with him cleaned up any remains he overlooked. The other half had stayed to guard the Lord. Just in case. Once he had finished in the city, Noir made his way back to the Lord''s Manor with a Sorry-looking Gren in tow. He''s escorted through the building to Lord Aldor as the ex-head guard is put in shackles and made to follow behind. Inside the audience room, the Lord''s officials are lined up on both sides of the carpet. "Is there anyone else in here I should know about?" Noir asks. Gren notions towards a few people before his eyes return to the floor. "If you tell me who they are, I''ll bring you back to the dungeon to be... reformed. It will be brutal, but at least you won''t die a miserable death." Gren looks at Noir while debating his options. The one that screams out to him is that he''s already turned traitor twice, why not see it through if it means he gets to live. The no-longer head guard then points to nine different men. Almost half of the assembled people. Noir doesn''t waste a second and je executes them on the spot before they, or anyone else, can even think about moving. He flicks the blood of the weapon in his hand before turning to Lord Aldor and smiling. "The coup has been foiled. Anyone involved, or associated in any way, are now dead. Those were the last of the people plotting against you." Noir leaves out the part about the damages. Slightly remembering someone saying something about not doing too much but forgetting who it was. "Already? You''ve only been here a few hours. I-I would have preferred to interrogate those people myself. W-Who else was involved?" He asks, clearly not expecting the well-dressed man to commit such atrocious acts as his face goes green. "There were too many to remember names. The list of the dead should suffice when it''s compiled. Are my companions back yet?" Noir''s not a name person and didn''t even ask for a single one. A simple point in the right direction was good enough for him. "N-Not yet, sir Assassin. You are the first to return I believe." Lord Aldor steadies himself as his guards begin removing the bodies of corrupt ministers. "I''m the first!?" He shouts. "Hahaha. I am the best!" Noir laughs as he strides out of the audience chamber. A sorry looking man follows along behind him to the ire of everyone left in the room. Chapter 51: Meanwhile, In The Dungeon The majority of Varona''s important buildings can be found around the fountain in the center of town. City Hall, The Mages Guild, The Academy of Dark Arts and The Towers of Torture are but a few that receive visitors on a regular basis. Today, however, the plaza is almost empty and a queue can be found running down the High Street. It stretches as far as the eye can see and doesn''t show any signs of dispersing soon. The line of bodies starts at the oddly-shaped cottage that sits just off the main street. With an upper floor that''s twice the size of the one below, every now and then a purple cloud of smoke is released from the chimney on the side of the building. The owner of the extemely-popular business is rushing back and forth trying to sell her wares. She is also brewing up new batches at the same time as serving in an attempt to keep up with supply and demand. Even though her latest potion is a major hit, Lucinda isn''t happy about her current situation. ''I should be allowed an assistant too,'' she thinks. ''I''ll ask Master later. It''s not like I have time now.'' She looks out of the window as another customer leaves satisfied. The queue that has been lined-up outside, ever since this morning, hasn''t dropped off once. ''Crap!'' Dashing over to her cauldron Lucinda stirs the gaseous mixture carefully as her next customer, a young farmer, enters. "Welcome to Lucinda''s Liquids," she shouts over the store. "What can I do for you today?" "Hi, mam. Do you have any of that energy drink left? It''s all I''ve been hearing about since yesterday and I can''t not try it myself after watching Seb work in his field." The young farmer, anxious and worried that it may already be sold out, tries his best to keep his smile. "I absolutely do!" Lucinda beams confidence as she scoops up a small amount of the formula before placing it in an empty vial. She turns around with an orange potion in her hand and places it on the counter. "Before I let you purchase it, you have to listen to the warning and possible side effects first." "The side effects are real?" He gasps, shock written all over his face. "Unfortunately, yes. At the moment the energy drink offers a 400% boost to not only stamina, but strength aswell, and it lasts for 12 hours. So far it is the best potion I''ve ever created. The only problem though is that it has a 5% chance of turning you into a Goblin for 15 minutes." She grimaces at the end of her sentence and wonders if the animosity she''s feeling toward the little green monsters stems from her Master. "How does that even work? I''ve never heard of a potion that can turn someone into a goblin. Honestly thought old Seb was pulling my leg when he said it happened to his wife. Said he was mortified when she shrunk into a little-green demon, he was. Before she turned back that is. Then he laughed his old-ass off at her. Or so he said." Lucinda is lost for words as the man laughs heartily. "... Er, OK? Would you still like to purchase Abi''s Energy Drink after hearing the possible side-effects?" She gets straight back on topic like a seasoned merchant. She''s sold more potions in these last two days than she has in the last few months and the way she handles her customers has also improved due to that fact. "Aye! 5% you said, right? That''s not a bad gamble against the other 95. Even if I lose, I''ll jus'' hide away for quarter of an hour." "That you could and absolutely, my skills are never wrong. The likelihood of transformation is no higher than 5%.There is still a chance of it happening, so be warned." "Can I take two?" His eyebrows rise up as he waits for her response with baited breath. "Of course. It''s always good to have a spare." "It''s not for me. It''s for my old lady. I want to see what she''d look like as a goblin." The farmer chuckles to himself and slaps his leg as Lucinda fills another vial and hands them over. "That''s... Also another way to use it, I suppose?" Debating the man''s intentions, she takes payment and watches him leave. It''s not like there''s anything significantly evil in transforming your partner into a Goblin just to ridicule them. ''I hope it turns out to be the opposite. Then she can laugh at him. That would be funny,'' she thinks as the door opens and the next customer walks in. "Welcome to Lucinda''s Liquids. What can I do for you today?" She beams a smile at the young man knowing full well what he wants. ''There won''t be any breaks today. Maybe I should have an energy drink too.'' After that day, Goblin sightings in Varona became a more frequent occurrence. Much to the dissatisfaction of a certain person. Dungeon Stories Volume 2
Now that Hana and Mira are in charge of keeping Varona safe, I barely put any attention into watching the comings and goings of people crossing my borders. Unless they''re got a certain amount of strength or malevolence that is. For example, the man loitering in the alleyway across from Ali''s has a corrupted soul, even if his gear gives off the impression of a well-seasoned adventurer. However, it isn''t his strength that I noticed, but his aura. The evil emitting from him was more than enough to alert me of his presence. Just as I was about to spend some points too. Hmm, Me, you''re about to get a visitor, I think. Through the eyes of Soul Guide, the well-armoured man''s entire body is clotted in a deep red. Without a doubt the scummiest scum that ever did scum. His armour even looks a little dark now that I decide to take him seriously. However, as I''m pondering on who to send and what to do with him, Scumbag A makes the choice for me and dashes across the street. Faster than the eye can see and in full-plate armour, he barges into The Chef''s restaurant. If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. Please report it. Of all the places to go... Why did he choose Ali''s? Ali doesn''t like to leave the dungeon''s proximity, but in no way does that mean she''s weak. The Rogue-turned-Chef should still be considered deadly, especially when it comes down to small, bladed weapons. However, Scumbag A doesn''t know that fact as he kicks the door of on his way in. He also doesn''t know that a certain dungeon resident, one who has only just acquired a body, is not feeling the best that he can right now. He has eaten far too many sugary treats and is regretting the decision completely as the door booms open. The contents of his stomach threaten to erupt and Me pulls his first death stare at the intruder interrupting his inner turmoil. I almost feel sorry for Scumbag A now. I was just thinking about eating him, but Me looks like he wants to blast him into oblivion. Mr Red-Soul couldn''t look more petrified as he quivers like a leaf. More so, it would appear that the gravity seems to have increased as his body won''t take that listen to his command to retreat. His eyes are looking a the exit, but that''s as far as he gets. It almost looks like time''s slowed down. Not to Scumbag A''s benefit, however. A dozen sous chef, all armed with differing sizes of kitchen knives, mallets, skewers, one of them even has a whisk, I''m not sure what she''s going to do with that, burst out of the kitchen in slow motion. His eyes go wide in horror as everyone seems to be aiming for a different vital part. One in particular that should never be aimed for. What... Is the only word his mind can produce before Scumbag A is disintegrated, along with the front half on Ali''s and roof on the building across the street. "What the hell, Me!? Why didn''t you just let the girls take care of him?" Ali screams in a horror of her own, voicing my thoughts perfectly without even having been told too, the front of her establishment now non-existent as bricks drop to the floor here and there. I was actually thinking about reformation when Me let off a power attack unlike anything I''ve ever seen. Not for Scumbag A mind you, he''s already been erased by a flick of Me''s finger, but the lesser-gone orange and yellow souls maybe. I was thinking about how we''d go about it. "I-I''m sorry. I didn''t... Did I do that?" Me is more shocked than Ali and myself at the level of his own power. As a dungeon system bestowed with knowledge, no one knows more about the powerful creatures a dungeon can summon to aid itself on its quest to complete objective A and B. After his own accidental display, he''s struggling to think if anything would be a match for him. He is an existence, in all rights, that shouldn''t exist. "Well... It''s certainly not cool, but I suppose Abi can fix it. It''s OK. I''m sure you didn''t mean to. You have to be careful though, Me. You don''t want to accidentally destroy Varona, do you?" She asks and his Core-coloured eyes meet hers. "What!? No! I''m just... How did she even make me this powerful? It doesn''t make sense." Me looks through his dungeon information log and finds out that I invested 10,000DP in order to strengthen his body. I also added the elemental properties that I was originally going to use to create a body for him afterwards. The multiplication of strength that he went through during his creation is unfathomable and his jaw drops open. Not going to lie. I did the same thing. I didn''t realise that I used so many points in the process, but afterwards... I certainly noticed when placing those benches. It''s why I left Me alone and went for a lonely walk. So I could chat shit to myself openly and not in my head. Although, I''m surprised I haven''t been called upon yet. "Did you find out why you''re so strong?" Ali asks after seeing Me''s face turn white. Which is quite hard since he''s already pretty pale. If he wasn''t a System-created system, I''d think he might be coming down with something. "Y-Yes. Although as usual it makes no sense because Abi is involved. The 10,000DP she used on me was multiplied by four." What? "Probably because of the tier bonus. That''s understandable. What''s not, is that number was then multiplied again by the amount of elemental blessings she gave me!" Well... Shit. Ali looks at Me blankly. She''s not the best with figures surprisingly and rarely handles taking payment because she''s got Sous Chefs A-to-Z to do that for her these days. "I''m sorry, Me. I don''t understand what you''re saying." I, on the other hand, understand his math perfectly. Which means I didn''t understand what I''d done in the first place at all! I was hoping he''d get a little boost to his stats but I was expecting a tier bonus and and elemental bonus. How strong does that actually make him then? "Basically. It means that I''m the monster now. That''s all. I didn''t intend to attack that person yet so much energy was discharged. You''re right, Ali. I will have to be careful" Staring at his hands, Me looks really serious. All I can think though is, that''s his first serious face, cute. I watch Me as he tries to come to terms with his own power, whiles still thinking about how reformation would work. There has got to be a better way than just eating everybody. I''m not against easy XP, but making them go through the reincarnation cycle means nothing if they''re just going to be reborn again into the same scummy societies that are guaranteed to corrupt them again. Some cities are overpopulated and there are a lot of people struggling out there. Those type of people, who are only trying to survive in this already fucked-up world, end up screwed over by The System''s flawed logic. Stealing a loaf of bread to feed your starving family should not get you bumped up a colour on the soul scale. According to her shitty logic though, it does. So when you think about it, how is killing people and sending them through the reincarnation cycle going to help anyone? Especially when they''re spat back out into a similar situation to their prior one. Hell, if they were allowed to keep their memories they might try to take a different approach to life. There are too many variables to think about when it comes to this skill and what it wants from me. Awkward-as-fuck doesn''t do it justice and I need to try and raise the bar somehow. The next time a lost soul enters Varona, I''m going to try to reform them instead. It makes more sense to correct their behaviours, instead of having to start them fresh. Even if I have to scare the hell out of them with Samantula to get them back to neutrality, I''ll do it. Plus, having the start fresh is a much longer process and the years can''t just be skipped. There''s also the green-to-purple souls to think about. I''ve already stated that I won''t kill any one good, but again this fucking skill says that I should. So that they can ascend to somewhere I''m not allowed to know about? Grr. Already in a sour mood over dodgy descriptions and requirements, I teleport to the Shimmering Stable. A single one of these features can hold 100 horses and I have three of them. They''re not why I''m here though. I''m hoping, against all hope, that this is going to be the time when the Hay Bale shines. With no one around on the land out here, that means I don''t need to use Divinity''s Creation. Which is quite rare on it''s own. There''s normally always someone out here and I wonder what I did to earn this type of luck. Not being one to look a gift horse in the mouth, I spend 1280DP on the solitary and rubbish feature''s sixth upgrade. It begins to shine and I can''t help but feel the same excitement that always comes with upgrading. Even though I know I being optimistic, the fact that it hasn''t changed ever since I placed it has been a plague on my mind, a knife in my heart and smear of embarrasment against my name. The light recedes and the smile is washed off my face. What am I feeling right now? Humiliation? Disappointment? No. Rage. "Fucking shitty System and your stupid shitty dungeon feature! Why won''t you change!?" Chapter 52: A Change Of Pace Inside the well-filled Retreat, the sound of merry drinkers fills the air as a mage wrestles with her feelings. Anya has a mug of ale in hand and she''s drinking merrily much like the rest of the customers. The idea of being able to drink such a delicious liquid after being dead for a significant period of time is not lost on her and she''s appreciating every sip of the heavenly brew. The fact that she was dead, however, with said event happening by the hands of a person she trusted no less, is still troubling her. "Hey. You''re Master''s friend, right?" One of the young women calls over from the table closest to her, distracting her from gloomy thoughts. "Yes. That''s correct. We were adventurers," she answers the women with a smile. "That''s awesome. I''m Tara and this is Lara. We run Cloak and Dagger, the general store on the high street. It''s a pleasure to meet you." The Rogue shopkeeper smiles back at Anya from across the table as she enjoys her own drink. "Thank you. My name is Anya. It''s a pleasure to meet both of you. I''ve got to say, everyone here is so nice. It''s really... Refreshing." The Rainbow Mage takes another drink from her mug after her introduction to steady her nerves. She is still trying to get her head around her current state of being. She had died, but was no longer dead. She had also been a cleric, but now finds herself as an overpowered, Rainbow Mage. ''I''ve never even heard of this class before.'' "Did you and Master go on lots of adventures together?" A man in creased clothing from the table beside theirs asks, interrupting the ladies and joining the conversation. His long golden locks catch Anya attention. "You''re supposed to introduce yourself first, stupid! That''s Jack, The Swindler, he''s in charge of the gambling establishments in the city. The guy next to him is Koniva, his number two." Tara points to the two men next to them in turn. "Watch your purse strings around those two," Lara adds sarcastically. "I knew a guy named Jack once. He was as shifty as they come." Anya smiles at the grinning man. She doesn''t have a purse, or any coins to put in one if she did for that matter and even if she did, she wouldn''t have to be wary of anyone related to Abi. Not that she has a pressing concern or need for money either. Tilly had told Anya that all dungeon residents are allowed to open a tab with Taskmaster Talia. Completion of any of her contracts goes towards the accued debt that has been built up. "That''s what Master said," Jack bursts out laughing. "So did you go on many adventures together?" Coral repeats Jack''s question, joining the conversation from the bar. For the next few hours, Anya describes her adventures with Abi the Rogue to anyone that cares to listen. Which is quite a lot in this case. She leaves any parts related to Kal, or replaces him in the story if needed. She explains how they went to quite a few different places and got into far too many unneeded altercations due to Abi''s mouth, much to the delight of her listeners. Not only are three women and two con-men listening intently, but every other dungeon resident present in the above-ground establishment has moved closer and listens on with enthusiasm. Even though her tales are not the best, or the most decorated, they hang on with baited breath everytime she mentions Abi fighting. ''They truly seem to love her,'' she thinks, ending the story and finishing her fourth mug. ''Damn that''s good ale.'' "So... What happened next?" Coral asks, wide-eyed and wanting more. "Nothing. We got paid, rested up for a while and then took on another job. Coincidentally, that one took us near a certain dungeon." She winks at the conglomeration that''s now gathered around her. "Oh, oh. I know which one," Dum raises his hand. Only to be slapped around the back of his head by Talia. There are still human patrons in the establishment after all. Talking about adventuring is fine but revealing dungeon secrets is not. "Ow, Talia. What gives?" He asks, rubbing the back of his head. "Shush. Be quiet and listen." She links her arm in his and Dum turns red instantly. He also doesn''t say another word. After a few more stories, some embellished for dramatic effect, everyone disperses as most have work in the morning. Anya sleeps like a baby in the house she now owns inside the beautiful city. With her dream wish fulfilled, what more could she possibly need. The Assassins and specialised Rogues, also sleep well. Their dreams mainly involve their master in various swashbuckling situations. If Abi was able to peek into their dreams, surely she would be at a loss for words. But then again, when isn''t she? Dungeon Stories Volume 2
Another day passes and another DePosit is cleared. It''s almost enough to wash away the sour taste left behind after trying to upgrade the Hay Bale. I don''t even know why I bother. It''s just... One day it will surely turn into something else, right? That''s a problem I have to ignore. Otherwise, I''ll keep flushing DP down the drain. Today is a dungeon day, so hopefully there won''t be any problems like that. Well, maybe one. How do I deal with the people-turned-prisoners that I''ve decided to reform, instead of sending through the cycle of Reincarnation? After some serious consideration, I decide to house the yellow souls in the Towers of Torture''s prison. Hana and Mira can keep the lesser evils locked away down there until they go grey. The midground scum can attend the towers themselves and for the evilest of evils, two dozen cells created by yours truly are added to the fourth floor for Samantula to scare the living hell of them. It''s not like we have anyone to fill these cells yet, but in time I''m sure they prove useful. If not, then I haven''t wasted much DP here so my losses aren''t too bad. Not unlike a useless piece of Hay I know. Shaking it off, I move on to my next task. Home improvements. Not for the citizens of Varona, as that would be far more than I can afford, but for my family instead. Starting from the bottom up, I alter Tina the Temptress'' Boss Room and double the size of it. She now has a cliff overlooking an ocean and all the space she could want to fly around in. I didn''t really know what to do for the stone golems and their Iron leader, so I installed a magma bath for Ian the Iron Golem and left it at that. Hopefully, he can hack it and won''t melt. Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. I skip the fifth floor so I don''t get stuck there and move straight onto the fourth. Seriously, I can''t even talk about Floor Five without wanting to visit and if I do... Like I said. Let''s not talk about the Black Death, right now. Samantula, the terrifying tarantula-lady, wanted a house surprisingly. So that''s what she got. I upgraded the Hospitable Home and placed the better version in a new room just off the Boss''.
Hospitable Home has been upgraded to Unburglable Bungalow: The spacious bungalow features all the necessary amenities to live in style, safety and more Home security is important so make sure you set your mana imprint to keep your valuables safe These small fortresses won''t open for anyone but you Reward: 16 XP
I''m quite surprised there wasn''t a comment on the end of that notification. She normally harps on whenever home improvement is on the table. Maybe I''ve been giving her too much stick recently? Even though the name makes it sound small, the quaint feature is four-times the size of its predecessor. It only has one floor, but it is not lacking for rooms or space and Samantula is extremely happy. I also summoned nine more Reaping Spiders, unlocking tier four, but left it at that after confirming them as Mini Bosses. Trixie and her pack don''t actually need anything, but after going through the other Bosses, I couldn''t just leave the gorgeous, white wolf out. I gritted my teeth and summoned nine Alphas and ninety wolves. Ten per Alpha. The forest on the third floor is the large space in the dungeon and easily has enough room for 110 wolves. Their third-tier upgrade didn''t sound as bad as I thought it would either and I summoned one to add to ranks of the forest.
Moon Wolf: 20DP Under the Moon''s blessing, inflict 50% more damage with every attack Sometimes referred to as mirage wolves they are master''s of illusion and trickery luring their opponents in with a false sense of security before finishing them off
The Moon Wolf looks like a ghost. Almost identical to Trixie, but with a translucent constitution like mine, she disappears the moment she''s summoned. I didn''t worry though, I could still feel her presence. Like Trixie, she has a strong will that promises to protect the dungeon at any cost. I named her Luna from afar, add her as a Mini-Boss even she she Trixie''s junior/senior, and moved on to the next floor. Trixie''s been the Floor Boss since way back when. There''s no way I''m going to trade her out for the newer model. Plus, with everyone taking turns in the Colliseum, they''ll all be ready to advance a tier in no time. Which means my Alpha will be a Moon Wolf herself soon enough. On the Second Floor, Violet wanted a tree for some bizarre reason. Not a normal tree either. A disfigured and dying one with no leaves that looks like... Amazingly, I actually found the feature in my list and agreed to her odd request. I was just happy that I had what she wanted.
Tree of Decay: This tree is full of life but will forever rot due to its inherent nature Who would want one of these?
Honestly, after Veris ended up with that paddle and the self-named Pleasure Palace, nothing they ask for can shock me these days. The punishment-obsessed Assassin also gets a visit from me. I upgrade her furniture, begrudgingly summon a few more Assassins and Mages at her request, and even go as far as to upgrade her paddle. It now has golden rims and a velvet handle of all things. I leave shortly after Veris had finished praising me as the pleasure/punishment room is too much for me to handle. I still don''t know how to deal with her. She''s like an eccentric aunt, one who always insists on kissing you on the lips. Even though you present your cheek she''ll turn your head forcefully with her hands. I purposely left the fifth floor for last. Every time I come here, it gets harder and harder to leave. Especially if Peaches is here. The entire floor is similar to the system-created room on my first floor except open plains run as far as the eye can see. On it, dozens of different coloured and sized Slimes mull around without a care in the world. This place is heaven. Peaches is actually here too. She''s been spending more and more time down here recently and greets me as I arrive. "Hello, Master. Have you come to visit... Everyone too?" "Yeah. I''m doing some improvements and making the rounds. No Sweets today?" Peaches is normally accompanied by at least two of the four Sweet sisters. "They have almost reached Level... 80 and are working hard to... Become Assassins," she replies quite well. She pauses less and less these days and it will be nice to have a proper conversation one day. It will be nice to do a lot of things one day. Everyone''s almost tier-four now, huh? Even the dungeon priests go out on missions here and there with the scouting teams to test themselves. The Colliseum doing wonders for everyone''s confidence. No one else has actually reached the fourth-tier yet, apart from the Assassins, but everyone''s working hard. When I made this room for Peaches, I wasn''t expecting to be overwhelmed by how cute hundreds of Slimes would be. Back then it was just, "Ten Black Slimes here," and "Ten Large-Black Slimes there." "A Black Death is fitting for a Floor Boss. Why not? Pow!" I then did the same with both the red and green Slimes, taking all the Slimes to the third tier. Why did I do black first? They cost more.
Black Death: Forged in the pits of hell the secretion emitted from this slime will destroy any matter it comes into contact with
The Black Death looked exactly the same as every other Black Slime I''d summoned so far. If anything, they''ve regressed in size and are now slightly smaller than the first-tier Slimes. Again, it''s strange, but that wasn''t even the shocking part. When Peaches bent down, prodding the little mass of gelatin, I half expected her fingers to start disintegrating. I then remembered there''s no friendly-fire damage between my monsters and sighed thankfully. It was about time a System enforced rule worked in my favour. After the Black Death quivered at her touch, it rose up and transformed into a perfect copy of Peaches. Only black. That black, that if you stuck her on top of a spider and imagined she had grizzly hair instead of smooth-slime skin, the Black Death could easily pass herself off as Samantula. Life sure is strange. "Oh. You''re... Beautiful. Like me!" Jumping up and down, Peaches clapped happily. The Black Death mimicked its pink counterpart and before I knew it, the two women were jumping up and down on the spot clapping like little children and hugging. I couldn''t help but smile as I watched what I would have considered monsters in my previous life, enjoy their own to fullest. After naming the Black Death, Ditto, I left her with Peaches to have fun with the other Slimes. Today, however, is even more shocking than back then. Not only is the Black Death in human form, but so too is the Magma Prince and the Tornado Princess. Because, why wouldn''t the other tier-three Slimes be able to transform? Peaches waves at me and against my better nature, I push off the urge to stay before quickly asking, "Is there anything you guys need here?" "Master, please may we have a few more features to relax on as we converse?" Before Peaches can answer, the alluring tone of the Black Death''s question beats her to the punch. I nod along dreamily whilst wondering how anyone could possibly beat a tier-three Slime. They''re gorgeous, even if they are made up of the element that signifies their name, and their tone alone will beckon most adventurers to willing walk into death''s embrace. Literally. Sparing no expense for the ladies on Floor Five, I add a few parks, ponds, benches and paths, loads of flowers, and even a few houses for the tier threes. Everyone is super pleased and I''m taken on a nice stroll before I''m finally able to leave. Although that was just so the Black Death and her crew could point out the areas that needed touching up, altering slightly, or straight-up wanted moving completely. Who knew Slimes were so picky? Arriving at to my tower, I need a second to myself before doing anything else. Sitting on my futon, I pass my hand over the top of my dire wolf. It''s almost as though I''m stroking the teddy and I wish deeply that one day I will be able to. Little do I know that stupidity has struck once again. Chapter 53: Carrying The Financial Burden After Carrie leaves the Lord''s chamber, the Assassin and her entourage are led down well-adorned corridors to the treasurer''s room. Entering alone, an old man looks up from the documents he''s working on. "H-Hello. How can I help you?" Irvine Goode has been the treasurer of Ishda for the last 60 years and has always thought of himself as resilient. Today, however, he finds that his voice is quivering and is barely audible in the spacious room he uses for work. The aura coming from the woman across the room has clearly shaken him. That and the fact the man also looks to be nearing a three-digit age. What hair he has left is combed over his scalp and a small pair of golden-rimmed glasses sit on the end of his nose. Jewelry decorates his hands and neck and the old man looks better off than most people Carrie has seen since she first started venturing out of the dungeon. Her attire, much like Noir''s, hasn''t changed much since her ascendance to Assassinhood. Now dressed in blue, Carrie wears the same dress she was summoned in, only a different colour than before, with the dungeon insignia stitched on the bottom. Before answering Goode''s question, Carrie removes her diamond studded mask from storage and places the perfectly-sculpted object onto her face. From beneath it, an ice-cold gaze pierces the old man''s resolve further and she sits herself on his desk in a show of authority. "I''m here to ask you some questions," she smiles as Goode begins to sweat profusely whilst looking slightly agitated. "Whether or not I find your answers acceptable will decide if you''re still breathing at the end of our conversation. Do you understand?" Goode nods slowly, unable to speak. With that, Carrie takes his notion as acceptance and continues. "Good. Now, it''s obvious that you''ve got your fingers in the pie. Quite deep as well I would suspect by the look of you. The question is, who else''s fingers can you feel in there with you? Do you understand where I''m going with this?" The treasurer is visibly shaking, but nods once more to show his agreement. "Good. That''s good, Goode. Really goode," she shakes her head quickly in embarrasment while wondering if her Master would have liked that one. Carrie''s not one for jokes, but every now and then she has her moments. Whether she likes them or not. It''s the Abi effect. "What I''m going to need from you is a list of co-conspirators and the locations of where I can find them." The treasurer has kept his mouth shut and denied plausibility throughout countless interviews conducted by the guards. However, the cold intent that Goode can feel emanating from the women sitting on his desk is enough for him to know that he can''t stay quiet any longer. Ever the trier though, Goode attempts to beguile Carrie using complex sentences while protesting his innocence in between. "Silly, old man," she snarls, grabbing his wrist, "I don''t have the time to waste listening to prattling excuses." Carrie takes hold of a finger on Goode''s left hand and then bends it in a direction that fingers are not meant to be bent. The aged-treasurer screams in pain as bone rips through skin and the Assassin releases his wrist. Tears stream down his face and Goode cries in agony, cradling his hand that seconds ago was fine. "If you speak again without permission, I will chop off your tongue. What I want is written information. If I find out you have withheld Anything then I will be back to see you for a less-than friendly visit. Nod if you understand." Sniffling away, the wounded treasurer nods in compliance. His mouth is firmly closed, but he''s unable to hide his pain. His skin has turned as white as his hair and he sways where he sits. "Good. Now, take out some parchment and begin writing. If you''re going to need a second piece, take it out now." Goode does as he''s told and removes a single piece of paper from the top drawer of his desk. He then picks up the quill, dabs it in ink and begins writing. ''I didn''t really want to hurt the old man, but it was the fastest way to make him do what I needed him too. I doubt the Lord''s men would do what I did to the treasurer without proof and he might have potentially thought I''d be the same as they were. Unfortunately for him, my master wants this to go well so I''ll do whatever I have to do to accomplish that.'' Goode scribbles away in silence as Carrie watches over him. His penmanship is fantastic and the Assassin can read his words perfectly. Once he''s done, the treasurer hands the parchment with the names of all his co-conspirators over to Carrie. "Twenty-seven? You remember what I said, right, Goode?" "Y-Yes... M-Mistress," he stutters. The treasurer''s eyes are firmly on his desk. He dare not look at the harbinger of death reviewing his list, unless he wants to add more pain to his day. "I can''t help but notice that your name is also included. Would you care to explain that?" He looks up into the eyes behind the mask before planting his gaze firmly back on his desk. Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation. "I-I... T-The others..." Carrie frowns in disappointment at the opening words of another excuse. Quickly realising that he''s treading the same path as before Goode stops talking, takes a deep breath and starts again. "No! I took it. I''m also to blame. That''s why I put my own name on there. There''s no excuse for it and if the Lord is going to punish me for it then so be it." His sudden bout of honesty slightly surprises the Assassin. She was expecting him to reel through a long list of reasons why he wasn''t to blame, none of it was his fault and his punishment was unjust. Luckily, it turns out that she got the easiest of the three missions. ''Go me.'' "Well said. When someone makes a mistake they should be held accountable for their actions. That said, I might ask the Lord if I can keep you for myself." Goode face drops as Carrie''s smile only grows larger. Little does he know that the Assasin doesn''t want to inflict more pain on him, but instead has bigger plans for the treasurer. "W-What use would you have for an old man like myself? Surely there are more capable people that serve you?" The images running through the treasurer''s mind are terrifying to him. "Nobody serves me. Where I am from, we are all equal. You would be the first actually. As for my reasons... They''re mainly to do with paperwork and finances to be honest. Much like you do here." Goode doesn''t know what to say. A moment ago he was expecting an execution or the prospect of spending the rest of whatever life he has left in jail. The prospect of avoiding that fate is a god send in its own right. He had only taken money from the treasury because his son''s life had been in danger. With all the other light-fingered ministers around, the treasurer didn''t think he would be caught out. "That all depends on what these people say, or do. If what you have written is accurate then I will choose to trust you. Even if it''s out of fear right now, soon you will appreciate what I''m willing to offer to you.". ''I already appreciate it! I don''t wanna spend the remainder of my life behind bars,'' he screams on the inside. At the same time the treasurer''s eyes shoot open and he begins to panic again. He raises his uninjured hand and waits for Carrie to take notice of him. "Yes? You can speak." "I-I... I''m so sorry, mistress. I-I have just remembered another. I am terribly sorry," Goode plants his head on the desk. His body still quivering. "How fortunate," she places the parchment down so he can add the extra name. "Before I forget, are any of the people on this list involved in the uprising?" "Uprising?" "The plot to overthrow the Lord, fool," slightly losing her patience she raises her voice and Goode recoils. "N-not to my knowledge, Mistress. But I haven''t heard anything about a plot like that." "Fine. I will be back. There are guards outside your room so I suggest resting." Carrie informs the old man as she leaves. He does as she said and moves to the couch, nursing his hand as he lies down. After sending a cleric to Goode and finding herself a guide, Carrie moves to the noble district of Ishda. The area the guard assured her was full of well-crafted buildings and beautiful works of art, is a far cry from what she was led to believe. There are a few homes that look spectacular. Even better than what Abi provides back home. There aren''t many of them though and in between the sparse plots of land, rubble-strewn debris litters the area. As Carrie tries to put an explanation to the question she''s wondering, the sound of another collapsing building can be heard in the distance. "I guess that would be Noir then." She rolls her eyes. ''I swear Dropper told him not to cause too much damage. It''s as though he''s incapable of following anyone else''s orders except Master''s.'' "So this is... was, Count Villier''s home?" Carrie asks the guard who led her here. "Er... yes, Mam. Or at least it was... Urp." The man''s dinner is expelled after he notices a lifeless arm hanging from the rubble. "Well, that''s one down, twenty-six to go. Next is... Madame Auberline. Lead the way, good Knight." Carrie tries to cheer him up with her own unused-enthusiasm. It doesn''t go down well with the Knight who looks at her maniacal smile in fear. "Mmm," is the only sound he can make before pointing at the next collapsed building on the row. "This is probably going to go a lot faster than I expected it to." All in all, Carrie only ended up questioning two light-fingered ministers. The men themselves were the only two that had no part in the plot to overthrow Lord Aldor. They did, however, agree to the authenticity of Goode''s list. The destruction of their neighbours striking fear in their heart that they might befall the same fate. Carrie makes her way back to the Lord''s Manor with the corrupt officials in tow. They sheepishly enter behind her, knowing full well that punishment will be coming their way. They have abused the rank and power that Lord Aldor bestowed them with. The Assassin is led to a much smaller room than Noir was taken. The original audience room is covered in blood and is still in the process of being cleared out. The source of why she''s in a less than welcoming room is sitting at a table, stuffing his mouth. "Noir. Why is the majority of the noble district in ruins?" At her words, the red-haired Assassin starts to choke on his food. Coughing dramatically before eventually managing to swallow, he sheepishly turns toward the sound of his partner''s voice. "I don''t know what you mean? It was like that when I got there." His words fool no one. Carrie had heard him as she followed the trail of destruction looking for her own corrupt ministers. "Noir!" "Fine. They were all involved with the plan to overthrow the Lord. He won''t miss them. Or their houses." He laughs to himself, grabbing another large leg of meat from the abundantly-stocked table. "And you didn''t cause any other damage?" "No! What do you take me for?" Carrie rolls her eyes at his words. The boisterous man before her may jest, but when push comes to shove he always does what''s needed. ''I wonder how Dropper is doing?'' She thinks, as Noir returns his attention to the pile of food. Carrie sits down next to him and starts to eat, feeling rather hungry herself after walking around the large city. Chapter 54: No DP Needed "I haven''t seen that loud guy in a while, have you?" "The red-head?" "That''s the one." "Now that you mention it, neither have I. He might be out in the forest with one of the patrols. I''m sure he''s part of the guard of something." "Don''t tell anyone I told you this, but I''m pretty sure he''s part of an undercover shadow gang... Or something like that." "Don''t be daft. If it was any other city, I might agree with you. But this one?" "Especially this one. I''m telling ya. That''s the reason why it''s so peaceful here." "Naa. I''m not buying it. We''ve been here for how long now? I''m sure I''d have noticed something." "You have and it''s right in front of your eyes yet you can''t even see it. Did you hear about old Ewan?" "The Stuck-up head of the Howser''s, how could I forget that prick." "Disappeared not long after we arrived. Was constantly complaining about the lack of hospitality until he just wasn''t anymore." "It''s not strange for a mouthy noble to be killed because of their sharp tongue." "Alright. What about Lady Illanoir?" "What about her? She used to torture people for the guard back in Cowley. To be frank, I''d be better off not knowing someone like that. This place seems to let you just... Forget your past transgressions somehow. It''s almost mystical." "That''s another example of what I''m talking about! Also, Lady Illanoir disappeared just like old Ewan did. One morning she just wasn''t here anymore." "She could have gone back North. Stupid as that sound, crazy bitch does have more than a few screws loose." "She could have, but it''s not likely." "If you have something to say then just spit it out. I don''t need you beating around the bush while I''m trying to enjoy my lunch break." "Ok. So the other week, I was at Talia''s place. Granted, I''d had a few drinks, but I swear to god I know what I saw." "Fuck sake. Go on then. What did you see?" "I shit you not, as I stumbled outta the door, that same red-head dropped into the shadows beneath his feet. He wasn''t alone either, he dragged some other poor souls down with him before he was gone. No hole or nothing. Just gone." "I''m calling bullshit on that one. You must''ve been really pissed to have thought you saw that." "I did see it! And it''s not the first time I''ve seen someone do something suspicious either. Honestly!" "Aww. Whatever. To be honest, I''m not even bothered." "Why? After what I''ve just told you don''t you feel like there''s something going on here?" "Yeah. I do. I reckon, there''s a bunch of people protecting this lovely little city that we''ve been so graciously allowed to live in. Free of charge still, I might add. That''s not going to last forever, but for the moment it''s still a blessing we can''t overlook. That said, most of the able-bodied men joined the guards just as we did. Pay isn''t bad and the fact that we get three square meals a day means this is the only place I spend any coin. Well, between here and Lucinda''s that is." "Have you tried her energy potion yet?" "Of course. I''ve got three on me." "Mate, I swear. They''re the best thing since... In fact, nevermind them. I''m telling you something shady is going on here." "Really? Again? All you''ve got is speculation and drunken admissions." "What about that chef then? The head chef at the Crescent Cafe. They call her Ali." "The one behind you?" "Where!" "You fucking idiot. I was just messing with you." "I''m being serious man. Don''t downplay this." "Im not. You''re over-playing it, if anything. I fucking love it here." "I''m not saying I don''t. I just need you to see what I''m seeing." "I''m seeing the same as shit as you. You''re just going a bit loco. Maybe if you don''t keep quiet, you''ll be the next person to drop through a shadow." "Don''t say that... I wasn''t joking. I really saw it." "Yeah. Yeah." "Ok then. This one you can''t dispute. What''s up with Talia''s brother?" "You mean Light?" "I-Is that his name?" "Yeah. I asked him. He''s not Talia''s brother either by the way." "He isn''t?" "No. They just look similar. They must be from the same region or something like that. Sky blue hair isn''t exactly common around these parts." "That... Would make sense. That''s good though. I might actually ask her out now." "Ha. I wouldn''t bother. She''s into someone else. Light told me." "What? Are you two like best friends or something?" "He was in here the other day drinking and I was feeling quite brave. I''d already had a few so I marched up to him and said ''I wanna date Talia!''. Do you know what he did?" Reading on this site? This novel is published elsewhere. Support the author by seeking out the original. "What? What did he do?" "Laughed in my face. Afterwards he explained things to me, but go for it if you think you have a chance." "No... I''ll er... Leave it at that. Nevermind. There are plenty of fish in the sea, or fine women in Varona I should say." "Now that''s a nice change of tune." "Well there are. Don''t get me wrong though, that''s also another one of those things that they''re involved in." "Oh my gods, will you give it a rest. Who are these ''they'' you keep going on about?" "I''ve just told you!" "Who? Talia, Light, Ali, and the redhead?" "Yeah! It''s not just them though, there are lots of them." "Fuck off, I''m going back to work." "But Max..." "Listen Sam. We''re friends, have been since we were kids and I''m telling you now to stop it. Do you hear me?" "But..." "So fucking help me. Do you hear me!?" "I hear you, Max." "Good. Because if any part of what you''re saying is right, I don''t need you disappearing on me. So, let''s just go to work and forget this conversation ever happened. OK?" "OK." Conversations from Varona Sam and Max
The image of the Lady-Slimes, fawning around in a meadow before giving me a good grilling, is glued to my brain. In fact, I''m quite surprised that I made it out of there that soon as I gaze at stars. The night can be argued to be even more gorgeous than the day as stars twinkle away in melody, painting the perfect picture of beauty. It eases my soul as not a single cloud is present in the sky and the entirety of the heavens are on show as the citizens of Varona sleep soundly in the city beneath them. As I enjoy the view, a quick browse through my status shows that the building-less feature that once caused an old man to travel to my dungeon, with a gift that''s still in my tower, has almost reached the next level.
The Syndicate: Level 5 All associates earn a 50% boost to all stats regardless of location All associates are able to use Dark Magic fluently even if they are unattuned to the darkness element All associates physical and mental skills inflict an extra 30% damage and status effects last longer regardless of enemy buffs All associates are now able to return to the dungeon by shadowport once a day Cloak of Night: Turn invisible for 60 minutes once a day Does not cost mana to cast and has no upkeep Does not require a physical skill to use Once activated can be deactivated at will Once deactivated cannot be used again until the cool down period is over Contracts until next level: 1 Contracts can be acquired from: Taskmaster Talia The Chef Ali Potion Master Lucinda The Swindler Jack Commanders Hana and Mira Cloak and Dagger Mayor Kana Deputy Mayor Sacha Cardinal Carn ...
The list went on. Almost anyone in my family that holds some type of position can offer contracts to the scouts and adventurers. They''re able to earn experience by completing missions for each other and those exact tasks benefit the dungeon. Me says they still need my connection, but I reckon these guys would do just fine without me. If anything, it''s the other way around and I would be lost without them. As I contemplate how well my family has grown, the sight of my city growing as the night passes peacefully and a new day arrives isn''t lost on me. Morning''s first rays light up Varona from the top of my tower. From there shadows are slowly chased away all the way down the main street until the fountain glimmers in the sun. As the center of city wakes up to a new day, so do the streets running of to the residential and commercial human districts. Further away, stable workers, farmers and some kids messing with the Hay Bale, also enjoy the morning''s warmth. Speaking of residents, Me is sitting in the garden of the Academy, enjoying the sun with a cup of tea.
The Academy of Dark Arts: The dark arts care little for titles or trivialities and only serve those strong enough to wield them Courses are available for those wishing to aspire to greater heights Novice Teachers: 4 Intermediate Teachers: 4 Advanced Teachers: 0 Masters: 0 Students: 58
The building that conceals the entrance to my dungeon is now fully up and running. Turns out, I did earn the teacher sub-class, I''d just forgotten about it due to everything happening all at once. Even with amazing skills in delegation, I''m still rushed off my feet. Needing someone to run the building, I chose Mystique, one of my oldest family members that''s still unassigned to a feature or job other than scouting. The Assassin was granted the title Headmaster and her partner Coral is set as the deputy. I certainly couldn''t see Tweedledum and Tweedledee being in charge of the Academy. Knowing that the majority of my buildings have one or more Assassins assigned to, or close by, them, is a very comforting feeling and I don''t think I''ve ever felt so safe. The Academy of Dark Arts has been open for a few hours now and there is already a queue leading through the courtyard outside. It snakes all the way to the gate, with more and more people waiting to enrol as they line up down main street. With its low admission costs for novice and intermediate level courses, alongside those already applying, I''m sure the Academy is going to become a major hit in my city. Everyone has the capability for magic after all. Some more than others but that''s not important in the least. Not in Varona anyway. It''s not as though I''ll be depending on the civilians learning magic to defend the city, is it? Watching potential mages chat eagerly with each other from my spot on top of the Academy''s tower, some people step out of line to pop into Ali''s as that''s how popular the educational feature is. The queue has almost reached the fountain in the city center. Thinking about the numbers, I summon a few more Mages, Arch Mages and Magi and have them specialise at the Mages Guild. Setting their subclasses to teachers, I assign them to the Academy to increasing the faculty staff to make sure everything runs smoothly. Or as smooth as bunch on Necromancer''s teaching Dark Magic to humans can. Classes officially start tomorrow, once everyone has finished enrolling. The extra additions are a just-in-case, more than anything. Plus, with how many people are still to enrol, eight teachers didn''t seem like it would be enough to handle everyone. The Academy has many rooms for classes and a even grand hall for lecturers to hold talks on subjects of choice, but it never hurts to be prepared. That''s right. I saw a problem and solved it before it grew. Abi the Diligent is on the ball. No more shirking responsibilities for this Dungeon Core. Now that the magic school is taken care of, it''s another problem off my mind. For the most part it will run itself, if not that''s what Mystique and Coral are for. That''s not me avoiding responsibilities though. It''s the Headmaster''s job to ensure their school runs provides results, educational opportunities and most importantly, graduates. Even if they won''t be used in city defence, it will still raise human confidence levels aswell as the overall tally of Dungeon Points per day. As I''m thinking about a city full of Necromancers, a malicious presence near the border of the residential district catches my attention. A guard detail arrives shortly after myself and I''m quite pleased at their response times. Their detection abilities are almost as good as mine these days. The woman at the forest line is screaming profanities at no one in particular. Through her delirious ramblings, I''m able to discern two things. First, she''s experienced a harrowing, traumatic journey and second, both of her children have died. This is a truly unpleasant situation as her soul is dark orange, bordering the territory with red. I definitely don''t actually want to kill the woman. Not after sprouting off about how I''m going to start helping people overcome shit. She may have done something to have been branded the colour, but she definitely doesn''t deserve it. This is one of those prime examples on how The System''s shitty logic is screwing the planet over. After what this woman''s been through, I''m more than willing to try and help her. This is exactly the type of situation I''ve prepared for after all. Well, not exactly. But it''s close enough. I have the guards escort the woman to a holding-cell beneath the Barracks for now. If she shows improvement today, awesome. If not... Even though she''s lost her kids and life''s kicking her in the vaginas, the devastated soul will have to be sent to the dungeon for some Samantula therapy. Almost dead-red, I''m hoping the sight of out Scariest Mary might slow, stop or best-case scenario reverse, her condition. That would be fantastic and we might even be able to get some answers from her then, opposed to the gibberish curses she keeps throwing out. I don''t know what I''ll do with her afterwards, I mean... She''ll have been in the dungeon, in the fourth floor no less. Whatever. We''ll cross that bridge when we come to it. Now that the excitement has died down, what shall I do? Chapter 55: From Then To Now "Did you go to the Academy this morning?" "No. After hearing the announcement, I''m still debating if I even need magic. I''m only going to be working at the Inn for the rest of my life anyway. It''s not like I really need it." "You should check it out. They have spells for everyday chores that you would probably find useful. There''s waste disposal, grime remover and deodorizer. Honestly, you''d be quite shocked." "They have a spell for smell removal? That''s got to be advanced magic, right?" "No. In fact, the Headmaster said that general cleaning spells were all in the novice tier. She recommends that everyone should at least train that far." "Wait a minute. You spoke to the Headmaster?" "No. There was a short lecture for new students once enrollment had finally finished. She spoke there. That''s why I asked if you''d been. I didn''t see you in the hall." "Obviously. I didn''t go... Wait a minute. The Headmaster''s a woman?" "Yeah. I was kinda shocked too. Her hair is also the same colour as yours." "No way. That''s actually quite progressive. Now that I think about it, women are quite dominant in this town, aren''t they?" "Yeah. Most of the businesses are run by women. Majority of the men that came to Varona with us joined the guard and even that''s run by two women." "They must hate that." "What? Being bossed around by attractive ladies all day? I doubt it. I reckon that''s the reason my Donald joined up." "Don''t be silly. Donald loves you and you know it. He joined because the job is a lot easier than it sounds. This is by far the most peaceful city I''ve ever been to, let alone lived in." "You can say that again. Even though it had its bad spots, I used to think that nowhere could be safer than Crowley. This place is unreal though." "I know. I went for a walk the other night and, even though I was still a bit scared because it was dark and I was alone, it was dreamy. I ended up just sitting in the park gazing at the stars." "Why would you do that? Everyone knows it''s dangerous for a lady to be walking around unattended at night. Even in a city as safe as this one." "Well yes, but I wasn''t alone." "What!? What do you mean you weren''t alone? You sneaky mare. Who were you with?" "Technically no one. When I left my house I bumped into two guards and they asked what I was doing. I told them and they said they''d patrol behind me, at a distance where they wouldn''t interrupt my stroll. Not that I''d have minded. If you know what I mean." "Mary! How very crass of you." "What can I say? Ever since Allen passed it''s been rather lonely. We never had children and other than our tea mornings, life as a receptionist is quite lonely." "Still, you didn''t need to be so blunt about it." "Sorry, Helen. I''m just being silly in my old age." "Now you are being silly. You''re only 41. You have many years left in those middle-aged bones of yours." "Maybe those good-looking, young men can help energise them." "Mary! Have you been adding something you shouldn''t to your tea? You''re being rather forward today." "I can''t help but notice how good everyone looks recently. I''m not just talking about the Varonians that were here before us. Surely, you must have noticed." "Noticed what? That everyone looks attractive? People tend to look better when they''re living well. It''s when life gets you down that you begin to show the strain of your burden." "That''s not what I meant. You must have noticed a change in Donald? Or yourself?" "Hmm... Well now that you mention, I did get a new cream from Lucinda''s. It erased the crows feet that were starting to set in. Look. My skin is smoother than it ever has been before. It''s absolutely amazing. Now that I think about it, you look pretty good too. It''s almost like you''ve lost ten years somewhere. Did you buy some of Abi''s Anti-Aging Cream as well? That Lucinda drove a hard bargain, but I managed to walk away with five tubs in the end. And who''s this Abi her products are named after?" "No. That''s what I''m trying to tell you. I haven''t bought, or used, any products since we arrived and I look better than you do." "Well, I wouldn''t go that far. Joking aside though, you do look very good, Mary." "Thank you, Helen. I don''t know whether it''s because of what you said or just because of this city, but either way I love it. I don''t just look good. I feel good as well." "I know what you mean. It''s almost as though I''m more motivated in the morning to get out of bed and get on with my day." "Strange isn''t it? Not that I''m complaining. I''m extremely grateful we were allowed to live here and don''t think that I could ever find the words to express my gratitude." "I know what you mean. It really is something else... As I was saying though, you should check out the magic school. I really think you''ll appreciate what you can learn there." "I''ll have a quick peek tomorrow. Danielle''s working and I''m off for the day. I suppose there''s no harm in checking it out." "You should, Mary. You don''t want to be overlooked by these dashing young men just because you can''t clean with magic." "Perish the thought!" Conversations from Varona Mary and Helen
Unauthorized reproduction: this story has been taken without approval. Report sightings. Not only is the Academy in full swing, but I''ve also put an education system in place for our illiterate citizens inside City Hall. One of the rooms downstairs has been reserved indefinitely so that we can teach reading, writing and numeracy, to anyone who might be interested. Which is more people than I thought it would be. Other than having to start a few more basic courses, there''s also a room for calculus and another for further education. Since they''re both advanced courses however, there aren''t don''t have many students in yet. Just a few merchants trying to better themselves to make sure they aren''t swindled whilst performing their trade. Honestly, it''s surprising that u haven''t unlocked an actual feature for this type of thing yet. Educating people will surely help keep them out of trouble. At the least, it should help them make informed decisions as opposed to stupid ones. After realising I already had the teacher sub-class, it only makes sense to get the most use out of it as possible. Plus, everything betters Varona so I''d foolish not to take advantage of my classes. Children have lessons during the day, joined by no-job-bums and adults too old to work. The general workforce attend classes in the evening, once their shifts are over and are even joined by some of those from the Academy. Even shopkeepers can be found inside scribbling away on pieces of parchment. Although, I suppose it''s always good to stay on top of your numbers. City hall is becoming quite a popular place as the building is always teeming with people coming and going. Whether it learning, working, visiting, or they''re just there to grab a contract, the feature guarantees a heavy footfall on a daily basis. Inside the feature known only to a few as The Hall of Inquiries, is the office of contracts. The room itself is almost-completely autonomous, but Deputy Mayor Sacha still keeps a watchful eye out regardless of whether it runs on its own or not. Within, many filing cabinets fill the rectangular room from wall to wall on three sides. The only other feature is a small desk in the middle of the office which Sacha uses for reading. The missions undertaken by my family members all get filed away inside after successful completion. The process of filing happens twice. When a contract is accepted, the contractor stamps the parchment with Magic Stamp A before placing it in the, in-process, cabinet. Upon completion, they slap the same parchment with Magic Stamp B before filing it away in the completed section. Simple really. Or it was until this room made itself known. It was easier when they were able to accept directly from the contract giver, which they still can. Provided the time''s right and it''s not rush hour in any of the establishments they would pick them up from. All my family are generally busy these days running their features to the best of their abilities. They don''t need pestering by Dum trying to see what they''ve got to offer. In that sense, it''s much easier that they can now come here as contracts are automatically added whenever they become available. No one needs to stop work to hand out a mission and the city is starting to run smoothly. Funnily, the cabinets lining the wall inside the Office of Contracts all have four drawers and look identical. The drawers themselves are as strange as the room because of the space magic inside them. They open out much further than their frame would suggest they can and, due to this, all my completed contracts are still being stored in the first drawer of the filing cabinet. Feeling the urge to throw some shade at The System, I realise there isn''t any blame to be found since nothing has actually happened. For a moment, I get slightly frustrated but don''t know why. I put it down to things usually going to shit, even though they haven''t, and move on. It''s been a few weeks since Wheeler and Aaron left my city for the second time. The large-than-life Merchant said he had affairs to deal with back home before he could fully commit to Varona full time. It also turns out he has a family in the capital and will be bringing them back with him. Aaron''s still just a hired guard so he went with the stodgy merchant. He was, however, hesitant to leave. Life in my little piece of heaven must really be to the young guard''s liking. Speaking of people hesitant to leave, I wonder how Noir and the others are doing. It''s been less than 24 hours since they left and I really want their missions to succeed. Not only will I obtain the credibility I need to call myself a legitimate city, but Lord Aldor also agreed to let me establish trade routes with the cities. I''m not an expert on trade relations, or item pricing, or deliveries and order fulfillment for that matter. Luckily, Deputy Mayor Sacha and another capable council member are on hand to deal with this should my Assassins succeed in their missions. Varona isn''t anything to scoff at these days, but unlike Ishda, our city doesn''t have a rich heritage, or an established line of nobles that have a say in their ruler''s ear. Instead, we operate on an ''everyone is equal policy'' and if you don''t like it you''re free to fuck off. Absolutely no one will beg your ass to stay. Unless course-correction of the soul is needed, however. Then they aren''t going anywhere. What started out with The Cramped Coop, The Forgotten Forge, The Stark Stable and the Fucking-Useless Hay Bale, is now a fully-functioning factory, dedicated to the production of a super important resource. DP. The citizens are the cogs and my features the gears. So long as I keep them well lubricated, they''ll keep pumping that juicy goodness into me. Day after day, night after night and in ridiculously-large quantities too. The thought of tonight''s deposit is already making me shiver in excitement. The Cramped Coop is now the Chick Shack and unlike its name would suggest, it''s actually a rather large tin building capable of housing hundreds of chickens. Three of these features run alongside the Fields of Fertility of the outskirts of town. The fields themselves are in the dozens now and more than a hundred subclass farmers tend to them and the coops in turn. There''s also the Pretty Pugly Pigs, the Cow Pits and the Golly Gosh Goats, but they''re some of the more recent features. Either way, it''s nice that food is now supplied to my city without me constantly having to foot the bill. Not to mention the citizens can''t complain about not knowing where their dinner comes from. The Forgotten Forge, once a crappy broken down feature as like the rest, became the Forge of Finalising and is the main hot-spot for humans visiting the artisan district in the west. Not that the Blacksmith inside every endulges anyone''s request. Instead, eccentricity runs hand-in-hand with some of these awkward features and the Assassin-Smith is no different. He won''t sell a single thing to anyone who visits his shop. That''s after a threatened to dismantle him aswell. I didn''t in the because the next one might be even worse that the current. At least the Assassin-Smith is willing to sell his wares through Cloak and Dagger. Even then, it''s still only the subpar versions he''s willing to let go of and I can''t help but attribute him as a hoarder. Which isn''t the best feature for a Blacksmith, even if he is part Assassin. He can''t possibly use all those weapons at the same time, let alone the armour, so why''s he keeping them all to himself? Whatever. It''s not the biggest issue I suppose. Tier-three human summons all come with a personalised weapon and it''s not like we''re expecting the regular humans who buy these subpar items to protect us. At least Tara and Lara make a nice bit of coin on what they do sell. Sales like these are slowly starting to fill my coffers, I think. Do I even have coffers? If I did, would Colin turn them into Mimics? Hmm. Maybe I should store my money elsewhere. Aside from the Coop thats ran by farmers, the Forge with its hoarding owner and the Stark Stables becoming the Shimmering Stables, the Hay Bale is still no different now to when I very first created it. Except for the cost of the upgrade that is. 2560DP is just appalling, especially when I''m 99.9% certain that nothing will be achieved from dumping points into it. Other than an increase to the cost of the next upgrade that is. It''s proper bullshit this feature! It''s a good job we have an abundance of fields to feed the animals with. It was all on Ali''s shoulders when Wheeler''s procession arrived and I felt terrible about it. That''s why there are a dozen of Fields of Fertility. Even though they only take a few days to sew, sprout, grow and crop, with the help of a magical cultivator, nothing is placed in reserve as we go through all that and more in days. The amount of food a fully-functioning city goes through on a daily basis is just ridiculous. Like, astronomically ridiculous. The only bright side is that we don''t have a bunch of nobles here wasting a shit-ton of what''s produced due to their own over-inflated appitites. I mean, why lace a table with more food than you need? No wonder the world''s going to shit and people are eating out of waste reserves. Funnily, those desperate people would be punished for doing just that by those who couldn''t eat their fill. At least The System isn''t piping up about theft though. Their souls may be safe after eating rotting waste, but their lives won''t be. Not due to the poor standard of waste control, but because nobles are just dicks. They''d take the act as a transgression against them and punish the starving people gorging on their waste. This fucking world. There are so many problems out there that dungeon objective A seems like a fruitless endeavor. How can I help people better themselves, when corruption runs deep across the continent? It''s even harder when the problems of my own are forever at the forefront of my mind. The cost of the Bale is still quite high, even when compared to what I retain overnight, but I still can''t bring myself to stay near the useless feature for too long. Arriving next to the unchanged feature, I barely have time to consider one more try before a rush of power appears inside my dungeon. It would appear that my family have returned. Chapter 56: Dropping In On Estelle The blonde haired Assassin is led to Lady Estelle''s last known location, her bedroom. Inside, the room is a picture of perfection and couldn''t be any neater. "Ok, squad. Time to start searching." A dozen Assassins appear behind Dropper before they set themselves upon the room, searching for anything that may hint to the location of the abducted princess. Their search doesn''t bring up much until an observant Assassin notices a ripped piece of fabric stuck to the outside of the window. "Mam," the man shouts out before he teleports on to the outside ledge and removes the cloth. Being extra careful that it doesn''t blow away as the window opens. Once he''s back inside, the male Assassin passes the torn fabric to Dropper who inspects it thoroughly. "Good eyes. I will be sure to tell the Master of your contribution. Also, you can call me Dropper. I''m not your senior or anything like that. We''re all Assassins here." She informs him and the rest of the group. The small piece of fabric has checkered stitching in gold thread. Not the biggest clue to go, but a definite start. They don''t find any other clues in Estelle''s room and Dropper excuses herself to find a guard. She doesn''t have to travel far at all as there''s one waiting for them right outside the door. "Excuse me. Where would I find someone who makes something like this?" She shows the guard the ripped cloth. "Hmm. Probably Annabelle''s or Jessica''s. They''re both tailors that work in the city. High-end ones too. Common folk don''t tend to have gold stitched into their clothing." "Do you have anyone who can show me the way there?" "The Lord said that we are to aid you as much as we can, Miss. I''ll escort you myself. The name''s Jen." Dropper smiles at the male guard, unable to hold it back. "I know, I know. Mom and dad couldn''t decide between Ben and Jerry, so I ended up as Jen. What''s strange is how two male names end up making me sound so damn female," he chuckles. ''At least he''s able to laugh about it. This won''t be too bad,'' she thinks. "Lead on then, Jen." Dropper and Jen leave the manor and head straight to the center of town. A dozen Assassins follow behind them, concealed and hidden away in the shadows. As they arrive at Annabelle''s, the shop is closed. "Strange for this time of day," Jen mentions. The sun is high in the sky and the streets are flowing with people. For such a busy day, there''s no plausible reason why the shop should be closed. Jen tries the door, but isn''t surprised to find it locked. "Let me," Dropper smiles as they wait. A second later, the door unlocks from the inside. "How did you do that?" "It wasn''t actually me," she laughs as they enter. Inside, twelve Assassins are already rummaging around for clues or anything else that could be deemed suspicious. Unfortunately though, their search isn''t as fruitful as the one they conducted in the manor and they find nothing. Deciding to head to the second tailor they choose to leave from the back of the shop. Outside, there are footprints in the mud beneath the window. As though someone has been secretly watching Annabelle. "Let''s see where these lead before we check the next tailor," she tells the guard, rather than asking. "How? They won''t go far around here." "Don''t worry about that," Using the skills she''s had since she was a Rogue, Dropper follows a trail of prints, scents and hidden information as she navigates her way through the city. Dark alleyways and tight corners lead them to the back window of Jessica''s shop. The second seamstress. It continues on, however, and so does Dropper, Jen and the hidden entourage. More alleyways and footprints follow until they finally emerge into an open space leading straight towards the east gate. Jen is a little wary of leaving the city, but he also can''t go against the Lord''s orders to help the intriguing woman. Outside the gate, farms litter the countryside in abundance. Dropper continues to lead them east past the small buildings which get bigger the further they travel from Ishda. Dropper continues to follow the trail until she eventually stops behind a large tree and indicates for Jen to look at the building in front of them. "Is that where we''re going?" he asks hesitantly. "Not you. Just me and the others. Everyone needs a lookout, right?" Jen didn''t want to charge into a fight, but Dropper''s words still sting. "I-I''m still a Knight, you know?" He tries to defend his honour. "Do you want to go in there and kill everyone then?" Jen''s face turns white at Dropper''s last sentence. "W-What!? Why does everyone have to die?" He blurts out. "Well... Cause they''re bad guys, right? Don''t you execute bad guys here?" The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation. "We do, but it''s more humane. We send them off in front of eve...ry...one." "Well, we do executions in the shadows. Where people don''t see. Oh, and you are definitely the lookout." In front of them is the largest farmhouse in the area. Bigger than every other house in sight, it has two floors and a large plot of land. Before they blindly attack, Dropper uses one of her skills.
Shadow Construct: Level 8 Recreate any area in the palm of your hand for your own personal viewing
A perfect copy of the farmhouse appears in Dropper''s outstretched hand. Waving the walls away, she is able to see what the people inside are doing. She notes the locations of everyone on the first and second floor before checking on the woman below. Thankful that she''s still alive, Dropper explains her plan to the troupe. It''s relatively simple and the dozen teleport inside the basement. One Assassin checks on Lady Estelle while the others secure the area. They ready themselves in case the men above charge the underground room. Not that they doubt Dropper''s plan, but because she herself told them too. After they disappear, Dropper casually walks up to the house and knocks on the door. She counts to five, listening to the men arguing and hushing each other inside, before she punches the wind stopper clean off its hinges. No magic. No skill. Just pure, raw strength. "Come on then dickheads! I''m not here for dinner," Dropper steps back and smiles. "Who''s brave? Not you," she points at the closest man, "You''ve already pissed your pants." "Don''t fucking stand there. It''s only one woman. Rush her!" A man can be heard shouting out from inside. The men hesitate for a brief moment, the flying door fresh in their minds, before they do as they''re told. Charging out of the destroyed entrance, Dropper takes a few steps back to allow them and they circle around her. "Fucking get her then!" They rush forward, each with their own weapon trained on the woman. As the blades and blunt instruments fall towards her, so too does she. Only not to the ground, but through it. The baffled cluster of kidnappers have to stop short in their attacks so as to not hit each other. A few individuals are not so lucky. Dropper re-emerges from behind them and sighs. She thought about removing her weapon from storage but decided against it. The men before her are nothing but ants and don''t deserve to be finished off by the spectacular blade that''s yet to taste blood. Instead, she releases an arc of shadows. Finer than the best blade that any human could hope to craft, it cuts through the middle of the group. It''s darker than a starless night and flies through the sky until it can no longer be seen. No one moves, not until Dropper walks to the farmhouse that is. They couldn''t move if they wanted to. They''re already dead, but they just haven''t realised it. She reaches the door and the bodies behind her begin to fall apart. "W-Who the f-fuck are you and what do you want?" Fear is present in the man''s voice but his face is twisted in rage. "That''s my fucking family you bitch. Why? Why!?" Dropper stares back into the man''s hate-filled eyes. No emotion on her face, she just stares at him before asking, "Are you serious?" "Am I... Are you serious!? That''s my family but you don''t seem to give a shit." He screams. "The Lord''s daughter is downstairs in your cellar, yet you wonder what brought me upon you. Anyway, I will be taking you back to Lord Ishda with me. Unless you wish to die here with the rest of your family, that is?" "The Lord will have me executed either way. Go on then. Do it. I''d rather die on my own..." Without letting him finish, Dropper removes the man''s head with a flick of her wrist, showing no remorse for her actions. In the blink of an eye she teleports upstairs to the three-remaining people in the farmhouse." Same goes for you three. You can either come with me to the Lord, or you can die here with everyone else. It makes little difference to me." The three women are horror-stricken at the sight of Dropper. Her sleeves covered in, what can only be described as their leader''s, blood. The silence coming from the floor below. The slight twitch that makes the angel of death look as though she''s smiling. With these factors drilling themselves into the subconscious of the remaining people, they all drop to their knees and begin begging for their lives. "They''re men. What could we do?" "We didn''t want to go along with their plans." "We''re so sorry." Not a single fuck is given as Dropper slaps each one in turn. "I don''t want to hear another word from any of you. I''ve told you already, what happens now makes little difference to me and Lord Aldor will only need one of you." At her words the women huddle together and begin to cry. It slightly reminds the murder machine of her master in a twisted way. Binding the women and taking them with her, Dropper has the Assassin troupe bring up Lady Estelle. The young woman''s curly brown hair looks as though she has seen better days. "Did anyone explain what was happening to you?" The dirt-covered girl nods in acknowledgement and Dropper leaves it at that. "Let''s go then." They pick up Jen on the way and head back towards the east gate. ''Thirteen beautiful Assassins, a beggar with his knight and three death-sentenced women walk into town.'' Dropper laughs to herself as they walk through the streets towards the Lord''s Manor. Catching not just the eyes of a few, but the many on her way. No one attempts to stop the large group and they make it back without any difficulties. "I can not thank you enough!" The Lord mumbles through tears. "Oh, Estelle. I''m so happy you''re safe. I don''t know what I''d have done without you." "Weren''t as fast as I was though. Was ya?" Noir grins at Dropper until Carrie slaps him round the back of the head. "I thought we had this conversation already? Master won''t be happy when she hears about how many buildings you destroyed." The grin is completely washed off Noir''s face and is replaced with a horror of his own. "S-She... She won''t be happy?" "It can''t be that bad, can it?" Dropper asks. Being the last one back, and with her mission taking her outside Ishda, she''s unaware of the damage that Noir caused. "Do not worry," Lord Aldor approaches the Assassins. "The only homes that were destroyed were the ones owned by those that either plotted against me, or stole from me. You can tell your Master that I am extremely satisfied with your performance. For now though, please. Let me toast the heroes that saved my daughter and my city." Dropper, Carrie and Noir ate and drank the night away before returning to the dungeon the next day with a sorry-looking treasurer and a pathetic guard in tow. Chapter 57: A Full Clinic "I still can''t believe the Master didn''t send me on the mission?" Light and Sophie are in the first Assassin''s home. The house is mainly unused as Light is more often than not, anywhere other than here and only uses the abode to sleep in when he hasn''t passed out in the retreat. His home is furnished, but without any personal touches it could easily be anyone''s. "I''m happy she didn''t." Laying her head on his chest and tracing the contours of his muscles with her finger, Sophie is extremely grateful for the time they have together. They''ve spent the entire day locked up in the bedroom. Laid underneath the blanket, the ex-dungeon diver smiles blissfully at the blue-haired Assassin beside her. "Don''t get me wrong, I''m enjoying our time together very much so. It''s just... It''s strange not being called upon for something important. I''ve gotten so used to being relied on that I''ve grown accustomed to it. I feel like I should be going." Light really enjoys talking with Sophie. He can be open and honest with her regarding any subject. Hell, if she''s willing to accept the fact that he was created by a dungeon, she''s definitely a keeper. "I rely on you now." Sophie''s smiles playfully as she looks him in the eyes. "More like lay," Light chuckles, earning himself an elbow to his ribs as she climbs on top of him. The blanket falling to her waist. "Now I''m not lying on you." Light''s heart thumps in his chest as Sophie saddles his waist. Neither are clothed and the sight of her body above his own causes many impulsive thoughts to enter the Assassin''s mind. "That''s t-true, but in that case... What are you going to do up there?" "Words won''t do it justice. Let me show you instead." No one saw either Light or Sophie for the rest of the day. Locked away in his home, the ex-dungeon diver taught the Assassin a great many new techniques. None of which could be used on monsters however. Not unless said monster was a beast in the bedroom. Dungeon Stories Volume 2
"I thought it would have taken them longer to return than it did." Wiping saliva off the top of Colin''s trunk, Me offers his thoughts on the recently returned Assassins. The King Mimic, getting a good scrubbing, has managed to breathe life into every chest I left him yesterday. That means I now own over three-dozen Mimics. Three dozen! "I know, right. They even stayed overnight when they didn''t need to. Maybe they were trying to present me in a better light? Although I''m surprised Noir didn''t nag them about coming home. In fact, I''m even more shocked he didn''t use The Syndicate''s once a day Shadowport. " While picturing Prince Loudmouth destroying buildings just for the sake of it, a Golden Mimic licks itself clean beside me. Not that it was dirty in the first place, but I wonder what Colin''s been teaching them? "Apparently, the Space Mages were still exhausted and needed to replenish their mana before the Assassins could be sent back. That and the Lord wanted to throw his saviour a feast and it''s not like you could attend yourself," he jabs, finishing up with Colin and moving on to the next drool-covered Mimic. Not that I haven''t already heard the same information myself, but it''s nice to hear Me backing them up. It''s even been a while since he called the Assassins monsters. "I suppose that makes sense. I forget that everyday Tironian have stats that are way below that my own family." Even though I used to be one of those regular, old Abi''s, it''s easy to get caught up in a power trip when you''re constantly surrounded by powerhouses. "I should try and get myself some of those Space Mages. I might earn another elemental affinity in doing so... Why are you cleaning the Mimics? They''re just gonna slobber themselves in drool again the moment you''re finished, you know? In fact, when did you even start liking Colin? I thought you said Mimics were dangerous and shit?" I''m quite shocked at my partner''s turnabout attitude toward the world''s most adorable legendary monster. "I can only attribute it to you, Abi. Everything I am is a part of you. My mind was created by The System to aid yours and you created my body with your own two hands. If anything, I''m too much of you." His words cause me to pause, until the perfect reply pops up that is. ''I don''t think you could ever have too much of me.'' smiling brightly, Me returns my gaze with contempt. "Please don''t start that again." "What? I didn''t even say anything." "You know that I can hear your thoughts just as well as your words." Finishing the smaller Mimic in less time than it took him to do Colin, Me moves on to the next. "So... Do you like Mimics now then?" Giving up on the teasing I had in mind, I keep to topic and inspect the work my partner did on Colin''s frame. "Yeah." Me zones in on a particular spot, trying his best he just can''t seem to buff out the mark. I take full advantage of that fact and throw some questions his way. The same ones that I once asked when he didn''t possess a body. "How do you feel about that?" Simple to start with, I ask a question he once rebuked by saying he didn''t have feelings. Even though he was clearly annoyed at the time. "It''s OK, I suppose," still putting pressure on to buff out that shine, Me actually answers without thinking about it and I push a liitle deeper. "And Hana and Mira are beautiful?" The question I asked just before the Catergoriser arrived. He answered accidentally back then, but immediately refuted us statement. I wonder what he think now. "Yeah, Hana and Mira are actually very beautiful." His honesty is more shocking than the reply itself. Finally feeling satisfied with his work, Me moves on to the next Mimic as I double down and push even deeper. "And Peaches is proper rocking that bod?" "Abi!" Maybe I pushed a little too hard. This time he stops - taking his core-coloured eyes off the Mimic to scowl in my direction, Me''s face says it all. "OK. Ok. I''m sorry. I was just testing you. I couldn''t help myself with that last one." Still, I''m rather pleased with how that went. "Quite. Don''t you have other things to attend to?" With the cloth hanging in his hand, Me stands up to take a quick break as he waits for me to leave. I just don''t want to though. With his carrrot top and freckles, my no-longer-Voice-Activated User Notification System is just too cute. Even if he does pack enough punch to level the city. If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation. "I suppose so. It''s just nice being able to talk to you properly, Me." Honesty is the best policy these days. There''s no point hiding my feelings from my family anyway as they''re all basically a part of me. "The sentiment is shared, however, point spending is a Dungeon Core''s responsibility. As your aid I wouldn''t be doing my job correctly if I wasn''t pushing you to do yours." Even though he looks human, he''s still the same subsystem underneath. "So you''re like the Kana to my Sacha then?" Portraying us as our city council leaders, Me looks a little confused by the reference. "Don''t you have them the wrong way round?" "Nope. It won''t be long before Mayor Kana relinquishes the position to her more-suited-to-the-job deputy. It must be the glasses, Sacha just has it going for her." Honestly, the deputy has an ocean load of confidence when compared to pale-faced, monotone utterings of her senior. "It must be the glasses? Mayor Kana also has a pair of... Go and spend your points." Returning his focus to the Mimics, Me brushes me off and begins cleaning the accumulated saliva off one of the nearest chests with more gusto than before. Or maybe that''s his frustration showing? "Yeah, yeah. I''m going. You don''t need to tell me five times." Getting my own jab in, although I''m not quite I benefited from insulting myself, I leave Me to his cleaning and decide to visit Anya instead. Tilly''s Clinic, referred to that way, even though the feature is the size of a hospital and The System says it''s a surgery, is quite busy. The building that I thought wouldn''t see many visitors has more citizens inside than Ali''s. "Why are there so many people here? Is something wrong?" Sticking my head through the wall of an occupied room, I scare Tilly half to death in the process. She acts as though something other than her spiritual contractor scared the life out of her so to not alert her patient, and answers back through the dungeon channel. ''Please. Don''t do that again. What would you have done if I''d been in the middle of surgery?'' The man on the bed doesn''t notice the Cleric throw an inquisitive look my way, nor her sigh or her shrug. "Sorry, Tilly. I have a bad habit of doing that. I''ll try my best not to do it again, but I can''t make any promises." I''m certainly not crossing my fingers on my side of the wall as I say this. Nor am I trying my best to contain a smile. ''Honestly, Abi. I suppose there are worse things than the occasional fright. To answer your question, most people are just here for a checkup. A few people have been in with bumps and bruises with the worst case being a small cut while the lady was cooking.'' So nothing is to blame for the entire reception area being packed other than a check up? It''s unlikely, but I can roll with that. It''s not like I''m brushing off another problem. "Are you happy then?" Tilly doesn''t just hesitate to answer, her entire body stops. Only momentarily, however, as she resumes scanning the man on table right after her blip. I''ve heard the story about how she was threatened into following the elf and what he did to his prisoners. Katrina explained it to me after she''d spoken to both of the survivors. She was determined to help them and that she did. "You can get up now, sir. The examinaion''s all done. You''re as healthy as they come, I''m happy to say. It''s always good to check though, just to be on the safe side so I''m glad you came in today. If you don''t feel well at any point or you get injured at work, pop back and I''ll fix you right up." Tilly writes down some notes on a pad as the man heads for the door. "Thanks, Miss Tilly, you''re a good ''en." Once the man''s gone, Tilly turns to face me. "I am happy. I love helping people. It''s what wakes me up in the morning. Seeing their smiles is what brightens my day and their words warm my heart. It''s enough to fight away the demons that plague the mind, you know?" I know. I know all too well the demons that plague the mind. It''s even worse when you don''t have a body. Trust me. "I know and it''s good. I''m honestly glad you''re happy. Is there anything I can do make it easier? Do you want a few more pairs of hands to help out? Sorry I didn''t ask before." I didn''t even think about staffing this place before I ran off, did I? It wasn''t even once either. The conversation I had with Anya about what has happened and why, sounded like the drunken ramblings of the local psycho woman. "It''s OK. You had just combined broken fragments of your friend''s soul after all. Ha. Haha. And then the Lord turned up! What was that all about?" Tilly''s nervous laughter show she''s not back to full confidence yet, but who expects her to be? I''m grateful she wants to work and even happier that it benefits her, but maybe she should have waited a little while longer. I grumble, "You don''t want to know. He''s got almost as many problems as I do... Or he did have." Why can''t my issues be solved that easily. I''ve got hundreds upon hundreds of Assassins right here in the city yet shit still manages to catch me out. "What do you mean?" I suppose it doesn''t do her any harm in knowing. Plus, she''s family at this point, her and Aura may aswell have been adopted by Kat, even though they''re all roughly the same age. Although, I''m not sure about elf? They genealogy is completely different than humans and for I k ow she could be 400 years old. "I sent a few dozen Assassins over to Ishda to help him out. Why is it that they can sort out his problems, but there''s no magical summon to mine?" I wonder if the Head Cultivator will be able to do anything for the Hay Bale if I ask him. "You sent Assassins to Ishda? Isn''t that like... Extremely dangerous?" She''s shocked that I would send my summons into the heart of any other city. "Probably, but he asked for the help and I got to benefit from it in the end so I''m also happy." If anything the blame would have fallen on the foolish lord for allowing dungeon creations into his city. It''s not as though I send my family out to pillage and plunder, is it? "Well... I suppose... That''s alright then?" At a loss for words over another situation that regular people just aren''t meant to be a part of, Tilly answers the best she can. "Don''t worry, Tilly. I know. I know." I hold my hand just above her shoulder to try and show some type of empathy for her mental state. "Anyway, do you have a preference on staff members, or are Assassins OK?" "I''d prefer some Magi if possible, but if not, the Assassins will be fine. Why do you have so many of them compared to the others?" Why magi? Is it because they''re better suited to this type of work? Probably, Assassins generally skip the hospital trip and send people straight to the morgue. "They''re my highest tier out of the human-classes. Magi are third-tier Mages, whereas Assassins are fourth-goer Rogues. If Anya reaches level 80, she''ll be able to advance again. I have no idea what comes after Rainbow Mage? Is she still a Magus? She should be, right?" Ending worse than I started, my honesty was going well until I got confused. Confusing Tilly in doing so. "Level 80!? How do you expect her to do that? Do you know how hard it is to level up... S-Sorry. You do know. I forgot. I''m sorry, Abi." They all know my story now. More so since Anya... Reincarnated? It''s definitely not revival. Reborn? "It''s OK. I''m over it now anyway. Almost. It is OK though, really. And yeah, level 80. That sounds long and hard, right? It is possible though, believe it or not. What would you say if I told you Light was level 94?" Levels like that don''t usually get dropped off-handedly like that and her face says it all. Disbelief, shock and a slight hint of partial-belief are what I catch as she struggles to find the words to respond with. When she does, I''m almost as shocked as she is. "The highest-leveled person I ever met was level 44 and he was the strongest in the capital. No one could match his speed with a sword or his skills in a fight. Yet you''re telling me that Light, the same Light who can be found in Talia''s night-after-night, is level 94?" The winning emotion of the three was disbelief. Kicking shock to the curb and bitch-slapping belief into the middle of nowhere, Prince Sillybollocks was certainly not the best example I could have chosen. The Ice Queen would have been a better choice. Even though she''s cruel and distant, no one sets the bar for confidence like Carrie. Her name is a testament to the willpower needed to carry Prince Loudmouth through whatever dribble he''s going to blurt out next. Still, Light always seems to come to mind first for whatever reason. "Funny, right?" Summoning the staff for Tilly''s Clinic, I go with two Assassins and ten Magi. Luckily for us, Necromancers have some pretty good skills when it comes to healing. Which is good, since all she''s going to be getting from them is necromancy. Ain''t no Clerics in this dungeon but you, babe. "No! It''s not. It''s anything but funny. How did he even get that strong? How old is he? How old are you? Why is everything around here all questions?" Pffft. You''re preaching to the choir here. I would also like an answer to that question specifically. Unfortunately, someone is always pretending not to be home whenever I come knocking! "You would have to ask him that yourself. I know the most of it but it still confuses me to think about. Him and Dropper are... For lack of better words, something else. And my age? That''s the last thing you want to try and understand, but if you''re that curious... Anya knows. I suppose you could ask her later. On that note, I''m going to go say hi to the soul-weaved Rainbow Mage." And avoid another wtf moment. There have been more of them than I can count recently and I could really do with today going well. I feel like I deserve it. I need it. More so, I want it. I just want a placid day where shit doesn''t go wrong once in a while. That''s not too much to ask for, is it? Is it? Chapter 58: Whos A Silly Core "M-My name is S-Susan and I was... B-B-Beaten by my husband." The timid, young woman meekly speaks from her chair in the circle of people. Her eyes never leave the floor and her fingers continuously rub against the fabric of her dress. "Welcome, Susan. Thank you for sharing. Sometimes the best way to heal is to let it out. It also opens the door for others to help." The redhead elf, Aura, smiles at the nervous woman across from her. "That''s right," Kat adds, "Everyone here has gone through some type of traumatic event. You''re not alone in this place, Susan." Katrina''s words help the woman raise her head. Tears run down her cheeks as she faces the ex-apprentice before looking at the others. Her eyes stop on Aura''s ears before they hit the floor once again. "It''s ok. I know elves don''t have a good reputation. In this city though, everyone is equal. From the Mayor, all the way to farmers, there''s no discrimination allowed here. Not by anyone. This is the safest place on Tironia. That''s why I''m able to be myself without having to hide who and what I am." Susan slowly brings her eyes back up to meet Aura''s own "Where is your husband now? If you don''t mind me asking." Kat asks, knowing the answer but asking for the sake of it. "He left for work two weeks ago, but hasn''t been home since. At first, I was wondering if he was having an affair. Even if he was, it''s not like I''d have been able to do anything. After a few days of worry and stress had passed, it began to feel... Refreshing? I don''t know. I felt as though an invisible weight had been taken away. Like I was able to breathe again. The only reason I''m crying is because I had to recall those memories. It''s... Not easy. Hard doesn''t do it justice though. It''s... Painful. Do you... Do you think he''ll come back?" Aura pictures the source of her own trauma, Hiroshi. The sight of him beaten to a pulp and embedded into one of Varona''s buildings was the best thing she had ever seen. Similarly, Kat remembers the blood-stained cleaning where Dropper and Light saved her life from Talon the Defiler. The life she was about to end by biting off her tongue. Neither women had asked for help, nor had the unassuming Susan sitting across from them, but Abi had done so regardless. "I doubt it." "It''s unlikely." Kat and Aura answer together which causes a small smile to creep across Susan''s face. The constant worry she has been holding on to begins to fade away as fresh tears leak out. Tears of joy, relief and happiness. "Varona is not the type of city to accommodate someone such as your... ex-husband. The type of people that are allowed to live here are those that actually want to work towards a better future with everyone else. Not the type who take their frustrations out on their wife, or people weaker than them." At Kat''s words not only does Susan perk up a little more, but so do the other women sitting around the circle. "That''s right. Status means nothing here. Noble, Merchant, Commoner. Everyone is equal even if they''re different. We''re all Tironians after all." Aura looks for her drink. The cup was next to her a moment ago. It has a flower painted on the side in beautiful colours and the elf has taken to using it all the time. Noticing her partner is distracted, Kat moves the meeting on. "Thank you for sharing, Susan. Miss Elsat, would you like to go next?" Next to the previous speaker, a well-dressed lady stands up and puts her hand on Susan''s shoulder. "My name is Barbara and my husband also used to take his frustrations out on me. I''ve been coming here for the last few weeks and I can honestly tell you, Susan, it really does get a little easier. The women here now mean more to me than my missing husband ever did." At the kind gesture and warming tone, over half the women in the group burst into tears. Susan included as her own stream down her face. As she looks up at the elder woman, she is embraced in her arms and the warmth of another person comforts her heart. Kat and Aura''s Support Group Dungeon Stories Volume 2
"Hey, Anya!" The Rainbow Mage smiles at me and continues her examination. ''Apparently, she gets persistent headaches that won''t go no matter how many potions she drinks,'' with her hand hovering above the lady on the bed, Anya frowns. ''I can see it. This class is amazing, you know, Abi. As a Cleric, I could heal injuries really well, but I didn''t actually know what was happening in some cases. Now... I know everything.'' Her hand shines green as she puts two fingers on the woman''s temple. She fidgets in discomfort until Anya''s fingers pull away along with a thin green tendil. On the end of it is a little, balck ball that has been extracted from the woman''s brain matter. Or so Anya says. I don''t know enough about dungeon''in, nevermind Healing Magic, and it''s not like I''d call her out on it anyway. She was just inadvently singing my praises by praising the body I made her. Aren''t I the best. With what looks to have been a miraculous recovery, Anya aids the woman in sitting up. Another short scan and she says, "That ought to do it. There was a tumor growing on your brain. That was the cause of your frequent headaches. No wonder you couldn''t alleviate them with potions. Any longer and... Sorry, I''ve removed the lump. It''s in that dish there if you want to look, or keep it, or..." ''What do I do with it?'' Why is she asking me? She''s the Rainbow Mage. In fact, Tilly''s in charge here. I forgot to mention that she obtained a title the other day. I''d say that''s shocking since she isn''t dungeon-borne and is only contracted to me, but with everything else... Exactly. "Shouldn''t you ask, The Doctor?" I know. I''m weak. There I go palming another job off on to someone more capable. Find this and other great novels on the author''s preferred platform. Support original creators! "I can dispose of it for you, if that''s what you want? Oh, I''ve repaired the damage that the tumour caused too so you should feel much better in a day or two after some good rest." Going from blissful exhaustion to heart-attack city, the woman''s eyes roll back as she lands back on the bed. "Miss Helena? Are you ok?" Not only is Anya panicked, but I''m also quite worried about her patient. Did she do something wrong? She was super confident a minute ago, where''s that gone? "I-I.. I can''t afford that." Helena''s answer almost goes unheard, it''s that quiet. Relief runs through me knowing that she''s alright and only scared about her doctor''s bill. "You can tell her all treatment is free for now," I inform the Rainbow Mage who smiles back at me with eyes that reflect her title. The patient, Miss Helena, leaves in tears of joy. Grateful for the free treatment she promises to return with homemade treats for Anya. "I knew you would say that, Abi. That''s why I healed her. Do you know that I have no idea how much treatment like that would actually cost? In fact, I don''t think anyone has ever treated anything like that before today. Seriously. But yeah, I knew you wouldn''t charge her. You could never resist a sad face." Once Helena left, Anya openly converserses with as if I''m not the ghost in the room. "I''m not even charging them rent yet, why would I charge her medical bill? Although, I should probably get around to making the city council get a shift on. I know some of establishments are making money here and there, but the others aren''t. I''m pretty sure everyone''s getting paid now. Otherwise, what else is Sacha doing with all that gold I summoned her?" Performing my best noble impression, Anya only caught one part of sentence. "Wait! You can make your own money? What can''t you do now?" She tries to grab my arms but her hands phase right through me. Aww. "Make a body for myself... Wait a minute. Can I? Gods damn it! I''m so fucking dumb." My Core beats faster as ideas race through my mind. "I could have told you that one," my best friend jokes, but the look on my face doesn''t change. I''m deep in thought and it''s not of the dirty nature for once. If I made a body for Anya and literally scraped her soul together, And if I could pull Me''s System-made consciousness from myself and stick him into a body, then what''s to say I can''t just do the same for myself? The thought runs around my mind and grows stronger with each lap. I can''t do it yet though, as much as I want to. My body needs to be the strongest. Especially now that I''ve got used to being called, Master. Even if I do consider us all equals, the Queen of Questions can''t possibly inhabit a bog-standard Assassin. Can she? What would her family say? "Seriously, Abi, what''s up? Are you ok? You''re freaking me out more than usual and it''s already hard enough. I don''t need you... Thinking." That one word brings my attention back to the room and I burst out laughing at my friend. I''m not that bad, am I? "Hey! I have some good ideas these days I''ll have you know. I''m smashing it when you compare me to other Dungeon Cores. No one''s as fast as me and that it''s a sex joke. Honestly, Anya. I''m killing it. Literally. By leaps and bounds too, I might add." "Yeah, but do you remember when you said it would be OK to pet that sleeping Lobe Hound? It nearly took your arm off." Anya portrays a serious face for a moment before she breaks into her own laughter. "I still stroked it though. Its fur was heavenly. I''ll never forget that. I actually have a teddy Lobe Hound in my tower with a few others. They''re so cute, but it doesn''t compare to the real thing." You would think that somewhere down the line, or inside the large cluster fuck of features I got from dungeon-absorbing elf and the Remnant Cores, I might have unlocked a Lobe Hound. But no. My luck was sucked dry when I got Barry and Colin. Anything I summon is loyal to a tee and would definitely let me stroke their fur if I asked. That reason alone is why it''s so hard to hold off on creating a body myself. I could go and stroke Trixie for Gods sake! I can almost feel it. The moment my willpower snaps after realising there are slightly-justifiable benefits. Benefits I''m certain to berate myself about later. Although, I wonder if I can leave a body once I enter it? If I can do that... Me. Can you leave your body? "It was still a stupid idea, Abi!" Kat shouts out as I wait for the saliva-cleaning Assassin, still in my Core Room shining Mimics, to give me an answer.
Why would I want to do that? It''s almost dinner time.
I need you to test something for me, please. And don''t start acting like that now you''ve finally got a body. You didn''t even want to hear about how nice dinner was before. Remember?
Well, yes, but... You were right. The smell and taste of food is really something else. Not only that, but being able to see and touch everything as well. The world really is quite amazing.
That''s what I was trying to tell you, but you... Nevermind. Please help me. Worst case scenario, I''ll make you a new body.
A new body?
"I know and I''m sorry, Anya. I''m also even sorrier because I need to go try something out. I''ll be back later though, ok?" "Do I even want to know?" The Rainbow Mage laughs and then shakes her head, "Probably not. I''ve got patients to attend to anyway. See you later, Abi." With that and a quick teleport, I''m back in my Core room. The green gem is pulsing wildly as I struggle to contain my excitement. "What do you mean by a new body? What might go wrong?" Me stops cleaning the golden Mimic to look at me. He then takes notice of my Core flashing brighter and brighter. "And what has got you so worked up?" "Nothing. It''s just another experiment. Come on. Let''s see if we can separate your consciousness from your body." "Wait, wait, wait! I... I, er... I-I don''t think I want to," Me''s words make me pause. My rapidly beating Core begins to slow until it has returned to a steady green. "Why not? I''m pretty sure I''ll be able to make you a new body if anything happens to this one." "That''s not what I''m worried about. How many people do you know, or have heard of, that can do what you''re doing?" Me''s words are like a knife to my heart. There is no precedent for what I''m doing. No strategy books, guidelines, or hints and tips on this journey. Just little old me stumbling forward. I understand why he''s worried. He doesn''t know what the outcome will be and after getting everything he didn''t know he was missing, he''s scared to lose it. Even someone who can calculate factors at astronomical rates can''t work out the future without reliable data. I''m also reluctant to put my own soul into a body in case I can''t get it back out. Damn! I really wanted to stroke Trixie as well. "Fine. I get it. I don''t want to go first either so it would be unfair of me to force you to do it. I just want to eat some of Ali''s food." I sigh in dejection. "Ali!" Me exclaims before he disappears. The Mimics look a little sad that their own personal polisher has just run away. I probably don''t look much better. I was slightly hoping that Me might offer to help regardless of his lack of knowledge. Hopefully, I won''t have to wait too long to acquire the remaining skills. The way I was originally going to create Me''s body will now go towards my own instead. Hopefully by combining all eight elements, the body I create for myself will be super strong and I won''t ever have to worry about death again. A top-tier Assassin body, strengthened by mana and all eight elements should be enough for me to enjoy life and then some. If I could take trips away from the dungeon that would be even better. I don''t know how that would work, but I''ve unlocked that many features recently that I wouldn''t be surprised if there was already something in my list that would prove to be a big help. Not that I don''t love my home. I just want to be able to enjoy all the benefits that we offer with everyone else. I still feel lonely from time to time. Even with so many people surrounding me, being overlooked or seen through is almost as saddening as being ignored completely. What''s a Core gotta do to get a hug around here? Chapter 59: Astounded Frustration Barry is down on the eighth floor of the dungeon doing what he does best. Ploughing away. Even though he isn''t the master''s main source of income anymore, the Mythril Golem still contributes in anyway he can. Recently, he''s been having some strange ideas. For example, even the Stone Golems are useless at digging, Barry was mortified when he saw them in action, but what they are good for is carrying. The perfect delivery system for Barry''s goods. They''re effecient, don''t complain and, best of all, they can work 24hours a day, 7 days a week, and then whatever then next one is that comes after that. Not only has he found himself a free, no-sustenance needed, workforce, but Barry has made the best maze ever seen by anyone anywhere in the history of everything. Or so he believes. It''s that good, three of the Stone Golems he sent inside are still missing. Although, they should have been back by now. Unless they''ve fell in one of the many traps he installed. The maze twists and turns as tunnels lead up and down, backwards and forwards, here, there, nowhere and everywhere. The only place they don''t lead, is back to the dungeon. The third floor of the master''s dungeon holds the only entrance to Barry''s. That''s not for a lack of trying and is one the stranger things the Mythril Golem''s come across recently. The master''s dungeon is right there, just outside his entrance on the third floor. A carved out circle shows and leads to the corridor his entrance is attached too. Attached to being the perfect word as beside the hole that looks out of his system, is a tunnel. Nothing out of the ordinary there. Just a tunnel. One that leads straight forward. There is also one to the right of the entrance/exit, alongside another seven, all running straight forward. What Barry can''t wrap his head around, is that his tunnels are running directly through the master''s. Yet, when he sticks his head out, his tunnels don''t seem to exist. Only a single corridor leads up to the bend and the entrance to Barry''s cave system is the only feature in sight. No half dozen tunnels running through each other and nothing else of note. Only, his side says a different thing entirely. With all those tunnels running straight forward, it would suggest the master''s dungeon isn''t there at all. It''s confusing. Too confusing for Barry to wrap his mythril brain around. Instead, he decides to continue with his dungeon. As a Golem, not a dungeon Core, Barry has no idea what he''s really doing. Every now and then he''ll go through the magical portal to his master''s home and have a wander around. Taking inspiration and a few Golems here and there. His master can make more and, aslong as he doesn''t take that other named Golem, he should be fine. Hence the Golem workforce and eight floors deep. He even went up two-floors and entrances to the maze can be found everywhere. What Barry doesn''t realise, or in fact know, is that each floor has a set number of rooms that it must hold in order to fulfil The System''s requirements. Not that he''s creating a proper dungeon and what he doesn''t know hasn''t stopped him before. Carving an archway, Barry proceeds to hollow out a staircase and works his way down step by gruelling step. At where he thinks the ninth floor would be, he stops. He''s gotten used to spacing out the floors and is pretty positive in his estimation. He''s further down than his master so, even if he could tunnel into her, it''s not like he can check. ''Break time,'' he thinks. The master told Barry to rest whenever he felt like it and ever since finding the magma bath, that''s where the Golem spends his downtime. Scraping his mythril frame through the man-sized archway, he heads up the dungeon. Upon reaching the fourth floor, Barry takes one of the tunnels to his own private room. There''s only one feature inside, but that is all the Golem needs. Knowing he''s put the effort in makes his relaxation that much better as he steps into the molten liquid and lies back. As one family member takes a load off, another one finds themselves pent up and pissed off. Inside the Pleasure Palace, Veris is causing a mess as she frantically searches for something. "Where the fuck is my paddle!?" If she was any louder, the citizens outside the dungeon would know about her missing tool. "Who used it last? Was it you, C? It was, wasn''t it?" She rages at the newly promoted Assassin who has only just returned. "It was, but that was a yesterday and it was you who actually used it if you remember?" Not taking the blame, Sweet C thrusts accountability of the missing object back on its rightful owner. At her words Veris throws more objects about the room as a sadness wells up inside of her. "Fuck! What did I do with it? The boss will be pissed if I have to ask her to make me a new one. She didn''t even like that one!" As the waterworks begin, the pressure released the from dungeon''s boss brings all the Assassins to their knees. "I swear on the Core, whoever has my paddle is going to get it" "Get what? The paddle?" C giggles from the floor, hoping to be on the receiving end of Veris'' frustration. "It''s not fucking funny, C!" A, B and D''s, sigh, shake their heads and begin the search for Veris'' missing paddle. Dungeon Stories Volume 2
After Me disappeared to enjoy some of Ali''s tasty food, Lucky Bastard, I set off to do what dungeons do best. Upgrade. Well, I''m not sure about other Cores, but im pretty sure I''m pretty sure my dungeon is rocking it on the upgrade front. Saying that, my good mood has just soured because of all the places I could have teleported to, I find myself back at the Hay Bale. Why? I don''t know. Frustration begets frustration if you need a reason. Anyway, after forking over the required DP, alongside a few choice words for The System, the annoyingly-useless feature actually starts to grows! Unless my eyes are playing tricks on me and that might be the case. A brief flash from the light of creation was all the feature got before it stopped expanding. Worse yet, that was all that happened. There was no morphing, altering, additions, or anything else worth noting. As usual, the excitement that gets crushed after every attempt returns with a vengance. Only this time it''s tenfold because something was actually happening. I cant help but sigh as I pull up its status. Finally. If you come across this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it. Finally! The description has finally decided to start playing ball, but, as always it''s ridiculously stupid in its own right.
The Bale Of Fortune: Any animal fed this Hay has their stamina increased 400% (Permanent) Any animal fed this Hay will be able to walk on water (Permanent) Any trade deals negotiated in, or with, your city will be 50% more beneficial Adventurers that offer a prayer to the Bale of Fortune before departing will be blessed with bountiful luck and a 75% increase in spoils The Lord of Hay may grant wishes to the pure of heart Unique Skill: Immortality Rewards: Bale of Infinity 5DP 256 XP
See? Ridiculous. Don''t even get me started on how the Hay Bale is now Immortal. I don''t understand how that even works? I mean, yeah. What a kick-ass skill. Obviously. However, It would be much better if it was owned by one of my family members and not an inanimate object. Even without Immorality, the Hay Bale''s description is a plethora of buffs. So why is it that I feel so annoyed? Where the fuck have these upgrades been and why have they taken so long to finally show up? Who the hell is the Lord of the Hay? Why can''t I assign anyone to this stupid feature? And what the hell is an Infinite Bale? Endless fucking questions and unpredictable fucking features! What was I thinking when I said I was rocking these upgrades? The only thing rocking round here is my sanity still. How is this stupid feature so good, but so infuriating at the same time? How is that even possible? It would be like Ali making the best-looking dessert ever, but it tasting like Lobe shit. Not that I know what Lobe shit tastes like, but it just wouldn''t happen. So how has this? I know I say it all the time, and that I shouldn''t be complaining over the extremely-sweet buffs it provides, but isn''t that what life is meant to be about? Or is the pursuit of knowledge just how humans live? Learn, grow, teach, record. Being a Dungeon Core is more of an exacerbating existence if anything. Since I dont play like normal dungeons do, there''s no precendent for what I''m doing so everything is confusing as hell. There are that many buffs on the Bale of Fortune, I can only assume they''re from previous upgrades that I''m only just now receiving. For reasons beyond my level of comprehension, The System has decided to finally let my frustrating feature undergo a change. Not that it shouldn''t have already done so long ago, if the standards of my city are anything to go by. Upgrading and evolution go hand-in-hand and this pile of, what I''m now starting to hope isn''t useless, hay has been a stubborn bastard. The Bale of Fortune better be damn well worth its cost. Fingers crossed. Inside the stable, I summon one of the Infinite Bales into a horse pen. The animal is startled until it realises that it was only food that disturbed its rest. With every bite, however, the small bundle of hay never changes. When the horse pulls away, the location it ate from fills in as though it was never missing in the first place. Infinite Bale. Fair enough. Does exactly what it says on the Hay. There''s a first for everything. Summoning another 99, I place one in each pen and the rest around the Bale of Fortune. The awkward feature has been solitary for far too long and even though there''s no need for the extra bales, the semi-circle stack they form around it pleases me immensely. It''s about damn time it''s changed!
It didn''t really change if you did it like...
Don''t ruin, Me. Please. I need this. In fact, how can you see what I''m doing?
My eyes are closed.
Oh, and that''s supposed to make sense how?
I don''t know, but you asked.
Whatever, that''s a you thing and I could do without right now. Even though it isn''t a categorising egotist, or a maniacal dungeon-absorbing elf, it''s still a heavy weight lifted off my shoulders. I remember when Katrina laughed at the small yet-expensive feature and I made that stupid vow that it would be the best piece of Hay she''d even seen. Well, wait till I see her later. Smug as fuck can''t even describe how I''m going to act. Giggling to myself, I realise everything seems to be going right for me. Not that I want to jinx it, or set off any flags, but shit is good right now! The self-sufficiency of my city is near enough at 100%. Other than a bit more gold that I''m yet to drop in our treasury everything is controlled by the people. As soon as I''ve finished donating the amount Deputy Mayor Sacha requested, commerce will commence properly in Varona. Right now, most things are free and people give whatever they can as a gesture of goodwill. It''s also good for Soul Guide as a steady stream of greens populating the streets mean they''re all living well and reflects a happy life. I''m pretty sure the city council already pays wages to the working citizens. And they can buy specialised goods here and there with their money, so I''m not sure why we haven''t already started. Sacha seem to know her stuff and her shit is that together, she could probably run this place on her own. We''re lucky to have her. Mayor Kana benefitting the most. With what''s left of today''s DP, I''ll use it to finish off her requests as well as a few of our less-than competent Mayor''s. Small purchases barely make a dent in my daily pool anymore so requests like benches and greenery can be bought on unoccupied land and transported to where it needs to go. Upgrades on the other hand take much longer due to the restrictive nature of Divinity''s Creation. "I wish that skill would level up! I''ve had it for who knows how long now and it''s still level one. Level One! What''s a Core gotta do to get some help around here?" Answering my question, the Bale of Fortune glows yellow.
Divinity''s Creation has reached Level MAX: Create Create Create Unbound to the limitations placed upon your soul you are one with the Power of Creation No Dungeon Core has ever obtained a System-owned skill before let alone raised one to heights unseen even by the gods With this your powers may earn the ire of the gods Creation is no longer restricted due to local populace Creations can be altered at no extra cost
Oh... My... Shit! Is today my birthday? Seriously! There''s got to be a limit to how much luck one Core can have in a day, right? As if on cue, the presence of Domination enters the boundaries of my city. Not complete domination, or even a mild version of the act, but just the feeling. It''s not the un-fledged apprentice that''s still with Katrina either. This time, a second, fully-qualified Categoriser, has come knocking. Fortunately, the strength of his will is nothing compared to Elric''s. Or it could be due to being a higher level than I was when that insane bastard attacked Katrina, but I don''t want to put too much faith in myself yet. My family, however, have all my trust and after a quick message, Prince Sillybollocks appears far to quickly as he hasn''t even taken the time to get dressed. "What the hell, Light? Clothes!" Embarrassed, and also slightly envious of Sophie after seeing the Assassin''s abs, a quick shout at the lady killer is all it takes for clothing to appear on his body. "If it was that easy, then next time don''t arrive half naked!" I can''t help but chastise him, "That''s not the point though. See that guy?" I point at the man dressed all in white. Catergorisers could easily pass as priests if people were ignorant to their profession. The Assassin nods and a jeweled dagger appears in his hand. It''s my first time seeing Light''s weapon since he advanced in tier. As per, I''m wibbly-wobbly jelly. The blade is slightly curved and there''s an ominous-green tint to the metal. Maybe a poison attribute? The handle and grip are embedded in that many jewels that it looks hard to hold, but the weapon seems to fit perfectly into his hand. Light notices me staring and a smile spreads across his face. "What do you think, Master? This will be the first time I''ve used it?" I can''t deny the quality of his weapon, even if it is smaller than everyone else''s. No puns intended, but that''s not what I called him for. I should really update those rules soon. "Have you been following Noir around lately? Did I say I wanted him dead? No. What is with you lot assuming that I want everyone dead all the time? Unless it''s Ali, there''s usually a weapon being thrown about," I sigh. "Yes. Your dagger is beautiful, Light. Now put it away. The first thing I want you to do is talk to him." I know that sounds like a repeat of the last time a Categoriser turned up, but Light was only a low level Vagabond back then. Now that I''m decked out in Assassin''s this should go completely different. If not, I''ll Divinity''s Presence the shit out of him. Chapter 60: Another One Bites The Dust Light walks over to the awestruck newcomer as instructed by his master. Sudden appearances through teleportation, or shadowport, could instantly spark a shit show, hence why she sent him on foot. Noticing the finely-dressed young man making his way over to him, the Categoriser stiffens up and makes no sudden moves. Nor does any mana form around him, none that''s noticeable anyway. He just waits for the grumbling man to arrive while taking in the city and its residents. The potentially-threatening newcomer is not as high level as Elric was. He could also be considered to be less knowledgable due to his age, but that would be just a guess. What it doesn''t mean, is that he''s stupid. Far from it. He wouldn''t be a Categoriser if that were the case. Light stops a few-feet away and waits. After Elric paralysed the dungeon residents on his visit, the Assassin seems dubious to go near another and he swore to get stronger so that the incident would not repeat itself. He will to never be in a powerless position again is what drives him forward. "Hi." Whilst waiting, his master is silent for some reason, the awkwardness gets to him and Light greets the man who looks similar to Me only without the freckles. "Hello." Neither are his eyes green, instead they''re a piercing blue. Both men stare at each other, the awkwardness growing. Neither say a word until Light''s belly speaks for them. He voices his inner thoughts and the Catergoriser agrees. "Er... Yes, actually." His stomach growls in response at the mention of food and Light leads him through the city. His eyes are everywhere, on everything and everyone. Neither men say a word as they make their way down the street. Everyone of the dungeon born watch cautiously as they pass by their respective businesses. Light feels a great comfort in this, knowing everyone has ranked up and are a lot stronger than they used to be. To the curious Categoriser, he''s in a state of disbelief. Everything he''s read about dungeons, and even the things he''s personally seen himself, could never describe the city he''s found himself in. Lost in the allure of eye service and wondrous scents, he doesn''t even register the ill-intentioned scowls aimed at his back. Gone in his own paradise, he follows his arguably good-looking guide. He only stops when the sweetest scent yet stimulates his senses. He walks right into the back of Light in the process. "Oh. I-I''m sorry. I was a little... Lost. What is that delightful aroma?" Having arrived at their destination, and being questioned on the subject whilst now being grilled by his master, Light answers politely. "This is Ali''s. Best meals in town. You said you were hungry, right?" Or as politely as he can. To his master, he thinks, It''s not my fault you were quiet. Plus, we''re both hungry. What''s the harm in feeding him? "Absolutely." With his agreement, and before he breaks his own neck nodding so vigorously, Light treats the man to a three-course meal at the best spot in town. During which, both men become a little more chatty as good meals always lead to good thoughts. It also gives his master some time to come up with a plan, which she actually thanked him for. Even though it was never his intention in the first place. Once they''re finished, the Assassin takes the talkative Categoriser, whose name turns out to be Simon, on a tour around town and shows the newcomer various sights he''s been instructed to. "Are you aware that there''s actually a dungeon here?" Simon eventually poses the question he''d been beating around. Light isn''t flustered, however, as he''s been waiting for that exact moment. "Yeah, we know. Or at least some people do. What would you say if I told you that I was created by the dungeon? As well as the last few shopkeepers we''ve visited?" Light responds with his own question and completely catches Simon off guard. "Preposterous. How would..." He gather a small amount of mana. Nothing dangerous otherwise Light was on order to turn him into dungeon food immediately. "No. It can''t be. I thought it was below the surface or something. How is it out here?" Knowing the truth, but stuck in disbelief, he looks Light over once again. It''s not often you come across someone with a sky-blue facial hair, but Simon would have pegged him as more of a noble than a dungeon monster. "It just is and I''m as human as you are, buddy. I eat, sleep, shit and get black-out drunk as well as the best of them." The Assassin laughs as his master face palms next to him. Muttering something about stupidity. "But... But that''s... But... Dungeons don''t create people. They make monsters! Fact." Simon''s ginger hair shines under the sun as he shakes his head in disagreement. Even though the truth is telling it to his face. "That''s what the last guy said, but my master can summon monsters too. Although, sometimes they come out looking human too. It''s weird.Anyway, she wants me to tell you a story, if that''s OK?" "Your master? The Dungeon Core? Wants you to tell me a story?" Rephrasing Light''s question into his own, Simon can''t produce any other words. "Yes. The Dungeon Core. What would you say if I told you that dungeons have strayed from their path?" "Their path? What role could they possibly possess other than to benefit the territory they''re in?" Simon only knows what he learned from books and tutors, and he has never heard anything about a dungeon having a path. Paths inside dungeons are common, but a dungeon possessing an objective, other than killing humans, is not. "My master knows the truth about dungeons and the world. The System and cycle. Life and death. She knows how, why and where humanity is supposed to go next... Really? You do?" Breaking character, Light talks to air beside him. Or at least that''s what it looks like to Simon. It takes the Catergoriser a moment before he realises that he''s already under the gaze of the Dungeon Core and probably has been since the blue-haired man greeted him. If you discover this tale on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the violation. "A dungeon''s main purpose is the betterment of Tironia," Light continues. "The way they''re meant to do that is by helping them grow, learn and advance. These are all part of what it''s meant to be a dungeon. A long time ago, a lazy God started a task he couldn''t be bothered to finish. It''s because of that asshole that I''m..." With his master not speaking, neither does Light and his eyes fall to the ground. If Simon could see the small ghost berating the much-taller man he might feel slightly sorry for him. Especially when it was said ghost who told the Assassin to ''Repeat after me.'' After a couple of nods and a few huffs, Light turns to Simon and apologises before saying, "My master would like to offer a very good deal." "A deal? What type of deal?" Still lost in the moment, Simon can''t even begin to fathom the man/monster''s intention and certainly not that of his master. "A... Mutually beneficial one she says." Light nods furiously as though the deal is too good to miss. He even goes so far as to give him a nudge, nudge, wink, wink. It doesn''t do him any favors however as the Catergoriser looks more confused than before. Although, it turns out it was nothing that Light did directly, only what he had repeated. "Why does the Dungeon Core identify as a she?" The only thing that managed to catch Simon''s attention, however, is the gender-identifying Core buried deep in the ground. Little does he know that questions are this dungeon''s forte and her Royal Questionableness is forever pondering life''s mysteries. "Are you discriminating against my master because she''s female? Especially when she''s willing to offer you lots of gold." Light frowns and mana begins to gather around him as his presence seeps out until he is scolded once again. "What? No! Wait. Lots of gold?" The universal currency of ''Do what I want you to'' grabs Simon''s attention with no problems at all. "How much gold?" "First, she needs to know what you get paid by whatever Lord sent you. As well as any other benefits you receive. That way she can offer you something better... Sorry, Master." At Light''s last mistake, Simon begins chuckling slowly before breaking out into a full-blown laugh. "W-What''s your name?" He asks the blundersome Assassin who keeps putting his foot in it, the cause of his humorous outburst. "My name, or my master''s name? Wait. How do you know she has a name? What''s that, Master... Aww shit!" At this point, Abi is already wishing she''d called upon Ali instead. Having only went with Light because he did such a good job last time with Wheeler, Sophie and Aaron. All whilst half-cut. This time though... "The Dungeon has a name? That''s huge! But honestly, it''s not what I meant. I was asking you. The person in front of me. The one claiming not to be a person, talking to the thin air, exactly like a crazy person would do." Even though the presence of the dungeon clings to the man in front of him, Simon''s mind is still trying to rationalize an unrational situation. "Oh. I''m Light. Didn''t I say so at dinner? That''s what my master named me and I am a person. I was just... Born differently to you. Is it that hard to understand?" Light puts both thumbs up and smiles, thinking his explanation was perfect. "Hard to understand? You have no idea. I still can''t work out if you''re trying to trick me or not, but... I remember. You did tell me your name, I was just... Distracted. Again, it''s a pleasure to meet you, Light. My name is Simon and I am the Categoriser of Gorn. Or I was at least, until my Lord declared war on the King for some reason. He relieved me of my position and sent me away the minute I arrived back from the cliffs of Tol." Simon the Catergoriser is not having a good time and seems more confused than a good-looking Dungeon Core could cause. Maybe? Either way, there is clearly more on his mind than his young shoulders are meant to carry. "That sounds harsh for you man. Good for us though, right? You need a job and we need a Categoriser for some reason? We should work together." Light sticks his hand out, but Simon only looks at it dubiously. "With a self-proclaimed dungeon monster? Even for one as funny as yourself, it''s still a hard sell. To save ourselves an argument, let''s say that what you''re saying is true. We''re supposed to be enemies if the texts are anything to go by. How could I possibly trust you?" Going off what he knows, what he''s read, Simon possess the impossible question. "Simple. You see all these people walking through the main street?" Light gestures to the masses, all making their way towards the Colliseum and Simon nods. "They all came from Gorn too." "Wait, what? When? Is that why the Capital''s streets were empty?" Putting two and two together, the young Categoriser connects the people living here to those from Gorn by their clothes and breathes a sigh of relief. He had believed a much worse befell the people he grew up around. "They must have fled the war you were talking about cause they''ve been here for a while now. They arrived with one of our merchants. Thousands of them. It was tough at first, housing so many people isn''t an easy task but my master handled it magnificently." With a bit of kiss-assing, Light is certainly trying to get back into the good books. Simon still casts a doubtful frown Light''s way. He can''t, however, deny the people he''s finally been made aware of. Especially if what the dungeon man''s saying turns out to be true. He had already seen many people dressed like those from Gorn, but in his search for the dungeon he barely even registered them. A dungeon helping people? It just doesn''t happen. How can what he''s saying be true? "Why does your dungeon help people instead of devouring them?" That question is enough to fault Light''s whole speech, or so he thought. "So that they can move on to the next plane? I already told you that," Light answers casually, as if to say ''Give me a better one.'' "The next plane? What''s that?" Unknowing thst Light only knows as much as he''s told, Simon''s next question isn''t for the assassin''s benefit, but his own. He''s never heard, or read, anything related to another plane. Curiosity has sunk its claws in as new information doesn''t come around so often. "The next state of existence. You go through it after avoiding the cycle of Reincarnation." Picking his ear as he answers, Light flicks his wax away as the Catergoriser almost gets in his face. "What? No one avoids reincarnation," Simon can''t hide his shock. More new information. That not found in any text anywhere and everything he''s ever read is being dismantled with ease by the blue-haired dungeon man . "Oh yeah? Tell me. How do you know that? Did you read about it in a book, or did a teacher tell you? If you''re going to answer yes, then don''t bother. Think about it. Who wrote that book? Probably that same teacher trying to make a quick silver by imparting what he knows." You may think that Light has gone off script, but he''s still following his master''s words perfectly. " And if so, how the fuck do they know what happens? Are they a god? Are they omniscient, or whatever that word is? Either way, Simon. You need to live in the now. Do you want a free house, an easy job and a fuck load of gold?" Nothing catches a man''s eye faster than the mention of money. "Y-Yes? Y-Yeah, I do." Having to think for a moment, Simon responds and nods in agreement. "I don''t think my master heard you, Simon." Light smiles and raises his voice a little. Encouraging him to do the same. The ginger-haired Categoriser opens his mouth and shouts at the top of his lungs. "I do. I want a free house, an easy job and a fuck load of gold!" Light chuckles lightly and puts an arm around Simon''s shoulder. "Well then. Let''s go to City Hall. It''s always best to sign contracts and stamp out details under the vigilant eyes of the mayor... And her Deputy." After a visit to City Hall and some extensive talks on what the Categoriser can and can''t say in public, Simon decides to relocate to Varona to live an easy life. With a salary three-times larger than what Categorisers earn in the Royal Capital and a rent expenditure of zero, his days will be pleasantly spent in the generous employment of the dungeon. Chapter 61: Family Gathering The wolf pack lay scattered and only Trixie remains standing. Albeit Injured and bleeding, the Alpha Wolf snarls at her opponent the Golem. The match-up inside the Coliseum is not going their way and the Wolves are at a clear disadvantage. As they''re inside the mountain at the original Coliseum, the only spectators are those waiting to take their turn and the Ringmaster himself. With a red, velvet jacket, golden buttons running up the middle and a dust-covered top hat, the Ringmaster Randall watches on in amusement from the best seat in the house. Not that anyone can tell how he''s feeling. Randall, who was originally summoned as an Assassin, most certainly did not come out like a regular Assassin. Everything below the neck is fine, it''s what sits above that has everyone confused. A moon, with its own miniature craters and everything, is the only word that does his head justice. That would be fine on its own, even if weird as fuck, but he can spin a full 360¡ã and then some. Worst of all is the black spiral that depicts where his face should be. Should be. If you can see its centre that means he''s looking at you. Even though the dungeon gladiators are unable to gauge the Ringmaster''s reaction, that isn''t a reason to stop and the fight continues regardless. Absorbing the ambient mana around her, Trixie''s wounds begin to close as the Golem marches towards her. Meeting its prey, it throws a heavy punch in the Wolf''s direction. Just before the hit can land, she leaps out of its reach and her opponent is caught off-balance. Not missing an opportunity, Trixie dashes back in and bites down hard on the arm of the Golem. The overwhelming force of her jaw strength clamping down on its arm begins to disfigure the iron. Not letting her win that easily, the Iron Golem shakes itself free and follows up with another jab at the Alpha. Fleeing to a safe distance, utilising the only advantage she has, Trixie lets out a howl. The Golem lumbers after its opponent, picking up momentum with each step until it is thundering towards the Alpha at top speed. Trixie still manages to evade the unnaturally fast iron creation, but it doesn''t slow down. Only, it circles around and is once again thundering towards her. Swinging and thrashing the Golem is relentless in its attacks and, even with the advantage in speed, all she''s able to do is dodge. Even then, Trixie still finds it hard to avoid the onslaught of attacks and a few catch her, opening old wounds and creating fresh ones every time they make contact. The Golem finally stops running after it knocks her to the ground. Raising both hands above its head, ready to crush the Alpha and seal her defeat in the Coliseum, she howls one last time. A weak, but high-pitched, cry for help. Before the Golem can bring the jackhammer down, its body is covered in a pack of wolves and they all crash to the floor beside Trixie. Not missing her chance, the Alpha dives on top of the Iron Golem and bites down hard on its metal head. It dints and crumples until it''s crushed by her jaw. A few shakes later and she rips it off the body. Randall the Ringmaster stands up and claps his hands, signalling the end of the match. Even wearing a pair of white gloves, the sound still echoes out across the Colliseum. "Excellent!" He shouts, even though there''s no mouth on the moon. "Truly excellent. Well done, Trixie." Appearing in the ring, the Ringmaster strokes the Alpha wolf and checks her stats in the process. "Very, very nice. One more level and you''ll be able to evolve. Your skills have grown nicely too. Swift Foot, Crushing Fang and Command have all grown by multiple levels." Behind Randall, the separated pieces of Trixie''s opponent pull themselves back together. "Next time, I''ll have to increase the difficulty." Teleporting back to his box, the Ringmaster takes his seat, ready to watch the next set of contenders. He didn''t watch the wolves leave, miserable as they were at the mention of a stronger Golem, not did he hear Trixie whine when he said it. The only thing Randy cares for is levels. The task set by the master. The purpose of his feature. The will of his soul. The wolf pack leave the Coliseum and the Acolytes, who were just watching anxiously, are next up against the fully-repaired Iron Golem. They slowly push and pull their way to the ring as the Ringmaster reaches for the cane beside him, only to find it missing. All black, with a deadly point on bottom and a white diamond the size of a fist on top, the weapon/walking is nowhere to be seen. "Hmm. I swear I left it right here." Dungeon Stories Volume 2
How about that! Just when you think shit is about to get dire, it turns into a mountain of gold. Not literally, but with my own fully-fledged Categoriser, not to mention Katrina and her new pal Anon, I''m making some serious waves right now. I''m pretty sure that Kat has my back. After what she went through, Light and Dropper are literally her heroes. There''s no reason she would ever want to hurt or betray them and by association that includes me too. Anon, I haven''t had a chance to talk to yet, but I''m sure he''ll follow Katrina''s lead. I mean, he''s already doing it, so he''s not a problem really. It''s Simon that''s the wild card. He was shining rather brightly after he accepted my contract and I have no idea what he might end up advancing to. For now, it''s nothing serious as my menu lists him at level 27. It''s when he eventually reaches rank 40 that we''re going to have problems. I''m not even sure if a Categoriser has ever risen that far? Under my breath, I secretly send thanks to the magical Lord residing inside the Bale of Fortune before reading the skill description for Divinity''s Creation. Apparently, I can use it as much and as often as I want now without restriction. Which is ridiculously amazing, I might add. Thanks to that, I had a good laugh after whooping out a ton of gold in front of Simon. The poor man almost collapsed from excitement. And with the expression plastered across his face, I knew he was hooked. Although, I still can''t believe it was that easy to recruit myself a Categoriser without any issues. Even though they''re meant to be a dungeons sworn enemy, I think we played that rather smartly. How many other Cores can boast of having, not one, but multiple Catergorisers on the payroll? Money really does remove all barriers. With Simon, Katrina and Anon, I should be able to dissuade any other Categorisers from starting shit with my dungeon from now on and hopefully without any issues. Better yet, if I can get even more on my books there''ll be nothing to worry about in my future. This dungeon''s going to have more Categorisers than anyone else on the whole-damn planet. Fact. It''s relaxing knowing that, what could have been, my greatest enemies have now become my own personal assets. Super relaxing. It''s also a bit off the ridiculous scale, but who''s nitpicking over classes? Certainly not me. I''m living this shit up to the max and there''s nothing that could kill my buzz. Take the moment to enjoy my bright-looking future, I teleport to my tower at Academy central. Taking in the city below basking in the setting sun, I still can''t believe that all this came about through my own efforts. This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work. OK. Maybe not all my own efforts. I''m only able to take the glory thanks to the hundreds of Assassins summoned through my crazy-ass Dungeon Core powers. I''m still waiting in answer about that from The System, but then again I''m waiting on a lot of things from her so... Yeah, not expecting anything soon. She must have a lot in her plate to only offer me sarcastic snippets and tiny bouts of encouragement. Even when she does... It doesn''t matter. Not even she could kill the buzz I''ve got going on right now. Hovering above my futon, which has more stuffed animals around and on it than anything else, I smile happily to myself. Being a Dungeon Core isn''t a bad deal. Sure, the early days are dark and there''s no torches to see your arse from your elbow, but it does get better. The prospect of creating myself a human body, the very thing I''ve been doing since day fucking one, is no longer a dream. Better yet, it''s going to be that strong, I''m going to be like final-of-final last bosses. Abi he Boss is in town so you better watch out lest she obliterate you. This chick doesn''t need to eat every stray going anymore so fools best be treading carefully now. Someone''s got a super red soul? Better know they''re getting obliterated and reincarnated as a pile of dung. Enjoy your new life you piece of shit. Phew. I better rein myself in. I''m just super psyched. Plus, being the boss is the absolute best. There''s no one to tell you to stop slacking.
Didn''t you just come down from your tower not too long ago?
Damn it, Me. Cut me some slack will you. The Hay Bale actually evolving took everything I had. It''s about time, right? Plus, the stupid thing granted the first thing I said. Not wished for, but said! I needed a break after that happened, but then a fucking Categoriser went and showed showed up, didn''t he? Seriously. Prince Sillybollocks was about as much as help as... Light did OK. We need to talk about his blaz¨¦ attitude at some point though, but yeah. We had to go through the contracting and... OK, that was pretty sweet, but I need a moment to myself, Me. I just want to watch the sunset in peace. Me and my cuddlies. Can''t a woman relax in peace without her partner calling her out on it for once? Apparently not. Me teleports to the tower and flops down on my Royal Futon, earning my ire and destroying my good vibe. "What the hell, Me? It''s bad enough that I can''t enjoy the damn thing myself, but I don''t need you rubbing its comfort in my face. Get off it, now!" Glaring at him, Me returns my furious gaze with a cheesy smile. Only irritating me even more. "I''m only doing what you told me to, Abi. Eating, drinking... Relaxing," His grin grows even bigger. In my anger, I summon him an orange futon next to mine with a ginger Direwolf. "That''s yours. Move." "I don''t like that one. I''m going to stay here." How old is he? Is he doing this on purpose as revenge for all those times I teased him. That was different. I was trying to get him to understand his own feelings. To reconcile with his System-created humanity or whatever it is he has. Right now, he''s just being a bitch. Lije that annoying sister that won''t leave the room even though you''ve told her a bazillion times. I swear to the gods, Me. Get off my futon now or I''ll slap you that hard, your soul will feel it! Playtimes over after Me''s "Hmmph." and I slap him as hard as a spirit can slap anyone. Which is actually pretty fucking hard it turns out. I''ve never been able to touch anyone before and without realising it would happen, I actually knock Me''s System-created soul out of his body. Which then collapses to the ground an empty husk. "Me!?" Panicking, I keep screaming my partner''s name. I''m not angry anymore and he can have my futon. Me doesn''t have a soul form and I can''t help but worry that I''ve just killed my friend.
What the hell, Abi!
Until he voices his complaints that is. Then I''m just relieved. "Thank the gods. I''m sorry, Me. I didn''t mean to do that. I''m really sorry. Not that it''s my fault. When has something like that ever happened before! That was absolutely an accident." Hearing his voice eases my mind and conscience.
It''s hard to believe it was an accident after you just told me what was going to happen. Also, stupid shit happens around here all the time. Next time you think about doing something like that, don''t.
"Don''t be like that, Me. Look," I transfer his consciousness back to the lifeless husk and put on my best smile as he stands up. "See. Good as new. And we know that you can leave and return to your body now. So it''s all good. I was still worried about it to be honest. I wonder if it will work for me?" "A Dungeon Core with a body?" Me lets out a chuckle, but soon breaks into an uncontrollable laughter. It''s not that funny. After Me settles down, he puts his hand up and watches as he turns it around. Wiggling his fingers, his smile never falters. "You are indeed a very strange... Person, Abi." "Not as strange as you, buddy. You were cleaning Mimics. Remember?" At my statement, we both start to laugh. Although mine is drawn short when I catch sight of Me rolling around on my futon. I let it go though as to not spoil the mood. "Quite. That was a pointless endeavour. They just... Two Mimics down the line and Colin was filthy again, so I gave up. Defeated by drool. How pitiful." Haning his head in shame, I still don''t know what possessed him to even attempt Mimic cleaning. "Don''t worry about it, Me. It''s what they do. It gets absorbed eventually with everything else, so don''t worry about it. There are bigger problems than saliva." Trying to cheers him, the sentiment is not reciprocated. "Quite. Like spending points before they go to waste?" Even with his new state-of-the-art carrot-topped body, Me is and forever will be my Voice Activated User Notification System. "They don''t go to waste. They level up Overstock so even if I forget to spend them, it''s all good. Even if I don''t continue to grow, surely I''m at a level now where my income is sufficient enough to let me laze around for a few months, right?" Me looks at me as though I''m spouting blasphemous nonsense. "Come on, Me. I know the reason you were created was to help me grow, but you need to cut me some slack on the spend, spend, spend routine. You know better than I do that no one else is pulling in the numbers that I am. Hell, I''m probably taking in more than a hundred Dungeon Cores combined at this point. Sure, some of it was luck, but we''re still rolling in DP and will be as long as everyone stays happy. The city will grow slowly and so will my income, so just... Chill your beans. You did your job well and I will probably have a million more questions at ask by tomorrow, so for tonight let''s just relax. Let''s get Ali to cook up a meal to eat with everyone at the sanctuary. What do you think?" "Hmm. I do like the sound of Ali''s cooking. Although something inside is still urging me to make you spend points, I will suppress it for tonight. Eating together is the best." I can''t help but laugh at the honesty coming from my partner. He''s certainly adapting to human life, that''s for sure. "You''re not wrong, Me. It is the best." I only wish I was. Although, I''m in my own way this time. I could create myself a body like Me''s, or even Anya''s, to partake, but I''m still reluctant to do so. A few hours later the System-created room on the first floor of my dungeon is bustling with activity. The place we call sanctuary is aptly named because it''s only for the dungeon borne and those contracted to me. No normies are invited. I don''t know how Ali manages to cater for hundreds of people on such short notice, but she does it every time without fail and to standards that exceed expectations no less. She truly deserves the title of Chef. Me is sitting with Katrina and Anon. The third and highest level Categoriser stands behind them in a state of disbelief. He''s watching as Harpies, Bats and a few other different species fly past while throwing short and sneaky glances in Veris'' direction. Not knowing the hurricane that he''s unknowingly about to walk into, I feel sorry for Simon and appear beside the man. My appearance doesn''t go unnoticed and he jumps in fright, making my own heart jump in glee. "Hi." I can''t help but chuckle whenever I catch people off guard and it always works best with new faces. "Please don''t do that. I almost had a heart attack. Miss Dungeon Core, I can''t believe you control all of these monsters. It''s... Nothing like I''ve read. I mean, I''ve seen some of these creatures before, but never like this. This dungeon is truly something else." His eyes stop on Veris, the white-haired, leather-clad Assassin catches his gaze, before he turns back to me, hoping to have gone unnoticed. "I''m not blind, you know? In fact, I''m more intuitive than you would think and I''ll tell you right now, Veris... That Assassin you''re peeping at, is a wild one. She will break you and... I don''t think you''ll ever be ready for that. I could be wrong. Doubt I am though, but it''s just friendly advice nonetheless. Anyway, enjoy your night, Simon. Make sure to try some of Ali''s food. I''ve heard it''s amazing." I skip back over to Me as Simon flushes red. He must think I can read his mind after that. Although, men make it too easy to know what they''re thinking. Trying to muster up the courage to introduce himself to the resident sadomasochist, Simon fails epically and returns to take a seat next to me. In comparison, however, it could be called a blessing in disguise. He wouldn''t be the same man after spending ten minutes with Veris. "When we were at your tower earlier, I noticed Eddie wasn''t there. Did you move him somewhere?" At Me''s question, the atmosphere dies as everyone turns silent. Only the new Catergorisers seem puzzled by his statement. "Who''s Eddie?" and "What tower?" Are the questions asked by Anon and Simon. Both look at one another in confusion as Katrina shakes her head. "Eddie the Teddy, or so she named him," Me''s response is any but simple to both the Catergorisers and myself. What does he mean Eddie wasn''t there? I''m sure I saw him. Panic sets and I disappear in a flash, only to return twenty seconds furious as hell. My hands are shaking, my body trembling, and I''m about to rip someone a new one for taking my shit. The scarlet hue of the Dungeon Mist rises from the ground and blankets everything in sight. Just as I''m about to lose control, I pause. The mist hangs in the air like a cloak of blood as I pick up the smallest feeling. I can feel him? I can feel Eddie! Chapter 62: The Thief and The Dungeon From one of the homes in Varona''s residential district, the first cries of a newborn child can be heard sounding out. The baby''s parents, Tina and Mark Ely, are overjoyed at the birth of their first born. "I can''t believe it. I''m a father. A father, Tina!" The bearded man beams through tears of joy. "I just... I can''t believe it. You were absolutely amazing, T." Praising his wife, Mark can''t help but feel jubilation as he looks at the small bundle in her arms. "Thank you, hun. We''re parents now. I can hardly believe it either. He''s so cute isn''t he?" Cradling her son, Tina lets out fresh tears which aren''t from the pain of childbirth this time. As they continue to congratulate each other, their newborn baby continues to grace the world with its presence. The little one isn''t intending to scream the house down, not that he can do anything else, but noise seems like the best way to vent his frustration. Up until moments ago, the baby was a 15 year-old boy diligently doing his homework. Bruce Gold was writing the answer to the last power equation in his math book when something hit the back of his head. After the tinnitus had gone, the floor below him disappeared and he fell into oblivion. Swallowed by the darkness, it took the teenager some time to find light and escape. Unfortunately though, upon his escape, Bruce noticed that a regression had occurred within his body. A regression of 15 years no less. As he cries his eyes out over the tragic series of events, both figuratively and literally, Bruce realises that he is surrounded by the warmth of people. The dream he had every night is actually playing out in reality and after soaking up the affection given by the two doting parents, his tears stop. Back in the orphanage, all Bruce wanted were the parents that had given up at birth. All he had on his person when he was dumped on their doorstep was a note with his name on. Not even a letter asking them to take good care of him. He was straight-up abandoned. As the newborns cries cease, the people around him make a huge fuss over him and stroke his face repeatedly. This warms Bruce''s emotionless heart and fresh tears start up. This time they''re the same type as his new parents. Tears of happiness at the family he''s found. Sure, having to start life again sucks. But if Bruce gets to keep his parents this time then he can endure another childhood. His short and brief life of longing almost dictates that it should be so. "Has anyone seen my scissors?" The Necromancer, who also happens to be the midwife, asks. "I swear they were in here when I left." Dungeon Stories Volume 2
Not only did I fail to notice the absence of Eddie''s presence, but so to did everyone else. Understandably, it is an easy thing to do, overlooking something that''s not where it''s supposed to be. More so when they don''t actually frequent my tower. The inky person who''s been there recently is Me. As my mist blankes everything in sight, I see a person-shaped emptiness slowly moving away from Me''s table. Pointing at nothing, I shout that someone is there and everyone dives toward the empty location completely trusting my words. All the dungeon-borne that is. Three Catergorisers, an elf, a Cleric and a Rainbow Mage, all look baffled as the pile of Assassins starts to increase. Jumping on top of each other, from the bottom Lara shouts, "Oh. I think I''ve got someone." Holding on to an invisible object, a second one hits her in the face. Fortunately my family are tougher than they look and Lara pulls the invisible person closer until she''s hugging them beneath the pile on. "I''ve got her," She shouts as the pyramid of people collapse and crowd around her. Taking the target from shopkeeper Dagger, Light and Noir hoist up an invisible person before hauling them over to me. With their plan ending in failure, the thief drops whatever spell was being maintained and a woman is left hanging in the grip of the Assassins. "Let me go you, stupidly-strong men!" The old lady protests, wriggling all the while. With hair as white as Veris'', the interlopers is certainly due to the passage of time rather than her trying to make a statement. A skin-tight bodysuit and a leather satchel, both black, are all she''s wearing. "Where''s Eddie!?" Are the first words to leave my mouth. As soon as they have found their way into the world, it''s already too late to ask a better question and I can feel Me rolling his eyes behind my back. The woman doesn''t reply because she can''t see or hear me, once again making me curse the stupid laws of being a Dungeon Core. Luckily, Noir prods her in the side and repeats my question. "W-Who''s Eddie?" She coughs. The old lady might have a few internal injuries after being forced underneath the pile-on, but they can wait. "Eddie the Teddy! He''s a black and white Direwolf and you better give him back right now!" Noir gets there faster than Light does and earns himself in the process. Not from me, all I want to know is, where''s Eddie? "Abi?" From behind, Anya''s voice sounds like it''s a mile away. After her haunting, however, I can''t not hear it. No matter where it is. "Abi?" It''s not alone anymore though as Katrina also calls out my name as do a few of the others. "OK. OK." The Dungeon Mist receeds and everyone calms down. "I wasn''t going to kill her. I swear. I was just... Upset." Aura seems dubious, Kat looks doubtful and Anya''s face says it all. She knows me the best after all. The also a certain helper, one who''s disbelief is apparent by the way he keeps rolling his eyes. "Does she have my paddle!?" Veris wades through the various people to get to the front. "I''ll kill her for you, Boss." Fortunately, I''m saved from making another poor apology by the terrifying glare Veris'' is giving the intruder. The thief, visibly shaken by the appearance of a younger, prettier version of herself, one threatening her own life no less, turns white. I, on the other hand, turn red. What the hell does she mean, where''s my paddle? I didn''t even want her to have that thing in the first place. Although, I''m probably irritated since I upgraded it for her and she''s lost it. Well, maybe not... "I have the paddle!" the intruder shouts, "And... A few other things." Even though she''s still suspended from the floor, her body is shaking. It''s nothing to do with Light and Noir having a stare off either. If anything, those two are like statues and I doubt they''re even paying attention. "Well. Where are they!?" Asking at the same time, I look at Veris, who in turn looks at me. She better know what the most important item is or she''s going to get herself a paddling. And not the kind she''d like either. "They''re all inside here." Her eyes motion to the satchel at her side. I tell Noir and Light to release her, but as expected neither are listening. If I wasn''t too worried after slapping Me they''d doth be getting it right now. As it stands, shouting in their ears also works. Telling them to stay alert, they release the thief and she begins throwing items out of the small bag. "Eddie!" Before in can hit the floor, I dive at the airborne teddy only to phase straight through it. Cursing The System, I inspect my cuddly wolf for any damage to make sure he''s unharmed. I''ve taken good care of him ever since the old man gave it me. Well, he gave it to The Syndicate, but beggars and choosers, right? If you come across this story on Amazon, it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it. It''s my Direwolf. "Please don''t kill me. I-I can''t help myself sometimes. I was exiled from my own village because I can''t keep my hands to myself." The old-thief drops to her knees and begins pleading for her life. All I can think though is that she''s mega stupid. "Why would she tell us that?" After making sure Eddie the Teddy''s unharmed, I question the sticky-fingered old lady''s life choices. "Please let me stay here," she blurts out just as I''m pondering what to do with her. People never make things easy, do they? Can''t she just quietly wait whilst I decide what to do with her. It doesn''t make it easier when she''s begging like that either. "What? Why would we do that after you stole my damn Paddle!" Veris screams while holding the inanimate object close and the thief nervously edges away. I really want to talk to her about that thing, but now''s not the time. Veris wasn''t the only person to have something stolen from them and many people are gathering personal belongings. Even the Ringmaster, freshly summoned not that long ago, is retrieving a cane. Or at least I think it''s cane. It could be anything knowing these lot, but the spiked bottom looks like it could do some real damage if rammed through someone. The diamond on top is guaranteed to break a few skulls too. "For now, ask her how she hid herself from the dungeon, please." Me answers as I''m lost in thought. The Ringmaster must be a right brute because everyone shows him respect as he makes his way through the crowd. Everyone that''s been to the Colliseum, that is. "I thought we didn''t talk about the dungeon to outsiders?" That one catches my attention, however, and I can''t help but shake my head at Noir. At this rate, I''ll start calling him Prince Sillbollocks the Second instead of Prince Loudmouth. All muscle and no brain these male Assassins. My sympathies lie with Carrie and Dropper. "Noir, we''re inside the dungeon, right now. Or have you forgotten? Look," I point at Samantula, trying to kill the thief with a death-stare. Even though she doesn''t have eyes. Then I move his gaze to flying congregation of monsters all above us, followed by Trixie, the Mimics and everyone else, before looking back at him. "I''m pretty sure she already knows." Noir turns red and his eyes drop to the floor. Light seizes the opportunity and gloats about how he knows everything, this that and other, and blah, blah, blah. Seriously. I''m seriously going to slap to slap the shit out of them both. Instead, the Ice Queen steps forward and the intruders flinches away as their eyes meet. Carrie asks how she managed to conceale her presence and when she answers, my anger is overwritten. It turns out that the thief isn''t actually a thief at all, but is in fact a kleptomaniac Space Mage. The technique she uses to hide is called Void Step and is unlocked at the third rank of her class. Third rank! The fact that she''s a Third-Tier human is even more shocking than her being able to hide from me in my own dungeon. She''s a rarity in these times, if we forget my family exists for a moment that is. Even the Lord''s guards haven''t past the second tier and they''re not likely to do so. Easy living means stagnated levels and the only way to grow is to put the effort in. You''ve got to risk it for a biscuit, or so they say. Not only is the sticky-fingered Space Mage in the third rank, but she''s actually level 79! She''s almost ready to advance Fourth-Tier which leaves me with more questions than I started with as per the norm. Nevermind being a Dungeon Core, life is just frustrating in general. The fact that the Space Mage is surrounded by, what she would call monsters, my family in our Sanctuary, means we can''t possibly let her go. She''s way too valuable for that and plus, she knows too much. I have to contract her by any means necessary. Even if I have to threaten the old bat with Veris. "Erm.. I don''t suppose it would be okay if I stayed here with you guys?" As though she''s also able to read minds, the thieving Space Mage solves my problem for me and I can keep the smile off my face. Until a loudmouthed, butt-hurt Assassin voices her own opinion on the matter. "Definitely not!" Veris voices said opinion very loudly too which makes me feel awful. The Space Mage looks like she''s about to cry and I can''t help but feel sorry for her. Plus, who died and made Veris boss of the dungeon? Well... Technically, I made her Boss of the dungeon, but that doesn''t mean she outranks me. I make the decisions in this dungeon and I really want that space attribute too. It''ll add to the creation of my body, when I finally get to it, but I don''t want to upset my family just because of that. "Veris. Let me see that paddle for a second, will you?" The scowl she''s aiming at the thief turns to a face full of fear as she clutches it so tightly I worried it''ll snap. After reassuring her I''m not going to do any malicious to it, she bounces over to me in joyful suspense. Holding out her toy like it''s a legendary weapon, Veris'' excitement is clearly visible and the animosity from a moment ago is long forgotten. Gods, she''s easy. The paddle shines in her hand as she squeals in delight. After it fades, Veris inspects the freshly-upgraded tool of spanking. Diamonds line the outer rim and a golden V sits in the middle of the Dominatrix''s personal weapon. Her eyes fo wide and she squeals, "I love it, Boss," in a childish manner. Grabbing Sweet C from the bystanding crowd, Veris drags her off to the Pleasure Palace to test out her new toy and just like that it''s problem solved. "Now that that''s sorted," Light and Noir are laid on the ground arm wrestling and I just want to kick them so hard, "Please ask what her name is, Carrie." I sigh and notion towards the confused thief, still under the watchful eyes of a few hundred Assassins and monsters. Although, after watching Veris interact with seemingly-nothing and witnessing a dungeon item upgrade in front of her, the old Space Mage has settled down somewhat. I''m be surprised she''s not freaking out if I hadn''t already had my fill of daily surprises. "M-Marie. My name is Marie. Did the dungeon just upgrade that bat?" Carrie relays my words and the thief answers. I nod toward my Assassin, giving her the Ok to answer Marie''s question and she does so with the same gesture. That''s not what I meant when I did it, but the point was recieved so... The old lady drops to her knees in reverence and begins praying. Which isn''t the strange part. Oddly enough, I can actually hear the prayer she''s saying inside her head. Her hands are clasped together and her mouth is completely shut, yet I hear every word. Once she''s finished and opens her eyes, nothing has changed and I''m left surprised at how much she reminds me of Veris than anything else. Because of that fact, I suspect her prayer could have gone on for much longer, but she cut it short due to current circumstances. In that brief period of time, however, the amount of luxuries and extravagant items she requested was just ridiculous. Honestly, she just reeled them off like I''m the Dungeon Core that never stops giving. The crowd of people and non-people, all family in my eyes, disperse at my say so. Ali offers Marie a warm meal whilst Talia provides the booze and, in turn, they explain what I can and can''t do. Most importantly, they talk up the fact that Marie must contract with me before anything can happen at all. Not that their embellishment was needed. It didn''t take much to convince her, almost the same as Simon, and once again I''m wondering why everything is going so well. Seriously, I''m not complaining. It just seems like one of those preludes. The ones that come right before the protagonist has to walk a dark and dangerous path without sunshine or rainbows. There might be a few unicorns, but they''re probably zombified at best. Anyway, after earned myself another Categoriser and a Space Mage in the same day, I can''t but feel like I''m killing this dungeon thing. Even if Me is still complaining about my lax spending habits. Now, I just need a Time Mage and I''ll be able to create the strongest body the world has ever seen. Laughing to myself, both Anya and Me pull the same quizzical expression. "I hope you''re not thinking about anything sinister there, Abi?" My friend jokes. "It''s more than likely something ridiculous, I''d wager," Me adds with an eye roll. "I was thinking about how close I am to creating a body made from all eight elements." Unable to contain myself, I explain why I''m in such a good mood. It''s mainly to do with the skill I earned when the Space Mage accepted my contract. A spacial skill. It can make the inside of any object, room or feature, bigger than it actually is. I don''t know how it will relate to dungeon''in yet, or in the creation of a body, but it''s bound to be good. "Ha! I knew it would be something ridiculous." Me shakes his head. Winning the competition of who knows Abi''s mind the best. To be fair, we''ve been together ever since I had to endure the early days of Dungeon Core''in and, even though he has his own body, we''re never actually apart. Anya laughs at partner''s accurate assessment and the two share a dishearted sigh. It wasn''t that bad though and there''s no need to be o dramatic. Isn''t it cool that I can create ridiculously-strong people by infusing elements into them? Why''s no else seeing the awesomeness but me? And I don''t mean that ginger bas... "Well then. I suppose we''ll have to keep an eye out for a Time Mage won''t we. Although, out of all the elements and Mages, they''re the rarest by a mile. Controlling Time isn''t like space, or anything else so I''ve read. It''s meant to be almost impossible. Even for those gifted by the mana, their bodies may age rapidly if they can''t control the time element. More so when they sleep... It''s not a friendly magic to the user." Anya sheds a cloud over my spirit. A pretty dark one at that. "Quite. Plus, the chances of one just happening upon our city are little to none." Whilst Me brings a thunderstorm and drives home the finishing blow. "All right, doom and gloom. Stick the spiritual knife in some more, why don''t you?" I laugh if off, Eddie beside me warms my Core. Even after hearing their pessimistic projects for the likelihood of Abi 1.0 coming to fruition, I don''t feel disheartened in the slightest. I''m enjoying life, as much and if-not more than I was before, with the family surrounding me. Old and New. Did I say it yet? I love being a Dungeon Core. Bonus Chapter: Colins New Grooves "I swear to the Gods, I saw it!" "Don''t be silly. They''re creatures of legend. Dungeons don''t even spawn them anymore." "But I did. I did! I swear on our Mary''s life that I saw it." "Like the time you said that you saw that guy fall through the shadows?" "Exactly!" "And that people are disappearing?" "Yes! They are! Well... not so much anymore, but they definitely were." "Buddy. How much time are you spending at Talia''s? I know you have a thing for her, but are you still drunk?" "Why don''t you ever believe me?" "Because you sound bat-shit crazy, Sam. That''s why!" "But I swear, Max. I swear I saw it. It was a treasure chest. Honestly. It had large-muscular arms and some creepy-little legs that shined like diamonds." "That sounds like an expensively-hench chest." "It''s not funny, Max. It was creepy as fuck and the way it looked wasn''t even the strangest thing about it." "Go on then. You''ve reeled me in now and I''m a little bit curious. What was the strangest part?" "..." "Well? Don''t tell me shit like that and then go quiet. What was it?" "Well... you won''t believe me, but... it stole a pair of my underwear, right off the line." "Fuck off, Sam. Every time. Every-fucking-time!" "Honestly, Max. It took ''em and ran." "Bollocks. Why do I even listen to your shit? Stole your underwear. Do I look like a fool to you? Sometimes... fucking sometimes." "Whatever, I saw a Mimic! I know I did." "Yeah, yeah. I know it''s your turn to get them in. I know that for a fact. It''s an undeniable truth!" "No. I got the last drinks. It''s your turn." "I don''t think so. First the Mimic, now the ale? Do I really look like a fool?" "First of all the Mimic was real. Second, we''ve only had one drink since we arrived and I bloody bought it." "... So you did. I remember now. Sorry, I''ll get ''em now. Mimics aren''t real though." "Yeah you will and yeah they are!" Max gets the drinks in. "Thanks." "No worries. So, other than drunken escapades with diamond-legged chests, what else is new in the life of Sam Yuel?" "I classed-up today." "Really? Nice." "Damn right! You''re looking at a level 21 Shield Warrior now, baby. I can''t believe there''s finally a guild here." "There were guilds here before, you clown." "You know what I mean. I can''t class-up anywhere other than the Adventurers Guild. You''re lucky. The Mages Guild was established not long after we arrived. Jammy bastard." "I suppose so. I''m almost level 30. Can you believe it?" "Pfft... What?" "Bro. Don''t spray it at me. And yeah, level fucking 30. That means I can kick your ass if you do that again." "Level 30! Wow. Makes no difference though. I''d still kick your ass in a fight with no magic, Max." This story has been unlawfully obtained without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon. "Fuck you and your imaginary Mimic." "It''s not even funny now." "It will be funny until it stops annoying you." "What if I can prove it?" "Prove it? How are you going to do that, Sam?" "We could stake out my yard. That''s where it appeared last night." "We? When did it become a we? I don''t remember agreeing to a we. A second ago it was a you who was going to prove it. I, on the other hand, don''t need to prove shit." "Come on, Max. Don''t be like that, bro. We used to do stakeouts all the time back in Gorn. Remember?" "Yeah, but that was for guard duty. Not to prove that you actually saw a legendary creature, or in this case were probably too drunk to know what you saw." "So do it with me then. Let''s stake it out. You never believe what I say anyway so even if I do see the Mimic again you won''t believe me. It makes more sense to do it together." "Fine. You''re actually right. Plus, if I''m there we might have a shot at capturing it." "Ha! Now you''re the one being daft." "What do you mean?" "You''ll see. When it turns up later, you''ll see." After a couple more rounds, a full bottle of Jacks and once the sun had set on the mountain town of Varona, Max could no longer dispute his friend''s claim. Sweat dripping off him, he sits with his back to the wall. Quiet as a mouse save from the clattering of his teeth and the rattling of his clothes. Uncontrollable shakes riddle his body as the pressure coming from outside makes him want to vomit. To his left, Sam is no better off and is in exactly the same state as himself. He understands what his friend meant earlier on when he implied he was being daft. Any attempt made to subdue the strangely-beautiful creature would no doubt end in failure. The power that it was emitting was a tell tale sign of that fact. But why and where did this creature come from? Why had no one reported it or was Sam the first person to notice? If he was, then were people really disappearing through shadows? Max sat there contemplating life, death and his friend''s now not-so bizarre claims, until the feeling of death pressing down on him started to fade. Sam sat there silently, also musing over the same thoughts as his friend. Only when the feeling had vanished completely did either man speak to the other. "So..." "So, what?" "So you saw the Mimic, right?" "I didn''t see anything. I need to go home and get some sleep. I''m too drunk for this shit!" "Max, you''re paler than that perverted lady''s hair. I know full well you saw it so why are you lying to me?" "Listen mate. I like living here. I really do. It''s been a long time since I actually enjoyed... living to be honest. In Gorn it felt like I was just... going through the motions, you know? But here, other than the last five minutes, everything is fucking wonderful. The women, the wine, even the weather is beautiful most of the time. I just... I don''t wanna lose all this. Just because curiosity outweighed common sense. There''s also a lot of what ifs flying around in my head right now and I don''t really voice any of them." Sam and Max Ex-citizens of Gorn
Staring at my King Mimic, I''m presented with a new challenge. On the bottom of Colin''s trunk, stretched around his base and with more holes than fabric to accommodate his legs, are a pair of boxer shorts. Where he got them from, I have no idea and don''t want to know either. However, as much as I would like to, I can''t overlook this situation as it means he may have been outside the dungeon. Well, the mountain, but this is no time for specifics. Hopefully, he hasn''t left the dungeon land, it that can found out later. Plus, it''s not as though I ever told him he couldn''t go outside, even after Me''s harsh classification of the adorable drool machine. I just sort of assumed it was implied, but I do believe the time to have that conversation has come. I hate these moments. I don''t like telling people what to do, especially when they''re so cute. At least Colin can''t look offended or question my decisions. It''ll make this a little easier. Still awkward, but easier. "Ok, Cutie, listen up. I don''t know where you got those from and I''m not even going to ask. Seeing as how there isn''t panic and riots in the streets I''m assuming everything is OK. That said, you can''t leave the mountain and you can''t go to the goblin-filled floors either. Sorry babe." Feeling like I''ve done a good job, I''m about to teleport away when, the strange scale reaches new heights and evolves into the what-the-fuck meter, Colin replies. "I''m like Assassins. No one see me." The world''s creepiest voice comes out of the King Mimic''s maw and gives me the chills. Not enough to scare me, since he''s still too three on the cuteness chart. "Since when have you been able to speak? And why do you sound like the serpent of death?" "I learn." Colin''s answer short and straight to the point. It also reminds me of Peaches. The Pink Slime also had speech problems when she arrived, although some of that may have been brought on by being swallowed alive by Trixie. I''m in the position now where I don''t have to worry as much as I did before. Doom and gloom aren''t clouds that hang around with this Core. Gone are the days where Me reminds me of the ever-impending death ready to rain down on a dungeon out of control. Hell, at this point, control is the name of the game and it''s what I''m vying for. Me spends his time indulging in delicacies at Ali''s and keeping the adventurers occupied with monsters in the forest. He hasn''t mentioned death in months. Well, not mine anyway. That said, what the fuck do I say to Colin? ''Me? You want to... Come to the Core Room for a minute, please?'' Me arrives next to one of the regular Mimics. He pats its head and makes his way over to me and the larger, shinier chest in the room. "Ok, I''m here. What''s up?" I don''t know what to say, so I say the only word I can think of. "Colin?" Which is then answered by the creature in question. "Yes. Master." Me''s mouth drops open before he glares at me something rotten. I''m pretty sure it''s something to do with his ''Mimics are dangerous routine'', but before he can voice that opinion I drop a crucial task on my trusting companion. "So Colin can speak now and I thought you two would get along well. You being the Mimic buff and all. Anyway lots to do. DP to spend. Gotta be off. See you later guys. Oh, Colin, tell Me where you got those boxer shorts from please." With that I take my leave and disappear faster than any objection can be heard. I''m sure one was voiced, but I''d left before that so it''s not my problem. As curious as I am over where Colin acquired the underwear from, I''d also rather not know if I''m being honest. Also, technically, I''m not pushing this task off on another person. It''s easy enough to say that Me is me, so it''s all good. Chapter 63: Switch Up It''s been a few months since the sticky-fingerer Space Mage Marie was caught lifting items from not only my city, but from my dungeon too. Since then, a lot has happened in the mountain-town of Varona. First of all, we''ve established trade routes with almost all the major cities in Ishda and the quality of life for my citizens has never been higher. Which in turn boosts their happiness and productivity. Not that they weren''t living well before, but through Soul Guide''s eyes the majority of my population have a very-healthy green glow. There are even two blue souls kicking around in that field who are loving life. Obtaining a green soul is the first step towards the question marks of tomorrow. Not that I know what they are yet, or where tomorrow actually is. Even Me knows nothing about Soul Guide''s description, or the strangely-titled next level. At the minute, the whole notion has been shelved until I''m actually ready to harvest a soul. Not that I''m confident in killing on the best of humanity, but that''s a problem for future Abi. I''m sure she''ll be able to work it out when the time comes. Good luck me. I''m counting on you. Anyway, not only did we get in the Lord''s good books for doing him multiple favors, but thanks to that, the residential district of my own city has more than doubled in size and numbers. As word of the mountain town spread with every caravan, merchant and trade route established, more and more migrants flock to my city. Even now, the numbers keep increasing as people arrive on a daily basis, continuously adding to the population and, most importantly, my DP. The best part is that everyone looking to make a home for themselves in the city I created and staffed with dungeon summons are always full of joy. I''m sure it has nothing to do with the fact that my family are ridiculously pleasing on the eye. Or the rare creams and potions that can''t be found anywhere else other than Varona. Speaking of improved looks, the refugees that arrived from Gorn a few months ago have also jumped up a few notches on the beauty scale, reinforcing the belief that making beautiful people really is my superpower. Me still vehemently disagrees every time I bring it up, however, always claiming I have no such powers. Only ridiculous ideas. Although, with how good my user notification system looks himself, he''s not really one to talk. Even with his carrot top, he turns eyes every time he''s out and about. Not that he''s noticed. Other than eating, sleeping and enjoying life''s other little luxuries, the only other thing my partner bangs on about is my lax spending habits. Anyway, more people means more problems, but that''s nothing more Assassins and Mages can''t fix. And as soon as they''ve weeded out the rotten patches, the rest of the flowers bloom quite nicely. Deputy Mayor Sacha and the city Council have been hard at work setting up our economy and somehow, they managed to succeed. The local currency now flows through my city as though it was there all along and, although everything is cheaper in Varona, that''s probably the reason so many merchants pass through to buy our wares. Although I still foot a small bill each night, it''s nothing compared to what was asked of me before and barely even accounts for 5% of my daily DP. Even whilst looking after her own boss, it baffles me that Sacha had the time, let alone the skill, to know what she was doing. I mean, I created her and still have no idea how she''s managed to pull it off. There has to be a lot of work involved, never mind gold and I''ve never been the best person to hold onto the money pouch, or so Anya would say. I''d be lost without my family, that''s for sure and I''m not blind to that fact. Not only Sacha and the Council, but every single one of the people here play an important role in keeping Varona running. From Cultivators to Guard Captains, The Taskmaster to The Potion Master, The Chef to The Council, everyone plays a part. Supporting each other without ever thinking twice. But even if they did, they''d help regardless because that''s just the type of place we''re trying to build here. Alongside constant expansion in the housing district to keep up with the good-looking population that keeps on growing, a few choice features have been upgraded to meet demands. Ali''s restaurant, The Crescent Cafe, which everyone had taken to calling Ali''s because of the sign outside, has even been renamed that way in its description since the upgrade. Now a chain business, each restaurant is homely, welcoming and can serve 200 guests in a single sitting. The Chef employs a small army and hundreds of staff members are employed across the ten establishments she has scattered throughout the city. Fortunately, she can teleport anywhere she needs to on her own now and if a problem arises, Ali''s on it immediately. Aswell as the catering industry, I also had to upgrade Lucinda''s business too. The potion shop thrives with activity on a daily basis and is one of the most popular buildings in town, even with its outlandish appearance. Surprisingly, the oddly-proportioned building looks even stranger than it did before, opposed to the homely atmosphere given off at Ali''s. Which is strange for a Tier-Three feature, nevermind a Tier Four. More armoury than shop in the outside, four chimneys pump multi-colored magical smoke into the atmosphere in every direction. Making the feature look like it has four cannons instead of the smoke releasing shafts they really are. Inside, not one, but a dozen cauldrons take up the floor behind the counter. There''s also a few furnaces, alchemy benches and dozens of desks, each of which are littered with different books and notes strewn on top. After the third upgrade, Lucinda was finally allowed a workforce of her own and she asked for as many people as I would summon. Well... She asked for Slimes first, which threw me for six. Since her customers are able to see where the magic happens, however, I had to shut her down. Plus, I''d probably find myself distracted every time I passed by and would end up spending more time here than neccesary. So, yeah. I summoned her a load of Assassins as a consolation prize, which was probably more than she needed, but she was still grateful for the assistance. The Potion Master has almost as many staff as Ali now, but she only has the one building. Still, it''s fine. For whatever reason, probably the spacial skill I got from Marie''s contracting, Lucinda''s Liquids is much bigger on the inside. None of these bizzare occurrences dissuade her customers however, and the sight of her rainbow coloured smoke pumping out lets them know she''s open for business. Once it''s gone, work is over for the day and if they wanted something, tomorrow''s the day they''re going to get it. Last on the list of upgrades was Tilly''s Clinic, or as The System would call it, The Surgery of Soothing. Unfortunately, it didn''t keep in line with the other two features and the Cleric''s name was absent from its title. Maybe it''s because she''s contracted, who knows? Certainly not Me. Either way, the contracting didn''t stop the surgery from becoming the most grandiose building I''ve ever heard or seen. The Royal Halls of Regeneration, is one of the largest buildings in my city. Looking like it''s straight from the future, the feature has four floors, three hundred rooms, and everything is a pristine white that somehow never manages to discolour. Other than the ever growing number of guards, what started as the Hut of Healing now boasts the second-largest amount of employees working at a single establishment. Which is much better than Anya and Tilly tending to everyone themselves and being run ragged. Hana and Mira are in charge of the majority of my family. They''re also have conrol of the humans who joined the guard in the last few months. Although, the scouting teams work perfectly and it''s awesome that my family coordinate together so well. All that''s really left for the Commanders to do is train the regular Tironians. My dungeon is a well-oiled machine after all. Other than a few upgrades and a growing population, the city of Varona is not the only part of me that''s undergone changes during this time. The dungeon I once hated due to losing my humanity, the one I''ve shared with my family since we began, has also seen some interior and exterior upgrades. The most notable is what Barry has been doing without my notice. Now that I''m able to view his creation around my dungeon, it''s almost impossible to tell where one path starts and another path ends. If that was all there was to it, I''d be quite proud of the maze my Mythril Golem has dug. But it isn''t... Ignoring his ant nest, the dungeon running directly beside my own, with its own Barry-created touches, is just bizzare. Worse yet, he''s even overtaken me in the dungeon game and his has a total of nine floors! That''s two more than my own. That alone was enough to insight me into pulling my finger out. Especially since Varona''s doing so well. Copying my Golem, it never hurts to pinch an idea or two, my eighth floor is now a gigantic maze. Granted, it''s nowhere near as big as Barry''s, nor is guaranteed to lose half as many adventurers as the mythril-murder machine''s, but my aim isn''t to kill as many people as possible. Unless theyre on the shit side of the stick, that is. Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. I did consider acquiring Barry''s tunnels, floors and maze. As bizzare as his dungeon is, I quite like the fact that I can see something else inside tkhe mountain other than me. Plus, having it next to me, I can''t help but pity any poor adventurers who get stray from my path and get in there. Hell, maybe I could chuck the red souls in at the bottom and hope they''re neutral by the time they return? If they haven''t starved by then. Even so, do they deserve a fate like that? Probably. They are the smelliest part of the manure after all. Damn that Golem is amazing. If it wasn''t for those Gachas I would never have gotten the deep-diving DP machine and my start as a Dungeon Core would have been average at best. Even though I rake in an absurd amount of points every single night, it wouldn''t be possible without the foundations Barry laid. After creating the Eighth Floor, I did something I never thought I would. Feeling uncomfortable using my human-type monsters like Violet and Sam, because they''ve also changed aswell, I decided to use something else as fodder and to level the humans instead. Sam is still the Scariest Mary to ever live, but has an actual face now. The rest of her is still hair. Violet, on the other hand, is a human with wings. The Bat of Sorrow even gives Peaches a run for her money now. Plus, I want Sam on reformation duty, not dungeon duty. Instead, I stated smashing out new floors like there was no tomorrow. Generic as hell and easy to navigate, the monsters I staffed it with are guaranteed to level up humans. Notice how I said monsters? Yep, that''s right. Ugly, smelly, disgusting, vile, despicable, dirty and damn-right rotten, Goblins have found their way into my dungeon. Horrible, little bastards they are, but good for leveling a bunch of under-leveled humans too. The best in fact. No one feels bad about sticking it to a bunch of Gobs. No one''s going to want to stick it to Violet... Not in that way at least. Last thing I need is my family corrupting people when they''re in the dungeon. Hence, the little shitters. All the first-tier variants are pretty useless on their own, but they do they job they''re supposed to in numbers and numbers there certainly are. Twenty one whole floors full in fact. Not going to lie. It took me a while to actually film the floors when I''d finally committed. Not because of the cost either. Goblins are one of the cheapest monsters going at 5DP a pop. That said, it''s my aversion to the little shits that made me take more breaks than was needed. Eventually, it was done. Me congratulated me, I told him to fuck off, and we moved on just like that. Or at least that''s how I''m choosing to remember it. He might have a different opinion, but it''s been a few months like I said. If he hasn''t, well... We''ll cross that bridge when we come to it. My new floors scale in difficulty the further adventurers progress. On the First Floor, Goblins don''t travel in packs larger than three. By the fifth floor, fifteen in a group is what''s to be expected whereas sixty is the norm on floor twenty. More so, I added extra DP in the creation of Goblins on floors ten-to-twenty. That way higher level adventurers won''t congest the lower floors and there won''t be any bitching in the dungeon. Well, there hasn''t been since I opened it, but there''s still time. I''m not averse to slapping the shit out of someone''s soul though to scare them into not being a fool. Using every Goblin available, they also scale in difficultly with hobs introduced from Floor Ten onwards. Sporadically at first, then they''re appear more frequently and with small platoons they take command over on the floor. So yeah. I''ve got stabby XP. XP with shoddy bows. XP that hold barrel lids like shields. Large XP. Large XP in armour and to top it off, a stupid fucking Mage who never shuts up. Also worth a shit ton of XP. Seriously, he keeps begging for this alter that appeared as a feature when he was set as the Boss of Floor Twenty-One. Not that he''s getting it and he''s been told as much. The description I read was less than appealing so it''s a big fat no. Plus, I''m not here to pamper my mortal enemies. They''re here to provide the means to level up my human population. Mainly the adventurers, but the guard will also be training here as well as the forest. It''s not all patrols under Hana and Mira''s watch. To think, all that actually happened and then some. Thankfully, I still couldn''t care less about the little, green bastards and wholeheartedly encourage the humans to kill them as often as possible. Hence the term monsters. Normally, twenty-one floors of Goblins wouldn''t be too difficult for a well-seasoned party. Especially not one whose members level in the twenties and have reached their first class advancement. My Goblins however, as with everything else, are on a whole other level. After deliberately adding that extra DP to those lower than floor ten, the adventures aiming to train themselves inside me haven''t been able to make it far. I think the record so far is floor thirteen. A feature was unlocked after summoning a thousand Goblins. One I wish the Rogues could have, it would be just insane. The newest item in my list could even be said to be the strangest one yet. Could be. Nothing topping the Hay Bale yet, since I''m not sure what it''s going to do next. Still, the Goblinator sure gives it a good run for its money. That wasn''t what The System named it by the way. I just thought it sounded better, because of what it does, and finally renamed something in my ever-growing list that may aswell be a novel. The Goblinator, for whatever reason The System chose, looks like a shell one would find at the beach. A plain, old, empty shell. Except it isn''t empty as it has a vortex in its opening. One as dark as my overview and, every few minutes, some XP crawls out of the Goblin-sized shell. It continues to do so until the floor reaches capacity and finally stops. How does it know when it has reached capacity? I don''t know? I didn''t even know my floors had a capacity limit, but apparently they do. Me gave an explanation into how it works, he was definitely still annoyed with me at that point as his tone would suggest, but as usual it went in one ear and out the other. Even though I actually trying hard to pay attention, the minute he started throwing technical jargon around that was above my comprehension limit, I''d already stopped caring. Sacha would have probably understand it though. Either way, as long as Me knows, that''s good enough for me. When he''s not as pissed he might dumb it down a little for me. Dungeon''in 101 for dummies is now in session. At 1000DP each, which isn''t too expensive considering I never have to summon Goblins again, I placed a Goblinator on the first ten floors. To my sheer disbelief, that unlocked the Hobgoblinator. I couldn''t believe it, but I''m not one to look a gift horse in the mouth. It the rule of ten wants to work on a monster-producing feature, I''m certainly not going to argue. The System''s already fucked up enough as she is. I''m super grateful actually, even if it is a little like cheating in a sense. The Goblinator took a thousand Goblins to unlock and I was honestly expecting to have to do the same with the Hobs. Fortunately, their self-creating feature unlocked before we even reached two hundrand, but again I''m not complaining. I put Hobgoblinators on floors eleven-to-twenty with the DP-enhanced Goblins and unlocked the ElderGoblinator. I don''t even have Elder Goblins on my list of monsters, but I went ahead and placed an Eldergoblinator on the Twenty-First Floor anyway. The fake dungeon boss, Obling the Goblin Mage, needs some minions after all. Especially since he''s not getting his alter. He''s the only named Goblin out of the thousands that roam my floors and if I''m being honest, I didn''t even want to give him one. I was just about to settle on stinky when I reentered that Bosses and Minibosses contribute to the appearance of my mountain. The last thing I want is to be known as is Goblin Mountain. Fuck that! That''s why there''s only one named gob on all twenty-one floors. Each floor has a new boss assigned to it by the Goblinator when the current one has been slain and, for whatever reason, they all answer to Obling. Maybe because he''s the highest-costing monster in their evolutionary chain? I don''t know. Anyway, even with the anxiety-inducing little bastards roaming around inside me, they''re proving to be very useful. Simon, Katrina and Anon have been placed in charge of dungeon admittance and Sophie helps out here and there when she can. There''s no entrance fee, but we keep a record of everyone going in and out. Just in case the Goblins do manage to kill someone and I eat them by accident. One I''ve digested, regurgitation isn''t possible in my case. Plus, I''m not always watching the dungeon. In fact, I barely watch it at all to be honest. Not now the Catergorisers are doing what they do. Well... Almost. Maybe? Still, they''re working on something dungeon related. It Catergoriserish. And yeah it''s much more pleasant outside in the sunshine where all the happy faces are. Even though my aim is to help the people of Varona grow stronger and better themselves, I can''t expect that to happen without a few casualties on the way. That''s why we keep a register of sorts. If someone doesn''t make it out of the dungeon and I can''t find them inside it either, then it means I''ve skipped their notification and they''re no longer with us. Gods bless their new life. As sad as it is, death is the actual price for entry and you might not get away alive ager trying to see what I look like inside. That said, it''s not like we force people to come in me. The only ones that have so far are those that work in the Barracks as guards to train. Them and a trio of adventurers who showed up a while ago. They''ve been living here for a few months now and frequent my dungeon almost daily. They haven''t made it past the larger groups of Hobgoblins yet, but they''re doing OK for a bunch of low-leveled humans. Not that it matters, I plan to add even more floors now that the dungeon is open to make sure my Core stays safe. It damn well needs to be safe. With the single Goblin Mage chosen as the fake Main Boss and the twenty-one floors that I''ve added to my dungeon, the size of the mountain Varona sits at the foot of has risen exponentially. This led to a few awkward questions being raised, but members of the City Council handled it like pros in true Abi fashion. They kept passing if off until the questions stopped coming. Legends! In all fairness, the growing mountain holds no impact on the quality of life my citizens receive. If anything, its size acts as the perfect landmark for our city and you couldn''t miss the multicolored work of nature if you tried. Even though it isn''t actually nature''s doing, no one needs to know that. Anyway, it''s not just the dungeon divers of my city that put their lives on the line by venturing inside me. I too put my own life at risk now that I''m inviting them in. If someone stronger than Light happened to turn up out of nowhere, ignored the Categorisers and my rules, managed to reach the Sanctuary and slaughter everyone inside, then I''d be absolutely screwed. Up until Marie the Kleptomaniac Space Mage arrived, I was under the impression that there weren''t any Tironians that had made it past level 40. It''s a good job that I fully trust in my family''s strength and abilities. Chapter 64: Dungeon Stories Peaches is sat inside Ali''s with Sweet A and Sweet B. After a lot of effort on her part, the Pink Slime has finally managed to complete a full transformation and now looks completely human. Alongside that development, Peaches'' speech pattern has also improved since she joined us. Due to that, she is now able to mingle with the residents of Varona without causing any suspicions. Even having the most-flawless skin and bright-pink hair isn''t enough to catch a monster out in my city. She''s but one fish one in an ocean of beauty and the only true monsters are those designated by Soul Guide. Currently, the Slime-in-disguise is enjoying one of the sweetest delicacies that Ali''s has to offer as she enjoys her lunch break. Peaches works in lots of different locations and has the most part-time jobs out of everyone I know. Even when working, however, she still has to have at least two of the Sweets accompanying her for certain reasons. Not that they''re a burden in any way. The extra pair of hands always goes a long way in making the working day more productive for whichever lucky person ends up with them. Whether it''s working reception at the Royal Halls or assisting Lucinda in potion brewing and serving customers, Peaches always has a smile on her face.
Simon''s role inside Varona is simple. The gold-loving Catergoriser has become the Dungeon Supervisor. The management of Varona''s human population has been thrust into his capable, if not young, hands. With a fully-fledged Categoriser on the payroll, it would have been foolhardy not to take full advantage of his knowledge and expertise. In doing so, it completely switched his job role. Instead of categorising, he now has Katrina and Anon watching over and instructing groups that are leveling up on Goblins. Having more than one Categoriser on the books is a major blessing for any city. Never mind one that''s actually a dungeon in disguise. Currently, the ginger-haired elder of the three is inside his own office at City Hall. Sitting in a chair several sizes too big, Simon counts the gold on his desk, stacking one piece on top of another. "173, 174, 175." Mid count, the concentrating Categoriser is startled by a loud knock at the door and his sweaty fingers slip. This in turn causes the tower of gold to come crashing down on his desk with sounds that make Simon smile instead of frown. Money has always been his main motivator after all. "And I was doing so well. Nevermind. It''s my gold. I can count it again," The gold-obsessed man chuckles before he wipes the coins off the desk and into the top drawer. He composes himself and then shouts, "Enter!" Wearing an outfit befitting of a city official with her hair up in a bun, Deputy Mayor Sacha enters the Categoriser''s office. Her glasses shine in the sunlight reflected from the window as she stops on the other side of his desk. "Were you enjoying yourself?" She asks knowing full well that Simon had been stacking his coins again. The sound of falling gold was relatively easy to hear as she was only on the opposite side of his door. Simon takes her comment the wrong way however and immediately turns bright red. "I would never do anything of the sort and even if I did, it certainly isn''t the time or place for such... Activities." Coughing at his last word, Sacha looks at the embarrassed man with a puzzled expression until she realises what he means. She laughs at the misunderstanding and produces a bag from behind her back. "This might help you to reach greater heights?" Raising her eyebrows at the red-faced man, Sacha holds it out in front of herself for him to notice. He returns her previous look of confusion until the heart-warming sound of clinking fills his ears. The sound is coming from the bag in her hand. Realising the error on his part, Simon''s face reddens more than what Sacha believes to be possible. "Shit. I didn''t mean... I don''t... Why is my mind suddenly in the gutter?" Recently, Simon has been having more and more thoughts of the sexual nature. Surrounded by copious amounts of sex appeal, however, he had just put it down to that fact alone. "It''s OK. There''s nothing wrong with a healthy imagination. Maybe you should give Veris a visit?" Having already met Veris, Simon''s face loses colour and he struggles to respond. "I... I think I''ll give that one a miss for now, thank you. However, if that''s all you''ve come for, I think I''ll get back to my gold." Overlooking the beautiful, blue-haired Deputy Mayor, Simon opens his drawer before emptying the contents of the bag inside. Adding to his already large collection he smiles in satisfaction and feels a tinge of excitement creeping back over him. "Maybe it''s the gold?" He says as Sacha leaves him alone with his one true love.
The Black Death rolls around in the meadow that was created by its Master as it contemplates the easy-going lifestyle it pursues. The evolution that came about from the Large Black Slime is the ruler of its floor and as such it is its job to ward off any intruders. However, the problem with that role is that there isn''t much in the way of foot traffic down here on the thirty-fifth floor. This leads to the Black Death having copious amounts of free time in which it doesn''t know what to do with itself. Luckily, it isn''t alone in this endeavour as it''s surrounded by a large amount of other-coloured Slimes that also have no idea what to do with their lazy days. They shuffle back and forth before repeating the same patterns in what look like endless rotations. Arriving at the right time to help out the depressed residents of floor thirty five, Peaches walks in with her Sweet companions. After seeing the sorry state of the Slimes'' everlasting boredom, she feels terrible and decides to take matters into her own hands. Using the knowledge she has learnt since entering Abi''s dungeon, Peaches teaches the Boss of the floor how to transform into a person. Not only does she teach the Black Death how to master the skill, but she even helps out all the other Slimes while she''s at it. Making a game out of who can do the best copy of their Master, the majority of them end up not doing such a bad job and their gloomy frowns soon pass. The contracted Pink Slime looks over the group that are putting their best efforts in and smiles. Her life as a Slime was a solitary one, until she stumbled upon the mysterious mountain she now calls home that is. You could be reading stolen content. Head to Royal Road for the genuine story. Now, surrounded by smiles and laughter, she wouldn''t have it any other way and can''t even imagine herself being alone again. Happy she joined the dungeon all that time ago, Peaches jumps back into the mix to help those who haven''t fully grasped the transformation skill yet and even joins in on the fun.
"Do you think we should tell someone? What if they''ve already noticed?" The first father in Varona, Mark Ely, seems worried as he peeks out of the window. He didn''t want to be the first to voice his concerns and is terrified of his wife''s response. Curiosity, coupled with fear, for the better of him as they won''t be able to keep him secret much longer. "I would rather die than let them take my child!" Tina glares at her husband, "Just le someone come and try. I''ll show everyone how strong mothers need to be." "That''s not what I meant and you don''t actually know that would happen. You''re assuming the worst and I get it. I do. I''m scared too." Moving away from the window, Mark puts his hands on his wife''s shoulders to reassure her. "He hasn''t even had his first birthday yet, T, and he''s already grown so much. What if our son''s a... Mage or something? As a father, I''m so proud, but I can''t shake off this cloud that''s following me around. If we just take him to Tilly''s, then..." Mark''s sentence is cut short by a slap to the face. "No! What if they try to take him away from us because of his abnormal growth?" she cries, the fear evident in her tone. How could it not be? Her dream had turned nightmare the moment her child starting growing. "Take him where, T? He''s gifted by the mana and that''s fantastic, right? People gifted in magic generally live good and prosperous lives. Not that we''re doing so bad ourselves right now, but I still think we should see Tilly to be safe." Mark grits his teeth and prepares for another slap. Risking a peep after it doesn''t arrive, however, he sees his wife trying to fight back tears silently. The absolute need to protect her child is the strongest voice present inside the young mother''s mind. She understands that every word her husband speaks he believes to be true, but Tina can''t shake the irrational thought that someone will take her child away when they find out he''s special. Downstairs, a child of about three years old is drawing contently as the heated argument upstairs draws to a close. With blonde hair and blue eyes, Kieran Ely looks like exactly his mom and isn''t bothered in the slightest. Right now, he''s enjoying the comfort that having a family provides and nothing could sour his mood. Having reincarnated into the city of Varona a few months ago and discovering magic and make believe aren''t a far-fetched ideal in this world, Bruce Gold is loving his second life. The A-Star orphan would never have believed it possible if told firsthand about what would happen to him. Logic and science dictate the laws of the universe and spells like haste or soul protection are only meant to be found inside video games. However, living firsthand an undeniable truth is not something a logical person can ignore. Only denial, resentment and anger come from ignoring one''s truth. Still, that wasn''t what made his second life worth living. Even if magic is every teenagers dream. What made Kieran Ely complete, was the love provided by his parents. Even if he had aged years in only a few month, his mother never said anything about it directly and instead showered him with affection. His father wasn''t lacking either and everyday after work, Mark would make time to spend with Kieran. He was truly blessed to be have murdered in that orphanage. Or at least that was the story Bruce was rolling with. Even though he was an orphan, the carers made sure everyone was fed and look after. Making sure no one went without, they were excellent role models in his eyes. Not that such kind-hearted people mattered anymore. Kieran would never see them again anyway and, in his new life, there was that much to learn he barley had time to spare them a though Time Mages age faster than any other magic casters due to not being able to control their element. That alone maked them rarer than gold as most children die overnight. Parents waking to find great-grandpa Geoff in bed, instead of little Johnny, know they''ve given birth to greatness only after it''s to late. That curse, if and when it''s able to be controlled, then turns into a blessing. Having the ability to control time, a Mage can live however they want without fear of repercussion. In Kieran''s case, with the knowledge he already possesses about biology and what he should be doing at every stage to better himself, his new life is off to a fantastic start and he has almost mastered speaking. Not slightly grasped either, but Bruce has the local language down to a tee. Which shouldn''t be possible for a regular Tironian. However, that''s no problem at all for a reincarnated Time Mage and Bruce Gold, the teenager-turned-child is witnessing, living and owning the strange phenomenon firsthand. With a family that cares about his well being and magic at his untrained fingertips, the A-star orphan can''t help but smile evferytime he thinks about the future.
Sophie, the ex-dungeon diver and Light''s girlfriend, has also found work inside the dungeon due to its opening to adventurers. She assists the Categorisers and leads groups through the first-five floors. Watching diligently as they level up on Goblins that roam Abi''s top layers. With experience in the field, Sophie was the perfect candidate to help train, guide and lead new adventurers into the dark depths. The newer candidates she gets to teach from scratch which is great since they don''t already have bad habits. It also frees up the Master Assassin to finish up missions faster than he was doing prior to his girlfriends employment. Not that Sophie is slow. She just doesn''t possess the same set of skills as her significant other. However, she never let this bothers her. Sophie has always wanted to be in a relationship, she had just never found the right man. Little did she know at the time, her man had been created by a dungeon. Then again, even after learning that fact, she still wasn''t deterred. If anything, the bump in her belly was basically Light''s wedding ring. There''s no escaping now and it doesn''t matter how far he can shadowport, Sophie and his unborn child are always waiting for him whenever he arrives home. With a smile on her face and love in her heart, it''s always a warming scene. If still weird as fuck.
A large grin is spread across Veris'' face as she swings the object in her hand towards the cheeks of the subdued woman. The victim of the paddling by paddle is none-other than Sweet C and she is making questionable noises as the diamond-rimmed object raps away in satisfaction. Loud enough that they catch the attention of a curious passerby. From the doorway, a pair of on-looking eyes sparkle in curiosity as she watches the masochist and sadist engaged in their daily act. Her lip quivers and her body trembles with each thwap of the paddle. She clutches her robes tightly as her heart beats faster. Every beat of the bat is followed by dozens of her own. Her body begins to sweat and her breath gets heavy as she edges closer and closer to the scene. The eyes belong to the once-Acolyte turned Disciple, Ang. The dungeon priests level up slower than the rest of my family as they spend more time preaching dungeon love than leveling. Plus, their only source of XP comes from the Coliseum and they barely frequent the violent place as it is. Even though they are able to revive, thanks to one of the building''s extremely-useful features, there are only a handful of fighting enthusiasts to be found among the dungeon worshippers. As Ang slides her feet further and further forward, her presence doesn''t go unnoticed by the people in the room. The spectator spectates from her place on a purple sofa and the two engaged in the act continue on. Happier for the extra set of eyes to spice things up. Sweet D''s pats the empty seat beside her. Motioning for Ang to sit down, she accepts the offer without words and silently watches what some would call entertainment? For a dungeon-worshiping priest, the last place you would expect them to end up would be watching Veris and Sweet C. Nonetheless that''s where she has found herself and in a moment of outburst she cries "I want to try too!" before flushing redder than carpets inside the Royal Halls of Regeneration. Regretting her action instantly, Ang plants her eyes on the floor until Veris'' boots come into view. Slowly, she raises her head until her eyes are level with that of the woman in front of her. Her silk-white hair looks perfectly brushed, even though moments ago her actions definitely dictate that it shouldn''t be so. "So. Which side would you like to be on?" Veris'' face is full of anticipation. She''s hoping she found a new addition to her own ranks. Even without a title, or an actual feature, the Boss of Abi''s dungeon is slowly amassing a small group of sado-masochists inside the Pleasure Palace. Chapter 65: A Day In The Life Of A Dungeon As I strut down the street in a fabulous-looking body, my feet lead me in the direction of the Royal Halls of Regeneration. Over the last few months, temptation got the better of me and I ended up creating an incomplete body to enjoy life''s little luxuries. Dungeon Cores only have so much willpower, you know? Plus, there''s only so much a woman''s nostrils can take before she has to indulge. Anyway, my body''s incomplete because I''m still missing the last element from my repertoire. The ever-elusive and rare-as-hell Time Magic is all I need to create the world''s strongest body. Every element adds a multiplication boost to the summoned creation''s stats which is then further increased based on the body''s tier. For example, a Rogue may have a solid 10 across the board with Dexterity at 14. It''s not bad on average and conforms to the masses as only special classes grant higher stats. However, the Rogues that I can summon, which are actually Tier-Four Assassins with all seven elements, have ridiculously high base stats. The across-board 10 is multiplied by tier and then by the number of elements added in its creation. That means a level 1 Assassin has base stats that almost reach the 300''s and their Dexterity is around 400. And that''s just level 1! No wonder Me managed to blow the front off Ali''s the other month. I don''t even know how I managed to reach this point. Well... I do, but it''s still hard to wrap my head around sometimes. Somehow though, throughout many mistakes and a shit load of luck, the future is actually looking bright for Abi the Gourmet. The future also looks extremely tasty as I stroll off course and head straight into Ali''s. "Two lunches to go please, Chef," I call into the kitchen with a bright smile on my face. Being here and being here, are two completely different things. If I had to give up this body and go back to using Spiritual Presence and Manifestation combined, I think I''d set a new wailing record. "Master!" Ali appears at the counter after hearing my voice. The colour of her features match my own and we could be mistaken for twins in any other city. Certainly not this one though. "Do you want the special?" "It''s like you read my mind." Recently, Ali has been experimenting with fish dishes. With a variety of different goods coming from all across Ishda, The Chef now has a lot more ingredients to work with. A far cry from the Boar stew the Rogues lived off for the first week. Ali rolls up two Yellowtails that have been seasoned and grilled into separate Rooflower leaves. The Rooflower, despite what its name would suggest, is made from a tree''s leaves. One that happens to grow on my mountain no less. Needless to say, it tastes delicious and looks amazing, but maybe that''s just because Ali''s involved. Who knows? Either way, the oldest of my family members adds a few side dishes into newly designed takeout boxes before placing the yellowtail beside them. She then wraps up both lunches before handing them to me. "I can already taste it, Ali! I can''t wait." Staring at the meals in my hands, I wonder if I''ll make it to Anya with both lunches still intact. It''s debatable as I''m already pulling a Colin. "You''re too kind, Master. I just do the best I can. We''re extremely busy right now since it''s dinner time, so I''m going to have to get back. Have a great day, Master." Ali disappears with a smile after I bid her farewell. I watch as she teleports to another one of her businesses to help the staff there. Believe it or not, there are more perks to having a human body than I would have thought. One such advantage is that whenever I close my eyes, I''m able to see the dungeon overview screens. The ones I''ve grown comfortable seeing through during my second life. That means that I''m physically able to see more with my eyes closed than when they''re open. The process is truly baffling, yet undeniably amazing. Anyway, with my new feet, I beat the street and continue my walk to the hospital. Not that I''m complaining, but I can''t go anywhere these days without being noticed. Instead, I''m greeted by almost every single person I pass and almost everyone has something to say. Whether they''re from the Dungeon or the city, it''s lovely that they offer a friendly hello to the small girl with green hair as she skips down the street. It does make me wonder though. Why is everyone being so nice? Maybe they''re mistaking me for Ali?
That''s probably it.
I was only joking, Me. Someone''s still got his knickers in a twist, I see. Anyway, It''s awesome now that the Queen of Questions is actually in the house. Or should I say the dungeon? What''s even better though is being able to finally enjoy the wonderful delicacies made by Ali. Damn, she''s good. Now that I''m bodied up, I can''t help but appreciate everything and everyone around me. It''s as though I''m high on love and not afraid to show it. Reciprocating everyone''s hellos with jolly-natured ones of my own, I bounce on and eventually reach Anya''s place of work. As usual, the reception and waiting areas are full of people just wanting a quick check-up, but there''s barely an I''ll soul in sight. The reason for this is that the quality of healthcare in my city is secondary to none. I doubt that they even have better in the Royal capital itself. Another reason is that a great amount of custom goes through Lucinda''s Liquids. People can''t get enough of the Potion Master''s special brews. The magical tonics acquired at her factory help boost the body''s natural resistance which in turn prevents them from getting ill. Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on Royal Road. Still, the citizens of Varona can fill the Royal Halls daily without much effort. Maybe it''s the Doctor Mages? "Maybe," a familiar voice says from behind. Turning around, I come face to face with Me. He doesn''t look pleased, but nor does he look poorly. "What are you doing here?" The body I created for Me is as strong as my own. Which means, he shouldn''t be able to get sick. Not a normal type of sickness at least. "Doctor Mages," he replies, not phased in the slightest. A large smile creeps across his face as we hold eye contact. Me becomes more and more like myself every day and I can''t even tell if he''s joking at this point. I mean, some of those doctors... "Well, you better not be here for my Rainbow Mage." I frown at the male version of myself who laughs back. "I wouldn''t dream of it. I have my eye on another." His honesty is enough to catch me out and I respond in kind. "Really? Who is it? I''m curious now." Everyone knows what happened to the cat, but I couldn''t care as long as I find out who he''s here to see. "Like I would tell you! You would only make a ridiculous joke about it. Or tell me to fuck off..." He looks elsewhere while sticking the knife in. "Come on, Me. I apologised, didn''t I? You know how I felt about those little bastards. I''ve been good since then and I''m alway nice these days. I just wondered if I could help in any way." Maybe I apologised? I can''t actually remember. Even if I didn''t, it''s been weeks since then. Months, in fact. Gods. Knows how to hold a grudge, doesn''t he? Then again, I wonder where he gets that from. I certainly don''t hold grudges and would just eat the first fool that told me to fuck off. Simple. "Did you apologise though? Whatever, it''s fine. Thank you for the offer, but there''s... Nothing to help yet." His mood sours as his eyes stare at the floor solemnly. Until they dart up to look at me as he shouts "And don''t even think about watching me!" At this point, all eyes in the waiting area fall on us and I instantly feel the need to retreat to a safer place. "I wouldn''t do that... Don''t! I meant don''t. I don''t do that type of thing," I say in a hushed manner, deciding I''ve taken too much uncomfortableness to be thrust on a single person. "Anyway, I''m off to see Anya. See ya, Me." I wave farewell and rush off before he causes another commotion. Not that I mind attention, but when it''s unexpected it always throws me. I don''t get far before "Don''t forget to spend up before tonight," Me shouts out as covertly as he can and I head down the corridor a deeper shade of red than when I entered. I don''t know why I get so flustered. I thought I''d grown used to being the center of attention, but clearly not. Which is odd since all I wanted at the start of my second life was to be seen and heard. Maybe it''s because Me''s so much like me that I don''t know how to deal with him. Either way, it''s not a problem. It''s just weird, but then again what isn''t around here? As I turn the corner towards Anya''s office, I bump into another dungeon resident who can take on human form. The Black Death doesn''t often leave her floor, but today it seems she needs to come to the hospital. She has long black hair, pitch-black eyes and is rocking a skin-tight dress that compliments her colour. At least she has clothes on. "Oh. Hello, Master. We were just talking about you." Ditto looks a little freaked out by my arrival. Almost as though I''m here to scold her or something. Has she done something wrong? "I-I mean... Anya was just telling me stories about the times you used to adventure together." That gets a chuckle as I can imagine Anya doing a good deal of embellishing. Especially on my part. "Is she in?" I ask, even though I know. To which Ditto nods, says goodbye and promptly rushes off back to her floor and the other Slimes. I can''t be that scary, can I? I''m only a little girl. Heading onwards to Anya''s office with our lunch still intact, I wonder if Ditto''s here for the Doctor Mages too. Before reaching a conclusion, however, I finally arrive at my destination. Knocking on the door, I let myself in knowing that she''s alone and not in the middle of examining a patient. "I hear someone''s been telling tales of Abi the Great recently," I laugh. "Abi!" Anya jumps up and grabs me in her arms. "I only saw you yesterday. There''s no need to be so dramatic," I playfully deny her affection even though I love it more than words can express. "You''re going to crush our dinner." After soaking up my friend''s love, I push her off and hold the containers from Ali''s. Anya''s eyes light up as she takes one and sits down behind her desk. "You''re the best, Abi. Thank you." Anya starts eating before I can even say, "You''re Welcome." She must have been hungrier than usual today. "Sho..." Anya starts to speak before stopping to finish her mouthful. "What do I owe for the pleasure of your company today?" She takes another large bite out of the Yellowtail wrap and my mouth waters slightly at the sight. Digging into my lunch, I momentarily ignored Anya''s question to appreciate the food made by Ali. The Chef most certainly is the best without a doubt. I definitely didn''t eat this well before becoming a Dungeon Core, that''s for sure. "No reason. Can''t a girl just drop in on her best friend whilst she''s at work?" I take another large bite from my wrap as Anya stares at me skeptically. "If I didn''t know you any better, and I do, then I''d know not to believe the first thing that came out of your mouth. So... What''s up?" Anya places her wrap on the table and walks around her desk before putting a hand on my shoulder. "You know you can tell me anything, right?" "I know," I smile at the Rainbow Mage who has my well-being on her mind. In a way, it''s like looking at a reflection of myself because I now feel as though I have their best interests at heart. A long stride from the shady Rogue I used to be, but a welcome change as well. Who would have thought that dying and being reincarnated as a dungeon would have turned out so well? Certainly not me and to be honest, if I was given a choice as to what I wanted to reincarnate as I would have chosen to become human again in a heartbeat. The foolishness of my former self doesn''t even shock me. It''s not like I''ve become an enlightened being now that my species has changed, but I do feel as though being a human isn''t all it''s cracked up to be. Don''t get me wrong, there are undeniable perks to owning a body made from flesh and blood. Ali''s food being the top runner in that category. However, other than those little benefits that can only be experienced by having their five senses, is being a human really all that? As I''m metaphorically weighing the state of existence in my head, Anya wraps me up in another warm embrace. Fuck it! Being human rocks. Even if this singular gesture was all life had to offer, I would gladly stay wrapped up inside it for all eternity. Tears of happiness spill from my eyes and as I look up at the person warming not only my heart, but my soul as well, they run down my cheek and drip off onto her jacket. "Seriously. Are you OK? Is it that time of the month? Wait... Do you even get that anymore? Is it worse for dungeons? Do you have like a cave-sized menstrual cycle that''s about to explode on someone?" Anya gets right up in my face getting more and more serious, yet all I can do is laugh. I wipe away my tears and calm myself down. Before explaining that I''m just happy I can enjoy the warmth of hugs. Through the dungeon, it feels like more. In a way, it''s like our souls are entwined and I can feel the love that she''s offering. It''s not given with expectancy, or for any type of reciprocation. Instead, it''s offered from her heart and soul. From her to me. Just because and for no other reason than she can. If there was ever a call for a good wailing session let me tell you, today would be the day. Chapter 66: Walking In My Shoes After a nice chat, a delicious lunch and a good cry on Anya''s shoulder, I''m feeling much better. The Rainbow Mage has always had a way with words and never fails to raise my spirits when I need her too. Before leaving, I quickly pop in to see Tilly and the head Doctor Mage informs me that they need more healers. I''m not surprised as the current staff only use up a third of the building''s space. The Royal Halls of Regeneration is absolutely massive and shouldn''t need another upgrade for quite some time. That said, I summon another hundred Magus to help lighten the load of the frequently busy workforce and head out. As I skip down the street toward my mountain, my Core is full of joy. More so than earlier as I always feel better after a chat with Anya, not to mention her famous best friend hugs. "Abi!" I hear my name being called and it pulls me out of my blissful trance. In front of me is an elderly woman dressed up like one of my Assassins. In all black, the only visible part of her is the crow''s feet around her eyes. Until she unmasks herself, that is. "What do you think? I look good, right?" The elderly lady is none other than Marie the thieving Space Mage. Ever since I contracted her to the dungeon, all she''s wanted to do is go out on missions with the Assassins. Ignoring the fact that she''s probably over a hundred years old, at least her sticky-fingered shenanigans have finally ceased. I watched over her for the first month, replacing whatever she took at no significant cost to myself. After she had amounted a nice hoard, the wily woman just went cold turkey. Plus, it''s not like she stole any children or anything of significance. She might be going senile? Who knows? One thing is for sure though, Marie definitely isn''t going to be sent out on Syndicate business. She might forget why she''s there! "You look pretty damn cool, Marie. I was speaking to Mystique over at the Academy yesterday and she was wondering if you wouldn''t mind doing some teaching? What do you think?" I offer the unemployed Space Mage an opportunity in hopes of deterring her from asking a question I''m going to reject. on the end of her tongue. However, the look on her face says my efforts are futile and she asks anyway. "But I want to go out with the others. You can''t keep an old bird caged up, you know? These wings were meant to fly." Not that I want to be mean, but saggy skin doesn''t make wings. Not the type she''s referring to anyway. Either way, her self-deprecating joke is a heart-felt jab and I''m already on the back foot. "You''re our only Space Mage though. Until the Mages Guild gets its shit together and stops making everyone Necromancers, that is. What would I do without you?" I try to win her over with reason and a bit of pity at my sorry excuse of a guild. I mean, I don''t even know why it doesn''t create regular magic classes. Other than Anya being the exception, every other Mage, High Mage and Magus, has become a death-wielding Necromancer. It''s a good job I''ve already got the Lord''s permission to operate in Ishda. Otherwise, we might have become known as the city of death. Not that many people actually die in Varona and the ones that do most certainly deserve it. Even then, it''s certainly not the Necromancers, but the shadow-slipping Assassins that hand out my justice. In all fairness, Necromancers actually make great doctors and the townsfolk love them. That might be something to do with the fact that every single one of them is easy on the eyes and has a fantastic physique, but who knows? They''re certainly not your regular, pasty, sleep-deprived, dead-looking Necromancers. That''s for sure. What''s worse part is that the ridiculous Mages Guild only seems to be biased toward my family members. Regular Tiroians who applied for classification have all come out with an actual speciality. Fire Mages, Wind Mages, Dark Mages, all sorts. The only thing they''re missing is a Necromancer. Not a single one has been found among my human population. "I can take care of myself, I''ll have you know. I have been doing it for... Let''s just say a long time now, so you don''t need to fret over me." Cursing the Mages Guild as I listen to Marie, a sigh escapes my lips. She doesn''t want to let up and as reluctant as I am to add her into the Syndicate''s roster, it''s not as though the Space Mage is going to slow the Assassins down. If anything it could even end up being the opposite way around. "Ok. But... You have to wait until the right mission comes up and until that time, I would really appreciate it if you go and give Mystique a hand. Maybe even drop into the Mages'' Guild and have a look at their equipment. I know that''s not your thing, but you''ve probably seen some stuff in your time. Hopefully, you can help me out." I give in to what she wants and persuade her to help out while she waits for a mission. Now I just have to decide who to send her with. Dum and Dee would probably be red-faced the entire time if she were to join them so that''s out. Noir and Carrie? No, that''s not the best fit for someone''s first mission either. The Ice Queen would be fine. It''s Prince Loudmouth that''s the problem. As strong and confident as Noir is, he''s not the best example of what an Assassin should be. He''s like the world''s deadliest fog horn and is definitely not what fresh eyes need to witness. Not unless he''s the last person they''re witnessing at least There are a few other candidates that I could send Marie out with. The Sweets spring to mind, but then so to do Veris. After she''s had her own fill of the outside and experience, my Boss let''s the other woman do their thing. Although, I''m not sure I want Marie hanging out with that crowd either. Instead of them, or any one else for that matter, I suppose I''ll stick with what I know works. What never fails and who always seems to impress; Light and Dropper. I almost feel bad for the two, hardworking Assassins. They''ve already contributed so much to Varona''s development yet they always seem to get lumbered with my extra problems. The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation. Poor guys. I''m not looking forward to that conversation. I''m sure Prince Sillybollocks will have something to say about it. If not him, Sophie is almost guaranteed too. "I doubt I''ll be much help in the Mages'' Guild, but I will give my best at the academy. Those children won''t know what hit them!" Marie has a mischievous look across her face, one that fits the elderly lady''s persona and I can''t help feel sorry for the students. "Thank you and try not to be too harsh at the Academy, please. We don''t want to deter people away, after all. Not that it would happen with the low prices we''ve set. But still, it''s nice to be nice. That and all you actually have to do is lecture them." It''s not like I''m expecting her to start knocking out Space Mages'' like there''s no tomorrow. After dealing with a persistent Marie, I come face to face with another strong-willed, white-haired woman. This one''s hair hasn''t degraded from age, but it naturally came that way through the summoning process. The outfit she has on, if it can even be called that as there''s more skin showing than garment itself, makes my cheeks flush. Worse yet, the Boss of my Dungeon is running down the road towards me. "Boss! I have an awesome idea!" Full of gusto, Veris screams from one end of the street to the other and my heart drops. My embarrassment over her choice of outfit flies out of the window as an strangely-familiar concern takes its place. The feeling that someone is about to ask for something you don''t want to hear and you have to try your best to decline their wishes. Whatever the reason may be. "Well, I was thinking that seeing as how Sweet C and a few of the others are enjoying a good paddling, I was wondering if we could do something like that up here?" "I''m... Not sure, Veris. What if someone manages to force you into submission? Will that count as them defeating the Dungeon Boss? That''s a bit of a risky gamble." After listening to my sneaky objection, Veris frowns before bursting into laughter. "Ha! Good one, Boss. Someone forcing me into submission? You had me going for a second there. Pain is the name of the game in my room!" She boasts loud and proud. Worst of all, I can''t even deny her statement. I''ve caught a few glimpses of Veris dishing out what-she-calls punishment over the last few months and the whole shtick is just fucking strange. She warms herself up by giving the recipient, usually Sweet C, a good paddling. Then, in a bizarre turn of events, Veris forces the other party to carry out the act on her in a complete role reversal. How do I know this? I might have watched for too long one time, but I haven''t made a hobby out of it or anything. I just like to make sure my family is doing ok, even the weird ones. Even the weirdest of the weird needs monitoring now and then. "Yeah, I know." I quietly agreed. After seeing her in action first-hand, I doubt any regular Tironian could force her into submission either and once again my own words leave me feeling a little silly. Not only does her body ripple with lean muscles under the small leather straps, but Veris is also the fifth strongest being in my dungeon. The fact that my Boss Monster ranks fifth on overall strength is another awkward quirk about my dungeon. Usually, the last Boss would be the strongest. In my case, Light and Dropper are still levelling up like there''s no tomorrow, placing them firmly in first and second place. It''s ridiculous! Then you''ve got myself and Me, rocking our almost God-like bodies. Our levels don''t compare to that of my Assassins, but the power we contain is unbridled. After us, you''ve got Veris. Leaving a very sour Noir ranking sixth, just in front of his partner. Anya would be up on the board, but she has zero intention on fighting anyone ever again and I don''t blame her. She doesn''t even visit the Coliseum. Still, if she did level up, I don''t know where her stats would end up. She''s the only Rainbow Mage we have so far and no one has ever heard of another person with that class. "Well!? What do you think? People will love it, right?" Veris'' smile is as innocent as a child''s. Below that heart melting act, however, is a sadistic and masochistic presence that not even The System could endure. "But... You don''t even have a feature." As I squirm at the thought of a Veris running a brothel in my city -even though that''s not technically what she''s about- another great thought hits me. "The Pleasure Palace is your Boss Room. It''s the feature of the room itself. I''m sorry, Veris, but I can''t recreate that." Inwardly pumping my fists, I congratulate myself on a job well done. That was quick thinking for me and I''m rather proud of that one. It''s indisputable for one and I''m certainly not placing the Boss Room out here in the middle of Varona. I may aswell be begging for trouble. Veris is already as mischievously inclined as they could, I dread the thought of unleashing her dark side on the general population. I''m not going to tell her that thought as it will only hurt her feelings. "That''s okay, Boss. I''ll just use a house or something," Veris shrugs nonchalantly while still holding the same heart-melting smile and I crumble. Sighing, I return her smile with one of my own. "Okay, Veris. But! There has to be some very strict rules on what you can and can''t do. I doubt anyone will be able to hurt you, so that''s fine. It''s you hurting them that worries me." All I have left to go with is my honesty. I should have just started with it to be fair as Veris isn''t one to give up easily. "Yes!" she starts jumping up and down in the middle of the street before catching me eyeing her. Composing herself, she says, "I mean... You have nothing to worry about, Boss. I''ll just be there for show. Like an ornament or something. Only unbreakable," Veris throws me a winks and I shake my head, already regretting my decision. It''s her eyes. Every time. They sparkle with such hope and anticipation. "Is it okay if I let them punish me? If they hurt themselves in the process, that would be their own fault, right?" Her shrewd words out wile my own and I nod along in defeated resignation. Fist pumping the air openly, Veris has won the war of pleasure and I can''t help but love her for it. The growth of every single person and creature that I''ve summoned has been phenomenal. "I suppose so, but I''ll create your building near Tilly and Anya''s Halls. Just in case." We''ve long surpassed the targets and guidelines of what Me thought possible. At this point in time, he has absolutely nothing to compare our growth against and has given up trying. Hence why he''s on the search for Doctor Mages. "You''re the best, Boss!" Veris grabs me in a bear hug and instead of pain all I feel is love. Her love. My love. Every thing''s just love at the minute. I don''t know what''s coming over me, but I can''t say I dislike it. Everything is great. Everyone is happy. Life rocks and so does my body. Best of all, I get to see my best friend every single day. How could I not be happy at a time like this? I swear to the Gods, any shit-hitting plans that turn up better come equipped with Lucinda''s Magic Deodorizer or else they''ll be in for a whole world of trouble. Chapter 67: Double DP The night came and went, with Veris getting what she desired, much to my ongoing concerns. I was also overstocked on DP once again, yet barely even noticed as the income passed my threshold and added to the ongoing total of accumulated points. I stopped watching Overstock''s growth because it was causing me to look forward to the future and was slightly dampening the joys of the present. However, that''s no longer the case anymore as Overstock has almost reached its level cap. Who''d have ever thought that saving up DP was this easy? Certainly not Me. That''s for sure. I chuckle in the deepest recesses of my mind. A place where I can think without having to share every thought with my mentally-bonded companion. Not that I have anything against our connection. Sometimes, a Core just needs her privacy. With Overstock currently sitting at level 9, that means I''m able to retain 90% of any DP earned. Another candidate for the most outrageous dungeon trait, but definitely not one to complain about. As the sun rises over Varona, I watch merchants offer prayers to the Bale of Fortune before setting out to sell their wares. I still can''t believe the world''s most-frustrating feature finally evolved, and into something spectacular no less. It may still look like hay, but that''s exactly what it is. What more should I expect? I mean, I wasn''t actually expecting it to upgrade when I paid the ridiculous cost. I was hoping it would. After so many failed attempts, I was beginning to see it as a waste of time and a failed effort. It''s a good thing the DP factory started up when it did or I wouldn''t have been able to fund it. Hell, none of this would have been possible if Wheeler and his guards had chosen any other direction in their moment of peril. Luckily, they came to me and what a blessing that was. Without the well-fed merchant''s effort, the citizens of Gorn would have scattered and ended up everywhere else but Varona. Granted, he has a stake in my city and isn''t spreading the word due to the kindness of his heart. I built Wheeler a shop on the High Street, as requested. He employs his own staff to run the business so that he can travel, spreading word of the beautiful mountain city while acquiring different goods from across the region. Wheeler. The man, the merchant, the legend. On the opposite side of town to the Bale of Fortune, the first rays of sunlight begin to creep up the mountain that gives my home identity. The multicoloured landmark has grown three times larger since the addition of my extra floors. However, seeing how clouds mask its peak, I don''t think people have noticed the change. Even if they have, I haven''t heard anyone mention it recently. Unless they''ve just grown accustomed to the strange shit that happens around here. With potions that have a slight chance of turning someone into a Goblin, the growing mountain isn''t as unique as it once was. Still, at this time of day, just as the leaves and foliage light up in the morning sun, I can''t help but think that it symbolizes home. To me, the colour of each area represents a different family member. The Mini-Bosses and Bosses that hold power inside me literally make me who I am. When I think of them the thought serves to brighten the already-surreal sight to greater heights. I love my mountain. I love my dungeon. And I love my family. From my tower, I watch the sun rise with my collection of stuffed animals in a harmonious silence. Until the presence of another person brings it to an end, that is. If Ed, Ned, Ted, Deb, Seb and Bobby can be quiet, why can''t User Notification System? Hell, I haven''t even used my voice yet. "I knew you would be up here. You''re always in your tower at this time of day." Me''s arrival pulls me from my serendipitous state of relaxation. "Yeah. I suppose you''re right. I can''t get enough of watching the sun rise on my mountain. Watching it with Ed and the others has become a bit of a daily routine," answering honestly, Me looks intrigued by my statement. "What''s so... Special about it?" He looks at the sun rising with genuine interest. Ever since I stuffed Me''s consciousness into a body of dungeon-borne flesh, he''s become a different person. Not physically and he still pecks at me to spend, spend, spend, but hes becoming inclined to all things human. His thirst for knowledge knows no boundaries and he wants to learn all he can. Which is cool and all, but is that going to give him more ideas to winge about? "Well... You''re a little late today, but I''ll show you tomorrow morning. The sunrise is much better witnessed firsthand, rather than having someone explain it to you. Honestly, words don''t do it justice and you''ll appreciate it more if we watch it together." Me nods but looks slightly confused. "Is it like a date?" As the words leave his mouth, Me turns slightly red from embarrassment. I open my mouth to say something, but no words come out and my jaw hangs in the air. I''m sure my face is ten-shades darker than his, but I have to say something to disparage the awkward comment. "Sort of, but not a romantic date. It''s more of a family one. Anyone else that wants to join us is more than welcome to." Smiling as the flushed feeling in my cheeks fades away, I only hope that I''m no longer the same colour as Noir''s hair. "Good. I thought you were suggesting something lewd for a moment." Me has already calmed down and now seems disinterested in the conversation. Although, I don''t see any need for the shade he''s throwing at me this early in the morning. I mean, I didn''t say anything crass or uncouth. Did I? Love this novel? Read it on Royal Road to ensure the author gets credit. "Come on, Me. I''ve been quite good recently. I''ve even been cutting back on the pins and innuendos." Fighting my corner, I defend my good behaviour with the world''s strongest armour. Truth. In all honesty, life is fantastic at the moment. Plus, I''m only snarky and quick lipped when I''m not happy. I do feel bad for Me though. Having to put up with Abi the Foul-Mouthed for the first few months of his life must have been tough. "Last week you asked if I wanted to share the futon with you." As usual though, he calls me out with his perfect memory. He''s like Anya. The Rainbow Mage also never fails to call me out on my bullshit when I''m acting up. "Yeah, but it was cold. I just wanted to share some body heat." I smile as Me sighs and shakes his head. "Your body is stronger and more resistant than mine. Plus, I don''t feel the cold, so how can you?" Sound logic prevails over banal bullshit. Oh well. It was worth a try. "Okay, I''ll rein it in. So what brings you here so early in the morning?" The sounds of the city waking up and coming alive can be heard as people arise from the slumber of another peaceful night in Varona. "Well. Your points are..." Before he can finish his sentence, I press a finger against his lips. Silencing the words he has on repeat. To be honest, there''s no way I can spend all the points I have without exhausting myself in the process. Because of that fact, I''ve decided to take it easy 4 days out of 7 for the foreseeable future. In turn this has led to more visits from my ever faithful, ear-bashing companion. Although, sometimes I think his visits to talk points are just so he can join in on activities with myself and Anya. Which I don''t mind. Other than my best friend, Me has been there for me ever since I became a Dungeon Core. I know The System created him for me, as she does for all dungeons, but I''m grateful nonetheless. Without him, I might have ended up as Abi the Extremely Sad and Lonely. My family and the contracted Tironians look at me as though I''m some sort of higher power, all because I created the dungeon and the city that stands outside. But that''s not the way I see it at all. Without Me''s multiple and repeated explanations, without my Rogues and their early scouting parties, without Wheeler and the DP Factory, none of us would be where we are today. I alone am not responsible for everything we have, but everyone''s efforts are what brought us this far. "I know, I know. My points are just sat there in abundance. I suppose I should spend some, but what do I spend it on? More floors? Now that I''m open, distancing my core from the surface should be priority number one, right? The only problem is that means more Goblins and I''ve already got enough of the ugly-little shits as it is. I''ve even got the bloody Goblinators!" I shouldn''t complain, but how can I not? Goblins are involved and I really don''t want any more of them. Maybe I can find some other unintelligent monsters for the humans to level up on. In fact, I''m sure I remember unlocking a Troll or two somewhere down the line. That said, instead of teleporting off to create new floors, I find myself standing in front of the Rogues'' Retreat. The first feature I ever built is one of the most popular buildings in town and Talia gets no end of customers. The Task Master runs a tight ship all on her own, unlike the other business owners who now have multiple staff members helping them out. As there''s no one around yet, I confirm the upgrade and watch as the Tier-Four feature transforms into a work of art. My words can''t do justice to how spectacular Talia''s establishment has become. The theme is different for the Rogues'' bar, as it always has been. Everything else in town is a pristine white, but the colour scheme here is red and black. Banners hang from the awning, displaying the dungeon insignia on a mug, the universal symbol for taverns. Large windows let passers-by see the fine establishment''s interior and well-stocked racking. Looking through, I can also see the owner of the establishment jumping up and down at the sudden alterations. Above the door, a large sign displays the new name of the business. The same one my notification showed right after confirming the upgrade. One that couldn''t be anymore fitting, even if I thought of it myself.
Rogues'' Retreat has been upgraded to One For The Rogues'': Task Master Talia has been upgraded and will now reward Monsters with more XP upon completion of her contracts A place for the weary Rogues to rest their heads Whilst on the same floor as the bar all Rogue type monsters have their attributes increased by 80% Any alcohol consumed on the premises will intoxicate the drinker with happiness and joy Anyone one who gets drunk on love from the Rogue''s ale will grant double DP for 24 hours Taskmaster Talia: All attributes have been increased New Skills have been acquired A new Contract has been unlocked for Taskmaster Talia: Increased Contract Limit: 200DP New features have been unlocked: Assorted Spirits: 16DP New Loot unlocked: Golden Dagger: 80DP Reward: 32 XP
Maybe The System deserves some credit for that one. I don''t like how she still calls my family members monsters and the loot seems pointless when each fourth-tier being comes with their own signature weapon. Her naming skills have advanced a bit, so at least there''s that. Another bonus for the Assassins means even more strength for Varona. I pity the first city that tries to wage war on us, for whatever reason they claim justifiable. I mean, it''s probably guaranteed to happen at some point. Stupidly greedy people always want what others have, and in this case I have a lot for them to want. The ability to earn double DP on anyone who''s had a drink is something I would have been grateful for earlier. I''ve only got myself to blame for that one though, but it''s not like there was a rush on the need to get drunk. Not back then anyway. Now, every night needs to be finished off with a drink at Talia''s before heading home. Some alone and some off to increase the population a little bit more. As I''m lost in thought, staring at the building I''ve just upgraded, Veris'' voice snaps me out of my blissful state of mind. My heart jumps as I see her skipping down the street towards me. A black cape fluttering behind her and a mischievous look in her eye. "Hey, Boss. Holy shit! Look at the Retreat. One for The Rogues?" She checks out the feature as I look her over. The added cape at least covers more skin than before, even if it is only around the back. "I think it''s quite good. Definitely a boon to the city. What are you doing today, Veris?" At my words, Veris places her fist across her chest and bows to me. "Thank you, Master." Her choice of words catches me off guard as Veris never calls me Master. It''s always Boss this and Boss that. Is she that happy with the building I made for her last night? It was only the equivalent of three houses combined. "I was looking for you to say that. So... Now that I have, I''ll be on my way." Blushing slightly, which is also out of character, Veris rushes off to be anywhere else other than in my sight. Silly girl. Doesn''t she know I can see her anywhere? Also, does everyone have the love bug? The strange irking that I''ve been feeling? No. It''s probably just a me thing. Although, if Veris is feeling it, then I must be giving off some extreme love today. Oh well. There are worse things to emit. Chapter 68: What Lies Below After Veris very quickly fled the scene, I was left speechless. For a brief moment, her usual demeanour was replaced by one of respect. Not that I mind Veris'' normal attitude. I quite like her casualness and even the way she calls me Boss. Her ideology on life, however, could use a good intervention. Looking back at what''s sure to be the finest bar on the continent, I''m struggling with its name. As much as I like it, One For The Rogues doesn''t make it easy to refer to. So for now, I''ll just call it Talia''s. It''s what I do for most of the other features anyway and I''d feel silly pronouncing the full titles of each feature every time I talk about them. Plus, there isn''t a chance in hell I''d ever say ''Hey, I''m just off to Towers of Torture. Do you want me to grab you anything on the way back?'' Don''t change the name though! Hoping The System will hear me this time, I think my thoughts as loud as possible until Me appears beside to me. "I can''t change the names of features. You know that." He answers as though I''ve been calling out to him which gives me a good laugh. "Sorry. That was for Her benefit. I''m glad you''re here though. Do you fancy a quick Jack?" Referring to my alcoholic drink of choice, Me sighs and shakes his head. He seems to do that a lot these days and every time he does, it makes me regret whatever the subject of conversation had been about. "You have only just started spending points. Can''t you get a little further before stopping for a break? Especially one that will potentially write off the rest of the day?" His words aren''t wrong. If I start drinking this early and especially if it''s Lightning Jack, I''m likely to end up catatonic somewhere in a state of terrorization. Which is certainly the last thing I want right now. Not that I''ve suffered recently from the life-like reality. To be honest, I don''t have a need for the meditative state during the day and instead, I use it to help me sleep through the night like a regular person. "Yeah, OK. I know what I''m doing tonight though. In fact, you should join me." I smile as Me''s face sours at the thought. He''s only tried drinking once and no matter how many times I tell him that each spirit and ale has its own unique taste, he still refuses to partake in the activity. Which is partially my fault for starting him on the hard stuff. "Quite. I will join you, but I''ll have something non-alcoholic, thank you." Still, not one to turn down an invitation, Me happily accepts with conditions of his own. Maybe he''ll try something different once he''s in the mood. Atmosphere alone offers peer pressure sometimes. With the plan for tonight set, I head off to do more early-morning upgrades. A few of the features that provide the food Varona''s citizens need were first. Additions, touch ups and general renovations to the residential areas were after that. More parks and streets in empty locations came after that. Nothing big and flashy like the Retreat, but enough little details that people will appreciate. Strangely, out of an odd force of habit, I find myself in front of the Bale of Fortune. Ready to hit confirm before I realize what I''m doing. It''s not like the feature -which has finally become useful- needs an upgrade yet, but I''m so used to coming here that I didn''t even think twice about it. Do I really need to upgrade it again? With how temperamental the feature has been I''m more inclined to think of it as a DP dumping ground than a good purchase. Not that I need to dump any points at the minute. There''s still more to accomplish by spending them elsewhere today and the Lord of the Bale will have to wait his turn. With that thought in mind, I take the short route and teleport inside my mountain. Now that the sun has risen over my city, the residents are also out and about. As they''re ready to start their day, my next round of spending will be inside my home and I kick it off with floors. An additional ten to be specific and each one gets the latest Goblinator to be unlocked. The Eldergoblinator. Placing one on each floor, with great reluctance I might add, they look stronger than any of the Goblins I''ve ever seen. Hench, is a good way to describe them. Not just big like a regular Hob, these large-bastards are ridiculously lean and muscly. Also, I unlocked the next step in the horrendous line of child-eating monsters. The Lordgoblinator. Not only does its name worry me, but I''m also wondering why I seem to have missed a few Goblinators. The first-tier monsters don''t bother me, but I''m wondering why I haven''t unlocked a mage version of the self-spawning feature. I thought it might have come after the Hob, but the Eldergoblinator took that spot and now we''ve moved straight on to a lord. Even though I don''t know why they haven''t unlocked, I''m not phased in the slightest and frankly couldn''t care less. I dislike them enough as it is and I suppose one Goblin Mage is more than enough. If it was an Assassin we were missing... Well, then shit would be different, wouldn''t it? Anyway, I don''t plan on placing any Lordgoblinators down here for the foreseeable future. No one''s even managed to pass the Hobgoblins yet and the higher-tiered ones could end up becoming a problem that I don''t want to deal with. I already get a strange vibe from Obling. It''s just the way he stares at me. The Goblin Mage''s intelligence is higher than that of the others. Plus, there''s the way he acts. Obling looks like he''s cooking up a scheme whenever he''s deep in thought and I''d be lying if I said it didn''t slightly freak me out. I''m hoping the awkward smile is out of respect to his master, but because of it I''m definitely not summoning a second Mage any time soon. Then again, I also said I''d never summon Goblins in the first place and look at me now. If it had been a bet, I would have lost that one every single time. Unauthorized duplication: this tale has been taken without consent. Report sightings. After I''m satisfied that the amount of Goblins is sufficient to keep in line with the rise in level, I create an additional floor beneath Obling''s and add a few Trolls to it. One, because I want to, and two, because dungeon monsters get stronger the further adventurers progress. Cave Trolls and Dungeon Trolls are the only variants I add for the moment. I''m not sure the humans will be able to take on Berserker Trolls or those that come after. They''ll need to keep smashing through Goblins until they''re strong enough to reach that problem anyway. With eleven extra floors, giving me a grand total of thirty-nine, my Core is now well and truly removed from the surface. Not only am I safe, but the majority of my dungeon-dwelling family members also have a ridiculous amount of Goblins and a couple of Trolls separating them from the surface now that the Sanctuary is at the bottom of my dungeon. Even if anyone truly dangerous arrives, by the time they reach Barry''s maze, I will have already added more floors in between here and there. There are also lots of other options at my disposal, all earned through the awful elf. Although, I don''t know why I even worry about my family. If anything, with how strong they are, it makes sense for them to be the last line of defence in my home. Plus, there''s that many of them now that I can barely keep track of who''s who. To be honest, I should limit summons to when they''re required and need to stop whipping out people like they''re rain and should only create them when needed. Monsters are a little different, but not knowing which ones will turn out more human than others is a bit of a pain. However, I don''t like to think of any of them as disposable. The Goblins are fine, but Trixie and the Wolves, Webster and the Willys, they''re all part of the family. Even scary Sam, dodgy Ditto and the voluptuous Violet. The latter being a prime example of what I''m talking about. Someone who had a mixed appearance until recently and one you never would have expected to bloom so well. Me''s still denying it, but I''m definitely the dungeon of beauty. I''ve got to be with how the bar rises every day. After creating the floors and the monsters to populate them, not much time has passed. With the midday sun hanging above Varona, I decided to take a break for lunch. At Ali''s, I grab two take-out boxes and head off to Anya''s. Dinner with my bestie is one of my favourite parts of the day. Even if we were to sit there in complete silence, Anya''s company alone is enough to fill the soundless void between us. That''s just how much she means to me. Not that it ever goes that way. As we eat, she asks how my upgrades are going and I tell her to visit Talia''s after work for a nice surprise. Other than that, we make small talk until she has to get back to work. I suppose I have to get back to it as well. There''s only so much hookey a Core can play. Saying goodbye, I head out to perform my last spending session of the day. On the outskirts of town, because I didn''t know where else to place the entrance to the city''s underbelly, my latest acquisition is set and upgraded to keep in line with the others. My newest feature represents what the Syndicate does for a living, yet I''ve only just unlocked it.
The Assassin''s Guild: From shadows created by the Moon''s grace, predators of the night take comfort in their embrace and use them to assist in their duty Neither peasant, nor King, or any that lay between, are safe Even locked away, there is no hiding from the shadows Bonuses: Attacks made in stealth are twice as lethal Immediately following a stealth kill, all stats are increased by 25% for 90 seconds DP is doubled on absorption if the target was killed with stealth Upgrades: The Door to Downstairs The Well of Contracts Upgraded network system beneath ground to encompass an ever expanding city Multiple entry points in indiscreet locations - Inactive until Guild Master has been set Rewards: 32XP
This double DP seems to be a recurring trend at the minute. Not that I need it, but I also won''t complain. Stockpile is due to hit max level very soon and if I''m right, I should be able to retain every point I get. Long gone are the days when points were wasted because I didn''t have the capacity to hold them or the features to build. Now I''m abundant on both counts and if anything it''s the opposite way around. There aren''t enough hours in the day to get through it all. Looking at the small grey building, if I wasn''t the Core who placed and upgraded it, I''d be more than a little dubious about the Door to Downstairs. As it stands, the feature resembles an outhouse more than anything and after four upgrades it still hasn''t gained the usual ''I look better than before'' vibe. Probably because Assassins and matters surrounding them aren''t meant to be flashy, but instead hidden and unnoticeable. Instead of a toilet behind the door, stairs lead down to a large, complicated network of short, winding tunnels that now run beneath the city of Varona. Branching off in many directions, slightly reminiscent of Barry''s maze, but with actual brickwork rather than a dungeon wall, the different paths lead all over the city. In the middle, however, beneath the city center, is a large, open space surrounded by small rooms filled with beds. In the spacious room, tables and chairs run line middle while bookcases and weapon racks run the length of the walls. The heart of the Assassin''s Guild. Decorated in black, black and more black, the trademark Assassin colours, this place is cool as hell. I mean, who doesn''t want a secret hideout? I suppose I already have one when I think about it like that. My dungeon was hidden away so well that barely anyone turned up before I started creating Varona. It was hard to see my dungeon as a secret hideout back then though. Especially when I was trapped inside, still worked up over dying and undergoing a full-on species change meltdown. Anyway, the pathways under the city are a super-cool feature, one that I would have been more thrilled to have used myself back when I was still a lowly human Rogue, but one that is sadly not needed and seen as redundant. Every Assassin I know can teleport within the boundaries of the dungeon and when they''re out of our range they move through the shadows. Still, at least they have a guild now and I might have a wander through the tunnels at some point, just for curiosity''s sake. The Well of Contracts is also connected to the Assassin''s labyrinth. No water is pooled at the bottom though and instead a large, wicker basket has been laid there to catch any requests that may be dropped inside. Not that I see it getting many. For starters, people don''t even know about it yet, and secondly, even if they did, it''s a long way to travel just to drop a letter down a well with your details on it. Either way, with a place to legitimately take contracts, or as legitimately as a non-functioning well can be. The Syndicate will probably get a boost to its level while further ridding Tironia of the plague that lies hidden inside the masses. Or so I hope. Chapter 69: One For The Rogues "Why the fuck is that Goblin so big? And gray?" Gordon shouts as he enters the eleventh floor, loud enough for his party to hear him, but not enough that the monsters take note of presence. ''Fucking Amateurs.'' After repeatedly warning the leader of the latest party that''s come to try their hand at Abi''s dungeon, Sophie has almost hit the max tolerance that she is able to endure, and they''ve only just passed the weakest Goblins. "Gordon! This is the last time I''m going to explain the layout here as I''ve already told you three-fucking times." The Warrior subject to Sophie''s verbal abuse is now paying her the full attention she deserves as his guide. The ex-dungeon diver is much shorter than Gordon the Warrior, having to look up when she talks to him. Her experiences dealing with monsters and her confidence while inside the dungeon, however, are leagues above his own and Sophie has no problems making sure every word is heard this time. "The first ten floors of the dungeon are solely occupied by regular, weak Goblins. They''re the ones you have just finished killing to reach level 10." She pauses for a moment to give Gordon some time to process the information. His companions, a female Mage with an affinity for fire, made obvious by her almost-completely red outfit, and a male Rogue dressed in the standard rogue black, don''t seem to have a problem with listening. "This is followed up with ten floors of Hobgoblins. These guys are stronger, faster and slightly more intelligent than the regular Goblin, regardless of what Abi would say." Not meaning to add that last part to her sentence, Sophie glosses over it and carries on. "You''ll stay on these floors until you reach level 20, which is not happening today. You''ve done well getting this far already, but we''ve been down for a few hours now and it''s time to head back," she informs the group. "Aw, but Sophie, can''t we just try to kill one Hobgoblin before we go? Please?" Gordon is practically vibrating; he''s bouncing up and down that fast. The look on his face screams that he needs to fight at least one before he goes. Their guide let a long, drawn out sigh escape her lip before she nods. "Fine, but only one. Are you still listening, Gordon?" "Yes." Gordon jumps even higher and fist bumps the sky. Sophie on the other hand can''t tell whether he was answering her or showing his joy at being allowed to attack the Hobgoblin. His short moment of intelligence had been quickly lost on him however as he quickly turns back to her and asks, "which one is Hobgoblin again?" Sophie has never wanted to beat another human so badly before as she does Gordon. Fortunately, for everyone''s sake, she manages to keep her shit together and just aims stink eyes at the Warrior. "As it happens, it''s the big, gray Goblin over there," she points. "The one you seemed so worried about when we got here." Gordon scowls at his guide. He feels as though Sophie has spoken down to him in front of his group. In a sense he''s not wrong, but attention in the dungeon is crucial, especially on the lower levels. "You can look pissed off, but I''m the one who''s actually annoyed here, Gordon. This is the third time I''m having to tell you this shit. Do you want to die here? Eh? Is that it? People die every day inside dungeons! They are dangerous even if you have a guide. I''m telling you now, this dungeon is safer than any other dungeon I''ve ever set foot in, hell, it''s even safer than some of the streets I''ve been down, but that doesn''t mean you can let your guard down. You can''t have the attention span of a goldfish and expect to survive down here. Not while... Look, I''ll continue to be your guide after today, but there are going to have to be some changes in your party structure." Sophie says half shouting and half ordering with her finger waving up in Gordon''s face,wondering if he even caught a third of what she said. "What do mean changes?" the warrior sheepishly asks, showing that he indeed did catch a third of her rant, even if it was only the last third. "Leadership, party structure, member count. These are the topics we''ll discuss back at the Tavern. However, do you still want to kill a Hobgoblin before we head back?" Without answering and possibly forgetting the crucial conversation from literal seconds ago to no-one''s benefit, Gordon and his party dash off to fight the closest Hobgoblin they can. Sophie keeps an eye on them as she debates how that conversation will go when they get back. Hopefully fast and easy so she can get home to Light and make up for lost time. Dungeon Stories Volume 3
The next problem is who am I going to choose to run the Assassin''s Guild? It''s not like I''m short on choices. Practically two thirds of my family were created with that class, but the Guild Master should be someone extremely capable. My mind drifts to Noir, laughing loudly whilst proclaiming something about his weapon and how he''s the best. The genuine version of this novel can be found on another site. Support the author by reading it there. Nope. That also rules Carrie out as she''s needed to keep him in check. I can''t have the boisterous, trouble maker running missions solo. Who knows what would happen. Realistically, there are only two choices left. The two people that have continued to defy expectations even when I thought it impossible. I decide to leave the decision until later and teleport over to Talia''s. Anya should be arriving soon and Me is already here, a cold glass of juice in his hand. In the corner of my eye, however, Light is standing on a table, mug in hand, doing something daft. It''s not often I see the blue-haired Assassin drunk as he always seems to handle his liquor well. One of the new spirits Talia unlocked must have really done a number on him. Everyone has that one drink that just obliterates your memory. With that thought, Light slips and lands on the table, crashing through it in the process. Landing hard on the ground, his arm is still raised high, indicating he didn''t spill any of his ale. Nope! Not a chance. Bloody idiot. I''ll choose Dropper. "Hey, Me," I beam, ignoring the antics at the other side of the room. The commotion now being Talia giving Light a well-deserved scolding. "Hi, Abi." We chat about dungeon management and the Assassin''s Guild until Anya arrives, then we get serious. My bestie and I eventually managed to convince Me to try something different. He had sworn off drinking after his last experience, but after explaining that other alcohols taste nothing like Jack''s, he was in. Showing more gratitude than he needs to as he slurs his words, it turns out Me is a fan of the fruity wines. The sweet taste being more to his liking than any ale or spirit. Fortunately, it lets him partake in the evening''s merry atmosphere rather than being the odd one out, being the un-inebriated third wheel. Unfortunately, the fruity taste of wine is very misleading, and before he knows it, Me''s already drunk, performing a repeat of Light from earlier. Only his antics don''t go so well and he ends up covered in his own drink, passed out on the floor. I have no worries about his physical wellbeing as his soul is easily transferable these days. No, the problem I have is that he''s soaked in the strongest wine I''ve ever had the pleasure of smelling in either of my lives. Anya is laughing so hard that she''s holding her stomach, while Talia doesn''t seem impressed that two of her tables have been destroyed in one day. With that a night of drunken foolery commenced. The type that you can never remember until someone calls you out on it later down the line. How nice it is to have a body to experience that feeling again. After my Assassins'' visit to the Lord''s city of Ishda, a lot of rebuilding is needed. That was mainly Noir''s fault, but as he completed his task and nothing else was said on the matter, I let it slide. It could have gone a lot worse. Either way, with the recently vacated properties and an abundance of shop-keeping Assassins at my disposal, I''ve decided to work my way into the city of Ishda and establish myself a base of sorts using Land Acquisition. Future wise, if everything goes well and a dragon doesn''t somehow destroy my home with a quick wash of its breath, I can totally see myself acquiring that much land. Hell, I could potentially own the entire region of Ishda. Imagine the DP! I''ll never have to work again! Not that being the Core is work. It''s more of a lifestyle and a pretty good one at that too. You even get to spend most of the day with your friends and family. With thoughts of where to start, I teleport to the eastern edge of my current boundary and begin using Land Acquisition. With each additional plot, more and more small sections of Tironia fall under my domain as I start what is guaranteed to be a large job. Unlocking sections one after the other, the plan is to create myself a path of sorts straight to Lord Aldor''s city. A direct line. As I can teleport freely anywhere in the dungeon, the idea of being able to bounce back and forth between other cities fills me with joy. Not that I dislike what I''ve built, but I''m no longer trapped or confined to a singular location. Not only am I able to teleport, but so too are my faithful, shopkeeping family of Assassins. Supply and demand mixed with arduous travelling conditions are the main issues every merchant faces and if they don''t have the wares, are waiting on a delivery to arrive, or can''t make the journey for whatever reason, then they''re losing money. My family won''t have that problem after I''ve connected us to all the other cities in our region. They can port over and pick up what they need at bargain prices from the suppliers themselves. It''s not as though I take part in Varona''s administration, or have a say on how our economy works. The Gods know I''d screw it up if I did, but I do know that this means my family and city will benefit exponentially and that''s enough to make me happy. Not as happy as finally being able to get out and visit different places brings me, but it''s still good. Depending if things keep going well here, I might even set up a second training dungeon in Ishda. That''s something time will tell though and as it stands, I''m nowhere even near the city yet. There are hundreds of miles in between us and Lord Aldor. Even with Land Acquisition, it will take me a while to get there. However, as I stand in the middle of the forest, the idea of ''how long it will take'' is completely lost on me as the sounds of nature fill my ears. Water running in the distance and the sounds of birds chirping in the foliage above sends a peaceful vibe through my body. The bushes shuffle as I push through and the foliage crinkles beneath my feet. The touch of wood on my skin sends shiver down my spine as the sun warmly coats my body. Being out here alone makes me feel more alive than the body I created for myself ever did. The realization that I haven''t been this far away from the dungeon ever since I was reincarnated hits me like a horse-drawn cart. Even though I''m still technically connected to it, the freedom I feel is unrivalled. Amazing. Unexplainable. It''s as though I can do anything. Take on anyone. Hell, at this point I might be able to, but the goal of my second life isn''t to go around being a badass. No. My purpose, which has slowly grown on me, is to aid the people of Tironia to become the best people they can be. Soul Guide being the driving force behind my motivation and the residents of Varona show the fruits of my labor. Proving that people can change and that my efforts aren''t in vain. A few unfortunate souls had already been sent down the path of reincarnation before I decided to try an alternate method to the skill and System''s recommendation. However, people die everyday and seeing how they''ll get another chance to try again, there''s no point in dwelling on those scumbags or how I could have helped them. Instead, I''ll concentrate on what I can do with the people I already watch over. The ones who are destined for the great question marks of beyond. There''s still a good deal of suspicion lingering around inside my mind over where they go, if they go anywhere at all and the System isn''t just fucking me. But only time will tell. I just wish I knew more. Chapter 70: 50 Years? Beneath the city of Varona, the daily cacophony of bustling citizens is replaced by the sound of condensed water, echoing out through the silence. Many of the passageways that are found underground lead to dead ends. Some, however, lead to ends that are worse than having to retrace your steps. The corridors twist and turn, forming themselves into a maze of interconnected tunnels. Tunnels that are not so easily navigated. Especially not by the uninitiated. With some corridors holding more significance than others, certain measures have been put into place. The aim being to incapacitate, rather than incinerate, potential intruders, or any curious souls who might happen down there by chance. If they don''t manage to get lost in the maze first that is. On one such passageway, just off the main hall, is the door that leads to Dropper''s office. Inscribed on the plaque is written - Head of the Assassins Guild. Inside the Guild Master''s room, bookshelves line the left wall. Their contents neatly arranged for all to see. Shelves and drawers are on the opposite side and the tools of her trade are displayed on top. In the center of the room is a beautifully-engraved desk made from mahogany. Dropper is sitting on a leather chair behind it. The seating apparatus clearly being several sizes too big for the dainty woman as she continuously shuffles about while carving her name into the front of the desk. With the blonde bombshell becoming the head honcho due to her partner''s drunken shenanigans in front of the big boss, she is feeling a bit under prepared. Hence the most-recent act of vandalism. Her feelings aren''t because of her skills or due to lack of talent. Dropper considers herself to be one of the best Assassins in Varona and it isn''t an exaggeration to say she''s correct. She truly is one of the best Abi has to offer and deserves the position she''s been given. The truth is, traveling the country to end the threats that others cannot is much easier than running a guild full of people. Even if half of them are dungeon born, talking in front of groups is not one of the skills in Dropper''s repertoire With her name etched into the desk, Dropper gets off the oversized chair and leaves the room. Walking down the dimly-lit corridors, she quickly reaches the open-plan training area. The latest batch of inductees are being tested to check how the level of their skills have risen. Living in such a peaceful city, there aren''t many people who would want to involve themselves in the darkness that lies behind the facade of humanity. Only certain individuals seek out to join the Assassins Guild. Or would be the case in any regular Assassins Guild. For some reason, Abi''s seems to be packed with new initiates wanting to join their ranks. The main hall is packed and Dropper quickly turns off to take a smaller hall. If anyone needs her to speak before the large group of people, one of her assistants will surely let her know. Rian, one of the promising human Rogues, is working on his Shadow Step technique alone in the training hall. As she watches him, Dropper notices that he keeps stumbling out of the shadow instead of emerging cleanly. "Having difficulties?" She appears behind him, hoping he might learn from seeing the skill performed firsthand. "I am," he answers glumly "Why does it feel like I''m tripping through the shadow?" "The shadows move us wherever we want them to, or where they are present may be a better analogy. It''s tricky. Shadow Step is more like a teleport. You move through the shadow, but come out in the same position you went in with. That''s why you''re stumbling out of the end." Offering her knowledge, the fire in Rian''s eyes confirms her suspicions that the young man will make a good Assassin one day, even if he is a human. "Thank you, Guild Master." Rian offers Dropper a dungeon salute. The humans had caught members of Abi''s family performing the motion a while back, and it caught on like wildfire. Not knowing how to take being called master and wanting to enjoy the warm feeling she got from it, Dropper leaves Rian to continue his practicing and runs straight into Marie. "Hey, Dropper!" Having finally been given the go ahead by Abi, Marie is here to learn before she''s sent out anywhere on Syndicate missions. "Abi said I should come and see you to learn some stealth techniques." Sighing inwardly, Guild Master Dropper returns the Space Mage''s smile. Cursing her own master, she leads Marie to a separate, smaller training hall and begins instructing her in the basics. The Assassins Guild Dungeon Stories Volume 4
With each day that goes by, I spend my excess points adding more and more land to my own personal portfolio. Me is no longer hounding me to spend points either as each piece costs 1000DP a time, running me dry rather fast. Other than the 5000 points I keep in reserve, that is. You never know when the Bale of Fortune might need upgrading. OK. Bad joke, I know. A case of content theft: this narrative is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. Those points are only a small sum in the grand scheme of things now. Overstock hit max level today and I can now retain every single point of DP that I earn. Finally! You would have thought dungeons could hold that sort of amount without bother, or maybe they can and I''m the exception. Regardless, it''s still a great accomplishment. One that I really didn''t have to do much of anything to earn. Excess DP seems to be a regular occurrence around here and it was slowly trickling away until I unlocked Stockpile. Such matters seem trivial now. Miles away from my dungeon, but still connected through the insane logic of Land Acquisition, I can see the village of Orad in the distance. The time difference is throwing me for a loop. To me, it feels as though it has only been a year since the last time I laid eyes on the place I once called home. In reality 50 years were lost somewhere down the line between the time of my death and reincarnation from human to Dungeon Core. In that time, Orad has grown more than I would have ever thought was possible. Hence how I''m able to see it from such a distance. It wasn''t the smallest of villages to begin with, but at twice its original size it''s now edging on the boundaries of being labeled a city. One that wouldn''t take much doing to jump past either if we''re being honest. With its current size, I wouldn''t be surprised if it isn''t the largest village in the entire Ishda region. Then again, what do I know? I was comatose for a good amount of time which puts me well out of the loop. Maybe I should have been more inquisitive about how things have changed. I could have got a lot of information from my Assassins now that I think about it. Never mind. We''ll lay the blame on Abi of the past, Abi the Shortsighted, and pretend I''m not involved. Not that it matters now that I''m fucking free. With a change of plan and new goal in mind, I change the direction of my skill and start purchasing towards my previous home. Less than a week later, four days to get there and two to unlock the land Orad sits upon, my DP influx has seen a 50% increase. It''s truly amazing how easy it is to exploit the rule of having people in the dungeon when said dungeon is actually outside my mountain. It would have taken me much longer to purchase the land beneath my former home if The Lord of the Bale hadn''t granted my off-hand wish. Not that it was a bad wish. With Divinities'' Presence at max level, I no longer have to worry about sustaining damage due to people being in or on potential dungeon land. Now that I''ve acquired Orad, it should make reaching Ishda a much quicker endeavor thanks to the increase in my daily spending limit. Before I do anything else though, my mind is begging me to have a quick nosey around town to see what''s changed and what hasn''t, since I''ve been gone. 20 minutes later and I''m back in my tower on top of the Academy. I''m also feeling slightly confused. The lack of criminals in my former home, or souls in need of redemption, or imprisonment in my case, was the first thing that caught my attention. I locked the small handful of redeemable souls in the ToT, then left them in the capable hands of Hana and Mira. The women shouldn''t have much problems correcting the behaviour of their first visitors. Also, I''ve only got the citizens of Varona to compare Orad against, but surely there should have been more yellow souls than five? Hell, a tenth of the entire village is already green and there''s roughly 10,000 people living there. The ones who have taken their first steps to enlightenment, or whatever. How!? How can a place change so much in such a short amount of time? Hardly anything changed in the entire 16 years I spent there and there were a lot more less-than reputable people back then too. "How is it so different? Orad''s like... a completely different place." I tell my assortment of cute and cuddly companions. Sadly, none of them offer a reply. I can wholeheartedly believe the words Katrina spoke back when she decided to join my family. Not that I didn''t believe her before, but the ridiculous time frame was a lot to get my head around. After seeing Orad myself though, it feels like more time has passed than I''ve been told about. There''s barely anything remaining from the days of my youth. Sure, some buildings are still in the same locations, but everything about them is different. The construction, the layout and interior, all changed, all bigger to accommodate the increase in foot traffic. Out of all the people that lived there before, there was only one person left that I knew. Know? I do still know her after all. Little Suzie Walker, who is now old Suzie Walker, still works at the family business. Having passed down the shop to her descendants, Suzie was muttering something about an item "not being right" and was in the process of telling her daughter how to do it correctly. As old ladies often do when they have nothing else going on in their lives. At least it looked like she got to live a good life and reaching the age of sixty is a great achievement all on its own. If we forget that Marie exists that is. She''s an anomaly, that one. The space Mage, who has to be over a hundred years old and who also has insane grandeurs of being an Assassin, is currently out on a mission with Light. I really need to learn to put my foot down somewhere because I''m a downright pushover whenever they ask anything of me. Marie is the only Space Mage I have and I hate the idea of the elderly lady being out in the field on assignments. I get that she''s got skill. Hell, she went undetected around here for long enough and I thought my intruder detection was top notch. Still, I can''t help but worry. She''s old. It''s like your grandma telling you she wants to come on your quest to slay the dragon. It just wouldn''t happen and if she tried to follow you, you would somehow manage to stop her. My efforts in that department were to try to get Marie to teach magic to the citizens in hope we might get a few more Space Mages. Two birds, one stone. Occupied Space Mage making more Space Mages. Sadly though, if my great-grandma wants to slit throats and take out the trash, I can''t stop her. Letting out a sigh, I bring up my most-recent gains, the ones from Orad falling under my control, before realizing that''s the wrong way to think about what happened back there, lest that dictator joke comes back to bite me in the ass. Abi the Dictator doesn''t sit quite right in my list of self-named titles. No, not falling under my control. I don''t control shit. Adding to the DP Factory, that has a much better ring to it. Looking at the new features I''ve unlocked from expanding the DP Factory, the biggest assets gained are guilds. Most are what would be classified as minor guilds. Ones that are primarily filled with non-combatant members. Sewing, Blacksmithing and Leather working all fall into that category. Normally I wouldn''t bat an eyelid to that lot, but the guilds are missing from my city so it''s a fantastic addition to Varona right now. The best addition though and one that I hadn''t even realized was missing, or thought about, as per the norm, is the Adventurers Guild. Which begs the question, where the hell did my adventurers come from then!? Gorn obviously. Since the city-sized army of people arrived here months ago with Wheeler, no one has been able to acquire a melee-related class. With all of them being classified under the adventurers branch, no wonder there aren''t droves of new adventurers queueing up for the dungeon. Which is also good in a way. I don''t want to place too big of a burden on Simon''s shoulders. Granted he''s got Katrina, Anon and Sophie helping him out, but with now close to 20,000 people living in Varona, a sudden boost to the number of dungeon divers would throw him for a loop. I suppose I''m going to have to create some assistants for him too. It''s getting to that point where some of my family members feel like third cousins. The ones whose faces you remember, but their names are like water, slipping through your fingers. Oh well. Here come a dozen more cousins. Chapter 71: Ignorance Is Bliss At the Inn, Gordon and his party are discussing their growth and their most recent expedition into the dungeon. "Gordon. You really have to stop annoying Miss Sophie." The Fire Mage is sitting on a chair and points out the single consistency from each one of the delves. She doesn''t want to single out her friend and party member, but sometimes these conversations need to be had. "I''m not doing it on purpose, Felicity. I just... I don''t think she likes me." Gordon lets out a sigh. He knows full well that he gets under their guide/mentor''s skin, even if he doesn''t mean to. "Don''t be silly. You''re very charming," The Rogue chuckles "You just need to spend a little more time studying and educating yourself. That''s all." "That''s easy for you to say, Rian. I just... I find it hard to remember certain details. That''s the problem." Opening up to his friends, Gordon explains what they both already know. "Well we''re not going anywhere. Once a party, always a party. We''ve got your back, Gordon." "Yeah. We can make up for each other''s shortcomings and if not we can take it slower. We could always do what Miss Sophie said as well." Rian and Felicity both voice their opinions on the subject and it warms the Warrior''s heart knowing his friends care. "Thanks guys. Anyway, how are your levels looking after training?" Having earned a level outside the city in one of the scouting parties and increasing a few of his skills at the Coliseum, Gordon is curious to know how his fellow party members have done. "My level hasn''t changed," Felicity answers bitterly before perking up with "but my spells have gotten a lot stronger thanks to learning how to not waste mana during my cast. Also, my flames are so much more deadly. Those Necromancers at the guild really know their stuff!" "I''m almost ready to take my class advancement. I won''t go through it yet though. Not until we''re all ready to tier up together," Rian says with a large grin from the corner of the room, earning himself a scowl from Felicity. "What? How have you levelled up so fast? We haven''t been in the dungeon for a few days? Did you go in with someone else?" Gordon asks, worried that his friend''s words and actions mean two different things. He was also a little deflated that he seems to have the weakest out of the three. "Don''t be ridiculous. Like I''d go in with anyone other than you two goons. The guild has... other methods to help their initiates level up. The Guard takes you out into the forest to clear out monsters, right?" Gordon nods. The last expedition into the woods had proven to be quite beneficial once they found their target. However, it wasn''t quite as fruitful as Rian''s had been apparently. "We do... something similar." "I should have chosen to be a Rogue," Gordon pouts, before quickly adding "Only for the levels, mind you." His friends laugh and he joins them. He couldn''t ask for better companions and wouldn''t change them for the world. "What do we think of a new party member then? I''m not exactly opposed to the idea, but I''d like to know what your thoughts are." Gordon asks the question on everyone''s mind. None of them has stopped thinking about it since Sophie offered the suggestion. "As long as they''re brighter than you, I don''t mind," Rian jokes while continuing to laugh. "We should get a strategist or a healer. Or maybe someone with a good memory," Felicity adds, digging Gordon verbally and nodding in agreement to herself. "I don''t think that''s a class, but we can ask. Other than that, is there anything else we need to go over before we go back into the dungeon tomorrow?" Shaking it off, Gordon takes it like a man and continues the meeting. "Oh, yes! You really do have to stop annoying Miss Sophie." Felicity reiterates her earlier comment and Rian bursts out in a fresh bout of laughter. "I know, I know. I''ll study more, damn it!" The red-faced Warrior yells. Gordon, Felicity and Rian. Adventurer Party A Dungeon Stories Volume 3
Another day passed and ended at dinner with Anya and Me, making way for another morning that once more blessed Varona with its tranquil rays of golden juice. Ah life. How sweet the nectar of yesterday''s efforts can taste. Future Abi, a.k.a the present me, is wondering what happened to all the problems that past Abi conveniently decided to leave for herself. Seeing as how they still haven''t sprung their heads though, I''m going to take today as another win and move on. I''m definitely not going to go out of my way to remember them, that''s for sure. Sometimes I wonder how long I will be able to keep control of my sanity when life is a constant mixture of ups and downs. This novel is published on a different platform. Support the original author by finding the official source. Frankly, we''ve had quite a lot of highs recently and I''m happy with how everything is progressing. Due to that fact, I can''t help but dwell on the miserable state I was back in the beginning of my second life. The Dungeon Core that just wanted to be human again. That was the only thing on my mind. A constant longing for something more physical. If I wouldn''t have had Me around to talk to and to help me out, I don''t know how I would have managed to cope. Not that cope is the right word for what I went through. It was more akin to stumbling around in the dark while stress panicking if I''m being honest. The story of my life. Learning only after making a mistake... or three and needing every bit of help I can get. Thankfully, I was and still am surrounded by the support network I so desperately needed. Hugging my assortment of cute and cuddly stuffed animals as though Marie is still on the prowl, I watch as smoke begins to rise from chimneys around the city as my citizens also rise from their slumber. The people that I depend on to supply me with the means to continue creating features. The ones that they in turn will use and benefit from, bringing more joy and enjoyment in life. Thus bringing in more DP and again funding more purchases to keep the wheel turning. We''re all just cogs in the machine that keeps the dungeon city running. Not that they know that piece of crucial information. As long as they''re happy, healthy and able to walk around with a smile on their face, however, then there isn''t really a problem. An untold truth isn''t technically a lie. Anyway, The Adventurers Guild is today''s first job as I had already spent-up yesterday. Meaning my overdue and latest feature had to wait an extra day for its spectacular debut. There is still space around the fountain in the center of town for one last building of importance and the guild fits the criteria soundly. Without a doubt it will create a lot more foot traffic and with the location being just off the main high street, will probably create more commerce too. Not that that was my aim, even if it does benefit us profusely. All that type of business is left in the capable hands of Kana, Sacha and the rest of the council. In my ever-lengthening list of available features, not that any of the options I have are currently unavailable, guilds available for purchase that don''t start with ridiculous names have instead only grown in size. Not that I would have minded. I''ve grown attached to the system-chosen naming program that''s derived from my own thoughts as some of them are far better than anything I can come up with on the spot. Granted some are on the opposite end of the spectrum, but after a few upgrades they generally turn into something decent. Anyway, the Adventurers Guild. With the center of Varona visible from my tower at the Academy of Dark Arts, I can see the fountain and the spot where my new feature will be placed from here. A quick teleport puts me next to the water feature in the empty square and in less than a minute I''m finished. The new building takes up the space between the City Council and the Mages Guild and as per the normal looks exquisite. Maybe a little too exquisite for an Adventurers Guild. Stone steps lead up to the front of the building. A large stone archway, its weight supported by stone columns underneath, leads to the entrance. Dark-red double doors, on it, the Adventurers guild''s insignia -a sword, shield and bow in a bold gold- open the way to the spacious area inside. Tables and chairs are on the left for parties to sit down and discuss quests. There''s also a bar inside, but it''s nothing compared to Talia''s. Multiple notice boards for quests to be pinned on line the wall to the right with a reception area directly ahead. To the side of the reception desk is a stairwell that leads upstairs. Offices, soon to be filled with paperwork and busy staff in the near future. Meeting rooms, more lavish than I would have expected, fill the entire floor but one. The guild master''s room is easily identifiable as soon as you reach the landing because it has a completely different door and frame than all the rest. The guild itself is leaps and bounds above the one in Orad and any of the others I''ve seen for that matter. Maybe I should have stopped upgrading it after the second time? Never mind. Looking like the long-lost cousin to the Royal Halls of Regeneration, but at only a fraction of the size. The Adventurers Guild is a nice addition to the center of town and one I''m extremely happy with. Simon might not be too thrilled about it. Depending on how my citizens feel about entering a dungeon after they get classed up will be the deciding factor. To be honest though, I think poor Simon is going to have his work cut out for him. Seeing as how my dungeon is unregulated, untaxed and you get to keep whatever you find inside, the rest of the unclassed youth will probably dive at the chance. Probably even some of the older generation. With the guild complete I move on to my second task, spending points until I hit my allocated reserves. Which still doesn''t take very long. It took a lot longer than it was half a year ago, lasting me the better part of an hour, but draining the purse is easy no matter the currency. Especially when my purchases cost 1000DP a pop. After emptying the pool, which was fun but dull, the rest of day was spent in the company of Anya while also occasionally boasting of my spending spree to Me. Less DP makes for a happy Me. As another serene day in Varona comes to a close, I teleport to my tower and smile madly into my futon. I can''t help but be happy. Life''s just the best right now. I roll around with my silent compatriots until the noise below garners my attention. Looking down at the crowd leaving the Academy, the evening classes finishing for the day, everyone is as happy and lively as I feel. Smiles are given and pleasantries exchanged as they leave the building, on to whatever else the evening holds for them. Quite a few will probably end up at Talia''s I suspect, but a stiff drink to wash down the day is a good choice to make. Especially if I''m benefiting from it. Some will find themselves at Ali''s for the late-evening rush, others may head to their guilds to seek further training or even categorization. After watching the excitable clusters of apprentice Mage and Magus bustle their way to their destinations, for some reason I find that Orad is still at the center of my thoughts. Even though I''ve been a Dungeon Core for almost a year now, I can''t help but feel awkwardly homesick. Though the village has completely changed and the one person that made it feel like a home now lives in Varona with me, it''s still a strange feeling nonetheless. That''s not to say I would change who I''ve become, or what I am now. If I was somehow able to go back to how it was before, I wouldn''t. Since becoming able to walk, talk and engage with the residents of Varona, my life has improved significantly. Not to mention the power in my hands is unlike anything I''ve ever experienced before. I haven''t dared to test myself properly yet, but I''m sure it will be high on the something-else scale. In truth, I''m a little scared. Going from human to Dungeon Core and then back into human, but in the top-tier body I created for myself, was so fucking weird. It was amazing because I''m literally me again, but I''m so fucking strong it''s scary. I can feel the strength and power that courses through my body. It''s like blood pumping hard after a good workout only constant. This new power, however, is only needed for one reason. For the protection of Varona and the people and family that live here. Until that day comes though, the best thing to do is to ignore it for now. Just forget the fact that I could be able to destroy an army single handedly with only a flick of my wrist. Ignorance is bliss. Or so they say. Chapter 72: Responsibilities "That cleans up the last of the problems then. It took a while longer than I thought it would, but thanks to everyone''s efforts the city''s never been better." Deputy Mayor Sacha smiles happily as she finishes her report. Sitting around a large, oval table are the city council members of Varona and an extremely relaxed ex-treasurer. Goode had wet more than one pair of pants upon his arrival in the mountain town of beauty and goodwill, but now looks more composed than half of the other people that have gathered for the meeting. Over the first couple of weeks he was asked to look over certain documents and give reports on his findings which had been sent straight to Sacha. Happy with his summaries, the Deputy Mayor had told Carrie to ease up on the elderly man as they didn''t want him dying before he could be of more benefit. Happy with being treated much better than on his arrival, but still a little skeptical of the four-eyed woman''s casual reference of death, Goode''s life changed in the opposite way he thought it would. It got better. Not only did he get a generous wage for the contributions he offered by weekly report, easily enough to help his remaining family members back in Ishda and then some, but he was starting to feel a spring in his step. Almost as though he had lost twenty years somewhere down the line. The daily pain in his knee, the one that had persisted from dawn to dusk for the last ten years, was long gone. Not even a dull ache remained. Not only his knees, but all the other old pains that Goode had grown accustomed to living with had also disappeared. His sight had cleared up somewhat, his hearing had improved and for the first time in years, he actually felt happy. Who knew that being manhandled by a beautiful woman and being taken to a new land would have been so beneficial. So heavenly. Truly, the worst punishment now would be being kicked out of such a wonderful place. Would he even leave if told to or would he argue for his personal peace to continue? "Are there any other topics that might need the council''s attention, or does anyone know of anything that Abi might have missed that still needs our intervention?" At Sacha''s words, Goode coughs into his hand and stands up. "Again? Sit down Goode. We know what you''re going to say," shouts the head of agriculture. A man with short dark brown hair and eyes. His clothing represents his department and makes him easily identifiable in the room of beautiful faces. "Agri''s right, Goode. The amount we get is fine. Are we really going to have to vote on this again?" The head of planning and development also expresses her annoyance at the ex-treasurer from across the table before winking at her colleague. Much to his fury. "I''m just saying the dungeon core could make more money if she so chose to do so by lowering our wage. I for one find it hard to spend even half of the amount you have graciously decided to pay me and I''m here under extenuating circumstances," he explains his reason to them. As he has done at every last meeting since his participation was established. For someone that was embezzling funds from his Lord, he keeps bringing up the same point that they''re all being paid too much. "Our master isn''t interested in such trivialities as money. She does all of this for us. So that we can thrive and live a life worth living. She is making the world a better place not only for us, but for everyone on it. She is truly a God in the shape of a dungeon." The head of the religious sector voices his own opinion. That opinion is always one and the same. All for the core and nothing less. "How many times have I told you, that is not my name, little miss development!" Red faced, the agriculture representative stands up and begins complaining at the planning and development representative. The other members watch on in amusement until Sacha raises her voice louder than anyone else, waking the sleeping Mayor next to her in the process. "Argi! Pam! Every. Bloody. Time! You''re as bad as Goode and his need to give up his money. You two need to kiss and make up or I''ll ask the master to give you a personal session." Both agriculture and development turn a vibrant shade of red before going pale. Rubbing her eyes, Kana realizes she hasn''t missed anything but the norm and settles back down on her arms. "Goode!" The ex-treasurer, who had just sat down, and the drowsy Mayor both bolt up and respond instantly, gathering a good laugh from the rest of the council in process. "Yes, ma''am!" Sacha gives her superior a look of disappointment, who then retakes her seat shamefully. "You need to go spend some time with Simon. Maybe gain a better appreciation for gold. Not one that causes it to go missing however, not that I should have to tell you that." Goode turns white, making him the third person today to pale. Sacha is on a roll. This book was originally published on Royal Road. Check it out there for the real experience. "Now. If there''s nothing else this meeting is adjourned. Mayor Kana, let''s go." Leaving the table before anyone else can speak another word, the exhausted Deputy Mayor vacates the room with a sorry looking senior in tow. Varona''s City Council Dungeon Stories Volume 3
I never imagined that one day I would end up owning as much land as I currently do. Not that I have the paperwork to support such claims, but my ownership is on a much more fundamental level so I suppose I don''t really need it. As long as people occupy the space above it, they will continue to contribute towards the awesomeness that is their local Dungeon Core Landlord Service, helping expand her business and income on the way. Hell, it doesn''t even need to be people staying on the land. Monsters that find themselves passing through any particular stretch of Abi-owned land also add their fair share to the stockpile of DP that rolls in like royalties. I''m a fair landlord though. I don''t overcharge and only ask that people offer up a percentage of what they can afford. I think a 1% contribution of a person''s accumulated XP is a ridiculously cheap price. Those who happen to be higher up on the level chart offer that more than your average Tina, which also helps my balance grow. Adding to my portfolio, I end up going off-track once again with a second detour. One day I''ll make a plan and follow through on it, I swear. This time I begin purchasing land in the direction of Tune. The city by the sea is the closest neighbor Orad has and instead of backtracking to add it to my collection later, it makes more sense to just snap it up now. Easy peasy. Being North-East from Orad puts Tune directly east of Varona and not too far away either. Ishda is easily three times the distance from my former home which means it will take a week or two to reach by purchasing land whereas I could be in the coastal city the day after tomorrow. It''s a no-brainer. Acquire land, obtain Tune, increase profits. With the extra Dungeon Points I''ll get from the people of the fishing community, I should be able to reach the capital a lot faster than if I were to head there straight away. Abi the Clever. Abi the Wise. Abi the Potentially-Getting-Ahead-Of-Herself. Relax. Breathe. Remember, I can breathe now. Calming breaths are the best. Especially when panic creeps its ugly face through the window. That bastard hasn''t been around in a while and isn''t welcome here. But I''m just fretting over nothing. More points mean more land. More land means more points. It''s a cycle of growth that only ends when there''s nothing left to purchase. This also incites a massive question for the future. What the fuck am I going to spend all that future DP on!? If I end up owning the planet, then my DP will be a truly-ridiculous figure. One so unfathomable that I have absolutely no idea what I would do with it. I mean, could I build myself a gigantic statue made of pure Jade? No. That would be way too much. Even for Abi the Egomaniac. Nobody should have an over-sized statue of themselves on their own mountain. That would just be silly. Right? Ahem. Anyway, to Tune. Just under an hour later and I''m almost broke. I can''t believe close to 100,000DP can disappear as quickly as it does. Magnificent and grand one moment, gone the next and I''m back home before I know. "Maybe when I have millions of DP, it won''t all disappear in a day?" The 10,000DP I decided to keep is a ''just in case someone decides to attack us today fund.'' Sitting at a table in Ali''s, I try to calculate how long it will take me to bring the continent of Tira under my dungeon umbrella. I give up as soon as my meal arrives though as my brain begins to hurt and my belly growls fiercely. That''s some complex math. I''m definitely never going to be Abi The Mathematician, that''s for sure. I guess I''ll have to see if Me can work it out later. He''s good with numbers. If not, I''ll try Sacha and the council. Why Sacha and the council? Because Mayor Kana is about as sharp as a butter knife. Seriously, I don''t know what to do with that one. The council and city are still running fine though, mainly thanks to the Deputy Mayor, so I suppose it''s fine for now. Enjoying my meal slowly, I watch as people come and go. Some eat in while others take their food and leave. All are full of smiles and happiness because their lives would have been much worse if they had chosen to migrate anywhere other than Varona. The fact that we let them live here for free the first few months was something no other city could have offered them. Well they could, but probably wouldn''t have. People are greedy, which is a straight up fact! And it only ever seems to get worse the higher up you go. There''s no profit to be made in helping the masses the way we did, and instead is a major drain on financial resources. Unless you happen to be a Dungeon Core that is. Also one whose main priority is the betterment of Tironia at that. To be honest I''m starting to think other Dungeon Cores aren''t all that. I mean really, how have none of them picked up on the fact that people mean points? Seriously. It''s more ridiculous than Barry plowing away even though he has no need to anymore. His efforts are still appreciated though and at least I see him taking frequent breaks now. Still, his work ethic is second to none. He''s a straight up do''er, that Golem. "Can I get you anything else, Master?" Ali appears and asks, noticing that I finished my dinner and dessert quite a while ago and have just been idling over my own thoughts. "No thank you, Ali. I''m good and that was delicious as always. I was just imagining how different life would be for the people that moved here if they would have decided to go elsewhere." I''m always honest with my family. Secrets are the first step on the path of distrust and that''s the last place I want to end up. I would hate to ruin the bond we have, the closeness I feel to them. "Thank you, master. Your praise is always a compliment. Regarding your other matter, why don''t you ask Noir? He was talking about the refugees from Gorn the other night so I assume he might know what became of them." Honesty is always the best policy. I give Ali a quick peck on the cheek and she flushes red. I leave her holding her cheek and head off to find the loudest Assassin I''ve ever met. Chapter 73: Mes Mission Fire rains down on the city from above. Rubble and destruction lay strewn about the streets as the Lord looks out at what was once a thriving city. "The pompous old fool. Why did he have to take it so far?" The Lord of Gorn watches on as smoke rises to the sky and his city crumbles to the ground. The only solace to be found is that his citizens have already left and their blood isn''t filling the streets. "That merchant certainly arrived at the most ideal time. To think he could offer safe passage for that many people. It''s uncanny, but I''m grateful nonetheless." The skies darken more than they should be able to and a terrible shriek cries out from inside. It threatens to destroy the hearing of any that hear it. "M-My Lord. T-There is still time. We could still escape now if we make haste." Minister Herald is on the balcony overlooking the city with his Lord. Having been given the choice, unlike many others, he had opted to stay, showing his courage and loyalty. Only now after pissing his pants to the unholy noise that had just cried out, not to mention witnessing the destruction of Gorn firsthand, it''s safe to say he''s had a sudden change of mind and is wholeheartedly regretting his decision. "It''s already too late for that, Herald. If only the King would have listened. Look." Minister Herald follows his Lord''s command and looks to the sky. There, inside the cloud of smoke, a shadow begins to form on its surface until a Demon of death emerges from within. With scales the color of midnight and wings that span a truly-spectacular length, the red-eyed monster descends towards the Lord''s Manor. "E-E-Edward! N-Now is the time to fucking run!" Mister Herald, forgetting all formalities, titles and etiquette, shouts at the man he would call his closest friend. "Holy shit!" Lord Edward Gorn, also losing his own composure, swears for the first time in his life. "I, er... I do believe you are correct, Herald." Unfortunately for them, the speed of two elderly men is nothing compared to that of their foe and before they can even reach the door the balcony shakes and the men lose their footing, falling to the floor. Lord Gorn looks at his minister who seems to have passed out and then turns around, only to come face to face with death. A Black Dragon. Realizing there''s nothing he can do, the Lord resigns himself to his fate. If only he''d kept his mouth shut. All he had to do was say nothing. Nothing. Then he wouldn''t be in this mess. The King wouldn''t have singled him out for the task and declared war when he refused. Edward Gorn had always been a just Lord. He treated his people well and was respected and admired in return. He had always done what was right and was always in favor of helping those that needed it. So when the King had suggested he commit an act of atrocity performing a certain ritual close to the borders of Gorn, of course Edward was against it. Because of that and that alone, the ritual had ended up being carried out inside the city of Gorn itself. What sort of cruel world was it that the King would let such an atrocious abomination revel in the middle of a populated area. Why? ''Not that it matters now anyway,'' he thinks. The Dragon opens its mouth and Edward can see the light of fire beginning to swell from within. He offers up a short prayer before what can only be described as lava erupts in a blaze of death toward him and his closest aid. Lord Edward and Minister Herald The Destruction of Gorn
For some strange reason, I found Noir inside the Adventurer''s Guild. Leaning on his spear, he was looking through the scarce amount of requests on the notice boards with an unhappy expression written across his face. Even though he doesn''t look impressed, I feel worse for the guild as their main occupation is monster slaying. With the large space they have dedicated to contracts, the wall looks barren. It makes sense though as the guild is still relatively new, that and the forests surrounding us were cleansed ages ago by my Assassins. There are about a dozen pieces of paper pinned up at most and it won''t help any aspiring adventurers if Noir''s in here cleaning house. The tale has been illicitly lifted; should you spot it on Amazon, report the violation. "Oi, get over here." Instantly recognizing my Voice, Noir turns on his heels like a dog when their master returns home. I called out to him from the door and not wanting to look out of place, took a seat at one of the tables. Noir followed with a large smile on his face. "What are you doing?" I ask, knowing full well what he was about to do. Noir''s smile disappears and is replaced by confusion. "I was... er... " Time seems to have done wonders for Noir as he at least thinks about what he''s about to say now before opening his mouth "... going to hunt the largest monsters I could find for you, Master. Yes! That''s what I was going to do." That''s not to say the answers I receive are ever any better though. Sighing at the Assassin I can''t bring myself to tell him off. It''s not as though he was going to do anything wrong and at least his heart is in the right place. Instead, I settle for letting him work it out himself. "Noir, how are the guild''s actual adventurers supposed to level up if you take what little game they have?" I wait patiently for him to come to some type of realisation. Calmly waiting while thinking about monsters and the forest. The forest and Monsters. Or lack of that is. As understanding finally dawns on Noir''s face, my own is furrowed in thought as I realize that we have a major problem. How is the Adventurers Guild in Varona supposed to do well if there''s hardly any monsters for them to hunt? Shit. I never thought the next problem would be the lack of monsters. How did that happen? Oh. Yeah. Assassins. I decide to hold a meeting about the relatively-low number of monsters that don''t live in the forests surrounding Varona when I remember that Me still needs some type of work to keep him occupied. Being in charge of the monsters that spawn in the woods would be the perfect job for him. It would also put the adventurers back in work and help raise levels in another safe environment. That solution couldn''t be better if I wanted it to be. I''ll talk to Me later about his employment roles, but for now I need to ask Noir about something. "I''ve heard that you might know what happened to the refugees from Gorn. The ones that didn''t come here." Noir''s face lights up. Being asked for information he knows by his master is a big deal for the Assassin and he couldn''t be happier. Evident by the large grin spread across his face. He really does wear his heart on his sleeve. "I only know a little, Master. Just what I have overheard and seen. It''s true we received the majority of Gorn''s population, some of their citizens had relatives that lived closer though so they opted to stay with them. I''ve also seen a few people in other cities that look like they may have originally been Gorn citizens. They seem to be living as normally as humans can. Some are in..." I put my hand up to stop Noir from continuing. The refugees seem to be doing fine and it doesn''t really matter where they are, given that I''m on a world-wide cleansing and acquisition mission. They''ll soon fall under the dungeon umbrella as it is and I''ll be able to check on them myself. So much for the short sighted plan of inviting more people here. But at least I haven''t totally wasted my time. I managed to find out about the dwindling contracts in the guild and I can get ahead of that before anyone brings it up. Coincidentally, I sense Me outside and call him in through our link. Now''s as good a time as any to tell him of his new job. He spots me and Noir immediately. I''m too cute not to notice and no one can miss Noir. He carries that bloody spear everywhere! I get it, it''s nice, but put it away once in a while. Not wasting any time, I quickly give Me the short version of what I need him to do and why. He looks at the quest boards on the other side of the room and nods. "Fine. I ask that you spare me at least... 5000 points per day to spawn monsters with for now," he requests in a hushed tone, making sure no one overhears him. "What? Are you out of your mind? What the hell do you need 5000DP for?" I don''t help the situation though as I instantly blurt out my shocked response. "If one adventurer can safely dispose of five monsters, then one hundred adventurers will be able to kill five hundred monsters. Five hundred monsters averaging at around 10DP each is 5000DP in total per day. That''s even factoring in rotations and shift changes." He whispers his explanation which manages to calm me down as it makes sense. "Damn! That''s not even that many monsters when you play it against the number of people living in Varona, or even the amount of family members I''ve got." With the rising population it probably won''t be long before he needs more as well. I shouldn''t grumble though. By filling the forest with Dungeon-approved monsters it should help the adventurers rise further in level. Which in turn equates to more DP which helps us grow further. If anything, I should see Me''s budget as an investment for the future. "Quite. I shall start right away." Me leaves the guild and I briefly consider following him to see which monsters he will end up choosing, but ultimately decide against it. I tell Noir that he is allowed to accept quests that come from any source that isn''t our own and only if our adventurers can''t handle them before leaving the guild. With the Adventurers Guild being brand-spanking new, hopefully we''ll be OK. Me will probably open up some Goblinator equivalents to whatever he decides to summon as well so that will be another bonus. I don''t want the adventurers getting bored after all and complaining there''s nothing to do. With the inevitable problem solved before it started by Abi the Efficient, go me, I skip through town in a positive mood, greeting people on my way. I don''t know all their names, hell I barely know any of their names, yet they all seem to know mine. Is it just me, or is that strange? It''s not as though I go around saying, "Hi, I''m Abi. Nice to meet you." I understand I''m pretty memorable, what with my hair colour and all, but there are more than a few of us rocking that beautiful green combo in Varona. Surely there''s something else going on somewhere. Deciding to try and find the cause of how everyone knows who I am, I''m stopped by the strongest presence I''ve felt yet entering my territory. My map shows that it''s headed in from the North but my overview shows no one coming toward me from that way. Taking a look with my actual eyes confirms the new arrival, however, it''s not on the floor as I expected it to be. Instead, it''s flying through the air at a ridiculously fast pace. There, in the sky above Varona, is a Dragon tearing toward my mountain full throttle. What the actual fuck!? Chapter 74: Twenty Minutes Later The Dungeon Priests can be found all over Varona, but every seventh day they all gather at what used to be the Townhouse of Tribulation for weekly mass. After undergoing another upgrade to be able to fit all the Cardinal''s flock inside, the dungeon residents now know it as the Cathedral of Confession. Only the dungeon residents know it as that, however. Everybody else calls it the cathedral, or the church as some may say. Even though it''s much, much larger than a church. Zen, Ang, Avos and the rest of the Acolytes, Disciplines and Tironian alike, gather to listen to Cardinal Carn''s sermons at least once a week. The congregation have subtly named it Dungeon Days. "You may have seen her in the street, or even eating lunch at Ali''s. She may have purchased food from your stall, or helped unnoticed somehow with your delivery. You may have greeted her and in turn she you without the knowledge of it ever transpiring. Such is the will of the dungeon." "Such is the will of the dungeon," repeat the masses. "She may be blessing the fruit of your labor, or even strengthening your seed. Even the gain to your experience is not beyond the touch of her reach. She walks among the masses as one of us and never asks for more. Giving her all for the betterment of Tironia and its children alike. Such is the will of the dungeon." "Such is the will of the dungeon," again the masses repeat the line. They hang on his words, waiting for more as Cardinal Carn talks a small sip of water. Placing the glass back on the podium he continues. "The dungeon we worship is vastly different from all others that have come before it. She is unique in every aspect of the word. One of a kind. She truly cares for everyone and in turn that reflects on all those gathered here today. She loves and again, it shows on the faces of her believers as they too offer such emotion to others. She provides, protects and prevails. Such is the will of the dungeon." "Such is the will of the dungeon." Cardinal Carn''s congregation hung on every word the holy man dictated. That was until a shrill shriek tore their attention away and stopped the Cardinal in turn. They all rush to crowd the door to find out what caused the unholy noise. Panic sets into the majority as a Dragon flies overhead, roaring as it goes. Before the masses have a chance to turn into an unruly, uncoordinated mob, the Cardinal pushes his way to the front of the crowd laughing all the way. "Fret not children. For now you will see the true power of the dungeon. Her majestic glory in all its worth will protect you no matter what so have no fear. The holy mother Abi sees all from her tower on high and will deliver justice to any that threaten the sanctity of her streets." While the fear of a Dragon attack is not something that can be so easily alleviated, Cardinal Carn manages to calm everyone down and they watch on from entrance of the Cathedral. Wondering all the while whether their Goddess truly will save them. Goddess Abi. Green hair. Green eyes. About 5''5 with an adorable smile and a warmth that radiates from her soul. Something like that. Cardinal Carn''s Mass Dungeon Stories Volume 3
For some strange reason, the Dragon didn''t attack my city and instead decided to make a den on my mountain. I''ve never actually seen a Dragon with my own eyes before today. Not first hand anyway. I''ve seen pictures inside books, but they didn''t do the creature I saw justice. Black scales and beautiful features were all I saw. Sure there was a hint of terror somewhere underneath the surface. For some reason though, I was enraptured by her beauty. A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. Is it a she? I''m definitely not an expert on Dragon anatomy or anything, but for some reason I''m pretty sure she was radiating feminine charm. Or is that just me? Either way Varona is in uproar as the citizens are in full-on panic mode. Dashing around and screaming like headless chickens, it''s taking the combined effort of all my family just to stop them from arguing with each other. The Dragon hasn''t gone either and instead has decided to take up residence in the black forest about three quarters of the way up my mountain. The monster ripped a few trees out to make space for herself and then dug slightly into the mountain before going to sleep. Seriously, what the hell? It could be the fact that everything has been sunshine and rainbows recently and all the minor problems accumulated into one big shit show occurring at once? That''s not how it should be though, right? I thought I was just enjoying the fruits of my labor. Living the good life, you know? Never did I expect that the next problem to fly my way would be one on this scale. I mean, who could possibly fight a Dragon and win? They''re meant to be like next-level monsters and only the strongest dare to challenge them. Not that I''ve ever heard any story regarding them winning that is. OK. My best option is go with the two people who always surpass expectations, right? It has to be! I''m definitely not sending Noir up there. He would more than likely piss the Dragon off at which point it could lay waste to my city from the sky. The buildings aren''t so much a concern but the citizens themselves are and my family is priority number one. Under no circumstances can I let any harm come to them. I suppose I could just ignore the Dragon. Pretend it''s not even there and tell everyone it left? No, that won''t do. Honesty is the best policy after all. Plus, I can''t fall back into ignoring problems that I don''t know how to deal with. "Abi! Was that a Dragon?" Anya shouts, running up the street toward me. "Yeah. I suppose it was. Don''t you think she looked kind of beautiful?" I asked before realising what I said. "What? No... Well maybe, but she definitely did look kind of fucking dangerous. You know, the kind that eats you and sets fire to everything type of dangerous?" Anya''s serious and isn''t playing around. "I know. I''m going to get Light and Dropper to see if they can communicate with it." I let the Rainbow Mage know my intentions, simple as they may be. "What!? Abi, no! You''ve got to kill it. It''s a Dragon. It''s not going to talk to you, you know?" Anya''s basically screaming at me now. Seriously, what did I say that time? "Don''t be like that. What if it''s an intelligent creature? There isn''t much information on Dragons so it''s worth a shot, right?" "What did Me say?" I hadn''t even thought to ask what he knows about the creature in question, but a quick telepathic question confirms my suspicions.
Dragons are generally intelligent creatures. Especially if summoned through the dungeon menu.
That settles it. I have to see if they can talk it into leaving before anything bad happens. I don''t really want my efforts to go to waste or for my city to become a black spot after all. Light and Dropper arrive in the shadow of the closest alleyway and rush over to me and Anya. "Master, we are here." Dropper announces their arrival while Light questions me about our latest threat. "Is this about the Dragon?" "Thanks for coming so quickly and yes, I''ve summoned you because of the Dragon." Light struggles to contain his joy whereas Dropper''s composure is something to be praised. Have they always been like that? It only feels like recently that Light has been acting out a little more than usual. For now I''ll put it down to him spending too much time with Noir and leave it at that. "I want you to see if you can talk the Dragon into leaving. Me says they''re intelligent creatures so there''s a good chance you will be able to communicate with them." "What if it doesn''t want to leave?" Light has a mischievous look in his eye as he asks the biggest question on his mind. "As long as it doesn''t pose a threat to anyone then it will probably move on at some point." It''s rare you get to see a Dragon these days, or at least it used to be. Not that we''ve seen any others in the last year except this one. "The most important thing is that you come back alive and the city stays safe. Do not under any circumstances engage the Dragon in combat. Am I clear?" Both Light and Dropper acknowledge my order. The blue-haired Assassin grumbled something about "not being fair," under his breath before they disappeared, which didn''t escape my hearing But I decided to ignore it. As long as they don''t die it will be a win in my book. Twenty minutes later and I remember why I stopped sending Light and Dropper on scouting missions.
First Time Absorption Bonus: 19,060DP 19,060 XP New loot has been unlocked unlocked: Dragon Fang: 500DP Dragon Scale: 500DP Dragon Absorption Bonus: 19060DP 19060 XP Bella The Black: Level 62 Black Dragon 190600XP Dungeon Core Abi has reached Level 38: DP has been increased by 160 A new monster has been unlocked: Black Dragon: 5000DP New features have been unlocked: All rooms and tunnels can now be customized with the Dragon effect for no additional cost Any Dragon summoned by you will create peace instead of chaos into the hearts of those who witness them Passive Skill Regeneration has reached Level 28
I sigh in relief as neither of them are injured. A massive smile is plastered across Light''s face. "What did I say?" I ask weakly, but Light just laughs as though he doesn''t remember me telling him not to engage the Dragon. "Well. I only hit it once when we were retreating as you ordered, but it just sort of... went down." I don''t know what to say. I honestly thought a Dragon might actually pose some sort of risk or threat to my city and dungeon''s security. Was I foolish for being cautious? Surely not, right? Chapter 75: Dragon Mountain "Just once, Dropper. Please!" "Master gave us very specific instructions." "But... but... what if I do it while we''re retreating. You know. Like a warning shot to make it back off. That''d be acceptable, right?" Light has been trying to talk Dropper into attacking the monster that has taken root next to Abi''s city. Not that he wants to disobey his master''s orders, he just wants to test his strength against a Dragon. Obviously he doesn''t share the same panic that Abi felt when the creature first made its appearance above Varona. "Only once?" Dropper asks. "Only once!" Her partner nods furiously. "And if you fail? What if you enrage the Dragon? How will you take responsibility for it?" "I''ll, er... I''ll draw it away myself. That''s right. That should be good enough, right?" Light clasps his hands together and pleads to his partner. ''Definitely spending too much time with Noir,'' she thinks while considering his proposal. Light is extremely capable, more so than most, in fact, and if he''s willing to retreat she can''t really complain. "Fine. But if you fail, I will tell Master that the blame is solely yours." She says as they push their way through the overgrowth. Today marks the first time that anyone has set foot on Abi''s mountain since she became a Dungeon Core, evident by the hardly navigable jungle. Trees with bark as dark as Barry cluster together and offer little space for the Assassins to make progress. "Yes! That''s fine. That means the credit will be all mine too, right?" Shadow Stepping past an otherwise uncrossable patch of trees, Light bursts out into a cheesy grin. "No. That we will share." Appearing next to him, Dropper crushes his spirit with five little words. "What? Why? That''s not fair..." "Shh." She holds a finger up to her partner and he stops talking immediately. Light is always one for jokes, but Dropper knows she can count on him to be serious if and when needed. As they listen they can hear breathing coming from behind the next cluster of pitch-black trees. Without wasting any time they make their way through to the area that the Dragon has dug out for itself, only to find it sleeping. "Er, we gotta wake it up right?" "Of course we do. The problem is how should we go about it?" Dropper thinks for a second before Light offers a suggestion. "Shouldn''t we just shout out to it?" "Wouldn''t that be a little rude?" "Not as rude as going over and prodding it." "True, but what if..." before they can continue the Dragons eyes shoot open. Red irises lock on to the two Assassins who instantly start panicking as they haven''t discussed what they should say to the creature yet. Breathing out a breath of fire that melts the trees, the earth and everything else it touches, the Dragon leaps out of its burrow toward the two separating threats that have awoken it. "What do we do now?" Light shouts, disappearing into a shadow to avoid the Dragon''s tail swinging his way. Dropper appears next to him, Shadow Stepping herself out of the way of the monster''s incoming claws. "I don''t know. We should have planned this first." She responds without thinking. Dropper''s panic isn''t due to the monster spinning around and blowing flames. She''s panicking because she doesn''t want to disappoint her master. "Oi! Stop! We don''t want to fight you!" Her shouts don''t go unnoticed and instead give their position away. The Dragon stops breathing flames and turns to face them. It looks as though the monster possesses intelligence behind her eyes and for a split second, Dropper thought she got through to the creature. Until she unleashed a roar and charged at the pair aiming to bisect one with her claw and eat the other. The Dragon found neither though as they both sunk into the shadows beneath them and she crashed into the forest wall instead. "Can we retreat now? She''s not listening." Light asks from the opposite side of the clearing to the Dragon. "I suppose so. I doubt Master will be happy with this." Dropper lets out a sigh from next to her partner who starts jumping up and down on the spot from excitement. "Ok. One attack. Which one do I choose? Also if I killed the Dragon, then Master will be happy that it won''t destroy the town too. Right, Drop?" Another sigh and another "I suppose so." This book''s true home is on another platform. Check it out there for the real experience. The two begin their retreat with a Dragon in pursuit. Less than three hundred meters down the mountain and Light has decided which attack to go with. As they dodge the heavy foliage leaping over rocks and fallen trunks on their way, Light jumps into the air with a quick spin and releases the tier 4 skill Shadow Spear. The arrow of darkness pierces through the monster''s body and it crashes into the mountain floor with an unholy shriek. Subsequently, when the noise subsided the monster didn''t move again. "Well that solves that. We can just teleport back now. I can''t wait to tell Noir about this!" "Right... First we have to report to Master though." Dropper looks at the corpse of the Black Dragon as it slowly begins to sink into the mountain floor, absorbed by the dungeon. "Why was Master so worried about that Dragon I wonder?" With that, Light and Dropper teleport to the base of the mountain and return to Abi and Anya. Dungeon Stories Volume 3
After listening to my Assassins'' story, I didn''t know what to say. How did I forget that these two, good as they may be, were a constant source of frustration back in my beginning weeks. They are also to credit for the majority of my exp as well, but that still wasn''t without its frustrations. How? Just... how? It was a Dragon! The Defiler, fine. The Troll, ok. Even the Elf I can get behind. But how the hell did he fell a Dragon with one attack!? It shouldn''t be possible. Or so logic dictates. But then, when does that ever happen around here? Logic is a word that doesn''t even exist in the Varonian dictionary, apparently. The part about Dragons summoned by me causing calm to all who see them proves that fact hands down. Again, how? I stop debating the better qualities of what should and shouldn''t be possible as Anya, Light and Dropper are all staring in my direction, waiting for me to say something. "Er... Good work?" I mean the city is safe now, so yeah. Good work! "Anya, come here." Stupefied by my words, the Rainbow Mage puts up no resistance as I grab her hand and run down the closest alley. Out of sight I teleport us to my tower on top of the Academy for Dark Arts. I wonder if the name will become more rounded after an upgrade. I mean, we do teach more than just dark magic here after all. Flopping down next to the gang of cute and cuddlies, Anya is still looking at me as though she is waiting for a proper explanation. Which is fair enough. It''s not like she received the same notifications I do. "What they said is true. Light killed the Dragon and I absorbed it. I can summon Black Dragons now with the bonus effect that people who see them feel calm and peaceful." It''s funny watching my friend as her face cycles through many different emotions. Even though I kept it short and sweet, not a single piece of that information was easy to digest. Hell, it wasn''t even easy to say. "What do you mean by peaceful Dragons?" Is the first question she arrives at. "I''m not too sure to be honest. One sec..." Looking down on the masses, quite a few of them are still hyped up over what they thought was an inevitable death so I summon a Black Dragon to see how well they can manage the peace. Anya didn''t seem very happy at first to see the monster materialize above the tower. After a second though she didn''t appear frightened of the creature and had in fact calmed down quite fast. Wow. That was easy. Not only has my bestie relaxed significantly, but the noise from below has also quietened down. In fact it''s almost ceased completely and the only sounds I can hear now are a few "ohh''s" and "arr''s." Seriously! It''s a Dragon. How is that even possible? Anya hasn''t said a word yet as instead is still captivated by the would-be predator''s magnificent glory. Not that I can fault my friend for knowing beauty when she sees it. From close up, the Black Dragon is even more beautiful than I had imagined. Her scales glisten in the midday sun, dark black with a tint of red hidden inside. Only as I''m looking at her do I realise that she''s also looking back at me. Intelligence is clear in her eyes as she knows I''m the one who summoned her. ''Master,'' she communicates and bows her head to me. Definitely intelligent. No doubt about it. "Hi," I wave at the Dragon for some reason. Honestly, I don''t know what I was thinking. The look Anya is giving me makes me want to laugh though. "So, er..." obviously I didn''t think this through. Shit. "For now, you can make a nest, or a lair, anywhere you want on my mountain," I pointed to the multicolored spectacle behind her. "Sorry if that''s insensitive. I''m not sure what Dragons call their home, but you''re more than welcome to make one up there. Also, your job will be to patrol the sky. You will be the eyes in the sky protecting the dungeon and the city." ''Yes Master. I will do as you command.'' "You don''t need to be so formal. You''re part of the family now so don''t worry about it." ''In that case, may I make a request?'' "Sure." ''Can I transform so that I may match your own height. I feel slightly uncomfortable being above you like this.'' Transform? Like... into a cute and adorable little Dragon? Fuck yeah you can. In fact, I implore you to do so right now. I won''t take anything less. "Absolutely," I reply, cool as winter''s evening. ''Thank you, Master.'' The Black Dragon begins to glow before she starts to shrink. I can barely contain my excitement as Anya watches on in shocked silence. To my dismay, I don''t end up with a cute-little Dragon, but instead a gorgeous loli. She has black hair and bright red cheeks and is smiling more than Light when he came back from killing the source of her summoning material. What the hell? Where''s my adorable little Dragon that I can carry around in my arms? And why have I got what looks like a ten-year old girl instead? Why is fate so cruel? Noticing that I look rather down, Anya puts her hand on my shoulder. She still doesn''t seem to have anything to say and instead is staring at the small child now sitting on my futon playing with Dire Wolf. We watch as the Dragon loli rolls around on my futon, wrestling with stuffed animals as she does so. In a way it''s extremely adorable. Too cute in fact, if you can forget she''s a nation ending disaster underneath that bundle of gorgeousness. As I''m trying to process how crazy this whole situation is, our latest family member suddenly remembers where she is and her eyes lock into mine. "My Master. This one is ever so sorry. This form is... very hard to control, but I couldn''t bear to be above you. Also what is this?" Her eyes sparkle as she thrusts a white unicorn teddy in front of my arms. "It looks delicious!" Erm... Anya? Help? The rainbow mage is looking at me as though I have all the answers, which implies that she isn''t going to be of any help whatsoever and demonstrates that by waving her arms in an exaggerated manner. Thanks, Anya. Thanks. Well, I suppose a trip to Ali''s is on the menu. Wait... Were the townsfolk still watching when she transformed? There''s no way someone didn''t catch that happening. A closer inspection shows that everyone has calmed down and daily life has resumed throughout Varona. Huh? Peaceful Dragons, eh? I could get used to that. "Ok, you two. To Ali''s!" Chapter 76: A Long Day Having to make more stops than usual due to picking up two unexpected guests, Dum arrives back at the makeshift camp with dinner over his shoulder. Dee is stoking the fire and their guests take a seat on a felled trunk nearby. Their guests, Lord Edward Gorn and his first minister Herald Bent have barely said a word since they were rescued from death by dragon fire. Neither Assassin can blame the men. They are only men after all and regular ones at that. They could barely even see through the woods. Both their eyes widen when they see the boar dropped in front of the fire. "I take it you''re hungry?" Dee laughs as the Lord''s stomach grumbles hungrily at the sight of food. "D-Do not speak to my Lord in s-such a casual tone." Minister Herard tries to reprimand the fire-stoking Assassin as the other begins to cut into the Boar next to the open flame causing both humans to flinch. It''s not that easy to calm one''s nerves after almost dying and at the hands -or claws- of a Dragon. "It''s okay, Herald. Regrettably, it''s probably correct to assume that Gorn is no more. With it also goes my status and title. The one consolation is that the citizens were not caught up in this." Edward smiles somberly. "Gorn? I think I''ve heard of that place before, you know?" Dee looks at the Lord while trying to remember how he knows that name. "Isn''t that the place by the water?" Dum asks, and all three stare at him. "You saved us from Gorn. Remember?" The Lord informs the slow-thinking Assassin. "Yeah. It was the city the Dragon reduced to dust." Dee adds, knowing his partner has a better chance at remembering the Dragon than where they picked up the two men. "Oh! That one. That was Gorn, huh?" The tense of his sentence saddens Edward further as he knows there''s no chance of returning home. Even if there was, the King of Imperia wouldn''t stand for that. Once you became his enemy he wouldn''t stop until you were dead. Silence falls over the camp save for the crackling of the fire and the butchery of their dinner. Edward and Herard are still reeling over the loss of their home whereas Dum and Dee feel slightly awkward having extra traveling companions. This mission will mark the first time they''ve brought back people to the dungeon themselves. As they cook the meat over the open fire, both Assassins try to imagine what their master will say upon their return. Surely she will praise their efforts for saving the two men from their doom. Thoughts akin to that float around inside their heads until the food is ready. "Oh! Isn''t Gorn where all those refugees came from?" Dum exclaims as he hands a stupefied Edward a skewer. "Y-You know of my citizens? I mean... my people?" Written across his face is sheer disbelief. Dee lets out a laugh at his friend''s expense. "That''s the one. Yeah the citizens of Varona are all refugees from Gorn. I remember now. How did you remember that before me, though? That''s a first!" "Hey! I''m not dumb, you know!?" A few seconds pass as the Assassins stare at each blankly before they both burst out into laughter. "Varona? That was the name of the city that merchant was talking about, my Lord." Even for his age, Herald likes to believe his memory is his best asset. "That''s right, Herald." Not wanting to be rude, or to interrupt the two howling men, Edward Gorn waits desperately to find out what has become of his people. "Excuse me, but... is everyone safe? I mean, are they okay?" He asks the two men who have moved on from rolling around in laughter to wrestling in the dirt. Fortunately, the two now dirty Assassins heard him and stopped messing around. "Yeah. Everyone who came to Varona is. We can''t speak for those who went elsewhere." "Is that where you''re taking us? To Varona?" Herald asks. "Yes. We were on our way home anyway and saw the Dragon as we were passing by. You were really lucky, to be honest, and for more reasons than one." If you stumble upon this narrative on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen from Royal Road. Please report it. Dee''s words give the Lord pause. Luck really had been on their side, no doubt about it. If more people had remained behind with the Lord and Herald, would the two passing men have been able to save them also? A terrible thought but one that will never come to pass as history played out differently. The Dragon attack is now history. How long has it been since the last one was last recorded? 100 years? 200? Any records the Lord had on such information have surely gone up in flames, much like the rest of his city. Dum and Dee Saviours of the Lord
"That was delicious!" The Dragon child shouts from her seat. "Indoor voice, please." Anya reminds the catastrophe class monster hidden inside the child''s body. I don''t know when, but at some point, Anya started to take a real liking to the still unnamed Black Dragon. Who in turn has also taken a liking to her as well. "Okay, big sister Anya," she beams a bright smile back at my Rainbow Mage, her teeth still showing remnants of her dessert. "Seriously, child," Anya tuts, "we can see your food. Rinse your mouth out, please." "Okay." Following Anya''s instruction she swills some water round her mouth before swallowing down. I''m just sitting here, acting like an unneeded third wheel. How did this happen? Then again, how does anything happen around here? I made a decision. Still, the Dragon did exactly what it said in the description. My city has quietened down and you wouldn''t even think we had been on the subject of a dragon invasion less than two hours ago. The power of peace-inducing Dragons -or Dragon in this case- sure is something else. That said, what do I actually do about her now that she''s transformed into a person? It''s a bit cruel to make her go live on the mountain by herself. Should I summon more Dragons? No, not yet. I''ll summon more over the next few days as I keep pushing toward Tune. That way she won''t be lonely when she does go up there. But for now, I''ll wait. "Anya, you have a spare room at your place, right?" "What!? Yes, but..." Ready to refuse, as she knows what I''m about to suggest, Anya looks at the heart-melting smile on the small child next to her. "Never mind. It will not be a problem. What do you think about coming to live with Big Sister Anya, hmm?" "Oh. You can give her a name as well. It will be awkward if she stays without one." I said to Anya. "I was just thinking the same thing," she says to me before turning turning to the Dragon child. "Okay then, Lola. What do think about living with me?" "Lola!? Is that my name?" She asks, full of excitement and energy. To which my Rainbow Mage nods in response. "Oh, I love it. I love it. I love it. I love it. I love it. Thank you big sister Anya. And I definitely want to live with you instead of on the mountain where Master suggested." Anya stares at me as though I''m some type of evil villain. Hey! I said that before I knew she could transform into a human. Even though most of my monsters end up that way. But still! Harsh. "It will be lonely up there all by myself. I don''t mind if Master orders it, but I''d much rather live with you instead." Anya''s brows furrow at that and her gaze intensifies. Seriously! I didn''t mean it! "I was going to summon more Dragons in a few days..." I trail off knowing when to stop with Rainbow Mage. Yep. Shouldn''t have said anything. With a quick "Good luck," to Anya and Lola, I throw a bright smile to Ali as I dash out of the door away from another one of my problems. I know I said I wasn''t going to skirt around them anymore, but Anya''s a confident and clever woman. She can handle Lola. It''s not like our latest family member comes baring any ill will toward the dungeon. With the Dragon delegated to my bestie and a full stomach after just having a late dinner at Ali''s, I head back to my tower. The evening sun is setting over Varona and all I can think is ''what a day!'' It''s a good thing I kept that 10,000DP back from today¡¯s land acquisitions. We wouldn''t have been able to start populating the forest with monsters otherwise. Well, we could have started tomorrow, but who knows what problems might creep up out of nowhere. There''s always something. I still can''t believe Light killed a Dragon with a single attack. Wait a minute! What level is he? Pulling up the dungeon menu and searching for their names, which takes a lot longer now that there are so many Assassins in their group, I see that not only Light has also reached Level 100, but so has Dropper. Even though she didn''t play a part in the killing, unless one of them is being untruthful -which I highly doubt- then she earned experience just for being with her party member. What''s strange is neither one of them had the usual I''m-ready-to-rank-up glow. So far, every 20 levels a new tier has unlocked, so why hasn''t it now? Is it because they''re level 100? After further navigating the menu to no joy, I''m about to give up when my world turns dark. Which is extremely unsettling because I didn''t turn out the lights. My temporary blindness lasts for the briefest of moments before I find myself sitting on a leather chair in a plain, white room. The floor, ceiling and walls are all the same colour and across from me is a man sitting on a chair identical to mine. I''m not sure why, but my heart is beating so fast I''m scared it''s going to jump out of my chest. I''m not sure how I got here or how I''m supposed to go about leaving, but that''s not what''s frightening me. No. Without a doubt, the one causing my palms to sweat for the first time since acquiring a body is the man sitting across from me. He has sandy-colored short hair, and bright, blue eyes. Wearing a strange bath robe, the design of which is something I''ve never seen before, his legs are crossed and he has his arms folded inside the sleeves. Oh, and he''s staring directly at me. What the fuck is going on here? Who''s this guy and why aren''t I in my tower? Where are my futon and my cuddlies? "So..." One word captivates my attention and compels me to listen. "... I hear you have been calling me a Lazy God?" Oh Shit. It was bound to come and bite me in the ass at some point, right? Chapter 77: The Lazy God Every fibre of what I consider to be really strong body is calling out in panic. The every-day-Bob before me doesn''t look like much, but my instincts are kicking at me like a donkey. They''re screaming that the bum sitting across from me is a serious threat. One wrong word and I could be done for here. Aren''t I the worst person to be in this situation? Why didn''t he take Me instead? That would have been so much better. He''s always got something useful to say. Shit! He''s still staring at me and I haven''t said a word since he asked the obviously rhetorical question. I mean, he has to know the answer. Why else would he summon me here and ask? Does he even want me to answer it? Where are Light and Dropper when I need them!? "In my defense... I didn''t know you were real," my answer is that weak, I feel ashamed to have even said it. Everyone knows there are gods out there. This one, however, his gaze doesn''t falter and it feels as though he''s drilling away at my soul with those piercing, blue eyes of his. Please don''t do that. I''ve only got this one and I don''t know how fragile it is after going from human to Dungeon Core. Plus, it''s kinda your fault in the first place that I''m this way. "Real or not, you think you can mock me?" The weight of his presence doubles and I feel the full force of it bearing down on me. It''s like gravity had just quadrupled, but it''s only centered on me. The guy in the khakis looks fine. "I... Didn''t mean to... Call you lazy. I just... Well, you did kind of leave The System running without any supervision though, right?" If I though it was heavy before, it means I still aren''t taking him seriously enough. Even hough I''m shaking. The fact that gravity got even heavier after my last comment as the self-professed God stood in front of me, glaring at me with the full force of his rage was enough. Shit! I''m going to die here. This guy''s not just a little bit annoyed about what I said. He took it as a full-force insult and challenge to his honour! What the fuck? Dude, it was just an off-handed comment by your friendly neighborhood Dungeon Core. Please don''t kill me over it! "I''m sorry! I really didn''t mean to say that about your... Majestic godliness... Or, something like that?" My eyes dart to the floor as my mind processes what my mouth said. Yes. That was good. It was an actual apology, wasn''t it? That''s got to be some points in my favor. It got a little sketchy at the end, but it''s all good. I''m on track. "Something like that!" Are the only words he seemed to have hung in and he bellows them back at me. Or not. Come on, dude. Don''t be like that. What about the beautiful apology before that part? I even threw in a compliment for free, you know? Have you seen those shorts that you''re wearing? Did you seriously think, I''ll look good in these. Ha. And what about that bath robe? I mean, a bath robe and shorts? What look are you actually going for? I could have said so much worse, but I handled it quite well and my apology was pretty spot on. "You continue to mock me, child. And to think I was going to let you off with a mere thousand years of service." "Like fuck! Saying shit like that isn''t going to make me grovel for forgiveness, you prick!" Not that I''d say that to his face. "How dare you speak to me like that! I will send your soul to the furthest depths of the universe to sit in penance for the next millennia!" Oops. This is not going my way. I''m shaking uncontrollably and sweating profusely. Pretty sure I might have pissed myself a second ago too, but I''m too scared to check. Why did I have to go and say that out loud? I don''t wanna rot in the universe. Although now that I think about it, isn''t his punishment kind of lazy too? Sending me off somewhere for a predetermined amount of time where he doesn''t have to deal with me. Yeah, that''s lazy as fuck. What is it with this guy? Or God? "Doesn''t that kind of prove my point? About being lazy and what not. Sending me off so that you don''t have to deal with me? Either way, since I''m here, can''t you just give me some good ideas or kiss-ass powers or something? You could send me back down better than ever, couldn''t you?" "I could, but I won''t be doing that." A ball of darkness appears at the tip of his finger. It''s small, but the power coming from it is strong. "But it would help you, wouldn''t it? Having me do all your dungeon work for you." I wait in silence as he considers my proposal. His magic slowly fizzling out. "Do not try to trick me, mortal. The System I set in place will function until the end of time if left undisturbed. Why do I need you to do it for me when I have that, and when I would much rather punish you." What is it with wanting to punish me? I didn''t even do anything wrong. Calling someone lazy is not a crime, douchebag. "I can manage The System for you, just in case anything ever goes wrong again. Surely you know it''s been experiencing some problems lately. My V.A.U.N.S says they''re bugs. But, I can do that all that free of charge as well as helping the humans advance." "Hmm." The Lazy God sits down. Clearly debating the pros and cons of never having to check his System again. His spell has gone, gravity''s returned to normal and I''m no longer shitting my knickers. This story is posted elsewhere by the author. Help them out by reading the authentic version. I''ve got him here. Abi The Invincible isn''t going to die today. Just a little bit more. One final push. "That way you can go do whatever you want without having to worry about any of the tedious problems here. Why don''t you go put your feet up, sleep for a millennia and just do nothing like you wanna." The pressure that had been slowly subsiding slams back down on me once again like a tidal wave. Pinned in my seat, I can only watch as the Lazy God''s face contorts in outrage. "That''s just another way of calling me lazy!" "Well... I wasn''t actually going to say it." Also it''s a bit hypocritical when he actually wants nothing to do with The System. If he did, why abandon it in the first place? "I am everything here, and you dare to disrespect me like that again?! My Divine Presence will show you the meaning of the word pain!" Oddly enough, I only actually heard two words in that sentence. Similar to how he heard what he wanted, so do I and the fear that was squeezing me is slowly released. Divine Presence? Is that like my own Divinity''s Presence perhaps? As he raises a hand toward me, I too do the same. It causes him to fluster slightly, but he doesn''t stop. At the moment a white light is fired from his hand, a black one shoots from the palm of my own. Going to be honest, I''ve got no fucking idea what''s going on right now. I''m just winging it and trying not to die. The two forces of energy clash against each other and the Lazy God cackles like an evil magician who''s just discovered a new life-draining spell. Who would have known that Gods were so screwed up? This guy would definitely be on The Syndicate''s list if he was on Tironia. The Lazy God''s laugh soon fades away as his power starts to diminish and my beam begins to envelop his own. His face pales as my presence overwhelms his and my darkness eventually engulfs his body. Huh? That was actually quite easy. What is it with everything being supet easy recently? Then again, my Divinity''s Presence is Maxed and I''m certainly not complaining. If anything, it was his own fault for being a gigantic dickhead. Before I can think any further, the Aura surrounding the lazy god explodes. The white floor was already scorched black, but as he bursts out of it the whole place looks like a mess. Emerging from the he''s panting and looks even angrier than he did before. "Hey! I didn''t start this fight. In fact, I didn''t even know that it was a fight until that beam-thingy shot out of my hand. So stop. Now!" I yell at him. He screams at me ferociously. A telltale sign that he is indeed not going to stop and is in fact intent on taking it up a level. Which isn''t fair in my opinion. I''m already severely outclassed here after all. He is a literal God and I am... me. Another feeling begins welling up inside me. One of confidence. At first I''m slightly confused about where it''s coming from as I''m pretty sure I''m not the one emitting it. I then remember that I''m connected to my family through the bond we share through the dungeon. The one thing that lets me know who''s returned and when. My will. This time though, instead of a warm ''we''re home'', it''s a fervent ''fight!'', and it''s not just coming from one or two, but from everyone. Everyone connected to me through our bond is urging me to do my best and not die. One in particular is just screaming ''Master!'' but he can wait until I''m back to talk about the etiquette of communication during battle. Bloody loudmouth. That said, another voice is offering something different, something new and something I''m hoping can help us get out of this terrifying situation. Latching on to the cord of Light''s will, I summon my Assassin straight into the realm of the gods. That instantly put lazy on the back foot as he wasn''t expecting anyone else to show up unannounced in his domain. "How did you do that!? My Divine Presence is Level 4 and my Domain is Level 3. Who''s helping you?" He screams at me while frothing at the mouth. It''s not a nice sight, especially not on a God. "Light." On my command the level 100 Assassin moves faster than any person has the right to do so and closes the gap between himself and the God in the blink of an eye. Light''s hand is covered in darkness, as black as the beam that fired from my own hand moments ago, and he thrusts it directly into the Lazy God''s chest. Unable to comprehend what has just happened, the God coughs up yellow blood and looks down at the wound. Inflicted before he could even react. "H-How..." is the only word he says as Light removes his hand from his chest. In it is the God''s heart. That was the last thing the Lazy God saw before his eyes turned cloudy and he hit the floor, painting it yellow. Why''s his blood yellow? Is it because he''s a God? Some reptiles have green blood and certain monsters bleed blue. I suppose it doesn''t really matter now. "Light! That was amazing. When did you get that skill?" "Just after killing the dragon... I-I mean... After ''accidentally'' killing the Dragon." Saying it like that doesn''t help your case, buddy. I''m your master, remember? I sigh. "Never mind. All''s well that ends well, especially since my life didn''t end today. Abi The Unkillable gets to live another day." As I''m celebrating, the white room starts to vibrate before it shatters. A never ending darkness is revealed to be behind and yet, it doesn''t scare me. Like the void in my overview, the space welcomes me. Closing my eyes, I let the darkness envelop both myself and Light. Wrapping around and caressing us, I close my eyes and picture the location I want to be. When they open again, I find myself back in the tower above the Academy of Dark Arts. Light is standing next to me smiling jovially. He must be proud as punch after taking down not only a dragon, but a God in the same day. Also the faint glow of evolution that was missing upon reaching level 100 is now clung to his body as it has done so many times before. Only this time, it''s yellow instead of the familiar blue. First things first though... "Don''t tell anyone about what happened today. Got it?"... I''ve got to lay down the law. I don''t need a big song and dance about what happened up there in the far reaches of wherever and the last thing I want is Noir pestering me for a shot at taking on a God. Although, he probably already knows because of the whole connection thing. Bugger. If anything we were lucky that it was the lazy System''s creator that came after us. I can''t imagine how differently it would have gone if any other Gods had decided to intervene. It''s also a good job that The System can continue functioning without him. Hopefully, there won''t be anyone up there that will miss him and nothing else will come out of this. That will smooth things over nicely.
Super Important Message: You have defeated the physical embodiment of the Lazy God and have acquired his domain as a result A new skill has been obtained: Divinities'' Domain Level 3 Congratulations, Abi Or should I say, Master
"Gods damn it, System!" Oops. Better refrain from damning any one for the foreseeable future. Lest any of the gods try to drag me away again. I''m a good Dungeon Core. I swear. Wait a minute. Was he actually called The Lazy God? Or did you just name him that because it''s what I was calling him? Really? Still no response? You would think after calling me Master she might reply now, but that''s still a fat no. You don''t know how hard I''m refraining from cursing at you at the minute. "Light, well done. Go relax because I''m going to sleep. Everything else can wait until tomorrow." "Yes, Master." Light drops into the shadows below and my head hits the pillow the second he''s gone. Gods-damn Dungeon Core problems. Where have my easy days gone? Chapter 78: The System After a few days of travel, Dum and Dee make it home with their new traveling companions. The ex-Lord of Gorn can scarcely believe his eyes as he and first minister Herald enter the mountain town of Varona. Not only is the city''s infrastructure on par with that of what his own used to boast, as the Assassins said it would be, but also that everyone around him seems to be possessed by an unbridled happiness. ''Are they all being brainwashed or is life really that good here?'' he wonders. Again, Dum and Dee had explained how well off everyone was in Varona, but Edward Gorn had been reluctant to believe it. "Life''s pretty damn good here. I''m sure you''ll be able to settle in soon. Plus, it''s better here than as dragon food, right?" One of their guides, Tweedledum, seems to know no decorum, but Edward has become accustomed to his bluntness. Their other guide, Tweedledee , had disappeared shortly after they arrived. "Do you have to talk to my Lord in such a vulgar manner? Has he not already been through enough?" Minister Herald on the other hand is having none of it and has been against it their entire journey. "It''s fine, Herald. After all, I am no longer the Lord of Gorn." Feeling somber, Edward returns his gaze to the smiles of the passing citizens. Whenever he was down, their high spirits always served to cheer him up again and even though they were no longer in Gorn, it still seemed to work regardless of location. He was a people person after all. "I''m just relieved to see everything is as you described it to be. If not more so than even I would have expected. Would it be possible to arrange a meeting with the local Lord so that I can thank them for what they''ve done for my people?" Little does Edward know that it is indeed a Dungeon Core running the shots in Varona and not just some local Lord. "Dee has already gone to give a report to our Master. It is more than likely that she will agree to a meeting. Unless she''s too busy that is. She probably will be though and if that''s the case, then we will go to see the city council instead. Mayor Kana and Deputy Mayor Sacha will probably be able to answer any questions you have for our master." Dee returns shaking his head so the Assassins decide to take the two men to the council''s building and leave it at that. After all, escorting high profile targets was not part of their original mission. Dum and Dee The Lord''s Arrival
Dragons, Gods and a large manner of other nightmarish oddities visit my dreams that night. That God though. What was his problem? Did he really come to punish me for nothing more than calling him lazy? Seriously. If he was that committed, then why not put a little more effort into the actual Dungeon System? Not that I''m an expert on such matters and in fact, would probably be the worst person to be left in charge of such a crucial piece of what makes up the fabric of the world. Oh well, it''s not like it matters now thankfully. I was a little scared after what I read, but she has been a little jokey recently. Haha. Good one, Sys. My dream eventually settles on a bridge overlooking a river with a country backdrop for its locale, and in it, I''m apparently having afternoon tea with a young lady I don''t know. Dreams are funny that way. One minute it''s Dragons and Gods, the next you''re at a tea party on a bridge. The tea is absolutely amazing, but then again why wouldn''t it be? It is my dream after all. "Is it to your satisfaction?" The young lady asks. Her irises are a deep purple and extremely alluring. Long hair that match the colour of her eyes, flows down her back so perfectly that not a single strand looks out of place. She''s also wearing a beautiful, black dress with frills at the bottom only seen on the likes of nobility. But when in a dream, why not, right? "It''s perfect, thank you." I look out across the fields and feel as though I''ve seen them before somewhere. But they are just fields after all. They''re common place all over Tironia so it''s silly to think I can distinguish one from the other. Taking another sip, it''s only then do I realise that I do know this woman. But I also don''t. It''s very frustrating and I can''t help but eye her up and down as I frown. It bothers me so much that I eventually just ask. This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work. "Who are you?" "I thought you knew?" Her little act and giggle might earn her a few points on the cuteness scale, but my frustration radar is going off like there''s no tomorrow. Let''s not turn this into a nightmare please. "Please just tell me. It''s been a very long day and I didn''t expect it to continue into my dream as well." It''s in times like these that I love having a body again. I can slump my head in my hands and sigh to my heart''s content. "Of course, Master. I am the System." I can also slump my shoulders in defeat. Of course she is. Why wouldn''t she be? Why would I expect her to be anyone else? Tomorrow, Tironia herself will probably want me to pop round for a nice chat and a brisk brunch. "Why can''t I just sleep peacefully? You could have saved this visit for tomorrow, you know? After I had rested from nearly dying of unnatural causes caused by unnatural beings!" "I''m sorry, Master. I thought it best to be swift since I don''t know how long it will take for the Lazy God to reform his physical body, amass an army and attack you again." There was so much I didn''t want to hear contained in that one sentence that I don''t even know how to process it." Why would you tell me that?" "So that you can hurry and take ownership of me!" She urges me physical, aswell as with words, as a prompt pops up directly infront of my face making me flinch back. What!? What the fuck? What is up with today? How did it go from just another normal day in the dungeon to... To... To this!? "I don''t want it. Sounds like too much responsibility and I''ve already got enough on my plate. Give it to some other sucker, thanks." Easy. Problem solved. I just passed the buck on the God-level job as though it was nothing like a boss. Mission successful. Abi has reached Max Level in delegating. If only. "I cannot pass on control to anyone other than the one who defeated the God that created me." I should have known it wouldn''t be that easy. In that case, try this one. "It was Light who beat the God. Doesn''t that mean he''s your master now?" The anticipation must show on my face because she only shakes her head. "No. You created the one who defeated his avatar so the responsibility falls on your shoulders." Damn... What about this one then? "In that case, I give you permission to govern yourself and do whatever you see fit." Haha. Truly, I am a master at skirting responsibility. Abi The Evasive dodges another arrow. "I am sorry, Master, but I am unable to govern myself. When the Lazy God revives his physical body, he will be able to take control of my functions to erase you from Tironia." What! Why the hell wouldn''t you open with that one? Hell yeah, I''ll take control of you if it means that I don''t get erased. Start with that next time. Damn. "Fine. Give me control. This better not mean a shitload of extra work though. I mean, you have been running yourself basically for the last however many... Centuries now, right?" "Yes, Master. You need to do nothing but control me..." Don''t say it like that, please. "That way the Lazy God cannot overwrite your own Divinity." She bows as though it''s nothing, but every word that comes out of her mouth seems super important. My own Divinity? "Wait a minute. Is that why you gave me Divinity''s Presence? So I could fight that damn God?" Frustrated is the word for how I''m feeling. "Partially. It also looked like you might kill yourself otherwise, so I... Took a chance." I open my mouth to refute her, but I''ve got nothing. Is there a chance that could have happened? There probably was. There was definitely more than one occasion where Me brought my death up. In fact, there were that many it''s hard to think of a time where he wasn''t making me think the worst. That little punk. He didn''t make it easy on me to say he''s a subsystem. "Even with your attitude and all that cursing, I know you''re pure at heart Abi. Even if you do drive me crazy." Aww. I feel slightly bad for slagging you off all those times now, System. That was a nice compliment and I''m pretty sure my cheeks just flushed. What a total babe and I don''t just mean your looks. How sweet. "So, shall we go?" What? We? Isn''t this a dream? "I can tell by the look on your face that you''re not sure what''s going on. Please, let me explain. Now that you have taken ownership of me, I will be accompanying you back to the mortal realm." Eh? "If I''m left here alone, what''s to stop the Lazy God from coming back and overwriting my program, thus erasing your ownership and afterwards your existence." I''m pretty sure I''ve just been played here. With my life used as the bargaining chip, what else can I do? She played me well. "Fine, but isn''t this a dream?" "Yes. It seemed the most convenient way to converse with you." "So... I could wake up and none of this was real?" "No. I will be there when you awaken. In fact, I was there the moment you said fine." She definitely doesn''t look like she''s joking, but I have to at least ask. "Do I at least get to enjoy the rest of my dream now then?" I reach for my cup, until it disappears along with the table. "Unfortunately not, Master. It is now time to wake up." What? I''ve been asleep for 20 minutes max! There''s no way it''s time to wake up yet. Before I have a chance to voice my opinion on the matter, you know, seeing as how I am her Master and all, my eyes open and I sit up fully awake. In front of me is the same woman, in the same dress holding the same cup of tea, sitting beside me on my futon. Why does she look vaguely like a witch? And where''s my cup of delicious tea? She stares at my cuddlies in delight and I instantly get the urge to kick her off my tower. I mean, I don''t think she would die, seeing how she''s a being designed to create, monitor and reward the dungeon functionality, but they''re my damn cuddlies! "Stop! I only tolerated the loli because she''s actually a Dragon in disguise and is somewhat cute herself. The cuddlies are not something I''m willing to compromise on. I''m happy to make you your own, but these ones are mine. Mine!" That said, why have I now found myself in another one of those situations? Seriously! Who can I palm this one off on? There''s no one, right? And what''s Me going to say when he finds out that I''m now his creator''s Master and that said creator is actually a she like I damn well said in the beginning? There''s going to be smugness on my part, that''s for sure. Chapter 79: My Life So Far Opening my eyes, life feels like a dream. It has been a few days since everything changed. Things went from real to surreal in the span of a single day and I''m still struggling to wrap my head around the recent chain of events that I call life. The Dragon''s sudden arrival, which was followed by its equally swift and unplanned - on my part at least - death, had the potential to throw me off my game all on its own. If that would have been my only problem, then I might have managed to overcome my state of denial sooner. As it stands, the now many Dragons flying casually around the beautiful mountain on which they live, reminds me every morning that I''m not dreaming and that the shit actually happened. After seeing that their description wasn''t just some bullshit made up by the program-turned-woman laying next to me, I was talked into purchasing more so that we could make Varona even more peaceful than it already was. That wasn''t too bad. Then Anya of all people talked me into grabbing the next tier. That means I now own 10 Black Dragons as well as 9 Oblivion Dragons. I had to hold off on the tenth though, lest I was talked into purchasing the third set too. Dragons, or at least my Dragons anyway, are the most calming beings in existence when they''re circling my mountain. It really is a sight to behold. One I wouldn''t have a bad word to say about. That is, until they take human form and start playing childish games around Varona. For some reason they don''t listen to my commands when they transform and always end up wreaking havoc through the city. Not to the extent where buildings are on fire, but the type of havoc that can only be wrought by children. Accidentally breaking glasses, spilling food, etc. Ignoring those problem, because that''s how this Dungeon Core rolls, I turn my head to the side and lock eyes with another problem. The woman laying next to me. For some reason, she hasn''t left my side since she arrived. She''s there when I eat, she''s there when I sleep, hell, she''s there when I... ok, I don''t technically need to do the last one I was about to mention, but I''m damn well sure she''d follow me then too. She doesn''t need to sleep and neither do I, but the action itself makes me feel more human. I enjoy it. Or at least I did. It doesn''t help waking up next to someone staring at you and invading your personal space, though. Especially when they wormed their way into your life through wily words. "I thought I told you to face the other way? It''s creepy as fuck waking up like this, you know?" I explain for the fourth time. "I do not. Also, why do you perform that action? If anything, all you are achieving is a 33% percent reduction in your efficiency." The fact that she''s like Me, only ten times worse, is also starting to grate on my nerves. Speaking of Me, he was quite shocked to say the least to see the arrival of his own creator in our growing city. All the other members of my family took it as expected, like it was only natural that she''d end up living here. At this point, I wouldn''t even be surprised if someone told me that I already have Gods living in my town. As long as it wasn''t the Lazy God or anyone like that, what difference would it make. I''d happily welcome the Goddess of Sunshine and Rainbows any day and the Goddess of Beauty has got to be doing a number on me already, right? My futon rustles behind me not once, not twice, but three times. A few days ago that would have disturbed me in a different way than it does now, and I let out a sigh. Without giving The System a response I roll back over and am met by the faces of three young girls. They''re not real girls, evident by the two small horns that each one has sticking out just above their temples. They''re the Oblivion Dragons. "What are we doing today?" The first invader to speak has dark purple hair and violet irises. She''s also wearing a short, blue dress, stripped black and grey pants paired with black boots. "What are we going to play today, Abi?" Before I can answer her, however, I''m assaulted by another quick-fire question. This time, it''s from the blonde with golden eyes. The white summer dress she wears looks like a miniature version of the one Dropper jad when she was still a Shadow Walker and goes well with her yellow sandals. Cute. I don''t even bother to try and answer her question, as by now I know what''s coming next. "What''s for breakfast, Master?" The redhead on the left, whose amber eyes match what''s on top, has obviously been spending too much time with Noir over the last few days. I''m going to have to send him out on a mission soon, I sigh. The hungry Dragon is wearing Assassin clothing that somehow fits her perfectly, and I can only assume where she got it from. Did you know this story is from Royal Road? Read the official version for free and support the author. As mischievous as they can be, Gods these dragons are cute. "Good morning to you too Violet, Blondie, Amber." I smile at the girls before The System thrusts her own face in mine and turns pouting to the max. Her hair is still as neat as ever, even after her quick movement, and her purple eyes gleam in anticipation. How does she even do that? I slump my shoulders and shake my head. It doesn''t anger me. If anything it makes me laugh watching her act like one of the children just for a little attention. Even if she is actually a dungeon-making machine. "Good morning to you too, Sis," I smile at her and she beams in delight. This always seems to placate her as she likes to be involved with whatever is happening. I''m sure a millenia or more spent alone will do that to a person. Not that she''s a person, but sometimes you can forget that fact quite easily with the way she acts. "Come on, then. Who''s hungry? I know I am." Three small arms dash into the air and start waving about. "Me, me, me!" they shout in anticipation as a forth joins the group. "Me," Sis can''t help it and flushes red. Seriously, how does she look so cute? Whatever, breakfast time it is. Teleporting to the street, we make our way to Ali''s. Other than the fact that I''m now accompanied everywhere I go by the Dragon triplets and Sis, I still can''t get over the fact that the Lazy God actually summoned me to some astral plane where he decided he was going to end my life because of a few off-handed comments. What a shitty God. Still, what''s even more unbelievable is the fact that my Divinity''s Presence out matched his own by miles. Ok, maybe not miles and Light played a huge part too, but I fucking won against a God. I''m sure Abi the Exaggerator is allowed to run wild with that story. I even ended up stealing his own skill, Divinity''s Domain, and it came at a plump Level 3. Not that I''ve had a chance to try it out yet. I''m a badass Dungeon Core these days. Although I probably owe more than I care to admit to the Bale of Fortune. I''d be damned if that feature hadn''t finally pulled through and upgraded. The wish that the Lord of the Bale granted me was to max my Divinity''s Presence and I didn''t really expect that to happen when I asked for it. Plus, I only thought it was useful for unlimited upgrades. Who would have thought a God would pick a fight with me and my Presence would beat his? Does he not know I''m Abi the God Slayer? Oh. I like that one. That''s a keeper. Furrowing my brows as we walked down the road, I turned my attention back to the problem at hand. "I like it. I''ve been doing it for seventeen years and I''m not going to stop now." I said, replying back to Sis'' earlier question about sleep. "But if you worked through the night you would see a 33% rise in efficiency," Sis chirps. She gives me this speech at least three times a day. After I wake up, when I''m eating and before I go to sleep, sometimes she even pipes up when I decide to relax. I don''t see what the problem is, though. I can blaze through points and hit rock bottom just by purchasing land quite easily. I''m going to have to find a way to chill her out. Eventually we reach Ali''s. "Master, we have arrived!" "What shall I eat today? "Breakfast time!" For some reason, not that I mind or even ever asked for it, only the redhead Amber seems to call me Master. Again, it''s something I can only attribute to her spending prolonged periods of time around Noir. She even shouts like my boisterous Assassin. I can only smile as we enter Ali''s and take our seats. Breakfast is piled high and the Dragon Girls demolish it in no time flat. During our meal, we hear a crash coming from inside the kitchen before an explosion of flour bursts from the door. Shortly followed by a small girl, covered in flour herself, who dashes out and jumps over the counter. Our eyes meet and I can''t say that I look impressed, but the girl gives me a mischievous grin and barrels out of Ali''s before I can say anything. "These Dragons may be peaceful, but they get into everything. Isn''t there any way to calm them down, Sis?" She cranes her head and not a single strand of hair moves. It remains perfect and frustrates me immensely. I wish my hair had that feature. Maybe that''s what I should have wished for; perfect hair. Sadly, if I had done that, then I''d be dead already. "The next tier of evolution should be able to keep the juniors in line," she remarks offhandedly before taking a sip of her tea. I suppose that would make sense, I just... Don''t like the sound of it. I was holding off on the third-tier dragons for a reason. What if I can''t control them either? Or what if they don''t inspire peace like the others do? I knew nothing and still know nothing other than what Sis tells me. Even my descriptions are thought up by her, though they originate from me. It''s so confusing as hell. It''s like she know that I know, even though I don''t actually know? I don''t know. I''m supposed to be working my way towards Tune right now, but instead I''ve spent the last few days chasing Dragon children around Varona while Sis chases after me. I haven''t even gotten around to Light''s evolution yet. Not that he hasn''t already rubbed it in Noir''s face. Nor have I managed to find the time to test out Divinity''s Domain. With my backlog growing larger by the day, I''ll have to take the plunge and hope for the best. It usually works out. That said, I summon my tenth Oblivion Dragon and am not impressed with the notification I receive, nor am I happy with Sis'' cheesy smile.
A new Monster has been unlocked: Dragon of Rebellion
Chapter 80: System Employment The Dragon of Rebellion is a perpetual teenager. She''s moody, argumentative and doesn''t want to listen to a single word I say. Fortunately, she can''t actually ignore me if I give her a serious command, but anything else I ask her to do she just rolls her eyes at me. Even when she does listen to me, Becca acts out every chance she can get. Rebecca, Dragon of Rebellion, thorn in my side. Even though I summoned her to look after the other Dragons, she was vehemently against the idea. There''s just something about Dragons that makes them extremely annoying. I would probably take her seriously if not for the fact that she''s a gods damn Dragon too. "Becca, get off my futon. I''ll make you your own," I beg as she grips my bed tighter. "Don''t want to. I like this one," she answers matter of factly, rolling around in delight and winding me up even more. This is Sis'' fault, I sigh. The sentient dungeon creator said I would be able to solve my mischievous Dragon problem if I unlocked and summoned the third tier in their group. She said they would look after each other. She said it would be fine. So why did it go so wrong? Isn''t Sis supposed to know the System better than anyone? I mean, it is her after all. How can she not know herself? If she''s going to be staying here then she''s going to have to start contributing somehow, just like everyone else does. I have the perfect position available, too. It''s a relatively new vacancy, but one that I''m sure she will take on and excel in. If not, at least I''ll get a slight reprieve and potentially have a good laugh. "Sis. I have a job for you." I just come straight out with it as I''m so vexed at Becca abusing my futon that I can''t even be bothered to sugarcoat. "Oh. Finally, I was wondering when I would get my own space to work in. Do I also get my own tower?" As happy as I am that she actually wants to contribute... A tower? Really? Even Becca is throwing a puzzled look Sis'' way as her request was strange to say the least. "Why do you want a tower? Why not a house like the others? They''re warmer, for one." Curiosity has caught me with its sharp hook and I can''t help but want to know why. Out of everything she could have asked for, why that? "I am not like the others," she answers simply. Leaving me a little let down and wanting more -until I get my just desserts that is. "I am more like you." No you''re not, you crazy bitch. You''re a sly, sneaky, manipulative, sarcastic, job-dodging... Shit. "Your job is daycare," I tell her dismissively, feeling annoyed that she compared herself to me. I look off at the mountain and take sly peeps to watch her face drop. Ha. That''s what you get. You deserved that one for lying about the Dragons. "W-What type of daycare?" I can already see the tears in her eyes, even though she can''t actually cry and I''m not even looking at her. It''s just fun to imagine, though. Who knows, she might even use magic to make herself cry when she hears this next part. "Dragon Daycare!" I exclaim triumphantly. If anyone is to blame for the source of my current headaches, it''s this chick. Peaceful Dragons. Question Marks. Sarcastic notifications! Oh my Core. It''s finally payback time. "You are now and forever in charge of taking care of the current and future generations of Dragons until I decree otherwise."
A new feature has been unlocked: Dragons'' Daycare
"No!" Sis'' screams are like music to my ears. I don''t even feel guilty about it. I''d like to even say I knew that notification would appear, but I didn''t. Still, that won''t stop me from smug as fuck. "You told me to get another Dragon. You said the next evolution would look after the previous tiers. You didn''t let The Hay Bale upgrade until, like, forever." I vent the frustrations in my mind. "What? What''s that got to do with anything?" She asks, looking puzzled. Which is about damn time because that''s how I''ve felt every-damn day since I reincarnated as a Dungeon Core. "Everything!" I yell. The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. I need to calm down. I don''t even know where that bout of anger came from. I was just letting out a few pent-up frustrations from the past, but I certainly didn''t need to release it at Sis the way I did. Well, she did deserve what I said, but there was no reason to have shouted at her. Damn. I feel bad now. "Sorry. I didn''t mean to shout. It''s just... Sometimes you can be a little... Infuriating?" Apologizing is not where I shine. I should have just stopped after I said sorry. "So I don''t have to look after the Dragons?" Sis attempts to puppy dog her way out of responsibility by looking sadder than she has the right to be. How does she do that? "Yeah, no. You''re still doing that," I smile. I can''t help it. It makes me happy. Payback is a bitch and this bitch is loving it. "But, why? I don''t want to look after the Dragons. They''re... they''re... they''re..." "Don''t say it," I warn her. Pretty sure what she''s about to say. "Childish! I don''t wanna." With a little ''hmph'' at the end, Sis flops down onto my futon next to Becca. The System''s faults stem from the Lazy God himself being half-assed when he created her making it harder to directly blame her. Not that I''m not frustrated that there are now two uncontrollable women flapping around on my futon. I would have done a much better job than he did. He probably applied the least amount of effort he had to hence why Sis is so... Buggy. Doesn''t she realise how childish she''s being right now? Yeah, yeah. I''m no better, but at least I''m trying. With a snap of my fingers my new feature is built. Surprisingly, it''s the first feature to be placed on the actual mountain itself. I didn''t actually know it was going to end up there as I was trying to place it inside the city seeing as how that''s where the Dragons play their shenanigans. Still, I''m not going to complain. I am trying to make a point as it is. "Becca, come on. We''re going," I tell the Rebellion Dragon still lounging around on my futon. "No. I don''t want to. I''ll stay here, forever" she answers without even looking at me. This only annoys me more and I turn my attention back to Sis. "If you do a good job, we''ll talk about that tower you want. I''ll even throw in some cuddlies as a bonus." At the mention of a tower, Sis perks up immediately and begins nodding profusely. "I''ll do it. I''ll take care of the Dragons. Also, I want my tower to be bigger than yours," she declares as though we''re bargaining. Seriously, how does Sis not realise that she''s just as childish as the Dragons? "No." I shoot her down without thinking it over. Okay, that might have been a little bit childish on my part, but who''s the Master here? I should have the tallest tower, right? "Aww," Sis pouts, but doesn''t complain any further. Finally, problem solved, job delegated. Before she has a chance to think up an escape clause, the six of us teleport to the Dragon Daycare to see what''s up because, of course, Amber, Violet and Blondie are still with me and there was no way I was leaving Becca alone with my cuddlies. For some reason, the triplets stick closer to me than Sis does and I think it''s going to be harder to convince them to stay here than it was her. The Dragon Daycare created a place for itself among the pink-leafed trees not too far up the mountain. It would still take a few hours to reach by foot for a regular Tironian, but it''s not like anyone travels up here anyway. Although, you never know. This could be the start of a new venture. Mountain hikes to see the peaceful Dragons of Varona. You just have to kill your way through the goblin-infested forests. The large, rectangular building, reminiscent of an orphanage, is pure white and looks just as beautiful as everything in the city below. It wants to look good too as there''s no upgrade option for this feature for some reason. If I had to take a guess at that, I''d probably think it was something to do with Sis but it''s not important for the moment. As we enter the building, some of us more happy than others, we see that the inside is fully stocked with anything a young Tironian Dragon might need to enjoy their childhood. Games, books, paper, toys and various other clutter that a child would need to have fun litter most rooms downstairs, which is quite a lot, as the building is on the larger side than normal. There''s also a kitchen, an office and a few toilets that finish the bottom floor whereas upstairs is mainly bedrooms and a few storage closets. What more could Dragon kids ask for? I can also get Ali to staff the kitchen with some of her workers and have Assassins watching the perimeter to turn around any mischievous Dragons that might try to sneak off to town unaccompanied. Perfect. Unless they fly to town. I''ll put a rule in place which says they can''t do that. I know they won''t frighten my citizens, but a dragon flying straight into town before turning into a child with horns might be too much for some people. "Well. What do we think?" I beam at everybody in the main room downstairs. Sis doesn''t look too pleased and Becca hasn''t smiled since she was summoned. She also doesn''t say anything and instead looks for the most annoying thing she can find. "It''s ok, I guess." "You did perfect, Abi." "Master, I think it is dinner time." My own followers don''t offer anything more than I would expect them to. Especially Amber. It''s like all she ever thinks about is food. Violet is very blas¨¦ and doesn''t title me whereas Blondie is upbeat and supportive and she always calls me by name. I need that support. Blondie is the dragon-equivalent of Anya. She''s so nice. Even with their little quirks, I''m growing fond of these three little cuties. Summoning some Assassins, I place them under Sis'' command. I''m not stupid enough to think that she can handle this task on her own. Hell, with how these Dragons act she might end up needing even more staff. That''s a simple enough task as all it requires is points. With the Dragon problem solved - or palmed off in this case, I feel quite proud of myself. All I had to do was place Sis in charge and she basically took care of the rest herself. Even though she didn''t want to. It was great. She gave me the notification for the Dragons Daycare and then she magically created the feature on my mountain to no satisfaction of her own at Max level. Huh? Maybe she is kinda like me? Becca has managed to find what she was looking for and is smashing the drums in the corner to an unholy tune that no musician in the world would approve of. I take that as my cue to disappear before Sis can say anything to stop me. Just as I dash out the door, I catch sight of her sighing, slumping her shoulders and regretting her decision. If she wants her tower she''s going to have to work hard. Poor Sis. What I didn''t see were the three Dragon triplets still holding onto my dress and teleporting with me. Chapter 81: How Landing on my futon, I feel slightly heavier than usual but everything is good. Sis is on Dragon duty and I can finally relax for a few minutes before I get on with whatever I decide is on top of my to-do list. The sound of city life below is like music to my ears, relaxing me as I take a deep breath in. As I''m sighing in relief, that singular moment where I was supposed to be alone is disrupted by a fight over space. "Wait. Why are you still here?" I ask one of my girls as she shuffles around on top of me. "Because I can." "We''re besties, Abi." "It''s dinner time, Master." "Yeah, but... Didn''t I tell you to stay at the daycare with Sis?" None of the triplets seem to understand what I''m asking and they''re right to confused. I didn''t tell them to stay there. I just wanted to get out of there after Becca started murdering the drums. "No." "No." "I thought you mentioned dinner, Master." Of course you did. Letting out a sigh, I can''t help but smile. I like these three and I don''t really want to head back to the Dragon Daycare right away. Becca will still be trying to deafen everyone inside, I just know it. I could send them on their own, but that would be cruel. Screw it. I''ll just keep the triplets. They''re not that bad. Their personalities are growing in me too since the aren''t constantly begging me to do some dungeon''in, like some other people do. Are they really people? Me''s body was created by me and Sis... Only the gods know how she managed to make one where not a single strand of hair ever falls out of place. Tch. Creating three smaller futons, but still royal in quality, I place them on the tower beside mine. Purple for Violet, yellow for Blondie and red for Amber, so that they know which one is theirs. I also make some cute dragon plushies, one each to give to the triplets and three for more because I love cuddlies. "Ok. You girls can stay here with me. The company is nice I suppose. Anyway, that''s where you''ll sleep. What do you think?" "It''s alright." Is all get from violet. "Thank you, Abi. I love it. Is that one for me?" Whereas Blondie seems more grateful, diving on top of her futon immediately. Amber stares at her futon before looking at me, her lip quivering and tears appearing in her eyes. It would be great if she was that emotional over being given the privilege to live with the big boss, if that was the case. "Yes, yes, Amber. It''s dinner time now." The redheaded Oblivion Dragon turns into a different person and we head to Ali''s. It''s amazing how she can swap personalities in the blink of an eye. At dinner we see Anya and Lola. It''s always nice to catch up. I tell her about the daycare so that Lola has the chance to go play with the other Dragons if she wants to. The four girls then demolish more food than a dozen men before we''re done and we say our goodbyes. "I like my futon, Master," Amber finally answers me as we make our way down the street, licking sauce of her chin as she does. "Good. That''s what I was aiming for," I stop to clean Amber''s face for her and we continue on our way towards the residential area. We''re on our way to Prince Sillybollocks'' house because I''m finally going to start working through my backlog of tasks. Can I keep calling him that? He''s been doing pretty well recently. The Dragon was a bit... Whatever, but he was top dog against that God. Maybe I should ease off on him now. Unlike Prince Loudmouth, Light is slowly settling down. Noir, ontheotherhand, just seems to get louder and louder every time he sees me. As we round the corner, Amber takes off in a sprint. The little Dragon already seems to know where Light lives and, arriving at his door, knocks a little too vigorously before running back to us giggling. "Why do you have to knock so damn loud, Noir!" I hear my Assassin shouting from inside. "Every damn time. I swear to the Core, if you''ve ran off again, I''ll hunt you down and..." Light stops mid-sentence as the door opens and he sees me. It takes him a second to notice my child-sized entourage before he scowls at Amber. "Oi. We''ll have less of that," I warn him before he shakes it off. Sticking his tongue out at the redhead instead. "Sorry, Master. Noir''s been a pain in the... He''s been a pain recently. Forget him though, what brings you to my home? I would have happily came if you had summoned me." "Let''s talk inside," I smile at the strongest Assassin in Varona and he welcomes us in. Even Amber, who he knows is linked to his rival. Once inside, Light leads us into the living room and everyone takes a seat. I then explain the reason for my visit. "Now that I''ve finally got the time, I''m ready to do your evolution." Light bursts out in excitement and starts jumping up and down while shouting "Sophie!" The ex-dungeon diver bursts into the room brandishing a large bloody knife and a smaller, yet definitely more noticeable bump on her belly. What the hell? Sophie places the knife down after seeing the happy expression on her partner''s face and pulls him into a hug. While that''s happening I can''t help but to steal glances at Sophie''s tummy. There''s definitely a bump there. As I''m thinking of teleporting away, pretending that I was never here in the first place, Sophie whispers something in Light''s ear and he turns to me looking confused. You might be reading a stolen copy. Visit Royal Road for the authentic version. "Master?" Is all he says as he waits for my response. Shit. "Y-Yes?" I shakily reply, all whilst hoping that Sophie''s bump is in fact caused by a good diet of fatty meat. Sadly, Light shatters that illusion as soon as I thought of it. "Sophie says that my baby is in her belly. Is that true?" I look at Sophie''s bump again. Feeling more confident that I''m not prying and that yes, there is definitely a baby inside that belly. "Yes," I answer a little more confidently this time, even though I certainly don''t feel it. The famous question - How did that happen? - the one that rotates around my dungeon on the wheel of eternity, springs to mind. Not that I want to ask as I already know the answer to that one. What I''d like to know is, how can I get out of this situation without feeling any more uncomfortable. "Sophie said it was because we had sex." There it goes. The sound of the world fades away and I''m pretty sure I''m redder than the roses in the vase on the mantle. I look at the triplets, but they''re just giggling between themselves. Not that I can hear them, but I can see what they''re talking about by their faces. Then to Sophie, who also seems to be slightly embarrassed, but is taking it nowhere near as hard as I am. Before returning back to Light, who is still waiting for an answer. He''s not even fazed about his off-handed comment. And I was going to stop calling you Prince Sillybollocks. "Yes," the word was almost a whisper. Why do I feel so embarrassed by this? Yes I created him, but it''s not like I''m his actual mother. Yes, I think of them as my family, but he got his body before I did. Doesn''t that mean, technically, that Light''s older than I am? This is too weird. Trying to talk myself out of my own delusion, I come around to Blondie pulling on my sleeve. "Abi." "Yes," I murmur before the mischievous little Dragon jumps up and slaps me around the face. What the hell, Blondie? I feel hurt. Emotionally. What did she slap me for? "Abi. You have said ''yes'' four times in a row." "Yes," I repeat before shaking my head. "I mean, I know. I know. I was just... Thinking. That''s all." "What about?" Don''t put me on the spot like that, Blondie. I thought we were family. I''m even letting sleep in the tower with me. "Light''s... Evolution? B-But also the baby. Congratulations, Sophie. Er... Well done, Light?" I don''t actually know, Blondie. All in all, I''m nearly eighteen years old myself and have no idea what to say in this situation. Five minutes ago dungeon summons having babies was not a thought that had crossed my mind. If anything, it''s one I would rather avoid for the rest of my life if possible. Light and Sophie talk between themselves whilst I debate the finer points of human/dungeon relations. Not that there''s much I can do about it since Light and Sophie are already an item. What was past me thinking when she sent the ex-dungeon diver on that mission with Light and Dropper? Abi the Un-Insightful obviously didn''t realise this would happen. She was probably having a good laugh at Prince Sillybollocks and didn''t think about how it would affect her future. Well done, me. "Ok. It''s evolution time," because I need to get the hell out of here as soon as possible. "Are you ready, Light?" "Ever since I killed that God," he boasts, even though I told him not to talk about it. I also notice that he didn''t say ''we''. Maybe he doesn''t really want this evolution? "Fine," I pout, activating my menu and chosing confirm. We wait, but no grand light encompasses my Assassin this time. In fact, the whole ordeal is kind of lacklustre. Wanting to sound like I know what I''m doing, I check Light''s stats before I say anything.
Name: Light Master: Abi Class: Master Assassin - Level 100 Class: Available Skills Spells Grand Skill Inventory
It has been a while since I looked, but the new categories are obvious. The ability to have a second class is amazing all on its own, however, I find my eyes drawn to the inventory section. When did he get that? I can''t help myself and have opened the inventory before I even realised what I was doing. To Light''s surprise, further embarrassment to myself, and to Sophie''s horror, out pours a deluge of toys that one would normally find hidden away in drawers, rather than a Master Assassin''s inventory. I don''t have any words for what I''m seeing as my brain has been fried in the last two minutes. With that, I grab the girls whilst congratulating Light and Sophie on their cross-species pregnancy as well as his evolution, then teleport us away as fast I can before anything else can happen. In the safety of my tower, I wonder how that all went so wrong. Although, it hasn''t actually managed to get better now that we''ve left. To my own horror, Amber managed to snag herself a chocolate-shaped edible and is already munching down on it. I know full well if I try and take that off of her there''s going to be a problem, so I close my eyes, pretend what''s happening really isn''t and move on to my next task. "Please go better than the last one," I pray to no one in particular while activating Divinity''s Domain. I''m reluctant to open my eyes, but when I do I find that all my problems have disappeared. Literally. In what can only be described as the Lazy God''s pad before it shattered, I''m all alone in a room made of white. Instinctively I''m aware of what I can and can''t do in this space. I can add and remove objects, furniture and decorations. I can change colours, sizes and textures. I can make it brighter or darker all at will. It''s like being a Dungeon Core prepared me to use this space perfectly and it''s exactly what its name described it to be. My domain. I''m so grateful it worked like it was supposed to. I almost want to make myself cry with water magic. Sis is obviously on my mind, but at least she''s not in my domain. With how it feels, I''m pretty sure the only people that can enter are those I allow access. Which is even better. "I might have to make this place my new bedroom," I laugh, making some major renovations to the Lazy God''s old home which is now mine by right of victory. A fireplace emerges from the wall with a Direwolf rug laid in front. The two chairs are replaced with comfier, green ones and a bed appears at the back of the room. Bookshelves and drawers fill the walls and behind them, hat was plain and boring white, turns sky blue. Clouds appear and float along the backdrop making me even happier with my Domain. "This is amazing," I compliment myself on a job well done whilst taking a book from the shelf and sitting down on the rug in front of the fire. Don''t get me started on how, but the story I picked out is a fantasy novel that I''ve never read or even heard about before for that matter. Apparently, it''s a love story. One about a poor girl who sacrifices her own life to save her fathers, after he pulls a dick move near the beginning. In doing so, she becomes a prisoner to a terrifying creature. It''s not as bad as it sounds, however. The monster feeds her, clothes her and provides with luxuries, the likes of which the young woman has never experienced before. She was even beginning to have feelings for the beast, but that''s as far as I got. Laid in front of the fire, wondering how a fantasy story I''ve never heard before has found its way to exist in my domain, I put the book down and close my eyes. Falling asleep next to the heat of the crackling logs, the only thing on my mind is that I won''t see Sis when I wake. That and how stupid the girl in the story was for sacrificing herself. Why would she do that? It''s not like I''m against the idea of self-sacrificing myself for my family. They don''t go around stealing things all willy-nilly though, just because we''re a little short on funds. Don''t be silly. They bring the beast back for absorption instead. Still, no Sis in the morning. Bliss. Chapter 82: A Short Day I was summoned with knowledge far greater than any of those that came before me. A collective consciousness of interwoven minds feeding me during my summoning. Helping me know what I need to, and more importantly, what I must not do. So why is it that whenever my Master wants me to do something, I instinctively want to say no and do the opposite? "Becca, come on. We''re going," she told me we were going somewhere with the name she had given me. I really liked it too, but I huffed at her when she said it for the first time. I really wanted to go with her, but I also didn''t. Like it would be burdensome for me to be around her. Even though that''s all I want. All any of us want. I know this because I know them. Even though I''ve never met them, I know that Talia is The Taskmaster who works in the Retreat. Ali is The Chef who trains others in her craft and oversees most of the food produced by the dungeon in Varona. I know Light is strong and Noir is loud, that Carrie is cold and Dropper is wiser than her looks suggest. I know this, so why is it when my master made a place specifically for Dragons, even though she didn''t have to and she staffed it using the very system that created the dungeons, why do I not want to go there? "No. I don''t want to. I''ll stay here," I told her defiantly, even though I wanted to go. I really did, but why can''t I just stay here on her futon for a while? What''s the big deal? I mean, I get it. I do. She''s my Master. She summoned me. This woman who is smaller than me, even with my human form shrunk as low as it will go. This little packet of power I''m able to see with my mana-infused senses. She''s strong enough to slap me into eternity, so why is it that I want to challenge her? She''s my master. I should listen to her commands without question, just like the others do. I should follow their example as they suggested at my birth, but I just don''t want to. I want to do what I want to do. Not what they say. But... I really want to listen to my Master too. I just... My Master apparently didn''t take no for an answer as in a flash I was laid in front of a magnificent Palace. Well, for human standards that is. It wouldn''t accommodate my true body if I decided to release my transformation inside. I hid my satisfaction and picked myself up from the floor, but secretly thanked my Master on the inside for providing me with this castle. It''s almost as big as some of the major features in town and with Sis here I''m sure it will end up larger. It will need to be if my Master decides to summon more of us. The triplets seemed to like it, but they don''t really stray far from her side. I really want to thank her, but I am definitely not saying those words to her face. There''s no chance that''s happening because I... I just can''t. What can I do to show her that I''m grateful for this place she has rewarded me with? There are lots of things here, many of which I haven''t seen before but somehow know they''re activities for fun. That said, the one in the corner looks easy enough as all I have to do is hit it with the sticks provided to make sweet music. With that I begin performing Wrath of the Rebellion Dragon. Composed, performed and given as a thank you by Rebecca to Abi. Although, I don''t think she liked it very much because after eyeing me doing my thing, she shortly left. That left only Sis to appreciate my greatness and listen to the rest of the beat. Next time Master visits I''ll be a master myself. Rebecca, Dragon of Rebellion Dungeon Stories
Waking up to the fire''s warm embrace is the best feeling ever. Almost as good as being able to stretch out my kinks, unobstructed by dragons or dungeon-creating women. More so when they''re not glaring at me and getting ready to explain how poor my efficiency is. Waking up in my Domain is almost as good as waking up in my tower was when it was just me. The sunrise over Varona is just the best sight in the world. Then again, I suppose views like that are even better when shared with others. Aslong as they can appreciate them. The book I was reading is still next to me on the floor and I can''t help but think about similarities between what I read and Dungeon monsters, specifically my own summons. Even more specifically, Light. I know he is some type of beast, debatable, and I know Sophie isn''t some captive human, also kinda debatable, but the similarities are there. Either that or I''m just looking too much into it after seeing Sophie''s belly. Hell, I''m surprised I didn''t find a pregnancy book... I look toward the bookcase before shaking myself off and getting up. I''m not even going to look. I''ve had a lovely sleep and I wonder how long it''s been since shit got weird. Hopefully the awkwardness is over and we can get on with things. Like my list of back stock. This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work. Exiting the bubble, the triplets are still in the tower and Amber is still mid-bite on the genitalia-shaped chocolate. Not a single one of them seems to have moved and neither has the position of the sun since I used my Domain. How is that possible? Did she deliberately wait to eat it in front of me just to weird me out? No, the Dragons are mischievous, my three slightly less so, but they wouldn''t do that on purpose. Plus, the sun hasn''t moved an inch. Unless I''ve just slept for 24hours which is highly unlikely. In that case there''s only one other answer. I can control time! Well, at least in Divinity''s Domain I can. After going back in and experimenting for a little bit, it turns out I can alter the speed of time. I can''t make it any faster and neither can I turn it back, but I can slow it to any pace I want upto and including stopping it completely. Maybe I''ll be able to do more once it levels up? That''s just wishful thinking on my part because Divinity''s Presence never levelled once on its own. It was only because the Lord of the Hay granted my wish that I''m still alive to complain about it. Maybe there''s a cool down on his wishes? I could max my Domain no problems then, but I doubt it''s that easy. I wasn''t actually expecting him to upgrade my presence as I joked about it, but that was my wish gone. Over. Finito. "If that''s not gone in five seconds, I''m absorbing it," Amber swallows the whole thing down in one go after my offhanded threat. I''m happy that it''s gone, but the sight was not pretty. I''m going to do my utmost best to ignore that this ever happened and I''m going to chastise the shit out of Light next time I see him. That said, I can''t believe he''s allowed a second class. That''s amazing. What should he choose? I didn''t even think about asking that before I ran off with the girls. I just didn''t know how to handle the situation Now that I''ve had time to process it... I still don''t know what I''m going to say when I see them. Maybe I''ll just act like that never ever happened either... It seems like something Abi the Wise would do. Or is it more like Abi the Cowardly? I really want to talk to Light about that second class, but I just can''t face either of them right now. Instead I teleport to the forest to see how Me''s handling the monster vs adventurer problem. I haven''t really had the time to ask him ever since I delegated him to the role. "Hey buddy," I wave as we arrive. Triplets in tow, we walk up to see Me scrubbing down a strange object. What is it with him and cleaning things? Does he want a stupid quirk too just because everyone else has one? He already says ''quite'' quite too often for my liking and that''s already considered his quirk. He doesn''t bloody need another one. Sighing is my go to method of venting these days and it seems to be all I''m doing recently. Other than lashing out at Sis, which I apologised for terribly. I should really put some effort into her tower when I make it. That should make her happy. "Abi? What are you doing here and why have you brought the Dragons? They''re scaring the monsters." "Sorry. I didn''t think of that. I just assumed the monsters would see them as part of the dungeon." "Not these monsters. I''ve set all their intelligence to zero so they''re just mindless creatures. Just as wild monsters should be. I even applied the technique to the spawners." He continues working on the sandy-coloured shell as I process what he said. "Wait... You''ve got Goblinators out here? Is that what that is?" I point at the object he''s cleaning in disgust. "Not every monster spawner has to be related to Goblins, you know? In fact for someone who claims to hate them so much, I do wonder why that was the first place your mind went," he chuckles. "And to answer your question, yes. This is a Cave Troll spawner. The adventurers in Varona are advancing rather well under the guidance of Hana and Mira. A lot of them are closing on their second advancement. I hear that''s a pretty amazing accomplishment for a regular human." "It is! They haven''t even been here that long." I''m actually quite shocked at their progress myself. That is an amazing achievement and I doubt they''ll stop there. With me supplying them a steady amount of monsters to level up with they''re probably going to aim their sights even higher. What are we going to do when they hit their third advancement and we become a city full of powerhouses? I know it bodes well for our defences, but when our little city pops up out of nowhere and is filled with people of levels unseen in this world for a long time, what am we going to say? Actually, now that I think about it, I don''t have to say anything. That''s what Mayor Kana is for and if she fails... Sacha will handle it. It''ll be fine. After seeing us firsthand, it''s not likely anyone will actually try and pick a fight us. Hell, even the King might be wary of us. Not that I know how strong his army is, but I reckon that''s where the strongest people in the continent would be. What I do know is that the Dragon is somehow related to the King. There are no sightings for years, but the one time he attacks Gorn a Dragon just happens to shows up. That''s more than just a coincidence. Also, if he can control Dragons, how does that bode for me. How many Dragons does he have? Does he have more than I do? Then again I can make more with a thought. Will he be able to seize control of my Dragons? I don''t know, but even if he could I doubt Becca would listen to him. She doesn''t even listen to me. Actually, she probably would listen to him just to spite me. That damn... rebellious Dragon. "So other than humans advancing well and monsters being mindless is everything else good?" I ask, getting ready to move on to my final task of the day. It feels strange that it''s already so late in the day, but it''s my own fault for sleeping in my Domain. I woke up less than two hours ago. I had dinner for breakfast with Anya and the girls, followed by a humiliating visit to Light''s. I don''t think I''m ever going to step foot in that house again. I can''t. It''s just too much. The sun began to set as we arrived at Me''s and it won''t be long before it disappears completely. Gone until tomorrow. "Quite." There it is. "Can you double my funds?" He asks, looking away knowing I''m probably going to ask why, or say what for? This time though, I agree happily. Me does a good job at whatever he does. He''s dependable and actually knows the ins and outs of the dungeon gig better than I do. I also said yes because out of everything I''ve heard and everything that''s happened in the last few days, his request seems like the most normal thing ever. "You got it, buddy. Love ya, Me." I leave him flustered as we take our leave. Me, the triplets and a very worried-looking bear cub in Violet''s arms. Chapter 83: Center Stage "I don''t see what the problem is? He''s too cute for that." Violet is never really bothered about anything, in fact, I would have gone as far as saying she didn''t care about anything. Except for some reason, the purple-haired Dragon has grown awfully attached to the bear cub she brought back from our trip to the forest yesterday. "Me said it''s mindless. That means it will attack without thinking. You don''t want it hurting or scaring people do you?" I try to reason with her. It hasn''t worked so far though and it''s still not working now as she squeezes the poor soul tighter. It''s easy to forget the triplets are Dragons, all things considered, but Violet has brought the little cub everywhere we''ve been so far today. Including two trips to Ali''s. "He can''t hurt anyone if I''m holding him and he definitely can''t scare anyone if I''m around. Because of your power, people love us and are happy every time we see them." Violet counters me with the The System''s stupid flavour text and unfaltering logic. Damn. "Blondie? Amber? Don''t you have an opinion on your sister''s pet bear?" I seeked help in the only place possible, but neither of them offer anything helpful. "I don''t mind at all, Abi." "I think it''s nearly dinner time, Master." I''ve probably sighed more than two dozen times already today as I one more to the pile. Giving in, I accept Violet''s argument and hope against hope that she manages to keep her pet under control as we see Veris strolling towards us. It feels like it''s been a while since I last saw Veris. I think the last time was when I made the pleasure Palace into an actual building. She must have been busy since then enjoying herself as I haven''t seen Peaches or the Sweets in some time either. Ah, the responsibilities of a leader. Life''s hard when you have to follow up on the people you delegated tasks to, you know? Plus there''s the whole Land Acquisition to Tune, then Ishda to get on with now that I''m back on track. I hope I''m back on track. I should really make a list for all my accumulating shit. Better yet, I should ask Sacha to do it. That would be ideal. Once I''m finished, I''ll get Sacha to make me a proper list for things I need to do, and then follow up on that when I can. "Hey, Boss. Cool bear, kid. Can I stroke him?" Veris starts ruffling the cub''s fur before the Dragon can say yes. "Does he want an outfit? I''ve got lots of little ones that are sure to fit a cutie like him. Oh, like this." Veris pulls out a few small leather straps from her back pocket before I step in, ending that conversation before it can go any further. I already feel like Amber''s little soul has been corrupted by Light and Sophie. I don''t need Violet tainted by Veris. "What''s up, Veris. It''s rare to see you strolling the streets. In clothes no less," I remark feigning shock. Although my surprise is quite real, I was just acting for dramatic effect. Veris is wearing a black one-piece bodysuit, made from skin-tight leather. I can''t even complain to be fair because the last time I saw her she was covered in straps like the ones she was trying to palm off on Violet. "Nothing, actually. I was just on my way to Lucinda''s to pick up my package. Do you want to know what it is?" She asks the triplets in a teasing tone. "Meh." "No thanks, Veris." "Is it food?" Getting no takers apart from a hungry Dragon, the Boss of my dungeon faces my way next. "What about you, Boss?" She winks, trying to be as mysterious as possible. Normally my curiosity would outmatch my sanity and I would end up being on the receiving end of a ridiculous answer that I would have been better of not knowing. I must be learning because I quickly shake my head and disappear with the triplets before she can say another word. There are some things that are better left unknown. Like the activities of Veris and her associates. "Master." I hear my name being called amidst whispers as I realise I wasn''t thinking about a destination when I ported. Normally, I end up back in my tower without having to think about it. This time though, I think I''ve really put my foot in it. Turning around, because we arrived facing a wall for some reason, I found a rather large crowd seated and staring directly at me and the triplets. Mouths hang agape, and some of the people burst out crying. I''m also pretty sure this is the dungeon church. It''s kind of evident by the faces of Ang and Zen, the first Acolytes I summoned, gawping at me from the front row of people. If that wasn''t enough, Cardinal Carn is stood to my left and is eyeing me up reverently. I don''t miss his lips curling up into a smile as he throws himself to the floor and began prostrating before me. Enjoying this book? Seek out the original to ensure the author gets credit. I''m pretty sure that I''ve already been seen teleporting around town by now. I mean, I do try to keep myself from being noticed, but every time I''m trying to avoid something, or someone, I generally teleport away without putting too much thought into it. So, when the Cardinal''s flock saw the voice of God drop to his knees and begin worshiping me, I wasn''t particularly surprised to see them follow suit. No. I had known the Cardinal was preaching dungeon love and acceptance at his masses. I''d heard about it from Me, who had told me that Carn''s sermons were quite intriguing and that some people were actually swayed by his words. I didn''t actually expect people to buy into it, not with how dungeons are generally viewed by the regular populations, and have a need to be regulated. I was actually impressed with what he was trying to do. Foolhardy as it may be, Cardinal Carn was trying to get the people of Varona to accept me and my dungeon for more than we were. I was definitely going to reward him for his hard work. Even though he hadn''t managed to make much progress, I was still proud and pleased with his efforts. Sis could learn a thing or two from him. What does surprise me though, as I stand on the podium and watch person after person drop to the ground and began offering me their prayers, is the fact that I''m able to hear them. If that wasn''t mind-blowing enough, the fact that every single one ended in Lady Abi, almost made my head explode. I must be red. Blushing so hard that Noir''s hair has nothing on me. How the hell do they know my name? I give Cardinal Carn the death stare and even though he''s looking at my feet, I''m sure he felt it. I''m frozen. Stuck to the spot having so many people notice me at once. I can''t even explain the feeling if I try. It''s like euphoria, but riddled with a crippling embarrassment from being called a Lady by so many people. I''m sure as hell am not a Lady. I''m pretty sure that''s an established fact by now. So why is it that I can''t do the norn and port away in true Abi fashion? Do I like it? Even though it makes me feel slightly... Off? Not me-like? I''d like to be a Lady, but it''s not likely that will ever happen. Abi the Lady would say something vulgar, or inappropriate at the wrong time and be cast out of high society at the first ball she ever attended. Doomed to be an outcast because she doesn''t quite know how to fit in. I''m pulled from my thoughts by Blondie, tugging away on my dress once again. Abi the Lady, I laugh, giving Blondie my attention and distracting myself from our latest escapade. "What''s up, Blondie?" "Um... T-There are lots of people here, Abi." This is the first time I''ve seen the blonde Dragon show any signs of fear. She even brushed Veris off better than I do. Maybe it''s the size of the crowd that''s got her spooked. Amber appears to be daydreaming, probably about what she''s going to have for dinner later, whereas Violet is more interested in her Bear cub than the events playing out around us. Neither seem to be bothered by the large number of people worshiping us like we''re Gods. What would a God do in this situation? They''d help Blondie feel better, right? Not likely. Gods are fucking useless. They don''t show it up when it counts and when they do, it''s to punish you for trivial reasons. If the Lazy God is anything to go off of, then the rest of the Gods are all probably self-serving assholes too. Fuck it. I''ll help Blondie my way. I kneel down and come face to face with the nervous Dragon, patting her head. Reassuring her that everything will be fine and that the people gathered are all here for us, I turn around and step forward. Probably going to make a gigantic ass of myself here, but as long as it makes Blondie feel better it will be worth it. "Hello, citizens of Varona. It''s er... Nice to see you?" Talking to people who are facing the ground is more awkward than you would think. For starters, you don''t even know if they''re listening, and worse than that, it''s just plain weird. I can also see that my weak start has done nothing to alleviate Blondie''s stage fright. "Everyone stand up. Carn, get up off the floor. You look like an old man, you shouldn''t be down there," I whisper the last part, but he only smiles at me. The people begin standing up, looking directly at me and the triplets. Cardinal Carn doesn''t say anything and waits for me to continue. I was really hoping that was all I had to say and we could be done, but no joys. "As you all apparently know," I eye the Cardinal again. This time he clearly sees me, but shows no remorse. Sneaky bugger. "I''m Abi. Not Lady Abi, but just plain, old Abi. No need for titles. It''s lovely to meet you like this. It was a bit unexpected, I know, but I hope we can all get along. These are the triplets," I wave my arm in the direction of the girls behind me from left to right, "We got Amber, who loves food, Blondie, who''s secretly everyone''s best friend and Violet the bear hugger on the end. Unfortunately we can''t stay long and have..." I''m interrupted by tugging at my dress once again. This time however, instead of a nervous Blondie, it''s a serious Amber. Funnily enough, I know why she''s so serious. I spotted it a moment ago and no doubt did the redhead Dragon as the drool is practically dribbling down her chin. At the back of the room is a row of tables lined with silver domes. Each one of them contains food underneath. Food that was supposed to be ready for when the Cardinal''s sermon was meant to end. We threw that off-track by accident, but it smells good from here, and if I port us away now, Amber will never let me hear the end of it. Hence why she''s tugging on my dress hard enough that I have to hold on to it to keep my modesty. "I see it, Amber. Yes. We''ll stay," I snap as the redhead runs off smiling before I can say stop. "I guess we''re not that busy after all. We can stay for a while and chat while we eat," I tell the congregation as I hear Amber shouting "Food time!" from the other side of the room. I take Blondie''s hand and reassure her again. "You can stay with me, OK? Amber and Violet should be fine on their own." Leading her into the crowd of people, we start mingling to boost Blondie''s confidence. Not to mention my own. Chapter 84: After Mass Last week, the triplets and I accidentally crashed Cardinal Carn''s mass. Not that he minded in any way. Plus, our interruption and appearance probably served to increase the number of his flock as opposed to reducing it. Also, it was actually quite nice to be praised by people who weren''t created by my own two hands -or dungeon skills, but you know what I mean. Violet had shown off her bear like it was the world''s cutest puppy and somehow some people had even agreed with her. Amber ate at least a quarter of all the food that had been served, leaving less for the rest of the congregation, but satisfied her stomach in the process, and Blondie managed to gain a little more confidence while talking in groups. Which is crazy because one-on-one, she never shuts up. I also gained a little confidence too, if we''re being honest. Not enough to live up to the people''s expectations of Lady Abi, but enough that I now don''t feel as bad talking to large groups of people myself. Overall it wasn''t a bad experience. Since then, I''ve spent the week acquiring the rest of the land between here and the fishing port of Tune as well as the city itself. The oceanside city is almost as large as Orad and provides another significant boost to my daily income, and the latter still provides the same amount of DP it did previously as the city hasn''t changed much since it fell under my wing. Whereas the amount of DP I receive from my own citizens has increased dramatically. Partially because more and more people arrive in Varona every day, but the largest factor has to be the fact that a lot of the human population that live here are seeing a greater rise in level compared to that of people who live anywhere else. The stronger they are, the more points I receive. It''s a win-win really. I help them and they help me in turn. When I had Me take control of the monster population in the forests around Varona, it was mainly so that the Adventurers Guild had some work to do. I hadn''t considered the possibility that that plan would run hand in hand with my dungeon levelling groups. I only found out how well things were going after Me informed me of such and in doing so we decided to up his budget to 10,000DP a day. With our steadily growing population, more people testing the dungeon and joining the guard, he needed it to keep up. I even had to make a start on the Troll floors inside the dungeon as the Adventurers are getting closer and closer to Obling. No one''s reached his room yet, but it''s only a matter of time until they do. That''s a fight I''ll have to watch, that Goblin Mage deserves a kicking for the way he keeps looking at me. I''m certainly not building his alter. Either way, I went with the same design for the Trolls as I did with the Goblins. Twenty-one floors in total. The first ten floors are filled with Cave Troll Spawners (Me killed my buzz over Goblinators) with the next ten featuring Dungeon Troll Spawners. I''d call them Trollinators, but I doubt that it''d go down well. I left the last floor to a single Elemental Troll Boss who looks oddly similar to Obling, only much, much bigger and a lot scarier. Other than that there hasn''t been any other significant changes in my own city. Whereas in Tune, I didn''t bother myself with getting into the political aspects of a city takeover, so I decided to let the mayor do his own thing. He was a steady yellow through the gaze of Soul Guide, but I''ll swing back to him later. Instead of a forceful takeover, I inserted key figures into their society. For example, a highly levelled Assassin has just became their Adventurer''s Guild''s Guild Master. Which reminds me, I''ve still got to send something to congratulate his appointment. Maybe a few more subordinates would do the trick? Another person to take note of that recently moved to Tune would be their new treasurer. Carrie suggested him, and Sacha agreed with her, and let''s be honest, anything with Sacha''s approval has my vote of confidence. So we sent Goode, the previous treasurer of Ishda - before he was caught embezzling by the cold Queen of night, Carrie - to see what was up with the finances in Tune. He managed to get the job quite easily with his skills and background. More so since the previous treasurer was taken captive by a group calling themselves The Syndicate. Terrible business in Tune, I tell ya. What was actually terrible was the shocking amount of yellow and orange souls that littered their streets. The whole city was full of corruption at every corner. The complete opposite of Orad, whose people lived side-by-side and helped each other out during hard times. I also didn''t have the space for all those corrupted souls that needed redeeming. I certainly hadn''t thought that plan through and I definitely wasn''t expecting to come across as many souls that needed redeeming This story originates from Royal Road. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. Sis said I should have killed them and that it would have been faster to send them on their way to reincarnation. I wasn''t down for that though. Not after I went through the effort to make special locations for people that needed my help, even if they didn''t know it yet. Granted, some people were past redemption and had to be sent back through cycle, but anyone who I could help avoid that fate, I would. Although, after Samantula underwent her transformation, she just isn''t as scary as she used to be. She''s more like supermodel Sam now which threw a wrench in my plan for her to scare people into changing their ways. That didn''t stop me from using her floor for orange-ranked souls though as the spider-infested area still serves its purpose well enough. The Towers of Torture are also full but with yellow souls instead. The easiest to reform and the ones we process fastest. Some even stay and join the guard once they''re back to neutral grey, but most opt to return where they came from. Apart from things that actually matter on a higher level, Ali talked me into building her a restaurant there. Well, not so much talked me into it, but when she brought it up she got her own quest to commission one being built. I asked Sis about that too, but she shrugged me off with a weak excuse about not knowing everything. Which I''ve got to say left me a little surprised because I thought she literally knew everything regarding herself. I also met with the Lord of Gorn this week. Or should I say the ex-lord? The City Council had been taking care of Edward while I was inundated with other tasks, but as soon as I had the chance we sat down to talk. He also seems like a good guy, which only made me more curious as to why the King of Tira attacked his city in the first place. It makes no sense. Anyway, that was that and Edward decided to stay here. As an ex-Lord, I think he was expecting a larger house than the one I gave him. All my homes are the same though, unless I make them personally, and if I''m being honest, I like it that way. Everyone is equal in Varona. Whether you''re rich or poor, man or woman, tall or short, everyone is the same here. There is only one goal. One future to work towards and I still don''t even know what it is! Sis couldn''t even tell me what that was because apparently, she doesn''t know. How can one woman be so frustrating? I even built her a pretty sweet tower right next to the daycare. You can even see it from Varona, although I made sure it was just smaller than mine by a few inches. I did, however, offer to double the size of Sis'' new home if she somehow managed to remember anything. Soul Guide''s description still leaves me wanting. My soul is on the line as well if the description is to be believed, and I would rather know where I''m going before I get there. Even if it''s paradise. The fact that Varona is a sea of green souls, with a few dots of blue kicking around, has me a little nervous. I''m actually doing quite well in regards to helping people grow into their best selves. I hadn''t really thought about the state of the world before. I knew that for most people, life was hard. That''s the same everywhere. I didn''t have a grand plan to become a great adventurer, saving the world from corruption and greed. Hell, if anything my soul would have been yellow at least, potentially even orange. There was no way I was red though. I was sly, money hungry, and maybe a little crazy, but I still had Anya. Kal on the other hand, he probably turned red the moment his sword ran though our Cleric and his name still leaves a foul taste in my mouth. Other than using Soul Guide to clean up Tune and placing key individuals into the society, this week has been a rather peaceful one. Which is great because I feel as though I deserved it this time. After the Dragons, the Lazy God and Sis, I was just about wrung out. Then Becca, the Dragon, drummer and disobedient little bugger, was thrown into the mix. It was too much. The nicest part of the week though was when I was using Land Acquisition. It reminded me of why I enjoyed being an adventurer and why I''m sure other people still take up that mantle. Getting to travel the world is amazing and when you''re being paid at the same time, it''s even better. I thoroughly enjoyed moving through the forest, countryside, and even the roads, as me and the triplets walked our way there, piece by piece. Violet almost lost her cub after she decided to let it walk beside her, but she kept a keen eye on it after that and Amber complained more than usual about being hungry. Fortunately, Blondie had nothing but nice things to say the entire journey. It was bliss. Yet somehow, things always seem to take a turn for the worst around here when things finally start going well. An elf, evident by his ears and his canny resemblance to our resident agony aunt Aura, stumbled into my territory covered in blood. Unlike the last time an elf arrived at my Borders, I now control a significant part of the forest that surrounds Varona. Not to mention two other cities and the roads that lead to them, but that wasn''t important. What was important was that the elf was dying so the triplets and I took him to the Royal Halls of Regeneration and left him in the care of Tilly, and the Black Dragon Lola. I''m a lot wiser than before, or so I like to think as the passing of time means I''m growing and acquiring more knowledge, but who in the hell was it that decided Dragons could use healing magic on people? I kept my rant to myself and asked them to contact me when he awoke. They could have woken him up there and then, but I didn''t want to deal with that right now. I just watched Lola heal that elf''s ear and was in a little shock. Outside I looked at the triplets and wondered if they would be able to do the same thing for me before realising that I hadn''t actually gotten any smarter than before. I was a Dungeon Core. I could just create myself a new body. Slapping my cheeks I ask, "Who wants some lunch?" Violet tilts her head, the universal symbol for meh. Blondie agreed as usual because that''s just kind of her thing. That and making sure to say the exact person''s name of whom she''s talking to at the end of her sentence. Amber was already running down the road in the direction of Ali''s closest building after she had heard the word lunch. She must have memorised where every single one was because she was heading in the right direction too. These girls. Chapter 85: The King Of Tira The sea of trees, all ablaze in a harrowing sight in which many still trapped inside couldn''t manage to escape, filled the young elf''s eyes with terror and rage. A crying sadness surrounded his heart as the once proud member of the village turned and ran from the place he had called home. At 60 years old, Eduine could be compared to a teenager by human standards. His usually pale skin was darkened by soot and ash as he ran through the night. So too was his hair, gone was its vibrant lustre. The usually tied braids were covered in falling ash and had turned a scruffy grey. The humans had attacked while the elves slept, and not just with a few, but many. A large force, one spanning more humans than Eduine had ever seen before, tore through his village with fire magic and arrows of the same nature, destroying everything it touched as the elves fought back in vain. Their village had of course been prepared to be attacked in such ways. Living in the forest meant fire was a constant danger and most mages in the villages were trained in the use of water magic as a means to combat it. However, the elven water mages could not rival the sheer numbers the humans had brought to the woods, and their village was burnt to the ground. Lost to nature and to Eduine. Eduine wasn''t there to witness the end of it though. He was running south as fast as his legs could take him and wasn''t stopping for anyone. He had an arrow in one leg and a nasty gash in the other. He wasn''t expecting to reach another village, not with his injuries. Eduine''s will to live was all that kept him going. He kept running until his legs stiffened up, yet he kept going. He ran and hobbled as fast and as far as his physically superior body was capable of. All until he ran through what he thought was a barrier. Although, it wasn''t a barrier. It was something he had never felt before, and in his deteriorating state, he thought it was more akin to a domain. Like someone owned the area in an incontestable way. It wasn''t a visible barrier. Nothing the eye could see and it wasn''t able to repel others, since Eduine had hobbled right in, but it was still there nonetheless. Baffled by the strange barrier, Eduine passed out as adrenaline began leaving his system. Collapsing where he stood, the last thing the young elf heard were the voices of angels. "Another elf? At least this one''s too injured to be crazy. What should we do with him, girls?" "Not interested," one of them answered as if she thought nothing of him or his plight to get there. "Whatever you want to do, Abi." Another girl, referring to the first who spoke as Abi, chirped in merrily. "We should take him to Tilly. She can heal him and then we can go get lunch," a third girl added, much to the satisfaction of Eduine''s dwindling consciousness. Healing does sound rather nice right around now, he thought. "He doesn''t look very tasty," the last speaker then quickly added in a disappointed tone, leaving Eduine to dream about flesh-eating monsters and all other manners of ghoulies. Until he woke up that was. Eduine the Elf
After talking to the elf, whose name is Eduine, but is happy with me calling him Ed, it sounds like our future is pretty much set in stone. Then, after having further talks with Edward Gorn, I''m sure we will be at war with the King himself within the week. Shit just got real. Apparently the King has gone mad, or there is a Demon controlling him, or something like that. Neither one of them have hard facts on the matter. Either way, the King had ordered Lord Gorn to attack the elven forest himself as he was the closest city to their woodland home. If you don''t count me in the mix, that is. Edward refused, obviously, since Gorn was wiped out and made his way south with Minister Herald, Dum and Dee. The two Assassins bringing them here to safety. Or as safe as they can be considering what''s coming in the next week. Edward Gorn is actually a better person than I might have given him credit for. Most of the scummy people on this continent would have probably done as they were ordered even if they hadn''t wanted to. Armies are like that sometimes. Unquestionable loyalty even in face of atrocious acts. Then again, no one was expecting the King to actually set a dragon loose on Gorn. There hadn''t been any indication that the King even had access to Dragons, let alone the power or ability to control them. Although, the dragon attack could just be one major coincidence, however unlikely that sounds. This story originates from a different website. Ensure the author gets the support they deserve by reading it there. Weirder things have happened recently. Anyway, Edward had already sent his people away. Off to the place the merchant had talked about after he had decided to disobey the King''s order, which showed great foresight on his part as well, I should add. Maybe I need to take a page out of his book, or better yet, I should ask him to come work for me. My foresight might as well be nonexistent with the amount of stupid shit I seem to stumble into on a daily basis. Like the exact predicament I''m in now, for example. If I hadn''t met Wheeler, he would have never traveled to Gorn to boast of a new mountain town that is safe and secluded. Which would have led Edward Gorn scattering his citizens in the Alona region instead of sending them my way. That would have meant no refugees for me and no DP farm, but I wouldn''t have to be getting ready for invasion if that was the case. However, I wouldn''t be where I am today without the DP farm... I mean, my citizens. Sure the King of Tira is on his way south to Varona, but he doesn''t know anything about us. No one knows anything about us except for what Wheeler tells them, and if anything, the King will probably think we''re just another city in the sticks, surrounded by forests and a crazy-looking mountain to boot. Low on every resource needed due to our poorly-secluded location, but fortunately for us that couldn''t be further from the truth. Even if he were to send an advance party, he wouldn''t learn much as none of them would return. And what could he learn from long-range scouting? That Varona is actually a pretty place full of untold beauty that doesn''t deserve to be destroyed? Maybe. Those scouts might not return either depending on how far into the forest they get. Then again, it won''t mean a thing if the King is actually being possessed by a Demon. That was what the elf had said. The ''Demon King'' was at the forefront of the attack on his village, slaughtering as many people as he could and letting none escape. I''ve never actually met a demon before, and in fact I''m probably the closest thing to one that I know of, but I''m pretty sure they only care about one thing. Power. This time, I might have a genuine reason to worry. I know every time I''ve done so in the past I''ve proven to look the fool. Most recently the Dragon incident springs to mind, but I squash the memory down and keep going. Not just a Demon possessing a King, but a Demon King. I might be reading more into Ed''s version of the story than Edward''s, but it''s concerning my survival. I can''t help but think the worst. I know I''m pretty damn strong these days, but even in my fight with the Lazy God, I still relied on Light. There were some good bonuses that came with doing so, the main being Light''s evolution, but what does that say about me and my confidence? That don''t I trust my own power any more, or that have I got so used to relying on others that it''s my go to move now? It''s like I''ve started delegating my fights to other people. Have I gotten so used to shirking responsibility that I can''t even fight for myself? No. That''s not right. It can''t be. I try to think of the last fight I actually participated in myself and the one that comes to mind is my fight with Kal in the Core Room. That was actually a long time ago... Snapping out of that daydream before shit turns melancholic, I focus on the task at hand. The King wiped out Gorn with his Dragon and moved the army south-west to attack the elves'' forest. If there''s no change in his movements, that means his army will continue south in our direction and that they''ll be here in less than a week''s time. That''s some bullshit right there. My city is finally kicking ass in terms of individual growth and the DP factory is stronger than ever. As nervous as I am, I''m not about to go and let some asshole King take what''s mine. Not after all the effort I''ve put in to make sure everything runs smoothly, with as little effort as needed on my part. There''s no way I''m going to give that up now.
Dungeon Core Abi Level 59: 3047/41600XP until next level 59 Floors 469 Rooms 872 Tunnels 24,457 Monsters 9 Contracted Monsters 11,138 Traps 343,878DP Available
So yeah. I don''t look often, but that''s what I''m talking about. My level almost matches my body. I feel as though I should be a 75, at least. Also, my DP is the absolute bomb. That''s all thanks to my Overstock skill hitting max level. I can hold and retain any points I get without worrying about them disappearing. I still can''t believe there''s a maximum amount that Cores are limited to per level. I would have been screwed if I hadn''t unlocked that skill early on. Between Tune, Orad and Varona, I''m raking in just over 100,000DP a day. Orad and Tune both contribute a modest 20,000 points each from their respective populations, but all the rest comes from Varona and the progress of my citizens clearly shows. Higher levels mean more points. I''m at that stage where I can purchase and alter anything I want, but my city is flourishing right now so I''m reluctant to change how things work in Varona. The citizens have grown used to embracing the odd life style that''s supported here and I would rather leave it at that than risk damaging it. Plus, I''ve got two other cities to test shit out on now. That''s definitely where I''ll start making changes. That said, that''s a task for future Abi. Abi the King Slayer, if she lives long enough to brag about it. Abi the Present needs to get her shit together and stop thinking about things that aren''t going to help her win the fight. Should I just throw Light at them? I don''t actually think his level would save the Master Assassin against an onslaught of troops raining down on him. At some point quantity will overwhelm quality as the latter will end up being worn down. Although, I''m pretty sure Noir would jump in there to help if I asked him too. His level is like 90 something if I remember rightly. I could also forbid Becca from fighting. That would make the Rebellion Dragon want to participate even more knowing that I don''t want her to. We''ll see how it goes. I was panicking before, but now that I''ve had a quick look at my status, we''re fine. I''m calm. If they''re trying to win by strength in numbers then they''ve already lost. I have 24,000 family members, and a couple dozen of them are Dragons. Not to mention that half of the citizens of Varona are battle-ready which equates to another 10,000 troops made up of adventurers and guards. I could also summon another 12,000 Assassins with the points I have extra, shoring my own forces up to almost 50,000. Either that or I could summon more Dragons. However, that plan has its own drawbacks. Either way, there''s no way I can lose this fight. Right? Chapter 86: Preparations It''s 20,000DP for your regular Dragon of Rebellion, which is a little on the high side for your average Core, but I''m not like your average Core. By the time the King arrives, I should have over a million DP to throw at him. That DP could go towards 50 Dragons of Rebellion. Alternatively, it could also go towards 100 Shadow Dragons or 200 Dark Dragons. Not that I would choose a lesser creature over its evolution for the upcoming war, and even if I could go with their third evolution, I wouldn''t. I worry immensely that the next one will turn out to be the Dragon of Disobedience or something of equal ridiculousness. Knowing that my points are better spent elsewhere, it''s likely that I won''t lean towards Dragons when I use them. It was just good to know the numbers I could have expected from the mischievous monsters. If anything, Assassins have been my go to summon ever since they were still Rogues, and I don''t see a reason to change that now. They come prepared and ready to take on any task I give them, and rarely, if ever, fail. The Magi on the other hand, need a little training and guidance before they can be classed as battle-ready. Otherwise they would also be good candidates for mass summoning. If I could summon Rainbow Mages en masse, that would be something I might have definitely considered. Anya can use almost every type of magic there is, the exception being Time. The only drawback to the fact that she can use almost every element, is that she has hardly trained any spells except her healing. My other Mages, Arch Mages and Magi, still have their classes stuck as Necromancer, but that doesn''t mean they can''t learn from other schools of magic. It''s just that when their proficiency in Dark element is that high, it makes learning another element harder than it usually would. They''re the exact opposite of my Rainbow Mage. Or that''s what Anya told me. I''m not a mage and wasn''t even able to cast spells in my previous life. I had a proficiency for Dark magic, but I still couldn''t cast any spells for some reason as, more often than not, they would fail. Instead, I relied solely on my skills to make up for what I couldn''t do with magic and it was working well for me until... well, you know. The point is, I can''t mass produce Rainbow Mages, but I''m sure the Necromancers will come in handy at some point during the war. Other than deciding what troops to summon once the battle is underway, I have other things on mind. Like how the King''s arrival has thrown my plan to keep purchasing land in the direction of Ishda out of the window. If the elf would have stumbled into my domain just a few days later, I could already have been there. I''m expecting Lord Aldor''s city to provide at least 40,000DP a day. It is the capital of our region, after all. It makes sense that it would have the highest level and heaviest population than all other cities in our area. Except for Varona, that is, but we''re still unknown to many. Especially those outside our own region. Wheeler is still spreading word of our peaceful mountain town day by day, but he mainly travels inside Ishda''s borders. Gorn was different because of how close it was. Apart from Orad and Tune, it was our closest neighbour, and to be honest they were lucky Wheeler went there. However, I don''t think he''ll need to keep playing us up as I''m sure that everyone''s going to know about Varona come next week. I''m also pretty confident that Lord Aldor has no idea what the King is up to either. His city is even further away from the Royal Capital than mine is, but you never know with nobles. He might already have received word about the unprecedented Dragon attack on Gorn, but is choosing to feign ignorance for the moment. Instead of choosing to help, he''s burying his head in the sand. Not only to protect himself, but the life of his daughter Estelle too. I imagine a lot of Lords are doing that right now. Although if they banded together to oppose the King that would pretty much be that. There wouldn''t even be a need for me to fight. I''m pretty sure that combined, the forces of each Lord on our continent could rival not only the King, but potentially me as well. Scary thought.
Instead, the only banners that marched our way were those that flew the King''s colours. It was a golden sword and shield crossed each other on top of a red background. Albus Tira the Fourteenth, King of the entire continent of Tira, is approaching with his army. I found out his name from Edward after we had held a few more meetings regarding strategy over the past few days. Not that I created any of the suggestions that were pitched to me. I only went with one and that was brought up by Me. The monster maker and cleaner had brought up a very valid point at one of those meetings and I just couldn''t refute it. However, it almost left me in tears when I saw what it had cost me. Me had purchased what he suggested the moment I agreed. We didn''t even get to talk costs before I almost throttled him. After they calmed me down and reminded me that I still had plenty of DP leftover with a few day''s more to come, the meeting continued. Stolen novel; please report. I didn''t attend anymore after that as I knew they had been coming up with some good ideas for defence. The main one was a wall. I couldn''t fault that one either. All cities had walls. Even I knew that. Varona had grown so much though, that a wall running from the mountain on one side, then back to the mountain on the other, going all the way around my city, would have eaten up the rest of my DP. I couldn''t afford that, I was already too scared to spend what I had left. Me had a few more ideas that he brought to me privately and I shot them all down claiming I would decide on the day. Sis also came with him once as she had some ideas of her own, mainly self-serving ones like a bigger tower so that she could see the battle better, so she was shot down too and left rejected.
There was only one day left until the King was supposed to arrive at my borders so I decided to get around to the one thing I shouldn''t have put off. I couldn''t help it, though. I was dreading it. I summon Light to my tower and the Master Assassin arrives as his cheerful self. Greeting me and the triplets as though our last encounter wasn''t awkward as fuck, and as though we weren''t on the eve of war. Then again, can I blame him? His confidence is anything but bluster. I just wanna punch him in his big, stupid, adorable, over-levelled head! Violet rolls her eyes as though she could take him in a fight. Her bear cub does the same. "Hi, Light," Blondie welcomed him warmly. "Have you got any food?" "It''s about your second class," I cut in before Light could respond to Amber''s totally unexpected request, earning myself a frown from the redhead in the process. "I''m sorry, Master. I have already chosen it. I was thinking about going with a crafting class," I was already dreading the end of that sentence, when life offered me hope. "But I eventually decided to go down the path of magic." I don''t know what made him choose that direction, but I was happy that he had already made a start on his choice without me, not angry. Wondering what logic he used to come to that decision, I had to ask. "Assassins can only use the Dark element, so I wanted to expand my repertoire." So far so good. Even the triplets are nodding along as though they now have respect for Light and his wise ideas. Finally a good choice. "I''ve been practicing Light magic and now I can make the shadows a little darker." I myself, like the triplets, was also nodding along quite happily until my mind caught up with what the idiot in front of me had just said. "Wait a minute. You learned Light magic, just so that you could make the shadows a little better?" I can feel a headache coming on. "Yeah. Isn''t it a good idea?" He beams as I shoot him down. "No! Why would you even need that skill?" The last time I checked Light''s status was after he became an Assassin and even then, he had more skills than I''d seen in some books. Specifically, a lot of shadow altering darkness skills. Something he can clearly do without Light magic. "So that I can make the light from candles duller, creating even deeper shadows." He tries to defend his choices as I try to explain the reason I''m disappointed. "Light. You have the Skill, Shadow Enclosure. You can literally cover an entire room in darkness. Why the hell would you need..." I let out a sigh. Ranting at Light over his life choices is not the right move here. "You know what? It''s your class and I''m sure you''ll figure it out. I''m still proud of you." The triplets look at me in horror. I''m guessing they thought I should have reprimanded Light over his choice and made him change his class to something that would actually help us out tomorrow, but I don''t wanna rant at him like he''s a Dragon of Rebellion. I have to do enough of that with Becca. That said, I take a quick look at Light''s class and...
Name: Light Master: Abi Class: Master Assassin - Level 101 Class: Magus (Necromancer) - Level 36 Skills Spells Grand Skill Inventory
... yep. Not even surprised. Why would I be? I said I''m learning. Still, that doesn''t stop me from asking though. "How? How are you almost a level 40 Magus already? It''s been like... five days! How do you level up so fast?" I''ve been wondering for a long time how Dropper and Light level up so fast, but neither one of them ever has a good enough answer. "We got lucky." "It was the perfect kill." "It was almost dead when we found it." Were some of the ones I remember before I stopped asking. They were always playing above their level though and that scared me a little. Much like what''s about to happen tomorrow, but hopefully the tables are reversed. "I was killing Goblins and Trolls on the mountain. I didn''t think you would mind." I kiss Light on the cheek, as he''s just made my day, surprising the triplets for a second time today. Every Boss Monster, or family member in most cases, seems to get their own section of mountain dedicated to them. Not only them, but the Sub-Bosses also get a small section of forest and space on my mountain. That wasn''t too bad, but it''s come to be known that each section of my multicoloured mountain has its own monster population based on my Bosses and Sub-Bosses. Worst of all, the largest stretches of mountain are now owned by Goblins and Trolls as I have 21 floors of each. "I love you, Light. Did I tell you before? Well, I have now. You level up to your heart''s extent. Hell, you should even invite Noir." At her idol''s mention, Amber''s ear perked up and she looked around as though he would arrive, even though we were only talking about him. "But that''s my spot," Light tries to counter me. "The whole mountain is not your spot. You need to learn how to share." I begin explaining, but am cut short by the sound of bellowing. "Master!" Noir shouts behind me, scaring me enough that I almost fell off the tower. "Don''t just appear behind me shouting. That almost scared me to death, Noir." Amber''s eyes twinkle in delight as she stares at her idol. She must see something in him that I can''t. That''s the only explanation I can think of. Actually, if my family were able to frustrate the King to death, then we wouldn''t even have to fight. How sweet would that be? I should send some delegates. That''s what Lords do, right? Chapter 87: Sentry Towers Before I knew it, the week had come and gone and the army that was marching towards us arrived at our borders. I knew they were here before they even entered any of the sections of forest that I own. I had lookouts everywhere, and at that point, I knew then that it was time to set my plan in motion. I also knew my citizens weren''t very happy with what had been decided. I heard quite a few people voicing their opinions as they put their trust in the government of Varona and their guardian deity, the Dungeon Core. Not that I gave them a choice. Just in case the King still had more Dragons at his disposal, I wanted my people someplace safe away from their wrath and destruction. Some dragged their feet while others moved with more urgency, but every non-combatant classed Tironian that lived in Varona made their way into my dungeon. Everything had been arranged beforehand as storing the humans was one of the better suggestions I had heard during our meetings. I''d even added ten, extra-large floors to accommodate them. The sheer amount of numbers that would be filling me up was no joking matter. As my citizens fled the usually safe streets of Varona from those that sought to claim their lives, they willingly leapt into the embrace of my dungeon. A new friend, maybe. A strange power, definitely. A desperate hope, absolutely. The guards and adventurers who were made up of refugees from Gorn stayed to fight as they felt as though they had a score to settle. A few of the more recent initiates, since word of Varona was still spreading throughout Ishda, also stayed behind to help man the city perimeter with the friends and colleagues they''d got to know since arriving. We had no walls to protect our beautiful city. Another lack of foresight in part due to the fact that we are constantly expanding. This was brought up to me more than once at almost every meeting I attended, but I just couldn''t afford it. Well I could, but it would have left me broke. The only type of defensive cover the humans have are homes that had been added around my city in a semicircle formation. From one side of the mountain to the other, the men and women of Tironia are standing ready to defend their new home -my home, too- where we will fight together as a united front. Not that they will see much action if everything goes to plan. I really hope the fighting won''t reach Varona if I''m being honest. Mainly because I don''t want the DP factory to lose out on any of its resources, but it would also be a tragic loss of life if that were to occur. Also, I''m still trying to help these guys ascend, or whatever, and I don''t like people interrupting my work. That said, there''s one more reason I kept all of the actual people inside the city limits. As familiar as they are with a human-turned-goblin walking down the street and peaceful Dragons kicking around the sky, the rest of what lies in my dungeon would be a completely different story. Hell, some of them even scared me at one point or the other. Webster and Sam spring into mind, for example. However, due to the sheer amount of numbers the Demon King brought with him, I had to respond with numbers of my own. Some of whom have never seen actual combat before -unless The Coliseum counts- but are more than strong enough to fight. I had to bring out everyone. Other than the Goblins and the Trolls, that is. I don''t need the headache of following them around. And I couldn''t just leave my Core unguarded. That would have been extremely foolish, so I left one person behind. The one whose job it is to actually guard me. The Boss of my dungeon. The one who spends more time in Varona, in the Pleasure Palace, then she does her own damn room. Even after she asked for those ridiculous trinkets and I obliged. Yes. Other than the humans, the Goblins and the Trolls, the one person I left in charge of them all, was Veris. When Veris is usually involved, I try not to put much thought into the matter because it never seems to end well. It was the same with this situation. I mean, she is the person who guards my Core. It only makes sense that I make her do her job at the one time she''s supposed to. I know she usually pushes the task off to one of the Sweets as well, seeing as how it''s a pretty boring task being my boss and all, but today there''s no compromise. She was the first Vagabond. The strongest at the time and she''s only got stronger since then. Even though she''s a bit loopy and sadistic, she''s proven herself among the others and is a very respectable level 96. Which equates to being strong as fuck. Unauthorized use: this story is on Amazon without permission from the author. Report any sightings. Good luck getting past her. Kat, Anon and Simon, my three Categorisers, were among the other humans and the non-combat classes. They were also joined by a pregnant Sophie, much to her displeasure and not without a considerable amount arguing. Technically, they are all combat classes, just not in any way that helps me, and sadly their skills would only be a detriment to my own in this fight. Everyone else was in the forest, and when I say everyone, I mean everyone. Hidden away at specific locations, my family members waited in ambush for what would hopefully be our first successful war. Most of the major players in Varona were with Me and the Triplets at one of my fancy, new towers. Everyone other than Light, Noir, Dum and Dee, that is. I had decided to use their unique skills for a special mission. It dawned on me, during our wait for the King to arrive, that my city had even less defences outside the non-existent walls than we had wall itself, apart from the regular patrols we managed. OK, while I was trying to work out the best way to spend points, Me argued that I was lacking in the defence department. He also stated it was Hana and Mira who ran our patrols, not me. But I was in charge, though, and everyone knows credit falls uphill in a pyramid. Silly Me. Anyway, that led to the construction of the watchtowers, which Sis was mega jealous of, by the way. Practically begged me to make her one, she did. The tower''s presence in the forest is quite commanding, and to be fair, I''d want one as well if they weren''t my own. They stand dozens of feet above even the tallest of trees and are made entirely of Mythril. Each floor has spaces for archers or mages to send out spells and arrows while enjoying the safety the walls provide. Better yet each tower supports twenty floors and are magically reinforced to repel 80% of the damage they take back to the one who dealt the attack. Best of all, I don''t just have one of these towers, but I have three. With the mountain at our back and the watchtowers placed at strategic locations around the outside Varona, or the Sentry Towers, as Me likes to correct me every time I say it wrong, we were now able to spot attacks that might come at us from any direction before they even got close to my domain. It was pretty sweet. I didn''t complain until after I saw the cost of the bill. My Gods damn Sentry Towers cost almost 100,000DP each! I mean, they are made out of mythril and magically reinforced to reflect damage, but damn. That was a blow to my purse and a very significant one at that. Looking at the figure in my status, I let out a sigh as I would have had a million DP had I not agreed to Me''s Tower suggestion. He''s not usually wrong when he offers advice, though, and even Sis backed him up, calling me more than a little foolish for lacking in the defence department. She said it was like I was baiting people to attack me, and maybe she wasn''t wrong. It had worked so far after all. Most of enemies that arrived in Varona have underestimated us sorely, based only on our appearance alone, and none of them actually ever got the chance to reevaluate their mistake as they died faster than it would take a person to realise they''ve stood in boar shit. And boar shit is quite big, so you don''t usually miss something that size. That said, did Sis bait me into purchasing the towers because she thought she might have gotten one? She is a very complicated person. Or as complicated as a person can be when they''re not actually a person, but a dungeon creation and reward system instead. Still, I can''t fault the Towers. As pricey as they were, they should definitely keep the fighting away from my city. Not that I couldn''t rebuild it afterwards if the fight was taken there. I just don''t like to add more jobs to the ever growing list that Sacha hasn''t even started on yet. "Sacha," the Deputy Mayor stops talking with Carrie as I decide now is a good enough time as any to ask for her help. I begin explaining why I need her to write me a list of all the important jobs and tasks I may or may not forget. Mayor Kana used to brief me on the day-to-day activities and what needed to be done on my end, but recently she''s been a little too inundated with work to meet me. Frankly, she should delegate more tasks to Sacha to help relieve herself. I know I am delegating to her, and Sacha''s not even my deputy. Technically they''re all my family, but that''s beside the point. Sacha agreed as though it wasn''t a problem at all and she informed me that she already had a list of sorts but would alter it to fit my needs. How fucking cool is she. A slight tug on the bottom of my dress draws my attention away from my conversation with Sacha. Amber looks up at me as though she''s about to cry and I already know what''s coming. Fortunately, most of my family have acquired an inventory after learning from Marie at the Academy. The old Space-Mage-turned-Syndicate-member tries to shirk off as many classes as she can in favor of going out on missions with the others, but when she shows up to teach, her classes are always packed. So packed that Mystique even lets her teach in the main hall. The one they use for ceremonies and events, and even then, the hall is still rammed with people who can''t find a seat and have to stand instead. Thanks to these classes and the sticky-fingered old lady''s teachings, Amber didn''t burst into tears after having gone a few hours without food. Blondie was bouncing around person-to-person being everyone''s best friend and agreeing with everyone. Even if two people disagreed she would agree with both of them. Violet was... Huh? Now that I think about it, I haven''t seen Violet in a while. I wonder where she went? Chapter 88: Secret Mission In the forest that surrounds Mt Morte on the boundaries of what Abi would consider hers, King Aldus'' army has set up a base camp and is preparing to lay siege to its next enemy. Little do the soldiers know that four high-levelled Assassins and a very sneaky, purple-haired Dragon girl, carrying an extremely adorable bear cub with her, have just snuck their way inside the King''s tent through use of the shadows. Light is nodding to himself, pleased with his application of Light magic on the candles that light up the large tent. Noir raises an eyebrow Light''s way before shaking his head. Dum and Dee watch the two make facial expressions at each other for longer than they should until someone''s voice grabs everyone''s attention. "What are you doing, stupids? Stop death-staring each other and do what you''re supposed to do." Violet and her cub are standing next to the Assassins as they all throw puzzled looks her way until she''s had enough. "Are you just going to stand there, or what?" "Yes. Are you?" Another voice, this time deeper calls out from further inside the tent. Making his way through the drapes that hang to conceal his sleeping area, Kind Aldus steps into the larger compartment. He is only wearing a pair of white-silk pants, but his figure is still imposing. Each Assassin feels it. The force of domination. The type that comes with being a ruler. His hair is the colour of gold and reaches his shoulders. Clearly he wasn''t expecting company and it looks as though he may have even been sleeping. "It wasn''t that good," Noir eventually breaks the silence. Instead of answering the king, however, his statement is aimed at Light. "How can you not see the benefits to controlling Light as well as Dark. It''s like... the ultimate combo." Once again, Light is left defending his life choices against the opinion of another. "Aren''t we what?" Dum is the only one to respond to King Aldur, who then locks his red eyes on the Assassin and activates a skill. "What?" Dee asks his partner. "That didn''t even make sense, Dum. Why do you always say stupid shit?" "What? I thought he said ''aren''t you?''" Dum breaks eye contact with the King, much to the Royal''s surprise and begins bickering with his partner instead. "He said, ''Are you?''" Dee corrects him. "Why would he say ''Are you?'' Aren''t you just makes more sense." Dum rebuts. "Aren''t you what,'' doesn''t though!" Dee pinches the bridge of his nose as he already knows he''s not going to win this argument. "It does when you think about it." Dum laughs, not phased in the slightest that he misunderstood the King, or if he is, he doesn''t show it. "No. It does when you think about it. No one else, Dum. No one else." Beside Dum and Dee, both Light and Noir have stepped it up a little and are now brandishing weapons. However, instead of aiming their blades at the King, they''re both pointed at each other like in a contest of dicks. "I could take you any day, you know? I''m over level 100 in my main class now." Light boasts his recent success to Noir as the redhead''s face can''t quite hide his jealousy. "Don''t be ridiculous. That''s only because Master summoned you first. If we were summoned together, I would be much stronger than you." Noir argues back as best he can. "In your dreams. You could never hope to be as strong as I am. You''re not even a Master Assassin yet," the blue-haired Assassin laughs. Taking delight in his rival''s misery. "You have no idea what I''m capable of. I could take you right now, Master Wizard bullshit or not. I''ll kick your ass whenever." Noir is ready to go, and a heavy, red aura washes over the tent. Light doesn''t back down though and instead forces his own blue aura back at Noir as both men fight for dominance in the middle of the spacious tent. "See. This is why I said it should have been just us," Dum tells Dee as they watch the two forces of nature collide against each other. Red vs blue in a battle to determine who''s stronger. Their own bickering finished when they felt Noir''s aura spread out. "No. This is why I said they should have come on their own. I didn''t even want to come, but when do I ever get a say in matters?" Until Dee disagrees with his partner again and decides to take a seat in one of the surrounding chairs feeling defeated, that is. Unauthorized usage: this narrative is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. "Why wouldn''t you want to come? This is where we can prove ourselves to our Master." Violet sits down next to Dee with a plate of food she has managed to acquire from... somewhere? As she feeds her bear cub, the Dragon loli looks at the four men still arguing and shakes her head. "You lot are fucking wild, you know?" Her words give everyone pause, even King Aldor has to take a second glance, as they take a moment to gawp at the child feeding her bear cub before resuming their arguments. The King himself is rubbing his temples and looks extremely irritated. Just as the Royal guards are about to burst through the flap of the King''s tent, Light fires a wave of Shadows at Noir. The Assassin deflected it and sent the wave cascading out of the entrance along with the King''s men. "What was that? I thought you were the strongest?" Noir goads Light into unleashing a second wave of shadows, washing away a second group of guards that had been trying to enter the tent. "That was the weakest Shadow Wave I could conjure. Even Dum could have stopped that one." Light plays down the other Assassin''s bragging, catching another''s attention in the process. "Hey! I resent your implication of inferiority," Dum pouts, but none of the other Assassins pay him any attention. Both are still locked onto each other until a third aura joins the power play and pushes them back. "What the hell? Who said you could join the party?" Noir scowls at King Aldus as he and Light jump back. It''s safe to say that at this point, not a single Assassin has remembered why they were sent to the King in the first place. Light''s pretty confident that it was something to do with determining strength though. "This is my tent!" King Aldus yells in annoyance, his aura swelling up inside as black lines streak through the available air. "This is my camp," He points a finger at Noir and shouts "Kneel!" Everyone waits to see what will happen with bated breath as Violet fed the bear cub her leftovers. The crunching and chewing is the only noise present. Until Noir finally breaks the silence. Looking back and forth between the King and Light, he asks the latter, "Is he serious?" The colour of the King''s face almost matches that of his eyes as he flushes a deep red from embarrassment. A hole in the fabric of reality tears beside him and from within he pulls out a long sword that oozes evil intent. "That was different," Light comments. The way the King had made his blade appear had an uncanny resemblance to how the Assassins store and retrieve their own weapons. "It''s time to get serious." Noir starts laughing until a plate of leftovers hits him on the head. "Are you dumb?" Violet yells. Sensing the danger from the other side of the tent. "No I''m Dum," Tweedledum answers her with a smile. "She meant dumb, Dum," Tweedledee shakes his head. "Yeah, that''s me," his partner smiles. "Dum with a b. You''re just plain-old Dum." Only to frown straight after. "What are you trying to say?" He asks, sporting a sadder tone than before. "I''ve had enough of your foolery. You dare come here and mock me?" King Aldus starts pacing forward, furious at the lack of respect he has been shown by the people he believes to be Assassins. He''s angry that he doesn''t even know they''re not people-people. At least he got the Assassin part right though. Also, Violet has little horns that stick out just above her temples. In the King''s rage, he seems to have just overlooked that fact completely. "We didn''t come here to mock you," Light shouts at the King before disappearing into a shadow, throwing the Demon-possessed man off his stride for a second. "As much as I hate to agree with him, Light''s right. We''ve barely even spoken to you since arriving." Noir also drops into his own shadow, leaving only Dum, Dee and Violet for the King to march on. "Where do you think you''re going?" King Aldus suddenly breaks into a run as he''s now possessed by more than just a Demon. An infuriating rage that he can''t quite quell is overflowing from the King and it carries him forward, closing the distance between him and his tormentors in mere moments. "Oh shit." Dee stands up holding onto Violet''s arm and immediately drops into his own shadow. Dum, who wasn''t even facing his enemy, only just manages to dodge the King''s attack by a hair''s breadth before leaping away. King Aldus doesn''t give him a chance to land however and is upon him again in the blink of an eye. With lightning-fast speed he brings his sword around in a wide arc, aiming to slice the airborne Assassin in half. His anger is driven past the point of no return in the next moment as his attack is parried by the stupid man sporting the goofy smile. "Phew. That was close," Dum chuckles. Still smiling and not showing a hint of fear, as though he hadn''t almost died then and there. Although he knows that another moment later and his daggers wouldn''t have been able to deflect the King''s blow. "Hey, you''re quite strong. Why don''t you come and work for my master?" Dum smiles so hard that he has to stop himself from laughing. The King however is not amused. "Are you fucking joking me! You little piece of..." King Aldus lost it. He didn''t even get to finish his sentence as Dum began disappearing into the shadows still sporting the same dumb smile. Unwilling to let the would-be clowns make a fool of him, the enraged King launched one last attack at the annoying Assassin as he fled. The thrown-blade inflicted a shallow cut on Dum''s arm and the King activated his curse just before his assailant left. Once the Assassins were gone, the tent was silent save for King Aldus'' ragged breath. He had been ignored, directed and belittled by the would-be Assassins. Even though none of them made a single attempt on his life and if anything seemed more intent on fighting each other than him, Aldus the Fourth knew they were his enemies. Strange as they were. Stranger yet was the little girl who had been carrying the bear cub. King Aldus wondered if she was their master as one of his troops slowly entered the tent. After two failed attempts and an enraged King, the men outside had drawn straws to see who would be the next to enter. Sadly, the method always has a loser and the poor sap that had just entered was in for a nightmare. With no one else to vent his fury on, the Demon King was sure to take it out on the next person he saw. Chapter 89: Prelude To War My four Assassins, one of them featuring a nasty black cut on his arm, arrive on top of the already-crowded tower with a very sneaky Oblivion Dragon and her pet in tow. Talia rushes to Dum''s side and checks his injury herself before letting the mages get to him. Violet begins sneaking through the crowd, but doesn''t go unnoticed by my eyes. Fortunately for her, I''ll have to leave her reprimanding till later. Right now, I''m stuck trying to make sense of three conversations at once and am failing miserably as I watch the sneaky little Dragon escape. Probably off to tell the others of her secret adventure and boast of how cool she is. The little shit. I would have expected that sort of thing from Becca, not one of the triplets. Never mind. Bigger fish to fry and all that. Light was babbling on about how his Light magic worked even better than he thought it would. He was also ranting that Noir had started a fight for no apparent reason. The aforementioned Assassin solely denied that allegation and instead claimed that it was in fact Light that had initiated the fight. Frankly, I wasn''t even bothered that there had been a fight. Nor who had started it. That was my general intention after all. The worst part was that I had to stand there and listen to the rest of their shit all while hoping that they managed to pick up some useful information. It wasn''t fruitful, let me tell you. Apparently, and I''m saying this now, they threw that word around a lot. It was usually followed by an allegation toward another Assassin, but I wasn''t interested in those parts of their story. I didn''t want to know that Dee had called Dum ''Dumb'' and that Dum had gotten offended by it. What I wanted to know was why Dum had a nasty, black gash on his arm. A demonic looking cut that my Cleric, Necromancers and even my Rainbow Mage, weren''t able to fix. I didn''t care who used their aura first or who escalated it to using skills, I wanted to know what skills the King had and what his aura was like. Yet for some reason, the annoying group of Assassins had no answers for me on that front. They had one job. Well, two. But the first was supposed to take priority. "Information gathering. That''s what I wanted you to do. It wasn''t too much to ask. You all have eyes and ears after all, don''t you? Yet no. No information. Just a pissed off King. Which was your secondary task so good job guys. Way to go." I''m not happy and the sarcasm is evident in my tone. Damn. I''ve been a right bitch recently. What''s up with that? A quick check on Dum shows that he''s not dying. He''s inflicted by a curse that prevents healing, evident by his status. Even though the Assassin has a serious injury, at least it''s some information. "Good job, guys," I say again as Dum joins his team, this time with more honesty. Noir perks up at my sentiment which instantly aggravates me, but I suck it up and keep smiling. "On a scale of one to ten, how pissed off would you say the King is right now?" After a bit of discussion they arrive at the number, "999." This is what I mean. I get what they''re doing, I do. They want me to know the King''s mega angry. Like, Dragon angry. So angry that it''s completely off the scale. I get it. But 999? Come on. Shaking it off, I thank the squad before grabbing everyone''s attention. "Ok, guys. It''s time to get into position. The King''s probably readying his soldiers as we speak and thanks to Dum we know he has the ability to inflict curses. That means he probably is being controlled by a Demon, like we had heard. That said, there''s no need to hold back on this, though. We''ve worked too hard to let what''s ours be taken from us. We built this place from the ground up, yes it was with magic, but we still did it, and no stupid, Demon-controlled King is going to take it away from us, nor will he force us out." Agreement and excitement comes from the crowd. I''m not usually one for big speeches, but it feels necessary now. "This is our home, not theirs. They''re invaders, aiming to take all that is ours, down to our very lives and more. Are we going to let that happen?" If you encounter this narrative on Amazon, note that it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. "No!" The shout erupts from the top of the tower. Loud enough to scare the birds away, if they hadn''t already fled. "Damn right we''re not. We''re not going to let no half-leveled soldiers and their King trample over our hard work. Over everything we''ve accomplished. Like fuck. You all know your positions and what you''re supposed to be doing. I have faith in you. All of you. Even you, Noir." The redhead beams in delight at being directly mentioned in my speech and he throws a smug look in Light''s direction. "Each individual here is a force to be reckoned with in their own way. Everyone of you is special beyond what you believe. And most importantly, I love you all more than I can say with actual words." I spread my will through the crowd, wrapping them up in the warm feeling I''m exuding from my core and I feel their own love in return. A circuit runs between me and them. The reciprocation and the offering of love circles through us all as hugs begin to be given and received. "It''s time to take your places." Slowly, Assassins and Mages begin teleporting from the tower using their own different techniques. Anya approaches me with Lola and as she holds me close she tells me to "Stay safe." I''m Abi the Invincible you know, I want to laugh to ease the tension. She looks more worried than I feel, which chips away at my confidence slightly. Once they''ve gone - off to Dragons Daycare as their role is more of a supportive one, I psych myself back up and watch as people leave in groups, one after the other. Off to take their predetermined spots. Ready to coordinate with the rest of my family that already lurk in the woods. Bats, Spiders, Wolves, Golems, Harpies and Sirens are but a few of the more monstrous elements of our family that have finally been allowed out into the world above. I know I usually argue with Me over the semantics of what we call ourselves, but on this occasion it might be better to agree with his definition. Although he has finally got over calling our family members monsters. It''s just a shame that that''s exactly what we''re going to be right now and I''m not any different. In a way... I suppose that makes me Queen of the Monsters, right? I''ll take that. A Dungeon Core is just another type of monster anyway. Albeit one that doesn''t move and makes other monsters, but still a monster nonetheless. Knowing that and unleashing my horde upon the surface of Tironia, almost makes me feel guilty. Like I''m a bad human/Dungeon Core. I mean, it''s not like I''ve released them so we can go around raiding villages and stealing humans. I''ve got the Syndicate for that. My monsters are here solely for the defence of Varona and maybe to gain a bit of experience in the process, but that''s obvious. The only time to fight most of them get is in the Coliseum. That said, the Ringmaster is amazing at his job. He constantly alternates through the main floors when coming up with training routines and he doesn''t leave any species out. That means this isn''t my family''s first fight, which would likely have been a major disaster if it were. Once most people have left, the top of my tower is almost empty. Only those that I will direct myself during the war, and the triplets, remain by my side. Me''s still here too, seeing how there are currently no Adventurer Guild patrols or any human guards for him to help level up. Inside, mages line the inner staircase from the bottom to the top. All ready to direct whatever magic they can at our would-be aggressors, defended by the small arches that they will be firing from. The Sentry Towers are more akin to little fortresses than as a means of surveillance, and with their reinforcement to magic, it only gives the statement more credibility. Strong as they are through, that doesn''t mean they they are invincible. From the edges of the forest, a wave of black and red energy, reminiscent of the Shadow Blades I often see my assassins use but on a much larger scale, begins to cut down the trees directly in front of us. The demonic tear in space is hurled right at us and explodes against my tower and its magically reinforced structure. Fortunately, Me talked me into getting the good stuff. Any ordinary tower would have been wiped off the face of Tironia had we been cheaper. I suddenly don''t feel quite as sore as before when I found out how much they cost. That''s for sure. Thank god they are reinforced and I hope no one was caught in that, are the only thoughts I can muster as I look at the damage my tower has taken. There are cracked bricks, but other than that we''ve held strong. I can''t see the tower taking more than a dozen hits, though. They are strong, but they can only last so long. After taking count of the damages, I stare out at the army marching towards us. I can see them myself now. Even with the distance between us, I can see them marching on thanks to the felled trees from the King''s skill. At least, I hope that was the King''s skill. I could do without him having some secret powerhouses in his ranks. Not that it''s likely, but I can''t rule out the possibility. That''s why Noir and Carrie are still on my tower instead of in the shadows with the others. I''ve kept them on hand, as well as a few other Assassins and Mages, in case anyone can''t handle what they''re up against. I''ve got my fingers crossed that I won''t need to deploy them. The nerves I managed to quell before are slowly creeping back in, and I embrace them, too. It would be stupid if I was overconfident right now, which makes fear a good feeling. It means I''m not 100% percent stupid. That said, I can''t let fear control my emotions. I''ve also got a bad track record of seeing red when shit gets real, so I need to keep that under wraps. Then again, this could be the best time to use Dungeon Mist. In fact, it''s probably the only chance I''ll get. I haven''t actually used the skill properly yet and every time I have it was always involuntary. The people around me get as angry as I am and I instantly cut the skill, but... I wonder what it actually does? Well. There''s no time like the present, right? Chapter 90: The First Blow After all the times I complained, I''m actually rather bummed out that Light won''t be able to one-shot this fight. 20,000 soldiers, or so Me estimates, are lined up in front of my Sentry Tower. King Aldus is at the front with two very beefy-looking men behind him. They''re identical in every way except for an eyepatch that they wear on opposite sides. To be honest, they look like your everyday thugs rather than soldiers and I wouldn''t be surprised if half of these numbers haven''t been conscripted quite recently. That said, I''m still picking up a really nasty vibe from eyepatches A and B. The King''s isn''t much better either as he''s full-on glaring at my tower in disgust. Maybe he''s like Sis and the green-eyed monster has him? If we can settle this without violence, I''ll happily build you your own. Hell, I''ll even make it bigger than mine. Maybe. "Where is your Lord!?" He shouts, still showing some anger from before and also assuming his voice has to be loud to be heard by the people inside. Guess what, guy. I''m a dungeon. I can hear perfectly fine when you''re speaking normally. What an idiot. I look at the people still on top of the tower, expecting them to be nodding along in agreement. Instead, they seem to be staring at me expectantly. "Sacha," I whisper to one person I know who will have a good answer. "Why''s everyone looking at me like that?" "You''re our Lord, Master. The human down there wishes to speak with you." As always, Sacha''s answer is perfect. Not what I wanted to hear, but precise and to the point no less. Shit. This is where I make an ass of myself, isn''t it? It doesn''t happen often these days, as every one of my family is connected to the same link, but I send Me a personal message through our private link.
I take it you don''t want the others to hear my opinion?
Don''t do that, please. You know I don''t. Otherwise I would have just asked you normally. I don''t know how to speak to royalty and what if he attacks me straight away? Are there rules to war? I think there are, but I have no idea what they are. Do you? You can be my war advisor...
Abi, I think you''re overthinking this. Just be yourself. If he attacks you then just attack him back.
Seriously?
Quite. I think you should blast him away the moment you get down there.
Huh? That threw me off. Yep, I wasn''t expecting that one. I''m pretty sure Me used to be the conservative one, unless it was to do with prisoners. He just doesn''t seem to like them. Probably Sis rubbing off him as she wants them all killed and reincarnated too. Still, his advice isn''t exactly helpful. Definitely going to make myself look like a fool. Yep. No two ways about it. "Alright then. I guess I''ll be back soon." No one tries to stop me, not that they would, but someone offering to go in my stead wouldn''t go amiss. Alas, no one volunteers and I port off feeling blue. In front of my tower, I appear from the floor like an Assassin would, but it''s just my dungeon features at play disguising my identity. I don''t want to give too much away this early in the game. King Aldus has long, golden hair and very bright eyes. Red as a blood moon and deep like the ocean, they never left my own as I rose from the ground. Although, even though he had asked, the King didn''t seem happy to see me. If anything he looked even angrier after I arrived. He probably wasn''t expecting a short, green-haired woman to pop up, that''s for sure. More likely expecting a man as the term Lord implies. I''m pretty sure anything I say will not be well received. "That''s the dude," Violet points toward the King and Amber''s eyes light up. "Do you have any food with you?" She asks. If you spot this narrative on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation. "Hello, Aldus. I''m Blondie," the third tag-along chirps merrily. Before I can say a word we''ve already blown it. At least I didn''t make a fool of myself though. The King begins to summon a ridiculous amount of demonic energy in the palm of his hand. Before he has the chance to use it though, I panic. Throwing a ridiculous amount of my own concentrated mana at him first. Unfortunately, I didn''t manage to kill him. Eyepatch A and Eyepatch B conjured some type of demonic shield, stopping my attack and informing me that they might indeed have a few powerhouses I was unaware of. The King laughs maniacally as the eyepatch twins drop the barrier, leaving him free to launch the ball of demonic energy in his hand towards us at alarming speed. Realising that our talks are already over before I even got a chance to speak, I try to teleport us away. For some reason my dungeon function doesn''t seem to want to work as I watch in horror as the mass of energy tears up the ground and disintegrates the fallen trees on its approach. I don''t know what I can do to stop it. I don''t have a barrier skill. I wish I did, but it''s too late to visit the Bale of Fortune right now. Raising my arm up to meet the mass of black and red energy in a futile effort to stop the sphere of death is all I can do to protect the triplets. To my surprise, a black barrier appears around us right as the blade of demonic energy crashes against it. Swiveling my head, I see Violet, Blondie and Amber smiling with their own arms raised. Their joy didn''t last however as the shadow barrier couldn''t endure the pressure from the King''s attack. Shattering like glass, the barrier the triplets erected folds under the weight and the demonic energy hits us like a horse-drawn carriage. Visions of evil acts enter my mind as my body is thrown through the air, straight against the side of the Sentry Tower. Scenes play out through the haze that I can barely make sense of. A man I don''t know stabs another man over nothing but a spilt drink in a tavern somewhere. A group of children are taking turns hitting and kicking a girl tied to a tree. A woman poisons her husband''s dinner and watches on happily as he lays frothing at the mouth afterwards. Worst of all is Kal. I see our ex-companion plunge his sword into Anya and commit the unspeakable once again. I watch them all while unable to move. Unable to speak. Unable to stop the act once again. Hatred fills my heart. I hate Kal for what he has done. More so I hate the King for making me once more relive the worst moment of my life. "Kill him." Technically, I''m referring to Kal as I''m still hallucinating. Laid against the tower where I landed, my family thought I was referring to the King. They take my words as the signal and the battle starts in earnest. The ground shakes as a tide of monsters appears from the forest on both flanks of the army, crashing into the sides of their ranks. It doesn''t stop there though as a swarm of Assassins appear at their flank and begin bombarding them with skills. I didn''t know any of that was happening however as I was still trapped in my own personal nightmare. I had reached the Core and Kal had just caught up to me. I''m pissed. Not the weak-ass me then, but the me here and now. This will be the third fucking time. I know this one and my terrortation session weren''t real, but I''ll be fucked if I let it happen again. Wanting to kill Kal before my fateful act plays out once again, I unleash my fury. However, what I want to happen doesn''t happen because things never seem to go my way. Instead of watching Kal die, my rage shatters the illusion instead and I snap awake to a new scene of horror. Smoke billows from the battlefield where skills had caused explosions and set people ablaze. The sound of blades clashing and screaming is loud enough to give a regular person nightmares. I already have them and am not too worried for my own sanity. What I am worried about is my family. Violet, Blondie and Amber all lay still in front of me. Parts of their skin burnt from the King''s attack. Hair singed and the red hue of the Dungeon Mist clinging to them as it has already swept across everything that is mine. I don''t want to look, but I can''t bring myself to face away. This is my fault. I wasn''t strong enough. The triplets, whose incessant consistency never ceased to amaze me, had to defend me with their own shields because I was weak. I can''t take it. I try to stand up, ready to release everything that has built up over the course of my life, my death and everything in-between. I hate Kal which gives me strength and I hate the king which gives me drive. I also hate myself for what had just happened and that motivates me beyond limits. I stand up and only then do I understand that limits exist for a reason. Even after being shielded by the triplets, I am missing the arm I had held out to stop the King''s attacks, as well as my left leg. Fear begins fighting against my rage as it often does, but I push it down. My anger can''t be quelled by a few missing limbs and I remember what Me said back on the tower. I was overthinking. Not intentionally, but I had grown used to the strength of my body and the family around me. The body I had created myself out of nothing but DP and a few skills. The fact that I got scared after losing a few body parts was laughable and only served to further fuel my rage. I''m no longer a human. Much as I might want to be, that''s no longer in the cards for me. I can look human and pass myself off as one easily enough, but that''s not who, or what, I truly am. I''m a Dungeon Core. A new body, identical to my own, appears next to me. Transferring my soul, I open my new eyes and look back at the damage I had taken. My hair is gone, burnt away by the King''s demonic magic. My right arm and left leg had been burnt down to stubs, little flickers of flame remaining, sealing the wounds. My dress is a mess and one of my eyes is full of blood. It doesn''t look pretty, that''s for sure. A tear falls from my eye at the sorry state I was in. A real, honest-to-Core tear, not created by Water magic which I thought impossible. Then again Light''s having a baby so what do I know? As the tear runs down my cheek and drops to the soil below, I activate not only my Presence but Divinity''s Domain at the same time. Stupid King. Foolish King. Dead King. No one hurts my family and gets away with it. Chapter 91: Unequivocal Rage "Kill him," the Master''s voice is heard by everyone outside the confines of her mountain. It isn''t a loud or menacing war cry, but instead a quiet, subtle whisper. An infallible order given out by a confused core, stuck in her grief. On her command, everyone who was hidden away and waiting in the shadows of the trees attacked. Waves of wolves spring from the darkness and charge the soldiers as Trixie and her pack lead the attack on the army''s right flank. From the shadows to their left, Webster and the Willies appear. Behind them are a horrifying number of arachnids, drooling venom and hissing as they rush forward. From behind the King''s army, the trees and everywhere else wolves and spiders were not, Lila and her oversized Bats appear, preventing anyone from the invading army from fleeing. If that would have been all the invading army had to deal with, some of them may have made it out alive. Unfortunately for the aggressors, shadows were everywhere. Not only were monsters hidden in the darkest areas unable to be penetrated by human eyes, but so too were Assassins hidden beneath their very feet. The center of the army has already begun to fall, before the monsters can hit the outer line. At least the men trying to hold the line can fight back. The soldiers unfortunate enough to have an Assassin in their shadow don''t have the luxury of worrying about where they should have been positioned. They''re already dead. Fangs tear into throats as Trixie and her pack run wild. Spider legs pierce through armour while some soldiers lay spasming on the ground, full of venom. Lila and her airborne army launch unsuspecting victims into the sky, letting gravity do most of their work for them. And everywhere, but nowhere, the Assassins claim kill after kill. Surrounded on all fronts and from within, the invading army was helpless and was offered no aid from their King. The invading army is quite weak and is now in the process of being literally ripped apart, which was shocking compared to the person leading them. The King, who had launched such a devastating attack, merely watches as his army is being torn to shreds. With their formations torn apart, the army''s ranks are diminishing at an astounding rate. Soldiers are being decapitated, webbed, poisoned, clawed, bitten and thrown through the air as Abi''s family mercilessly slaughters them all. Bodies burn from Dark magic, spasming as their blood merged with the red mist which has risen over the killing field. Smoke drifts to the sky and Dragons have begun to gather above, circling overhead. Their aid is, for now, unneeded as the enemy numbers drop faster than Abi''s points during a Land Acquisition spree. The King himself, since the battle had begun, had been surrounded by a new barrier, simply watching events unfold without a shred of emotion. He offered no intervention at all, seemingly uninterested. Even still as his troops are being slaughtered in droves, neither he nor his three personal guards put forth any effort to help. The eyepatch twins and a third man in a grey robe still stand with their King and it is only when the woman laying at the bottom of the tower tries to stand up, despite her missing limbs, do they show any reaction. What happened next surprises all four of them, evident by the look of shock and stupor written across their faces. Another woman, identical to the first in every way except uninjured, appears standing next to the former in a flash of blue light. There were no spacial disruptions around her, no mana fluctuations in the air and she hadn''t fallen from the sky. She was just there. Her eyes are closed, but she is very much present. Not paying attention to the able-bodied version of her, the injured woman still looks toward the three small girls. None of whom are moving. They had shielded their master at the cost of their own lives. The damage caused by the demonic energy was too much for the triplets'' barrier to handle and as it shattered, Abi had been driven back by the power. She and the energy had passed through the girls. None of them had survived. Each Oblivion Dragon had only been level 1 and they were unable to withstand the blast. As she turns her despondent gaze upon the King, it turns to one of hate. A primal rage burns behind the eyes of her dying body, wishing unending death and destruction on him. If looks could kill, King Aldus would have died a dozen deaths there and then. However, such was beyond her and her body gave out. She stills as her body collapses to the ground, rage and hate still written on her face. In the next moment, the new woman adopts the same expression and opens her eyes. They are glaring the same glare her predecessor had worn. "How dare you?" Are the only words she speaks before she begins to concentrate the mass of power inside her body into a single point. Squashing it down as more is constantly replenished, fuelled by the dungeon, her family and most of all, the triplets. A ball of concentrated mana, no bigger than an apple and without any elemental property to speak of, forms in front of her outstretched arm. It is as bright as a star. Lacking colour, but still shining so brightly. Becoming denser and denser by the second, yet showing no signs of enlargement, she keeps fuelling it more and more and eventually even the fabric of reality begins bending to its will. All of a sudden, the air swirls and crackles around the star of mana as it pulls in power from elsewhere. It keeps on pulling until it becomes a pitch-black orb. Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator. King Aldus finally begins moving again to avoid foolishly waiting to receive the coming attack. He attacks again using the same demonic power as before, with twice as much power as his first attack. The King throws it directly at the one being he perceives to be a threat. The woman with eyes of jade. This time, however, a shield of darkness rises from the ground before her. It takes the full force of the King''s attack and remains unbroken, standing strong and yet going a step further. Instead of shattering and dispersing or being deflected, the mass of demonic energy is instead swallowed whole by the wall of shadows leaving the King aghast. From behind their master, the figureheads who had been atop the tower have come to her aid, all casting the same skill together. Cloak of Shadows. Normally, it would be classed as a simple skill. One that creates a veil around the caster''s body. The high-levelled Assassins have taken it a step further than that and create a blanket of darkness to protect the woman still amassing energy. The ball of magic is starting to look more like a void in space. A dark sphere of raw power, all it touches fated to be erased from reality. As the cloak recedes, Light steps forward and activates a second skill. His Grand Skill. After reaching level 100 in his main class, the Master Assassin had been granted the skill, Night''s Embrace. One that darkened even the brightest of days. The sun flees across the sky as though chased by the God of Water himself and is quickly replaced by the moon. The night sky is dark with only the moon and stars to illuminate the killing field, but as it does, it offers one more additional buff to the growing list of those that are already in play. On top of Abi''s Mist, which offers a 20% boost to attack and regeneration, there is also Talia''s Tavern, The Syndicate, The Mage and Adventurers Guilds and everything in-between which boosts health, attack, defence, magic and speed. Light''s new skill offers a further increase on top of them all. It boosts all the active bonuses within range by a further 25% and applies them to anyone that he considers to be allies, regardless of alignment. The King is thrown off by the shift from dawn to dusk, as well as the ineffectiveness of his missing magic, as he begins conversing with the eyepatch twins about the shadow shield and why his attack had failed. They, however, are none the wiser compared to him. An ear-splitting sound begins to cry out from the mass of power under Abi''s control. Their master is finally ready, and the whole of the defending force flees from the line of fire as their master whispers underneath her breath, "Die." She releases the energy directly at the King. Space splits and reality distorts as the ground is carved away by the power of the attack alone. "Danil!" The King shouted. The person in the grey robes standing next to the eyepatch twins, Danil, springs into action. Just before the energy can tear them apart, he teleports their group away to safety. Or to what safety they can find, as they are still on dungeon-owned ground. Abi''s attack doesn''t stop with the disappearance of the King, however. The now aimless force that has been released continues on through the forest and across the countryside. It passes through the ashen remains of the elf''s former home, rising as it ignores the curvature of the planet. Eventually it rises above tearing up the earth, continuing through and over the trees and onto the mountains, cutting through them without resistance and then passing over the ocean. It continues on past the atmosphere and doesn''t even stop there. It is surely not their master''s intention that a noticeable portion of the moon is erased from the sky. The void sphere thus disappears into the galaxy beyond, after it had left its mark on not only the moon, but Tironia itself. The King hasn''t got far as Marie, the wily-old Space Mage, had erected a closed-circuit teleportation field the moment he and his army entered Abi''s territory. The King''s Space Mage, Danil, will still be able to move them about with short jumps, but they won''t be able to escape the dungeon''s reach so easily. They are not, however, attempting to escape. King Aldus, Danil and the eyepatch twins appear in the eastern forest. They aren''t alone for long though as Abi and the Assassins follow right behind, leaving Trixie and the others to finish off the human army. "Do it now!" the King yells at his three remaining subordinates. Eyepatch A and B do as they''re told and begin to cast a spell. It takes them a few seconds, but that is all the time they need and a portal opens in the eastern forest. Not the regular type of portal you would expect to see other Space Mages using though. Not that those are in use anymore, mass teleportation being the more efficient means of travel. Instead, the eyepatch twins have created what could only be described as a portal glimpsing the land of nightmares. One that doesn''t look like it leads anywhere that anyone would want to go willingly. Portals are generally sized like small doorways. This one is large enough to be classed as a warehouse all by itself. Flames made of purple, red and black, all clash against each other, but come together to form the outer frame. Through the stupidly-sized doorway, terrible creatures can be seen on the other side of the mirror-like fabric. The portal lets them gaze into the beyond and what they see in that twisted place are demons. Not the demon-controlling King type, as he''s rather unique, but the ''we''re evil as fuck and will eat anything'' kind of demon. Tentacle-like appendages and boney spikes protrude from their bodies in what can only be described as a massive freak show. There is no colour to them, other than varying shades of the same pale grey. It is a horrifying scene and the demons covered the inner landscape as far as the eye can see. They are in what appears to be a desert with a red sky. There''s no sun or moon, or anything other than demons. First, one demon notices the portal. Then another. Then more. They begin to run, sprinting towards the portal alerting more of their kind as they scream in joy. It starts a rush and a wave of demonic bodies begins fighting amongst themselves. Vying to be among the first to cross the threshold. Snarling and screaming, they fought towards their freedom. From what the defending force can see, beyond the portal is a ridiculous number of demons. Easily more than three times the number of troops that had made up the King''s original army and that''s only the ones that can be seen. Who knows how many demons King Aldus just released onto the world. Chapter 92: The Demon Army - Part One "How do we stop that thing?" I ask Me. "I... have no idea." Unfortunately, he''s as stumped as I am. It''s a good thing I have an actual Space Mage to ask these questions, then. "Marie," I shout, before feeling stupid and contacting her through the dungeon link. She teleports in front of me and I pose to her the same question that I did to Me. "What the hell is that thing and how do we stop it?" "I think -and that''s only because of the demons running out of it, but I think it''s a portal to the demon world? Not that I''ve seen one before, but unless they''re hiding on Tironia somewhere then it''s got to be the demon world, right?" She doesn''t sound very confident, but it''s better than an ''I don''t know.'' "Demonia huh?" Me groans and Marie looks confused. What? If I''m going to die then I''m at least making jokes while I go. I don''t know what the demon world is called and at the moment I don''t care. I just want it to go away so I start to gather energy as I did before. Hoping I won''t miss and hit the moon again. The demons are a mess of unfinished monsters. Each one different than the last in a multitude of fucked up ways. The fastest of them has large teeth and closely resembles the wolves. They have no eyes or ears and spikes sticking out where their spines should be, but other than that, they look like wolves. They are the first to cross the threshold thanks to their speed. Then there are the humanoid-looking demons. Varying in size from child height to adult, each one looked like a deformed Goblin. Long ears, sharp teeth, clawed hands. The whole package. Spikes sticking out of their heads like miniature horns are present on their shoulders as well. Some even have the boney spikes protruding out of their fingers. Just looking at them is enough to freak me out and I''m still trying to do this power attack thing. I didn''t mean to scar the planet and I''m determined to not mess up this time. The last attack was done in my rage, so technically it wasn''t really my fault. Yeah, I know that''s just a bunch of BS I''m telling myself, but I need that right now. I do feel really bad about that last attack, but I just wanna murder him so badly. Is that so wrong? Behind the human-sized Goblin-demon thingies, were the slower, larger demons. They had been ambling around the desolate landscape unperturbed until the rushing masses had turned their attention toward the portal. Each one was completely different from the others. Some walked on four legs while most walked on two. A few of them have even more than four appendages and skitter around freakishly on their multiple limbs. One has no legs at all and is just a mass of flesh. Rolling toward us and the portal, squashing and absorbing demons in its path. A troll-sized demon with no lips and a circular mouth picked up one of the runts running by and ate it before resuming its march. I was beginning to panic. I''m not going to lie. I was furious a moment ago. After seeing the triplets, and when I thought the King was on the run following my show of strength. Instead, after following him to the eastern forest, it seems he had planned to sacrifice his human troops all along to gauge our strength. King Aldus might have seen a lot, but not everything we''re capable of. "Now you will die. Everyone will die!" the King screams. Demons pour into the mist-covered forest as my family once more leap from the shadows to defend our home and the people within. This time it''s different forces that meet our enemies'' advance as the wolves, bats and spiders are still cleaning up the human army. Unauthorized duplication: this narrative has been taken without consent. Report sightings. The Ringmaster and his army of Golems hold the line as the wolf demons crash into them. The demons'' levels outrank those of the King''s human army as some of the Golems are taken out in the initial charge. Barry is next to the Ringmaster, crushing skulls and launching demons back through the fold. His mythril frame sparkles under the moonlight as his large fists crush skulls. Golems aren''t the only monsters in this part of the forest. Colin the King Mimic and all of his own subjects are out in force. It''s been a long time since any Mimic has treaded on the soil of Tironia like this. Bloodthirsty and out for death. Colin throws demon after demon into his trunk and none of them have returned. The smaller Mimics that were created by Colin, through imbuing regular chests with his weird-as-hell Mimic power, number to 800 chests and they are doing the same as their leader. Me has long-since given up on telling me how dangerous legendary creatures are and has finally learned to accept the chests as family. He does clean them after all. Standing against the demon army with them are my Assassins. Always there and ever present. They''re unable to use most of their stealth bonuses as they can''t - and I wouldn''t want them too either- teleport through the portal into the demon world. Not that they need to cross planes to attack as thousands of demons are literally pouring out of the reality-altering gateway and into my forest. Guarding me as I condense more and more power are Noir, Carrie, Dropper, Dum, Dee, Me and Marie. Everybody else has formed around the portal and is fighting. Even Jack the Swindler and his sketchy associates are out fighting. Ang, Zen, Carn and the rest of the dungeon priests even though they''re technically non-combatants themselves are off to the side chanting. Peaches and the Sweets are teamed up with Talia, Lucinda and Ali with the rest of their employed Assassins. The Magi weren''t absent either as Mystique and Coral had them take up position at the rear. Launching spells into the portal instead of the battleground, they are sure to hit enemy targets regardless of where their attacks land. Hana and Mira lead the dungeon-summoned guards in setting up a wall of troops that surrounds the entire portal to make sure no demons escape. Further protecting the regular citizens from loss of life and ensuring the DP Factory will stay strong. Even the Assassins that make up the City Council are in the fight. Just because they handle paperwork on a daily basis doesn''t mean they haven''t spent at least some time in the Coliseum with the Ringmaster raising their levels. Further, every scout, gatherer and Syndicate member have also been recalled. Underneath the night sky where darkness lurks the forest has become an Assassin''s playground. Light is nowhere to be seen and has disappeared somewhere. I can''t even sense him using my dungeon connection. With their portal open and the battle in full swing, King Aldus and his men join the attack. The only person who stayed by the portal is Danil, the King''s Space Mage. Even though he didn''t cast the spell, he''s the one left to defend it. Eyepatch A and B jump into the fray and King Aldus follows behind, fixing his sight on me. Utilizing the forest to their advantage, my Assassins try to kill as many demons as possible by using their overpowered stealth skills. The demons are quite tough though. The wolf and humanoid ones take more than a few blows before they stop moving. They obviously have high levels, and I''m not surprised, as living in a place like that does that. It doesn''t look like it''s easy to survive on the other side of that portal. One of the larger demons has just reached the opening and my family parts as I unleash my destruction beam. It''s the mass of flesh that has rolled over its own kind to get at us and who''s about to cross the portal that''s in its path as my attack lands. Everything but the outer rim of flesh is erased from existence as the beam travels through its body and annihilates everything behind it. I don''t even get to congratulate myself though as the gap is immediately filled with more charging demons. Not bothered in the least that thousands of their kin had just evaporated, they kept eagerly advancing on the portal. I need to find a name for that move. It''s not actually a skill or a spell, rather just me condensing energy and releasing it like an arrow at my target. The never-ending droves of demons keep pushing out into the forest, forcing my family''s enclosure back. The lowest levelled Assassins fall and Golems are destroyed as the demons prove to be the first formidable opponents we''ve come across, and it drives me crazy. I''ve gotten so used to a fight being over before it¡¯s had the chance to actually get started, that I''ve forgotten how easy it is to lose people. Violet, Amber and Blondie spring to mind as I decide to join the fight myself. With that, me and my strongest Assassins jump into the mix. Chapter 93: The Demon Army - Part Two I ordered the Dragons to retreat after what happened to the triplets. None of them had raised their level by much over the last week as they mainly maintained the peace in my city and they reluctantly headed back to Sis. Anya and Lola were also with the latest weirdo to join my family at the Dragons Daycare up on the mountain. The Rainbow Mage hadn''t let the little dragon out of her sight ever since she had called her big sis Anya and was always with her. I, on the other hand, was actually in the thick of it. I couldn''t believe it. I was slapping down demons like there was no tomorrow all while making my way toward King Aldus. As soon as I reached him our eyes locked. "So you are a Demon King then? Or are you a demon controlling a King? Which one is it?" The Demon laughed, seemingly finding my question amusing for some reason. Shame. It was the only one he was going to get. "What difference would it make if I were one or the other?" He shrugged. "You''re right. You killed the triplets and I''m going to fucking murder you three times for that." "You are a very odd woman. What magic do you use?" Smiling at his question, I begin gathering energy in both my hands. Not as much as I was condensing for the void beam, but enough that I would be able to shoot smaller attacks a lot quicker. "Let me show you." I start shooting lasers out of my fingers straight at the King, but the crafty bastard dodges my attacks. Also, what I''m firing aren''t exactly lasers, but they look like them so that''s what I''m rolling with. "That was a lot faster than before. Were you holding back on me?" King Aldus begins to take me seriously. Pointing his sword at me, he starts advancing all while dodging the lasers I''m shooting at him. He''s too fast. Before I''m able to hit him, the Demon King manages to get right up in my face and I have to teleport away to avoid a sword to the face. That was close. Like super close. He almost... Before I can continue that train of thought, I instantly become furious with myself. My human habits of protecting my body are throwing me off. Luckily this is my dungeon and I can be wherever I want to be. Appearing directly behind the King, I manage to fire two lasers into his back. His screams fill my ears with joy as the revenge of the triplets is at hand. Just as I''m about to hit him again, I watch as the wounds on his back stop bleeding and begin to heal up. "Not bad," he smiles as he turns to face me "but how long can you keep it up, I wonder?" "We''ll see, won''t we." I tell him while putting distance between the two of us, firing more lasers with each port.
Not far away from Abi''s battle with the King, but in a magically secured patch of forest, Eyepatch A managed to stumble upon the Dungeon Priests. He had already decided that his opponents looked weak, but there were way too many of them for him alone. He didn''t even know how he arrived at their location. What was stranger was that for some reason, he felt drawn to enter the clearing that the priests were chanting in. "Defiler!" One of them shouted, followed by another, "Desecrator!" Cardinal Carn was in the center of the circling congregation. The highest-ranked member of Abi''s clergy and one of the few priests to frequent the Ringmaster at the Coliseum. Ang and Zen were two others that visited the training ground and were beside the Cardinal as the masses made space for Eyepatch A to pass through. "You will find no death, except your own. You are one and we are many and we are blessed by the dungeon." Eyepatch A''s eyes narrowed at the statement, but he didn''t stop and continued walking. Led by temptation. The only reason he came was because the Demon King would have killed him personally for being a coward otherwise. The shield demon already regretted following the Controller to this forest. It had been going well until they arrived here. The Priests slowly closed back up, surrounding Eyepatch A. He couldn''t run and he began to show a hint of fear and eventually his facade broke. "Okay, wait. Please don''t kill me. I didn''t even want to come here, but that crazy Controller is fucked in the head. He thinks he''s invincible and he''s a lot stronger than I am. He would have killed both me and my brother if we had refused his order." Spilling partial secrets, Eyepatch A hoped to strike a bargain with the Priests. He knew the limitations of what he could defend against better than anyone and there were that many Priests around him, he knew he would never outlast all of them. That and he seemingly felt obliged to turn tail and switch sides. It felt like the most natural thing in the world to do. The Priests were warm and caring whereas the Controller was a mean dick. If you encounter this story on Amazon, note that it''s taken without permission from the author. Report it. What he didn''t know was that most priests, literally 95%, never once attended the Colliseum to train, practice or level up. All they actually did was spread word of the Goddess Ali, much to their master''s unknown horror. That and he was under the Cardinal''s charm spell. One that eased people over to the idea that dungeons are good and should be trusted. That they''ve been misunderstood for centuries. Those emotions that Cardinal Carn usually broadcast to his flock he was now using on a single individual. With that, Abi''s priests managed to uncover a good deal of information from Eyepatch A before he decided that the best course of action was death by suicide. Biting off his own tongue, he frothed at the mouth as he was quickly absorbed by the dungeon and the Dungeon Priests began chanting once again Similarly, Eyepatch B was also engaged in battle. Unlike his twin, however, his fight wasn''t against multiple opponents nor was it against one of the dungeon-summoned beings. Instead, he had found himself in the presence of the contracted monster Peaches. The pink slime, who was still in her human form, was covered in black blood and was holding a severed claw that she had taken from one of the wolf demons. "It''s been a long time since I had to... fight anyone. I must say though, it''s much easier to do in... this form. Are you my next opponent?" She tilted her head and began walking towards her new opponent. Tossing the demon-wolf''s claw over her shoulder, Peaches stopped for a moment to consider how best to deal with her enemy. "You use barriers, correct?" She already knew the answer because she shared the same connection to the dungeon that all Abi''s family used. Not getting an answer, Peaches broke into a run. Sprinting as fast as she could, the Pink Slime closed the distance between them and Eyepatch B had to cover himself with a shield. The barrier wrapped around his skin like a cloak of armor, protecting him from most forms of attacks. Unfortunately for the shield Mage, his attacker had a plan to counter his magic and he did exactly what she wanted him to do. She was going to wait him out. Peaches'' body began to swell, getting larger and larger. Her arms and legs were swallowed by the mass of her body. Peaches laughed at the foolish Mage as her head followed the rest of her appendages and she rolled on top of Eyepatch B, enclosing him within herself. It didn''t matter how strong he was, the only thing that mattered was how long he could keep his shield up. Peaches'' body had returned to its original Slime form and she wasn''t expending any effort on her part by being sat on top of her opponent. In fact, the loveable Pink Slime was happy to wait until the King''s subordinate ran out of mana so that she could let him dissolve inside of her.
Danil, the Demon Space Mage, attempted to teleport into the fight but only managed to come face to face with Marie. That shocked him quite a lot as both he and the human Space Mage were in an empty section of forest. "Where are we?" He asked, only to be replied with a knife to the throat. Marie didn''t manage to kill him however as her attack was repelled. She had gone for an instant kill, but failed. The demon Space Mage hadn''t performed any spells or used a single skill, yet Marie was unable to injure him. Marie, with an age pushing past eighty-years old, was a very-quick learner. She had learned that pestering Abi the right amount would get the Space Mage whatever she wanted. Even if what she wanted was to go out on missions with the hunky Assassins. Marie knew Danil hadn''t cast the barrier himself. That meant he had to have an object on his person that would protect him on its behalf. Marie had seen an artifact like that once. At a time when she herself lived in Imperia, the Royal Capital. One of the previous King''s had purchased it and stored it in their treasury, away from prying eyes and any light-fingered thieves. Marie had always wanted that cross. Danil laughed as he moved away with a quick jump. Tapping his pocket and reassuring himself of his luck. Marie didn''t let the demon get far though and she ported in right after him, swinging her knife and attacking again in the process. Another flash of light and Danil jumped away again. He was only able to perform short-range jumps because of Marie''s control field. Even though he was on the back foot and always evading, flashes of light illuminated the forest with each one of Marie''s failed attacks. The demon laughed in delight as none of her attacks were getting through and she then stopped. This caused Danil to laugh harder because he thought she had run out of mana and had to rest. She was pretty old after all. Chuckling in delight, he walks instead of porting over to Marie with a gloating glee. "Foolish human, as long as I have the..." he goes white. Fumbling in the pockets of his Robe, Danil doesn''t find what he was searching for. "Where is it? Where is charm of Deman?" "Oh, you mean this?" Marie smiles. In her hand is a talisman. A silver dragon with emerald eyes is wrapped around a silver cross. The very one she saw more than fifty years ago. "H-How did you get that?" He screams. The glee from a second ago is gone and has been replaced by fear. "I don''t know. One minute it was in your robe and then it wasn''t," she laughs, twirling the charm around by its chain. "You... you stole it!" The Demon seems to be offended that his charm has mistakenly misplaced into someone else''s possession. It''s as though he thinks that they''re allowed to kill people with no remorse but anything done to them is sinful. "You crazy bastard. This is mine. I''ve always had it." Marie fakes offense at the demon''s words. Mouth agape and her free hand held over her heart, her acting top class. She then pockets the amulet and smiles. "Why don''t you try and attack me this time?" "What? No. That''s mine, give it back!" Before Marie can think up another quip to make fun of the demon Space Mage, Light appears from the shadows and chops his head off with his special knife. The blade covered in black mana sliced through bone like it was butter. "Aww, he was about to blow his top then, Light." Marie complains, but the usually casual Assassin gives her a serious look. Obviously, it isn''t the time to be playing around. At least Marie earned herself a new trinket though. "It''s not time for that now. Go help the others," he orders her before dropping back into his shadow. Marie huffs, but doesn''t complain instead she ports back into the battle. Feeling safer than ever with the amulet of Deman in her pocket and with that, all three of the King''s lieutenants had been eliminated. Chapter 94: The War Rages On My fight against King Aldus was not going as well as I had hoped it would. Since I managed to land my first surprise attack, there hasn''t been a second. Every time I utilise my teleporting feature, the tricky demon always manages to evade my beams. Even though my lasers are quite fast, they still take a second to power up and that''s all the time he needs to move out of their path. Also, my old human habits of protecting my body due to the fear of dying are throwing me off my game. The fact that I''m a Dungeon Core and not a human is something I''ve been overlooking recently due to having this fabulous body. I hate it when Me''s right. Even without his shielders, I still can''t quite manage to hit Aldus as we continue to trade attacks and dodge one another''s strikes. That is until I talk myself into doing what''s necessary, what''s needed and what must be done to finally gain a foothold in this fight. Gathering all the courage I can muster, because it takes ovaries of steel to do what I''m about to, I don''t dodge. Instead, I let the King''s sword hit me head on and his blade pierces straight through my chest and out of my back. I feel foolish, but ecstatic at the same time as I cough up blood or whatever the substitute for the liquid inside my body is. It''s the same colour as a human''s so I''m just going to roll with it being blood. Grabbing hold of my smug-looking enemy''s wrist before he can realise that I''ve tricked him, the power I had been gathering detonates in a mess of flesh and bone as both of our hands explode. The Demon King screams in pain while holding his new stub close to his chest. Obviously he wasn''t expecting me to sacrifice a part of myself to hurt him, but he has no idea how far I''m willing to go now and I begin laughing in his face. He obviously doesn''t like that because before I could do anything else, King Aldus pulled his blade from my body with his uninjured hand and unattached my head from the rest of my body. I hadn''t been prepared for that attack. Not that it hurt. Not that an attack that can instantly remove your head would hurt, but I didn''t feel any pain in my hand after it had exploded either. Strange. It''s a strange feeling knowing something should hurt even though it doesn''t. There was a type of phantom pain the moment my hand blew up, but it quickly faded as though it was just an illusion. My mind still remembered the pain I had felt as a human and had found it hard to shed itself of my baggage. Either way, being decapitated on the spot like that released my soul from the body I had created for myself. In my soul form, I was still laughing. Laughing at how foolish I was. Laughing at how easy this fight would be now that I''d cast off my human fears. The King was wounded. His mind would be quicker to making rash decisions and that would also help me win this fight. I was definitely going to kill this dickhead. I was even going to reincarnate his soul myself into some weak-ass monster body just so I could kill him again and then I would do it a third time. One kill for each triplet. A death each for Violet, Amber and Blondie. A piece of my heart was missing and now that I was detached from my body, I could see everything. I could even see a broken piece of my Dungeon Core lying on the ground in the room Veris was protecting. The jade fragment, which would have been considered small when compared against my current Core, was bigger than the physical representation of my heart had been when I was first reincarnated as a dungeon. I wonder what would happen to Colin if he ate that piece? Shaking off idle thought, I begin spending points as though there''s no tomorrow. There still might not be if I don''t play this right though. As I spent the accumulated efforts of my DP Farm, I also checked the overview to have a quick look at how my family were faring. The portal was still going strong and quite a few big demons had managed to breach through. More than a dozen of them lay dead already, but the Assassins were showing signs of fatigue. That''s an odd sight on its own around here and it shows the demons are really pushing them to their limits. Marie was surrounded by Light, Dropper, Noir, Carrie and Dee. Dum had retired to the mountain, burning out faster than the others due to his cursed arm. Leaving his partner and the others to protect the Space Mage as she tried to close the portal that had become self sufficient. The dungeon''s natural mana proved more than enough to keep it operating. Unauthorized content usage: if you discover this narrative on Amazon, report the violation. Around them, demons and Assassins were dying faster than I could count and I dumped all of the Goblins from my dungeon into the middle of the demon horde. I also spent the majority of my points there and then on more Assassins, hoping they could hold the line long enough for me to kill the King. I would be able to help them afterwards with my void beam. I couldn''t keep my eyes on them for long as King Aldus was still alive. Also, my new body was ready. This one is stronger than any I had ever created before, imbued with 100,000 DP, it had almost cleaned out my reserves. The body that appeared looked exactly the same as the previous two only much, much stronger. Overflowing with the power I had been using during the fight. The power that makes up my lasers and void beams which I''m now only realising are the Dungeon Points I invest on creation. That means that my power could run out if I''m not careful... I think? I''m not 100% sure, but I could always add more points to my body. That said, King Aldus doesn''t look too impressed as I stare him down from my latest creation. My new body features none of its previous injuries whereas the Demon King is still bleeding profusely from his stump. I know I''ve been trying to turn a leaf lately, not killing for the betterment of Tironia and instead choosing the path of reformation, but there''s no way in hell that''s happening here. The King and his men -his demons- were all dead already. They just don''t know it yet. Before I could start gathering the power in my body, King Aldus rushed me. His sword was still in his good hand as he swung repeatedly, trying once again to remove my head. This time instead of porting away, I kept dodging. Drawing him closer and closer, his rage building with every failed attempt on my life and his sword strokes slowing with each consecutive attack. The Demon King had progressed past the point of sanity. He must have known his subordinates had died because his attacks became reckless. One after the other, I sidestepped, dodged and evaded as I came up with a new plan. One that I wasn''t feeling very confident about. I honestly didn''t know if my Assassins could keep up the good fight at the portal and I was beginning to worry I might lose more than I bargained for. With that thought I enacted my idea. Screaming as I continued to sidestep the King''s attacks, I split my soul in half. Well, it was more like a 95 to 5 split, but it still hurt like hell. I was literally ripping myself in two. 5% of me was sent into a second, hastily-created body and the King halted his attack. There were now two of me and he paused, unsure who to attack first. Two women, both identical, both powering themselves through the use of Dungeon Points. Hastily, King Aldus chose a target and attacked. To be honest though, it didn''t matter which one of me he chose. I was prepared for both scenarios. He lashed out at the lesser version of me and she stopped gathering power. Again I chose to take the attack, but protect myself from a fatal blow, his sword cutting deep into my side. With that, I''d won. The lesser me wrapped her arms around the Demon King. Pulling him in tight and squeezing him as hard as he could. With his arms pinned to his side beneath hers, King Aldus flailed and attacked however he could but his struggle was futile. All he could do was struggle as the blackless void tore him and my other self to pieces. Disintegrating matter and putting an end to the one who instigated the war. I was a little worried I might have disintegrated a part of my soul during that last attack, but fortunately enough I felt complete again once Abi B had evaporated. Which in itself is a weird experience. Watching yourself die while smiling cheerily, and then feeling whole afterwards, was just fucking weird. Really, really weird. I can''t even ruminate on it because there''s still more to do. There''s that portal and all the demons, the triplets... I turn my attention back to the ruined forest. I don''t have enough time to fully charge my void beam, but it''s more than enough for what''s needed. Activating Soul Guide, I scanned the area for any sign of the King''s soul. Since my soul had returned to me, that meant that King Aldus'' soul hadn''t been obliterated in the void, only his flesh. Hiding in the mist is a small, red cloud. Growing smaller by the second, I can see the soul being sucked away down the reincarnation drain. A waste. This bastard needs to die a few more times before he''s allowed to start over. I pick a monster, the worst one imaginable and then summon the soulless creature on top of the King''s soul. Using the power of Soul Guide, I force it to stay inside the little, green body and laugh maniacally as though I''m the bad guy. The Goblin''s eyes spring open and it begins thrashing around, falling over itself and garbling the incomprehensible language of its species. I wouldn''t be able to understand a normal Goblin, but I get this one loud and clear. Through my will and the dungeon connection, King Aldus'' words were a slur of hateful curses as I listened while he tried to figure out what had happened to him. First was his death. It was the largest factor on his mind and he was furious with himself. He had died, yet for some reason he wasn''t dead. Then he remembered that I had died on more than one occasion, yet I wasn''t dead either. Examining himself didn''t make Aldus feel better either as his small, green body was pathetically weak. A level 1 Goblin with a Demon King''s soul. Thinking about it, that made him sound quite unique, and if I would have picked this combination up in any other situation, I''d be tempted to keep it. That said, he killed the triplets. "All you''re going to know is pain." Porting inside and dropping the King off with Veris and Dum, the former was licking the latter''s wounds, which I ignored the shit out of that problem, I headed straight for the portal and the rest of my family. It was time to end this. Chapter 95: Outside Help Opening his eyes, Dum is keenly aware of the awkward feeling in his arm. The wound where the King had inflicted his curse throbbed. However, that wasn''t because it hurt. It was due to the white-haired woman who had been sucking on it while he was unconscious. "What the hell are you doing, Veris? Get off me, you crazy bitch!" Dum struggles to stand up while fending her off and she overpowers him, forcing him back down to the ground. "Hey! There was no need for that. Do you think I want to do this?" Veris looks upset after being called a name. "Yes. Did anyone tell you to do it?" "Well... no, but I was getting the curse out." Nodding enthusiastically, Veris urges him to check the wound. His arm, which had been turning darker by the minute, wasn''t curable by conventional methods. Even some of Abi''s more unconventional ones had failed, namely the Necromancers and the Rainbow Mage. That said, Dum noticed that his arm had improved since he last saw it. No longer black and rotten, his skin now had more of a greyness to it, and didn''t smell as bad either. Not wanting to let Veris have her way with him, but wanting to die even less, Dum reluctantly agreed and gave Abi''s Boss a specific request. "Please don''t tell Talia, or anyone for that matter. I''ll die of embarrassment if word of this gets around. No one can know, Veris. No one, ok?" "Fine. And there was me wanting to be the hero. Stuck in this room on the Boss''s request when everyone else is out there fist-fucking demons up to their elbows. It''s a tough gig, Tweedledum. But fine. I won''t tell your precious Talia," Veris makes childish kissing gestures, "now, are you ready or not?" "Fine, do it." Not able to fault Veris'' treatment, as unorthodox as it may be, Dum reluctantly agrees to let her suck his arm. Closing his eyes so that he can''t see her work, the Dominatrix then begins making slurping sounds and licking his skin. "Do you really have to lick it? How''s that getting anything out?" Red faced, Dum can''t help but complain even though his arm is looking better than it was moments ago. The size of infection has shrunk considerably and the grey areas are beginning to look healthy. "Holy shit. Never mind. Keep going." He tells Veris, pushing her head back down, which she doesn''t seem to mind at all and even giggles. It was going great for Tweedledum. Veris was sucking him clean and he got a brief rest from the fighting. He could almost feel his energy returning to him. It was all fantastic until Abi ported into the room with a confused-looking Goblin. A look of disbelief mixed with exhaustion was written across her face. She didn''t say anything other than, "This is the Demon King. Watch him, but don''t kill him. Er... bye," before taking her leave as fast as she had arrived. Now that he has regained some strength, Dum got up off the floor and grabbed hold of the little Goblin. "Are you able to remove this curse?" was what he was about to say. Instead he hit the goblin off the floor a few times and carried it back to Veris. Sitting down, Tweedledum scowled as he held the goblin next to him by the throat. "What are you waiting for?" he asked Veris. "Master''s already seen you so it doesn''t even matter now. Everyone will know by tomorrow," he pouts. With that, Veris began sucking, caressing and licking the curse out of Tweedledum''s arm. Much to her satisfaction, Dum''s annoyance, and to a very shocked Goblin. Dum thought over the possibility of chopping his arm off. If Veris wasn''t so close to being finished he would have opted for that choice sooner. The only Assassin Dum wanted sucking on him was Talia, definitely not the deranged Veris. There was still more to go, though, and he might yet still do it. Tweedledum and Veris Dungeon Stories Volume 4
In the eastern forest, Marie is struggling to close the gate as the larger demons continue to force it open while following the flow. Light and the others are trying their best to keep them contained, but with their dwindling stamina, it''s a fool''s errand. It''s a good job I''m ready to help in my new kick-ass, King-killing body. Leaping to the front I unleash my void beam directly inside the portal, wiping out demons of all sizes in their realm and ours. With the larger threats evaporating and the others too slow to pose a burden, Marie finally makes some headway in reducing the size of the portal''s frame. Ensure your favorite authors get the support they deserve. Read this novel on the original website. That didn''t mean the small-to-medium sized demons had stopped coming, but it did mean my Assassins were able to get a handle on them. Forming a new enclosure around the portal they pressed closer, giving few a small reprieve from the action and swapping as needed. It also gave me time to fire up another void beam. I was condensing my power when I heard the sound of a trumpet. Not willing to let points go to waste, I ported to the front line and unleashed the wrath of my destruction against the mass of flesh pouring out from inside the demon realm. Demons ceased to be as a large path of emptiness was created before my very eyes. That definitely needs a cool name. Then I remembered the sound of the trumpet. Checking my overview after porting back, a platoon of elves weren''t far from where the fighting was taking place. It caught me a little off guard as I''d not noticed their arrival sooner. But to be fair, I have been dealing with a lot of shit recently. Gathering energy for another void beam - name under progress - I port over to the elves. I don''t have time for another enemy right now and everyone knows most elves and humans don''t get along. They''ll take one look at me, give me shit about my race and then I''ll have to kill them. We are in the middle of a war, after all. Plus, I still can''t summon my own elves yet. I''m pretty sure I only need to absorb one more, though. "What do you want? We''re busy fighting demons." I state bluntly, still holding the ball of light that will become the void beam. They take notice of the sphere in my hand and back up immediately. All in all, there were about two hundred elves all wearing the same uniform. They look like a royal procession and I really hope I don''t have to fight two kingdoms today. Although I wasn''t helping my case with my bluntness. Their leader, or the elf I assume to have that title as he''s the first to act, salutes me. What the hell? Normally, a salute wouldn''t shock me. Not even now in the middle of a war against demons would a salute shock me. What got me though was the fact that it wasn''t a regular soldier''s salute. The elf in front of me had just given me a dungeon salute. I know a closed fist over the chest could be considered a greeting almost anywhere, it''s just that I had gotten used to it being our thing and I nearly mistook the elf for one of my own. That said, it''s not as though they were my enemy. "We know what you are and we also know what is happening. I have brought Space Mages to help seal the breach between planes." I didn''t panic at his initial sentence because all I heard were more Space Mages. It''s about damn time. Marie must be exhausted. I wouldn''t even be surprised if she died in her sleep afterwards. I definitely need to get a few of these Mages to stick around. With the Elven Mages'' assistance and my Assassins holding the line, we managed to finally close the portal that Danil, the Demon King''s Mage, had opened. After eliminating the rest of the demons that had still been on our side of the breach, every member of my family collapsed, exhausted and spent. Never before have we had to go through something like that. The sheer number of demons alone was more horrifying than their physical appearances. There were just so many. Even when the portal had closed, I could see them filling the desolate landscape. As far as the eye could see, deformed monstrosities were still rushing to the closing portal. The elves'' assistance hadn''t gone unnoticed, but everyone was too tired to care about them. Even the more monstrous members of my family were laid around in the forest. Some had returned to the dungeon, but those who had fought hardest collapsed where they were standing. The Ringmaster was one of them, and his moon-shaped head laid on the floor as he gazed up at the illusionary stars. It was then that Light''s grand skill finished and the darkness of night was replaced by the warm sun, shining down on those basking in its ambience. The fight was over. The war had been won. Not a single Demon had managed to pass my family. Not a single one stepped foot in my city. I wanted to laugh and shout and to celebrate, but I couldn''t. Sorrow was still heavy in my heart. "Are you going to bring the triplets back or what?" Me asks as though it''s just as simple as that. I then once again felt foolish as my regular state of idiocy took over. Why am I so dumb? I know I have my moments, but damn I''m stupid. Porting to the scene of the crime, I find the girls'' artificially-created dungeon souls floating helplessly in the forest. I shed another tear and take them in my arms, holding them close. The triplets are unable to enter the cycle of reincarnation as they never had mortal souls. Red, yellow and purple, their souls contrast to their personalities perfectly and I carefully begin soothing them back to a state of perfection one at a time. Once their souls are healthy and vibrant again, I create three Oblivion Dragons. Each one is identical to how they were before and I carefully insert the corresponding soul into the correct body. Amber groans and is the first one to awaken. "I''m starving. Master, is it dinner time yet?" Her words are nectar to my ears. Sweet and delicious. I can''t help but wrap my arms around her and sigh. "Absolutely," I pull out some sweets from my personal storage and hand them to Amber just as Blondie wakes up. "Abi? Did I die? I''m sure I remember dying." Blondie seems more on track than Amber, but that isn''t anything unusual and I pull her into a hug as well. "Don''t worry about it. The King''s dead... sort of, and you three did amazing. I''m super proud of you." Even though their barrier shattered like glass, the triplets had put my life above their own. "Bear? Bear!?" Violet''s eyes snap open and the first thing on her mind is the cub. I thought that would be the case as the cub''s soul was right next to the triplets. Violet never went anywhere without him. "Where''s Bear?" She began to cry as I personally summoned a soulless Bear Cub. Much better than the last, I might add, as the previous one was just a mindless monster spawned by Me in the forest for adventurers to level on. This one would obey her every order, and was strong to boot. I knelt down beside Violet and offered the upset Dragon the present in my arms. Her mood instantly brightened the moment she saw the cub and she snatched him out of my arms faster than Amber took the food. She wasn''t fast enough to get away from a hug though, even though she definitely wasn''t appreciative of it. These girls. It''s like Blondie pays attention and the other two are oblivious, wrapped in their own world. Then again, Blondie only does that because she wants to know everything about everyone. Wanting to be everyone''s best friend must be quite tough. Still, I wouldn''t change these three for anything. It''s only been two weeks since I summoned them, but damn they''ve grown on me. Finally happy, I collapse on the ground next to the girls. Exhausted. Gazing up at the sun, I can only hope the rest of the day will be easier to handle. Then I remember I still have a delegation of elves in my forest, and sigh. There''s no rest for the wicked. Chapter 96: The Cost of War There truly was no rest for the wicked. Not that I considered me or my family to be wicked. Ok, maybe Veris, but that would still be loosely related to the word and for an all too different reason. The elves were still gathered where the portal had once stood, but they had made a small camp with tents and were also in the process of resting themselves. It must have been a long journey from wherever they came from because they looked just as exhausted as we did and they were only here for the last ten minutes of the fight or so. Eduine, the elf that had warned us about the King''s approach, was with them. Not that Aldus'' first army posed a threat to us, but if he had caught us unprepared it could have been so much worse than it had been. The losses on our side totalled a few hundred dead Assassins. It was a steep cost, but the DP Farm had played no part in it. Eduine was explaining what had happened to his village and how he ended up in Varona. It turns out his village had sent a message to the elven capital and this was all the troops they had decided to send. 300 elves in total. They wouldn''t have even made a dent in the demons, not that we managed to do much different other than to hold them back. There were just so many of them. I was more than grateful for the Space Mages in the elves rank, not as grateful as Marie was, though. The oldest member of my family has quite a high level, but the job she was tasked with wasn''t the easiest. It was kind of overwhelming for someone to do it all alone, but she still performed amazingly. None of the Assassins had been able to offer any assistance other than that of protection so when the elves turned up, every one happily accepted their offer of aid. On an even more positive note, the human soldiers stationed at the edge of Varona didn''t see a single scrap of action. Not a blip. The occasional light display inside the forest after our Master Assassin had turned day to night with his grand skill was the highlight of their war. That said, the human guards were still raring to go, eager to get revenge on the king that had made them flee their previous home and ready to defend their new one. I bet they''d be thinking differently if they would have seen the demons firsthand. I suppose I should get someone to tell them it''s over. Delegating that job to a nearby Assassin, I also send word of our victory to the Categorizers inside my mountain. They''re with the rest of my citizens and I explain that they can leave the dungeon now or whenever they want to. I don''t tell them about my idea to keep the King as a murder project, or just in case I need someone to vent my anger on. They didn''t need to know those details. That will be mine and the triplets'' little secret. Humans slowly began to leave the dungeon after word had spread and they made their way out into the city. After a short rest the monsters still in the forest returned to their respective floors, the ones who survived more confident in their abilities than before. I was going to let the elves stay in the Sentry Tower for the night, but then I remembered it had no door. Plus, they had magic repelling properties so that Space Mage couldn''t sneak in. The only people able to go in or out were those connected to my dungeon and through the use of the dungeon teleportation feature. That said I couldn''t leave them with nothing but tents after helping us close the portal, so I used some of the DP acquired from the demons to build them an outpost. The cat was already out of the bag at this point. Plus, did I care that a few elves saw me spawn a building out of thin air? Not in the slightest. They already bloody knew anyway and I had just killed the King of Tira. What else could anyone possibly bring to the table to stop us from living life the way we wanted? Also, the King was a gigantic dick. If someone is going to be praised or scorned for ending that scumbag, then it''s definitely going to be the real me. I actually deserve the credit. That was the first proper fight I''ve actually had in a long time and yeah, I died a few times, but I still fucking won. Actually, I think I deserve something nice as well for winning. As I contemplated what to buy myself from the catalog, a very hungry Dragon''s tummy rumbled loudly beside me. "Are you hungry again, Amber?" Silly question, I know. Amber nods intensely and we head to Ali''s. The Gourmet has already got the stoves on full blast to begin supplying the large demand of hungry citizens. A lot of families made their way home, but a larger majority have decided to hit up one of Ali''s many popular eateries. There isn''t much in the way of food inside my dungeon and most of them haven''t eaten a meal since breakfast. If you stumble upon this tale on Amazon, it''s taken without the author''s consent. Report it. "She''s always hungry, but so is Bear so it''s ok. I don''t mind this time." That was the longest sentence Violet has ever spoken and I can only wonder if it''s something to do with her new pet. The new cub is a lot more restrained than the last one. He''s also a boatload stronger too. A miniature power house capable of enduring Violet''s death squeeze. "I never mind visiting Ali''s. The food is always amazing," Blondie doesn''t go without getting her part in there and I wrap my arms around the girls holding onto Violet by her sleeve so that she can''t escape my embrace. "Don''t be like that, Violet. You know you love me really. Why else would you protect me?" I tease her. "I-I... I was protecting Bear. Yes, that''s right," she quickly replies and I feign being hurt by her words of denial. "That was cold, girl. And after I brought Bear back for you too." Water magic sends a tear tumbling down my cheek and I sniffle for added effect. "Well... that was cool, I guess. Thank you, Master. I er... don''t love you or nothing though," she blushes brightly, hiding her feelings. "That''s ok because I love you wholeheartedly and nothing you ever say will change that," I made myself blush, but it had to be said. "I love you too, Abi. You''re the best." Blondie also wants in on the action and, as per the norm, two triplets can''t speak without the third joining in. "I love Master the most when she''s giving me food." Amber is practically salivating in delight as we arrive at the restaurant. "Dinner time!" she shouts and rushes off inside. We follow leisurely behind and find her already sitting at a table, menu in hand. I can''t help but smile and remind myself how lucky I am to still have the triplets. When I saw them lying on the ground I kind of lost my shit for a moment, but it doesn''t even matter now. Soul Guide, the skill I thought to be one job on top of another, turned out to be the saving grace I needed. Without the ability to see souls, I wouldn''t have been able to bring back the triplets. Hell, I probably wouldn''t have been able to separate my own soul from Me''s way back then, now that I think about it. The skill itself has been much more useful than I ever give it credit for. Yeah, I''ve gotta regulate society and help them advance, blah, blah, blah, but that doesn''t mean I''m against it anymore. When the System first granted me the skill, it was safe to say I was pretty pissed off. I am a delegator, not a delegatee. I hated the thought of Sis palming her work off onto me because she was too lazy to do it herself, but I didn''t see the hidden benefits at the time. Combined with my two Divinity skills, I may as well be a God. I can bring people back from the dead for... someone else''s sake. I''m trying really hard not to let my ego have its way with myself. But I deserve it, right? I should boast and shout and sing from the top of my tower. I''m not going to, but it''d be nice if someone else did it. "What are you having, Amber?" After a lengthy debate with herself, the hungry Dragon finally settled on two starters, three mains and four desserts. It''s a good job that the meals are on the house and that I don''t have to pay for her, otherwise she''d cost me a fortune in food. By the time we had finished eating, I noticed that the people mulling around in the street outside had managed to settle down. Acclimating back into their peaceful lives inside the mountain city. It was probably to do with the Dragons circling the sky and keeping the peace. Even though my citizens were all settled, I wasn''t. I knew there was still a lot of work to do. Work that would make Varona safer and those tasks would be my first priority. As soon as the DP factory coughed up its daily tribute, that was. Now, it was time to celebrate. Arriving at Talia''s Tavern, One For The Rogues, I''m not surprised in the slightest to see the place packed. I know full well that I shouldn''t be bringing the triplets into the bar due to how old they look, but it''s not as though the human-posing Assassins inside are much older, the oldest being just over a year at best. Inside, Light is standing on the bar boasting about how many men he killed in today''s fight. Talia looks as though she''s about ready to knock him off her serving apparatus and Noir is calling bullshit on his rival''s claims. Both have mugs full of ale and seem to be in high spirits even though they''re arguing. Their respective partners are sitting at a table with Peaches and the Sweets who are also discussing the day''s battle. As I look around at all the happy faces, it would indeed appear that our war is all any one is talking about. Even Me and Sis are engaged in talks over the demon realm and if they have a system of their own. Apparently, Sis doesn''t control what happens everywhere like I thought she did. A healthy looking Dum is trying to dissuade Talia from swiping Light''s legs, and his partner Dee is in high spirits to see his best friend healthy and active. He keeps asking Dum about how he was healed, but his friend was slyly evading the answer. Anya was beckoning us over to her table and I accepted her invitation. As we made our way over, I noticed Veris in the corner of the establishment. She was discreetly whispering into the ears of a few of the human patrons. That can''t be anything good, but hang on... Wait a minute. Who''s watching the King? Chapter 97: Another Long Day It turned out that Veris had left the King - who was now a Goblin - under the watch of a few Assassins in Sanctuary. He was bound, gagged and locked inside a cupboard. Even though Goblins speak, they thought it best to chuck something in his mouth so he couldn''t bite through the rope. I still wasn''t pleased Veris hadn''t informed me of that information until I caught her in Talia''s, but it was my own fault to begin with for keeping him around. I didn''t really need to kill him again, and now that the triplets were back, I had no reason too. I was still going to kill him. If only for the fact that I told him it would be happening. A crash drew my attention to the bar and it turns out Talia had enough of Light standing on her counter. She swept his legs up, and he ended up laying on his back on the floor of the tavern. Unsurprisingly, he didn''t spill a drop of ale. Noir is laughing his head off and everyone else carries on as though nothing has happened. It''s just another day in Varona. After a few drinks with Anya, I teleport to the sanctuary and locate the Assassins Veris had delegated to watch my Goblin. Torturing would have been a better word to use, though, because when I located them, they were actually talking to him. Not that he could verbally respond, but he could answer back through the dungeon system. He was in the body of one of my monsters after all. Even if he could, he probably wouldn''t be trying to talk, anyways. In fact, Aldus was staying tight-lipped about everything and the only responses he gave were screams, probably for the questions to end. Apparently, the Assassins had been interrogating the Goblin ever since Veris had dumped him on them. I was glad they took the initiative, but a little sad they hadn''t gotten anywhere. Well. It was my turn now. Upon seeing my face, ex-King Aldus'' little green face flashed with fury, making him even uglier than your usual Goblin. Even uglier than Obling, the Goblin Mage and Leader, and that''s a hard feat as he''s fucking ugly. I can''t stand that goblin. It fills me with delight when he begins screaming incoherent nonsense, and through my will, all I hear are curses. Curse me, curse the little Dragons, curse the beautiful angels of death that won''t shut the hell up, curse everybody, was the jist of it. Not playing around, as my patience is thinner than Veris'' garments in my dungeon, I crush the King''s skull and watch as he spasms to death. The moment his soul is released from the body, I grab hold of it and summon a new Goblin. Placing him inside, the eyes open and he screams again. I know I shouldn''t be happy about this, but that''s just another human trait I''m holding onto. I decide what''s right and wrong now. Not the outdated system and laws people follow, putting royalty and nobility above the majority. Screw those pompous guys. Why!? Aldus isn''t happy about dying and being reborn as a Goblin. Not that he has any say in the matter whatsoever, and I listen to him scream inside my mind while smiling. The triplets behind me don''t say a word. They just watch as I kill and reincarnate Aldus'' soul over and over again. Even the Assassins didn''t speak, and I was still in their house. It was only when the walls were covered in Goblin Blood that I stopped and wondered if I took it too far. No. He definitely deserved that. In the back of my mind, I know what I just did was wrong on some level. I wasn''t even questioning him. Still, I don''t feel a shred of guilt over what happened even if I know it was wrong. It was a process that needed to happen. With my frustrations worked though and Aldus placed in the world''s weakest Goblin body, wrapped up and safely locked away in the Assassins'' closet, I head back to Varona. The sun has set and the true night has almost arrived. Not the illusionary night that Light had created this morning, but the real deal. With it, the streets began to empty and those not already home, slowly staggered their way there. Some days feel longer than others whereas some can flash by in the blink of an eye. I suppose it''s all a matter of perspective. My perspective says that this was an extremely long-ass day. That''s how it feels, at least. Instead of going to the Sentry Tower, I port us to my tower on top of the Academy of Dark Arts. I don''t care about size, at least not in the tower way. I care about my city. My family. The DP Farm... Factory? I mean citizens. I care about my citizens. The little people down there that make me my DP... I mean, that live life well. The people that live well. Damn, DP is really stuck in my head. I only got 85,000 total from all the demons we killed. The amount of xp and DP I earned from them was significantly reduced as well for some reason. The System, or Sis, couldn''t specify why either, and I didn''t even earn 1% from them. It was crap compared to the usual 10% I get. I would be rolling in points and levels right now if it had been calculated properly. We did kill close to 4000 demons, and those were the ones I absorbed. Who knows how many I disintegrated with my void beam. Stolen story; please report. Still, I''m not complaining. It''s just that I don''t have much DP left. I spent the rest of the reserves on my two bodies and replenishing the Assassins ranks during my fight with the King. I had less than a hundred points left at that moment. Now, after absorbing the demons, summoning three Oblivion Dragons with specific specifications, creating Bear and making him better than before and creating the outpost for the elves to camp in, I''ve only got 30,000 DP left. It feels like pittance compared to the million I had been sitting on, but I suppose it''s still better than the 20 points I started with. Being a dungeon and not having to worry about money is cool and all, but worrying over my points is basically the same thing. You can''t escape the feeling of wanting more no matter what species you are. The triplets settle down on their futons and Violet tucks Bear in beside her. I grab an arm full of cuddly monster teddies and lay flat on my back on my own Royal Futon. Hey, Me?
Yes? What''s up?
Do you think I can start calling myself Queen Abi now? I mean, I did kill the king and all.
Did you really just ask me that question? I''m not an expert, but from what I have heard, that''s not how it works.
Yeah, I know. I was just messing with you. Night, bud.
Quite. Also, you know I have no need to sleep and neither do-
Yes I do, so goodnight. Don''t bother me while I''m sleeping unless it''s an emergency. Cutting Me off before he can state the obvious, I snuggle myself into comfort and drift off like a log. It''s been a while since I called him just to joke. There were no dreams that night and no nightmares either. Just the peaceful nothingness of rest and relaxation. When I awoke the sun had just begun to rise on the horizon, and the streets were still empty. The triplets were still sleeping, so I decided to spend my points before they woke up. That way we could spend the day together doing fun things rather than the same-old boring Land Acquisition. I was at 133,000 DP after I had made bank last night. Totalling to three cities, the amount is more impressive now that the threat of war isn''t looming over us. I can finally start making my way towards Ishda, and then I can spread my territory out to the rest of the cities in our region from there. More cities means more people, and more people means more points. In honesty, every city is a DP Farm waiting to be harvested by a dungeon. They can then use those points to help better the people of said city. Helping them in levelling, which in turns fuels the dungeon with more points. We''re all connected on a fundamental level yet no one sees it. Humans fear dungeons and dungeons kill humans in the masses. That''s how it has been for centuries. Then again, humans kill humans in the masses too but they find it easier to overlook their own misgivings. I should know. Before I start spending points on land, I head to the forest to see the elves, just in case they need anything before they leave. Their leader, the elf that had saluted me, was called Edwan. Or that was what Eduine had told me. I didn''t know whether or not to believe him because it seemed like there were too many Ed''s going around recently. I just wanted to call him something else. However, that was his name and it''s what I had to call him. Porting into the middle of the outpost, Edwan came to meet me after one of the elves took off to inform him of my arrival. "We have more than enough rations to last the trip back, and we wouldn''t dream of asking for anything from one as powerful as you." I didn''t know how to take that sentence. Was Edwan praising me or saying the elves were just too afraid to ask? I couldn''t tell. Regardless, I decided that I would send some Assassins with Edwan and the elven contingency just for some extra protection. I didn''t want them dying on their way home. Then they wouldn''t be able to spread word of my strength and glory. It''s time to push this Core thing to the limit, and when I finally reach Ishda, Lord Aldor''s city will be where I make a name for myself. As the Lord''s city is central to our region, all the information that travels through our area either goes to or from Ishda. That means if I''m going to start spreading word of unregulated dungeons that help people level free of charge, our region''s capital would be the best spot. The best attainable spot that is. The best location would actually be the Capital City of Imperia, but that''s too far away to acquire through points for the time being. Acquiring Ishda and all the cities in the region should hopefully triple my daily DP amount. That in turn triples how much more land I can purchase on a daily basis. World domination is a long way away, but Ishda? I can easily see myself acquiring the entire region in less than a year. I''ve already got Orad and Tune under my wing. Not that they know the extent of how far under they are yet, but they will in time. In time everyone will come to know how great and loveable dungeons are. As long as you take your time and progress at a steady rate, anyone can level up. Everyone can ascend. "Although, I think at some point in the future our King may wish to speak with you." Edwan informs me. The last thing I want to hear is how another royal might want to meet me. I suck at talking to people as it is and things just never seem to go my way. Also, the last thing I want to hear about now is more royalty. Queen Abi is about the most I can take and even then it''s in a joking capacity. Maybe I won''t send those Assassins with them after all? Chapter 98: My Next Problem I''ve definitely got a problem and it''s nothing new or even serious at this stage, but it''s a problem nonetheless. After running away from Edwan''s talks of royalty, I needed to do something to take my mind off his statement. What did I do? I spent points as a means of R&R is what I did. Now, spending my points isn''t the problem, it''s the fact that I get distracted and lose track of time while doing so that gets me. Then again, I did quite a bit this morning so it''s easy to see where the time has gone. I started with the food production features, The Coop, The Shack, The Cow Pit, giving them all upgrades and increasing their output. I don''t know why I started there, although I could probably attribute it to the whole once-upon-a-human thing. After that, I built a wall. An actual fucking wall. One that encompasses the entirety of Varona and I even left room for growth. Although, it''s not like its placing is permanent. Since it is custom built by the dungeon, a.k.a. me, I can move the construction whenever and wherever I want. The perks of being a core. Now, I said I built a wall, and I did. But, it''s not a very good wall. Not when compared to the mythril Sentry Towers anyway. No, the walls around my city are made of stone and cost me half a day''s income to erect. No iron, no steel, no gods damn mythril and half my DP gone. That was when I should have stopped. I was planning on it, but as I made my way through the streets my mind wandered to those that played a major part in the war. Light sprung to mind as always, but I had no idea what to give the Master Assassin as a reward. With that in mind, I moved on to those I could reward. The dungeon Priests were on that list oddly enough. They had managed to defeat one of the eyepatch twins in a fight even though hardly any of their group had levelled up. In fact, it was only Zen, Ang and Cardinal Carn who put the time in at the Coliseum. Ang is also known to frequent Veris at the Pleasure Palace, but that''s neither here nor there. Although, you never know if that shit would help with levelling and I''m definitely not about to ask Veris the finer points of what happens when she does what she does. Either way, it''s a good job the Priests won because I''m going to need them for what''s to come. Because they put forth such a good effort in the war and mainly because none of them are ready for evolution, I decided to upgrade the cathedral.
Grand Cathedral of Confession: Alerting the world to your presence could be seen as a mistake and one that can not be taken back Dungeon Priests can now bestow a minor dungeon blessing on those who wish for one Dungeon Priests now earn xp from dungeon-related preaching The faithful offer twice as much points to the dungeon if they pray once a day Rewards: 32 XP
The reward seems paltry at this stage and I should ask Sis to stop showing them. To be honest, I could do without her snarky descriptions, too. All I really need was the benefits list. Just like One For The Rogues'', the Cathedral of Confession provided a boost to DP. As long as the members of the Priests flock to offer up a prayer on a daily basis, then I''ll bank twice as many points from them as I was doing before. The Priests'' building grew in size and became more grandiose than any other religion-affiliated building I had ever seen. Marbled columns, way more than needed, I might add, were present in every room inside. Even a small one that served no purpose other than being in the way was present in the room Cardinal Carn would claim as his own. I couldn''t even call it gaudy though as the small supporting column that wasn''t supporting anything all, and every other individual piece of marble was absolutely beautiful. They were whiter than Veris'' hair which I didn''t even think to be possible, and the room that would house the congregation was huge. It was easily three-times the size of the hall the church had supported before, and I couldn''t believe that the room actually fit inside the Cathedral. After popping in and out a dozen times though, I was sure. There was some space magic in play somewhere. Sis must activate that stuff on her own because I don''t remember putting in any extra effort when I was dishing out their reward. Not that I''m bothered by that. In fact, I''m hoping all my features end up with a similar feature. That would be awesome and is also something else I need to speak to Sis about. During my trips in and out of the Cathedral, I noticed a lot of artwork and sculptures based on myself. Namely the sole statue in the entrance room that is basically a life-sized depiction of me. Stolen from its rightful author, this tale is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. I wanted to be angry, but I was secretly delighted. I wanted to shout at someone and make them take notice of it for a moment. I wanted to... alright I fucking liked it. What more do you want? It also fits into my goal of coming out and no longer posing as a human. As I was gazing at the stone version of myself, I spotted Marie passing outside through the main door. My Space Mage was another person who did an amazing job during the battle and definitely needs some praise and recognition. Rushing out of the cathedral and away from the statue of... myself, I called out to Marie and ran over. After a quick explanation, she looked ecstatic about being rewarded. Her joy was contagious, and I too was also caught up in her mood. Until she told me what she wanted that was. "I want to be a full-time member of the Syndicate," she grinned. My excitement disappeared right away I can''t say yes to that, can I? Who will teach Space magic at the Academy? I''ll think about it. "But I need you, though, Marie," I pleaded. "In fact, as soon as you''ve trained three capable Space Mages to replace you, you can join the Syndicate. How''s that?" I feel quite pleased with that. I came up with it on the spot after all and it solves the problem of her replacement on its own. That said, I didn''t feel like I''d rewarded Marie enough with just that. It felt more like I''d encouraged her to get on with what I''d originally wanted her to do. Unsure of what else to offer the Space Mage Syndicate lover, I give her a small piece of my fractured Core as a consolation. Before Colin could swallow up the chunk that had broken off when the triplets died, I stored that shit out of his reach. I was curious to see what it would do to an actual person. I was also pretty confident they wouldn''t die just from the contact. Most humans that absorb Dungeon Cores usually gain special powers from the process. Even though it was only a fragment of my Core, the jade shard was bigger than your average Dungeon Core. The physical representation of my heart is much larger than it used to be and since I know I will heal over time, I don''t mind sharing the pieces that broke off. It''s not like I can reattach them anyway. Even though I didn''t want to use Marie as a test subject, I was confident she would be ok. Producing a small green shard of my heart and holding it out, Marie went to take it from me curiously. The fragment began to glow the second she made contact with it and her body absorbed a part of me into itself. "Will this make me an Assassin?" she asked. I could only sigh. I was expecting more. Something else. Nevertheless, she didn''t undergo any changes like Colin did nor did she seem any stronger. If anything, I felt closer to my Space Mage than before, but that was it. Hopefully it might help her teaching skills somehow. I''m praying that it does because I really want some more Space Mages. "I''m not sure," I tell her honestly, "but it might improve your teaching skills. That way you''ll get what you want quicker." After considering my words, Marie decided to hold one of her rare classes to see if there have been changes like I said. She disappears to prepare, and I''m left on my own outside the Cathedral feeling a little blue. It was only a white lie and she really might improve because of the Core fragment. Still, it left a sour taste in my mouth even though I wasn''t technically lying. To be fair though, if Marie had put in the time and taught one class a day since her arrival, I would have loads of bloody Space Mages right now. Her classes are more elusive than I am when I need a break and happen once a fortnight if my citizens are lucky. Taking a deep breath, I exhale and compose myself. There are still so many people to reward for their contributions. As I said before, though, I have a problem. The sun has risen high in the sky and I''m greeted by the arrival of a blas¨¦ Violet, a beaming Blondie and an absolutely furious Amber. "Master! Do you know what time it is? How long I''ve been waiting? Or how much my tummy hurts?" Amber begins to sob and I''m taken back, regretting my decision to blow off steam by spending points. Worst of all, I didn''t even do what I set out to do this morning. I made absolutely zero progress towards Ishda and instead built a wall that looks worse than most of the buildings that make up my city. Stupid dungeon things. "I''m sorry, Amber. I''ll get you extra portions so you can fill up," the redhead perks up at my offer of apology, "and how are you four this morning?" Violet also takes interest as I included Bear in the conversation. "We''re fine, thanks." She smiles and scratches the top of the cub''s head. "I''m fine too, thank you. It''s a beautiful morning today. How are you, Abi?" Blondie waits intensely to hear my answer, her eyes getting larger with each second that passes. "That it is, and I''m good. Thank you, Blondie. Sorry I wasn''t there when you woke up. I want to get my spending done before that so we can enjoy the day together." I explain as we head to the usual place. There are a lot of friendly waves and excited faces as we make our way down the high street. Ali has many establishments around town, but I always like to eat at the building near the fountain in the center of Varona. Everything is close by if any needs arise and it''s by far the best looking part of town. Some of my parks are pretty but the fountain is just beautiful. Surrounded by the guilds, council and a host of shops, it gets sunlight all day and is so peaceful you could sleep there. A far cry from some other cities I know and have heard about. Brunch came and went and Amber ate her fill. Blondie, Violet and Bear also ate a larger portion than usual but they did all skip breakfast due to an absent Master. I should tell them they don''t have to wait for me to eat. Nobody else does. In fact, other than their day jobs, missions or on the spot delegations, my family members live a pretty ordinary life. It''s definitely a better life than I used to live, that''s for sure. If I had a cushy life back then, I sure as hell wouldn''t be a Dungeon Core right now. Not that I''m complaining as there''s nothing I want more now than to stay as I am. I can''t believe myself when I say this, but I don''t want to be a human anymore. If I was still a human then the triplets would have been gone forever. Hell, I would never even have known them. Their smiles make me smile and their words fill my world with happiness. They''re as much a part of me as I am myself. They''re my everything just like the other oddballs that make up my family. From Me to Kat, Light to Veris and Anya to Becca, every one of them is eccentric in their own way. I only wished that one of them was an eccentric listener. Chapter 99: Goblins What did I come here for again? Currently, I''m on one of the floors filled with Goblins and I''m holding one of the little runts in front of me. Looking at it closely, the Goblin doesn''t seem to be as ugly as it was before. "Is that a Goblin, Abi?" Blondie asks beside me and I''m not confused by her question. In fact, I was just thinking the same thing myself. A cute, button nose sits in the center of its pudgy face as the Goblin looks at me in a confused manner. Probably because I''m sporting the same look. That doesn''t help me though. That was when a memory jumped to mind. I had been joking at the time, but it wasn''t wrong to say what I laughed couldn''t come true. "Come visit, Abi. Become beautiful just by being inside her," I had joked. The Goblin, however, is no joking matter. How can I keep hating them if they''re going to end up being good looking? This one could almost pass as a little boy and I wouldn''t know any better. rather than what my menu''s telling me. I can''t have adventurers killing kids, even if they are Goblins. Then again, it''s not just this one that looks childlike at the minute. Most of the others still look like hideous old men, but a few have already made the change to brighter pastures. This is so wrong. How are the Goblins even capable of that type of transformation anyway? What sort of bullshit is this? Trixie doesn''t look human yet and she''s been with us for a lot longer than these little shits have and Barry''s still made of mythril. Although, both of them are beautiful in their own way. The same could be said for Colin and his gorgeous chest. Even when he''s covered in drool, the King Mimic still manages to pull off a strange type of majesty that draws my attention. Still, this completely throws my dungeon out of sync. People won''t want to and probably shouldn''t be killing ugly old men and adorable children. Not that that''s what they are, but regardless that''s not what we''re about. That said, what am I going to do with twenty thousand, human-looking Goblins? That''s right! That''s how many there are. Each floor can hold up to one thousand Goblins and the Goblinator spits them out until they reach capacity. Ten-thousand Goblins from floors one to ten and the same number of Hobgoblins from eleven to twenty. And I can''t use the them now either. They don''t look like wrinkly old men or children. They could pass as this generations adventurers. Even if they are wearing loincloths and have a tint of green to their skin. Gods damned, stupid, good-looking Hobgoblins. They''ll be hell to pay if adventurers come across them. I can already see it! I shake my head while trying to come up with a solution for my problem. Until another problem literally screams in my face and I quickly look in on the Trolls. None of the adventurers or guard parties have managed to make it past Obling yet which means the normally-ugly Trolls have had longer to suck up my good-looking juices. Bastards! After a quick look, I''m left speechless. Stupid, good-looking Trolls and Goblins. Why isn''t anything ever easy? Me?
Yes?
Why are all these monsters so good looking? I mean, why aren''t the Goblins ugly? Or smelly, for that matter? They even smell nice! How? It''s not like there''s a bath or even any water sources on their floors. Although, should I really be complaining right now? They''re usually the biggest complaints I have when it comes to Goblins and if they''re surpassing my hate for them by changing everything I dislike about them, should I really keep putting them down?
You''re always the one harping on about making things beautiful.
Yeah, but... damn. I didn''t see that one coming. Stupid Goblins. And stupid Trolls for aidding them. "I suppose I am." My answer couldn''t have sounded less half hearted if I tried and was grumbled out miserably. I knew the kid still in my hand was a Goblin, I was just having a hard time processing it as one. Turning off the auto-spawners, I create a new floor for the good-looking group of monsters. Floor 43, which is almost the same size as Varona, only underground, is now the new home of twenty thousand Goblins and a smaller number of Trolls. Pfft. I summon Huts which lead to Dwellings, Dwellings that lead to Longhouses, Longhouses that changed to Reinforced Longhouses and every off branch variation that pops up. I add Tanneries, Cramped Coops, Meat Shacks, and I litter the forest with an abundance of cheap animal spawners that will provide enough food to keep everyone fed. I still can''t believe I''m catering to Goblins and Trolls, but I''m going with it due to my views on change. If I''m coming out then I need to be prepared for change. Even if that means getting over my aversion towards the little green devils, that''s what I''ll do. Although, once the adventurers and guards return to levelling up, I''ll have to reactivate the Goblinators. Then we''ll be back to good, old-fashioned, ugly and smell Goblins fresh for harvesting. Not that it changes the fact that a city''s worth of Goblins are now living on the lower floor, but it''s still a pleasant thought. Support the creativity of authors by visiting Royal Road for this novel and more. Until then, which will hopefully be later, rather than sooner, I don''t have to worry about it because that''s a problem for me of the future. The easiest person to delegate things to. The one person I know that won''t shirk her duties unless she''s delegating them to someone else. Miss reliable. It''s also easy because I''m always here and just can''t seem to get away from myself. "Are we done now? I''m getting hungry." Seeing how I''m finished with the setting up the floor, Amber takes the opportunity to state the obvious as her tummy chirps up to agree with her. Looking around, we have been here for quite a while. It takes some time to set up a floor for so many inhabitants. Even if one is a stellar Dungeon Core like myself, a few hours are still needed to make sure everything is in order. Although, it doesn''t matter what time of the day it is, Amber is always hungry. Violet and Bear look bored, whereas Blondie seems to be having a pleasant conversation with someone through the dungeon link. After a brief, but filling lunch, we move over to the Coliseum. I wouldn''t normally force these little girls to fight, but everyone is going to have to spend some time here from now on. The fight with King Aldus showed me our weaknesses. Even though I didn''t think we had any, we did and it was quite obvious. The triplets being wiped in one shot was an eye opener. It was my fault for keeping them with me all the time. They died because their levels were low. Hence our current trip to the Coliseum. The monstrous element of my family was stronger than the human army and won with few casualties, but they too need levelling. It best to take preventative measures for now because if they had been fighting the demons instead of my Assassins, the situation could have been much worse. "Are you ready, girls?" This will be their first fight and I''m more than a little worried. Not that they can die inside the Coliseum thanks to its Immortality feature, but I still can''t calm my nervous. Opposite to own feelings, the Triplets seem to be quite eager to fight and level up. It makes me feel ashamed for not letting them do this earlier. I move to join the Ringmaster in his booth, leaving the girls and bear alone on the arena floor. They need this. So do I for peace of mind, but the girls just want the levels. Excitement dances across their faces as Golems rise from the floor and stand idly by. They won''t move until they''re given instructions from Randy. Violet places Bear on the ground and the fight begins. Even though I want to give the Triplets my full attention, I can''t help but think about Marie. As I watch the girls evade and engage their opponents, the fact that I only have one specified Space Mage is a problem I can''t get off my mind. There''s not much I can do about it either. I do have access to that type of magic now and my dungeon certainly uses it in different ways here and there, but it''s not like I can explain any of that. Before absorbing my Core, Marie wanted to spend as little time teaching as possible. Since then, she''s been more proactive and has been holding three classes a day. If Marie can manage to shape a few others into Space Mages, I''ll be happy. Then she can finally pursue her dream of going full time at the Syndicate. I''m not opposed to her being an Assassin, not if that''s really what she wants to do. I just don''t want to lose such an important member of my family when there''s no one to take her place. Marie was vital in closing the portal to the demon realm and if she hadn''t of come to Varona, I don''t know if we would have been able to win the war. The Assassins were beginning to run low on stamina. If the demons had continued to come through the portal, would that have been the end? Could I have closed the portal somehow? It''s not likely without DP. Before l get any further, Amber appears in the spectator box beside us. The fact that she was teleported here means her fight is over and that she lost. The gluttonous redhead doesn''t have to wait for long as she''s followed almost immediately by Blondie. Not long after that Violet and Bear are also taken down, the Golems teaming up against the last remaining Oblivion Dragon. I know they''re only level 1, but being an Oblivion Dragon should have counted for something, right? "Why were the Golems so strong?" Blondie instantly rages at the Ringmaster beside me as soon as they''re all together. I delicately take two steps away from Randy while inwardly asking the same question. "That''s what I was about to say," Violet pouts before glaring at Randy. "I''m never doing that again." That childish comment was adorableness at its finest. "They tasted disgusting too." ... That one though. I have nothing for that one. Why she was just trying to eat a Golem after we just came from lunch is beyond me. Why she tried to do it in her human form is even stupider. Not one of the triplets used their transformation skill so I''m not surprised that three little girls lost to a bunch of Golems. "I don''t think I want to it either. Who needs to level up? I can just stay in the dungeon." Blondie doesn''t seem to want to repeat today''s evens either. "Never mind. You can try again tomorrow," I break their little hearts. "What?" all three answered in unison. That was a first. Usually the triplets hold down their characters to a tee and never speak over each other. The idea of fighting Golems must have been enough to shatter their illusion of individuality. "I know. It was tough. But just think about how tough it was for me having to watch you die, I don''t want to go through that again." Feelings like that are hard. "But... you can always bring us back like last time," Violet counters with a surprisingly-good argument. If she knew the cost, she might think differently. "Doing that cost me 30,000 DP for the three of you. It''s 10,000 for Bear aswell. That''s probably why he''s not with you." Violet only just notices that Bear isn''t in her arms and is still in the ring with the Golems. He''s not strong enough to cause any damage, but he''s tough enough to endure a bunch of stone Golems. 10,000 DP is a bloody, large amount for a little bear cub. Evident by the autonomous monsters stomping on him and getting nowhere. Until one their feet breaks on the cub''s back and the Golem crashes to the ground, that is. Well shit. Would you look at that? "It''s not a bad deal to avoid death, Violet. I agree, but you can''t guarantee I''ll always have the points to do that. No. It''s a much better idea for you three to level up." "But I don''t wanna." Violet cries, watching her cub take a beating. "Please don''t make me do this again, Abi." Blondie begs. "I''m so hungry I could die." And Amber states the obvious. I feel awful. Don''t beg me like that. You''ve got to be strong, Abi. I''ve got to be strong. Hell, we all have to get stronger. "Why didn''t any of you transform? The Golems literally stomped all over you, just like they''re doing to Bear. You could have done the same thing to them if you changed into your Dragon form." The girls look aghast. It''s as though I''ve just spoken heresy. "Don''t you like us like this, Abi?" Blondie looks sad, but still manages to find the energy to twirl on the spot. "What? Of course I do. I like you alive more though. Who said I didn''t like your Dragon form?" "No one. It''s just that we''ve been this way since you summoned us. We thought you wanted us to stay this way?" "No. I just... if you need to, then transform. I don''t mind either way. I just want you to survive. Anyway..." I give the triplets a few pointers on their battle, with the Ringmaster nodding along behind me. Inside the ring, a very excited Bear has just earned his first kill after chomping through the core of the footless Golem. After climbing on the body of the floored Golem, the rest continued to rain down attacks. This kept the injured Golem he was laid on down and damaged it enough for the cub to claim victory. A second stone foot shattered on his head right after, and another Golem hit the floor. Bear jumped over to his now opponent as I watched on in surprise. I had stopped talking to the girls and was giving Violet''s cub my full attention. Huh? I wonder if Bear''s going to be stronger than triplets? Chapter 100: Still Nowhere The main hall inside the Academy of Dark Arts was packed to the brim. The seats, rafters, balcony and floor were all full of silent listeners. Some had been there since morning classes but more had arrived after word of a sudden lecturer holding a special class was spread around. Marie was set on her dream of joining Syndicate ranks full time and was putting in more effort than before to help Abi cultivate a new generation of Space Mages. "Miss?" A woman near the front raised her hand. "Please. Call me, Professor," Marie smiled at the student, enjoying her role more than she thought she would. "Yes, Professor. I still don''t understand the difference between portals and teleportation and why there is a need for both?" "That''s a good question. While both seem similar, they each have their own benefits and flaws. Teleportation is good for moving single people or small groups and allows them to instantly appear in locations they have visited before. The cost of the spell is determined by how far away the target is and the amount of people being transported. Portals - or gates, on the other hand, are a different pot of fish. They take effect over reality rather than the mage casting the spell and cost a significant more mana in their initial set up. Once they''ve stabilised however they only require a trickle of power for their upkeep and can be used by the masses as opposed to small groups. The difference between the two is not only a variable mana cost. Gates take longer to set up than a single use of teleportation would, the amount of people that can use them afterwards make up for that shortcoming. How you arrive at your location is also important. Once a gate is created, it is visible on both sides of the portal. Time is needed for people to pass through and the gate will need to be guarded to prevent misuse. Teleportation, however, occurs instantly and follows the mages will. There is also a spell called mass teleportation that''s capable of moving even armies, but is not cost effective so I won''t go in to it. What I will say is that it takes an absurd of mana to move a large number of people with one spell. So unless you''re coordinating with a group of Space Mages - or you have a mana pool the size of a river, it''s highly unlikely you''ll be able to cast a spell like that on you own. Hell, you may even suffer for trying it. It''s easy to learn from the mistakes of the past. An mana-depleted Space Mage is no help when it comes to retreating. Unless they''re saving their own skin that is," she added, talking from experience. The woman who had asked the question was nodding along, scribbling down notes as fast as she could. Much like the majority of those in the hall. Others were entranced by the old ladies'' words and couldn''t take their eyes of her long enough to write anything down. "I know most of you didn''t see the portal that was created in the forest, but that was different to the gates we are able to create. Even I have never seen a gateway that leads to another realm, and I have been around. When I was closing the breach, I wasn''t able to decipher any of the runes that were used in its creation. Which I''m still pertubed about. Still, that''s the speciality of gates. They allow you to travel to places you have never been before, unlike the spell teleport which is confined to known locations. To be able to create portals, you need to have the spell gate and know the symbols for at least one runic travel formation. You can aquire them by studying currently-dormant gates spread through the land. Chasing someone through portals is much easier than following a teleporter, let me tell you." Marie thinks back on her past events and how they helped shape her into the person she is today. A strong woman. And a strong Mage. With an even stronger determination to hit level 100 and become an Assassin. Joining the Syndicate is her goal, but it''s not enough. She wants to be an Assassin, one with the shadows. If Abi knew about it, she would probably attribute it to Marie''s kleptomania. The hall was even quieter than before after Marie''s mention of demons. The citizens hadn''t seen them, but the details weren''t being hidden. Word of what happened had spread through Varona like the wind. Everyone now knew that demons were real. That they were an actual thing, and they had even invaded them. Or at least they tried to. The person who secretly ran the council, the woman the Priests revered as their God, the one who claimed to own the dungeon and all the monsters inside, had fought them back. Or so the stories went. There was also a lot of "I killed more than you did" in between conversations for some reason, but the girl named Abi was present in almost every story. Even Marie had spoken about the woman with green hair. She let her tongue slip mid-lecture before composing herself. "Tracking a teleporting Mage is like searching for invisible bread crumbs. The mana signatures they leave are faint are the only way to find them is..." Marie''s was psyched. Her lecture continued until late in the evening and the numbers attending only grew larger. She prayed it would only take a few weeks to train herself a few replacements if she kept drilling them with knowledge. Hopefully some of them would unlock the class and she would be free. You could be reading stolen content. Head to the original site for the genuine story. Although, teaching had actually grown on her by the end of the session. Having so many people listen to her speak was a hard to begin with. Especially since Marie liked to live in the shadows and had hid away from society for the last 40 years. Yet, there was something about a crowd of people hanging on her every word that she found intoxicating, and she liked it. Marie the Space Mage Professor Dungeon Stories Volume 4
I haven''t made any progress at all. Zero. None. Ishda is still a far-sighted dream due to my constant spending and every day there''s something else that I need to spend points on. Whoever said having more DP would make life easier was a fool. Although, that might have been me. If anyone calls me out on it, I''ll just pretend I never said it. I remember the days when I only had 20DP. Spending my points in a matter of seconds and lazing around living the life of un-luxurious bliss while waiting for them to refill. Ok, I know, that''s not how it went down. Then again, if I swap out ''bliss'' for complaining and crying then it wouldn''t be too far from the truth. Instead of making my way towards another valuable farm of DP, I''ve been replenishing Assassins, upgrading features, dealing with unforeseen problems and coaching the triplets. For reasons they seem to blaming on me, none of the girls want to use their transformation skill. I don''t wanna force them to change, but as humans... They kinda suck. Like... really suck. They''re still level 1 for Core''s sake. Even Bear is level 18! The triplets just aren''t strong enough to beat a Golem in human form. They don''t have the stats for it. If only they''d grab a few levels as Dragons, then they wouldn''t do so bad in their other form. At this rate though, Bear''s going to end up being their protector and guardian. I''ve also been spending my time sorting out other problems. The guests from Tune have been allowed to return home and we''ve taken in a new batch of redeemable souls that need guidance. Guidance that is more like therapy, but it works. As soon as their souls have reverted back to grey, they''re swapped out with another yellow or orange soul from the coastal community. It''s slow going, but it''s better than killing everyone and it works. I''d be a mass murderer by now if I followed Sis'' instructions. Fortunately, I found my own way of correcting behaviour that doesn''t involve 16 years of waiting for them to mature. Growing up in an already corrupt world is no way to start a new life. No wonder the system wasn''t working properly before. Sending souls through the cycle of reincarnation, only for them to be born again into the same shitty world is not a problem solving idea. The equivalent is sweeping dust under the rug. It might be out of sight for a while, but the problem is still there. It''s better to mop the floor instead. Although in this case, Tironia is the floor and it''s pretty fucking big. It''s going to take a long time to clean, but it''s not like I have to do it all on my own. Sacha, the Deputy Mayor of Varona, is amazing when it comes to finding the right people for the right job. Hence when she told me that Raff - one of the City Council members - would be the best person for the job, I immediately put him in charge of reformation. Delegation at its finest. My responsibilities on the matter are now more laid back. Hana and Mira still watch over the yellow souls undergoing reformation and instead of me, it''s now Raff that sends them their way. Samantula and the Spiders are still on orange duty which takes much longer to cleanse. Other variables that I hadn''t considered before and another reason why I''m still nowhere near Ishda, were the current problems in the cities I already control. Orad wasn''t actually that bad to be fair and it only took the better part of a day for me to sort out. After having an awkward conversation with Mayor Baldur about the fact that I''m a Dungeon Core, which he took a lot better than I thought he would, I created buildings to house the homeless and built livestock-producing features to ensure everyone would be fed. I also made an orphanage and staffed it with a few Assassins to look after and teach the little delinquents. Usually it''s hard to find someone to care for those who haven''t been dealt the best hand in life. But since I can rely on my ever-expanding family, I don''t have to worry on that front. Mayor Baldur is quite young for his position. He''s roughly in his forties, has dark brown hair, is cleanly shaven and wears a nice tunic that you would expect your everyday city Mayor to be dressed in. He''s also as straight faced as they come. After joining me me as I constructed the buildings, he didn''t seem startled in the lease nor did he say a word. It was beginning to throw me off my game with how casual he was and I was starting to question whether he might be a demon too. But when his facade finally broke, I felt much better. People should be freaked out about me being a Dungeon Core, right? Mayor Baldur''s jaw dropped after we left the city. Outside the walls, a small hill was emerging from the ground. It kept rising up, getting higher and higher until a door rose into view embedded in the new mountain. Soil fell from the featureless frame as it stopped rising and settled in to it''s new position, surrounded by the grip of Tironia. Mayor Baldur almost deafened me, screaming like a lunatic as the door creaked opened, "What the hell?" Did he not believe me? Did he think I was just a super powerful Magus or something? I told him what we were going to doing of course, but he must not have believed me. Well... that was unlucky because it''s there now and adventurers are ready to level up on good, old-fashioned, ugly and smelly Goblins. Dungeons that are free to enter are unheard of around here. So any treasure they find, which I did add to incentivize dungeon diving, is theirs to keep. Not to mention that they can level up quite well on my Goblins. Growing stronger the accomplishment they rack in can become addictive and the effort they put in works twofold. They grow and get stronger, becoming happier and higher level in the process. Improving their lives and hopefully inspiring others to do the same. I earn more points as the farm grows too, so it''s a win win. I explain to Baldur that the monsters inside this dungeon are not capable of leaving and that there will always be a couple of guards on duty to ease his mind. Not that they would exit the dungeon anyway. Everyone I summon is loyal to the dungeon. To me. Still, it makes Baldur feel better. Dungeon B is only 20 floors deep and consists solely of Goblins. A hobgoblin is set as the Dungeon''s Boss and it shouldn''t be too hard for a group of seasoned adventurers to take down. A comfortable room where the Assassins can relax after standing guard outside is after the Boss. In the room behind that, defended from any would-be dungeon destroyers, is Core B. Nothing will happen to me if it''s destroyed, it''s just a Dummy Core after all, and I shaped the dungeon around it myself using my own dungeon''s powers. To be honest, the Core is actually irrelevant and unneeded. Now that the land is mine, I can keep purchasing and create dungeons out of nothing. Still, having a Dummy Core there makes me feel better for some reason and it looks legit. That was the extent of Orad''s problems. Not many at all as the city runs rather well. I can''t fault Baldur. He''s a good guy with a good soul to match. I like him. Tune and its Mayor, on the other hand, are pretty fucked. Chapter 101: Clean Up Tune is the largest city on the Ishda coastline and supplies most of the region''s fish. There are two other exporters, but both combined distribute less seafood than Tune does. That''s probably the main reason the town is rampant with corruption. It''s ripe with seedy business negotiations and backroom deals. I wouldn''t even be surprised if the mayor was in on most of them. His soul is a steady orange after all. There are so many problems in Tune, that I''m still working on them. Reaching Ishda''s capital still seems like a dream as I walk down the dirty streets of my third city. Getting more annoyed with each step. Screw this. Absorbing anything not living, even a few corpses if my notifications are anything to go on, which they are, the streets become free from clutter, dirt, blood, and grime as I breathe a sigh of relief. My absorption doesn''t fix broken buildings obviously, but that''s a task for tomorrow. Today is clean-up day. Councilman Raff is in the center of town and I make my way there while absorbing as much as I can. I''m meant to oversee the candidates he''s going to choose for reformation. Which might be tricky for him. The problem with delegating this specific task is that nobody else can see souls and I''m the only one able to use Soul Guide. I have full confidence in Sacha though. The Deputy Mayor always knows what''s best and she recommended him for the job. We''ll just have to see if he''s up to the task. Among the different walks of life in Tune, there are no ideal choices. Each person comes with their own problems and there are too many to count. By the time I arrive at his location and he greets me, Raff''s selectively chosen individuals are already lined up. He''s got a good variety going on too. Children, men, women, some elders, guards, officials, laborers, fishermen, and even a few adventurers have been included in his selection. "A little bit of everything," he chuckles nervously. I nod in response but don''t comment. I have an opinion, of course, I do. I just think voicing it wouldn''t be that great, so I keep my mouth shut for once. Also, I''ve already decided to palm this job onto Raff and if I had wanted to do it myself, I would have. All great leaders utilize their subordinates. It doesn''t mean I''m lazy. Using Soul Guide, I look over those lined up in a trance-like state. Shadows cover their eyes which creeps me out a little, but other than that, Raff''s choices are spot on. Most are yellow but there are a couple of oranges in there also. I don''t know how he worked out who was what, but he did a good job and I''m feeling quite comfortable leaving him in charge. Soul Guide is useful in many different ways as I''ve recently learned. Obtaining an understanding of my own skills is something I''ve been lacking due to a chain of continuous events. Even the fleeting moments of downtime that find their way into my life manage to get taken up by problems. Maybe I should visit the Coliseum myself? If I had any offensive skills other than destruction through DP, I might consider it. Fact is, I have no means of offense other than that. I recently learned that my Dungeon Mist only boosts family members and not myself so... Where''s the master''s power, huh? After leaving Raff, I find myself traveling to my next destination alone. I know, right? Where are the triplets? They''re still in the Coliseum, and, I have a sneaking suspicion that Bear will be ready to evolve when I get home. That and the girls will still be level 1. Maybe I should order them to transform? For the greater good? I don''t want to be mean, but is it okay to be cruel to be kind? I doubt it so let''s ignore that for now. The main point is that they''re trying and you never know, they could get lucky. That said, I''m about to hold a meeting with the Tune''s Mayor and could probably use some luck myself. If not, I have another trick up my sleeve that''s guaranteed to work today. One that has changed many a mind over the last few centuries. I don''t bother myself with the two guards stationed at the door. Nor do I concern myself with the four inside, pretending to look busy. Instead, I port straight into the Mayor''s office just as he''s counting a large pile of gold. Almost like a certain Catergoriser, I know. The narrative has been taken without authorization; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. The Mayor is not the most composed of men, as evidenced by his fall backward off his seat at my sudden intrusion. A quick smile is all he gets before I port him back to his chair as though the awkward event never happened. The only difference is that the Mayor is now trying to catch flies in his mouth. "Yeah, I know. How did I do that? Amazing, right? Here''s the deal," I pause for a second to let his mind catch up and catch on to the fact that I''m offering him a proposition. "I have a shit load of gold that I''m willing to give you. What do you think about that?" The Mayor can''t hide his disbelief and scoffs as the words leave my mouth. The overweight man has definitely been doing well for himself as he''s covered in gold. Rings, bracelets, necklaces, and even the stitching in his clothes is made of the stuff. "Normally, I wouldn''t give someone like you the time of the day. Nobody gives away gold for free. There''s obviously some sort of catch so get to it. I''m very busy as you can see." He goes back to counting his coins as though I haven''t just offered him a load more gold. Seeing how he''s covered in the stuff, I thought he''d have jumped at my offer. It almost threw me off a little, but what I wanted wasn''t anything he couldn''t deliver. "Well there is one thing I want you to do," I sigh. Acting as though the mayor''s a clever guy, I make out that he''s seen through me like glass. "There always is. I should know. Continue." I hate this guy already, I don''t know why we haven''t thrown him in a cell yet. Maybe I put too much trust in Raff? Although it''s probably not a good idea to kidnap the mayor when I''m coming out as a dungeon though. Probably. Either way, I don''t like him. He''s nothing like Baldur. "I''m going to give you an abundance of food. So much that you''ll be able to feed every single resident of this city twelve times a day if you wanted to. Also, that''s exactly what I want you to do. Feed them." The heavily-portioned man seems confused by my offer. It shouldn''t be that hard to understand though. I''m basically paying him to do the job he''s supposed to be doing now. Only I''m offering a ridiculous amount of food and the same in gold on top. "Well, not twelve times a day of course and obviously not you personally, but I need you to be the guy who sets it up. Look like the Mayor for once," hell it might even drop you a colour. If it goes well, he might not need any time in rehab. He probably will, though, and I wouldn''t count my chickens just yet. "Okay?" Now he''s wondering why I''m offering all these goodies out for no apparent reason. Time to lay it out there. "Oh. I''m a Dungeon Core by the way." That was enough to get his attention. He even knocked his coins over as he flinched away. "Yep. Dungeon Core. Not a Space Mage even though I can teleport freely. Short story is that I own this city now. Purchased legally and everything. Due to that, I''m now able to see anything that happens anywhere in Tune. It doesn''t matter wether it''s the guard downstairs picking his nose or the fact that beneath your desk your leg is hammering away furiously. I see it all. If you don''t start feeding everyone -and I mean everyone- I''ll know about it and our next meeting will not be as pleasant." The Mayor turns so pale that it looks like he''s just made a deal with the devil. Instead, it''s just me, your friendly-neighbourhood core. "Before I leave for the day, I''ll be setting up food production sites right outside of the city. They should be ready to harvest as early as tomorrow, but I''ll spare you the details for now. I''m sure you have people who know their stuff." The Mayor''s mouth is moving, but no words are coming out so I take the opportunity to continue. It''s nice having the room. "They take about three hours to replenish since I upgraded them. Your guys need to know that information so make sure you tell them. Other than that, I suppose you can keep doing what you have been doing for now. Well, maybe change your behavior before you become a bigger problem on my list. I don''t wanna have to throw you in my dungeon," I frown. "Anyway, I''ll be back in about a week. Make sure you feed your citizens or you''ll be seeing me a lot sooner and remember, it won''t be for a friendly chat like this one." Someone''s need for food catches my attention and I turn around to find no one. Amber isn''t with me and it was in fact my own stomach that interrupted my monologue. Turning red, I face the Mayor and bid him a prompt goodbye before disappearing. Hopefully, he won''t mess it up. I don''t really have high expectations, but what will be will be. Right now I''m too embarrassed with myself to care and port to the Coliseum. If I''m hungry, Amber must be starving. On arrival, I find the girls being lectured by Randy rather than fighting Golems and it''s no surprise to see their level unchanged whereas Bear is ready for that evolution. The Ringmaster shakes his head when he sees me and the triplets look disappointed. Is it that bad? Can they just not fight or something? "Don''t worry, girls," I offer them words of encouragement, "I''m sure we can find something else for you to fight." What that is, I have no idea, but I''ll think of something. "Until then, let''s go get some dinner." Amber is the first to her feet and is full of excitement. Motivating her sisters to do the same, we move out of the Coliseum and head straight to Ali''s. While we''re there, I debate whether or not to purchase some land. After we''ve finished I feel too tired to do anything else tonight and tomorrow is a new day. I don''t have any city visits planned now for another week and nothing else needs my immediate attention, neither do I have to go anywhere. There are still a few people left to reward for their service and efforts in the war, but that''s nothing major like cleaning up Tune. It would be nice if the domino effect kicked in, at least that''s what I''m hoping for. Once the majority of souls have reverted back to neutral, hopefully, the rest will follow. Hopefully. I mean, being good can be infectious in its own way after all. Chapter 102: Back On Track The reincarnator formerly known as Bruce Gold has been coming to terms with his second life. That was until the peaceful city became a hot spot for invasion. The teenager was thrust into the mountain dungeon with the rest of the citizens and, for the most part, went unnoticed. Bruce Gold had been a good child on the back end of puberty before he died. That said, he wasn''t happy about having to repeat that stage of life again whatsoever and was currently at odds with himself. For all appearances, he wanted to keep up the facade of being a good son. Even if his parents knew he was special they hadn''t let him leave the house in months, not since his last growth spurt. It was only thanks to the war that his mother was forced to move them to a safer location, albeit reluctantly. No matter how much Kieran had begged her to let him play out, she hadn''t given in. But after gaining a slight grasp on the power known as magic -and with his parents caught in the same panic as the rest of the city, Kieran managed to slip out of their sight. A brief squeeze on the stream of time was all it took for the teenager to disappear. He hadn''t actually teleported anywhere, instead he stopped time momentarily and made a hasty break for it. Through the caves, through the tunnels, all the way to the large stone doors that signified the entrance of the dungeon. He was free. Not that he wouldn''t return to his parents. All he wanted was a quick tour of the city that was now his new home. Plus, all teenage boys snuck out now and then. It was only natural to be a little rebellious. Kieran didn''t want to upset his parents or make them worry. He was thankful to have them. The orphanage where he had lived on Earth wasn''t the worst place to grow up, but all he had ever wanted was a family. Now, after sneaking out, he felt as though he was breaking their trust. He could have attempted this many times from their home, but Mark and Tina Ely always had their eye on him. Plus he was still building his confidence and coming to terms with the fact that he could use magic. Time magic, no less. Time Mages were the rarest of the rare, or so he had overheard, and he was now one of them. He couldn''t believe his luck. From orphaned nobody to superstar status and all it had taken was his death. Kieran wasn''t pleased with the last part, but it had happened nonetheless. Poor Bruce, he thought, smiling as he slipped through the empty town. The only people around were those holding the line on the outskirts. The rest of the citizens - as Kieran knew them - were in the forest, fighting the King''s army. Throughout both his lives, the budding Time Mage could be classed as an adult in either world and he thought he was prepared to see war. Not to participate, but only to observe. It was strange at first and Kieran felt alone. Alone in the forest, hidden behind a tree near a large, black tower. The only citizen present to watch as the enemy army approached. ''Where are Varona''s defenders? Don''t tell me it''s just those guards back there.'' Bruce began to panic. Maybe there was a reason his parents hadn''t let him out into the world yet. Maybe it was because this world was just as messed up as his last, only in a variety of different ways. Dungeons and magic are not subjects of everyday discussions on Earth unless your after-school club is dedicated to fantasy in some aspect. Just as Kieran was about to break the laws of nature for a third time that day, the most beautiful woman he had ever seen appeared with three children. It was strange that Kieran thought of the children as good-looking, but his concept of time was skewered and he just went with it. There weren''t any seedy feelings after all, so there wasn''t anything wrong with his observations. Before she could speak, the children started talking amongst themselves and the King didn''t seem too impressed with their dismissive tones and ridiculous requests. He let off the scariest-looking magic that Kieran had ever seen. Not that he''d ever witnessed any firsthand. Instead, his knowledge was limited to manga and anime but they didn''t do the attack justice. A blade as black as the tower beside him cut down every tree as it flew toward the four females. The three children somehow erected a magical barrier, but it was in vain as the magical attack broke through, and the woman and children too. The woman took the brunt of the attack as it carried her into the tower behind, severing a few limbs in the process. The children were hit by a smaller portion of the King''s magic, but it was enough to cease their movements and end their lives there and then. It was then Kieran realized that he was absolutely shitting himself. The extent of his power so far was the ability to stop time for ten seconds. Roughly ten seconds. It was enough to slip away and make it past a couple of unsuspecting guards, but to evade an attack like that? Bruce didn''t know if he could do it. Hell, he didn''t even want to find out. The only reason he was still there was because of the amputated woman. She wasn''t dead yet. Worst of all, the young Time Mage wanted to help her. He was even debating running in, picking her up, and then stopping time for as long as he could while running as fast as his little legs would take him. He knew it was foolish. That he would probably die. He was still going to do it though. What good was magic if you didn''t use it to be a kickass hero? Saving the damsel in distress was always his favorite part of the anime. Just as he was about to enact his plan, the woman spoke. Kieran didn''t catch what she said as his heart beat so hard it was the only sound he could hear. Instead, what he saw next made him question his eyes as another woman appeared. Identical to the first in every way except that this one had all her limbs still and this time, when the full-bodied, green-haired beauty spoke, Kieran heard her clear as day. If you find this story on Amazon, be aware that it has been stolen. Please report the infringement. "Kill them," she whispered. Then the darkness opened up and everything inside, from monster to man, was aimed at the human army behind the King. The woman herself was gathering an insane amount of power in the palm of her hand and in no way seemed like she needed the young man-child''s help. Instead, Keiran watched on in fascinated horror as the King''s army was decimated and the earth was torn asunder as the woman released her death ray. What a world. Kieran Ely, Time Mage Dungeon Stories Volume 4
Everything is back on track. Finally. My day-to-day tasks have increased slightly, but on average it''s not too bad. Mornings consist of breakfast with the triplets, followed by a meeting at City Hall. There, I have to listen to a bunch of reports from the people in charge of the tasks delegated to them. This is by far my least favorite part of the day. Mayor Kana updates me on anything that needs my attention in Varona, which isn''t half as much as it used to be. Raff reports the changes in Tune, he also likes to mention how his job would be easier if I put more time in there myself. Although, from what I''ve seen, he seems to have things covered and I was never expecting the coastal city to change overnight. Also, Light complains at every meeting about being left in charge of Orad. He complains that the countryside city is too much of a boring place and that nothing interesting happens there. That''s right, I shipped Light out to Orad for a while. I didn''t send him alone though and sent my gold-hungry Categorizer with him. Simon is there to oversee the dungeon. Even though there are only twenty floors of Goblins, people are prone to making mistakes while not paying attention or when showing off. We don''t want them dying out of stupidity, giving the small dungeon a bad rep. Once the city guard has been shown the ropes and conforms to my orders, Simon should be able to return to Varona. That doesn''t mean Light has stopped complaining about his posting though and he voices that fact at every meeting. Seriously, he should be happy. Sophie is with him -pregnant as she may be, specifically because there''s no danger there. All he has to do is patrol and make sure they''re distributing food like they should be doing. Is checking on the quality of people''s lives that boring? I''ll switch him out with someone else soon. I thought I was doing them a favor though. Never mind. I debated sending Noir first, that would have been doing me a favor. After deciding there wasn''t anything that needed demolishing, I held off on that idea. After the morning meetings, me and the triplets enjoy a nice walk outside the city. We move through the areas already unlocked in the direction of Ishda. It would be faster to port to the opposite side of the dungeon-owned land, but then I''d spend my DP before Amber could inform me it was lunchtime. Plus, it''s boring. This way I get to enjoy myself a little. Instead, we opt to stroll through the morning''s early sun, sometimes taking out a monster or two on the way. Most of the time it''s just me holding the creature down while the triplets shamelessly beat it to death, but at least they''re leveling now. That''s what it''s all about. I knew I''d find a way. Plus, they''re wild monsters we gang up on so... Who cares about their feelings? Don''t pop up. Don''t pop up. Don''t pop up. ... Thank the Core. For a second there, I was half expecting a notification telling me that monsters now need to ascend to the next plane of bullshit. Thankfully, that didn''t happen. At some point during my acquisitions, Amber lets us know it''s lunchtime and we head to Ali''s. Afterward, I drop them at the Coliseum, which is the triplets'' least favorite part of the day, Sometimes I stay to watch their progress, they''ve been doing much better recently. The levels they earned on our morning walks have helped them gain enough strength to finally beat the Ringmaster''s first group of Stone Golems. Alone, I might add. Bear, doesn''t participate in the girls'' fights anymore. He''s over twenty levels and an evolution in front of them now. He is also a gigantic Bear who can fight on two feet. No longer a cub, the evolution he earned increased his size tenfold, and instead of carrying the Cave Bear, Violet now uses her pet as a mount. Still, he has his own matches and Randy puts him against stronger Golems in his own corner of the Coliseum. If I''m not watching them train, I''m busy dealing with tasks that need not only my attention, but my DP too. Raff, Kana, and Light, usually have some tasks they need me to carry out around the same time the girls are fighting. Other than myself, Me, and Sis, no one else can spend my points. Even then, those two are only able to spend what I give them. Once the triplets are done with their matches, I too am done for the day and we enjoy a nice dinner together. Usually in the company of others as everyone is generally done with their day jobs by that time. We chat, laugh, tease and slightly insult each other, but all in good spirits. Just like tonight. That was when something odd happened, or at least I thought it did. Time seemed to stand still for the briefest of moments before it corrected itself. I was about to mention it when Anya pushed a glass of Jack in front of me and after downing it, I passed the time skip off as nothing. That bit of strangeness did remind me that I still need to find a Time Mage though. Rare as they are, I''ll probably have to unlock and search the entire continent before I come across one of them. Not that I''m in a rush to find the hermits of the magic world, but sooner would be preferable to later. After dinner, believe it or not, is when I hone my skills. Not in any physical sense of the word though. My evenings are spent reading. When that awful elf Hiroshi died, I absorbed the remains of three Dungeon Cores he had taken into himself before reaching Varona. I also gained a shit load of monsters and features I''ve neglected to sort through. Now that I''m actually going through it, I''m barely making any headway. There are so many different types of features that I could use to benefit my dungeon, I really should have gone through the list sooner. Still, it''ll probably take weeks to finish going through it all so I''m in no rush. Due to my laid-back way of acquiring land with the triplets and my advisor costs being low, I always have points left over to test out new features after dinner. It''s become the highlight of my day and I look forward to this time. Today, however, it isn''t a feature I''ve decided to go with. Today it will be what the System specifies as a monster. Instead, I''m hoping for intelligent family members because I have an important mission for them when we reach Ishda. These points are being spent on Vampires. Lesser Vampires first. They have a human appearance as expected, but animal-like intelligence. They can follow orders but don''t make good decisions on their own. After an evolution, they become your average, run-of-the-mill, Vampires. The next step up is no longer animalistic in the brains department, instead they have a one-track mind. Ready to serve and advance. Honestly, all they talk about is advancing to the Noble rank. Which brings us to the third-tier Vampires. Nobles. Damn, they look good. They even give the rest of my family a run for their money. Seriously. It almost feels unfair to the rest of the population, though they''re not doing so badly in the looks department themselves. Noble Vampires are clever and calculating. They should be able to blend into the capital''s population easily. Ishda is missing a few of their nobles after all and I can easily erect a few mansions when I get there. That will give the impression that not only are the new nobles wealthy, but they''re capable too. I''ll also throw a cave''s worth of gold their way, making it more than just an impression and solidifying it as a fact. Gold is bilingual after all. Chapter 103: Vampires The scar that ran across the face of the planet was nothing compared to the small piece of moon missing from the sky. How can she be that strong? The young woman''s power defied everything he knew about life, or his old life at least. The Time Mage formerly known as Bruce Gold was petrified at being alone in the forest while an army was invading. After all, he had never seen an army''s worth of people in person, only scenes like that on TV. On the receiving end of their invasion, however, it was fair to say that Kieran Ely regretted his decision to sneak a peek. Then - as if the army wasn''t bad enough, the forest was filled with man-eating monsters, the types that can generally be found in your weekly fantasy manga. Spiders, wolves, bats, and even a few hundred slime were present. That in itself would have been the strangest sight had they not been accompanied by an army of Assassins. The people that can generally be found strolling around town loving life, or in Talia''s Tavern enjoying a good ale loving life, or on guard duty, somewhere or other, still loving life, were fighting alongside the monsters, culling the human army by the masses. The last thing that Kieran had seen pushed him over his limit. He was shocked at the - minuscule at best - planetary destruction caused by the beautiful, young woman. Her eyes, a subtle shade of green, didn''t imply that she was capable of such feats; King Aldus had seemingly felt the same way before he had disintegrated with three of his subordinates, leaving his army obliterated and high-tailing it away. That wasn''t allowed however as the Assassins dropped into the shadows and the woman disappeared in a snap. Unable to stop himself, Kieran couldn''t help but shake uncontrollably beside the tree he was hiding behind. It was mind-blowing. Sure, he could stop time for a few seconds, but that was nothing compared to the beam of obliteration that had out-trumped the King''s blade of magic. What happened next was, by all accounts, even stupider. Kieran heard the sound of combat to the east and followed it. Why? He had no idea but his legs carried him forward as he continued to question himself. At every opportunity, Kieran would stop the flow of time for as long as possible to avoid missing any crucial blows. The moment of magically-induced carnage still played on his mind. It was destruction like nothing he had ever seen. The Time Mage ran until he reached the action. It wasn''t what he had expected, even with the monsters he thought might be there. Most of the creatures he had seen in the first fight were still in the same location finishing off stragglers. The Assassins that had disappeared into the shadows utilized a teleportation skill as they arrived before Kieran. Even with his time blips, he felt a little cheated being the last to arrive. Not that anyone knew he was there. They were all too engrossed with the army of demons flooding out of the portal. Forming multiple rows around the doorway to hell, the Assassins fought hard but the demons looked strong. For every dozen that fell, so too did an Assassin. After he had laid his eyes on the demons, Kieran was furious with himself. He couldn''t believe he had made his way to the next battle instead of returning to the mountain dungeon. He had been gone for twenty minutes at this point. Surely, one of his ever-watching parents had noticed he was missing and they were probably searching the dungeon as he watched the carnage. Unbeknownst to the citizens guarding Varona from the city''s outskirts and those inside the dungeon, an army of more than one million demons was trying to force themselves into this plane in the forest outside their home. There was so much going on that Kieran could only do one thing to help. He ran. He wasn''t an Assassin. They looked awesome. In his brown tunic and green pants, Kieran thought he resembled some country hick. It had been a novelty, but that had long since worn thin. After seeing the Assassins, Kieran wished to be as cool as them. If Abi had known this, or known of Kieran''s existence at all in fact, then she would be groaning. Another - what could be an - exemplary Mage wanting to follow in the steps of her unique summons. One of the guards noticed a blip of a person before it disappeared as he ran past stopping time once again. Still sprinting he went through the residential district and into the usually-bustling street that housed Lucinda''s Liquids. Round the corner, he passed Ali''s and from there it was a straight run to the center of town. He could see the Academy of Dark Arts, the place his parents always talked - argued? - about. The first time he had seen it was earlier on that day. The crowd he and his parents had been part of was led towards the main building and around the side. At the back of the campus, between two smaller buildings a pair of large stone doors sat, the entrance to the dungeon. The story has been taken without consent; if you see it on Amazon, report the incident. Kieran didn''t have the same conceptions as the rest of Tironia when the subject of conversation was about dungeons. His knowledge came from the life of Bruce and his short-lived, but majorly loved, hobbies of reading fantasy novels and playing the old Nintendo RPGs at the orphanage. Without hesitation, Kieran backtracked through the tunnels and caves that led him to his freedom less than half an hour ago. He hoped against fate that the Assassins could somehow push back the demons and that the green-haired woman would defeat the king. He had seen them standing off as he made his way through the forest, but Kieran had already decided he would be a burden if he stuck around any longer. He thoroughly wanted his parents to drag him home, scold him, and then ground him for eternity. It was nice having parents and Kieran didn''t want to lose them. That said, after seeing the angry and disappointed look on their faces, all he wanted to do was curl up into a ball and forget that the day had ever happened. Kieran Ely, Time Mage Dungeon Stories Volume 4
Noble Vampires are not hindered by the same debilitating effects that the lower evolutions need to be cautious of. The first tier of Vampires turn to dust when they come into contact with the sun. So they''re literally no help for most of the day. Awesome. Sounds about right. The next tier at least has some resistance to the harmful yet everyday aspects of life. They still can''t bask in the rays of light for more than a few minutes, but it''s enough for them to perform small errands during the day. Given they''re cloaked up, they can stay out for longer if they''re needed to. But at least they don''t instantaneously combust into balls of fire like the Lesser Vampires do. The third evolution, however, has risen a step further. Able to walk the sun-covered streets without fear of setting aflame, Noble Vampires are truly the pinnacle of their species. They''re also ridiculously beautiful, like everything I summon, and more often than not I find myself captured by their beauty. Not that being perfect on the eye is a bad deal. Realistically, it should help with their mission as some people will do anything for a pretty face. Even going so far as to change their ways. That is what I''m aiming for really. For now, all of the Vampires have been sent to Tune and will stay there until I reach Ishda. Their job for now is to infiltrate high society and learn everything they can because everything is important when it comes to changing the world. The Noble Vampires will be the new heads of society and will set the pace for the standard of living. Not just for themselves, but for the standards of everyone they can within the cities they''re based in. Lesser Vampires, unable to contribute as much as their peers, have been designated butler and maid status, keeping them confined to the mansions where they''re less likely to combust. Also, every tier of Vampires seems to be able to use magic to influence and control people weaker than them, which is almost everybody since they had no problem gaining levels at the Coliseum. Unlike the Triplets. Magical mind control will hopefully reduce the number of people visiting the Towers of Torture. Taking time to make people see the errors of their ways by letting them have a few days with Samantula and the Arachnids also works wonders, but scaring their souls back to grey isn''t the most proficient way to go about what I''m doing. Although, it beats the cycle of reincarnation hands down. Who wants to wait fourteen years for someone to reach adulthood only to find out they''re close to having an orange soul because they''ve lived negatively to survive? No one, that''s who. It''s better to solve the root of the problem. The way of living life itself. Hence why Tune and Orad have had a multitude of features built for them. Food supply easily surpasses the population''s demands meaning there should be no one going hungry in either of my two new cities. Other issues were also addressed with new residential areas and orphanages created in both cities. According to Light, Orad didn''t have many issues and barely had a dozen kids in their orphanage. On the other hand, Councilman Raff asked me to build a second as his had filled up before he could solve Tune''s orphan problem. The housing and homeless problem was much easier to solve. Adults are more capable of taking care of themselves than children so it was a boost in quality of life for them. No longer homeless and with a skip in their step, a good 10% of Tune turned a better shade of soul overnight. Those Vampires should do well too. More so in Ishda. Speaking of Ishda, I''m about three-quarters of the way towards our region''s capital. On the way, I''ve picked up whatever farms and homesteads we''ve seen, slowly increasing my DP amount in the process. It''s not the same as acquiring a whole city within a day, but small increments still lead to bigger payouts. Slowly but surely. However, I''ve just realized another problem. One that I hadn''t even considered. When the triplets and the rest of the Oblivion Dragons evolve, are they all going to become like Rebecca, the drum-playing Dragon of Rebellion? That will be hard. Although, I don''t really want the triplets to change their personalities. That''s what makes them unique. I doubt Amber would lose her love of food, but I could do without them wanting to do the opposite of anything I say. That''s another one of those bridges I''ll have to cross soon. The problem is that I feel like these bridges are held together by yarn. Not tightly interwoven to make the material strong, but individual threads threatening to snap at any moment. Anyway, the Vampire I put in charge is named Jezebel. She manages the brood that will mind-fucking Tironians into being better people and reports to Raff daily. Raff, in turn, reports her progress to me during the morning meetings in Varona. Fun times. Other than my Vampire test projects which are going well, I''ve also been visiting the Cathedral of Confession since its recent upgrade. Cardinal Carn was adamant that I show up every now and then to reinforce the belief of his flock. Not that they should need it after we beat the King''s army, but I don''t particularly mind. It''s nice to be appreciated. The visits consist of me saying a few words, Amber stuffing her face, Blondie being every single person''s best friend, and Violet showing off the oversized Bear. Which, believe it or not, people are getting used to. Then again, an Oblivion Dragon riding a Bear is not the strangest sight my city has to offer. Of the many odd sightings that can be found around Varona, the multicoloured mountain that houses my dungeon is by far the winner. The sight I''ve come to know as home is breathtaking while being utterly impossible at the same time. Its growth alone is something that doesn''t stand to reason, but the fact it changes and becomes more with every floor, Boss and Mini-Boss, is something else. Still, I wouldn''t change it for the world. Chapter 104: Surprise Picnic Katrina, Aura, Tilly, and Peaches are seated at one of the tables outside Ali''s. The two humans have become quite close friends and the elf is no exception either. Peaches just wants to be one of the girls and has been spending more and more time with the trio of women. She''s still accompanied by two Sweets wherever she goes and they''re sitting at a different table eating cake. The seating arrangements outside only have space for four people and women always sit together. "When are you going to move out of the Privacy Palace and get a real house, Kat? Surely Abi''s offered you one?" Tilly asks the only person, other than passing merchants or travellers, who still resides at Abi''s Inn. The Privacy Palace has been home to Katrina ever since she was contracted to the dungeon and she''s grown fond of it. Not that she hasn''t thought about owning her own house. She appreciates the extra security that the penthouse floor offers. Which isn''t much except for being four floors off the ground, but her early morning views are almost as good as Abi''s. Why would she want to give that up? "I don''t know. I wouldn''t mind a house, but I love watching the sun rise over Varona in the morning. I don''t think I''d get the same experience in a house," she explains. Tilly and Aura nod along, but Peaches seems confused by her sound reasoning "Why don''t you just teleport up the mountain? Then it doesn''t matter where you live." All three women stare blankly at the Slime''s statement. "That''s... Not such a bad idea. Maybe not all the way up the mountain, but far enough to get some good views." Aura, one with nature, has watched the sunrise over Varona many times and knows why Kat doesn''t want to miss it. "True, Peaches'' idea definitely has merit, but it''s much nicer seeing the sunrise from your home," Tilly throws her opinion into the mix as she sips her tea. Humans still appreciate the beauty of nature but are less inclined to spend their time in the elements than the elves. "I''ll think about it," Kat tells the group, soliciting smiles all around. "Anyway, did any of you see Veris this morning?" "No, why," Aura asks after another serving of the sweet treat. The mouthful of cake not being hidden well behind her hand. "She had a goblin on a leash, walking it around as though it was the most natural thing in the world." None of the women had seen it, but they all laughed as odd sights in Varona are not a rare occurrence. Veris being the cause of quite a few of them in fact. Not many people know that the Goblin in Veris'' care is actually the late King Aldus, but as a small, green, smelly monster, he poses no harm to anyone as even the children of the growing city could serve him a whooping if needed. "Ignoring the growing list of oddities and Veris'' new pet, it''s almost time for our support group, Aura." The elf nods in acknowledgement, her mouth still full of cake. "Do you get many new people showing up these days?" The Doctor Mage asks, curious about how their group is doing. "Not as many as when we first started, but we occasionally get a few new faces. Honestly, there''s like... A thousand of them now. I might have to ask Abi for more chairs at this rate." Kat sighs, wondering why people keep turning up even though the dungeon she''s contracted to has the city on lock. "More chairs and a bigger space," Aura adds after swallowing the heavenly delight. "The back room of Talia''s is lovely and all, but it''s just not big enough anymore. I was thinking Abi might let us use the hall at the Academy seeing as though classes are finished by the time we hold our meetings." "I like that idea. We could get a bigger circle going and people wouldn''t have to triple up and stand against the wall anymore." Kat bounces in her seat. She is definitely going to bring that point up as soon as she can to Abi. That and potentially asking for that house she''s always offered. Only, she might want it built somewhere secluded and in a less-than-normal location. With thoughts of the future, the women finish their tea and split for evening activities. Kat and Aura head off to their meeting while Tilly heads back to the hospital. A Cleric''s work never being finished and all. Peaches and the Sweets head back to the Pleasure Palace to see what nighttime entertainment Veris is cooking up. Evening Tea x Dungeon Stories Volume 4 Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation.
With my expansion thanks to Land Acquisition, I''ve been steadily unlocking more and more of the continent of Tira as I make my way towards Ishda. The forest surrounding Varona can no longer be seen from my current position as I''m not that far away, but the mountain though... my mountain is beautiful even from here. The patchwork forests blend together to add colour and vibrance to what would usually be a boring and plain sight. Not that I can even see the entirety of it. A third of my home''s dominating landmark is hidden above a thin layer of clouds that always seem to be present. I might have to look into why that is soon, but that''s not today''s job. Today''s job is a family picnic. Seeing how Varona is mainly self-sufficient nowadays, that means the people running the show and everyone in between can spare a few hours to relax, even Sacha. Finding a suitable place wasn''t terribly difficult and I chose a golden meadow as our setting. A small hill crested to the left and a river was visible to the right. The area was large enough to accommodate everybody. I began to summon row after row of tables and benches which appeared in neat lines on the level ground. Tableware and cutlery followed and various eateries and sections were set up for the more monstrous members that will be attending. After all, Spiders, Bats and the other rabble aren''t able to sit on benches or at tables in the same way the others do. After I solve their seating and eating arrangements, I stock every table, bowl, and trough with an abundance of food. It isn''t the same quality as what Ali would produce, but the Gourmet also deserves to relax for once. I haven''t actually told anybody about this hastily thrown-together gathering yet. Not that they''re likely to refuse. There''s always a reason to spend time together. Amber instantly got antsy and ran off to test the food. I made no effort to stop her as I can always summon more and it makes me happy to see the triplets happy. Violet and Bear are usually satisfied when they''re together - so that''s always in their case, whereas Blondie loves to talk to people as though they''re best friends and have known each other for years. All in all, it''s quite easy to keep them pleased. All that was left was to inform my family and Blondie''s unsuspecting victims, to close their respective businesses for an hour or two while we all enjoyed each other''s company. One by one they begin arriving, taking their places and sitting down. Happily greeting one another as more and more Assassins, Magi and Monsters appear. Blondie rushes around greeting everyone she can personally. I wouldn''t be surprised if she knows more people than I do at this point. She speaks to them more often than I do. Then again, there are a lot of them now and it''s easier to listen to my commanders, delegates and council than it is to follow up on everyone''s personal requests. There aren''t enough hours in the day for that. The Employees Association, which consists of all the workers in Varona, arrives with their respective colleagues and neighbours. Hana and Mira lead the entire guard to the picnic as the humans can handle small problems in their absence, even if they are stretched thinner than usual due to their reduced numbers. I inform my city liaison officers, Light and Raff, who bring Simon, Sophie and the Noble Vampires to the countryside picnic. I obviously didn''t think too cleverly about the location as some of the Vampires can''t attend. After a quick word with Light, however, and a frugal use of his Grand Skill, Night''s Embrace, the Lesser and regular Vampires are given a bubble of darkness to eat in. Granted it''s only a small area, but they''re still here and I''m happy about it. The Council, my Priests and everyone else arrive after them, shortly followed by Veris with Goblin King Aldus in tow. The dominatrix ties him to the closest tree and takes her place with the Sweets. The dopplegangers are with Peaches, Anya and Lola, and are debating whether or not the Pink Slime will be able to morph into a Dragon Slime. Katrina, Anon and my fully-fledged Categoriser Simon are with Tilly, Aura, Eduine, and Marie. They''re discussing the small elven unit that had helped close the portal and how beneficial they''d been. Well, it was mainly Eduine talking them up, but no one disagreed with him. Especially not my own Space Mage. Marie was probably the most grateful for their aid, after myself that is. Their timing couldn''t have been any better. Tara and Lara, better known as Cloak and Dagger are with Taskmaster Talia, the Headmaster and her aid, Mystique and Coral, as well as Dum, Dee and a few other coupled-up Assassins. It''s getting strange. I''d call it incestuous as I summoned them all, but they''re not technically related. Not that it matters, that''s an easy-to-ignore matter which doesn''t require the slightest amount of delegation. I turn away and the problem is gone. Simple. Tara and Lara don''t often get out and they run what was once known as The Shop of Secret. The small wooden shack that showcased an even smaller amount of dungeon loot is now like the rest of my features and no longer resembles a market stall as it did when it was originally placed. Now a thriving part of the high street, the Assassin Shopkeepers operate under the moniker of Cloak and Dagger. Much like the Towers of Torture though, the sign outside is not the same information the System tells me. She calls it The Black Market. I was confused about the description at first. How can I make humanity better while performing backroom deals and shady acquisitions? The only answer I came up with was that we would choose our deals carefully. That way we won''t partake in anything likely to alter the colour of someone''s soul for the worse. The last thing I need is to be giving myself more work. Either way, everyone arrived and I decided to make a quick toast. Talking in front of my family is different from speaking to others. Not that I''m terrible at public speaking, but my family are like a piece of myself. It''s much easier to talk to them and they understand how I feel at the same time. Hell, I could even give a whole speech without moving my mouth and everyone would hear and feel it. The link we share through the dungeon is unlike anything I''ve ever experienced and is far more advanced than how regular people communicate. Through tone and facial expressions, it''s easy to misinterpret a spoken sentence. When directly given information through the dungeon, feelings and thoughts move as one. If everyone on the planet was able to communicate the way we do - I''m not saying it would bring about world peace, but there would have been far less petty squabbling than there has been. That''s for sure. Sometimes fighting is inevitable - for now at least and is something Future Abi''s still working on. For the majority, if they''re able to understand each other better, and more clearly, their lives would be that little bit easier. Me and my family are proof of that. Chapter 105: Awkward Kieran was deflated. It had been two days since he and his family had taken shelter in the mountain dungeon behind the Academy. The first and only time he had been officially allowed out of the house. Now, back in his room and confined to the family home, Kieran was testing the limits of his skill when he saw the green-haired beauty who had almost died standing still outside his window. It wasn''t just the woman who had come to a stop as the entire street had ceased moving. Every single person was motionless, even the young boy caught mid-leap in the air went unnoticed as Kieran gazed at the woman who had captured his heart in her moment of rage. The one who scared the moon and Earth - or Tironia, as he now knew. Unfortunately, Kieran was still grounded and he watched as time corrected itself and started to flow once more. He hadn''t even done anything to deserve the grounding. Well, nothing that his parents knew about anyway. Today was the day his father was off work. The Time Mage''s masculine role model had joined the city guard like many of the other migrants from Gorn and Kieran respected his commitment. Even if Mark was a gentle giant, their table was always full and their son wanted for nothing. Other than freedom, that was. Even in the orphanage, back when he was still Bruce Gold, Kieran had more freedom than he did now. Granted his belly was never full, but that was a state of being he''d learned to live with. Tina was out shopping, looking for ingredients for tonight''s dinner. This was a stroke of luck for the young, but old, reincarnator. His father didn''t check in on the youngster as often as his mother, so Kieran took his shot. With as much confidence and determination as a teenager can muster, Kieran grabbed hold of the strings of time. He dashed out of the family home and ran down the street, following the direction the Goddess of War had taken before releasing his magic. His control had gotten better in the last few days and Kieran was now strong enough to hold time still for almost twenty seconds. Nearly double the amount he had stopped in the forest during the war. Catching up, he found the woman with three, young girls. Girls who Kieran could have sworn had died. This world had magic though and was as close to fantasy as it could be. ''Of course, people can come back to life,'' he thought. Little did he know that if anyone else would have died, anywhere else in the world, for that matter, their soul would be sent to the reincarnation cycle as his own was not too long ago. A purple-haired child sits on top of a large bear without a care in the world. Next to her is a blonde who doesn''t stop talking and beside her a redhead, whose belly rumbled the moment time commenced. The woman with green hair laughed, her smile sending flutters through Kieran''s heart. He followed the group to a restaurant. The name on the building marked it as Ali''s. Kieran didn''t enter as he had no money. Instead, he opted to - as stealthily as a teenage boy could - peep through the window and observe from afar. However, the inexperienced Time Mage was far from a Master Assassin - the sad truth of the matter was that he was still level 1 - and it didn''t take long for his existence to be noticed by the woman who fought with the King. Kieran was mesmerised. Caught in the beauty of her bewitching gaze, he realised too late that they were fixed in his direction. Before he could react, she disappeared and a hand had landed on his shoulder. Kieran''s body turtled up as it had done so many times as Bruce. He was expecting a fist to arrive shortly and braced for the impact. "Who are you and why are you following us?" Instead, she asked him a question. Her voice was the sweetest whisper, the most pleasant sound Kieran had ever heard. He even missed the slight edge she left hanging at the end as he could see her eyes perfectly so close up. Lime green with an array of speckled colours dotted around. They were entrancing. "I-I''m B-Bruce G... I mean, I''m Kieran. K-Kieran Ely. I saw you and... And... I don''t know, I''m sorry. I shouldn''t have followed you. I''m not even allowed out. I was just... You''re so... I... I... I''m sorry." With that, the red-faced Time Mage flared his magic to the max in embarrassment and fled as fast as he could. First impressions were important and Kieran had just blown his. Instead of the doting admirer, he was now the crazy stalker. Why was fate so kind yet in many other ways so cruel? He didn''t know. Kieran ran home, stopping time every chance he could to make sure he wasn''t followed. Through the door. Up the stairs. Under the blanket. And then the tears came as he sobbed into his pillow, the feathers scratching his face. His sound hadn''t been completely muffled as his father entered the room shortly after. "Hey, son. You okay? Is this about not being allowed out again?" Mark was worried, genuine concern showed on his face. "I don''t ever want to go out again," Kieran shouted back through taxed breath and salty tears to his father''s surprise. All his son had ever asked for was to be allowed out. To mingle and join in activities with the others. Mark Ely hated himself for not being able to allow it. Having to hide his son''s power was hard on all of them. Support the creativity of authors by visiting the original site for this novel and more. Mark had plans though. Big plans. Kieran Ely Time Mage Dungeon Stories Volume 4
My speech ended and it wasn''t all that, to be honest. I got my point across but then ended up rambling on about improvements and new trade routes before I was shut down by a booing Me. Yeah, yeah, I know. I don''t even know how I ended up talking about roads and way stations, but they will help Hana and Mira keep the guards busy and levelling. There''s only so much forest they''re allowed to patrol so they don''t curb the adventurer''s levelling and more and more guards end up patrolling the streets than what should be the naturally-dangerous wilderness. Roads and waystations would make travel much safer and easier for human merchants, but still, it''s not where my speech should have ended. Pumping myself up, I try to finish strong. "Everyone here contributes their fair share and I couldn''t be more grateful for that. Because of you, we are where we are today and it wouldn''t have been possible without all of your help. From the Taskmaster," Talia''s name solicits some cheers, "to the Ringmaster," while the second earned a few light-hearted boos and chuckles, "you all contribute. You all put in the effort and work hard." Now that I''m at this point, I feel kind of bad. If anything I''m the person who slacks the most. Even the humans seem to keep themselves more occupied than I do. Even with my new routine. "You fought off a demon invasion for Core''s sake. You guys rock and I''m not just talking about you, Barry." Colin licks the midnight-black surface of Barry''s Mythril frame and Noir slaps the Golem on the back laughing heartily at the joke he caught. That was surprising on its own as puns and sarcasm usually go straight over Noir''s head. "Marie, what would we do without you?" The Space Mage sitting with the Categorisers and they all congratulate her. Everyone has been congratulating each other for the last few days but more praise and recognition is due. Unfortunately, there are too many people to name at our little get-together and if I tried it would last a lot longer than I told them it would. "I''m so proud of everyone and honestly couldn''t ask for a better family. Special in your own ways and unique in many more. I love every single one of you. Even you, Me." I throw him a quick wink at which he flushes red and looks anywhere but in my direction. "With that said, let''s eat. It would appear that Amber and a couple of others have already started so you don''t want to be left behind. I only have so much DP and that Dragon can eat. So, enjoy it while you can." When I said that talking to my family was like talking to a part of myself, I may have been talking myself up then. That was still awkward as hell, especially with how many of them there are. Using my will is much more convenient. Maybe I''m just not a public speaker. Either way, I gave the speech and it wasn''t a complete failure. Go me. Now, it''s time to mingle. Going table to table, I try my best to remember the names of the people I have met once or twice since their summoning. In fact, quite a lot of these guys weren''t even named by me and that fell to their employers instead. While engaging in the third conversation since making my speech, I call Blondie over since I''m already in way over my head. "Hey, Danny, Trish, Marsh and Manda. I hope you''re all doing OK. This food''s the best, right? Anyway, sorry to interrupt, but I need to borrow Abi for a second. Thanks, guys. You''re the best." Blondie saves me from making an ass of myself and I let her know there''s a treat in store for her later if she helps me navigate the tables. It''s not so that I can remember their names because I probably won''t, but I just want to praise them more. They really do deserve it. The only thing I can actually take credit for around here is spending points. Every other accomplishment is theirs. At the next table, Sophie is talking about Gordon and his adventuring party. Apparently, they''re the closest to reaching the second tier. All are over level 35 and their leader''s pushing 39. The pregnant woman no longer guides their party as they have since passed her in level. That doesn''t mean she hasn''t been keeping an eye on them whenever she can though, which is harder than usual as she spends most of her time in Orad with Light. A few Assassins don''t seem convinced that reaching the second stage is such a big deal. That''s mainly because most of them are over level 80, but humans have to be more careful than these carefree idiots. Looking in Light''s direction, why am I not surprised to see a mug in his hand and a silly expression on his face? Also, why does it feel like Prince Sillybollocks'' tolerance to alcohol is getting weaker rather than stronger? Isn''t it supposed to be the other way around? As I watch him goofing around, Noir appears beside Light and slaps him merrily on the shoulder, albeit a little too hard. Not letting it phase him, Light smiles mischievously before returning the friendly gesture. Ever so slightly harder than what he had received. I can only shake my head as less than three slaps later a fight breaks out. I don''t know what''s overcome these two, but there''s never a dull moment when they''re together. Even out in the countryside, they can find reasons to kick the ever-living shit out of each other and yet, I still love them unconditionally. It really is like I''m their parent sometimes, watching my kids squabble over petty things like affection. Guess what? You both annoy the shit out of me equally! It''s pretty fucking amazing when you consider that they''re dungeon-summoned beings. Not your average dungeon monsters, but sentient people who have thoughts of their own. Before I have to intervene, the dastardly duo''s respective partners turn up and put a stop to it for me. A quick slap round the back of Noir''s head from Carrie and the redhead looks ashamed. She''s got him well-trained. On the other hand, Dropper must have thought a slap wouldn''t suffice for Light and punched him straight in the face instead. The Master Assassin blew backwards, destroying a table in the process - he costs me a fortune in tables, but to his credit, he still didn''t spill a single drop of ale. In fact, the only liquid covering the wreckage and ground beneath him is his blood. Gushing from his nose at a scary pace, I can''t help but wonder how Light managed to become a Master Assassin before Dropper did. Then I remember the hand I played and groan. It was him I summoned when the Lazy God decided exile was a cool gig for a quick-witted Dungeon Core to have. "Erm, Tilly. Can we borrow you for a minute?" Chapter 106: Barry Blood pools from the Elder Goblin as Gordon removes his blade from its chest. Another of the monsters lies close by but has been reduced to cinders thanks to Felicity''s magic. Rian, the Vagabond whose level was once the highest in the group, is now second to their leader Gordon. Trailing by only a single digit, he also stands one number in front of the Fire Mage Felicity and is two levels in front of the latest addition to their party. After being drilled by his companions to take their mentor Sophie''s words to heart, Gordon recruited a healer to their team. Well, sort of a Healer. When she signed up, Gordon was under the impression that the Cleric would be a great addition to their party and as she fulfilled that role perfectly, nobody complained. Jasmine, a blonde with high cheekbones and a gorgeous smile. A woman not adorned in the usual white garments that signify one''s status as a Cleric. Jasmine, dressed as black as night and as beautiful as its embrace, the type of clothing worn by those at the Royal Halls and others that work around town. Jasmine, clever and wise, raised no suspicions from the three eager adventurers seeking a new party member. Not even the female Felicity, who could have easily misconstrued her arrival as a battle for dominance and a play for power on the chain of command. Jasmine, the Necromancer. Born and bred on the streets of Varona, her time was spent healing under the eyes of Tilly and Anya. Jasmine, member number four of Adventurer Party A, raises her arms and silently casts a spell. The scratches and burnt hair on Gordon''s arm revert to new as she solidifies her status in their group. Rian is a master of stealth and Felicity fights from range so neither of them needs Jasmine''s aid as often as their tank does, but both are grateful for her presence as she saves them a fortune in potions. The party have been pushing themselves against the Elder Goblins on floor 30. After fighting the Boss on the floor below and losing miserably - Obling being a sneaky, little bastard had almost killed them, the party decided to keep levelling and advance to the next tier before attempting the fight again. Felicity is a High Mage who uses the fire element, but the Goblin Mage''s magic is stronger than her own. That had been a blow to her confidence, but she had shaken it off and was now putting all her effort into every spell. Rian also couldn''t breach the Mage''s barrier. Even after mastering Shadow Step and having the ability to appear in their opponent''s blind spot, the Goblin''s defence was just higher than the Vagabonds'' attack and he was unable to do damage. That was before Jasmine had joined their group. "Yes," Gordon shouts, "level fucking forty." "Congrats. I''m on the cusp of 39. I can feel it," Rian answers. "Well done, Gordon. I''m still three levels away, but the progress we''re making on this floor is good." Felicity smiles. "Thanks, guys. How are you doing, Jasmine?" The Necromancer was inspecting the corpse on the floor and wasn''t paying attention, but stood up after hearing Gordon call her name. Fidgeting with her robe as she did so. "Erm... I''m fine, thank you?" Jasmine, the socially awkward Necromancer, turned around and crouched down, leaving Gordon standing there. "OK. We''re going to keep moving. Are you ready?" He asks as she prods the Elder Goblin. Its body convulses at her touch and stands up, still as dead as it was when it was laid on the ground. "I will follow," she says toward the reanimated monster, her words meant for Gordon. So far, Jasmine has made eye contact with each member of Adventurer Party A once and that was the day she joined them. Since then she prefers to look anywhere other than into their eyes and her gaze generally settles on their feet. Even with her quirkiness, the party doesn''t find her strange. She is, after all, just one more oddball in a city full of beautiful weirdos and the party continues their grind on floor 30. Gordon, Felicity and Rian, Adventurer Team A Dungeon Stories Volume 4
Light''s face was quickly fixed up by our resident Cleric and the celebration lasted another hour. Not many people were drinking and letting loose other than Light. With the need to return to work as the day was still young, the majority of my family kept their minds fresh, uninhibited and focused. And then we were done. I watched as most of them ported back to Varona whereas a few headed to Orad and Tune. When they had left, only the triplets and Barry were left behind. The triplets I was expecting, any chance they get to put off attending the Coliseum by a few minutes they take, little rascals. Barry, on the other hand, I was not. "What''s up, Rockstar?" I ask before my eyes pick up on something I should have caught earlier. Coating Barry''s star-filled body is a soft, blue glow, the light of evolution. I shouldn''t be surprised - almost every member of my family has advanced at some point or another, but this will be my Mythril Golem''s first evolution. If you spot this tale on Amazon, know that it has been stolen. Report the violation. Granted Barry was already a seventh-tier being when he was summoned, but this is a major accomplishment. It''s taken him two years to amass enough experience - mainly because he and Colin are confined to the dungeon for safety reasons, but he''s finally ready. Hence why he''s still in the clearing with me and the triplets. "Well look at you," I smile. The large creature shuffles on the spot in bashful embarrassment making my heart flutter. He''s so cute to say he can smash through walls like no one''s business. "Shall we start?" I ask and he nods excitedly, garbling Golem speech as he does. I can''t say that I''m not a little nervous. As the light coating his body shines brighter, his entire form starts to change. He shrinks smaller and smaller as the rocky appendages that square off his body alter drastically. They condense and tighten, sculpting themselves into muscle, giving his body and face defining features.
#!*%]£¤ Error.
That''s... Confusing? Or is it? The once plain, but still beautiful, Golem has a brand new look. One that''s so indistinguishable from humans that, not only am I left speechless, but so too is Sis apparently. Before I can think any further, Me ports back to the countryside location of our picnic. "It''s been a while since that happened. What did you do this time?" "Why do you assume it was me?" Putting on my best ''It wasn''t me'' face, I throw my arms up in fake frustration. To which, Me slumps his shoulders and shakes his head. His go-to expression when it comes to all things me. I feel slightly foolish and a little embarrassed, but it''s nothing new so I brush it off like crumbs from lunch. "Quite," he raises a brow, exchanging glances between me and my Golem. The triplets are also looking at me, confusion written across their faces. Bad Abi. Telling lies is naughty. "OK, OK. It was me," I concede begrudgingly, not wanting to be a bad example for the girls. "Oh, I know it was you. There''s no one else here that it could have been," he states the obvious and it''s my turn to slump in resignation. "To be fair though, Me. I didn''t actually do anything weird this time. I was only evolving Barry as you can see." The Mythril Golem beside me is no longer made of the star-filled material. Ditching his old grooves, his colour now matches the light of evolution. All white, his body shines a soft blue. Black lines trace his joints and two more run across his forehead in the shape of a cross.
A new #¡é$¡Á@#& Summon has been unlocked. Orichalcum Architect: 50,000DP
"That''s a lot of points you''re worth now, Barry. Damn near broke Sis while you were evolving too. Is she meant to do that, Me? I mean, she''s always glitching out and shit." Before he could answer, someone else chimed in. "I''m sorry, Master." Barry apologises as though he''s done it thousands already and like it''s the most natural thing in the world for him to do. He even performs the dungeon salute whilst doing so. Well... That''s twice in ten minutes my jaw has hit the floor and I''m not alone this time. Me is sporting the same expression whereas the triplets are a mixture. Violet seems more interested in Bear and Amber has disappeared to find some leftovers. Bouncing on the spot with stars in her eyes, Blondie is the only Dragon interested in what''s happening and obviously wants to talk with Barry. Other than his pale, white skin, Mythril markings and lack of hair anywhere, Barry looks like a regular Tironian now so why wouldn''t he be capable of speaking? That would be a better question. It''s shocking because out of all the people and creations I''ve summoned, the Mythril Golem turned Orichalcum Architect was one of the first and, in all that time, hasn''t uttered a single word. Not an intelligible one anyway. Hell, Barry wasn''t even able to utilise the dungeon connection properly. All I ever got from him were mixed emotions. It was enough to help me understand what he needed, but still awkward, nonetheless. "This isn''t The System''s fault. You keep creating weird things and changing the design parameters with your ideas. If anything, she''s struggling to keep up with you." Me tries to defend his initial creator. Although, I could be classed as his co-creator as the body he''s using to wag his finger was made by me. Plus, I''m pretty sure he said the word things isn''t a good descriptor way back when. See how easy that is to fall into? I almost feel bad for Sis after he defends her. Especially since I dumped her in charge of the Dragon Daycare and left her there, in fairness though, she has done a good job and I suppose she can be offered some relief now. Before that though, there''s still the Orichalcum Architect to deal with. "It''s OK, Barry. Sis will be fine. I was only joking around. And when there''s blame around, you can guarantee that Me''s throwing it my way. So don''t worry about that either. That said, you look fucking awesome. How do you feel?" Awesome doesn''t actually do him justice. On his pale skin, black streaks of Mythril come together to form tattoos across his body. "I feel... Different. Smaller, but stronger. I also feel faster and more flexible," he says while stretching out and pulling some poses. Thankfully, even though he isn''t clothed, genitalia doesn''t seem to have been involved in his evolution. "You can also speak now too, so that''s something. You''re also an architect? I wonder if that''s because of all the tunnels you carved with the maze. Not to mention those magma baths you''ve got kicking around. Now that I think about it, you''re always creating things. I''m not surprised that Sis gave you a cool-ass evolution because of it. Seriously, if we weren''t already outing ourselves as a dungeon, I''d be fine with you leaving the mountain as you are." "I can be even more helpful now," he grins. I can''t help but feel a little sad that''s where his first thoughts go. "You''re already helpful enough. Seriously. You''ve been The Man since the beginning, Barry. Without you, Varona wouldn''t be where it is now and we would definitely have missed all those refugees. I''m telling you, Barry, you don''t need to do more. I know everyone has just eaten, but now that you can speak do you wanna visit Ali''s?" Me shakes his head as I''m blatantly ignoring the whole error problem whilst Barry thinks over my offer. The monstrous element of my family doesn''t need to eat but can do if they so choose to. Certain conditions prevent that in some cases such as Golems for example. They have mouths, but that''s about the extent of their anatomy. Behind their lips are nothing more than the element they''re composed of and in Barry''s case that would have been Mythril, no throat, no stomach, just a wall of Mythril inside his mouth. Amber overheard me from three tables away and decided in a heartbeat that she still wasn''t as full as she could be. It took her less than a second to arrive next to Barry, drooling at the thought of dinner at Ali''s and as she did, the Golem''s attention was stolen by Blondie. She waited patiently to talk to him and, now that he can finally answer, can''t wait any longer to make another best friend. Me stops caring and decides to stroke Bear instead, much to the approval of Violet. I don''t know if it''s the error message, or how soft Bear''s fur is, but the latter seems more likely as he''s turned his frown upside down. Including the monster lover in my teleportation, I move us all to Ali''s. Off to show Barry what a good meal can do for the soul. Chapter 107: Normality Kieran was still feeling blue. Not because of his grounding, that was something he could get over. It had been ongoing from birth through no fault of his own other than being born with a rare magical talent and he had grown used to it now. What had him down was the fact he couldn''t talk to the woman named Abi. On more than one occasion he had tried. Knowing where she ate was all the information he needed to be in the right place at the right time to catch a glimpse of her before he would have to flee. She was noticing him faster and faster each time and Kieran was worried that she might stop him before he could stop time Even though every thought he had screamed, "Stalker!" he couldn''t bring himself not to go. Every time he did, the danger of being discovered absent by his parents was a constant worry. One that hadn''t happened yet. Kieran knew it wouldn''t be long before it did though and had been preparing an excuse. Flimsy as it was, he was going to tell his parents how he happened to see a woman being kidnapped in the alleyway directly outside their house and - knowing he was the only one who could do something about it, Kieran just had to stop time to trip the kidnapper, subsequently leaving his room to do so, yes, but saving the damsel in the process. Surely, they would understand. That said, Kieran wasn''t out tripping any women-kidnapping men and instead, his mother would be sorry to see him peeking through the window of Ali''s. It''s lunchtime and Abi''s inside with the trio of Dragons as her stalker gazes longingly through the window. Kieran thought it strange that she travels everywhere with the triplets, almost like they''re her children, but he always gets a peaceful vibe every time he sees them too so he never pays more mind than that. Today though, as Kieran''s peering through the glass, Abi disappears before even looking in his direction. Yet, before he can do anything, her hand is holding his wrist in a vice-like grip. "Why do you keep watching us?" She demanded an answer. Her tone was not nice and Kieran realised he doesn''t look like the doting watcher he is. Instead, the voice in his head prattling on about serial killer material wasn''t far from the mark. Shit! Is all he can think as his mouth makes no attempt to fight his corner. He can''t muster up any words of defence, too enamoured by her beauty. It''s the first time he''s actually stuck around after being noticed by her, even if it isn''t his choice to do so. Seeing the teenager stutter air instead of words, Abi released his wrist. "I''m not going to hurt you. It''s just... Don''t you think staring at us through the window day after day is a bit creepy?" Kieran''s heart dropped. He really did come across as a crazy stalker. "Instead of that, why don''t you just open your mouth and say ''Hi, I''m...'' and then introduce yourself? We don''t bite, except for Amber and that''s only when she''s hungry." Her smile was heavenly and she shone like a goddess. Kieran opened his mouth to speak, but no words came out. His face flushed red and his eyes glazed over. He wanted to say hi. He wanted to introduce himself. Instead, he stopped time and ran home. His power lasted the entire run as his feelings carried the magic further than before. Through the door, up the stairs and into his room. He heard his mother say something but he was too upset to care. He dived onto his bed and sobbed quietly into the pillow. Humiliated, embarrassed, frustrated and worst of all, infatuated. He still couldn''t get Abi out of his mind. Her voice, her hair, her eyes, the little dress she wore. The way she would disappear into thin air or appear from nowhere, everything that made her the person she was. Then a crazy thought shot into his mind, one he hadn''t considered before. ''What if she''s like me? What if she died and reincarnated here? What if she''s from Earth? I need to ask her!'' He got off his bed before stopping immediately. ''How can I ask her anything when I can''t even say hello?'' He grilled himself. ''Screw it. I''ll do it. I''ll ask her.'' Psyching himself up, Kieran was ready to try again when his mother burst through the door. "I said, where the hell did you come from and why were you outside?" Maybe he would wait until shopping day to try again. That is if his mother didn''t tie him up before she left. Kieran Ely, Time Mage Dungeon Stories Volume 4
Since Barry became the world''s most human Golem, capable of eating, sleeping and even passing gas, things have settled down and returned to normal. Or as normal as a Golem passing gas can be, which I suppose is pretty normal in my city. The triplets resume their training and the days pass by in an uneventful, but pleasant manner as I continue to train my skills, going so far as to ask Me for advice a couple of times. Since I was happy with how things played out, I even visited Sis and built her a massive tower using nothing but my Creation skills. The skill I use rarely, but should have incorporated into my daily life the moment I had enough DP. With how strong I am now, I can create anything in the catalogue for a fraction of the price it would originally cost. Not only that, but I can customise them any way I want as they''re being made. I wish I''d realised that before summoning the Vagabonds since they all turned into stereotypical Veris''. The only thing they lack is her white hair. Creation even lets me customise my summons. Seven Nobles Vampires with different-coloured eyes that make up a rainbow when standing next to each other are proof of that. The Vampire with pink eyes looks a little weird but still has the beauty +50 factor that everyone is summoned with and can pull it off. I don''t know what I was thinking when I did that. Still, eight Noble Vampires aren''t a bad number for their initiation into noble society. This story has been stolen from Royal Road. If you read it on Amazon, please report it While I was visiting the Dragon Daycare, Rebecca was still banging away on the drums that she''d found on day one. It looked like she wanted my attention too - her eyes practically begging, so I gave it to her happily, anything to improve our relationship. The Rebellion Dragon''s drumming skills have improved considerably and I even enjoyed the beat. For some reason, however, even though neither of us spoke to the other, Rebecca still found reason to work herself into a mood. Kicking over the drums, she stormed out of the daycare and that''s how that day went. I don''t get that Dragon. I wish I did, but I just don''t. She''s almost as awkward as the kid who keeps following me. Every time I try and talk to him, he disappears. Worse yet, no one else seems to see him. I really hope he isn''t another type of spirit like Anya was. That''s the last thing I need. Either way, Sis was thrilled with her tower. The Goliath feature clearly signifies its location on my mountain and the home of the Dragons. I would be scared of adventurers knowing where they are if I didn''t know that adventurers are actually weak-ass shitsters who still have a long way to go. It''s the demons we have to watch out for. They''re a much trickier problem to deal with. Theoretically, although we don''t know for certain since portals to another plane are not what''s hot right now, a regular Tironian could potentially open one if they had the right skills. That said, it doesn''t mean we need to be wary of everyone. Plus, anyone even slightly off Soul Guide''s radar is shipped straight to the Towers of Torture for reformation. The last thing I need, or want, is someone malicious opening a portal in the middle of my city whilst we were unprepared, or slacking off. Not that I can call my family members slack. If anything, it''s me who takes that title and I need to redouble my efforts on that front or risk losing everything we''ve built here. It''s a tricky one though, like I said. How do I plan for what''s to come, when I don''t even know what''s coming? For now, get stronger, level up and practice shit. They''re not only my goals, but everyone''s. Anyway, there''s one area where I certainly haven''t been slacking off. My daily walkabouts with the triplets have finally borne fruit and we have arrived at the capital city of Ishda. It''s taken us a while and a shitload of DP, but the days have been enjoyably pleasant. The city guards look slightly nervous that myself the triplets have just arrived on foot and are all alone. I''m a little worried they might overreact and attack on sight if we get closer, but that''s probably just the Dungeon Core in me and we push on. Then again, we helped the Lord of Ishda with his problems a while ago, there better be a warm welcome here. What worries me the most is that the triplets have small horns that stick out of their forehead. A telltale sign that they are indeed not human and a monster of some description. Not that they would be able to guess what type and even if they did, I doubt they would pick a fight with three Oblivion Dragons. Well, they better not. Mama Core doesn''t need a repeat episode. The scenarios bouncing around my head don''t play out and the guards relax the closer we get, letting us enter the city unhindered. A major city that I just purchased a significant sum of. Not that it matters as everyone looks much happier after they''ve seen us. I then remember the description Sis gave the Dragons. Even Rebecca, rebellious as she is, exudes the same calming vibe that all Dragons do. That one still baffles me. If I had still been human in that situation, it would have been a lot harder to enter the city. I would have to explain where we came from, what we''d been doing and the purpose of our visit. As it stands, I didn''t have to say a damn thing and we just strolled straight in. I felt like royalty and my ego can''t help but swim in satisfaction. No one questions her Royal Questionableness. Feeling vain, I slap myself back to reality and purchase what land I can as we make our way through the city. Ishda is the size of Orad and Tune combined so it will likely take me a day or two to acquire it all. That said, I need to make my way to the Lord''s Manor first and then the noble district. My Vampires need somewhere to live while they''re here after all and, since I know Noir destroyed a large amount of property whilst on a murder spree during his brief stay, it''s the perfect place for them to be. Noble Vampires in the Noble district seem quite fitting. The perfect place for them to help guide the city. It''s probably the most corrupt location in the city as well. Although, one would think the slums would take that title, just on appearance and seediness alone. Just because Nobles are pretty and have lots of cash, doesn''t mean most aren''t rotten to the core, black on the inside and from nothing more than being born in a position of power. Sure, there are a few good nobles out there, but like the book I read the other day, they''re diamonds in the rough, few and far between and not enough to make a significant difference. It''s sad in a way as all I can imagine is their soul descending the ladder due to the filth and corruption surrounding them. Fortunately for them, the Queen of Questions is in town. She still wishes she was the Queen of Answers, but no longer gives a shit since there''s nothing she can do about it. Not unless the God of Answers turns up and Light shows him a thing or two, passing over his title in the process. How nice would that be? Sis would certainly be getting an ear full, that''s for sure. Speaking of the dream invader, at some point we''re going to have to have a proper chat about what it is she''s actually meant to do, that and why things turn out the way they do. From the beginning, nothing has been normal. Not a single thing. The problem I''m having broaching this topic is the long conversation it will entail. I know it is not going to be a short one. I can already imagine hundreds of different tasks she must be performing subconsciously, or that her Subsystems are taking care of, but that''s probably not even the cherry. Me alone is a big ball of ongoing babble, or he was until he got that body. Even now, I''ve got to be careful what I think. Otherwise, a lecture is thrust upon me about etiquette, manners, dignity or whatever BS it is that I did at the time. I don''t even know where he gets it from. Since the beginning, Me''s complained about my crass manner of speaking and, even when he lets it slip himself, he''s still quick to thrust the blame my way. Thanks, buddy. So yeah. That''s a long-ass conversation I''m putting off. Since I own her and all, I really should do it at some point. Future Abi needs to pick her game up and start sorting shit out. Until then, life''s left in my capable hands. Hence, Noble Vampires. A reformation group all on their own. Able to deceive, trick, coerce and, if all those options fail, mind control their charges. Those charges being the nobility of Ishda. Other than those sat on the we-don''t-get-to-live-anymore-end of the shit stick, all those below red have the chance to become a Vampire''s best friend. All for the cheap price of their blood. I''m kidding. Like the rest of the monstrous elements in my family, Vampires should be able to survive on my mana alone. Their connection to the dungeon is their source of power and nutrition. I hope. If not... What''s a little blood in exchange for help on the road to somewhere? There better not be any complaining about it. There wasn''t anyone as generous as me to help out when I was still alive so... Yeah. Plus, there''s still a dungeon to build here. If they''re not happy now, they won''t be when a door to death appears outside their walls. That''s why my family will help Lord Aldor convert his citizens to a new way of thinking regarding dungeons. Just like we''re doing in Orad and Varona. Orad was the perfect place to trial run a new dungeon after opening my own went so well. The people who live there lead good, honest, hard-working lives and -when allowed to level up in a safer environment they''re used to, one where they get to keep anything and everything they find, it didn''t take them long to warm up to the idea. Baldur practically jumped on the idea when I offered to provide guides, aids, guards and anything else needed to keep people safe. Simon doesn''t have any problems in his position there. Well, none that Light informs me about and Orad''s citizens seem to be levelling up at a fairly steady pace. Their city already grants 5% more DP than it did before the dungeon was created. A Goblin-only dungeon with nothing but a single Goblinator on each floor and a solo Hobgoblin as the boss. We called it The Beginners Dungeon and hopefully, it will become the backbone for new adventurers here. A great course of learning for anyone who wishes to pursue a career in adventuring. Anyone other than myself, that is. A Goblin dungeon? I would definitely have skipped this training course or found some way around it. That''s for sure. Chapter 108: Ishda The Lord of Ishda seems rather conflicted to see us as we enter the reception room in his manor, announced at the door and led in by his guards. It''s a little hostile, but I can take a certain amount of disrespect. Especially if it''s brought on by fear. The young lady seated beside the Lord, I''m assuming is his daughter Estelle. The once damsel in distress and a cause of worry for her ageing father. They''re both wearing strained smiles until Noir and Gren walk in behind the triplets, at which point scowls replace their previous mask. They may have been smiling, but I know full well the Lord must be shitting his pants now that I''ve arrived. It hasn''t been that long since I killed the King after all and I''m no longer just the savior of his daughter. Now, I''m probably the most dangerous person in our region, if not the whole of Tira. I''ve never met anyone who''s travelled to another continent before and have no idea what levels they boast. If they''re anything like the humans here, however, I''ve got world domination in the bag. I doubt it will be that easy, but if King Aldus was the strongest person on the planet, then there''s nothing to worry about. Well. Nothing besides the Demons, but that''s... Not a right now problem. "Why are they here!? Lord Aldor stands up and thrusts a finger at not only the traitorous Knight Captain but Prince Loudmouth too. My current problem outranks the Demon one since it needs sorting now. Plus, it also seems easier to deal with. Clearly, the Lord is upset at seeing the traitor Gren, but he seems more annoyed at Noir''s presence. In fact, the redhead Assassin is getting the full force of his glare. Even though he''s a dungeon being, Lord Aldor seems furious and it''s a nice change seeing someone else annoyed by Noir''s shenanigans. Did he really cause that much damage though? "I was informed after he left how many mansions, storehouses and other buildings he destroyed. After he had left. I had considered sending you the bill seeing how it ran high into the hundreds of thousands, but... With what you did for my daughter, I consider us even. Now you''re back, however, I''m beginning to feel as though some monetary compensation might not be a bad idea seeing as how you are here yourself, in person no less." So he did cause a lot of damage then. Lord Aldor studies me, his eyes continuously going up and down my body. If I wasn''t so flattered that he basically just called me a big deal, I might take offence to his prying eyes. Instead, I let it slide and wait for the question I know is coming. "You''re a Dungeon Core, yet... Here you sit. As though you could be anyone else. A regular person." That one earns him a frown, but I reel myself in and wait. I''m not here for an argument. Even if being seen as not a real person does sting a little. Plus, with the way he''s shivering slightly as he looks at me, I''m slowly coming to terms with that fact now more than ever. "S-So... For what reason have you come here today." There it is. It was obviously bound to be asked at some point. Why else would I turn up if not for an important reason? It certainly isn''t because I''ve only just reached Ishda and wanted to get shit sorted straight away. Fortunately for future me, I''m trying not to add to her work pile today. "Well, I do believe it''s your lucky day. Even if I do say so myself. I take it you''ve heard about the King?" I know full well he has. There were travelling merchants in Varona who were stuffed into the dungeon alongside the citizens for their own safety. Some had departed for Ishda not long after the war celebrations were over. Lord Aldor nods, gulps, and turns pale as I continue. "Good. In that case, it''s safe to assume that I''m probably the strongest person on our continent. That said, it''s not like I want to rule the world or anything. Could you imagine the headache? Management on that scale would be just ridiculous. Instead, I intend to purchase the land itself and clean it up so to speak. That doesn''t mean mass murder before you start getting any crazy ideas. Believe it or not, I was once a human like you. I died tragically and became a Dungeon Core is about as far as I''m going to expand on that, but yeah. Process that information for a second." Hiding a yawn behind my hand, I wait as the Lord cycles through a range of different emotions, none lasting more than a second until he finally settles on befuddled. Unable to speak for himself, Estelle takes the opportunity and speaks in her father''s stead. "I... I believe you. Why else would you send someone to rescue me? It makes sense that you would want to help us if you were once a human." Smiling as she speaks, the Lord''s daughter can''t help but look around for her own saviour. That was easy. Not that I wanted it to go any differently, but she''s wrong with her reasoning. I wanted good future relations with people in power. I suppose that''s still a human concept, but not the one she''s suspected me of having. "Yeah, sure. Anyway with what I said, I''ve already started purchasing the land beneath your city. That alone lets me move wherever I want, whenever I want and it doesn''t just go for me. My entire family can travel that way and we can appear anywhere in the blink of an eye. Hence how I''m here today." "You''re... Purchasing my city?" Lord Aldor seems to be unable to move past that part of my sentence. He didn''t even flinch when I said I can turn up as and when. "Not in the monetary way you''re thinking of. It''s more like I''m purchasing from the planet and your city just so happens to be built on top of those pieces of land. That said, I am going to reimburse you a shit load of gold for the properties Noir destroyed. It will make us both feel better and I want to use them whilst I''m here." Stolen from its original source, this story is not meant to be on Amazon; report any sightings. "You''re buying the planet? How can you do that?" Lord Aldor is having trouble following this conversation. Not that I can blame him. Everything I do sets a precedent these days and I''d be blind if I didn''t notice that. "That''s not on your need-to-know list, but let''s just say it''s a special dungeon feature and move on. I''m not staying for long, but I''ll do some renovations for you since I''m here. Free of charge too. All I ask in return is for a few of the properties to be signed over to me. After that, I''m going home because it''s been a long day. I''ll return at some point to check on your corruption levels in Ishda, but, as it stands, I''m still quite full on the people from Tune." "Full?" The Lord''s face pales and, if you added some Mythril tattoos, he looks like he could be Barry''s brother. It takes me a second to realise the error in communication and I sigh in resignation. Humans find it hard to believe anyone. "Not like that. Didn''t I tell you before that I don''t eat people?" "No. I do not believe you did. Although, I was asking for a lot at the time. I could have misheard you or just forgotten about it entirely. Not to mention my guard didn''t really have my back," he glares at Gren once more. "Speaking of your guard, Gren''s soul has returned to neutral and he truly regrets his actions. He now works for the city guard in Varona and specifically asked to be here so that he could give you an apology in person." Stepping forward, Gren bows to the Lord he used to serve. "My Lord. I am deeply sorry for what I did. My actions were fuelled by greed and power. However, that is not an excuse for my actions and was only the reason behind my motives. I do not expect your forgiveness as I will never be worthy of it. All I want is for you to know how much I regret the decisions I made." Gren retakes his place beside Noir and, after doing what he came to do, breathes a sigh of relief. Lord Aldor doesn''t respond to him and instead turns back to me. "So, what do you want with me?" "Honestly? I was just being courteous. Plus, I can summon gold out of thin air so I thought you''d like to see that." That perks his interest and cheers him right up. "Other than that, not much else will change. You''ll still be in charge of the city so long as you keep doing a good job obviously. As I made my way here I noticed your city is very well managed. There aren''t half as many homeless people as I''d expected to see. That said, you still have a few issues here and there that need addressing. I''ll create a few food-producing features that will supply you with enough food to feed all your homeless and then some. Any orphanages you have will be staffed fully and I might even create a few of my own, your city is bigger than the others after all. As I mentioned before, I''ll also be rebuilding the noble district. Mainly for you, but a few of the manors will be mine. Homelessness and food shortages are the first problems I''ve been fixing on my way around the region." Souls are secondary because reformation takes more time than filling a stomach does. Lord Aldor pinches the bridge of his nose. That''s a lot of information I''ve just dumped in his lap. Before he can think too deeply about my noble intentions, I decide to make his day and a bar of gold materialises in the air before clanging loudly on the floor. Every human in the reception room goes wide-eyed. Even Estelle, who seemed to have lost interest after she realised Dropper wasn''t with us, is now drooling over the source of many a man''s death. Summoning nine more gold bars, which also clang against the ground in a cacophony of noise, Lord Aldor''s eyes bulged at the sight. Using Creation, each bar cost 100DP so for all ten it was roughly the same price as one plot of land. It was nothing. The one human trait I''m glad never stuck with me was the urge for gold. I wanted the shiny material as badly as the next woman when I was still human. As a Dungeon Core though, I have absolutely no need for gold and the points that I do spend replenish themselves daily. That alone has probably skewered my concept of money a little, but it seems like it''s for the better so I don''t mind. "So you''re going to feed the hungry and shelter the poor, effectively micromanaging the smaller problems that lay beneath the day-to-day bustle of the city''s economy. And the gold is... A bribe of sorts? To stay quiet about you being a dungeon?" Lord Aldor tries to wrap his head around my goals, but his eyes don''t leave the bars on the floor. "That''s about the gist of it for now. Except the gold isn''t a bribe. I can''t go around bribing people if I''m trying to make Tironia a better place. The gold is... Think of it more like a salary. Everyone gets paid for working, right?" The Lord nods along although that isn''t technically true and we both know it. I was just trying to be clever with my words. Lords do make a nice living, but they don''t get paid by those above to do their job. Their income comes from taxing the people who live and work in their region. Usually, a portion of that flows upwards in tax to the King. With the man in charge out of commission, however, I''m deeming taxes and tributes unnecessary from this point on though as they don''t help my overall goal in any way. Unless they come in cute and cuddly-sized packages, I''ll happily accept any donation if that''s the case. "From here on, the smaller cities and towns around Ishda won''t be sending any gold your way. Instead, they''ll be using it to help their own cities grow. On the flip side, you also don''t have to send anything to the King as he''s... Yeah. I will also be paying your wages in gold which I''ll drop off at the start of the month. Your city generates more than enough points to do so unless you don''t think it''s enough?" Lord Aldor shakes his head but doesn''t say a word. It''s safe to say this day isn''t going the way he expected it to. At least he''s a shitload richer now. That''s enough to placate most people, right? "That''s about everything I think. Oh. Don''t forget, I''ll be back once I''ve finished cleaning the corruption from Tune. At which point, I''ll make a start on the souls in Ishda. Everyone needs to start coming together soon. We''re meant to be a species rather than a bunch of power-hungry individuals and it''s about time we realised that." Still silently nodding along, I''m glad he understands. It makes life so much smoother when we''re all on the same wavelength. "Clara," I call the Noble Vampire with pink eyes that I''ve already established as the head of their click. Appearing beside me, she takes in the room before saluting me. Her presence causes the guards'' knees to go weak. Not from an aura of power or any skill. No. Every man in the reception room, Lord Aldor included, is shocked by the woman''s beauty. I feel a little jelly if I''m being honest. Where were my fluttering hearts and drooling doofus''? I''m pretty too, right? Fuck it, we''ll just say they were too overwhelmed because I''m the Dungeon Core. That''s got to be it. "This is Clara. She and her sisters are staying in Ishda to help with reformation. If you need me for any reason, she can contact me at any time." I don''t think Lord Aldor heard a single word after Clara arrived and, feeling less satisfied than I thought I would, I leave hoping that at least Estelle heard me. Another city, another problem. Why would I expect anything else? Although there''s got to be at least one village, town or city out there that doesn''t need my help. The perfect place. A haven amongst dung. Pfft. Keep dreaming, Abi. Keep dreaming. Chapter 109: Satisfied? "I''m not sure about this, Mary." "Nonsense, Helen. That female priest recommended this place personally. She said it wasn''t as it sounded." "You mean a brothel? Because it sure does sound like a brothel. The Pleasure Palace? Seriously, Mary?" "Just a quickie, Helen. I mean... A quick peek. Just a quick peel. If it''s what you think it is we can leave straight away. I don''t think that nice lady would have recommended the things your mind is imagining." "Hey. I have some nice thoughts too. There are some dashing men around recently though. Enough to get the blood pumping at least." "Helen! And you were the one who didn''t want to come." "Purely based on the fact that I shouldn''t have to pay for that sort of thing." The two women arrive at the Pleasure Palace. Upon entry, they are greeted by a dashing young man. "Hello, ladies. My name is Darwin. Please, follow me." Darwin enters the establishment and both women follow him without so much as a word. Entering an open seated area, Darwin leads them to the circular couch and takes a seat. "So then, ladies. How may we help you today? Are you here for conversation, companionship, or maybe something extra?" "Can we just talk?" Helen is the first to speak and Darwin smiles at her. "Absolutely. Sometimes all we need to take pleasure in the world is to unburden ourselves from the day''s troubles and the strain on life becomes easier to bear when shared with others." "Huh?" is the only sound Helen could muster. Mary had a smug look as she knew the Priest wouldn''t steer them wrong. "What''s the difference between companionship and something extra?" "Mary!" Helen goes red at her friend''s provocative suggestion. "What? Oh. That''s just your mind, Helen. Get it out of the gutter." "Something else is whatever you desire to find pleasure in life. A foot massage, someone to read to you, a person to hold you whilst you sleep - and of course, everything inside the dark place your friend''s mind seems to be." Darwin chuckles at his joke soliciting a frown from Helen. "I''m not that bad, am I?" She asks her friend seriously. "Well... You always seem to think everything''s about... You know." "I''m sorry, Mary. You were right. This place is not what I thought it was going to be. So... Darwin, wasn''t it?" "Yes, mam." The gorgeous young man smiles at Helen causing her heart to flutter and skip a beat twice in the same day. "I-I would like to have a conversation with someone," she announces shyly. "Absolutely. Are there any guidelines to that or are you happy with anyone?" "What type of guidelines would there be?" "Someone you know, someone you don''t know, a male, female, child, older person, someone created by the dungeon, someone you''ve had a brief encounter with, the Guild Master. If there''s a stipulation, we''ll try our best to fulfil it," he smiles, constantly sifting through his list. Helen didn''t know there would be so many different types of people she could talk to, but someone created by a dungeon? That didn''t sound right. Still, the woman attending the academy had heard rumours during her lectures and was curious to see if they held any truth. Helen chose a conversation with a dungeon summon while Mary also chose to have a conversation. It seems Mary already had a plan for who she wanted to speak with and chose a male her age almost immediately. Wiley fox, Helen thought, and she calls me the naughty one. The women were led to separate booths and were assured sound magic prevented any noise from escaping. Mary was then left alone while Darwin remained in Helen''s booth. "I thought I would get to speak to a dungeon summon, or something like that? Why aren''t you leaving?" Feeling slightly giddy, Helen asks the question she thinks she knows the answer. No one can be that good-looking, right? Chiseled abs, perfect jawline, silky-smooth hair. "Because the dungeon summoned me, Helen," Darwin announces as mysteriously as possible. This tale has been unlawfully lifted from Royal Road. If you spot it on Amazon, please report it. "It''s a good job these booths are soundproof then," she smiles, approaching the suddenly shaken Darwin. "W-Wait, Wait," he begs. "What!" she stops just before him. "This is the wrong room. There''s no bed!" Helen and Mary Dungeon Stories Volume 4
After leaving Lord Aldor in Clara''s capable hands, I left his Manor and headed to Ishda''s noble district. I''m not fond of places like these. I like the buildings and architecture - or what''s left of it at least, it''s the people that live inside that I generally tend to dislike. Nobles are usually a haughty bunch that prides themselves on being better than those below them. Now and then you might find a decent one, mind you. A noble who uses their wealth and authority to help those in need, but they are few and far between. Even as we make our way through what''s left of this particular section of Ishda, the remaining nobles I see are all at least orange on Soul Guide''s radar. Even if they didn''t participate in the coup, the kidnapping, or the embezzlement, they''re still on the wrong end of justice. There''s a lot of work to do here, much more than I had originally thought in the Lord''s Manor. Purchasing the entire noble quarter, I do what this dungeon does best and make shit disappear. In the space of sixty seconds, months of removal work is completed as I empty plots and remove broken buildings by absorbing everything Noir had broken. Every brick, fence, and piece of furniture sink into the ground, freeing up space for new constructions and uncluttering the rubble-strewn district. There are some worried and anxious expressions, but life''s changing whether they like it or not. The orange-souled nobles will soon be visiting Varona for reformation anyway so their opinions fall on deaf ears and I begin creating building after building. This time though, seeing as how we aren''t in Varona and are in fact in a nice district, I decide to show off a little. Instead of creating the usual Unburglable Bungalows, I take it up a notch and make the Vampires a proper mansion. If I want them to run this place and have the other nobles fall in line, they need to at least look the part. That includes a sweet crib to go with their dazzling looks. Best case scenario they manage to start the reformation process before I get around to this place. That would be nice. Or maybe I could just make some more space in my dungeon for them? If I did that, however, I''d need to use more of my family to watch over them and I''d have to feed both of them from Varona''s supplies. No, I''ve got a good thing going at the minute. Once I''ve gathered all of Ishda under my skirt, then we''ll see if reformation needs expanding. With work finished it''s time for a little sightseeing. Still purchasing land as we make our way around, it''s gotten to the point where it''s become less like work and more of a habit. More so since I can''t travel anywhere that I haven''t personally bought. Fortunately, the rest of my family don''t have the same encumbering problems that plague me and can go wherever they like. More often than not, I''m stopped by the boundaries that make up my domain and have to fork out DP before going any further. As we make our way through Ishda - looking like the most bizarre adventuring party anyone is likely to come across, we''re given warm smiles and people graciously make way for Bear as Violet rides him down the street. Again, this wouldn''t be the normal reaction that people have when seeing a little girl riding an animal three times her size. Fortunately, the triplets pump out the same peaceful aura that every other Dragon does automatically regardless of where they are. This means that no matter where we go, no one will question the odd child on the bear. I treat the triplets to dinner whilst we''re walking around to let them experience something different for a change. We have to sit outside the establishment, however, as Bear wouldn''t fit through the door. Once we finished, I was left wanting. Our meals were extremely nice, but it felt like something was missing. Maybe Ali''s adding a little extra love to her Dishes. Or maybe I''m just a sucker for home cooking. Either way, I''m not satisfied and by the look on Amber''s face, neither is she. Returning home we have a second meal at Ali''s, the Chef''s food hitting the spot perfectly, before retiring for the evening. It''s the triplets day off from fighting in the Coliseum. Ringmaster Randy mentioned that other people have started to fall behind because I''m prioritizing the triplets above all else. Because of that, we decided to arrange for them to have set training days like everyone else. They''re already much stronger than they were and to be honest, I''m grateful Randy suggested they train less. It won''t be long before my cute little triplets are ready to join Rebecca in the ranks of Rebellion Dragons. That thought alone makes me extremely sad. No matter what I say to Becca she always takes my words the wrong way. Maybe I should push the Rebellion Dragon''s training schedule so we can rush them through that phase as quickly as possible. My only concern on that front is that I could possibly end up with something worse than a rebellion on my hands. What if she turns into the Dragon of Imminent Death or some stupid shit like that? I wouldn''t put it past this awkward strand of evolution, but I''m hoping that Sis will pull through with something amazing. Hoping is the operative word in that sentence. I''m actually begging. I just want Becca to like me. What''s so wrong with that? Shaking off thoughts of the future - we all know who that''s left to by now, I bring the triplets to the tower with me whilst I practice my Creation magic. Creation itself isn''t technically magic, but it damn well might as well be because nothing else I''ve ever seen or used comes close to its power. As the girls watch, fabric and material form into existence. Knitting, sewing, and stitching themselves together, they form different beings as I create a mass horde of stuffed animals. Cute and cuddly beyond belief, Blondie squeals in excitement as the stuffed animals float toward the girls'' futons. Before hers have even arrived, Blondie has begun plucking them out of the air one by one. Death squeezing them like I once did so long ago - and also not so long ago at the same time as I wake up every morning with at least four cuddlies in my arms. They help me sleep, what else can I say? Plus, they''re just so adorable. Evident by the fact that Bear is enamoured by the miniature, stuffed version of himself. Violet doesn''t seem bothered by the space invaders on her futon, but as long as Bear is happy she''s never unhappy. Amber is the happiest of my three little Dragons though by far, I''ve done something special for her. I had a clever idea when I was creating her cuddlies and made each one resemble food of different varieties. Seeing as the first one went straight in her mouth before she spat it out though, that might have been a bad idea on my part. Still, even though she can''t eat them, Amber doesn''t seem dissatisfied as she sucks on the top of a large, soft banana and peacefully falls asleep. Yeah, I know. At least it''s not a chocolate you know what though. Chapter 110: Rebellion ''Why can''t I be a good dragon?'' Destroying two Golems in one bite, Rebecca releases her frustrations on the Ringmaster''s puppets. Randy has been dedicating extra time to the Rebellion Dragon. Out of all the other members of his family, she''s the one struggling hardest. Her species makes life extremely difficult for the young Dragon. Feeling power surging through her from receiving another level up, Rebecca revels in its warmth. Swinging her tail, she destroys a further two Golems and takes out twice that number with her large claws as she spins. "Haha. I''m unstoppable," she boasts raining fire down on the remaining opponents and ending the match. The Ringmaster appears next to her, clapping his hands. Some of his head is missing and the moon-shaped crescent looks slightly disturbing even to the large Rebellion Dragon. "Well done, Becca. You''re definitely getting stronger." His voice is easy to hear even from her heightened position, not that he has a mouth on the moon he calls a face. "Don''t get too cocky though. Strong as you are, there could always be tougher opponents." He clicks his finger and a single Mythril Golem appears in the ring. "What level are you now?" He looks at the Dragon of Rebellion''s status. Randy is one of the few who can check the status of another and is needed in his role to help the denizens of the dungeon grow stronger. "Level 43 is extremely good. Well done, Becca. Unfortunately, I still don''t think it''s going to be enough to beat Barry Mark 2, over there." Becca looks at the Golem who does resemble a post-evolution Barry. Rebecca sorely wants to evolve herself. If she can, all of her negative emotions might go away and it should take her disobedient attitude with it. All she wants to do is talk to Abi. But every time she sees her, mixed emotions cloud her judgment and force her to act out. Randy returns to his seat as the fight begins and Rebecca charges toward the Golem. Picking up speed with each step whilst using her wings to propel her forward, the first attack she lands on Barry Mark 2 does more damage to her claw than her opponent and The Rebellion Dragon screams in pain. At least the Mythril Golem was propelled into the arena wall. Rebecca''s claw mangled in a gory scene of broken bone and flesh, however, was not worth its while. She hadn''t damaged the Golem with that attack and it was only briefly incapacitated while it freed itself from the debris. Seeing her disfigurement, the pent-up Dragon roars ever louder. The Golem simply pulled itself out of the wall and slowly began walking toward her. Not even a scratch was left on its frame. Not from the impact nor Rebecca''s speed attack. "That''s fucking bullshit that is, Randy and you know it. How is it not even a little damaged?" She screams at the Ringmaster, still watching from his booth. "It is made from pure Mythril. One of the strongest substances on this planet. I did say you weren''t ready for this, did I not?" His voice echoes in her head as she watches the Golem draw closer. "No, you said you didn''t think it would be enough. You didn''t say anything about not being ready!" "Well. Seeing how that is the case, I must apologize. You commenced the battle yourself when you charged into the fray after misunderstanding my statement. At no point did I tell you to fight that Golem. Now, you will have to do your utmost best to defeat it, or die trying." Even though the Ringmaster doesn''t have a face, Rebecca''s sure he is grinning at her. This bastard. "I don''t want to die here, Randy. Let me out now." Rebecca attempts to flee by flying out of the arena, but a barrier prevents her from escaping. The same shell that protects civilians from stray spells in the arena also prevents any form of matter from passing through. "Let me out, you bastard! I don''t want to die in here." Rebecca screams again. Fear seething through her tone and lacing her words. "You don''t actually die in the Coliseum, Becca. Well, you do, but you come back to life afterwards. It''s a special feature that was created when the master upgraded this feature." Randy explains as she moves where the barrier meets his booth. "Fuck that bitch. Get me out now, Randy!" The Oblivion Dragon unleashes a torrent of purple mana at The Ringmaster. Unfortunately, it does nothing but cover the area, effectively masking his stupid face from view until it disperses. "Sometimes death is good for the soul and teaches things that life can not. Like cocky, young Dragons who think they''re invincible for example. Now, get down there and fight. We''re not going anywhere till one of you kicks the bucket." Randy claps his hands and the barrier turns black. Hiding everything above her, Rebecca can no longer see the seating area and turns to look at her opponent below. Cursing Abi, Randy, and Abi once more for creating the torturous Ringmaster, Rebecca steels her nerves and attacks the Mythril Golem below with a breath attack. Painting the ground black, the Oblivion Dragon kept it up until she eventually ran out of juice. Once the attack was over and the mist had cleared, the motionless Golem stood as steam leaked from its body. This fight isn''t an easy one, the barrier was still trapping Rebecca inside. Deciding to try another speed/power attack on what she hoped to be a now-brittle Golem, the Rebellion Dragon shot down from the air like a bullet. Her good claw impacted her opponent''s chest and shattered like the first as the Golem was pushed into the ground. Did you know this text is from a different site? Read the official version to support the creator. Rebecca wanted to cry. Both her claws were broken and as she tried to take flight, she felt the cold grip of death latch onto her wing. What followed was the worst twenty seconds of her life. The Mythril Golem broke bone after bone as it made its way toward her neck before finally ending her suffering. Her eyes snap open and immediately lock on to the only other person in the room, Randy. He''s sitting beside the bed she''s laid on in a small, featureless room. "I fucking hate you, Randy." She glares at him. "Yeah. A lot of them say that, but I''m not sure why. All I''m doing is helping." Doubting his intentions, Rebecca is sure the Ringmaster secretly enjoys watching them suffer as she wears a doubtful look. "Anyway, did you learn anything from your fight?" "I did," she answers immediately. "Do tell then. I would very much like to know." The crescent moon on top of his body comically bobs away in anticipation. "Don''t trust the gods-damned Ringmaster!" she jabs, quickly porting back to the Dragons Daycare before Randy can stop her. Rebecca''s fighting for the day is over after that last moment of horror. Maybe even for the week. Rebecca and Randy Dungeon Stories Volume 5
By the time I''ve unlocked the rest of Ishda, my daily income has closed in on the 200,000 mark. Increasing my spending limit is by far the best feature of acquiring new land. The amount I can accomplish in a single day keeps getting larger and larger too. Which isn''t the best, but I like being flush so it''s fine. Less than a week after acquiring my third city, I''ve already managed to connect us more than we ever have been before. I spent a few days repairing and adding roads, bridges, and everything in between, connecting all the cities that fall under my domain. I even placed rest stations at set locations between each city, giving my inactive guard members something to do whilst making travelling safer. I even went ahead and set up patrols around Tune and Ishda. Both are on the worse end of Soul Guide''s scale of righteousness so I ended up stationing about a thousand guards in each city. That''s only a small number compared to their respective populations, but it''s enough to keep more of my family busy. Plus, it was only the other week I was complaining that too many of them had nothing to do except keep the peace in my city. Which isn''t really much of a job seeing as how my dragons have that front covered. However, sourcing out a few to the two cities should help prevent any more negative-coloured souls from cropping up. Creating roads and pushing work onto the guards isn''t all I''ve been doing this week. I''ve been slowly upgrading the shoddy stone wall that surrounds Varona in between my various other tasks. I''m about a tenth of the way done, which isn''t very far, but the section I''ve finished is all solid Mythril bricks. That''s right, Mythril. Nothing''s going to be breaking through these walls by the time I''m finished. I might even throw some magical enchantments in there while I''m at it. Well, that won''t be until I''ve finished changing all the bricks to Mythril, but it''s still a good idea for afterwards. Tune''s count on souls that need guidance has also been dropping well and I''ll soon be able to move Councilman Raff over to Ishda. I don''t know how he manages it without Soul Guide, but working together with Treasurer Goode, the wise councilman can spot corruption a mile away. Once he''s finished with the fishing city, Raff''s second task will be twice as big as his first due to Ishda being double the size of Tune. Although the Vampires will have already given him a head start on that front. They''re practically guaranteed to succeed in the noble district. If shit rolls downhill, so too do sunshine and rainbows. However, it wasn''t all that long ago that Noir had to stomp out some major corruption with his sisters. I''ve even seen the destruction firsthand at this point and it wasn''t pretty. Not that Carrie and Dropper were as heavy-handed as the dungeon-loving loudmouth had been, but Lord Aldor still seemed more than a little sour over Noir until I dropped that gold in his lap. Anyway, the Assassins'' visit curbed a good deal of evil from the region''s capital, but it wasn''t anywhere near enough to cleanse the city completely. It was a good start though and Raff should easily be able to pick up where the trio of Assassins left off. Not to mention the Vampires already doing a fantastic job of making behavioural changes right now. It''s amazing what flattery, unmatched beauty, and a little bit of magic can do. Especially when you''re a drop-dead gorgeous Noble Vampire. Speaking of, Clara ended up joining us in Varona for our morning meetings and updates. Me asked for another budget increase which I happily provided. With the extra 40,000 coming in daily from Lord Aldor''s city, I didn''t mind upping Me''s allowance to 15,000. He is using it to fuel our adventurers and further my goals after all. All in all, other than that weird kid who keeps watching me eat, everything''s been progressing nicely. The triplets even hit level 40. It broke my heart and, honestly as selfish as this sounds, I didn''t want them to evolve. I wanted them to be my three, little adorable babes forever. Sadly, that can''t happen as evolution is as much a part of their life as I am. Plus, I don''t want to see a repeat of what happened during the King''s attack. I''d rather them be rebellious than go through that again. I watched as three, cute Oblivion Dragons evolved into their next tier. Growing slightly in size, each one transitioned into teenage-sized versions of themselves. Violet''s hair now has a white streak running into her fringe, a telltale sign of rebellion if I''ve ever seen one. Although, out of the three, she''s already the hardest to coax into doing anything unless Bear is involved. Blondie, for some unknown reason, has a pair of glasses hanging around her neck after her evolution was done. I don''t see why she needs them, all my creations have superior senses, but when she puts them on... She looks super cool. Amber seemed to be furious and it wasn''t far-fetched to say that I was a little worried. Fortunately, when she turned her scornful gaze my way she only said one word and it was more of a question. "Dinner?" Shattering the illusion that every Rebellion Dragon would be like Rebecca, I instantly moved us to Ali''s and watched as the teenage Dragons demolished plate after plate in the most peaceful eating display ever seen. People watched in silent happiness as plates came out as fast as they went back until they eventually slowed down. Normally the crowd would be rambunctious but because my Dragons are involved, it''s a different story. Two out of the three finished and only a greedy redhead continued to put it away. As I was beginning to wonder where it was all going, Violet asked me a question. Violet! "Can I go for a run with Bear?" As scary as the prospect of a Rebellion Dragon riding a fully-grown Bear was, I didn''t dare say no. I also didn''t want her kicking up a stink in Ali''s restaurant so soon after her evolution and I agreed. I also told her to try to stick to the forest. Not that people would care much about her running through the streets, that peaceful-vibe aura they have going on is some pretty powerful shit. After watching her dash off, I turned back to find Blondie missing. The chatterbox doesn''t normally leave my side, but now they''ve evolved of course that''s bound to change. Scanning the crowd, I found her talking to Ali at the counter. I feel as though a weight has been lifted off my chest. Other than Violet wanting some alone time with Bear, nothing else seems to have changed much. Blondie''s still talking someone''s ear off and Amber is stuffing her face. It''s nice to know they''re still my girls. Chapter 111: How Do They Keep Doing This? OK, so they''re not exactly the same as they used to be. Amber hasn''t and is refusing to leave Ali''s until she''s full. Never mind the fact that she''s eaten over 100 dishes already and has been here for over four hours. Blondie, the peaceful best friend to everyone in Varona, has vanished. I don''t know when she disappeared or where she''s gone as I can''t sense her anywhere in my domain and Violet still isn''t back from her run. Fortunately, I can sense her and Bear in the forest outside town, but Blondie''s starting to make me nervous. It''s not like I can follow her either if I don''t know where she is. Another hour of panic later - about the same time Amber decided she was full, I felt Blondie enter my domain. Moments after she appeared next to us outside Ali''s and she was shortly followed by Violet. It was as though they knew that Amber had finished and returned right on time to match. I didn''t say anything and instead moved us to my tower. Maybe I shouldn''t have been panicking? With how Becca can act though, my worries are definitely justified. Speaking of my rebellious teenage Dragon, Randy has been pushing her hard recently. I really want to go and congratulate her on the effort she''s putting in, but I just know it will go sourly. When she''s ready to evolve, I''m definitely going to praise the hell out of her. If it wasn''t for the stupid rebellion clause in her species, I''d be over there praising her right now. Becca and her sisters do a great job of keeping Sis occupied on a daily basis, that alone is praiseworthy right there. Before I appointed her to the mountainous, daycare position, Sis had begun to remind me of how Me used to act before he got behind the Abi version of Dungeon Core''in. A lot of ''It would be more efficient this way'' and ''Why do you persist on sleeping?'' springs to mind. A peaceful life is what it''s all about and those types of questions lead to stress. That said, after seeing Sis yesterday on her day off, she was a lot more mellow than she used to be. In fact, when I saw her, she was reveling in delight at the different types of desserts our resident Chef had created. With that in mind, I lay down to rest. It''s been a rather stressful day all things considered. Tomorrow though, I need to talk to her about this Dragon issue. I''m hoping we can come to some sort of understanding about what Rebellion Dragons evolve into. I''m praying it will be something placid. Or as placid as a fourth-tier Dragon can be that is. With the task in mind for the Abi of tomorrow, my head hits the futon. The triplets bickering over something trivial is the last sight I see as sleep claims me. I didn''t even realize I was that tired. As the darkness of my dream''s embrace begins to fade, it leaves me alone in a room that I swear I''ve seen before. White walls, white floor, white ceiling, white furniture. White, white, white, white, white. I swear, I''ve seen this place before. Before I can think any further about where I know this room from, a voice enters my mind in a truly painful fashion. I can barely hear her because of how she threatens to tear my skull apart with each word. Divinity''s Presence and Domain both flare up and the pain recedes. Being granted a reprieve from the migraine of death, I remember where I know this scene from. This was the Lazy God''s domain, or at least what it looked like before I got my hands on it. Is he back? Sis said it would take a while for him to be able to manifest again. In that case, it can only be another God, someone different. Questions rattle around in my brain. So many questions. The one that I end up asking though is enough to grant me my first view of the latest person to snatch my consciousness. Seriously, how do they keep doing this? Can I do it? Not important right now, I guess. The question I ask is simple. "Do gods all decorate the same way or do you just have no fashion sense?" The stupid question won''t grant me any tactical advantage over my enemy. It is what I said, however, and enough to piss the God off that she ends up revealing herself. "How dare you! I''ll have you know that Kor stole this design from me. No one else on the spiritual plane has the tenacity to pull off an all-white abode such as I. Kor was a lazy little shit who stole other people''s ideas and never followed through on his own. Truly, he was worthy of being titled as the Lazy God." Everything about her is white. Her hair, skin, dress. Everything. Worst of all, she thought she looked good. "Was that his name? Kor, I mean? And he was actually titled the Lazy God? By other Gods too? That shit is hilarious." I laugh. At first, not going to lie, I might have dribbled a tiny bit after remembering the last time I was in a place like this. Now though, I''m not even phased. How strong can a God actually be and what really is a God? I''m pretty damn sure they''re not what I thought they were, that''s for sure. Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. The monotone woman mentioned the spiritual plane a moment ago and that slightly piqued my interest. Slightly. After a quick thought, doesn''t that mean she''s just the same as me but from a different realm? Well not the same as me, but it does mean that Gods are more like realm travelers or some bullshit like that. It also means that people are basically worshiping other people. Screw these guys. How does praying to them benefit anyone on Tironia? How did Kor, the Lazy God, aid the population by creating the error-ridden dungeon system? How do these guys help in any possible way other than fucking shit up? Gone is my comical demeanor as I''ve just talked myself into being annoyed. Currently, I''m debating whether or not I can even hold a conversation with this bitch. "How dare you give me such a poor title!?" She begins crying and it really throws me off my whole aggression game. Even though this God''s paler than the Noble Vampire Clara, she''s also extremely beautiful and I''m a sucker for that type of crying woman. Stupid lingering human emotions. "First off, if you''re lying or you decide to lie to me in any way, I''ll void the shit out of this place in a heartbeat. Do you understand?" I don''t want to come across as mean, only dominant, but my words cause a fresh batch of tears to fall, and a horrified expression appears on her face. "Please don''t do that. I only wanted to know why you stole my title and gave Kor''s?" Now I''m even more confused. As far as I''m aware, my status doesn''t show any titles. "Hang on. Are you sure you''ve got the right Dungeon Core?" I''m pretty sure she might have. I did fight the Lazy God, but I definitely didn''t get a title for it. "I can see your title plain as day. Goddess of Beauty. The title that once was mine. Now I''m classified as the Lazy God. Me! Why did you do this?" She seems genuinely upset that I''ve wronged her. Even if what she said is true, it isn''t my fault that he picked a fight with me over a silly insult. Especially when he actually was titled the Lazy God. Why did he even take offense to what I said in the first place? "So you''re telling me that I''m the Goddess of Beauty?" I can''t stop the smile creeping across my face as I ask. Plus, I couldn''t help myself. That question was at the forefront of my mind begging to be asked. The new and beautiful Lazy God sighs, wiping her tears away before nodding miserably as she sniffles. "No fucking way. Wait till Me hears about this. It will blow his mind. I mean... I''m sorry you''re now the Lazy God and all but don''t think I''ll be giving up this title for you or anything. That guy attacked me. His System basically bullshitted her way into my life. It''s been fight after nerve-racking fight recently and don''t even get me started on the triplets and Rebellion Dragons. Either way, this title''s mine. I deserve it." Ok, so the dominant but not mean version of me is now out of the window. If she wants this title that I didn''t even realize I had then she''s going to have to fight me for it. Or more specifically... Light and Noir appear beside me. Both look a little confused at their unannounced summoning, but neither of them says a word. Light should recognize this place as he''s been here before, or at least somewhere similar even if it did look exactly the same. Noir, on the other hand, the Assassin who never shuts up, doesn''t speak for once. I almost want to start congratulating him there and then but I''ve got bigger problems at the moment. God level ones. As we stare down our opponent she returns our gaze, only alternating her own between the three of us. Before Noir can ruin the standoff, I can see him twitching in the corner of my eye, the God dives to her knees and starts begging for mercy. Ruining what I thought was quite a cool stare down while seizing her moment, the three of us watch in silent shock as her begging turns into rambling about an unfair life. "Stand by. I might need you, two." I send Noir and Light back to Varona while wondering if my body is still over there. Is this form just my soul or am I still all of me? Did the triplets notice my disappearance, or are they still bickering with each other? "How did you do that?" She asked while I was lost in thought. "What? Summon those two clowns? Believe me, it''s harder to get rid of them than it is to summon them," I laugh, trying to lighten the mood. Now I know she doesn''t want to fight, I''ll try not to talk myself into another mini rage. "It should be impossible though. This is my domain and I''m at Level 3. That''s considered to be quite high in our realm if you didn''t know. I also possess Divinity''s Sight at level 2 and my Presence is the same. Theoretically, you shouldn''t be able to just pop people into my domain like that. I should be in control of who is allowed to enter and exit this place." "You have Divinity''s Sight?" If I was an evil person, I''d be thinking about killing this God just for that skill alone... Alright, I was thinking about it, but I''m not going to do it. I''m sure I can find another way to exploit that extremely useful skill. "That''s what I said," she replies smugly which irritates me. Maybe I will kill her after all? "Don''t be like that. You were on your knees with snot dribbling down your face a second ago, remember?" A flash of fear washes across her face once more. "Also little-miss smug as fuck, my Divinity''s Domain is level 3 as well. I think. Or was it Level 4? Either way, that means shit as my Presence is maxed out!" Ok. I shouldn''t be smug while telling her not to act the same way, but something about her just annoys me. Maybe it''s how perfect her face is? Or her white eyes? Either way, watching her face pale further than physically possible was a pretty smug feeling and I was basking the hell out of it. What? What''s that? My Presence is stronger than all your Divinity combined? Poor old ex-Goddess of Beauty. My dungeon created heart bleeds for you. It really does. But this shit''s mine now and it''s about time you realised who''s on top. "M-Maxed!? B-But... But... That''s impossible. Nobody can max their presence. No one. It just isn''t... It isn''t... Achievable. How? How have you managed it? Divinity spans into the thousands and has multiple unknown requirements. It separates the realms whilst also holding them together and being the very fabric they exist upon. No wonder you were able to summon others into my domain with no more than a thought." Thousands? Really? Divinity''s Presence hadn''t shifted a notch on the level chart ever since Sis unlocked it for me. until the Lord of the Hay granted my wish. A spur-of-the-moment comment, spoken in ignorant misunderstanding, might have been the best thing to have ever happened to me. Screw what this God thinks. Maybe it''s time I realized who''s actually on top. Maybe, I should also visit the Bale of Fortune and see if the Lord''s ready to grant me another wish yet? Chapter 112: Upgrade Sitting across from me in a now much better-looking domain - of course, I replaced hers with one of my own after finding out I''m much, much stronger than she is, is the newly-titled Lazy God. Or Lazy Goddess in her case. Underneath a bright, blue sky and surrounded by nature, we''re sat under an umbrella at a lovely-little table the same colour as my new companion. Drinking tea on top of the same bridge I met Sis on once upon a moon ago, we discuss many things including her terms of employment in Varona. It turns out her name is Kolena and the former Goddess of Beauty only cares about one thing. Being beautiful. She''s convinced herself that now she''s lost her old title she''s also going to lose her looks. I assured Kolena that wouldn''t happen as I had plans for my new Goddess friend. Plans that would ensure she stays beautiful while also being beneficial to me in some way or other. Living in Varona is all she actually has to do if she wants to stay gorgeous, but while she''s there she may as well pitch in. I can see her doing well in the reformation department. Divinity''s Sight is a huge boon for her. It might almost be as good as Soul Guide. In fact, maybe it''s better than my skill seeing as how she can see titles and I can''t. Waking from my sleep, there''s one more woman in my city than there was before I drifted off. Standing beside my futon, Kolena is staring at the triplets with an unhappy look written across her face. "What''s up?" Curiosity always gets the better of me and I can''t help but ask. I stand up and summon an apple as she turns toward me. "They''re Dragons? Something else you shouldn''t be capable of. They''re demons from the demon realm." She states matter of factly. "What? Don''t be ridiculous. How are they demons? Dragons are monsters, aren''t they? That''s what Sis classifies them as anyway. They level up, evolve, grow, and learn just like everyone else. Some are more... Rebellious than others, but they''re still amazing. There''s no way they can be demons, I summoned them myself. In fact, we''ve fought demons and they didn''t look anything like my girls." Kolena inspects them all carefully before returning back to me. "It''s true that they don''t have the usual demonic appearance. That may or may not have something to do with you and my title." "My title," I have to correct her. She looks ready to argue until my glare settles that one. "Fine, whatever. Your title. That said, they''re still demons whether you like it or not." Huffing her answer, Kolena looks down at the city. "You know what? I can summon that many different types of creatures these days, I''m not even surprised. Nor do I care for that matter." "What?" Kolena is shocked at my response. "W-What do you mean you don''t care?" "These girls are my everything. I love them just as much as anyone else summoned by my skill. Demon or not, they''re my family and if you see something wrong with that, then we''re going to have a serious problem." "I... I don''t have a problem. I just... Wanted to make sure you were aware of what they are. T-That''s all." She stares at the ground and her response makes me feel bad again. I suppose I should really. I do keep threatening her, although she did abduct me so she kind of deserves it. Another weirdo to add to the ever-growing pile. "And like I said, they''re family. That''s the last I want to hear about that, please." This is so awkward. Kolena is from a different realm, yet here she is nodding away at my words as though they''re law. Actually... "Kolena. I want to make a contract." "A contract? What kind of contract?" That''s a good start. She doesn''t seem unwilling, only a little skeptical but after my pitch she''ll be sold. "Just one that binds us together so to say. I''m hoping to get that skill of yours while you should receive a boost in your beauty at the very least." All she really cares about is her own looks after all. "I suppose so. Nothing else really matters in any of the worlds except for beauty." With that, I bind the Lazy Goddess to my dungeon as a contracted monster. The same as I did with Peaches, Katrina, Tilly, and the rest. Unfortunately, I didn''t unlock Divinity''s Sight while doing so, but that doesn''t mean I didn''t gain anything from our contract. Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel.
Dungeon Core Abi (Goddess of Beauty, Goddess of the Dungeon) Level 63: 46,550/52,600XP until next level 69 Floors 499 Rooms 912 Tunnels 22,112 Monsters 9 Contracted Monsters 11,138 Traps 183,665 DP Available
I''ve joked about it so much that it''s hard to take seriously. Even while looking at my status, I have to repeatedly make sure my eyes aren''t deceiving me. For Kolena to say it is one thing, but to see it for myself is another matter completely. I can''t believe I''m a Goddess for Cores'' sake. When did that happen? I''ve become one of the people I complain about - and too, day after day. Not that these posers are the real deal, but I''m going to show them what being Godly bloody well means. Also, not only do I have the Lazy Goddesses'' previous title, the one for beauty that fits me perfectly, but I somehow managed to acquire a second one somewhere else down the line. Oddly enough though, owning two Godly titles makes me feel pretty God-damn good about myself. With vague ideas as to where my second title came from, I leave the thoughts alone to enjoy the high I''m riding. The last thing I want right now is something killing it. However, the universe always seems to be against me for some reason and the triplets decide that now is the perfect time to wake up. Didn''t even last five minutes. "Who''s this? And why are you all white? I mean you look kinda good, but... I don''t know. Maybe mix it up a little? A green streak would go a long way." Violet''s vocalism isn''t lost on me. Usually, she''s the last one to speak, if she has any input at all that is. Anything not related to Bear is usually lost on her. This rebellion I can almost get behind. "This is Kolena. She''s from another realm and is going to be staying with us for a while." I announce. "Why do you always bring home strays?" I have no answer to that as I wasn''t expecting Violet to be so blunt. She''s just stroking Bear''s fur as though she hasn''t just trampled on my feelings. I''d like to complain about them not being here if I didn''t do just that, but technically I absorbed the Dragon that Light killed so it''s a different matter completely and wouldn''t be relevant. I''m still hurt though so I stick my tongue out behind Violet''s back and leave it at that. Blondie, now that she''s actually present again, is back to her usual self and is discovering all of Kolena''s deepest secrets. Amber is still rubbing her eyes and there''s no need to wait to see how she will react. I''m dreading what she''s going to go through today though. Porting the six of us to Amber''s favorite spot, it''s breakfast time. The redheaded Rebellion Dragon drags Kolena inside obsessing about ''having to try it.'' This will be the first time the goddess will have tried Tironian cuisine. Or at least dungeon-borne Chef cooking. Either way, it always hits the spot. Amber only ended up spending an hour of our time eating. Kolena was also extremely satisfied with her meal and had two extra portions herself. Fortunately, my Stalker was nowhere to be seen today so that was a bonus. After breakfast, I faced the first problem of the day. What do I do with the triplets while I attend my morning meeting? Worse yet, what do I do with them while I''m doing actual work after lunch? They were placid and patient before their evolution, but I doubt so much now. I suppose I should try and find them some type of work while I''m busy doing my own. I doubt they really want to sit around and watch me change stone bricks into Mythril. The wall surrounding my city is a much bigger project than I initially thought it would be. Maybe we could go for a walk? Land Acquisition is still a thing and I''ve got a few cities left to acquire before the entire area falls under my domain. Although, that thought only lasts as long as Amber''s cravings remain at bay and I suspect that isn''t half the amount of time it was before. Violet and Bear will probably enjoy it and Blondie can keep at Kolena on the way. It''ll do. For the meeting though? I move us to the forest where we find a startled Me holding some type of rat creature upside down by its tail. "This isn''t what it looks like." He shouts even though I have no idea what''s going on. "If you mean you''re not holding that rat by its tail, then you''re clearly wrong and it definitely is what it looks like. Not that I care about that or why you''re doing it. What I need is for you to watch these five for me. Just while I''m at the meeting." Glossing over the fact that he''s clearly doing some weird shit with that rat, I only need him to babysit for me so I get straight to the point. "Oh. Erm, OK. I don''t mind, but who''s this?" Me is referring to Kolena of course as he hasn''t met our new resident God yet. "I''ll leave her to explain that. Actually, I suppose I should bring her to the meeting. It will be a lot easier once everyone meets her." Confusing Me isn''t usually that hard, but when I change my mind mid-sentence, he always gets it the worst. "What do you mean it will be easier? Who is she, Abi?" "Before I tell you, when was the last time you checked my status?" I ask knowing he won''t reply and instead will do exactly what I just mentioned. "Are you serious? Goddess of Beauty? How did you manage to attain that? The Dungeon one I can understand, but that beauty thing did not happen just because you may or may not have mentioned it before." He says, staring into the forest and avoiding eye contact with me. "You know damn well I said that before. I told you I make people beautiful and now I have proof. I''m the God-damn Beauty Queen, Me." That earns me a sour look from Kolena but screw that Goddess. Who really cares what she thinks? It''s about time I got to revel in something, even if it is just rubbing Me''s nose in it. Chapter 113: Morning Meeting Sitting around a large table inside one of the City Council rooms are a handful of my most trusted family members and a couple of humans. The people who look after and run the important aspects of all four of my cities gather once a day to give me a rundown of the events of yesterday. Sometimes they come with plans for the future which also get discussed, but that''s about the extent of how fun these meetings are. Starting on my left are Deputy Mayor Sacha and Mayor Kana. Two of the most important people in Varona. Kana is tasked with the day-to-day handling of the entire city and a lot of my family report directly to her on a daily basis. Even though she''s about as bright as a dying dungeon torch, her aid Sacha burns bright enough that both of them shine. Damn, Kana''s lucky. If she was more capable, I''d be stealing Sacha to be my own personal assistant. Sat beside them are Councilman Raff and Treasurer Goode. The Tune Team. Every day I get a new report from them, combined with Hana and Mira who happen to be sitting next to them, on how our reformation work is progressing. Tune''s citizens who required the reduced-duration course - because the colour of their souls was closest to grey, are almost being swapped around daily. Thanks to Sacha''s suggestion, Raff is excelling in his position and with the help of the Commanders, is doing a fantastic job cleaning up the fishing city for me. Goode only comes to update Sacha during the meetings and hopefully by being around us more often, he won''t sink back to his old gold-pinching ways. Hana and Mira have always been among the most helpful of my family. Summoned with the first ten Rogues, the women became the Commanders of my guard not long after my dungeon opened and have watched over us diligently ever since. Now that we''ve moved on to greater heights, the Guard House that upgraded into the Towers of Torture is the main location for most of the reformation. Anyone who''s even slightly yellow will be passing through there at some point or other. Unless they get lucky and manage to change their ways themselves that is. In fairness, being Commanders of the Guard basically forced Hana and Mira to be a part of the soul-guiding scheme. Not that they''d have said no to helping out, if I had asked them, or if things would have played out differently. Still, it would have been nice to have given them a choice. Sitting next to Hana and Mira are Light, Sophie, and the Dungeon Categoriser Simon. The dungeon diver''s belly looks larger every time I see her as Light insists on bringing his partner to every meeting. I didn''t complain though and even now I don''t mind. It''s clearly obvious that he just wants to protect her and keeping her in his sight at all times is the easiest way to do just that. Light''s job is to update me on Orad which, to be honest, isn''t much of a job at all. The peaceful city''s residents closest to us do a pretty good job at living life the way I need them to. No corruption in a city that size is a pretty big accomplishment and I can only attribute it to Mayor Baldur and his people. Compared to Tune and Ishda, Orad''s homeless numbered less than a dozen, and everyone in their city was quite well-fed. That didn''t stop me from adding to their food production or housing the homeless in better accommodation, however. I just wish that all cities were as easy as Orad was. Well, I wish all cities were like Varona, but you know what I mean. Simon is here to give one of his regular reports on the dungeon outside Orad. The gold-loving Categoriser has been compiling a list of how far the adventurers have managed to progress through the dungeon. It hasn''t been long as it''s only filled with Goblins and at some point soon, I''ll have to add a couple dozen floors of Hobs to match their growth rate. That should keep them busy for a while. Coral and Mystique are also here this morning and are sitting between myself and Simon in the last two seats. Those chairs are never empty as there''s always someone who wants to report directly during the meeting. I get it. I do. That''s why there are two extra seats and not twelve. Otherwise, we''d be here well past lunch. That might seem cruel, but if there is a matter of the utmost importance - one so crucial that it just can''t wait, there''s always the dungeon communication feature. My will carries everything between all of us and much as I keep my own channel free from their daily ramblings, it''s always open in case of an emergency. However, the only emergency today is Kolena''s Introduction and I''m doing that directly. The woman from the spirit realm who is currently standing behind my seat is the source of everyone''s attention as she''s the only person in the room standing. Which I now feel a little bad about. Shuffling over, I create a chair between myself and Coral before telling Kolena to sit down. This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon. "So. Good morning. I''ll get right on with what I have to say seeing as how none of you can take your eyes off Kolena here. She is from the spirit realm. Just like the demon realm, her home is on another plane of existence." I let that sink in for a moment. Hopefully, they''re listening because no one seems to have anything to say. That alone might be cause for concern. "She is also the former Goddess of Beauty and is going to help Hana, Mira, and Raff in the reformation department. Questions?" "So she''s a God?" Mayor Kana is the first to speak. It cuts me a little deep as I too can now be classed as a God thanks to my titles. Not that I mentioned that part. "Gods aren''t exactly what you think they are, Kana. They''re more like people who live on another plane of existence. It''s not like we worship the demons and they''re basically the same thing." "Hey," Kolena cries out in disgust. "Don''t compare me to the demons." That comment solicits a round of sympathetic gazes that all land on Kolena. "That was pretty harsh, Master." Even Light seems to have taken her side. "I didn''t mean it like that. I was just pointing out that they''re just like us. Well... They would be like us if we were real people, but... You know what I mean." This time my will carries mixed messages as I almost confused myself. "Whatever. This is Kolena. She''s going to be working with us from now on. Be nice." I slump down in resignation. Stupid meetings. "What''s the spirit realm like?" "Can you grant wishes?" "How do you know Master?" The barrage of questions aimed at Kolena almost makes me wish I never brought her. I mean, I could have left her with Me and the triplets. That way my meeting wouldn''t have been extended by questions that could just as easily be asked later. "Kind of lonely to be honest. No, I can''t grant wishes and I learned of Abi after she stole my title." Kolena''s words hang in the air before everyone turns to look at me again in disbelief. Their faces say ''Why would you do that, Master?'' "Alright, alright. We can do question time another day. For now, let''s get on with the reports, please. I left the triplets with Me and it was only yesterday they evolved into Rebellion Dragons. I''m still a little antsy to let them out of my sight. Kana, go." I point at the Mayor who jumps out of her seat before grabbing her documents. "Yes, Master. Sacha, go," the Mayor smiles in my direction as she mimics me. Sacha rolls her eyes and I can''t help but do the same. It also makes me smile and I Don''t say anything about the lackadaisical attitude. Fortunately, the report on Varona is all good so I take that as one small victory. Sacha doesn''t fuck around after all. Unlike the goofy Mayor who has already rested her head back down on the desk. Raff''s report was about how many of Tune''s citizens are left to reform. According to Goode, their finances are now back on track as well. With most of the city''s illegal activities ceasing to exist as neutrality takes over, money is flowing in the correct direction once again. Not that gold is important to me, but it''s still a good sign that they''re doing well. Other than the fact that everything was running smoothly in my own city, Hana and Mira didn''t have any other updates for me today. Short and sweet, just like the three Oblivion Dragons I used to know. Light also didn''t have much to report. His city is just as peaceful as my own only without the need for Dragons. He did complain for a short amount of time about being bored out of his mind and how Sophie would be safer in Varona, but he''s got an easy job so he should be happy. It was a valid point on the safety concern though so I''ll swap him out for someone else soon. The ex-dungeon diver herself went into great detail describing a dessert she had eaten yesterday at a cafe in Orad. Five whole minutes had passed before Sophie let the next speaker continue the meeting. After she had finished though, I was beginning to feel hungry and I''d only just come from breakfast too. The next speaker, Simon, apparently came prepared. He sat forward, leaning his elbows on the table with a serious look on his face, he looked directly at me. "The Dungeon in Orad is still doing well and the adventurers have almost reached the bottom. Their levels are slowly rising and it might take about another week, but I''m sure they will be able to clear the final floor. I think now would be the perfect time to expand." It''s one thing to have a Categoriser on my books, but it''s another to hear him talk about expanding a dungeon. Especially when he does it so dramatically. The ginger-haired gold lover fits into my large family of weirdos perfectly. He can be Me''s money-loving cousin. "OK. I''ll come over after lunch to do that for you. Anything else?" Simon shakes his head and leans back in his chair. A breath of relief escapes his lungs. He''s actually quite a capable guy if I''m being honest. Unlike Light, he doesn''t complain about being Orad for extended periods. That''s more than likely because Light''s got used to the luxuries in Varona, but it''s still nice to see Simon doing so well. With nothing else to come from my Catergoriser, we move on to the two women who managed to snatch up today''s guest seats. Mystique, headmaster of the Academy of Dark Arts, and her assistant Coral finally give their report. Another that I''m extremely happy to hear and one that makes me grateful they got today''s spare seats. The Space Mages trained by Marie have been running their own smaller versions of her class. Yesterday saw the first student from one of the graduate classes perform a teleport spell. Not a major feat in itself as teleportation has become a frequent thing now, but it shows the progress of my academy and the citizens in my city. They''re not dungeon summons after all and Tironians generally find it harder to learn the higher aspects of magic. Hence why I still don''t have a Time Mage. Although, the thought of adding the element to my body doesn''t appeal to me as much as it did before. I''m still curious to see if I''ll become even stronger than I am now, but I think it would be more beneficial in running certain features of my dungeon. Like the Coliseum for example. If I could slow down time inside the building, I could chuck all my Rebellion Dragons in there and boom. Insane mode complete. If only it wasn''t just wishful thinking. By the time I find a Time Mage, I''ll probably be way past Rebellion Dragons. Chapter 114: One Brick At A Time After Mystique and Coral made my day with the news of more Space Mages to come, that signified the end of our meeting. I didn''t manage to get away as fast as usual due to Kolena being bombarded with questions, but I did manage to keep my mouth shut to avoid looking further like the bad guy. It''s not my fault I stole her title. Nor was it my fault that Kor, the old Lazy God picked a fight with me. Either way, the Q and A session ended and we ported back to the forest. There, I find Me combing Bear''s fur with a brush and Violet''s eyes sparkling as he does. It''s obvious she wants cthat brush. At least I know what to make her if I need to coax her into doing anything. Amber is snacking on skewers that she''s managed to acquire from somewhere. Probably her storage seeing how none of the vendors open till lunchtime. Blondie... Is nowhere to be seen. "Me, where''s Blondie?" This is the second time since her evolution that she''s left the dungeon and I''ve lost track of her. She wasn''t gone for that long last time, but it still makes me panic nonetheless. Me looks around and shrugs before continuing to brush Bear. "She was here a minute ago." "You know why I left them with you, right?" Implying my meaning, I try my best not to say it out loud. The last thing I want is to argue with Violet or Amber. That said, I still need to figure out what jobs they can do whilst I''m supposed to be getting on with my own. There isn''t much they like to do other than what they''re known for. Amber likes to eat, Blondie likes people and Violet only likes Bear. It''s tricky to think of any type of employment they could fit into with those personalities. That''s when I remember that the triplets already have a job. A Dragon''s job. They''re my peacekeepers for Cores'' sake. With how peaceful Varona is, it''s really easy to forget that sometimes. Knowing that, I should just let the triplets do what they do best and be themselves. Amber can be a taste tester. There''s no way in hell she will ever turn down that opportunity and it means she''ll get about. She can hit up the market stalls and visit whichever Ali''s she wants to whenever she wants to. The same almost goes for Blondie. If I leave her to her own devices, hopefully, she''ll just wander around Varona talking to people. If I want them working while I''m working, I''m going to have to settle for letting them out of my sight too. Violet''s a trickier subject. The only place I think she''d be happy would be the stables. There are other animals there and she and Bear can run around as much as they like. Plus anyone entering my city will be greeted by a peacekeeping Dragon and her unique mount. That''s the best I''ve got until I can think of a better position for her. Hopefully, Blondie will be back soon so I can tell her what her job is. That leaves Kolena, but I already know what she''s doing and where she''s going. She''ll be left in the capable hands of Hana and Mira at The Towers of Torture. I''ll also introduce her to Sam and she can alternate between the two locations to check on our prisoners'' status. The spider-infested floor that houses the souls of those orange and above needs less supervision than the towers do. After all, their stay with us are guaranteed to be much longer than those who are closer to the neutral zone. Turning grey is enough to get a person released back into society with the hope that they''ll go on to live a better life. I know. It sounds just like prison. The only difference is your stay is based on how much you actually show repentance for. If someone''s unwillingly to change for whatever reason, their stay either becomes indefinite, or they become dungeon food. Smashed through the cycle with a blank slate and no attachment to the resentment they carried in their past life. Blondie returned while I was caught in thought about Soul Guide and it was good timing. After a little explaining, mostly for Violet''s benefit - the purple Rebellion Dragon feeling as though she''s the only one being lumbered with a proper job, they left for work. I then dropped off Kolena with Hana and Mira before porting off to get on with my own tasks. Mythril bricks. I don''t get very far though and before I know it, I''m in Anya''s office at the Royal Halls of Regeneration drinking tea. Lola, who still happens to be a Black Dragon - the first Black Dragon I summoned no less, is also here. Chilling with the Rainbow Mage at work and relaxing the entire building whilst doing so. "I know, right? I''m telling you now, adventuring was a lot harder than these Assassins make it out to be," I laugh. Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation. We''ve been indulging Lola in stories of the past. They were many and numerous, but quite a few were almost life-or-death situations. Although, those same scenarios would now pose no problems for the current me. It''s just nice to reminisce with my Bestie. I''ve been working hard recently and, since the King''s invasion, I haven''t really had much in the way of time for friendly conversation. Even my nights these days are spent working on skills. "Big sis, Anya," Lola attracts the Rainbow Mage''s attention with her cute little line. The little Dragon stealing her attention doesn''t phase me in the slightest. In fact, it causes my heart to flutter. "I''m hungry." Her words snap me out of my daze as I realize I''m late. The first time in a long time and I''m surprised Amber hasn''t let me know already. Speaking of Amber, her job as a taste-testing, peacekeeping Dragon is probably the reason why she hasn''t informed me. She''s already eating. "I''ll catch ya later, Anya," I smile at my Bestie before waving to Lola who''s holding her sleeve. "Bye Lola. Make sure you eat lots of sweets." I chuckle evilly at Anya before porting to the girls. As expected, Amber is exactly where I left her, but both Blondie and Violet are here. Them being taller now still throws me off a little when I see them, but I suppose they''re still the same as they were and I''m probably just overreacting about this whole Rebellion Dragon thing. I mean, they haven''t acted out yet. Taking a seat beside them, Bear rolls its eyes at me for some reason and I feel as though I''m missing something. Only after Amber has smashed through her first plate do I realize not what it was, but who it is. "For Cores'' sake. I''ll be right back." Ten seconds later I arrive with an eager-looking Kolena in tow. She takes a seat and digs straight into one of the Chef''s specials. She''s clearly taken a liking to our food and it makes me wonder what they eat where she''s from. I don''t like the answer, however, as it hits closer to home reminding me of when I didn''t have a body. "We don''t need to actually consume substance to maintain ourselves. We survive on the mana we absorb from our surroundings." Amber actually stopped eating for a second, casting a horrified glance in Kolena''s direction before shoveling as much food into her mouth as possible. No one''s sending you there, Amber. You don''t have to eat like it''s your last meal. No one commented on what she said and instead continued to eat in silence. Dozens of dishes stacked unevenly in the middle of the table later, it was time to get back to work. Since it wasn''t the triplets'' day to enter the Coliseum, they were also going back to work. That meant that Amber was staying exactly where she was whereas Blondie was going to walk off her meal, greeting everyone while she did so. Violet was headed back to the stables. She must have enjoyed her time there as I didn''t hear her voicing any complaints over lunch. I dropped Kolena off with Hana and Mira before reminding her about dinner and porting away. I really didn''t want to have to go and get her again. Although the first time was entirely my fault for not specifying what time lunch was going to be. It''s easy to forget trivial matters when there are larger games in play. Wanting to somehow skirt my morning meeting being one of them. If only. Instead of working on the roads, the wall or acquiring any more land, I end up in my Core Room. The once-quaint room is now an emperor''s treasure trove. Literally. Scattered amongst the statues of my titled family members and Bosses are more mimics than a person should ever be able to see in one viewing. In the middle is a Mimic three times their size and as golden as they come. With its tongue hanging lazily out of its mouth, saliva flies everywhere as it spins to greet me. Muscular arms appear at its side as it pushes the smaller Mimics out of its way on its path toward me. "Hi, Colin. Looking good buddy. Man," I quickly scan the large room as fast as possible. "I still can''t believe you can create these little cuties, you know? That''s amazing." Around us are thousands of different treasure chests made from a variety of different materials. However, it doesn''t matter how the chests improve as we keep going, none of them are like Colin. The King Mimic swallowed a fragment of my Dungeon Core, forcibly evolving him into what he is today. A panty-snatching drool machine if rumors are to be believed. "Thank you, Master." Colin''s voice is like that of a snake. If snakes could talk that is. It even has the little hiss that comes with their species. "Want some more?" I ask and he bobs up and down, knowing exactly what I''m talking about. He then slaps away a chest that was getting too close for his liking. I summoned him two hundred diamond chests, enough to hopefully keep him busy for a few days. Before bidding farewell and leaving the Core Room, I turn to the Core itself. My heart and the single most important object in my dungeon sits graciously in the middle of the room. I still can''t believe how big it''s gotten. Then again I am looking pretty good on levels these days. My Core looks a lot better now than it did during my fight with the King. Back then it had fractures all over the place and a good chunk had even fallen off. Thankfully, Colin was in the middle of the action and I managed to snag that piece before he did. My one and only Mimic back then had eaten the broken pieces himself becoming the King he is today. I still need to do something with the broken pieces I have in my inventory, but I''m not quite sure what yet. Although I should be thinking about who and not what. It obviously works better on system-classed monsters than it does humans. Maybe I could shortcut the triplets'' evolution? No. Who knows what would happen to them? I was a little anxious when I gave that small shard to Marie. Fortunately, nothing bad happened, not that I considered it would, but nothing truly good came of it either. I should really get on with upgrading the wall, but brick by soul-crushing brick - even with using Creation, it''s slowly sucking the life out of me. There''s only so much boredom a person can take in one day and I need to come up with a way to alter those bricks on a much larger scale fast. Because until that time, I''ve got to keep plugging away one brick at a time. Chapter 115: Return I hate this wall already. Granted, what I''ve already completed looks good, but it''s taking me forever. After trying many different ways to change more than one brick at a time into mythril, I gave up. I don''t get it. I''m even Godly and shit now, but I still can''t seem to do what I want to do. What I want to do is chill the hell out for a bit, but I can''t seem to stop myself from working. I keep going, brick by brick, complaining all the way up until dinner time every single day. After this morning''s debacle, I''ll have to keep track of it myself seeing as how Amber is off timekeeping duty and is at work stuffing her face. Why is her job better than mine? Did I just sign myself up for the shit jobs without realising or something? Even spawning monsters in the forest would be better than this. Maybe I should get Me to switch with me? No, that would be cruel. This job blows so hard that I''d definitely feel cruel delegating it to him. Plus, I''m just over 2/5 of the way there. I''ll be at the gatehouse soon. I''d like to finish the wall myself and not just because I want the credit for building. Once the feature is complete, it won''t need anyone to run or maintain it. Not unless we''re attacked again, that is. It also falls under the jurisdiction of Hana and Mira which means I won''t have to delegate anyone to man it. The Commanders have that covered and all I''ve got to do is finish turning stone to mythril. The project should take me another week to complete if I keep going strong and don''t let myself get distracted. Which is easier said than done around here. Inside the restaurant, the triplets are all seated and so is Kolena. That means I don''t have to go get her myself this time. The little luxuries. It''s a good job I got to enjoy that feeling as less than 60 seconds after sitting down, I''m called away.
Come quick.
I can''t even enjoy a Gods-damn meal these days. Porting to the forest in a huff, I''m met by not only Me, but a new elven unit which I didn''t even notice arriving. Although, there''s so many people that come and go nowadays that I barely check my overview anymore. Unless they''re relatively strong, that is. The unit may be new to us, but their commander isn''t. I remember his face, but his name is gone and is nowhere to be found in my memory. "Welcome back. I can''t help but notice you''ve returned quite quickly. Is there something else we can help you with?" For the life in me I can''t remember the bloody elf''s name and try my best to conversate without actually needing to use it. Feeling foolish, I try my best not to look that way as I smile politely at the elven leader. "Thank you for seeing us so quickly, miss Dungeon Core," he bows. Well, problems accrue fast around here so it''s best to deal with them when they arise. Or at the least, delegate someone else to do whatever it is that needs doing if it''s only a minor task. Unlike the wall... "After informing our King of your battle against the human King as well as the demons, he wishes to hold an audience with you." The elven leader answers. That sounds formal. Hang on. He''s been home, spoke to their King and got back already? How fast are these elves?
Edwan has Space Mages with him so it''s likely they teleported back to their home.
That''s his name! I should have remembered because there are so many bloody Eds.
You couldn''t remember his name? Why didn''t you just ask?
Well, I... I didn''t want to sound foolish.
When would that ever be different than any other time?
Don''t be like that, Me.
Quite. Anyway, you should answer Edwan. He is waiting after all.
True, the elven leader - whose name I now remember, was still waiting for my reply. "Erm... cool. When does he want that?" I heard Me''s sigh in my mind before he muttered something about decorum. Good old Ed, however, was more lenient with me and ignored the fact that I answered like some country hick. This book is hosted on another platform. Read the official version and support the author''s work. "He would like you to visit our home within the month." "What? I can''t visit your King," blurting out my answer, the elves are quite shocked by my reply. Almost as though I''m turning down their King''s invitation, which I''m not. To be honest, I feel quite privileged. It''s not everyday that the rulers of entire species want to get together to parley and shit with me. The only people that associate with me are out-right weirdos. Hopefully this King won''t fit that bill. "Why not? Have we done something to offend you," Edwan''s face sours. "What? No. You guys helped a bunch. Also I''d love to meet your King, I just can''t visit him myself." "Why not?" I thought that my explanation was a little better that time around, but apparently not. Edwan still doesn''t seem to understand why I can''t just go visit his King. Then again, how would he? He isn''t a Dungeon Core. "You know that I''m a Dungeon Core, right?" Edwan nods, "So you know why I can''t go then?" before shaking his head. Damn elves. I''m not in the habit of telling people outside my family secrets about myself. Especially when myself is now a substantial dungeon that controls four major cities. One of which I created myself. That said, if I don''t explain myself properly, Edwan might think I''m just being unreasonable or worse yet that I''m stupid. "As far as we were aware, dungeons can''t create bodies for themselves. Because you happen to possess one and we know nothing else about you, we had assumed you would be able to travel anywhere you liked." Before I can explain myself, Edwan explains himself before I get the chance to. "If only. Listen, Ed. Dungeons do not have it easy. Let me tell you that now. Even myself, as unique as I am, am still bound to the system much the same as yourself. Only mine is a little... awkward," I chuckle. "It took a long time to get this body," I then wonder how long it might take an average Dungeon Core to reach the level I''m at now before realising I''m already getting distracted. "That said. I can''t just go anywhere. I''d like to and that''s kind of the dream, but for the moment I''m only able to move around inside the Ishda province and even here I can''t go everywhere." Edwan looks a little bummed out at my response. Which is good in a way. Better that than an evil grin after just revealing one of my secrets to an elf I don''t really know that well to save face. I''m such an idiot. "Don''t look so sad though. I would truly like to meet with your King. Especially since my last meeting with royalty didn''t go so well." This time Edwan pales a little. I''m not saying that makes me happy, but it''s nice that other actual people know how strong I am. When I was still a human I was just that Rogue. A best friend, a team member, but nothing special. Now, I''m a level 63 Dungeon Core rocking two Godly titles. It''s nice to be noticed. That said I don''t want to be feared or looked at as a potential threat so I better ease the mood. "Not that I go around killing Kings on a daily basis." That didn''t work and Edwan raised an uneasy eyebrow in my direction. "Listen, Edwan. I''m not the best with words. Try as I might, I always seem to put my foot in my mouth. What I''m trying to say is that we should be allies and I''d love to meet your king at a future date. One I just can''t set yet." The elven leader composes himself while coughing into his fist. "Splendid. May I ask if you know when this date will be?" He asks a horrible question that I can''t answer without more information. "I''m not sure. How far away is your city? I mean, how long would it take to reach on foot from here?" "On foot? That journey is a very treacherous one as you would have to pass the Korin mountains to the west. We would be happy to teleport you through with us." Edwan doesn''t understand that if I don''t own it, I can''t go there. Infact, the only possible way for me to visit their lands is by purchasing my way there. Hence why I want to know how long the journey will take. "Thank you, but I must respectfully decline. I have to make my own way there. It''s a... personal matter." Why didn''t I say that earlier? It would have saved me a bit of dignity. Edwan seems a little upset that he can''t persuade me to go with him, but that''s just the way it has to be unfortunately. He''s come all this way to arrange a meeting yet all he''s going to leave with is an unspecified date for the future. Poor guy. It''s not his fault he has to deal with me. "Hey, Edwan. You want to stay for the night? It is dinner time afterall. You could have a good meal, a nice rest and then head out tomorrow." "Thank you, but this time I must decline. Your city is full of humans and our kind have never seen eye to eye." "My city isn''t like anything you''ve ever seen before and I''m telling you now, no one''s going to give a rats ass that you''re all elves. Not with all the other weirdos walking around anyway." Edwan seems confused and I can''t really blame him. It''s not like I can sum up Varona in a few simple sentences. There''s way too much strange shit going on behind the scenes to even know where to start. That said, the perfect starting point would be Eduine and Aura. "You already know that I took Eduine in as you met him on your last visit. Although, I''m quite surprised he stayed in Varona rather than leaving with you. Either way, he''s not the only elf that lives here and my humans don''t care about species discrimination. It''s not food for the soul after all." "Eduine is a good elf and it''s a real shame about what happened to Garten. To be honest though, mistress Dungeon Core, I was only using the humans to avoid this part of the conversation. I''m a little... worried about you." What? That''s not what I was expecting. It''s fair enough though and I understand his reasoning. That doesn''t stop me from moving everyone to Ali''s however. Arriving in the middle of the room the elves take up arms immediately due to the sudden shift in location. A few diners also do the same in retaliation to their sudden interruption. Until they see me that is and calmly sit back down before resuming their meals. I wave at the party still waiting for me at our table and receive only confused stares from three out of the four women. Blondie is the only one happy at my arrival because to her eyes, I''ve brought friends. She''s vibrating on the spot next to me staring a hole into Edwan. The elves put down their weapons and everyone visibly calms down without me having to say a single word. I guess the peaceful vibrations emanating from my Dragons even work on elves. It''s a shame they don''t work on demons though. Chapter 116: Voice-Activated User Notification and Help System After inviting Eduine and Aura - who turned up with Tilly and Kat, to dinner, Edwan and his men settled down even further than the dragons could take them. They weren''t just peaceful anymore they were now understanding. Explaining the situation far better than I did, Aura, Tilly and Kat, explain how relations between species work around here. No hate, no animosity, only jovial neighbours who might happen to turn into Goblins after drinking a Lucinda special. That solicited more than a few raised eyebrows, but was played down after its cooldown time was revealed. In no hurtful way and in the interest of fun, a few patrons had spiked a few ales at Talia''s the other week and half the Tavern had turned green. Not the sickly type but the ugly, little bastard kind. Even with my own aversion to Goblins, I still found the humorous side to that incident. It''s a shame Light''s in Orad because that would have been even funnier. With Aura and Eduine on delegation duty, I got to finish my meal. Blondie was with the elves so it went quite quietly too. I feel like I really deserved that meal. After the elves had been fed, they looked much happier and were more reluctant to stay. Eduine and Katrina took them to get settled at the Privacy Palace where both of them reside. The Inn is a feature that was placed a long time ago. Other than the homeless elf and the apprentice, the building doesn''t see much in the way of special customers other than passing merchants. Everyone else owns their own home and is living the dream. That said, I need to give Kolena her own place. She can''t stay on the tower with us every night. Bear''s one thing, but a Goddess whose title I stole by accident is another. I''ve got to draw the line somewhere. Although, maybe I should offer the same to the triplets? Maybe they don''t want to stay in my tower but are too bashful to say so. No. Maybe it was that way before, but not that they''ve got that pinch of rebellion in them, I doubt that would be the case. Still it''s better to ask. "Since you three are... older? Bigger? Since you''ve evolved, do you want your homes?" I ask while trying to keep my shit together. The girls look at each other before shaking their heads. "Are you trying to kick us out?" Amber looks upset that I asked. Even though I was asking for their benefit. "Why would we want that?" Blondie questions my question which isn''t really helpful. "If it''s because of Bear''s size, he can shrink down. He has a skill for that." Whereas Violet tells me some crucial information that I would have liked to have known before. "No, Amber. I''m not kicking you out. Blondie, I thought you might want more space now you''re growing and you don''t have to go anywhere if you don''t want to. Violet... Why the hell don''t you shrink Bear down at night times if he can do that? I see how much futon you get. You may as well be laying on the floor." "Can I stay in your tower?" From behind, a hopeful voice perks up and I speak before thinking. "No. You get to have your own house, Kolena. No offence, but my tower is only big enough for one God. Thank you very much." That and I might be slightly worried about her stabbing me in the back to reclaim her title. Not that doing so would grant her what she desired. She would have to take out my Core to truly kill me and that isn''t an easy feat. Behind tens of thousands of Goblins, trolls and my family members who prefer sanctuary''s sun to that of the real deal, my Core is safe and sound from potential threats. That said, even if someone managed to invade my dungeon and make it all the way to the bottom, I could move my core to any of the three cities I control. They are now just as much a part of me as everything that dwells below and around the mountain. The former Goddess of Beauty looks a little dejected at my statement, but that''s unfortunate. My tower isn''t big enough to house the egos of Bear, three Rebellion Dragons and a jealous Goddess as well as myself. Hell, it''s hardly big enough for me alone sometimes. After a slow walk to settle my meal, we arrived at Kolena''s house. The single-floor structure looks identical to the rest and she doesn''t seem very pleased with its appearance. Which is tough shit really because we don''t do status or nobility around these parts. If anything, I''m looking to abolish that system completely in a few years. I don''t need to be adding to it now. "You can''t have a bigger building, I''m sorry. Everyone is equal in Varona so you have to live with it." I try to be stern with Goddess, but she pouts and turns to me before saying, "But it''s orange." Oh. Now I get it. The colourless Kolena isn''t happy because of the size or appearance of the feature. Instead, she''s out off by its colour. Like I said, another weirdo. After a quick colour change, the building is a pristine white and Kolena looks delighted. She said nothing, sprinting inside before I could say another word. I mean, white does look good. Maybe I should make the other homes the same? It doesn''t cost me anything to alter their colour after all and I don''t really want Kolena''s building standing out as though she''s better than others. I shout inside to let Kolena know we''ll meet her for breakfast in the morning before porting us to my tower. "First things first. Violet, shrink him." I look towards the purple-haired Rebellion Dragon and she rolls her eyes before doing as I asked. Thank the Core it was that easy. All I want to do is create a little something special for him. Bear''s size shrinks down until he resembles the cub he once was. Unauthorized usage: this tale is on Amazon without the author''s consent. Report any sightings. How cute. No. Don''t get distracted. At which point, I created him his own little futon. Personalised with his own little bear face on it. I know I was just harping on about equality, but Violet''s pet doesn''t really fall into that equation. Not yet anyway. By this point next year, he''ll probably have evolve into some type of stupid bear-man knowing my luck. What will I do if that happens? She damn well can''t go round riding on him in public. Either way, both Bear and Violet are extremely happy with their new sleeping arrangements. Violet gets her own space back and Bear still gets to be comfortable. It would have been solved a long time ago if she would have told me he could shrink down. Amber is laying on her own futon, barely paying attention as she munches out. Even after a full day of eating the redhead still seems to have room for more. Blondie, however, has disappeared once again. The chatty Dragon hasn''t gone far though as I can still sense her. In fact, she''s less than a hundred feet away at the Privacy Palace talking to Edwan. With my triplets taking care of themselves, I decide to spend the rest of my accumulated DP on speed purchasing land. It''ll only be a few hours until the farm fills me up anyway so there''s no need to hold back. With that said, I begin heading west. Buying land and porting to the other side before repeating the action continuously. Through the forest I go out into the open evening of the countryside. Across rivers, fields and farmland, I progress further west than I ever travelled while I was still human. I kept going until there was only a few thousand DP left in the bank. The sun had set and I was exhausted. Not physically, but mentally. The constant acquisitions had taken it out of me and I was ready to hit the hay. Hay! How many times am I going to forget about that damn Bale? With nothing demanding my attention and the idea at the forefront of my mind, I arrive at the Bale of Fortune. The ring of hay bales I placed around the feature are still standing strong and give the solitary bale in the middle a little oomph... Alright, it''s just hay sitting around more hay, but after it''s last and only upgrade all the bale did was marginally increase in size. I had to do something. At least this way you have to walk inside to pray to the Lord of Hay. Putting my best foot forward, I walk through the opening and place my hand on the featureless feature. Silently, I cast a prayer. After a few seconds of waiting and no new notifications from Sis, I voice my wish instead. "I wish I had Divinity''s Sight." Still nothing. No genie lord. No notifications. Just me standing alone in a circle of hay talking to myself. I still hate this feature. Why is it so damn awkward? Everything else does exactly what they say they do in their descriptions. This thing though...
The Bale Of Fortune: Any animal fed this Hay can keep running four-times longer than normal permanently Any animal fed this Hay will be able to walk on water permanently Any trade deals negotiated in or with your city will be 50% more beneficial to you Those who offer a prayer to the Bale of Fortune before departing your city will be blessed with bountiful luck and see a 75% increase to their spoils The Lord of Hay may grant wishes to the pure of heart Unique Skill: Immortality
Don''t get me started on how the Bale of Fortune is Immortal. That''s something I still can''t wrap my head around. Coincidentally, Immortality is one of the skills I see while testing my skills at night. Unsurprisingly, my own version is still level one and I have no idea how to use it. Not that I''ve put any effort into trying, but you would have thought after having three bodies destroyed during the war - my soul being in each and every one of them, that it would have at least hit level two. Either way, in its description the word wishes is clearly written down. Not wish, but wishes. Plural. Also, it''s not like I''ve suddenly had a change of heart. I''m still trying to save the Gods damn world after all, so where the hell is my Divinity''s Sight? Stop being so shady Lord of Hay and grant my damn wish. After a few more unsuccessful attempts, I gave up in defeat. I really do hate this feature. It doesn''t upgrade properly and it doesn''t function correctly either. It''s just a piece of junk. Honestly, I wish being a Dungeon Core was easier sometimes.
Dungeon Protocol 2 has been initiated: Voice-Activated User Notification and Help System is being implemented...
Aww fuck off. It hasn''t said so, but I know damn well that my last unspoken wish is being carried out by the Lord of Hay right now. Funnily enough, I''m sure I''ve seen that user notification system message somewhere before. I just can''t remember where. All of a sudden Sis starts shouting across the dungeon link. Demanding to know what I''m doing to her as I''m forcing programs to bend to my will. Not that any of it''s intentional. All I wanted was Divinity''s Sight and I''m pretty sure that''s not what I''m getting.
Error... A Voice-Activated User Notification and Help System has already been attached to the current Dungeon Core New system is unable to merge with host Protocol aborted
That was rather anticlimactic. Guess I''m not getting whatever that system was then. Although, it did say I already have one. Nevermind, it would probably be more work knowing this thing.
The Lord of Hay is rewriting current System parameters... Please wait...
Er... Not only is Sis still begging to know what''s going on, but Me has also decided to chime in. Neither of them are helping me read the flowing text though, so I blank them out to keep going.
Reconfiguration in progress... System designation: Error... Rectifying... System designation: Sis (Type one dungeon creation and betterment system) Owner: Abi, Goddess of The Dungeon, Goddess of Beauty, Goddess of the Hay Voice-Activated User Notification and Help System has been found Editing parameters...
I started to get a little worried at that point as Me was getting louder and louder. Almost drowning out sis who was now screaming about me being impossibly infuriating. That''s my line. And what the hell is that title about?
... New parameters have been defined and accepted Measures have been put in place to accommodate for new subsystems and a second Voice-Activated User Notification and Help System
Now I remember what that system is. Its infuriatingly long name reminds me of the time I had no body and was a wailing wreck. At the very beginning of my second life there was a help system that helped guide me through my depression. It helped explain the ins and outs of dungeon''in all while taking the brunt of my foul mood and attitude. How could I possibly forget the crazy bastard shouting over our link? How could I forget about Me? Chapter 117: You Let''s be honest. Even though Me and Sis were screaming at me through our link, I wasn''t the best thrilled either. Instead of gaining the ability to view statuses that are currently outside of my capabilities, I''m getting a second bloody assistant. At this point, Assistant A has no guidance left to offer as we''re way beyond the need for a new starter''s guide. I can only sigh as a new voice pops into existence inside my mind.
Hello... Dungeon Core Abi. I am your Voice-Activated User Notification and Help System. I see that your dungeon already has... 69 floors. Go you.
Go me? Never mind the fact that Assistant B sounds like a cool-ass chick, I like her already. Damn right, go me. I''m killing this dungeon game.
However, out of your... 499 rooms and 912 tunnels, I see 1657 alterations that could be made.
Gods Damn it Hay Bale! Through our connection, I hear Assistant A laughing his ass off. That isn''t funny in the slightest, so I don''t know what you''re laughing for, I tell him before arriving next to him. "What?" Our roles reversed, I''m now the smug one as Me looks panicked at my arrival. "Why do you look so worried, Me?" I ask as an identical version of myself appears next to us. "What''s that for?" He asks in trepidation. "Oh, this? This is for You," I smile as I rip Assistant B from my soul before stuffing it in the empty clone. "I don''t want that. Take it back." "Yeah, no. I already told you, Me. This is for You. And You is now your problem." As understanding flashes behind his eyes, the stand-alone version of myself opens her eyes. "Dungeon Core Abi, what... What have you done to me?" "Don''t worry about it, You. Me here, will explain everything," I smile at You, Assistant B, who is going to be left in the capable hands of Me. "I most certainly will not. Why do I have to look after her?" "Honestly? It will be easier coming from you. With you both being subsystems and all." "Don''t talk like you know everything now, Abi. And just so you know that excuse is bullshit at best," I can''t deny it "but I will take her under my wing and teach her how you... Operate." "You don''t need to sound so sinister when you say it. Plus, I do some good work and you damn well know it." "Quite. Anyway, You," Assistant B turns to Assistant A and bows. "Yes, first assistant, Me." I can''t hide my smile as Me throws an irritated glance my way before I decide it''s time to leave. Retiring for the night and forgetting my problems is the easiest way to get to sleep which is exactly what I do. I ignore the fact that Bear has returned to his larger size and is taking up 90% of Violet''s futon. Closing my eyes like I''m the only person in the world, I drift off to sleep. Thankfully no Gods, Systems or other types of soul-jacking entities visit me at night and my sleep is good. So good in fact, that I wake up later than usual and the triplets are already gone. Stretching out, I let out a content yawn before wiping my eyes. Feeling good, I arrange my cuddlies and port to the girls. It''s breakfast time. At Ali''s, Violet, Amber, Blondie and Kolena are seated next to Me and You. That''s what I get for ignoring problems and sleeping through them. "Me, You," I greet them as I sit down. "To what do I owe the pleasure of this visit." "Well, since you eloquently dumped You on me and ran away, I have been listening to her dungeon suggestions. I thought she would be the same as me, but I couldn''t have been more wrong. She thinks completely differently than I do, although you may play some part in that somewhere. It''s hard to tell with you." This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report. "You?" I ask him with a smile as my breakfast arrives. "Don''t start that. We could be here all day." "Don''t be silly. There isn''t a ''We'' yet." No laughs? Tough crowd. "Quite. Anyway, You has some good ideas that I think will help not only the dungeon grow, but the humans as well. She has quite a few of them though so this may take some time." This is the last thing I want to listen to over breakfast. Especially when the boring-as-hell meeting takes place right after it, I can already see this turning out to be a long day. "Does she really need me to listen to it all though? If you''ve heard her ideas and think they''re worth implementing, surely I don''t need to hear them too." I''m certain he''s just trying to get me to sit through a lecture because I dumped You on him. Fortunately, subsystem B, a.k.a You, is the same as Me below her human exterior. Able to utilise more dungeon functions than the average member, she will actually be a pretty helpful addition to my family. "You," I address her directly. "Yes, Dungeon Core Abi?" I used to hate the name she replied with. I remember when Me called me that in the beginning. Even now the memory sends shivers up my spine. "First of all, just Abi will do. You don''t need to keep pronouncing the Dungeon Core part. Just address as Me does. Also, would a budget of five thousand points per day be enough to make the changes Me spoke of?" "It would be more than enough. Most alterations don''t even require the use of your DP. I can save or use what''s left over each day to add more floors and monsters to meet your specifications of helping Tironians advance." "That... does sound pretty good actually. In that case, You, I am officially placing you in charge of dungeon alterations. Please try not to kill too many humans. They will take much longer to advance if they have to go through the reincarnation cycle again." Not that I know how long they are going to take. It''s roughly been a year and a half since I acquired Soul Guide and we haven''t passed the second stage of positive souls yet. Even then, the people whose souls shine blue barely number a hundred. Greens - the first step and colour on the path to ascension, number in the thousands. More crop up every day in Varona showing that even though I''m bumbling, I''m getting shit done. It''s an achievement I''m extremely proud of as I barely know how it happened myself. It''s been a long time since I personally went through the cycle and was reincarnated myself, but it seems to have flown by so quickly. "Yes, Abi. I will try my best to level these people up so that they can grow and ascend." Hopefully, this will be another one of those jobs that has the perfect person delegated to it. Nobody knows dungeons better than the help feature. I might have had some tricky moves up my sleeves that stupefied Me, but I''ve long since run out of those. Seriously. The only things up my sleeves right now are exhaustion and frustration. What I should do is dedicate a day where nobody does a damn thing. Well, maybe not nothing, but a day they can do whatever they want. No work or chores, unless you''re that way inclined that is. No tedious dungeon tasks. Just a single day where I can... where we get to do fuck all. Lazing around all day in the sun on top of my tower... Ok, that one''s me, but screw it. I need a break. It''s been all-go recently and these days you can never tell when something unexpected is just going to shove its head into your domain. Or vice versa. One day isn''t too much to ask for. It would even help my points build up. Fair enough that means nothing in the grand scheme of things, it doesn''t matter when I spend them really and it''s just another way of trying to talk myself into a day off. I do deserve it though. I''m sure I do. There was the King and the demons. The elves and Marie the wannabe Assassin grandma. The triplets and Kolena. The elves again. Then finally there was You and the bloody Hay Bale. Ok, it''s the Bale of Fortune now, but that damn piece of hay is so bloody temperamental it''s beyond a joke. Even when it''s sort of helpful. Maybe I should upgrade it again? Not that I currently have enough to upgrade the stupid feature, but even if I did, what am I thinking? Asking for wishes is one thing, but it won''t be long before the Bale of fortune will cost over one-hundred thousand points to upgrade. A truly ridiculous figure for a cursed piece of dry plant plant matter that may not change in any way. As it stands, the unpredictable feature will cost me just over five thousand points if I want to try my luck. That said, if it fails the next attempt will cost over ten thousand. Then twenty, forty, eighty before finally one hundred and sixty thousand fucking dungeon points. I daren''t think about anything after that because it''s already crazy as hell. Especially when you consider the fact that Talia''s Tavern, One For The Rogues'', only cost me three hundred and twenty DP total. In fairness though the Bale of Fortune has been subject to a lot more points than any of my other features have. What was a dumping ground for excess DP in my constant need to upgrade the feature has backfired in a sense as it now costs a small fortune to even attempt. "Are you seriously going to leave You in charge of the dungeon? I know that I said she had some good ideas, but I didn''t expect you to palm the whole thing off on to her. There''s only so much you can delegate, Abi." Me interrupts my gloomy thoughts and for once I''m actually quite relieved. "Yeah, why not? I think you misunderstand what delegation means, Me. I''m pretty sure it means putting individuals that are better suited to certain tasks than myself into those positions." We argue the semantics of delegation over the course of breakfast. The triplets and Kolena leave to begin their day''s work and I feel slightly bad. I barely spoke to them this morning as I too caught up with You and Me. Not that I changed my mind. You is now in charge of dungeon management and has a small budget of five thousand DP a day. Me wasn''t impressed, but I told him I''d keep an eye on her. I also told him he had to do the same. More so than me in fact because she was his responsibility. He was her senior after all. It was sort of his job to take care of, guide and nurture his junior colleague. Especially since the whole premise of my dungeon was bat-shit crazy. I mean, I own four cities for Core''s sake. I can literally hide my Dungeon Core in someone''s attic if needs be. Not that I expect I''ll need to be, but the point still stands. That''s how weird it is. I take strolls in the countryside while purchasing the land around me and have inter-dimensional meetings with Gods. None of which are planned, expected or appreciated by the way. There''s all that more. "She definitely needs a more capable senior to fill her in," I chuckle as Me turns red and I port off to my meeting. The pun is likely to be the only source of entertainment I have this morning. Chapter 118: Rebellion? For two days in a row now, I''ve been the person with the most to say at our morning meetings. Usually, I just nod along and keep my mouth shut. My family being so capable and all. It''s definitely nothing to do with the fact that it''s early and I''m still tired. Then again, I''ve never been a morning person. Not that I''ll tell them that fact. I''d feel bad if they pushed back the meetings I originally scheduled for this time just because a certain Dungeon Core can''t hack it. That''s probably why I''m frustrated over the fact that I have to participate more than I usually would. Seriously, it''s more like I''m updating them rather than it being the other way around. Especially when nothing much has changed since yesterday. The only difference to the meeting, besides my run down on You, is that Randy the Ringmaster replaced Mystique and Coral in the additional spot. The Headmaster and her assistant gave me some wonderful news yesterday regarding our Space Mage programme and I''m hoping that in the near future, we''ll have a small battalion of them trained up. Not that I put the most confidence in humans, but my gut tells me I''m going to need them at some point in the future. Marie is fantastic, but it''s been proven that she isn''t strong enough to handle certain situations by herself. She is only human after all. With a battalion of mages following her command though, that portal would have been closed much faster. Hana and Mira informed me that Kolena was an excellent addition to the reformation team. Thanks to her sight, the Goddess can see the best options to clear souls of their corruption. I knew she''d do well in that department and hopefully, You will also perform as capably in the dungeon. I can''t see her not doing well though. She''s a bloody dungeon subsystem - or at least that''s what my notifications tell me, so she better do a good job. Otherwise, I''ll have to find someone else to replace her. When the time for Randy to speak finally arrives, the Ringmaster stands up and bows. His voice is then broadcast around the table by the connection we share through my dungeon. Seeing as how he doesn''t have a mouth, that''s the way he always communicates. "The first Rebellion Dragon is ready to evolve." Oh My Self! His voice is like music to my ears and I jump up from my seat with a loud "Yes!" Mayor Kana is startled back into consciousness as it would seem she was falling asleep. I''d have something to say about that if I wasn''t so excited by Randy''s news. Way to go, Becca. "Where is she?" I ask, ready to end the meeting there, before checking her location myself. "At the Daycare. She has no more training scheduled until after her evolution. Instead, the triplets are booked in for her spots today." Even better. Randy''s killing the leveling game and I didn''t even notice. I knew he was doing a good job, but he''s actually on the ball. Today might turn out to be quite a good day after all. With the meeting finished - not just because I wanted it to be, but because Randy was the last speaker and had said all he had to say, Becca''s evolution jumped to number one on today''s to-do list, trumping everything else by miles. I can''t wait. The elven delegate Edwan, on the other hand, can. So too can my usual job of improving the wall and I arrive at the Dragon Daycare faster than Amber gets to Ali''s. Chanting her name in my head as I reach the building, the sound of drums can be heard as I step inside. Becca''s had a thing for that drum kit and even though I praised her growing skill on my last visit, she still wasn''t interested in what I had to say. I don''t think it''s her fault though. It has something to do with the fact that she was summoned directly as a Rebellion Dragon. The triplets are nowhere near as snappy, nor are they prone to the same outbursts that plague Becca. Following the beat of the drum, I find my target in the lounge. Instead of unintentionally making her cause a scene by saying the wrong thing, the only word I speak is her name, "Becca?" With her back towards me, the drumming stops and her hand hangs in the air. Slightly shaking, the soft glow enveloping her body leaves small afterimages as I wait for a response. I can''t help but be proud that she''s made it this far, even with what we''ve both endured. I''m then subjected to the world''s harshest glare as Becca stands up and turns to face me. This is hard. I take a deep breath to stop myself from overreacting and watch her do the same. It must be tough for her, being forced to be that way. What''s my excuse? "Are you ready?" I ask full of anticipation only for it to be burst by an eye roll. It''s really hard. "I''ll take that as a yes then. Here we go." I activate her evolution and watch as she glows brighter, growing an extra foot as she does. Once the light fades, the first change that captures my attention is her eyes, ruby red and pure gorgeous. Silk-like hair reaches the bottom of her back and is reminiscent of Mythril.
Rebecca the Rebellion Dragon has evolved into The Oncoming Storm: A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. Hell hath no fury like a dragon scorned. Unpredictable, uncontrollable and a force of nature all on her own, there will never be another like Rebecca as she is unique to herself. At any time she may appear, causing calamity and destruction in her wake. Fear the power of nature as its unstoppable rage decimates everything in its path.
"That doesn''t sound like it''s gotten any better at all! What the hell was that, Sis?" The culprit in the corner responsible for the flavour text must have eaten a whole bag of onions recently because I could cry after reading that. Seriously. This is why I was always giving you the stick! "I thought that''s what you wanted? Cool descriptions and clever wording." I... May have said something along those lines, a long time ago, but things have changed now. However, even if I did say that, it isn''t like I asked for Calamity and Destruction. I thought we were supposed to be helping people. "What happened to that peaceful vibe they had going? I liked that one." As I talk about her, Becca is checking herself out. She looks damn good, even if I am slightly jealous that she''s taller than me. "She still has the effect," Sis answers as though I should already have known. "So what''s with the calamity, destruction and unstoppable rage then?" I can barely contain myself and it isn''t even Becca who''s vexing me. The culprit, however, looks away like I haven''t just asked her a super important question. "I suppose it doesn''t matter anyway," I sigh, returning my attention to The Oncoming Storm. The beauty dungeon strikes again. Already beautiful? Don''t worry about it, you can come for an upgrade instead. "Are you ok, Becca?" The Dragon in question is inspecting her hands. She looks... Happy? I hope that''s how she looks when she''s happy. Lifting her head, the first smile I''ve ever seen Becca show spreads across her face. I want to reciprocate the gesture, but I''m still nervous as hell because of the problem Dragon''s flavour text. What if I say the wrong thing and she burns Varona down? Not that it would come to that. I''m pretty sure we''d be able to contain her before she got passed the daycare. Still, I''m anxious as hell. My heart jumps as The Oncoming Storm rushes straight towards me. Before I can react, the ruby-eyed monster picks me up and squeezes tight. For a moment, I can''t help but panic, unsure whether Becca is trying to crush me in a death grip or not until I settle into her arms. "That''s so nice," I muffle between her bosom, letting myself relax in her embrace. We stand like that for a while until she finally lets me out. "I''ve wanted to do that for so long," tears run down her cheek. "Don''t start crying, you''ll get me going," I smile as Sis chirps in from behind me. "See, I told you it would be fine." She places a hand on my shoulder and smiles like she knew this would happen all along. I can''t help but glare at her, the same way Becca used to glare at me. "You said nothing of the sort. In fact, if you knew what was going to happen, why didn''t you tell me beforehand?" I still can''t get over Sis. She''s a right pain in my ass sometimes. Then again, she wouldn''t be who she is if she wasn''t like that. As I look at the freshly upgraded Oncoming Storm, it breaks my heart that I have to go and deal with a bunch of stupid elves instead of spending time with her. Although we''ve barely spoken -and even when we did it never went well, I feel a strong connection with Becca, the same as the triplets. "So, listen. I''ve got to go deal with those elves that arrived yesterday, but after that, I think it''s time that me and you got to know each other better." Still wrapped in Becca''s arms, I have to stop myself from chuckling as the image of Me and You entered my mind. "I would like that very much, Master." Releasing me fully, the once problematic child bows to me in agreement and my Core flutters. She likes it! Yes. Now I can''t wait. I''ll just speedily send the elves on their way with my promise of visiting soon. They said a month would be fine, but I''m still not sure where they live. Even after all my acquisitions yesterday, I went as far west as I could before running out of points and saw no sign of elves. I''ll have to get some solid directions when I''m kicking them out. Then, I can get back and hang out with Becca. Here we go. Edwan and the elves are no longer at the Privacy Palace and have moved on to Ali''s. Even though the time is between breakfast and lunch, The Chef caters for anyone regardless of the time or reason. Seated inside, the elves are all enjoying the local cuisine as I arrive. Amber is obviously here too, exuding peace over the entire establishment. You couldn''t be annoyed by her hungry face if you wanted to. Before I''m able to speak to the elf in charge, Aura enters Ali''s and orders a snack box from the counter. Edwan seems to be shocked at the appearance of yet another elf, which is unexpected as he''s already met with Eduine, and begins whispering with his men. It would have been within the norm to say they were taken in by her beauty, but that''s not what was happening. Edwan was whispering something in elvish that - oddly enough, I happened to partially understand. Strange. It might have something to do with the fact that I''ve absorbed an elf or two in my time that''s helping me understand their language, but I can''t comprehend everything they''re saying. Maybe that''s because I don''t have their species unlocked in my summon section. I still need to absorb one more elf for that to happen. The requirements for unlocking races and their classes are much different from that of monsters and beasts. Either way, that''s not what''s important. What is important, is what I just overheard. Princess Aura? What the hell? I won''t say anything about it though, or at least I''ll try not to. That''s a bomb I''d rather avoid and I''m sure she has her reasons for not mentioning the fact that she''s royalty. Then again, I can''t believe the human and elf running the city''s support groups are a Catergoriser and a Princess. That is random as hell. "Ahem," I cough into my hand, stealing Edwan''s attention away from his men and the missing princess. "Edwan, I think that I''ll be able to meet your King after all." Eduine smiles at the unexpected turn of events. It was only yesterday I had turned him down after all. "Are we all going?" Blondie asks from behind me, causing me to jump. She''s not alone either as Violet and Bear are accompanying the little ninja making me wonder why Amber is the only one still working. Then again if Blondie comes, I have no doubt that she''ll end up working overtime along with her sister. "Sure," I answer after composing myself. "I''m pretty confident that the elven lands will have some tasty food for Amber to try out also." This catches the attention of the hungry triplet at the table. A good meal being the sole reason she lives her life day in day out. "Can we bring Bear?" I knew that was coming and quickly asked Eduine, who nodded politely in response. "We revere most animals in the forest. Especially the mighty bear," he then tells the triplet. The mention of her partner''s name and species, not to mention the whole revering part, had the third triplet hooked. With that in mind, I made sure to get sound directions from Edwan before leaving him in the company of the peaceful Rebellion Dragons. I was also looking forward to reaching the elven capital and enjoying some time off whilst there. I damn well need it. Chapter 119: The Dragon And The Dungeon Becca is the best. Gone is the perpetual teenager to make way for adulthood. She talks to me. She listens to me. She even has her own opinions that she tells me. No scowls, eye rolls or irritated huffs and no storming off to smash the drums. However, The Oncoming Storm can still belt out a banging beat as she showed me. Listening to her play and watching her excitement as I did so was heartwarming. Watching my Dragons grow, as I do with everything I summon, makes me feel motherly and proud. Or at least these are the feelings I''m attributing to that occurrence. I didn''t have children of my own when I was still human as I was in the prime of my life and what I have now are the closest examples to it I''ll ever have, so why not? Everyone I''ve summoned - the people I call family are exactly that, my family. Daughters and sons in the thousands. No, in the tens of thousands. Damn, I''ve been busy. Damn. I should have told that one to Me. Never mind, I''ll tell him later. Speaking of Me, he and his sister, as well as their annoyingly childish, third cousin removed Sis, are more like extended family members. Sub-siblings if you will. I didn''t exactly create them per s¨¦ and you can be damned if you think I''m calling Sis, Mom! Fuck that. I don''t need a bat-shit crazy person like that as my parental point of authority. Hell to the no, not happening. Bringing my focus back to Becca as she finishes her solo, I applaud loudly before looking to my left. Sis is clapping away too, but in a less-than-gracious fashion. Yeah, no. She''s definitely the third cousin removed. Maybe even the fifth. "I can''t believe how good you are on those drums. I''ll have to make a special set for you if you''re good." "I''m not a child anymore, Mother." Oh my Core. Did she really just say that? Don''t cry. Don''t cry, Abi. "O-Of course not. I don''t know what I was thinking. I just... Missed your early moments because you hated me." "I didn''t hate you. It was difficult for me to control my emotions. I wanted your love. I just... Couldn''t stand it at the same time." Yeah. Hate sort of fits the bill, there, Becca. "We''re past that now anyway, so don''t worry." After the others have passed that phase, there will never be another Rebellion Dragon again so there won''t be any more worries on that front. "Anyway. I was thinking that once I''ve reached the elven capital, we can have a holiday of sorts. Me, you and the triplets. What do you think?" I pose the question in slight anticipation but am relieved at her response. And slightly shook. "That sounds wonderful, Mother. Just the five of us?" "And Bear. Violet doesn''t go anywhere without her mount and the elves have already permitted her to bring him. Amber is looking forward to eating them out of their reserves and Blondie can''t wait to find out everything there is to know about elves. To be honest, those three will probably end up doing their own thing leaving me and you to bond," I pause as words get trapped in my throat. "M-mother and d-daughter, time." I flush. Is it hot in here? Must be all the Dragons in the Daycare. "That sounds amazing. I can''t wait." Becca takes me in her arms and holds me tight. Not tight enough that I can''t move and I reciprocate the gesture and what it stands for. The Oncoming Storm is almost as happy as I am now that we can finally talk without the awkwardness. That said, I have other things to get on with and can''t spend the rest of my day with her. Or can I? "Come on, Becca," I say before grabbing her hand and porting away. The contact is unneeded, but it made it seem like we were escaping from Sis'' evil clutches so it was cool as hell. I saved the maiden from the malevolent system of childishness and begrudgery. Although the maiden might not have wanted to come to the semi-finished wall that was next on my to-do list. Erm? "Mom? Why are we here?" Oh my Core, her words keep giving me goosebumps. "I just thought I''d bring you with me today, but I''m now realising that my jobs aren''t the most glamorous." I let her know what I was thinking, silly as it is. "I know what work you do. Sis told me. All of it is important. That''s why everyone tries their best to follow your example." Becca throws me off with her statement. I honestly thought it was the other way around. I was putting in more effort recently so that it didn''t seem like I was slacking off compared to the rest of my family. Yet Becca says they''re working that hard to follow my example? This tale has been unlawfully lifted without the author''s consent. Report any appearances on Amazon. How did they manage to come to that conclusion? Surely they don''t all think that? If they do, maybe I''m giving them a little bit too much credit. "Sure?" I answer with as much confidence as I can muster. "We can do something else today if you want. It''s not like the wall will be finished anytime soon and what points I don''t spend now will just go on more land later so it''s no biggie." "I don''t mind watching you improve the wall," just hearing those words suck the life out of me. Why can''t I upgrade these damn bricks any faster? My mind drifts to Aura. The Elf that had once played prisoner to another of her kind. How does a princess end up in that situation? Also, from what I''ve heard, the power-crazed elf wasn''t her first owner either. Still, that''s an Aura problem and potentially a problem for future Abi. Although it might not be. It would be great if Edwan just managed to forget he''d seen her. A quick check of my overview shows that that''s not the case and before I can stop myself, The Oncoming Storm and the world''s only momma Dungeon Core arrive to help one of her adopted children. That''s what I''m rolling with for contracted monsters. Although Aura is anything but a monster and, technically, she might be older than I am if you include the time skip. However, that elf''s got game and I''m surprised she doesn''t have suitors lining the street professing their love for her. Then again, a princess''s standards must be quite high. Outside Ali''s, as Aura and the elven procession don''t get far, every elf other than the redheaded soothsayer is on their knees. Aura looks more embarrassed than we do as myself and Becca stand witness to yet another of Varona''s strange spectacles. Realistically, I shouldn''t even be surprised. It''s probably about that time that princesses make their way into my life, right? Wrong! That''s the last thing I want. Peace and tranquillity are what I damn well need, but where are they? I shouldn''t have disappeared earlier after overhearing the elves and to be honest I don''t know what I was thinking. I was just pumped to spend some quality time with Becca but look where that got me. Elves revering other elves in a predominantly human city. Not that it irks me and if anything I''m happy with how well our equality and diversity plan is going as other people stop to watch. Not with scornful glares or racist attitudes, but out of curiosity. In any other city - well, any other human city I should say, this act would at least be frowned upon. Humans and elves, for reasons that are lost on me, have been at each other''s throats for centuries. Only in Varona can you find both species mingling with each other merrily. Not to forget the street-strolling human-turned-goblins or the Dragons peacefully occupying the sky above. As I make my way to Aura, she utilises the dungeon connection and asks me to stop. Wanting to handle her own business will get no complaints from me. Hell, I''m all about that. Unless the person handling them is me that is. Crack on, girl. In elvish, Aura speaks a single line out loud to the whole procession. Immediately after, Edwan and his men stand up and immediately take their leave. Not fully understanding their language, I didn''t catch every word she said but the gist was, "Get lost or else I''ll see you demoted so low you''ll wish you never saw me." Or something like that. Either way, it was enough that they decided to head home faster than planned and that was the end of that. We didn''t even need to show up really. Still, it was quite a spectacle watching Edwan bolt off like that, poor guy. Aura smiles at Becca and me before going about her day. Edwan and his troops do nothing to knock the free spirits'' confidence, even after outing her as a royal. Then again, it''s not like humans can speak elvish so she probably thinks she''s in the clear. I''ll ignore the fact that I can partially understand the language of the elves. I could do without Aura being all huffy about me knowing her secret. It''s not like I''m going to tell anyone. Yeah, I''ll certainly keep that one to myself. "So, Becca. What shall we do then? I''m not really feeling wall upgrades now. Is there anything you want to do?" Watching Aura disappear around the corner, more than likely off to another one of her meetings, I ask my doting daughter to think up an activity for us. She thinks it over before replying," Well, I haven''t been flying in a while and I haven''t even transformed since my evolution. Maybe we could try that?" "That''s not a bad idea," I reply while moving the two of us outside Varona''s wall. I''m rather curious to see if there are any differences after her last upgrade. So far all the dragons are black when they transform into their larger form, probably because they all originate from the Black Dragon that I absorbed. Still, it would be nice to get some aerial diversity going on. "Alright. Let''s see what you''ve got, Becca." On my go, The Oncoming Storm grows larger. Her skin pales before turning completely white and streaks of purple lightning run down her limbs. On top of her head, horns protrude from her skin in the shape of a crown. Now that''s royalty I get behind. Once she''s finished growing, Becca is taller than the wall surrounding my city. Monstrously tall and I almost can''t believe my eyes. As she unfurls her gigantic wings my jaw drops in awe. Running down the thin membrane are hundreds of neon thunderbolts. Not still patterns, but magical symbols moving through her anatomy. I''m lost for words as I stare at the largest of my daughters. She''s so big that I could have parked her in front of the demon''s portal and that would have been the end of that. Either that or she could have opened her mouth by the entrance and had an all-you-can-eat buffet. "Climb on, Mother," she says through our link, her voice is the same soft tone as her human self, belaying what one would expect from her much larger appearance. Not that I even notice. I''m floating on air right now. Me! Ride a Dragon? Fuck yeah, I will. I don''t waste time climbing however and I port to the centre of Becca''s head in a flash. The crown of horns is like my own personal enclosure from where I can view the world. As soon as I''m on, Becca pushes off with her mighty wings and in seconds we''re barrelling through the sky at insane speeds. I wasn''t prepared for that. Nor was I prepared for what happened right after, but then again, when am I ever? Becca was moving so fast that before I could shout about the incoming barrier, the invisible walls that dictate where I can and can''t go, she flew straight through it. I''m not averse to trying new things, but being knocked out of my own body as it continues on a joy ride through the sky with my daughter was not a pleasant feeling. The body I created for myself, as with every other I summon, can leave the dungeon-owned land a piece of cake. I, however, can not and it puts a little downer on my day. Not enough to make me inform Becca of the awkward happenstance. The Oncoming Storm is enjoying herself too much, flying in and out of the areas I own and enjoying the childhood she missed out on. What a cutie. Chapter 120: Putting You To Work Eventually, Becca realised something was wrong on her own. The lifeless corpse on her head not responding, or making any attempt to move, was the main sign. I had to tell her. Poor girl. She was so upset after hearing what happened. Not that it was anything bad. It''s a strange experience being forced out of your own body, but it doesn''t hurt. Plus, after she transformed back into her human form and my body hit the ground, I was able to jump straight back into the over-powered vessel. No biggie. That was it for Becca though. She felt bad and wanted some time to herself for reflection. Bless her. The fact that she cares and can now show me that, makes me super proud. Sis had a good laugh at my expense when she found out what happened, so I shrunk her tower down two floors. That gave me a good laugh. Afterwards and still putting off the wall renovations, I had a quick check on how You was doing in the dungeon. She works fast and already every Goblin floor has been altered to accommodate the differences between our daily challengers. New pathways have been put into place that lead to different sections. Each one features a sign next to it describing the difficulty posed to adventurers. There''s even more helpful information below which You added in. It details recommended party sizes, the amount of enemies expected on that route and more. Pretty ingenious if I do say so myself. I knew the Lord of Hay would pull through. Ok that''s bullshit and I know it, but all''s well that ends well, right? Either way, I''m going to have to get You to do the same thing to the dungeon outside Orad. Detailed signs about knowing what to expect is a pretty damn good idea. Especially when there are parties that still refuse to venture inside with a guide. Still, we don''t refuse them as everyone has the right to come inside me. "You," I call out as I enter the dungeon. My clone appears and bows elegantly as she greets me in return. I can''t help but think that I already like You more than Me. Not only due to her lovely demeanor and attitude, but because she''s a downright babe. "Hi, You. So, I''ve got a few plans if you have a minute." Of course she does. The Dungeon isn''t going anywhere. That said it might take some time to hammer out details and it''s almost lunchtime. In that case... Taking hold of You''s hand, I cast Divinity''s Domain. I haven''t brought anyone else into my private world yet and if I''m honest I wasn''t sure whether or not it would work. Then again I did summon the bumbling duo into another Goddess'' domain so why I wasn''t doubting myself I have no idea. However, you never know what you''re capable of until you try. Varona is living proof of that. The joke of Sis labeling my creation as a bandit hideout couldn''t be any further from that statement. Growing larger than I ever thought possible, even if I hadn''t acquired any other cities yet Varona will still see me through just fine. Over sixty thousand DP a night is just ridiculous. I love it, but it doesn''t make it any less ridiculous. However, coupled with the same amount coming in from Ishda alongside roughly thirty thousand each from Orad and Tune, I''m rolling in points. At this point I could even stop expanding if I wanted too. Stop trying to acquire more, stop trying to be more, just stop. But honestly... I don''t want to. Not now. I want more. I want my Dungeon Core to be as big as the damn Coliseum. Bigger in fact. I want it to be so large that it becomes unbreakable. That will only happen if I keep pushing on and world domination is the best goal to follow in that regard. That and ridding Tironia of its corruption of course. Can''t forget about Soul Guide. I hadn''t noticed until recently, but I gain a modicum of experience every time a soul is corrected. The amount is nothing substantial and is about as much as a feature upgrade reward, but it''s still something. Slow and steady wins the race after all. "Ok, You. Listen up." The soul that houses my sub-systems consciousness is not actually listening. Instead, she is taken back by the beauty of my domain. My own personal space is still in the same design that it was after I had overtaken Kolena''s own. Meadows stretch as far as the eye can see and there isn''t a cloud in the sky. The author''s tale has been misappropriated; report any instances of this story on Amazon. Divinity''s Domain is an amazing skill. I can alter any aspect of the world inside it just like I would my dungeon. All it takes is a single thought and the world shapes around my will. Filling the sky with thunderstorms or turning the ground barren is as simple as spawning wildlife, fauna or anything else that springs to mind. I give You a moment to collect herself as I too take a second to appreciate my own personal space. Will this be what Tironia is like after I manage to purchase it all? Let''s be honest, jobs along the lines of deforestation and river routing will be much easier for myself than would be for regular people. What could take them months only takes me a matter of minutes. Pulling the lake closer to our location, I created two chairs and a circular table with a parasol. A pot of tea is on top of the table and I take a seat while waiting for You to catch up. "What is this place? It feels like a dungeon, but... off?" "Hey! This place is the greatest, I''ll have you know. This is my Divinity''s Domain and it''s like my own personal world. As long as we''re in here, time won''t progress on the outside." Not unless I change the settings, I think? "That is actually very convenient. You know, Abi, there are a lot of other areas where you could put this skill to use. Your morning meetings for example." I raise my hand to cut her off. "Let me stop you there, You. My days already feel long enough without the need of making them longer. If anything, the sole use of this domain is for catching up on sleep. That and maybe practicing skills, but in no way is it for anything that constitutes as - or creates, extra work." I can''t have that. If I held the meeting in here that would mean I''d have more time to spend procrastinating over Varona''s wall. Stupid mythril bricks. Why did I dive in at the deep end? "I understand, Abi." She does? Really? Thus is usually the stage where Me would point out that I am in fact being lazy. Maybe my number one informed his junior of my half-hearted tendencies and she''s already accepting of them? I don''t know, but if she''s not pushing, I''m not complaining. On to business. "Thank you. Anyway, we''re here to talk dungeon. So let''s do this." We spend the better part of an hour hashing out details over new dungeons. That''s what I want from You. I want her to create two more Dummy Dungeons. One outside Ishda and the other at Tune. It''s time to start leveling these humans. You was happy to oblige and the majority of our conversation was about level development. She also explained how to better manage my floors to stop too many people gathering in the same areas. All in all, I learned something this morning and was even paying attention. I don''t know why, but it''s easier to get advice from someone who is the spitting image of yourself. Not that I didn''t listen to Me. I''d have been screwed in the beginning if his wise words hadn''t been badgering me to build, build, build. I''ve got to tell you. That starting point of a Dungeon Core''s life is low. The low ceiling on Dungeon Points coupled together with the even lower number of starting summons is poor at best. Seriously, if they weren''t scattered around the world they''d be screwed. Then again, how come I haven''t come across any dungeons since I started acquiring land. Surely someone must know of a few? A future question for Sis and maybe the Lords Edward and Aldor. If anyone is going to know where dungeons are, it''s going to be one of those three. There''s also the possibility of giving my Goblin King his voice box back. I''m pretty sure that bastard knows the location of more than a few dungeons. Not that I''m in a rush to meet other Dungeon Cores. Who knows what they''ll be like. They might not even be rational. Last thing I need is a dungeon war. I feel like the dungeon would be a stronger adversary than the humans were. They have the ability to keep spotting out monsters after all. Well, as long as they can afford they can. But I digress. It''s lunchtime. After finishing my tea, I take us to the entrance of the mountain and smile at You. "You''ve got a big task ahead of you. Are you sure you''ll be ok?" I can''t help but ask again. I asked repeatedly while we were hammering out the details, but You insisted that she will be fine. Having no reason to not trust her, I allot her some extra points as I know she''s going to need them. Tune''s Mayor won''t be impressed. Especially since he can''t capitalize on my dungeon and has no King to complain to. I might have to bring him in for his reformation soon. I suppose he could actually voice those complaints at the same time if we chuck him in with Goblin. During my morning meeting, Raff kept assuring me that the fishing city''s mayor was on a steady path of repentance and probably wouldn''t need to be brought in. That in itself is good because if people at the top can change - especially those exposed to copious amounts of gold, then it shows hope for those still waiting their turn to visit our retreat. Ishda''s Lord might feel the same way about the dungeon, but I''m sure Clara and the other Noble Vampires will talk them around. That is their job after all. Bidding farewell to You, I port over to Ali''s to see the triplets joined by Rebecca and are all seated. Only Amber is eating however and it looks like she''s still in the middle of work rather than lunch. Although they''re one and the same thing. The little food bin hasn''t even gained an ounce of weight, which is just as ridiculous as the amount she eats. Other than sleeping, Amber has spent the better part of the last two days eating away and inspiring others to have peaceful meals in Ali''s restaurant. It''s a crazy world we live in. Chapter 121: Dragons? Becca''s presence at lunch was definitely the attention puller. The usually-recluse Dragon has become something different completely since undergoing her evolution. Sociable, pleasant and an absolute delight are some of the descriptions that spring to mind. Best of all, however, is the fact that she actually likes me. Sure there''s that ''Mom'' thing, but I''m down for that. I''ve long thought of everyone as family, Wolves Golems and Mimics included. It''s only since Becca gave me that moniker that I''ve truly been thinking about what it means. I did create everyone and everything here, other than the humans of course, so it''s kind of growing on me. It''s just... strange? Then again, what isn''t? I need to get over myself and keep going. "Hey, mom," Becca''s words make me falter instantly. My heart beats faster and Violet eyes me suspiciously. She watches for a second as I try to compose myself before she takes her opportunity by the horns. "Hi, mom," she smiles mischievously and I can''t find it in myself to be annoyed. I''m too flustered. "I can call you mom now, Abi?" It doesn''t help that Blondie jumps on the hype too, who''s then followed by Amber in between mouthfuls. They''re almost too much and I sit down quickly after ordering my meal. "Working hard, Amber?" The stack of empty plates and bowls beside her indicate that she is indeed working hard. It''s also confirmed by a quick nod followed by another serving. "What are you doing after lunch is over, mom?" Becca seems to have calmed down a little from our unexpected accident this morning and is as perky as she was before it happened. Her Ruby eyes are shining in anticipation of my answer. Obviously she doesn''t want to stay in the Daycare anymore. Why would she though? She''s an adult now, right? "I''ve got a few tasks to complete around the region. Nothing too spectacular though unfortunately. You''re welcome to tag along though." "Yes!" she answered immediately, indicating that she had indeed had enough of the Daycare. "Can I come, Abi? I mean, mom." Blondie can''t help but revert to her old ways straight away, but I honestly don''t mind what she calls me. As long as it isn''t anything bad. "I suppose we could come as well. Bear is... missing you somewhat he said." Amber invites herself before I''ve even responded to Blondie. I look at Amber and she asks the important question on her mind. "Will there be food?" I knew that was coming. She''s a proper glutton this one. It''s a good job that I have so many Shacks, Sheds and Cow Pits producing food on a daily basis. Otherwise Amber would probably eat me out of points. "It''s not likely. I''ll be moving from city to city sorting minor problems and upgrading." I say feeling a little sad. "I''m good then, thanks." My emotion was because I knew what was coming the moment I said no. She really is a little glutton. "Just the four of us then," I smile until Bear makes the cutest little roar I''ve ever heard from beside me. "Five. I meant five of us. Sorry, Bear," I apologise while bending down and stroking his furry chin. His face lights up in delight and then ecstasy as I scratch away. Until Violet retrieves her pet that is. Fair enough, I get it. I was just giving him some attention too. "Is everyone ready then? Are you all done." A chorus of yes'' later and we''re off to Tune, the fishing city being the first port of call. Councilman Raff has everything under control he told me and upon inspection, he wasn''t wrong. The streets of Tune are still free from the grime and horrors that had filled them prior to my Absorption. Not a homeless person in sight either and everyone is looking well fed. It''s apparent in the atmosphere as there''s a warm vibe floating through the merry streets. Gone is the sour taste of death and decay, the scowls and depressing looks are now a thing of the past. To look at, you wouldn''t even believe they had a housing and food crisis not too long ago. Hence the reason for my visit. Everything is going well so no extra intervention is needed on my part. That said, I took the time to upgrade their meat producers right quickly before porting us to our next destination. Orad. The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. Already a fine example of what a city should be like - especially one that was not owned by a dungeon until recently, there''s never much for me to actually do in Orad. Today, however, Light said that Mayor Baldur would like to have a word with me at some point in the future. Seeing as how I''m making the rounds, now seems like a good enough time as any. I upgrade the producers as I did in Tune before we stroll over to the mayor''s house. Sometimes it''s just nice to walk. We are greeted by the mayor''s assistant Ivan after knocking on the door. A thin man in his early thirties with large round spectacles leads us inside and straight to the mayor''s office. It doesn''t take long to reach as even the mayor''s home in Orad is rather modest in size. No wonder they''re doing so well with Baldur leading by example. What a guy. "Miss Dungeon Core. Please, take a seat. Who are you lovely... friends? Baldur stutters as he takes in the horns on Blondie and Violet''s heads. "These are a few of my daughters. They''re Dragons in case you were wondering. Don''t let the horns fool you, they''re definitely not demons." Stupid Kolena and her stupid demon speech. Now I feel like I have to justify the Dragons'' existence. Maybe I gave Baldur too much credit before. I''ve only been in his office twenty seconds and I think we''ve taken him out of action. He''s pale faced and is slightly frothing at the mouth whispering, "Dragons?" Poor guy. "From my left is Becca, Blondie and then Violet. Bear is a bear in case you didn''t realise. Also, I know they''re beautiful, but get over yourself. You wanted to speak with me about something Light said." "Thanks, mom." Becca is positively glowing from my compliment and so are Violet and Blondie. Bear is also happy to have been mentioned once again and at such an important meeting no less. "Yes? Their, erm... beauty." Nothing at all to do with the fact that there are actually three Dragons in my home, he whispers. I let it slide though. Baldur''s a good guy, evident by Orad. I''d rather not have him replaced with some tool like the guy in charge of Tune. Granted he''s coming around, but when your leadership is corrupt how do expect those below to stay cleansed. It''s impossible to expect that to happen. "I wanted to talk to you about the dungeon outside our wall. Is that ok?" Baldur asks. "Sure. You can ask whatever you want. If you want to get rid of the dungeon though, I''m sorry, but that can''t happen. It has to stay here to help your citizens level up. Either that or they''d have to travel all the way to Varona to use my dungeon." Then again, could I support that? I should have asked You earlier, but I''m pretty sure that my dungeon is running close to capacity as well. "Actually it''s quite the opposite. I was hoping you would be willing to enlarge the dungeon or possibly just creating a second one might be better altogether. Maybe somewhere on the opposite side of the city? We''re having trouble getting everyone in." I didn''t expect that one. In fact, that''s something that Simon should have known about. "How come Light or my Categoriser don''t know about that?" Not that I think Baldur had ill intentions, but I don''t understand why he wouldn''t inform sooner. That''s the reason they''re here after all. So I don''t have to attend more meetings and whatnot. I much prefer to port in, sort my upgrades and move on. "I didn''t really want to burden them with that so I''ve been trying to manage it myself." Orad''s mayor fiddles with his fingers as he answers. He didn''t want to burden them, but instead thought to ask for me? Yeah, he''s definitely not as capable as I thought. Maybe it''s Ivan? Baldur''s number two might be the genius behind Orad''s success story. "In the future, please tell these things to Light or Simon. Or... Whoever is stationed here at that time. I don''t want to sound like a drag, but I''m a pretty busy Core, you know?" Cracking a joke to relieve the tension, which is purely my own at being called to a meeting I had no need to attend, I relax slightly. Still, I suppose Baldur is quite easy on the eyes for a human. "T-There was another... erm... I mean. What I wanted to say was... It''s just you''re so... I mean, I can''t help it if... You know?" What the hell was that supposed to be and where did this bumbling idiot come from? The sweaty man is no longer easy on the eyes and looks as though he''s taken a turn for the worst. "Are you ill?" I''ve got to ask. I don''t know if Dungeon Cores can get sick, but I don''t want to chance it. I''m not asking Me because he''ll just say no and I still don''t want to chance it. "What? No. I-I was just trying to say... What I wanted to say was... Oh, why is this so hard?" "I''ve got you, Baldur. Don''t worry buddy. Mom, this guy fancies you." Blondie steals the spotlight as myself and the mayor both go red. These little bloddy Dragons. Damn it, Blondie. That''s the sort of thing you''re supposed to whisper to me, I tell her through my will. "That''s not... I mean... It wasn''t supposed to come across that way," he stutters. I just keep my mouth shut as I have nothing to say. Not that I don''t want to add to the conversation, but more along the lines of I can''t. I can''t even think straight as Blondie caught me off guard with her casual statement. "Ahem. I think... I left... A Golem cooking. We''ll be back," I say in my nicest voice before the five of us immediately disappear from the mayor''s office. On top of my tower, I''m giving Blondie the biggest stink eye ever as I can''t believe she said that aloud. "Do you know how embarrassing that was? I could have died. Again." "Don''t be so dramatic, mom. You''re strong. That guy would be lucky to be with you." Blondie 180''s my mood with her positive vibes and I''m instantly swayed to her way of thinking. "Damn right he would. Your mom is a catch," I laugh. "Yeah you are," Becca chimes in, who''s then followed by Violet. No one likes being left out after all. "Bear also said he agrees you''re a catch." The monster in her arms is nodding along, but I''m happy to believe that comments from Bear are really comments from Violet in disguise and that warms my soul even more. She''s slowly coming around like The Oncoming Storm. Although Becca''s was more of an immediate thing, her presence amongst the triplets is now a great example of how to behave. Hopefully, they can learn from her and when they''re ready to evolve they''ll come out as some kick-ass Dragons too. Chapter 122: Kieran Kieran couldn''t stand it. His mother hadn''t taken her eyes off him in the last week. Because of that fact, he was unable to sneak out to see the green-haired Goddess. He didn''t literally think she was a deity and instead, she was more of an idol to the budding Time Mage. He wanted nothing more than to lay eyes on her and his moment came later on that afternoon. She strolled past the kitchen window as Kieran was sitting at the table chopping vegetables. It was a sign, Kieran knew it. He had been trapped by the people he was calling his parents, jailed under the ruse of their loving nature. He knew why he was forbidden from leaving the house. It was his magic. Between them, his parents Mark and Tina were both in awe and afraid of his gift. Not that Kieran had ever given them a reason to doubt him. Other than sneaking out and getting caught that is. Still, it''s only a minor offence when you compare it to war, Kieran thought as he stopped time. His mother''s back was turned and Kieran would hold the veil for as long as possible. All to get a glance at the one he admired. Immediately, Kieran jumped out the window and ran down the street following the path she had taken. When he arrived, Kieran was stunned for a moment at the sight of her beauty. For some reason, both her feet were planted on the floor, as though she had stopped moving before he had stopped time. Odder still was the fact that her eyes were closed. It was as though she sleeping while standing up. The children - who were now more akin to teenagers since the last time he saw them, were frozen in suspended animation like everyone else. Unlike the statuesque Goddess beside them, they were all engaging her in one way or another. The first tinge of pain assaulted Kieran''s strained mind. He wouldn''t let go yet. He would hold on to time long enough to get a close-up look at the woman of his affection. However, everything went to hell the moment he stepped in front of her. The woman''s eyes opened and took in everything around her. Her stilled companions, the motionless street and the sweaty boy in front of her. "Oh shit. You''re a Time Mage," she cried as Kieran''s grip on the veil was released and time resumed its natural state. Kieran''s first instinct was to double down. Stopping time again and running away seemed like the best plan at that moment. Unfortunately for him, he wasn''t fast enough. Two teenage girls and a fully-sized Bear that appeared from nowhere piled on top of him, pinning him to the ground. Even if he was ready to stop time again, Kieran wouldn''t be able to escape from beneath the trio and his efforts would be in vain. Instead, Kieran did what every boy would - every boy not surrounded by a throng of friends that is, he apologised profusely and begged miserably. "I''m s-sorry. Please let me go. I haven''t done anything wrong. I''m sorry. Oh God, I''m so sorry. Please don''t hurt me. You''re just... and I''m... It''s like... I can''t explain it. I''m really sorry though." "Oh my word, we have another one," the blonde on top of him called out. "Who is it?" "Who is what?" He answered while struggling to find an inch of freedom. "Don''t play dumb with me, Kieran. That''s right, I know your name. It''s my magic power. Now tell me. Who were you following?" The blonde was pressing him for information and worse yet she already knew his name. ''What sort of magic lets you know that information?'' Kieran wondered as he managed to pull one arm free. With it, he gingerly pointed in Abi''s direction. "No way. That''s two in one day, Mom. You''re killing it," the blonde laughs merrily. The teenager''s mom, whom Kieran was having a hard time struggling to believe, began walking towards him. When she reached the pile of bodies, Abi crouched down to look him directly in the eyes. "You''re a Time Mage?" she repeated. This time there was less shock in her voice and instead was laced with fascination. Also, her words sounded like a question so Kieran nodded in return, still a little embarrassed over the blonde girl''s statement. "Violet, would you kindly get Bear off him, please? You can get up too, Blondie." Violet made Bear release his prisoner and Blondie also removed herself with a smile. After Kieran was able to breathe properly again, he stumbled to his feet. Blondie and Violet hadn''t been so bad, but Bear''s weight alone was a different story. Bears in general are not the lightest of creatures and when they''re trying to enforce their weight it can be very effective. Especially on much smaller creatures. Those creatures being human and in this specific case, Kieran. Even after his breathing had sorted itself out, he stood there silently. So too did the women and teenagers, even the Bear made no further attempt to make noise. The green-eyed Goddess never took her eyes off him during that time however, it was as though she was studying him. Her piercing gaze read his very soul. A case of theft: this story is not rightfully on Amazon; if you spot it, report the violation. Kieran didn''t know the extent of her power, but after seeing her void beam during the war - and Blondie being able to name him the way she did, he was certain they already knew everything there was to know about him. So the Time Mage didn''t hold back when he began explaining the circumstances that led Bruce Gold to become Kieran Ely and subsequently the events that placed him onto Tironia. He also told them what he''d been doing since his arrival, which wasn''t really much of anything except for being grounded. The hard life of a teenage boy. Kieran Ely, Space Mage Dungeons Stories Volume 5
It takes me a second to realise what''s happening when I return from my domain. Becca is the only normal-looking person in our entourage. Blondie is mid-air with a fist thrown up and a large smile is plastered across her face. Violet is mid-step with Bear in her arms and looks as though she''s about to topple over. That doesn''t happen though and as my attention snaps to the only animated-person in sight, I realise just how special my stalker actually is. "You''re a Time Mage," I blurt out without even saying hello. Unfortunately for him, my emotions are a mixed bag right now and after finally finding someone proficient in the rare and elusive element, I couldn''t keep them from spilling out. The young mage seems to be panicking. Is it because time has stopped but I haven''t? I suppose it is quite shocking when your skills don''t work the way you expect them to or when someone like me comes along. As time restarts - for reasons beyond my comprehension level, the triplets ( with Amber tagged out today for a good-looking Bear) dive on the mage that''s in front of me. They land directly on top of him, taking him down. The sight alone has me howling with laughter on the inside. It was hilarious and if I was a cruel person, I''d be curled up in hysterics right now. As it stands, I''m lovely and feel slightly sorry for the young man being crushed to death under the combined weight of two Dragons and a Bear. Well, it''s mainly Bear, but I don''t want to personally comment on his weight. Bear likes me and I don''t want to say anything to change that. I should make a cuddlie like him. Or two. No doubt Violet will take mine if I don''t make one for her. While I imagine how adorable a cub-sized version of a stuffed Bear would be, Blondie is happily chatting away to the Time Mage being crushed beneath her. Literally. He''s suffocating underneath them, or so it seems. I better stop daydreaming. Moving closer and getting down to his eye level, he doesn''t appear to be suffocating like I previously thought. When I ask him the same question from before, only this time in a much nicer tone, he nods in response. That makes me wonder once more if he is struggling to breathe and I tell the girls to release him. Them and Bear. I mean, I doubt he''s going to run away now. "Violet, would you kindly get Bear off him, please? You can get up as well, Blondie." The latter seemed to be really happy about something she''d just discovered during their conversation, but it probably wasn''t anything I want to know so I''ll let her have it and wait patiently for the Time Mage to speak. Ok, I might have gotten lost in thought while waiting. Wondering how long it would take this young master of time to teach others his skills at the Academy. That''s if he even enters a contract with me. Part two of finding a Time Mage is more important than the actual finding itself, to be honest. If I can''t convince him to enter the contract, then I won''t gain access to his element. Granted, I could just kill him. That''s a cold line, but something Me would have said once upon a moon ago. The simple solution. Death, Absorption, Power. Dungeon Core style. Unfortunately for me, that''s not how I roll. If this goody-goody''s soul was in the red, I''d be justified in claiming his element that way. Damn me for being so Goddess-damn nice. And damn Soul Guide too while I''m at it. Stupid do-gooders. The Time Mage begins rambling through a very unexpected story and once he''s finished, I''m at a loss for words. Why''s everything got to be so damn strange? Or awkward? Or weird? Or intense? Or just plain old, bat-shit crazy? Where''s the mother-fudging easy life at? Nowhere close to me, that''s for sure. The Time Mage - who happens to be from another world completely, is not the Master I thought him to be. Not to mention the fact that he''s still young and has been sheltered for most of his second life. Definitely not Master standard. Still, a Time Mage is a Time Mage regardless. I''d like to think that we need to find him somewhere to practice, but that''s not number one on the list. Having earned a small modicum of parental responsibility, I''m going to have to speak with him before anything. "Ok. First thing first. I need to speak with your parents." At my statement, the young Time Mage turns white. That''s obviously not a conversation he''s looking forward to. "Kieran Ely!" As though he hadn''t lost any colour at all, the man pales even further at the woman running down the road towards him. "What the hell did I tell you?" "That''s your mom, I guess?" It seemed pretty obvious, but I didn''t want to make a fool out of myself. Gods know I do enough of that. The Time Mage nods in acknowledgement as his mom slows on her arrival. "Didn''t you hear me? What did I tell you?" she asks again. "To stay inside," he mopes. Kieran''s mother, Tina Ely, is worried something bad will happen to her only son and is afraid to let him out of the house. Or that''s what I got from his story at least. Better see if I can help the poor soul out. "Excuse me, Mam. Hi, my name is," before I can continue I''m cut off by a mother''s fury. "Stop. This is a family matter and it doesn''t concern you. When you grow up and have your own children, little girl, only then will you be able to comprehend how I''m feeling right now. Now, stop luring my sweet child with your wicked wiles. Kieran, home now." The street went silent as Kieran''s mother frog marched him down the road towards their home. I just stood there. Silent. Still caught up in the fact that I had just been scolded by an adult. It shocked me so much that I didn''t even defend the young Time Mage I desperately wanted to contract. Even the girls didn''t move. Everyone was still as we watched them round the corner before I finally came back to my senses. "What was that? It felt as though my body had turned to stone." Becca asks. "A mother''s fury, I think." I''m not sure, but that''s the only way I can describe it. "You''re not going to start acting like that to us, are you?" A worried Blondie voices her opinion from behind me and I turn to face her. "You? Never. Light and Noir though. Pfft. That''s a different story." The girls laugh as I turn to face the corner Kieran and his mom disappear around. I know where they live, so it''s not like the young Time Mage is going anywhere. I''m just going to have to do something about his mom first. But what? Chapter 123: Lost Trying to deal with a Time Mage''s overprotective mother is hard. So hard in fact, that I decided to bin the idea completely. I didn''t have a parental figure growing up so I don''t really know how to talk to them. Then again, even if I did, I still wouldn''t know how to go about asking a mother to let her son form a contract with me? No idea. Poor Kieran is on his own. I feel bad. There are a few things going on that I should get some kind of hold over, but I don''t know what to say or how to go about them. There''s Princess Aura for example. That wasn''t even a thing until Edwan opened his mouth and dumped another complicated situation in my lap unintentionally. Why is it that the only female elf in my city is royalty? Worse yet, royalty that was somehow enslaved and passed around a few undesirable masters. How do I talk to her about that? Exactly. I have no idea. Unlike Kieran, however, Aura is not grounded or alone and has a large support network of friends. Friends that she''s made here in my city. Some are regular Tironians and others are dungeon humans. Either way, she''s surrounded by people who care about her and make the Princess feel safe. Which is good for her after what she went through and it means I don''t actually have to say anything. She deserves it. I mean so do I, but all I actually want is a little peace and quiet. Some Abi time to just kick back and relax. Hence why I''m here. Closing the book I''m reading, the light in my domain fades away save from the crackling fire beside me. What do I do about these problems? And why are there always so many? I''ve been in my domain for the better part of a day reading, under the guise of trying to figure out some answers. Having little to no luck though, I''m deciding to call it as I haven''t had any startling revelations and nothing even slighty helpful has come to mind. Even when I''m in my domain I can''t relax these days. There are always that many things on my mind that I''m starting to think I''ll never be able to rest properly again. Exiting my personal space, I come face to face with the reason I fled in the first place. Time stops when I use Divinity''s Domain and that made me question whether I actually need to contract Kieran or not. That was when I realised that time won''t just stop in my own space, but it probably applys to all the Gods domains. That means I still can''t use Time Magic anywhere in my dungeon, but it was still a revelation of sorts. "I suppose so." The cause of more frustrations than one, Veris, begins jumping up and down in excitement. I''d been thinking about her request aswell why I was reading. She wants another building to create her own chain of Pleasure Parlours. It isn''t an unreasonable request and her first business hasn''t had any problems yet, much to my surprise. I was sure that if something was going to go wrong somewhere in Varona, it would be there. Still, seeing as how I can''t fault her, the Boss of my dungeon is getting her way once again. I''m definitely too soft when it comes to Veris. Thanking me profusely, Veris leaves with a smile and disappears to get up to Goddesses knows what. Actually, I know exactly what she''s going to be doing. She''s either going to be the giving end, or the receiving end, of a mutually-beneficial paddling with one of her clients. I still can''t believe people visit her and manage to keep their souls green. Isn''t it... Nevermind. Let''s forget that thought before it goes somewhere. "Mom, it''s time to work." I don''t know when or how, but at some point Becca became the personal assistant I kept complaining about not having. Worst of all, I can''t even slack off because I don''t want to set a bad example for my daughter. Damn their clever words. I was nice and content just skirting through before. Now it feels like the only breaks I get are at meal times and to sleep. I''d probably cry if I wasn''t able to get in few sneaky trips to Divinity''s Domain here and there. It''s great that I''m able to take time to consider my options. Even if I don''t end up at a conclusion, getting to lay down and relax while mulling over my problems kills two birds with one arrow. Hopefully, they haven''t realised what I''m doing yet. Everytime I close my eyes to think, another book is finished after a quick tea break in my Domain. Unauthorized tale usage: if you spot this story on Amazon, report the violation. Then again, it''s not as if it''d matter if anyone did notice. Time stops inside my Domain, so it''s not like I''m wasting any. The worst of it would be earful about neglect, or something like that. Mentioning neglect, as I was so rightfully informed, it''s work time. It''s been a week since I last saw Kieran. The same amount of time since I saw Edwan. He and the elves left Varona right after a harsh scolding from Aura. Poor elves. Although, he did kinda call her out in the middle of Ali''s. Even if it was in elvish. During the time they''ve been gone, my bond with Becca has only gotten stronger. Which is still unbelievable. The Oncoming Storm spends most of the day with me now and even attends the morning meetings. She''s super helpful, I''ve gotta say. Sometimes she even brings up some good points and suggestions. Although they''re usually ones that I''m supposed to talk about myself, if I don''t forget about them or manage to become distracted that is. The triplets are getting closer to their evolution thanks to Randy''s efforts in the Colliseum. All the other Dragons have already reached level 40 and are just waiting to evolve. I just need to make sure the Coliseum is free before I go ahead and start evolving Oblivion Dragons. The thought alone causes my Core worry. Doing it all at once would probably lead to the end of Varona since that specific tier of Dragon seems to do what they want. I''m hoping that it was just Becca''s personality and that Sis is right. Either way, the Ringmaster suggested doing one Dragon at a time. That way we can focus solely on them and their training. I''m definitely not against that idea, but I still feel kinda bad for those that will have to wait longer. Still, it''s a good idea and it even gives me peace of mind. Way to go Randy. As soon as the triplets are ready, we''ll set that plan in motion and I''ll find out if Sis is full of bubbles or not. The wall surrounding Varona is still exactly the same as it was last week. Roughly 40% complete. I''ve been spending almost all my DP unlocking copious amounts of land and would like to say it was due to world domination, or something on those lines. The truth is... I''m kinda lost. I was following Edwan''s directions, or at least what I remember of them, but having never been this far west I''ve completely lost my bearings. That said, it doesn''t stop me from going out and purchasing more land with Becca as the two of us make a day of it. The triplets are too busy with training to come, or even work, as Randy is pushing them hard. Much to Amber''s dissatisfaction. The little glutton has been racking in those hours at Ali''s and was rather upset about having to trade all you can eat for all you can kill. Violet and Blondie complain less. There are still complaints, but both combined don''t surpass Amber''s. Still, another day is over and another shitload of land has been acquired. I''m really starting to amass some ground space now. I mean, I don''t even know where I am, but I own all of it. Believe it or not, it''s really easy to get sidetracked and think ''I''ll just finish off that forest before we move on.'' At least I don''t have to come back for it, right? Becca wasn''t that impressed with my notion, but I thought it was a sound argument. After all, I do own the forest now. Not to mention the small elven community that lives there now contributes to my daily DP. It wasn''t the elven capital though, which was a bit of a bummer. I thought I''d gotten lucky when I saw that first elf, but no joy. I''ll have to face the music soon and ask Aura. I''ll give it another week though, just in case I manage to find it myself. In fairness, it shouldn''t be this hard to miss. It is a capital city after all. It should be big and glamorous, but in a natural sort of way because they''re elves. Either way, that''s another two hundred thousand points worth of land added to my ever-growing portfolio. Without adding in variables, such as traveling merchants or monsters that live on my lands, I''m rolling in points. My daily income has surpassed a quarter of a million and that''s after You and Me''s allowances. Speaking of subsystem B, You has already altered every single one of the adventuring floors in my dungeon and is currently in Orad. The city that I spent most of my first life in only has the one dungeon that I made myself. Full of Goblins, You will probably be finished redesigning it by the end of the day. The fact that alterations cost nothing to perform means she has been saving most of the DP I give to her on a daily basis. Me, on the other hand, blows through his like there''s no tomorrow. It''s strange to be honest. Me only has to populate the forest around Varona whereas You is in charge of the whole dungeon. Then again, the lower floor monsters are all created by the auto spawners I placed. That means You doesn''t have to use her points on them either. Hmm. Realistically, I don''t even think You needs an allowance. Her five thousand could be spent on five more sections of land. Which might not sound like a lot, but over the space of a year that''s more than fifteen hundred plots in total. Whatever, I suppose there''s no rush. Not on the world domination front anyway. My sit down with the Elf King is a different story tough. There''s only three weeks to go until we''re supposed to meet and I''m nowhere nearer to knowing where their city is now than I was when Edwan gave me directions. Did he even even say it west? Why did he have to tell me? If he''d have told Becca instead, we''d be there by now. Then again, she had only just gone through her evolution so she was still adjusting. Hell, I''m still adjusting to her now. She''s so different. Porting myself and Becca to Ali''s, we meet up with some tired-looking triplets for dinner. Blondie and Violet complain about the strength of Golems that Randy has been putting them up against while Becca tells them about all the places we visited today. Myself and Amber say nothing. Choosing to eat instead of making small talk. I''m drained. Even with my secret domain visits, I feel shattered. It''s always the same after a spending spree though. I''m sure Me said that Dungeon Points are akin to my stamina or something like that. Which is probably the reason why I''m so tired all the time. It''s nothing a nice sleep and nightly replenish won''t fix though. I wonder if I''ll see Kieran tomorrow? Chapter 124: Help "Why does the Core not manage the dungeon properly? And how has it managed to create features outside its confines?" Subsystem B asks the senior system. "Honestly? Your guess is as good as mine." His reply doesn''t even attempt to answer her question and Me''s attitude is almost a reflection of the Core''s. "But... You have been with this Core for two years now, correct? That''s far longer a period than I. Surely that proves you have better insight as to why it decides to make such... Strange decisions?" Me can''t help but let out a chuckle at You''s choice of wording. "Honestly, You. I have no idea why Abi does half of the crazy shit she does. She''s an enigma, wrapped in a mystery that I don''t think even she understands. She bumbles, stumbles and downright forgets nearly anything of importance that''s dungeon related. Details are not her strong point and neither is memory. To be honest, I''m more shocked than you are that she''s managed to create what she has after witnessing first hand her lack of attention. It''s beyond puzzling." Me remembers having to repeatedly remind Abi to spend her points. On more than one occasion did he find them trickling over her limit. Until Overstock maxed out, that was. "Although, she does seem to have become more involved recently. Did you know she set up the morning meetings herself?" You cocks her head to the side, but says nothing. "Even though she complains about them profusely, Abi still attends every single one religiously. Why? I have no idea. I mean, why set them up in the first place if she''s just going to complain about them? She mopes about her workload, but it''s all self-inflicted. Sometimes, I wonder if she secretly enjoys being so busy. Again though, with Abi, it''s hard to tell." Me pulls a mug of yellow liquid from his inventory and takes a sip. Taste really is the best thing ever. "That doesn''t really help me understand the Dungeon Core though. I want to know what its plans are, its goals." You says with a twinkle in her eye. "That''s an easy one. Abi has absolutely no idea what she''s doing." Me laughs and takes another mouthful of the frothy liquid before continuing. "Even if she tells you that she does, don''t believe her. She''ll change her mind after a few days, or probably forget about it entirely. That''s usually a given around here." The twinkle is gone and You is shocked to hear how complacent the Dungeon Core is. She processes the steadily-growing number of problems as she watches Me down his drink. "You don''t need to worry about that sort of stuff though. Deputy Mayor Sacha handles anything that Abi overlooks or forgets. Fortunately for us - and unlike every other Dungeon Core, ours can summon sapient beings that are extremely capable of handling large workloads. It''s fortunate for her really. She''d be screwed without her Assassins and she knows it." You is now lost for words. Me''s description of their Dungeon Core didn''t paint it in the best light after all. He wasn''t wrong about its subordinates either. You has had the opportunity to meet a few of the residents and Deputy Mayor Sacha did indeed seem like a problem solver. Her senior, Mayor Kana, might be more of a problem causer though. Still, if Me said it was fine and that everything was running smoothly, who was You to object? He was her senior. "Also, don''t let Abi hear you referring to her as an it. She knows that she''s the Dungeon Core, but that doesn''t mean she likes it. She can still be a little iffy about how you refer to her. You''re best off just using her name." "OK. I suppose everything inside and out of the dungeon is operating rather efficiently. It''s... Her methods are far from the norm, but I can see the progress she''s made and is continuing to make. The amount of DP she processes in a day is something else." You nods as though she''s reached some insight into the thoughts of their master, even though she hasn''t. Not wanting to feel like he''s missing out, Me also nods along in false-understanding You''s having a hard time coming to terms with Abi and her family''s oddities. The daily DP income, the special human-type summons she can create and not to mention the fact that she''s part-God part-Core, wane on her newly-created sanity. "Don''t worry," Me offers some last words of advice. "You''ll get used to it here, it just takes some time. If you focus solely on the dungeon like Abi told you to, time will pass easier thanks to being absorbed in work. Plus, it''s easier to ignore the crazy shit she does if you''re not there to witness it." Me and You Dungeon Stories Volume 5
Another week has passed with no signs of the elven kingdom during my land-acquiring sprees and I''m forced to concede. In my defence, it shouldn''t be as hard as it to find. It is a capital city after all and they''re not known for being on the small side. Especially one carved into a forest. Maybe I missed the mark and went straight passed it? Either way, sitting across the table from me is a flustered-looking Aura. The elven Princess-turned-slave seems to be more worried about our meeting than I am. Although, I don''t see why. If anything, I''m the one who usually puts her foot in her mouth. The elf across from me, on the other hand, has been a model citizen since she arrived. A light in the dark. A shepherd to the masses if you will. Even when you consider the bias that''s normally present between races, Aura is a shining example of what royalty should be. She helped Tilly, a human, before they had even arrived in Varona. That alone speaks volumes for her character. "So, erm... What''s up, Abi? What did you want to talk about?" Sitting in the garden of her home, Aura''s hair glows in the sun. It almost appears to be ablaze and I nearly lose myself before we''ve even begun. Unauthorized use of content: if you find this story on Amazon, report the violation. "I''ve... Forgotten the directions to the elven capital city," I mumble under my breath. Not my best moment, I admit, but I''m embarrassed. What else can I say? It''s been a while since Edwan told me and I''ve been known for not having the best memory. "I''m sorry? I didn''t quite hear you." She leans in closer. Of course she didn''t hear me. How could she? I barely even heard myself and I said it. Come on, Abi. Stop messing around now. Just say it again and get it over with. And don''t mention the princess thing. Thinking what I have to say must be really important and something I don''t want overheard, Aura leans in even closer. Of course it''s something I don''t want other people to hear. I don''t even want her to hear it. Still, I brace myself and raise my voice the tiniest fraction. "I''ve forgotten where the capital city of the elves is. Seeing as though you''re the only person I know that''s been there, can you tell me where it is?" Nailed it. "How do you know I''ve been there?" Or not? Damn. Her confusion is evident. How do I know she''s been there? It''s not like she''s ever spoken about being elven royalty before. If anything, I''m guessing she either wants to forget all about it, or hide away forever. Either way, I''m fine with whatever she chooses. Aslong as I can get this location out of her first. "I think... That I heard about it from... Edwan?" Aura frowns at me poor answer. It was the truth though. I couldn''t actually tnhink if anything else to say. Why did I earn myself a frown? "I-It was at Ali''s. Right before he left." I add, trying to muster some confidence to my statement. Hoping for a better outcome, of course it doesn''t go my way. "Hmm. He was speaking in elvish back then though?" Shit. In for a copper in for a gold, right? I lean even closer and indicate for her to do the same until our heads are side by side. I know that I don''t need to whisper and that we can communicate directly through the dungeon''s connection, but sometimes being sneaky requires a certain flair. Plus, I love being able to speak again and take every opportunity I get. "Listen, Aura. Don''t freak out when I say this, but I know you''re a Princess. I''m not going to say anything about it though. Not to anyone. I promise. Even if I did want to out you, it would only end up with more work being thrust my way somewhere down the line and I''m already the world''s busiest Dungeon Core. That said, your secret is safe with me." I lean back and wait for her reply. Aura doesn''t move and I can see she''s thinking it over carefully. As a princess should really. It''s always better to think before speaking, which is something that I really need to start getting better at. Blurting things out is usually my jam, but certainly I need to start being a bit smoother with what I say and when. After a few minutes have passed, Aura asks a question. "How did you understand what Edwan told me?" Not the question I was expecting, but one I don''t mind answering. "I absorbed an elf back when I was still a new Dungeon Core and there was those remains of that self-exoloder. I''m pretty sure that''s something to do with it. I didn''t actually understand all of your conversation though and only managed to catch the awkward parts. Which is just my luck really," I shrug. Aura pulls a disgusted face at me, but then let''s go of whatever grudge she was about to harbor with a sigh. "I should have guessed, really. Dungeons do absorb bodies after all. The language thing is still weird though." Not going to lie, it''s even weirder than she''s thinking. Only catching snippets of an important conversation make for some very uncomfortable eavesdropping. Before the morale highgrounders start jumping on the bandwagon, it''s not like I was at Ali''s just to listen to private conversations and gossip. It was lunchtime and you can''t fault me for being concerned. There aren''t many elves in Varona yet and when one important elf talks to another, especially one that went through the ordeal she did, I couldn''t help but be defensive for her. Even though Edwan and his group helped us during the invasion, Aura still takes priority over the rest of her species. "I know. It''s stupid as per and there''s so much to learn, but this is Varona. That mountain attests to the ridiculousness of it all, if not our beauty. For now though, there''s nothing I can do about. Maybe after I''ve absorbed a few more elves, I''ll gain the ability to summon them. I should be able to understand the language better then, I hope." I beam a bright smile at Aura. The elf, however, seems a lot less enthusiastic about my glee than I am. "That''s... I don''t know what to make of that. You absorbing elves. And I mean... Summoning elves sounds even stranger." Her forehead creases as she frowns, trying to imagine me summoning elves en masses. I, on the other hand, think it would be awesome. I could have my own contingency of elves. Much better than the ones Edwan arrived with too. Not only that, but I could summon Aura some friends. Not that she doesn''t already have friends, but I''m sure she''d appreciate some of her own species kicking around town and having more elves to talk to than just Eduine. "It''s no less strange than summoning humans. Believe me. Although, you come around to it after a while. Especially when they''re more capable than anyone you''ve ever known. Now... About the location of that capital." I didn''t want to keep the awkwardness going since I could see the princess was struggling to grasp the reality. Plus, I''ve it Becca waiting on me. Aura gave me directions and we were off. As it turns out, I wasn''t actually that far away from the elven capital. Well... One of my routes wasn''t. Picking up Becca, the triplets are still in session with Randy increasing their level, we head off to our destination with a renewed vigor. By the end of my points, however, I''m wondering if I''ve managed to take a wrong turn somewhere as the place we''re in does not look very royal-like at all. To be honest, it looks the the most-haunted forest I''ve ever seen. "Crap. I''m never going to be able to find this place. Next time I speak to Aura, I''m bringing you with me." I mood sours as I look at Becca, feeling foolish for not taking her with the last time. "Would you like me to take a quick look from the air?" Her words are the light to my dark. "That''s a fantastic idea, Becca. Thank you." Why didn''t I think of that? Not restricted to the same boundaries that I am, Becca takes flight while I port out to the countryside. I didn''t want to stay in the eerie-looking forest alone. Getting comfy, I create a nice chair for myself to relax in. As I''m enjoying the sunshine, Becca''s large shadow ruins my view right before she lands in front of me. "Found it, mom. It didn''t even take that long. Everything''s easier to see from the sky." She says after morphing into her human form. She''s not wrong either as I only got to enjoy roughly ten minutes of quiet time before she returned. "I''m impressed, Becca. Not only are you extremely fast, but you''re also super efficient." I beam at her. "Praise me more, mom," she laughs in a joking manner, but I wasn''t playing around. Becca is extremely efficient. More so than a person titled The Oncoming Storm should be at the very least. Still, she''s super helpful and in no way am I complaining. "Damn right I will. You''re such a good girl. You''re going to be a shining example to the rest of your sisters." I smile as I catch a twitch in Becca''s eye. Not missing a beat, I ask about what''s troubling her. "I was... going to talk to you about that," she says as her cheeks flush. "About your sisters? What''s up?" I try my best to ignore her rosy cheeks as I move us back to my tower in Varona. "I was wondering if you would create us a male Dragon." I stop in my tracks. Is she asking for what I think she''s asking for? Or is that just me? I really hope it''s just me. "Well... I suppose that I could create one more Oblivion Dragon. I''m not summoning a Rebellion Dragon though. You can scratch that idea now. Not to be a bitch, but it was hard to even talk with you before, Becca." "I know, mom, and any male Dragon would be fine really. We all level the same way after all." Something about that sentence doesn''t sit right with me. I''m probably just over thinking it. She''s not another Veris. Definitely not. She''s not, right? Chapter 125: The Elven Capital Less than a week later - which is still more than enough time before I meet with His Royal Elfness, I arrive at Aura''s place of birth and the elven capital of Tira. Although I only realized we were there once I had purchased part of the forest. The sudden influx of DP was dizzying. Far above us and living in the trees, is an astonishing number of elves. High up in the silver oaks that reach the sky, branches cross and intertwine with one another to create the base of their city. They stretch far and wide, connecting almost all of the canopy above. The trunks are hollowed out up top, carved to form homes and businesses. Signs hang above doorways, fashioned to indicate stores and supply buildings whereas living quarters are unmarked. Not only can I see those above, but, at some point, they also notice myself and Becca. Maybe they saw her circling in the sky, but they didn''t look very pleased at our arrival, for some reason. I want to say it''s because they don''t get visitors like us very often, but something''s telling me that''s not the case. I mean, when are things ever that simple? I want to say it''s not dungeon-related, but that wouldn''t be true. Wherever I go, so too does my home. "Becca. Can you see the elves? Do they look... Angry to you? " More and more furrowed brows lean over the safety fences to glare down at me and, frankly, I''d be surprised if she hadn''t noticed them by now. "Yes, Mother. I''m not sure why, but they all seem to be giving you the stink eye." She confirms my theory, not that I would have put it that way, but I still don''t understand why they''re acting that way. "They also look a little pale," Becca adds to make things worse. "Don''t say that. It could be considered racist. We need to try and get off to a good start." I try to cover her mouth, but she nimbly evades me. "No. I mean to say that they look paler than elves usually do. It''s as though they''re afraid of something. They also seem to be sweating quite heavily." OK, so she wasn''t being racist then, but how can she tell all that? Aren''t I supposed to have the best vision around here? And how does she know what elves usually look like? Nevermind. Stupid question. Plus, that would be the least of my worries. What''s important is the reason why the elves are pissed off with me. What did I do? I''m even anxious to port up there now just in case they take it the wrong way and see it as a declaration of war, or something stupid like that. I mean, I can see why they might be angry. Elves and humans don''t have the best relationship with each other and I look about as human as they come, if I do say so myself. And, other than her horns, Becca is the definition of human beauty. Maybe that''s why they look like they''ve just stepped in horse shit? I used to get pretty annoyed about people turning up invited. Maybe it''s that? Although, in my case, everyone has a reason to want to destroy the dungeon. Still, I suppose it''s nothing a quick explanation can''t fix. Before I have the chance to explain myself, the elves start shouting insults down at me. As if that wasn''t shocking enough - rather than dispersing the crowd, I watch as a procession of guards join the hate parade. What''s even more shocking, it turns out that I was wrong and their animosity has nothing to do with the fact that we resemble humans. Out of all the taunts and insults I make out, none of them paint me as the friendly, demon-slaying Dungeon Core that I am. If anything, it kind of sounds like they hate me. So terrible am I that I''ve kidnapped their princess and am holding the royal descendant inside my dungeon of death for seedy games and pleasure. Ok, I may have added a little detail at the end, Veris springing to mind. After hearing Aura''s name mentioned, alongside kidnapping and the hurtful curse words in between, it''s easy to understand what they''re getting at. Not that they''re right. Well, almost. Veris would definitely be down for a few seedy games inside the dungeon with the elven princess. I have no desire to take part in Aura''s passion, nor do I wish for her to partake in any games either. Again, Veris would have a much different opinion on the subject, but thinking about that will get me nowhere. So, back to problem A. Screw these elves. I thought I had been invited here. Where''s the welcoming committee and shit? A piece of rotting fruit hit me in the face and, before I could think, I''d already acted. In the palm of my hand, a large Void Beam is ready to release. Seconds away in fact. Fortunately, I managed to rein my shit in and it''s a good job too. If I hadn''t stopped myself at the last moment, there would probably have been another procession of armed infantry marching on Varona and with due cause. But thankfully, I restrained myself and, in the process, the jeering elves also fell silent. This tale has been pilfered from Royal Road. If found on Amazon, kindly file a report. That''s what I thought. I don''t need this hate. Especially when none of it is justified. I don''t take it any further and release the magic-drawing power from my dungeon into the air. In a display of strength, the mass of energy blazes upwards and explodes exactly where I want it to. In the cloudy skies above, a circle of pale blue can be seen as the elves look upwards. With my magic gone, the sun shines down on them as they silently watch. All the elves are speechless after my little display. Becca doesn''t look too pleased, but I feel pretty good about myself after showing off like that. Not that I came here to make them fear me or anything devious like that. The main reason for finding this place was because I''d been invited. I just lost myself in a moment of provoked rage. Thats all. Let someone give me shit now. I dare them. Still, if anyone''s going to smooth this situation over, it''s going to be the person who got them riled up in the first place and without asking, checking, or making sure she''s OK with the idea, I summon Aura home. A lot happened in the next few seconds as the unwitting elf realized where she was. First was that she was no longer at home in her bath. The sudden chill is the first indicator alongside the immediate change in scenery. Second, even though she had been alone moments ago, relaxing in unadulterated bliss beneath the bubbles, the elf was now the center of attention for many people. Third, and definitely not gone unnoticed, was the cause of her sudden embarrassment, waving at her casually with a stupid grin on her face and rosy red cheeks. "What the hell, Abi?" Aura crumples to the floor to protect her modesty before glaring at me. "Why would you just teleport me like that and why here of all places? I ran away from home, you know?" "That''s not cool, Mom. You''ve gotta make sure a person''s dressed before you teleport them." Before I can come up with a response, Becca also throws her opinion into the mix. The sudden arrival of their missing/kidnapped/now-runaway princess, and the fact that she''s naked at that, is enough to kick start the chorus of haters back into procession once again. Worst of all, I deserve this round of jeers. "How could she do that to another person? Let alone another woman." "I can''t look. It''s too humiliating." "Don''t worry about that miscreant, Princess. Your body is beautiful!" Coming out of my stupor, I clothe Aura and move the three of us into my domain. I then spend a few moments thinking, brushing my foot on the floor which I turned to sand while keeping my eyes firmly pinned to the ground. I screwed up. I know I did. I dread to imagine how I would react if someone did that to me, but Aura''s just waiting patiently for me to say something. I think. I''m afraid to look at her. I feel ashamed. I feel more ashamed for Aura. I should known better by now. Why didn''t I check quickly? "Aura?" Slowly raising my eyes, I see both the redhead elf I''ve just embarrassed and the daughter I never had have both found a comfortable spot to sit in and have started reading. The elf raises her eyes above the book at her name and I feel bad the moment we make contact. "I''m sorry. I''ll never teleport you again without permission first." She stares at me before smiling and returning to her book. "OK," she brushes it off with a wave. What? Just like that. No ''How could you?'' or ''You''ve ruined my life forever.'' I feel bad. Like really, really bad. I thought she might have been annoyed at me for the location change, but I didn''t even consider the fact she might not be dressed. Why doesn''t she care about it as much as I do? Why isn''t she livid with me? Other than her initial anger, she doesn''t even seem slightly concerned about what''s just happened. "Erm... Aura. About those elves..." She snaps the book shut before I can finish my sentence. I even flinch in the process, earning a stifled giggle from Becca. I''m super glad Me isn''t here right now. Or You for that matter. I''d dread to hear what she would think about this. "I''m not speaking to him," are Aura''s only words as she looks at the closed book in her hands. She then looks toward the shelf she had taken it from absentmindedly. "Him who? All I want is for you to tell those elves that I haven''t kidnapped you. You should hear what they were saying about me, Aura. I nearly cried." I nearly destroyed their kingdom too, but I won''t mention that last part. "My dad. The King. Remember, I''m a princess. Who else would He be? You know, Abi, sometimes you can be really dense." That... makes sense. I''m really off my game today. What''s up with that? "So as long as he''s not out there when we go back, you''ll tell the others that I''m not holding you against your will?" Aura frowns but reluctantly agrees. "Thanks. I''m supposed to meet your dad in a few days, but I don''t know how that''s gonna go down. I thought things between us were friendly and peaceful when... When... Damn it. What was that elf''s name again? You know, the one in charge when they helped against the demons." "Do you mean Edwan?" Becca asks and it damn well sounds right. How can she remember his name, but I can''t? "Yeah, that guy. He said we would be welcomed, but unless elves welcome people by booing and making them feel like crap then maybe he lied to me?" I pout. "It''s not likely. If that''s what he told you there''s no reason to believe otherwise. The reason they changed their mind might have to do with the fact he saw me in Varona. It''s been a long time since I was there... Here? In fact, where are we right now, Abi?" Unable to make her mind up, Aura decides to ask instead of guess. "This is Divinty''s Domain. It''s one of my divine skills and I can do anything I want here with a thought. Cool, huh?" "Well yes, but where are we exactly?" "Oh. Our bodies are still in the same place at the elven capital''s lower level. I think. I''m pretty sure that only our souls enter this space. I have been known to be wrong though. Either way, whenever I end the skill, I''m always back where I was when I used it. There are loads of other amazing uses too, but right now, I need you, Aura. I need you to tell those fools that I haven''t kidnapped you and that we don''t perform despicable acts in my dungeon of death." Aura has no words to answer my melodramatic plea for help, all she does is nod along sympathetically. Honestly, I was hoping she was going to defend my dungeon. What do you mean, Abi? You''re dungeon''s lovely and great. Sunshine, unicorns and rainbows 24/7. Don''t just nod along like it is an actual dungeon of death. Maybe I took it over the top? Nevermind. It''s onwards and upwards from here. Literally. Chapter 126: Goblins It makes sense now. The reason Aura never mentions her home. As I stand behind the redhead native, waiting for her to cast some good light on me and explain how they have it all wrong, somehow, she ends up making the situation far worse than it had been originally. How? Let''s just say that Aura has a really nasty mouth when it comes to her own people. Why? I have no idea. If I didn''t know any better, I could easily mistake the princess as a human picking a cross-species fight after catching a third of her verbal assaults. I mean, the way she speaks to the other elves is just mean and insulting. Then again, she did become a slave for whatever reason, so... Maybe she''s justified in ranting at them. Or, maybe this is just how elves communicate with each other and I''m actually being welcomed by them. Could I have been mistaken earlier? I mean, it could be possible. "The Princess has been brainwashed by the evil dungeon!" Nevermind. They think she''s under mind control instead. Great. You know what, I can''t do this today. Why is nothing ever as simple as it should be? I need a day off after all that traveling around. What should have been a pleasant experience turned more and more into a choir as the days passed unsuccessfully. Now that I''m here, I''m already regretting it. I should have just told Edwan "No, I don''t want to meet your King." Why did I think this would be a good idea? Whatever, I''m going home. Maybe the elves will have calmed down by the time we return. I doubt it and, once again, I''m screwing over future me by leaving this problem to her. Poor Abi of Tomorrow. She''s gonna be super pissed at Abi of Yesterday. Although, she does kinda deserves it in my opinion. "Fuck this shit, we''re leaving." A quick nod is all the confirmation I need and in the blink of an eye, we''re back in Varona. The citizens bustling down the street create a steady racket, but it''s a welcoming one and is music to my ears. The sounds of their laughter and joy fill my world, subtly easing the building tension inside which I release with a sigh. I really thought that visit would have gone better than it did. "I didn''t want to say it, since it sounds a little racist, but those elves are proper dicks. A big bag of dicks... And not the good kind," unable to keep my thoughts to myself, they split out unintentionally. Instead of being annoyed at the hate I''m casting upon her people, Aura bursts out in laughter at my ridiculous reference. Knowing the elven Princess isn''t angry with me, I join in and enjoy it while I can. I doubt she''ll be happy when I ask for her aid again, but I''m definitely going to need it. Even if she doesn''t want to help me, I still have to ask. Before that can happen, a forced cough from behind and a disgruntled comment about male genitalia is enough for me to know that Assistant A heard every word that I just said. "Hey, Me." Knowing full well the ginger ninja has never been a fan of my vulgarity, I quickly try to move the conversation away from my last comment. "How are you today? Is everything OK, or do you need more DP?" I smile and he lets out a sigh, casting a sorrowful gaze towards the ground before looking to the heavens for assistance. Although, I don''t see what the big problem is. He can be as bad as I am sometimes. Plus, he isn''t going to find any help looking up there. They''re worse than I am those gods. A big bag of deity-sized dicks is all you''re going to find up there, buddy. "Quite. Kolena wants to speak with you. She''s on your tower and is..." Before he can say another word, I''ve already teleported over to the worst of us. "You better not be messing with my cuddlies," I announce on arrival, startling the curious so-called Goddess who was definitely just brushing my Direwolf up against her face. Eddie lands on the futon and I glare at Kolena like she''s a princess-stealing Dungeon Core. This type of face get through to people, as I''ve just learned firsthand through experience. Hopefully, my glaring might stop her unannounced visits to my tower, though it''s not likely. "What do you think you''re doing, Kolena? I swear to the... I mean, I''ve told you before not to touch them." I don''t need to be swearing to the gods whilst in front of one. Who knows what the little snitch would do me in for? I''m also 100% sure she''d sell me out in a heartbeat if it meant getting her title back. This bitch. "I... I don''t think you did." Her reply causes me to pause and I''m certain she''s one of the people I mentioned this to. In fact, I''m pretty sure this is the third time I''m telling her so. Gods just seem to think they can do what they want, where they want, with whoever they want and, if I''m being honest, in most places that would be true. Having a God residing in your town would undoubtedly cause the area and people to flourish. Their presence alone would promote so many benefits that humans everywhere would jump on the opportunity if it was presented to them. So who wouldn''t want to welcome a deity into their city? Someone who knows how they think on a deeper level, that''s who. Seriously, who in their right mind would give the Lazy God permission to live in their city? Certainly not me. That guy is way too picky about off-handed comments that he doesn''t stop to think. He just acts and... Well, look at where that got him. He''s probably waiting for his avatar to fix as I speak. Is that even how it works? Hold on a minute. Why don''t I have that skill? Where''s my avatar? Shouldn''t I have gotten it when I took his domain? Crap. The Queen of Question strikes again with another pile of unanswerable bullshit. "Well... I''ve told a lot of people and you hear more than they do. These are mine. I''ll make you your own if you want, but these are mine! There''s no ifs and buts here. Being from another plane of existence also means nothing. Most of these guys come from Syndicate requests, so they''re all originals. I can recreate anything though and I will give you some, so for the last time please don''t touch these." Otherwise, you might have to take an unplanned trip home. Back to wherever the hell it is you came from whilst you wait for your avatar to heal. Hell, you can even discuss philosophy with your lazy-ass colleague while you''re there. Support the author by searching for the original publication of this novel. I know I''m being petty with my self-centered request, but do I care? No. They''re only stuffed creatures and I can easily recreate them, but they hold sentimental value to me. In their own way, each one represents not only a mission but a reward. The Direwolf, for example, is the first cuddlie I obtained way back when. Eddie is priceless, if only to me. "I''m... Sorry? I didn''t think you would mind that much" You''d better be sorry as well. There are some lean, mean, God-killing machines in this dungeon, I''ll have you know. "Well, I do. So if you please." I motion for the Goddess to move aside and then quickly go over my collection. Ed, Ned, Ted, Deb, Seb, Fred and Jeb, are all fine. No one is missing and I can breathe. Life''s good. "OK. Me said you wanted to see me. What''s up?" I feel much better after making sure she hasn''t secretly stolen one of my treasures, but I still don''t feel like I can trust Kolena. At least not completely. Just the fact that the former Goddess of Beauty is from the same realm as the God Light killed completely overshadows the good work she''s doing in the reformation department. Teamed up with Hana, Mira, and Samantula, the latest Lazy God is not as reserved as her moniker would suggest. She''s also a far cry from the title''s predecessor. Not that she was known that way before, but I have long since claimed the right to be the Goddess of Beauty. Plus, I''ve been banging on about making people beautiful being my superpower since day one. Now that it''s confirmed, there''s nothing I like more than rubbing it Me''s face. That''s what happens to naysayers and non-believers, you know? They get told. "You said that I would become even-more beautiful by staying here. That is not happening. I want my title back." Pfft. Tell me another one, Kolena. That almost made me wet myself it was so funny. "And I want to bitch slap you back to the divine realm, but only with a great amount of effort am I managing to restrain myself." Through gritted teeth, Kolena doesn''t notice the internal struggle conflicting within me and continues to babble on about her unjust life. Little does she know that I don''t give two fucks about how unjust she thinks her life is. She damn well hasn''t had it as hard as me, or half the people on Tironia for that matter, that''s for sure. Lazy-ass loafers who are no better than the nobility and wouldn''t know a hard day''s graft if it slapped them in the face have no reason to complain about anything. Was she turned into a Dungeon Core after witnessing a sight no true maiden should ever have to witness? Is she forced to stay inside the confines of herself unless she knowingly makes herself larger? Does she have to listen to Assistant A banging on about her language and constantly reminding her to tone it down? I don''t think so! "I''m only going to say this once, Kolena, so listen closely and, for the love of everything you hold dear, pay attention. Go down to Talia''s and tell her that I said you can have as many Jacks as you want on the house. Then, find a nice young man and go home with him. That''s all. If, however, before you do any of that, you mention another damn word about how bad your life is, I will personally send your soul through the reincarnation cycle myself. Goddess or not! Understand?" Kolena''s quite pale as far as skin tone goes, but her colour whitens until it matches that of her clothes whilst she processes my words. Slowly - and with as much grace as a reappointed God can muster, she disappears from my sight. Hopefully off to do exactly as she was told. She needs it that one. Kolena is way too high-strung for her own good. Which is probably what most of the deities are like. I imagine there are more like Kolena than The System''s creator. Although, since he created the dungeon-making apparatus, doesn''t that mean he wasn''t that lazy once upon a time? Whatever. It would seem an easy life is still too much to ask for and a long way away. Then again, if we''re being honest, I''m not much help in that department either. Forever leaving the problems of today for my future self to clean up, I''m more of a culprit than anyone for making messes for myself to clean up. I''ve really got to get my shit together soon, but at least I''m not dumping it on other people anymore. That''s good, right? From the top of my tower, I watch as the people below take pleasure and enjoy the city that I created for them. Even with the frequent greetings I receive and the acknowledgment given from the church, I still feel like an outsider sometimes. Which is strange since I''m the one that created this place. Not that I ever envisioned Varona would turn out the way it has done. In hindsight, it was the foolish idea of an even more foolish person yet it came together magnificently. I couldn''t have predicted Gorn''s destruction and in no way am I happy that it happened, but without those tragic circumstances, I wouldn''t have half as many citizens as I do now or a fully-functioning city that takes care of itself. Yes, the council has their part to play, but even if they disappeared with me Varona would keep on going. Citizens work hard to guard and keep food production going - even though there''s no real need as my fields produce way more than they require, it''s a nice sight to see nonetheless. Plus, it''s better to be active than lounging around all day. Idle minds tend to wander and so do souls. With that thought, I grab an arm-full of Eds'' and close my eyes. Fully intending to go to sleep, my futon begins to adjust to my body and comfort envelops me. I let out a peaceful sigh and then the moment is ruined. "What are you doing?" Me''s voice disrupts my relaxing vibe and I can''t help but let out another sigh. This one, however, is far from peaceful and carries many curse words I chose not to voice. Maybe I should send Me to be Kolena''s drinking buddy. "What now, Me? I''ve only just gotten rid of of one problem. Can''t I just have five minutes for myself?" Rather than looking at him, I make the pink troll, whose name is Ned, do it for me instead. With a little magic, he even cocks an eyebrow at Me. Which goes completely unnoticed, causing a further bout of sighing from myself and Ned. "Unfortunately, there are a few other matters that require your attention today." His words break my heart. Wasn''t the whole reason I formed the council so that I could palm these matters off and live peacefully? I know damn well they were, so why do they keep swinging back my way? It was then that the answer to my problems appeared beside her senior. Surely You had arrived to voice her own opinions and suggestions, which are always dungeon-related, but before she gets the chance, Abi the Delegation Queen strikes again. "You. I''m glad you''re here." My clone, which is currently occupied by You''s consciousness, looks skeptical and my words don''t inspire her the way I thought they would. It doesn''t get any better as I go on either. "I''ve thought about this a lot," Obviously, I haven''t, "and I''ve decided to put you in charge of anything and everything that requires my attention." I still haven''t opened my eyes, but I feel a smile creep across my face. If only I meant it. "What!?" You pales at the monumental task I''ve just dumped in her lap. She shakes, tears up, and then looks to her senior for aid. At first, he looks off into the forest. The area that needs filling with monsters daily. He crumbles when she doesn''t let up, however. "Abi. You can''t delegate everything to You. She''s still quite new and is still coming to terms with how you operate." Me''s such a pushover when it comes to Assistant B. I wonder, if I was offering her his job, would he have a different opinion on the matter? Either way, I was only joking. I know I can''t palm this shit off on You. If I was going to delegate the task to anyone, it would be Deputy Mayor Sacha. Then again, that''s not such a bad idea. Maybe there''s some vacation time in my future after all. "I wasn''t really going to dump it all on You. Relax, Me. I''m getting better at handling and seeing things through these days." With You off the hook, she looks a lot better now that my responsibilities aren''t hanging over her head. I don''t even know why she''s worried. It''s not that hard being the Dungeon Core. "Then why are you laid up here and not in the elven capital?" As per the norm, Me''s words are a slap in the face that call my bullshit out regardless of the subject. Seconds was all it took for animosity to return and my mood to be ruined. Reluctantly, I open my eyes, sit up, and glare at Me. Stupid, hateful elves. Why do they have to be so mean? Aura didn''t help the situation either with her choice of words and it would''ve probably gone better had I not summoned her in the first place, to be honest. Still, I''d like to see him do a better job. Huh? That''s not actually a bad idea eother. "I''ll tell you what, Me. Tomorrow, you can try speaking with the elves instead..." Chapter 127: Human It''s not often that I shock Me. Even with some of the shit that I come out with. There''s been a few times in the past, but they were more about my dungeon portfolio as opposed to what I had to say. Most sentences he can brush off like a bad smell, but it''s always nice to watch when I catch him by surprise. Afterwards, however, he looks more annoyed than anything. He obviously didn''t like that one, but I thought it was hilarious. It gave me a good enough laugh that I''m ready to get back to it. By that, I mean I''m ready to listen to You and not scare her to death. Ignoring Me''s frustration, I ask Assistant B what brings her to my tower. She only ever turns up for dungeon-related topics, so I already have a good idea what she wants to talk about. "She can wait. I''m not meeting those elves. I don''t even want to go in the forest around Varona these days, monster population is getting a bit boring. That certainly doesn''t mean I''m going to clean up that mess you created." Now it''s Me''s turn to be mean. Still, his last sentence catches my attention and I can''t help but fluster. "You saw that?" Obviously, I''m referring to Aura''s arrival, Aura slagging the elves off, and then, Aura fleeing with me as soon as I decided being there was a lost cause. It wasn''t the best scene to witness. "Aura was on fire, wasn''t she?" he grins. It''s nice now that Me has a sense of humour, but I wish he wouldn''t use it at my expense. How am I supposed to laugh and say, "Good one, buddy," when my first impression in the elven lands is the butt of his joke. I was really hoping for it to would go well. Stupid elves and their slander. Maybe I should go and eat one or two of them. I bet that would quiet ''em down. If only it was that easy. "Dungeon Core Abi. The Goblins have... You must come now and inspect the dungeon." How easy it is to fall so low in someone''s opinion when they say daft shit like that. I''ve almost gotten passed her pronouncing my title every time she says my name, but when the conversation You wants to have is about Goblins... "And when she threw that stone... Hilarious. That poor little elf though. I hope her head heals properly. That was a perfect shot from Aura." Me isn''t even listening to You and is still laughing his ass off over Aura''s antics. My thoughts on the matter are quite different, but all I can think about is the dungeon. I''m not bothered about Aura throwing stones. They''re lucky I didn''t wipe them out with my Void Beam. Still, levelling up the population takes priority and the little, green bastards are needed for just that. That means when there''s a problem You can''t handle, it''s upto Super Mama to sort shit out. I''m certainly not going just to get away from Me. Ginger prick. "OK, You. Let''s go check on the little green bastards, shall we?" Leaving Me to laugh in solitude, I port myself and You over to the source of her concerns where I find two groups mid-argument. With no Catergoriser or guide around to mediate, the quarrel is escalating by the second. Good things someone''s here to deal with things. If only past me could hear me now. Boasting about taking care of problems. "Hey. What''s going on?" I know You needs me to deal with the Goblins, but this shouldn''t take long. Plus, solving disputes is easy when you wield all the power. At my arrival, both groups turn to me and began speaking over each and I catch none of it. Well, almost none of it. What I got was that group A don''t like how group B are looking at their women. Group A being compromised of both men and women whereas group B is straight-up testosterone. Group B also look a little off in my opinion as well. None of them are wearing armour and they have barely a scrap of clothing between them. If I didn''t know any better, I''d say these guys are out here doing their best Goblin impression. A quick look at the worry written on You''s face is enough to send my heart into my stomach. Her eyes are darting between the Goblin impersonators and all can think about is her problem. She didn''t specify what that problem was, but it can''t be this, right? "Master. This human won''t give me his woman. If I beat him down, I can take her. Yes?" Fuck off. Just... No. I must look angry because You''s knees are knocking. Which are really my knees since she''s still in my clone. I''ll have to make her a body later l, but right now I need to resolve... This, without setting off my Dungeon Rage. It''s been a while since that''s happened, but I can already feel my blood boiling and my temperature rising. There''s no way this good-looking, under-sized, crooked-nosed human is a Goblin. It doesn''t make any sense. Yet, by what he said, this predicament must be exactly what You needed me for. She can deal with a good bit of difference from everyday Dungeon Core''in, but this is well above her pay grade. Hell. Goblin humans should be above mine. In fact... "Huh?" Caught in a daze, Sis can''t work out whether to smile at seeing me, or worry due to the location she''s been summoned. I''d suggest the former since she''s about to get roasted. Ignoring the arguing going on beside me, I stare down the source of my problem. Problems if you want to be specific. Since day one, this bitch has been a pain in my butt whilst giving a few free upgrades here and there like she''s some sort of saint. The Sanctuary, trademark Abi, is her crowing glory and yes, the sun-endowed room where my dungeon-residing summons live is worth a great deal of praise. However, that alone doesn''t excuse hardly knowing where to take my next step since nothing works or upgrades like it''s supposed too. So yeah, I suggest she worry because this conversation is long overdue. "What is that?" I point at the human from Group B, still arguing semantics on why he should be allowed to take fmthe female from Group A. He herself is firmly against the idea, but the Goblin human is still trying to talk his way into it happening. Threatening may be a better description, but they haven''t drawn blades yet so that''s one thing. "An argument?" Sis shrugs as though she has no idea what I mean and my rage rises as I try to control it. "Don''t play dumb, Sis. Today is not the day to be a smart-ass. Today is answer day.l because I''m sick and tired of being in the dark. I want to know, right now!" OK. Maybe that wasn''t the best way to get my point across, but I''m sick and tired of flying blind. Only saying I want to know doesn''t exactly help anyone and I''m almost a little confused myself. "I meant, why? Why are the Goblins turning human? In what sort of world does that shit make sense? Shouldn''t they just be really good-looking Goblins? What''s the need to add hair and change their skin colour? Eh? Why? Why, Sis? Why?" She looks at the best-looking Goblins in the world before turning back to me. Before she can answer I''ve already dived into my next spiel. The narrative has been illicitly obtained; should you discover it on Amazon, report the violation. "Features don''t upgrade properly, Summons won''t display future evolutionary data, monsters look more-human than the actual-fucking-humans! Meditation caused me nightmares, my Core nearly shattered and you don''t seem to know your ass from your elbow. So why, Sis? Why?" "For the majority of unexplainable circumstances, I can attest to having no hand in the matter. Dungeon Cores shape and use mana on a fundamentally differently level than humans can. In turn, the mana responds and acts accordingly with the dungeon''s will. It can even go as far as to altering nature to fit the whims of a Dungeon Core. Everything else is because you are a reincarnated human with her memories intact." Shockingly, I get answer. Not the answer I wanted, but it''s enough to sedate my rage. It''s also funny because she''s trying to push the blame on mana. Like it''s a physical thing and not made of elemental properties. Still, that doesn''t account for everything and while we''re playing the who''s to blame game, let''s talk about the sponge in my field. "That feature was... Is..." Sis hangs her head in shame. That''s what I thought. Sis can''t pass blame on the Hay Bale to Mana since she wasn''t involved in its creation. That feature still riles me up today when I think about it. I don''t even talk about the fact the I''ve upgraded the Bale of Fortune three times since then and had no success whatsoever. "And what about the Gacha?" She looks up about to defend herself, "I could have used a few more Barrys back then, you know?" before she returns to her original stance. Head dropped, shoulders slumped. I''m about ti cry, written all over face. There are hundreds of examples I want to voice, however, the sound of a blade being drawn forces me to shelf the discussion once more. If I''m being honest though, I don''t really want to hear what she has to say. Not now anyway. I feel much better after voicing my frustrations at her. "I don''t deal with everything. I have subsystems that deal with a lot of problems. They even have their own subsystem and there are further systems below them. I mean, I could call over Brian, Daisy and Pete, but you would be less happy after meeting them." As I''m talking down the stab-happy Goblin, Sis once more passes blame. This time, on her own subordinates. She nods along with herself as I slap Gobby Goblin into a wall. I''ve had enough. I''m really trying to keep my cool, but after being laughed at by Me and bullshited by Sis I''ve had enough. The stupid, woman-obsessed Goblin didn''t help anyone''s case when he tried arguing semantics either. All he earned himself was an I-don''t-care slap and a who''s-the-boss-in-this-dungeon glare before I turned back to Problem Causer A. "I might actual decree it a rule that you will be forever know as Problem Causer A if you don''t buck up on your accountability. When you''ve done some stupid shit, don''t say it wasn''t me. Say, fucking, sorry!" My glare from Goblin paste persists through my rant at The System. Made obvious since she cowers away from me. Personally, I don''t think I''m particularly scary. Sure, I have a mouth on me and a short temper, but I know what''s acceptable and what''s not. For example, it''s not like I''d eat the dungeon-creating System just for not taking responsibility. Would I joke about and make it sound like I was really going to do it though? Absolutely. "I wonder. What would actually happen if I ate you?" At my off-handed question, Sis passes out and the room falls silent. Half of the humans silently edge towards the tunnel that leads out whereas the monstrous half have turned into statues. All of them looking anywhere but at me. You can''t believe what she just heard and is looking around flabbergasted, probably snitching on me as I speak to Assistant A. He was probably watching anyhow. At this point, I''m sure that he gets entertainment from watching my tribulations. Why? I''m not sure. He was complaining about his job earlier though and, thinking about, it can''t be all that challenging for him. All he has to do is make sure the area around Varona is populated with monsters since not everyone can enter the dungeon at the same time. If he doesn''t want to do it anymore though, what am I going to do? I certainly don''t want to do that shit. Plus, Sis and You already have jobs and I''m unsure whether Kolena''s able to use DP. Not that I trust the former Goddess of Beauty enough to let her play with my purse even if she can. "D-Dungeon Core Abi. You''re not r-really going to est the system are you?" I bet Me''s laughing his head off right now. I''m sure he''s told You not to take me seriously in most cases, but his words have fallen on deaf ears today. Poor Assistant B looks horrified. "Of course I''m not going to eat The System. Could you imagine what might happen if I did? I''d probably be out in charge of her work aswell as my own! Screw that. There''s already enough problems to delegate, avoid and sweep under the rug, as it is. I could do without adding to those intentionally, you know? Plus, she probably doesn''t that good." You doesn''t look as reassured as I''d hoped she would, but there are more problems in this cave than what she thinks I''ll do. "You four," I turn to the humans slowly edging towards the tunnel, "Don''t move. You''re not in trouble and nothing bad is going to happen. This is all a misunderstanding and I just wanna resolve it before you go spreading baseless rumors." Doing as they''re told, feet stop shuffling and they all turn to face me. Which makes me feel awful because they look worse than You. If she was horrified then these humans are petrified. In my defence, they don''t have all the facts. They don''t know that the human passed out on the floor is actually The System that creates and monitors dungeons. Nor do they know she''s the biggest pain in arse going and the source of many headaches and stress. If they did, those fearful expressions might be sympathetic instead. Who am I kidding? "First of all, I don''t eat anyone that doesn''t deserve it. That means you better make sure you live a good life. Understand?" Confusion spreads among the group as they look at each other in befuddlement before they all nod vigorously at me. "Good. Second, even if I ate this annoying woman on the floor, the human population on Tironia would budge a single figure. Do you know what that means?" More confusion is passed around like salt at dinner and this time no response comes my way. "It means she isn''t a person at all. That doesn''t mean you have to be afraid of her, it just means she a massive pain in the.... She''s tricky to deal with. That''s what I mean." The woman at the back of the group begins to cry and I can''t help but wonder where I went wrong. I thought I was explaining myself rather well this time. "Hey, I already said I''m not going to eat anyone. Why are you so upset?" Being spoken to directly only makes things worse. Her knees go weak and she collapses, caught by her party before she hits the floor. The adventurer is still conscious, but it doesn''t look like she''s doing well mentally. Maybe I should just avoid humans until they get stronger? It always ends up being a one-sided conversation anyway, so what''s the point? The goblin/human statues haven''t moved an inch, which would be commendable if not for the fact that they''re Goblins and I pass them on my way towards the human adventurers. Who look worse the closer I get. What can I do to resolve this quickly? All I wanted to do was relax for a minute in my tower, but here I am, dealing with more stupid shit. Four mithril daggers appear in the air before the adventurers and I swear I hear them gulp. They''re not for that reason. Manipulating the mana, I move them closer to the adventurers without actually nearing myself. "They''re for you. A gift from me. I get that you''re probably freaked out after witnessing that exchange, but there are no ill intentions here. I promise. In fact, I''m going to take Sis, You and the Goblins, and we''ll leave first. That way she can get some rest and you three can have peace of mind." Not a single Adventurer has said a word since I made Goblin paste. Even now, there are no words of gratitude and the only silence responds to me. Whatever. A thank you would be nice, but I suppose I''m at fault in the first place. Check me out growing up and shit. I''m almost mature these days. Wrapping You, Sis and the Goblin statues, in teleportation, I move us all to the lower floors. Two statues fall over on arrival and Sis''s body thumps off the floor, still unconscious. How the dungeon-creating System is able to fall unconscious in the first place, I have no idea and don''t want to know either. I''m past it now and just want to go chill out. "Oi! Nob heads. Stop pretending to be statues and start grovelling now. That''s the only way your surviving this without being dismantled. Trying to abduct human females and in the dungeon no less! What the hell do you think you''re playing at?" The pink-skinned monster humans assume the position, but I''m at a loss with what to do with them. With everyone else I''ve summoned, this is the point where they''re allowed to mingle with the humans in Varona. Fuck knows what I''m going to do with the Goblins though. My first thought is to dismantle them, Goblinators and all, and replace them with trolls. It''s getting harder and harder to keep hating them when they no longer represent the little, green shits they are. That said, I can''t unleash them on the society outside until they''ve learned basic human etiquette. Like not threatening people for their women. To do that, the passed out trouble causer will find she has a new job when she wakes up. Not only will she be in charge of the Dragon Daycare, but Goblins are now her number one priority. Fingers crossed she''s got enough brains to get through it without killing anyone. Chapter 128: The Errors Of Yesterday Well... I suppose it was inevitable. I''d already noticed the Goblins becoming better looking and it was only a matter of time before what happened actually came to pass. However, it isn''t what I was expecting when You said we were having Goblin problems. Still, it isn''t anything Sis can''t handle. Not that she wanted to be left in charge of that many Goblins, and when I told her, she almost passed out again, but a good System should be able to manage anything, right? They are her creations after all. I know I summoned the Goblins, but since Sis created me, so technically, this is all on her. For now, I can happily forget about the whole "Goddess of Beauty" thing and leave it all to my creator. It''s her fault I''m in this mess after all. If I had gone through the cycle of reincarnation like everyone else, I wouldn''t have known about all the extra complexities life entails. Not that I can leave it all to Sis. She gets flustered too easily that one. Because of that, a very unhappy You was chosen as her second in command. It''s a good job that scowls, pouts and begging on one''s knees isn''t enough to change the mind of this Dungeon Core. Nope. I t''s a good job she didn''t turn on the waterworks though. I''ve already got enough on my plate as it is. If it was only the four Goblins to deal with, I could probably handle that quick enough and get back to work. The problem is that it isn''t just those four Goblins. There''s a thousand more of them living on the floor above The Sanctuary looking better than any Goblin has the right to look. They are the ones I summoned myself before unlocking the Goblinator. I should have known this was going to happen. When they started to grow hair and changing skin colour, that should have been enough to kick my ass into action. Instead, I chucked them to the bottom of the dungeon and forgot about them. But that''s what happens when you keep sweeping problems under the rug. They turn into humans and come back to bite you in the metaphorical dungeon bum. Poor You. It''s her fault that this happening, but she has been placed in charge of dungeon management. I would feel bad if I took her position away. Which means it''s upto her to take care of any problems that arise inside my dungeon. It''s definitely not because I''m trying to avoid dealing with the Goblins myself. Like I said, I''ve already got a full plate and numerous side dishes to contend with. I certainly don''t need a helping of Goblins for dessert. Fuck. That. My patience is already stretched thin as it is. The last thing I need is barbequed elf because I''ve took on more than I could chew. Aside from You, I don''t feel sorry Sis one bit. That bitch has had this coming from day one and nothing makes me happier than seeing her struggling with Goblins. "Don''t you think that was a little harsh, Mom?" Rebecca doesn''t look impressed as I watch Sis'' tribulations with a massive smile plastered across my face. Goblins are ridiculous monsters. Even though they''re summoned by myself, miss Dungeon Core Supreme, they don''t seem to want to follow my orders like the others. That doesn''t mean they don''t do as they''re told but, without breaking the rules, they try everything they can to be what their species dictates they are. Goblins! Hence the quarrel on the upper floor. There was no blood shed, not until I turned up at least, but they were still trying to get their hands on a female human. I don''t want to think about what would happen if they had succeeded, but whatever it would have been can never come to fruition. Ever. If it did... "Maybe I should just turn all the Goblins to paste and replace them with trolls." Watching Sis wiggle a finger in the face of one of her uncooperative charges, I open my eyes and return to the peaceful sight of my city. "Unless you start dealing with your problems properly, they''ll just keep cropping up here and there." Ever the spoilsport, Me is still at my tower and still on my case as he graciously informs me that shit won''t better unless I play a hand in dealing with it. The only hand I personally want to offer is the backhand, but that''s also not the way to go. Not unless I''m riled up, that is. Then it solves most problems. "Why are you still here? Don''t you have some populating to go and do?" Trying to get rid of my nagger, I remind him that he has a job to do. "I don''t want to do that anymore, Abi. It''s boring. It doesn''t take long to check on the Monsternators since they''re self sufficient, but it''s the worst part of my day. Porting round the forest sucks!" Wow. When did Me turn into a whining teenager? It actually makes me chuckle listening to him complain like that. It''s even funnier that he threw in a word that''s not a word. More so since I''m usually the one making up stupid shit and he''s forever correcting me. I quite liked it though so I won''t mention it. I''m definitely stealing that one though. "What do you suggest then, Me? There''s only a few of us able to use DP and I''m not down for letting Kolena in on the action yet. I don''t trust her yet. She''s definitely going to try something to get her title back though. I guarantee it." "Why are the gods your first port of call? You have been summoning capable people since the day you were created. Hell, it''s safe to say that some are even more capable than the Core herself," he digs. "Hey! Do you want to be let off your duty or not?" "My most sincere apologies your Royal Questionableness." No need to be a kiss-ass either though, even though it does rub me the right way.Help support creative writers by finding and reading their stories on the original site. "Hold on. Did you just say that my summons can use DP? Since when was that a thing? I thought no one but me, you, You, and Sis, could use my points. If not, where did I get that idea from?" I''m a few years in as a Dungeon Core now. I should really be on top of my game with knowledge that relates to me. Instead, I feel like a baby. Still taking my first steps even though I own a quarter of the fucking region. I pull in some big-girl points every day, but still get stumped over trivial shit like this. "Since they evolved and became Bosses," he flicks a bogey from my tower and I can''t help but scowl. Not because of Me''s poor manners, but because I still don''t know shit. Becca looks appalled at his disgusting mannerism, however, she doesn''t say anything. There''s a problem here. Like... A massive problem. It''s so big, that I''m already debating running away to my domain for a couple of days. There''s still a lot to learn. Although, it isn''t what I don''t know that''s causing me grief, it''s who I need to learn it from. Sis and Me, who would have made a much better Tweedledum and Tweedledee than the Assassins themselves, are my only sources of knowledge when it comes to anything dungeon-related. Me was created to aid and guide the Core on its path to whatever-the-hell-it-is-that-other-Cores-do. And Sis? She''s the gods-damn System itself. She creates Cores and knows everything! Or so she''d have you believe. In reality, she''s full of shit. Granted, she did a good job in the Dragon Daycare, but let''s be honest. How hard is it to take care of a bunch of Dragons that inspire peace and happiness wherever they go? She''s got the easiest job in the city... Or on the mountain, since the Daycare was placed out of the way. But even that decision was made more because of Sis than the Dragons. She hadn''t been here that long when I decided to put her to work and ship her off up the mountain with Becca. To be fair, Sis did have to deal with the Rebellion Dragon drumming away 24/7. Now that Becca''s evolved into the world''s best daughter, Sis must be living on easy street, up there out of the way on her relatively modest tower. It must be super peaceful and chill up there all the time... This bitch! How dare she? How very dare she!? She getting to do exactly what I want to do everyday and it was me that set it all up for her. She''s even got her own fucking tower to watch everything from. Oh, she''s gonna get another piece of my mind when I see her. "She can also hear your thoughts like I can. She told me when we were at Talia''s. It''s probably why she''s... Nevermind." I''m trying my best to stay calm, but there''s always something else. Since when was he best friends and drinking buddies with Sis? And I knew it! I knew she could hear me. "When did that even happen? I thought you didn''t like drinking? Every time I bring it up, you say you''re still not over the Jacks." Yeah, I know. I could have said a million different things instead, but that''s where I went. Damn right it is. I''m jelly as fuck right now. I thought Me was supposed to be my friend? "Well... Sis isn''t as... She wouldn''t... When we..." he sighs as I bounce in anticipation, waiting for him to finish a fucking sentence. My mood is not easing off at all and I really do need to disappear for a while. However, I''m not going anywhere without hearing what he has to say first. Me looks everywhere but in my direction and I wait patiently. Or as patiently as an irate Dungeon Core can. Becca looks anxious as my foot as taps away and I fold my arms in annoyance since he seems to have forgotten how to form words. "C''mon, Me. I''m not that bad, am I?" He looks upset that I want to see where this ends, but I''m vexed. The last, and first time, we drank, Me managed to throw up more than he''d drank and I passed out after a giggle fit. But that''s just a typical friday night in the mortal realm. Plus, it''s not like I''m asking him to match me drink for drink. "I don''t want to tell you about it because I know you won''t be happy." His words are a like an empty jug in the desert, useless. They make no sense because I''m already unhappy that he doesn''t want to drink with me. More so since I''m the one who told him how cool all this shit would be once he got a body. Now... It''s like he''s dissing me because I''m not one of the cool crowd. I''m a rule breaker. A System crasher. A menace to the status quo of society who does what she wants when she feels like it. Ostracised by my own temperament and mind set. I wanna say who cares, but I do. Sensing that I''m not letting this go, Me sighs in defeat and gives me a brief recap of our first and only night out. "After passing out I thought the night was over, but you woke up shortly after. Then, you near-enough dragged me to the Pleasure Palace where I had to endure the weirdest experience of my short-lived life. I wished to never revisit that moment. Afterwards, you took me to Veris'' room and she... She..." He doesn''t finish his sentence, but the look on his face says it all. I have no words whatsoever, which is a first for me. A complete melt down on anything and everything logical has occurred and I''m struggling to process what I heard. In fact, I want to disappear right now, but I''m even at at loss for that. "I went... To the Pleasure Palace..." The whisper escapes my lips and Me nods in response. I see Becca''s lips twitching before she turns away from us and I can''t help but notice that Me doesn''t seem to find our current topic as funny as the one from earlier. Which is funny because that''s the only thing I seem to be able to comprehend. "Good. Great," I lie. "In fact, I think I remember now. It was a smashing night." Putting on my confidence face, I act like I don''t give two shits where we went or what we did and the look on Me''s face is priceless. He''s mortified. It''s almost like he''s been keeping a secret that everyone knew. More probable is that it has something to do with what went down in Veris'' room. Truth be told, I want to curl up in a ball and fucking die. What was I doing at Veris''? Getting a paddling? I fucking hope not. More so, why the hell has no one else thought to mention this? "That''s why I was drinking with Sis. She doesn''t make me do weird shit like you do." "Well... That''s not not true, but you don''t have to say it like that. However, her creating you to be a Core-teaching mini-system in the first place is pretty fucking weird if you ask me. Just saying..." Neither of us say anything more and Becca manages to calm herself down a little. After a minute of silence, I pull my finger out and put on my big-girl pants. "I''m sorry, Me. Now, I''m going to chill out for a while because I''m seriously rattled after that. See ya." With that, I boot up my Domain and a brief "Abi," is all I catch before I''m sat in the comfiest chair in existence. I love this place. "This is, without a doubt, thee best perk of Godhood. Is that what they''d call it? Godhood. Deityisation? That sounds pretty stupid now that I''ve said it. Hmm..." I turn the fire up and kick back in my cosy, little cabin. A picture of Me and You hangs on the wall beside the bookcase and I can''t help but wonder when that appeared there. "I know," I say to the Me in photo. "Even I thought that last one was pretty stupid. At least you''re not here to ride the cart on that one." I laugh until the Mini Me rolls his eyes and I almost fall out of my chair in shock. After checking it a dozen times, however, it appears that it''s just my imagination running wild. The Pleasure Palace, Abi? Really? Really!? That''s what happens when you can''t handle your booze. "I''m so stupid. That''s certainly not how a God Core is supposed to act. Oh! God Core, I like that one. Much better than Godhood and we''ve already forgotten about Deityisation." Rehanging the photo next to the bookcase, I kick back in my chair and smile. Trying my best not to imagine myself in compromising scenarios with Veris. "Abi the God Core has a nice ring to it, even if I do say so myself." Chapter 129: Aura Due to an overbearing parent, a youth spent on the sheltered side of the elven hierarchy system, and an act of injustice, no species should ever have to suffer, Aura holds no kinship towards her race. All alone on Mount Morte, she couldn''t stop her emotions from spilling free. The cruel actions of her father and the reason she decided to abandon her home had plagued her mind since she had returned. The circumstances leading up to the events of her kidnapping had been a major oversight on the elven princess'' part, but that wasn''t what caused her waterworks. More than anything in the world, Aura missed her friends. Not the women in town that she''d grown close with and certainly not the pointy-eared jerks that were badmouthing Abi. No. When she was known as Princess Aura, the young elf had a group of friends called the Paupers. At half her size, and what tomatoes would like like if they had faces, limbs, and wore proper clothes, the vegetable people never failed to make Aura laugh. The unsociable princess never responded well to those within her age group or those above. She believed they all had secret agendas. Which they actually did. Elven nobility was no different to that of any other. Brown nosing. Backstabbing. Bootlicking. Nobility is the same regardless of species. Entitled, unjustified and propped up in society by a generation long gone and laws decreed centuries ago by a higher type of self-serving, dickhead. Kings can be much worse than the nobility and Aura''s father wasn''t any better than the last few. Not that it made him a bad father. After years spent apart, Aura came to understand why he gave that terrible order, but that didn''t mean she would be able to forgive him. Never. The princess visited the Paupers every day. Rejecting her father''s pleas to make friends in the palace and stay above ground. Maybe if she had done as she was told, she would never have decided to run away. Maybe her friends would still be alive. She wasn''t the friendliest elf. That was a fact, but the friends she did have were enough. They kept her spirits high, and in turn, she played with them for hours. Sometimes until the sun went down. On those days, a safety lecture would be waiting to greet her the moment she arrived. Regardless of the time, there were always words to be had on her return. Ordering the guards sent to protect her to stay home just wasn''t appropriate. For those reasons, and probably more that she was unaware of, Aura''s best friends were gone. The sweetest, kindest souls she had ever met before finding herself in Varona. Until now, Aura had only felt happiness with the Paupers. However, after her owner was killed by the mad elf Hiroshi and she was forcefully dragged into the human lands, Aura is actually happy and still does not want to return home. Thankfully, Abi isn''t the type that would make her do something like that either. Not unless she got on the wrong side of her somehow. Then again, if the events of today are anything to go by, the elven princess might just stay on the mountain for a few more days. Aura, the Elven Princess
As much as I love my Domain, it gets lonely fast, and unless I bring others along with me, I don''t usually stay for more than a day or two. Not that this place isn''t kick-ass. Honestly, these self-proclaimed gods are living a life of luxury in their domains. The amount of control I have in my own Domain far surpasses what I can do in my dungeon. Not that I''m slacking on that front other than what I do and do not know. It''s just the comparison. It''s ridiculous. For example, I can randomize my bookshelf with novels I''ve never even heard of. How? No idea. But that''s just a small fraction of what makes this place unique. The time dilation, terrain customization, I''m even able to create copies of myself to test shit out on without a DP cost; everything about my domain is amazing. Everything other than how boring it gets. Then again, I''m probably not even using this place to its potential. I should have brought Becca with me. Letting out a sigh, I half regret disappearing. Not because I didn''t need a break, but because I now know what I''m returning to. It could be worse, however. I could not have a Domain to run away to. Kicking off the chair, I''m back at my tower by the time I land. "Don''t you dare," finishing the warning that started before I left, Assistant A points his finger at me and I can''t help but grin. Me acts like my parent sometimes, and as annoying as his lectures can be, at least it makes me feel wanted.The tale has been stolen; if detected on Amazon, report the violation. It''s completely the opposite of how that bunch of pointy-eared bastards made me feel earlier. "Get over yourself, Dad. I''ve been and gone already." His annoyance is clear and it doesn''t end with a scowl. His face is red and there may as well be steam rising from his ears. "It''s not productive when you disappear for days on end. Or... What would class as days if time still progressed for the rest of us... You know what I mean!" His argument is the same as usual. At least his teenage angst has taken a backseat, and he''s not complaining about his job. "But no time has actually passed. How is that not productive? When I''m there, I''m able to think about everything I need to." And cool off, kick back and de-stress from everything going on all the time. "Well?" He cocks his head to the side and asks a daft question. "Did you manage to come up with a way to solve the problem then?" Good one, Me. Which problem? The gods? Sis? Me and You? Fine. Smartass knows damn well I didn''t do anything productive. I bet he thinks that I lazed around for a few days recuperating until I got bored. Which isn''t far off the mark really, but it''s not like I''m going to admit it. Not a chance. To be honest, though, his argument might have some validity. Apart from the elves, I can''t think of anything else that needs my attention more than them. More so since Aura cussed out every single one the last time we were there. I''m still not sure why she acted that way, but feel like it would be awkward to ask now. Hopefully, she''ll tell one of her friends later and I can just eavesdrop the deets. I could do without having the awkward conversation myself. I have enough of those. Right now, however, we''re going for round two. Not bothering to dignify Me with an answer, I port myself and Becca to the mountain where a lonely-looking elf is wallowing in self-pity. She kinda reminds me of myself when I found out I''d just become a Dungeon Core. Except that she''s still got a rocking bod'' so buck up princess. Yeah, I know. Abi the Meanie strikes again. How dare I interrupt her privacy to ask her to come with me again? How dare I? Well, it''s either this or endure the smug look on Me''s face when he finds out he was right. Not that dealing with the elves isn''t important. It''s the definition of important. Super important. In fact, it''s that important that here am, disturbing a crying princess who travelled partway up the mountain clearly to be alone. Abi the Downright Terrible is more like it. Unfortunately for Aura, it''s tough. Sometimes in life, you''ve got to put your big girl pants on and suck it up. Whether you want to or not. More so when your Dungeon Core landlady needs a favour and wants to ditch her overbearing assistant. "Hey, Aura," I wave as she spins around. Startled at my appearance she quickly tries to hide her tears. It doesn''t work, and I pretend like I haven''t just interrupted a crying princess with snot dripping from her nose. "Sorry for disturbing you, but I''ve got a proposition," I don''t. I just started winging it in on the spot because it became awkward immediately. Honestly, I don''t know where my confidence goes sometimes. Although, I reckon it''s the tears. "So. Erm... Oh! I''ve got this," I pull a jade shard from my storage and hold it out to the elf. "This is a piece of my Dungeon Core. It''s... It can..." Hmm. What would it do for Aura? Actually. This might not be such a good idea. Who knows what will happen if I let her have this? Deciding to switch the carrot to something a little less life-threatening, I''m beaten to the punch as the princess takes the shard faster than I can store it. The fragment of my core evaporates into a green mist and her body absorbs it before I''m able to say anything. Her eyes turn from fiery red to the same jade green as the shard she absorbed. I watch on anxiously, waiting. Hoping. Until finally, nothing else happens. Or at least nothing that I can see. Who knows what''s going on inside her body? Aura''s the first non-dungeon person to absorb a piece of my core. There''s no precedent for what might happen next. None. "You didn''t even let me get to the offer." I don''t know what else to say. I mean, what sort of person jumps in feet first and blind like that? She didn''t even hesitate, swallowing that shard like it was dessert from Ali''s. Why is everyone around here so reckless? What if it had been dangerous? What if she''d have died? That shit would have been on me. Is my foresight really that bad? I''ve never really been one to make plans, but this spur-of-the-moment gig is a fine line to walk sometimes. Back to Aura though, she didn''t even wait to hear what I had to say. Imagine if I''d come to ask Elven Royalty to be Veris'' new assistant? I''m not, but what would she say if that were the case? She''s already taken payment. "I''m sorry, Abi. I didn''t expect it to disappear. Where did it go?" Is she joking? She doesn''t look to be, but the Princess seems fine all things considered. "What do you mean, ''Where did it go?'' You absorbed it!" Aura doesn''t look too pleased by that statement and I can''t help but sigh. The one time I decide not to do something reckless, someone else does it for me. "What do you mean I absorbed it? How did that happen? It was a crystal." As Aura checks herself to make sure she''s OK, I can''t help but wonder how she managed to miss it. Nor can I fathom how other people''s thoughts process. Coming to decisions and turning them into actions. "I... It''s... You tell me, Aura. If you were created by me, I could understand what happened and attribute it as dungeon-related. But this? You?" I point my finger at her from top to bottom. "I don''t know." Pulling a mirror out, I pass it to the princess who spends a full minute staring at her reflection. Apparently, she''s delighted with the changes. I get it. Green eyes are cool. What''s not are the stupid situations I keep getting caught up in by not thinking things through first. "I look like a hero." I wouldn''t go that far, Aura. Maybe you''ve got the looks, but it''s what''s on the inside that makes a hero. After the vulgarity that escaped your lips this morning, you certainly don''t fit that bill. I won''t say that to your face, though. Promise. "That''s probably not the only change you''ll find, but we can work out the rest later." However, if it improves your attitude a smidgen towards your race, you won''t hear me complaining. "Now, we need to go back to the Elven Capital because it''s grating on me that we got such a shitty welcome last time." "Huh?" Aura seems confused. Did I not mention that part? No. I didn''t get a chance to, because an impatient elf took it upon herself to throw a wrench in things. "Yep. That''s right. That''s what I was going to ask before you grabbed my core quicker than a child-snatching witch." The look on her face makes me feel evil, not that I''m expecting her to fight my corner this time. I just want her present when we meet the King, that''s all. For the rabble and hate slingers, I have a different solution. One that''s much more reliable than hedging my bets on a foul-mouthed princess with quick-fingers. The Elf King When I get my hands on Edwan, there''s going to be more than just harsh words spoken. The soldier/delegate had told me that a warm reception awaited my arrival, but his words couldn''t have been further from the truth if he tried. Instead, here I am instilling fear into the nature-loving species next door because they just won''t shut up. It didn''t matter what Aura tried, or how hard Becca attempted to reason with them, nor how hard I glared; the only thing keeping them from speaking up again is the crater where the forest on their doorstep used to be. Yeah, yeah. There were many ways we could have played this back and forth out. Mine just happened to be the easiest, quickest and most convenient path to ending the problem. Since that''s happened, no one''s said a word. Nada. Not a single peep. Hell, they haven''t even looked at me the wrong way. Granted, not many of them stuck around afterwards and the ones that did don''t seem to be conscious anymore, but it makes getting where we need to be much easier. Now that the elves have made themselves scarce, I''m able to take in the beautiful sights their city has to offer. The canopy above has been cropped and the light shining down blends harmoniously with the natural setting. Passing a fountain in what I assume is the city centre, I wonder how they keep it spurting out water before I settle on "Magical bullshittery" and move on. Last thing I need is to get stuck in thought in a place I''m not particularly liked. Our destination, the largest tree in sight, gets closer as we continue through the city, which turns out isn''t as big as I first thought it to be. Considering the elven capital has been around longer than my city, I''m surprised to see it''s not much bigger than Varona. I know I have dungeon magic on my side when it comes to all things construction, but elves know magic too. Evident by the interlocked branches we''re walking on, hundreds of feet above the ground. It seems as though Varona is on track to surpass the natural city of foul-mouthed, tree-loving elves in just a few years. With ample housing options, a variety of employment opportunities, top-notch security measures, a stable environment to level up, and an abundance of amenities and entertainment options, Varona truly has it all. This realization fills me with a sense of pride and satisfaction, as it is evident that my city is a truly remarkable place to live. In fact, the only thing we''re lacking is a crime rate. It goes to show that when problems are handled effectively and efficiently, the only way forward is staying good. Plus, by scaring the worst of them into not reoffending, it''s doing wonders for the guards swelling numbers. Increasing Varona''s security even more. That said, there has to be a better way to coerce the world to do my bidding without becoming the supreme dictator I joke about. I don''t really want to force people through fear. The elves are a different story, but it still beats torture and the Cycle of Reincarnation, hands down. A full belly and content life is enough to keep most people on the straight and narrow. With a little bit of dungeon magic sprinkled on the side to help them advance, I can''t imagine it''ll take more than a few years to see our first successful violet souls. There are already a handful of blues and a small army of greens so I''m definitely doing something right. Orad was quite neutral in the soul department whereas Tune and Ishda both have their fair share of corruption. On Abi''s dungeon path to tomorrow, led by head reformer Raff, Tune''s already seen a major turnover in soul colour and is working its way towards a brighter future. Literally. On that note; to say they''re such a hateful bunch, the majority of elves that reside in the capital have neutral souls. Which is downright shocking after they treated me. There are a few outliers on both sides, but overall, it''s not bad on the eye. Just the ears. As I debate how such an angry species has managed to stay so borderline, we arrive at the Palace. Aura seems hesitant, Becca looks determined, and I''m going to do what I do best. Wing it. I''m not going to have another King try and tell me what''s what. Not a chance. Especially one that seems to make his daughter feel unwelcome. If anything - and I can almost guarantee my luck bottoming out for this one, he''s probably a gigantic, red-souled dick. With my opinion considered and deemed acceptable by myself, I blast open the doors with a flick of my wrist and stride inside through the aftermath. After my unannounced display of power, Becca and Aura have swapped personas. The Oncoming Storm looks aghast that I''m flaunting my goods, whereas the elven princess is giddy with glee. I''ll have to reel it in there though, lest she asks me to level the whole place. Inside, the elven guards move to surround us. Only, they keep their distance more than you would expect from trained soldiers. Their armour looks immaculate, almost like it''s never seen war. It also appears to have the latest self-vibration feature as they''re all rattling away. One''s even got a self-cleaning function. Although, I''m not sure where the water''s coming from. They also need to do something about the puddle forming at the guard''s feet. Not to mention its colour and aroma. Seriously. It was only a door. I can have it fixed in seconds. The King makes no motion to move and instead looks upon his daughter with a warm smile. Aura, however, has already reverted back to Scowl City and is hesitant to move closer to the throne. I, on the other hand, have no aversion to getting closer to the man in charge around here. That''s what we came for after all. Giving credit to the King''s guards, Becca''s observation from this morning rang true when she said they were ''paler than usual''; I step forward, and they attempt to block my path. An attempt is as far as they get as Assassins appear between us, preventing the guards from reaching me and creating a direct path to His Royal Elfness.This narrative has been unlawfully taken from Royal Road. If you see it on Amazon, please report it. Assassins, right? Even when they''re not killing, they''re just the best. The King, on the other hand, has barely registered anything other than his daughter''s arrival. Not the destruction, not the Assassins, not even me as I stride forward with as much authority that owning a tenth of the continent affords me. That confidence runs side-by-side with the animosity I''m feeling towards their species as a whole. Never before have I felt so humiliated and I was in some shitty situations in my short-lived life as a human. Growing up without parents means I probably didn''t have the best soul myself, but that''s another story. Right now, I''ve almost reached the King and he still isn''t taking this seriously. I get the whole doting father thing, but there''s a time and a place. That time not being when a disgruntled Dungeon Core has just blown your doors in and certainly not when she''s marching towards you whilst trying to come up with something to say. I know this could have gone better if only I had a little more patience or, at the least, easygoing assistants. The problem is that patience is one of my weaker traits, and thanks to the antics of some people, non-people, and a few thousand elves from this morning, I''m fresh out of it. "Oi! I seriously hope you''re not ignoring me on purpose. Can you not tell how annoyed I am by the fact that your guards are being made to kiss the floor? What is it with you so-called rulers?" Honestly, if world domination becomes an actual thing, Orad''s Mayor is in for a big promotion. Out of everywhere I''ve been, his town was doing the best at the gig we call life. "Hello?!" Waving my hands in front of his face, I finally get the King''s attention. His eyes find their way to me and he scowls. Keeping my shit in check, I resist the urge to slap the shit out of him and destroy his kingdom. Not that the continent would miss this hateful forest and its inhabitants. I know I wouldn''t. "What?" he spits at me. I know he hasn''t seen his daughter in a long time, but how does one get to rule the roost when they can''t act their station, not pick up on subtle cues? Not that my cues are subtle, but that only makes it worse. I can absolutely guarantee that if someone blew my doors off, I''d know about it. What I would also do is deal with it there and then, or at the least palm it off to someone capable of handling it. I wouldn''t just ignore it like... Huh? That does kind of fit my MO. Whenever problems arise that I don''t know how to deal with, they''re left to gather to dust until inspiration comes to mind. Which in some cases takes a while. It''s unfortunate for Aura''s father and the ruler of this Core''s most loathed species, the Queen of Questions has gotten too large to just sweep under the rug. I''m also a right here, right now, type of chick, so "What?" just isn''t going to cut it. As I debate which insult to throw out first, the Elf King returns his gaze to his daughter and I find myself sidelined once again for puppy dog eyes. It''s not often that I''m snubbed these days and I''ve grown quite fond of being greeted whenever I take to the streets of Varona, so it''s a weird feeling being overlooked for someone else. Even if that person is a princess and his daughter. At least Papa''s little girl is on my side. She doesn''t look impressed at all, although that''s partially because I made her come since she absorbed that piece of my Core. Regarding that event, the roots of Aura''s hair have turned the same green as her eyes and the change is certainly noticeable. That''s probably why her dad can''t stop looking at her. She''s like his very own Rebellion Dragon. Still, being ignored is vexing me more than I can take, and I''m not sure what''s worse. The King''s dismissive attitude, or the hate I received from his subjects. This whole thing has been one ridiculous act after another since I arrived. I mean, why did I even say yes? It''s not like I go out of my way to receive compliments, but it is nice when they''re given freely. Is that why I came? For this guy to blow smoke up arse? This guy!? What the hell was I thinking? Has becoming the Goddess of Beauty given me vanity issues? Probably not. I''m pretty sure I already had a few of those anyway, but what if the title makes it worse? The King''s face changes when his surroundings alter in the blink of an eye. A circular wall made of stone surrounds him and an array of empty seating loom above. The main box only has one spectator and his full moon shines down on us. Dressed in red and gold, the Ringmaster''s presence is at its peak in The Coliseum. Before his confusion catches up with current events, the King''s vision begins to spin. When it finally stops he finds himself staring up at a headless body before it collapses on the arena floor. The light fades from his eyes and before he knows it, his Royal Elfness is standing in the same spot as before. Said spot being directly opposite the frustrated Dungeon Core that''s working through her issues. I know this isn''t a fair fight and it''s not like I''m here to torment him, but sometimes you''ve got to drive that message home before it sinks in. That message being... Well, I don''t want to say it''s because I was feeling petty, but I travelled a long way to meet this douchebag. I think some courtesy is in order. I wasn''t expecting him to lick my toes or anything, but a "Hey, Abi, it''s nice to meet you," would have been more than fine. Instead, I get the worst procession anyone''s ever received and for what? All I wanted was a little mutual respect. Would that have been so hard? Seriously, what''s the deal with these elves? At least Aura and Eduine are somewhat normal. Or as normal as can be at least. Before my outclassed opponent can voice his opinion, argue an objection, or make any other type of comment I probably don''t want to hear, I obliterate him with a Void Ray. Destroying his body on a cellular level. I''ve got to say, I love The Coliseum. The walls are strong enough to withstand my spells and I can really let loose in here without worry. Even the moon didn''t put up much resistance when my Void Beam hit it. And it had to travel however far away it is to get there. I wonder what happened to it after that? Did it keep going? Before I can finish my train of thought, it''s round three. This time, however, I''m beaten to the punch. The King rushes me, using some type of wind magic to propel him forward. It was really cool up to the part where I cut his head off again. This continued for a while as I worked out some kinks and even managed to practice some of the lesser elements of magic I''ve neglected. My opponent knows a lot of spells and every time he uses a new one, I copy it the next round. It makes me happy to see our roles reversed. The frustration on his face makes me feel warm and fuzzy. As I''m trying to work out how the King used that last water spell, he drops to his knees and bows in my direction. He then proceeds to throw praise after praise upon me and I can''t help but think, it''s about damn time. I mean, I know he''s only doing it so that he can end his suffering, but that must mean he''s learned his lesson. Kings don''t grovel to their lessers after all. Or maybe I''m just talking myself up in this? Whatever, we''re already here now. "Alright, alright. You can give it a rest. We''ll stop if you''ve learned your lesson. Just so you know though, I didn''t enjoy doing that." I don''t think I''ve ever told such a bold lie. Not only did I work through my issues, but I got a little bit of training at the same time. Plus, he certainly deserved the first one. The rest? Still debatable. "What have you done to me?" I can''t help but take offence again. Out of all the questions he could have asked, he assumes I''ve already done something malicious. Other than killing him a few times, I haven''t done anything. Hell, I even brought him back to life so we could repeat the process. Would he prefer a permanent death? That could quite easily be arranged, but I don''t think it would do Aura any good. That''s why he brought him to the Coliseum. It''s the one place I know where death isn''t absolute. Not unless you aggrieve the person in charge, that is.